You are on page 1of 688

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Preface

Preface
This manual is provided as a guide to personnel involved with the operation, maintenance and repair of this rotary blasthole drill. We recommend that such personnel review and become familiar with the general procedures and information contained within this manual. In addition, we recommend that this manual be kept readily available for reference when repairs or maintenance are necessary. Due to the complexities of mining equipment and the environment in which it operates, situations may arise which are not directly discussed in detail in this manual. When such a situation arises, past experience, availability of equipment, and common sense play a large part in what steps are to be taken. In addition, a P&H MinePro Services Representative is available to answer your questions and assist you upon request.

Copyright
Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation. All rights reserved. All materials contained herein are protected by United States copyright law and international treaties, and may not be reproduced, distributed, transmitted, displayed, published or broadcast without the prior written permission of Harnischfeger Corporation. You may not alter or remove any trademark, copyright or other notice from copies of the content. All rights in translations of these materials shall remain exclusively with Harnischfeger Corporation.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Preface.fm

-i-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Preface, Version 00 - 03/06

Preface

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Preface, Version 00 - 03/06

-ii-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Preface.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Change Record

Change Record
Changes to this manual are made by direction of the P&H Mining Equipment Knowledge and Development Department Manager through recommendations of Instructors, Technical Writers, Engineers, Service Personnel, and results of the manual review process. All changes shall ensure effective user comprehension and fulfillment of the topic being described. Use the form below to enter all change information contained on the PDF enclosed on your manual CD.
Number and Description of Change Entered By Date

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Change Record.fm

iii-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Change Record, Version 00 - 03/06

Change Record

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Change Record, Version 00 - 03/06

iv-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Change Record.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i Change Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xv List of Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv SECTION 1, Blasthole Drill Safety 1.1 General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 1.1.1 Safety Websites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 1.2 Safe Operating Practices for Users of P&H Mining Equipment - Large Rotary Blasthole Drills . 1.2 1.2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 1.2.2 Qualifications for and Conduct of Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 1.2.3 Responsibilities of All Crew Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 1.2.4 Planning the Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 1.3 Operation Near Electrical Lines Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7 1.4 Safety Decals and Signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7 1.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7 1.4.2 Hazard Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7 1.4.3 Safety Hazard Decals and Signs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8 SECTION 2, Introduction 2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 2.1.1 Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 2.1.2 Applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 2.2 Questions concerning the drill or this manual should be referred to your P&H MinePro Services representative.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 2.3 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 2.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 2.3.2 Drill Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 2.3.3 Power Unit R10433F1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 2.3.4 Main Air Compressor 51U165D4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 2.3.5 Undercarriage and Propel 100J6626F4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 2.3.6 Rotary Carriage R54410F4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 2.3.7 Pulldown Mechanism 916J204F1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 2.3.8 Drill Pipe Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9 2.3.9 Mast and Back Braces R14102F6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9 2.3.10 Winch 23U52D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9 2.3.11 Deck Wrenches GH5007463 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9 2.3.12 Operators Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9 2.3.13 Hydraulic Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9 2.3.14 Automatic Lubrication System 944J461F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10 2.3.15 Bailing Air System R45797 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and

Table of Contents Table of Contents (Continued)

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

2.3.16 Towing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10 2.3.17 Hydraulically Operated Dust Curtains R6349F1-F2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10 2.3.18 Serial Number Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10 2.4 Sign Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10 2.5 Reader Comment Form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11 2.6 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11 2.7 Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11 2.8 Drill Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11 SECTION 3, Auxiliary Hydraulic System 3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 3.2 Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 3.2.1 Hydraulic Tank R6908D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 3.2.2 Auxiliary Hydraulic Pump 37U153D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 3.2.3 Valve Bank 1 36R198D3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13 3.2.4 Valve Bank 2 36R199D7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.27 3.2.5 Valve Bank 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.40 3.2.6 Bill of Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.54 3.2.7 System Data Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.55 3.3 Auxiliary Hydraulic System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.57 3.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.57 3.3.2 Hydraulic Tank R6908D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.59 3.3.3 Suction Filters R16280D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.60 3.3.4 Temperature Probe 89Z724D2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.62 3.3.5 Low Level Switch R16982D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.63 3.3.6 Hydraulic Tank Breather 1046Z994. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.64 3.3.7 Magnetic Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.65 3.3.8 Return Filters 46Z529 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.66 3.3.9 Auxiliary Hydraulic Pump 37U153D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.70 3.3.10 Valve Banks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.72 3.3.11 Dual Counterbalance Valves R6268D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.82 3.3.12 Main Hydraulic Pressure Transducer 36Q549. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.86 3.3.13 Hydraulic Pressure Switch R24844D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.88 3.3.14 Leveling System Pressure Switches 79Z2750D2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.91 3.3.15 Regeneration Valve 36U437D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.96 3.3.16 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.98 SECTION 4, Main Hydraulic System 4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 4.2 Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 4.2.1 Hydraulic Tank R6908D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 4.2.2 Main Hydraulic Pumps R51924D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 4.2.3 Propel Motors 41U100D2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and DevelopmentCopyright 2006 Harnischfeger Cor-

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual Table of Contents (Continued)

Table of Contents

4.2.4 Pilot Control Valve Bank 36U435D4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 4.3 Main Hydraulic System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9 4.3.1 Hydraulic Tank R6908D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9 4.3.2 Main Hydraulic Pumps R51924D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10 4.3.3 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16 4.3.4 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.17 4.3.5 Pilot Control Valve Bank (Valve Bank 4) 36U445D4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18 4.3.6 Charge Filter 46Z547. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.19 4.4 . Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.21 SECTION 5, Power Unit 5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 5.1.1 Power Unit Assembly Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 5.2 Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 5.2.1 Main Drive Motor 5100A1368F12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 5.2.2 Air Compressor 51U165D4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 5.2.3 Hydraulic Pump Drive Transmission (PDT) GH5829479. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 5.3 Main Hydraulic System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 5.3.1 Main Drive Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 5.3.2 Hydraulic Pump Drive Transmission GH5429879 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7 SECTION 6, Main Air System 6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 6.2 Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 6.2.1 Main Air Compressor 51U165D4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 6.2.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5 6.2.3 Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6 6.2.4 Oil Circulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15 6.2.5 Bailing Air Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.25 6.3 Main Air System Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.32 6.3.1 Main Compressor Air Cleaner 46Z534 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.32 6.3.2 Main Air Compressor 51U165D4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.34 6.3.3 Compressor Inlet Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.41 6.3.4 T-Tank R55420F1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.45 6.3.5 Circulation Pump R56963D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.50 6.3.6 Compressor Oil Cooler R56568D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.52 6.3.7 Thermostatic Mixing Valve R38039D2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.55 6.3.8 Compressor Oil Filter, R51071F1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.59 6.3.9 Subtractive Pilot Valve, 36Q577D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.62 6.3.10 Main Air Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.65 6.3.11 Bit Air Pressure Transducer (BAPT), 44Q1536. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.66 6.3.12 Compressor Oil Pressure Switch (COPS), 79Z5680 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.67 6.3.13 Main Air Pressure Transducer (MAPT) 44Q1536 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.68

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and

Table of Contents Table of Contents (Continued)

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

6.3.14 Scavenger Oil Return Filter GH5000348. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.69 6.3.15 Air Pilot Valve R56220D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.69 6.3.16 Pressure Relief Valve R12262D4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.70 6.3.17 Butterfly Valve R51305D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.72 6.3.18 Muffler 27Q762D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.75 6.3.19 Dump Valve GH5000369. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.75 6.4 Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.75 SECTION 7, Low Pressure Hydraulic System 7.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 7.2 Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 7.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 7.2.2 Intake and Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 7.2.3 Cab Roof Hatch Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 7.2.4 Boarding Ladder Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6 7.2.5 Grease Pump Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 7.3 Low Pressure Hydraulic System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8 7.3.1 Hydraulic Pump-Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8 7.3.2 Check Valve Cartridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9 7.3.3 Low Pressure Hydraulic System Valve Bank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11 7.4 Hoist Brake Circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17 SECTION 8, Automatic Lubrication System 8.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1 8.1.1 Automatic Lubrication System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1 8.1.2 Control Panel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2 8.2 Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4 8.2.1 Pump Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5 8.2.2 Lube Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6 8.2.3 Lubrication Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7 8.3 Automatic Lubrication System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.10 8.3.1 Hydraulic Pump-Motor, 37Q117D2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.10 8.3.2 Grease Pump 37U154D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.12 8.3.3 Lubrication Control Panel R7686F1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.14 8.3.4 Vent Valve 36Q525 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.19 8.3.5 Lubrication Injectors 44Z1169D__ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.21 8.4 Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.32 SECTION 9, Propel System 9.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1 9.2 Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1 9.2.1 Propel Motor 41U100D2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2 9.2.2 Propel Transmission 53R176D2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and DevelopmentCopyright 2006 Harnischfeger Cor-

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual Table of Contents (Continued)

Table of Contents

9.2.3 Crawler Assembly R6575F3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4 9.3 Propel System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7 9.3.1 Propel Motor 41U100D2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7 9.3.2 Propel Transmission 53R176D2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.13 9.3.3 Idler Roller 13N385D1F1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.24 9.3.4 Upper and Lower Rollers 13P627F1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.26 9.3.5 Crawler Track Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.28 SECTION 10, Levelling System 10.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1 10.2 Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1 10.2.1 Rear Jacks 100J6691F5 and 100J6691F6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2 10.2.2 Front Jacks 100J6692F3 and 100J6693F3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 10.2.3 Leveling Jack Shoes R56352D1, R56353D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 10.3 System Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4 10.3.1 Leveling Jack Shoes R56352D1, R56353D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4 10.3.2 Jack Hydraulic Cylinders R4102D2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5 10.4 Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7 10.4.1 Basic Operational Test for Auto Level System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7 10.4.2 Troubleshooting Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.16 SECTION 11, Mast 11.1 Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1 11.1.1 Mast Weldment R53818D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2 11.1.2 Ladder 29J333F3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2 11.1.3 Back Braces 100J6487F3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3 11.1.4 Mast Lock Pins GH1302T14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3 11.1.5 Mast Hoist Cylinders R6268D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4 11.2 Mast Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4 11.2.1 Mast Weldment R53818D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4 11.2.2 Auxiliary Winch 23U52D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4 11.2.3 Winch Motor Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6 11.2.4 Winch Brake Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.9 11.2.5 Winch Planetary Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.12 11.2.6 Winch Drum Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.14 11.2.7 Assembly and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.16 11.2.8 Auxiliary Winch Sheaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.17 11.2.9 Back Brace Locking Collar Cylinder R7187D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.25 11.2.10 Mast Lock Pin 19T6502D3 And Cylinder R51992D2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.27 11.2.11 Mast Raise/Lower Cylinder R6268D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.31 11.2.12 Mast Bottom Plate R11834D2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.37 11.3 Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.41

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and

Table of Contents Table of Contents (Continued) SECTION 12, Rotary Machinery

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

12.1 Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1 12.1.1 Rotary Motor 83013-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2 12.1.2 Rotary Gear Case R10678F2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2 12.1.3 Rotary Drill Pipe Coupling R12253F9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2 12.2 Rotary Machinery Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3 12.2.1 Rotary Motor 83013-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3 12.2.2 Rotary Gear Case R10678F2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.9 12.2.3 Bit Air Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.11 12.2.4 Oil Pump and Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.13 12.2.5 Removal And Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.13 12.2.6 Intermediate Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.16 12.2.7 Main Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.19 12.2.8 Rotary Drill Pipe Coupling R12253F9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.24 12.2.9 Gearcase Removal and Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.26 12.3 Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.29 SECTION 14, Hoist/Pulldown Machinery 14.1 Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1 14.1.1 Pulldown Motor 83013-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2 14.1.2 Pulldown Motor Blower R37819D2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2 14.1.3 Pulldown Transmission 914J434F1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3 14.1.4 Pulldown Drive Pinions R5544D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3 14.1.5 Pulldown Idler Pinions R7560D3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.4 14.1.6 Upper Guide Rollers R54361F3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.5 14.1.7 Lower Guide Rollers R54362F3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.5 14.1.8 Pulldown Brake 15R55D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.6 14.1.9 Pulldown Resolver Assembly 975N20F1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.6 14.2 Pulldown System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.7 14.2.1 Pulldown Motor 83013-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.7 14.2.2 Pulldown Motor Blower R37819D2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.10 14.2.3 Pulldown Transmission 914J434F1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.12 14.2.4 Pulldown Pinions R5544D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.17 14.2.5 Idler Pinions R7560D3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.18 14.2.6 Guide Rollers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.18 14.2.7 Pulldown Brake 15R55D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.27 14.2.8 Pulldown Resolver 75Z1252D6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.34 14.2.9 Cleaning, Inspection and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.35 14.2.10 Assembly and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.35 14.3 Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.37 SECTION 14, Pipe Handling Equipment 14.1 Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and DevelopmentCopyright 2006 Harnischfeger Cor-

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual Table of Contents (Continued)

Table of Contents

14.1.1 Pipe Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2 14.1.2 Deck Wrench GH5007463 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2 14.1.3 Breakout Wrench R46448F1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3 14.2 Pipe Handling Equipment Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3 14.2.1 Pipe Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.5 14.2.2 Limit Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.15 14.2.3 Deck Wrench GH5007463. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.17 14.2.4 Deck Wrench Cylinders GH5010453 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.20 14.2.5 Breakout Wrench R46448F1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.22 14.2.6 Hydraulic Circuit Inspection and Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.24 14.3 Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.28 SECTION 15, Water Injection System 15.1 Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1 15.2 Water Injection System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4 15.2.1 1000 Gallon Water Tank R33238F1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.5 15.2.2 Submersible Water Pump 37U152D3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.5 15.2.3 Pressure Relief Valve R12410D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.7 15.3 Sensing Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.10 15.4 Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.11 SECTION 16, Lubrication 16.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1 16.1.1 P&H Lubricant Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1 16.1.2 Operating in Cold Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1 16.1.3 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2 16.1.4 ISO Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.3 16.2 Automatic Lubrication System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.4 16.3 Oil Bath Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.4 16.3.1 Pulldown Gearcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.5 16.3.2 Hydraulic Pump Drive Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.6 16.3.3 Auxiliary Winch Gear Reducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.7 16.3.4 Cable Reel Gear Reducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.8 16.3.5 Propel Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.9 16.4 Oil Pressure Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.10 16.4.1 Rotary Gearcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.10 16.4.2 Air Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.11 16.5 Hydraulic Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.17 16.6 Manual Lubrication Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.19 16.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.19 16.6.2 Pipe Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.20 16.6.3 Mast Back Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.21 16.6.4 Rotary Carriage Roller Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.22

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and

Table of Contents Table of Contents (Continued)

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

16.7 Lubrication Schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.23 16.7.1 Reference Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.23 16.7.2 Lubrication Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.25 16.8 Lubricant Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.26 16.8.1 Material Specification P&H 464 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.26 16.8.2 Material Specification P&H 469 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.30 16.8.3 Material Specification P&H 472 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.32 16.8.4 Material Specification P&H 474 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.36 16.8.5 Material Specification P&H 497 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.41 16.8.6 Material Specification P&H 499 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.46 16.8.7 Material Specification P&H 520 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.48 SECTION 17, Preventive Maintenance 17.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1 17.2 Lubrication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1 17.3 Bolt Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1 17.4 Bolts And Bolt Torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1 17.4.1 Bolt Torques -- American Standard Coarse Thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2 17.4.2 Bolt Torques -- American Standard Fine Thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.3 17.4.3 Metric Conversion Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5 17.4.4 Temperature Conversion Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.6 17.4.5 Special Bolt Tightening Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.7 17.5 Maintenance Schedule Check Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.7 17.6 Using The Maintenance Schedule Check Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.7 P&H Model 120A Rotary Blasthole Drill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 A Maintenance Checks (Daily / 8-12 hours) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 P&H Model 120A Rotary Blasthole Drill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 B Maintenance Checks (Weekly / 40-100 hours) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 P&H Model 120A Rotary Blasthole Drill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 C Maintenance Checks (Monthly / 160-250 hours). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 17.7 A Maintenance Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.14 17.7.1 Note and Record Any Faults on GUI Fault Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.14 17.7.2 Fill Water Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.16 17.7.3 Inspect Machine For Damage And Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.16 17.7.4 Check Hydraulic Tank Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.16 17.7.5 Check Main Air Compressor Oil Reservoir Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.19 17.7.6 lnspect Operator Cab Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.20 17.7.7 lnspect Drill Pipe Sling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.20 17.7.8 lnspect Auxiliary Winch Rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.20 17.7.9 lnspect Winch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.21 17.7.10 Check Rotary Gearcase Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.21 17.7.11 Check Pulldown Gearcase Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.24 17.7.12 Check Grease Pump Hydraulic Supply Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.24 17.7.13 lnspect Deck Wrenches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.24 P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and DevelopmentCopyright 2006 Harnischfeger Cor-

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual Table of Contents (Continued)

Table of Contents

17.7.14 Inspect Pipe Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.25 17.7.15 Inspect Crawler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.25 17.7.16 lnspect Jack Shoes And Retaining Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.25 17.8 B Maintenance Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.25 17.8.1 lnspect Hydraulic System Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.25 17.8.2 Check Cable Reel Drive Reducer Oil Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.26 17.8.3 lnspect Breakout Wrench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.28 17.8.4 lnspect Mast Racks and Pinions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.28 17.8.5 lnspect Rotary Machinery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.28 17.8.6 Inspect Bailing Air System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.29 17.8.7 Check Crawler Belt Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.31 17.8.8 Check Hydraulic Charge Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.32 17.8.9 Check Hydraulic Return Line Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.34 17.8.10 Check Main Compressor Oil Filter Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.35 17.8.11 Check Main Compressor Oil Separator Element. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.39 17.8.12 Check Main Compressor Air Intake Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.41 17.8.13 Check Auto Lube Grease Reservoir Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.43 17.8.14 lnspect Trail Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.43 17.9 C Maintenance Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.43 17.9.1 lnspect Mast Back Braces And Slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.43 17.9.2 lnspect Mast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.44 17.9.3 lnspect Auxiliary Winch Sheaves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.45 17.9.4 Clean Main Compressor and Hydraulic Oil Cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.45 17.9.5 Inspect Main Frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.46 17.9.6 Inspect Crawler Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.46 17.9.7 Check Auxiliary Winch Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.47 17.9.8 Inspect Cable Reel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.48 17.9.9 Clean/Flush Water Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.48 17.9.10 Check Pump Drive Transmission Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.48 17.9.11 Change Main Compressor Bearing Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.49 17.9.12 Check Propel Transmission Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.50 17.9.13 Clean/inspect Machinery House Blowers And Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.51 17.9.14 Inspect Rotary Carriage Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.54 17.9.15 Check And Adjust Water Pump Drive Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.55 17.10 D Maintenance Checks - 500 Hours (Quarterly). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.55 17.10.1 Replace Oil Line Scavenger Filter Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.55 17.10.2 Check Bolts, Mounting And Attachment Torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.56 17.11 E Maintenance Checks - Semi-annual/1000 Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.56 17.11.1 Change Rotary Gearcase Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.56 17.11.2 Change Pump Drive Transmission Oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.57 17.11.3 Change Hoist/Pulldown Gear Reducer Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.59 17.11.4 Change Propel Transmission Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.59 17.11.5 Change Hoist/Pulldown Gear Reducer Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.59 17.11.6 Change Propel Transmission Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.60

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and

Table of Contents Table of Contents (Continued)

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

17.12 F Maintenance Checks - Annual/2000Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.60 17.12.1 Change Hydraulic System Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.61 17.12.2 Change Auxiliary Winch Gearcase Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.61 17.12.3 Change Cable Reel Gear Reducer Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.61 SECTION A, General Maintenance A.1 Removal General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1 A.2 Disassembly General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1 A.3 Inspection, Cleaning And Repair General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1 A.4 Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A.2 A.5 Maintenance Of Specific Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.3 A.5.1 Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.3 A.5.2 Couplings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.3 A.5.3 Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.5 A.5.4 Coupling Alignment - Straightedge-Feeler Gauge Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.6 A.5.5 Coupling Alignment - Dial Indicator Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.6 A.5.6 Sheaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.7 A.5.7 Gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.7 A.6 Gear Tooth Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.8 A.6.1 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.8 A.6.2 Gear Wear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.8 A.6.3 Surface Fatigue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.9 A.6.4 Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A.10 SECTION B, General Hydraulic System Maintenance B.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1 B.2 General Maintenance Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1 B.2.1 Correct Tightening of Hydraulic Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3 B.2.2 Pipe Thread Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4 B.2.3 SAE Flare Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4 B.2.4 SAE Straight Thread Connection (O-ring Seal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B.4 B.2.5 Split Flange Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.6 B.2.6 Flat Face O-ring Seal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B.8 B.2.7 Troubleshooting Hydraulic Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.9 B.2.8 Developing Systematic Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B.10 B.2.9 Recognizing Trouble Symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B.10 Reader Comment Form

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and DevelopmentCopyright 2006 Harnischfeger Cor-

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

List of Figures

List of Figures
SECTION 1, Blasthole Drill Safety Figure 1-1: Look closely to see whats in the water... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 Figure 1-2: Mast and Drilling Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.24 Figure 1-3: Mast Hoist Cylinder Boots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.25 Figure 1-4: Machinery House Exterior Panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.25 Figure 1-5: Machinery Deck Layout (Overview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.26 Figure 1-6: Operators Cab Door (Drill Deck) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.27 Figure 1-7: Oil Separator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.27 Figure 1-8: Main Transformer (right side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.28 Figure 1-9: Main Transformer (front view). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.28 Figure 1-10: Fan Room Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.29 Figure 1-11: Machinery House Door (front) (outside) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.30 Figure 1-12: Lube Room Door (outside) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.30 Figure 1-13: Power Skid (typical both sides). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.31 Figure 1-14: PLC Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.31 Figure 1-15: Solenoid Junction Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.32 Figure 1-16: Machinery House Door (rear) (outside) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.32 Figure 1-17: Operators Cab Door (front) (outside) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.32 Figure 1-18: Machinery Deck Layout (electrical cabinets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.33 Figure 1-19: Auxiliary Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.34 Figure 1-20: Hoist/Rotary Junction Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.34 Figure 1-21: DC Hoist Drive Cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.35 Figure 1-22: DC Rotary Drive Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.35 Figure 1-23: High Voltage Junction Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.36 Figure 1-24: 460V Load Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.37 Figure 1-25: 120V Load Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.38 Figure 1-26: High Voltage Cabinet (side view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.38 Figure 1-27: High Voltage Cabinet (front view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.39 Figure 1-28: Operators Cab (Inside). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.39 SECTION 2, Introduction Figure 2-1: P&H Model 120A Rotary Blasthole Drill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 Figure 2-2: Model 120A Rotary Blast Hole Drill. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 Figure 2-3: Model 120A Deck Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 Figure 2-4: Main Drive Motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 Figure 2-5: Main Air Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 Figure 2-6: Undercarriage and Propel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 Figure 2-7: Rotary Carriage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 Figure 2-8: Rotary and Pulldown Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8 SECTION 3, Auxiliary Hydraulic System Figure 3-1: .Auxiliary Hydraulic Schematic, R57351 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation BD120149-00-MSLOF.fm

-xv-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development List of Figures, Version 00 - 03/06

List of Figures

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

List of Figures (Continued)


Figure 3-2: Hydraulic Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 Figure 3-3: Handwell Valves and Suction Filters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4 Figure 3-4: Hydraulic Tank Temperature Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4 Figure 3-5: Hydraulic Tank Oil Level Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 Figure 3-6: Hydraulic Tank Breather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 Figure 3-7: Magnetic Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 Figure 3-8: Hydraulic Return Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 Figure 3-9: Level and Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8 Figure 3-10: Filter Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9 Figure 3-11: Auxiliary Pump Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 Figure 3-12: Auxiliary Hydraulic Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 Figure 3-13: Pump Cartridge Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11 Figure 3-14: Pressure Feed to the Vanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12 Figure 3-15: Pressure Plate Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12 Figure 3-16: Valve Bank 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13 Figure 3-17: Valve Bank 1(spares removed for clarity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14 Figure 3-18: Relief/Unload/Oil Diverter Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15 Figure 3-19: Pressure Transducer and Pressure Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16 Figure 3-20: Mast Hoist Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18 Figure 3-21: Mast Anchor Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20 Figure 3-22: Deck Wrench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.22 Figure 3-23: Dust Curtain Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24 Figure 3-24: Back Brace Lock Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.26 Figure 3-25: Valve Bank 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.27 Figure 3-26: Valve Bank 2 (spares removed for clarity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.28 Figure 3-27: Pipe Rack Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29 Figure 3-28: Pipe Rack Gate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.31 Figure 3-29: Pipe Rack Gate Valve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.32 Figure 3-30: Pipe Rack Holdback Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.33 Figure 3-31: Deck Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34 Figure 3-32: Breakout Wrench Engage / Disengage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.36 Figure 3-33: Breakout Wrench In / Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.38 Figure 3-34: Valve Bank 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.40 Figure 3-35: Valve Bank 3 (spare removed for clarity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.41 Figure 3-36: Relief Unloading Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42 Figure 3-37: Auxiliary Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.44 Figure 3-20: Front Jack Valve Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.46 Figure 3-21: Left or Right Rear Jack Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.47 Figure 3-22: Regeneration and Dual Counterbalance Valves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.48 Figure 3-23: Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.50 Figure 3-22: Jack Limit Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.51 Figure 3-23: Hydraulic Oil Cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.52 Figure 3-24: Hydraulic Return Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.53 Figure 3-25: Return Filter Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.53

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development List of Figures, Version 00 - 03/06

-xvi-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation BD120149-00-MSLOF.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

List of Figures

List of Figures (Continued)


Figure 3-26: Hydraulic Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.59 Figure 3-27: Handwell Valves and Suction Filters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.60 Figure 3-28: Suction Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.61 Figure 3-29: Hydraulic Tank Temperature Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.62 Figure 3-30: Hydraulic Tank Oil Level Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.63 Figure 3-31: Hydraulic Tank Breather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.64 Figure 3-32: Magnetic Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.65 Figure 3-33: Hydraulic Return Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.66 Figure 3-34: Return Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.67 Figure 3-35: Auxiliary Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.70 Figure 3-36: Valve Bank 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.72 Figure 3-37: Valve Bank 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.73 Figure 3-38: Valve Bank 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.74 Figure 3-39: Valve Bank 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.75 Figure 3-40: Valve Bank 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.76 Figure 3-41: Valve Bank 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.77 Figure 3-42: Solenoid Operated Directional Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.78 Figure 3-43: Valve Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.81 Figure 3-44: Dual Counterbalance Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.82 Figure 3-45: Cartridge Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.85 Figure 3-46: Auxiliary Hydraulic System Pressure Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.86 Figure 3-47: Hydraulic Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.88 Figure 3-48: Hydraulic Pressure Switch Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.89 Figure 3-49: Hydraulic Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.91 Figure 3-50: Bench Test Set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.94 Figure 3-51: Regeneration Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.96 SECTION 4, Main Hydraulic System Figure 4-1: Main Hydraulic System Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 Figure 4-2: Main Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 Figure 4-3: Main Hydraulic Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 Figure 4-4: Propel Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 Figure 4-5: Propel Motor Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 Figure 4-6: Pilot Control Valve Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 Figure 4-7: Pilot Control Valve Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8 Figure 4-8: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9 Figure 4-9: Main Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10 Figure 4-10: Pump Start-up and Functional Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11 Figure 4-11: Pilot Control Valve Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12 Figure 4-12: Pilot Control Valve Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18 Figure 4-13: Charge Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.19 Figure 4-14: Charge Filter Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.20 SECTION 5, Power Unit
Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation BD120149-00-MSLOF.fm P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development List of Figures, Version 00 - 03/06

-xvii-

List of Figures

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

List of Figures (Continued)


Figure 5-1: Power Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 Figure 5-2: Power Unit, Exploded View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 Figure 5-3: Legend for Figure 5-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6 Figure 5-4: Pump Drive Flexible Coupling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 Figure 5-5: Coupling Hub Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10 Figure 5-6: Bolt Tightening Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12 SECTION 6, Main Air System Figure 6-1: Main Air Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 Figure 6-2: Main Air Compressor and Main Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 Figure 6-3: Compression Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 Figure 6-4: Turn Valve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4 Figure 6-5: Main Air System Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5 Figure 6-6: Air Intake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6 Figure 6-7: Main Compressor Air Cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7 Figure 6-8: Vacuum Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7 Figure 6-9: Compressor Inlet Valve Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8 Figure 6-10: Inlet Valve Modulation Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9 Figure 6-11: Compressor Inlet Pressure Switch CIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11 Figure 6-12: Pilot Air Pressure Gauge and Subtractive Pilot Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12 Figure 6-13: Inlet Valve Bypass Line Check Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13 Figure 6-14: Inlet Valve Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14 Figure 6-15: Oil Circulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15 Figure 6-16: Compressor Air Temperature Probe and Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16 Figure 6-17: T-Tank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17 Figure 6-18: Main Air Pressure Differential Switch and Gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18 Figure 6-19: T-Tank Shutoff Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18 Figure 6-20: Oil Circulation Pump and Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.19 Figure 6-21: Thermostatic Mixing Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20 Figure 6-22: Compressor Oil Cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.21 Figure 6-23: Compressor Oil Flow Switch COFS (typical; for reference only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.22 Figure 6-24: Compressor Oil Pressure Switch COPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.22 Figure 6-25: Compressor Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.23 Figure 6-26: Scavenger Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.23 Figure 6-27: Compressor Oil Pressure Differential Switch and Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.24 Figure 6-28: Bailing Air Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.25 Figure 6-29: Subtractive Pilot Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.26 Figure 6-30: Main Air Pressure Transducer MAPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.27 Figure 6-31: Bailing Air Pressure Transducer BAPT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.27 Figure 6-32: Main Air Pressure Switch MAPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.28 Figure 6-33: Air Pilot Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.28 Figure 6-34: Muffler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.29 Figure 6-35: Relief Valve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.29 Figure 6-36: Butterfly Valve with Electric Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.30
P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development List of Figures, Version 00 - 03/06 Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation BD120149-00-MSLOF.fm

-xviii-

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

List of Figures

List of Figures (Continued)


Figure 6-37: Dump Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.31 Figure 6-38: Main Compressor Air Cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.32 Figure 6-39: Main Air Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.34 Figure 6-40: Power Unit (exploded view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.35 Figure 6-41: Legend for Figure 6-40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.36 Figure 6-42: Flexible Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.38 Figure 6-43: Compressor Inlet Valve Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.41 Figure 6-44: T-Tank (on Left Hand Platform) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.45 Figure 6-45: Air/Oil Separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.46 Figure 6-46: T-Tank Shut-Off (Drain) Valve Positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.49 Figure 6-47: Compressor Oil Cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.52 Figure 6-48: Themostatic Mixing Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.55 Figure 6-49: Thermostatic Mixing Valve Piping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.56 Figure 6-50: Thermostatic Mixing Valve Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.57 Figure 6-51: Main Air Compressor Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.59 Figure 6-52: Main Compressor Oil Filter Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.59 Figure 6-53: Changing Main Compressor Oil Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.60 Figure 6-54: Subtractive Pilot Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.62 Figure 6-55: Main Air Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.65 Figure 6-56: Butterfly Valve Electric Actuator and Valve Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.72 Figure 6-57: Butterfly Valve Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.74 SECTION 7, Low Pressure Hydraulic System Figure 7-1: Low Pressure Motor/Pump Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 Figure 7-2: Low Pressure Hydraulic Valve Bank (Valve Bank 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 Figure 7-3: Low Pressure Hydraulic Valve Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2 Figure 7-4: Low Pressure Hydraulic Circuit Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 Figure 7-5: Intake and Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 Figure 7-6: DC Systems Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 Figure 7-7: Cab Roof Hatch Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 Figure 7-8: Boarding Ladder Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6 Figure 7-9: Grease Pump Circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 Figure 7-10: Hydraulic Pump-Motor Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8 Figure 7-11: Low Pressure Hydraulic Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11 Figure 7-12: Hoist Brake Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17 SECTION 8, Automatic Lubrication System Figure 8-1: Automatic Lubrication System Componentsl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1 Figure 8-2: Lubrication Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2 Figure 8-3: Automatic Lubrication System Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4 Figure 8-4: Pump Operation Circuit Schematic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5 Figure 8-5: Lube Control Circuit Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6 Figure 8-6: Lubrication Injectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation BD120149-00-MSLOF.fm

-xix-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development List of Figures, Version 00 - 03/06

List of Figures

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

List of Figures (Continued)


Figure 8-7: Hydraulic Pump-Motor Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.10 Figure 8-8: Grease Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.12 Figure 8-9: Lubrication Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.14 Figure 8-10: Pressure Switch Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.17 Figure 8-11: Vent Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.19 Figure 8-12: Vent Valve Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.20 Figure 8-13: Injector Operation, Position 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.22 Figure 8-14: Injector Operation - Position 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.23 Figure 8-15: Injector Operation - Position 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.23 Figure 8-16: Injector Operation - Position 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.24 Figure 8-17: Injector Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.25 Figure 8-18: SL-1 Injector Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.26 Figure 8-19: Injector Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.27 Figure 8-20: Bleeding Air at Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.29 Figure 8-21: Bleeding Air at Manifold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.30 Figure 8-22: Bleeding Air from Feeder Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.31 SECTION 9, Propel System Figure 9-1: Propel Drive Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1 Figure 9-2: Propel Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2 Figure 9-3: Propel Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3 Figure 9-4: Crawler Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4 Figure 9-5: Crawler Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5 Figure 9-6: Upper Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5 Figure 9-7: Idler Roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6 Figure 9-8: Propel Motor and Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7 Figure 9-9: Propel Motor Adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.10 Figure 9-10: Motor Displacement Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.11 Figure 9-11: Propel Transmission Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.12 Figure 9-12: Legend for Figure 9-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.13 Figure 9-13: Spring Cage Fixture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.15 Figure 9-14: Brake Disk Arrangement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.16 Figure 9-15: Crawler Frame Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.23 Figure 9-16: Upper and Lower Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.26 Figure 9-17: Crawler Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.28 Figure 9-18: Slide Hammer Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.29 Figure 9-19: Drive Rod Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.30 Figure 9-20: Track Tension Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.32 Figure 9-21: Track Tension Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.33 SECTION 10, Levelling System Figure 10-1: Rear Jack (left shown, right similar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2 Figure 10-2: Front Jack (left shown, right similar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development List of Figures, Version 00 - 03/06

-xx-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation BD120149-00-MSLOF.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

List of Figures

List of Figures (Continued)


Figure 10-3: Jack shoe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 Figure 10-4: Hydraulic Cylinder Components (typical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5 Figure 10-5: Verify Jack System Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.10 Figure 10-6: Auto Level Pressure Switch Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.12 Figure 10-7: Auto Level Tilt Sensors (LS1, 2, & 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.13 Figure 10-8: Check Machine Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.15 SECTION 11, Mast Figure 11-1: 120A Mast (Typ.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1 Figure 11-2: Saf-T-Climb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2 Figure 11-3: Back Braces (Typical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3 Figure 11-4: Mast Lock Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3 Figure 11-5: Auxiliary Winch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.7 Figure 11-6: Auxiliary Winch Brake Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.9 Figure 11-7: Auxiliary Winch Planetary Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.12 Figure 11-8: Auxiliary Winch Drum Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.15 Figure 11-9: Auxiliary Winch Sheaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.17 Figure 11-10: Back Brace (exploded view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.19 Figure 11-11: Back Brace Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.20 Figure 11-12: Back Brace Locking Collar Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.25 Figure 11-13: Mast Lock Pin Cylinder Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.27 Figure 11-14: Mast Lock Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.30 Figure 11-15: Mast Raise/Lower Cylinder Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.32 Figure 11-16: Mast Raise/Lower Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.34 Figure 11-17: Mast Bottom Plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.37 Figure 11-18: Mast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.40 SECTION 12, Rotary Machinery Figure 12-1: Carriage Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1 Figure 12-2: Rotary Drill Pipe Coupling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2 Figure 12-3: Rotary Machinery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3 Figure 12-4: Installing Motor Pinion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5 Figure 12-5: Pinion Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.6 Figure 12-6: Rotary Gearcase. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.9 Figure 12-7: Legend for Figure 12-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.10 Figure 12-8: Bit Air Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.11 Figure 12-9: Swivel Housing and Air Pipe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.12 Figure 12-10: Oil Pump Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.13 Figure 12-11: Intermediate Drive Shaft Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.17 Figure 12-12: Checking Main Drive Bearing Preload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.22 Figure 12-13: Rotary Drill Pipe Coupling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.24 SECTION 14, Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation BD120149-00-MSLOF.fm

-xxi-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development List of Figures, Version 00 - 03/06

List of Figures

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

List of Figures (Continued)


Figure 14-1: Rotary Carriage Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1 Figure 14-2: Pulldown Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2 Figure 14-3: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2 Figure 14-4: Pulldown Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3 Figure 14-5: Pulldown Drive Pinion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3 Figure 14-6: Pulldown Idler Pinion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.4 Figure 14-7: Mast Racking (typical). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.4 Figure 14-8: Upper Guide Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.5 Figure 14-9: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.5 Figure 14-10: Pulldown Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.6 Figure 14-11: Pulldown Resolver (typical). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.6 Figure 14-12: Pulldown Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.7 Figure 14-13: Pulldown Motor Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.9 Figure 14-14: Pulldown Motor Blower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.10 Figure 14-15: Pulldown Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.12 Figure 14-16: Legend for Figure 14-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.13 Figure 14-17: Rotary Carriage Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.14 Figure 14-18: Legend for Figure 14-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.15 Figure 14-19: Roller Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.19 Figure 14-20: Roller Assembly Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.20 Figure 14-21: Guide Rollers (Upper shown; Lower similar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.22 Figure 14-22: Upper Carriage Roller Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.25 Figure 14-23: Pulldown Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.27 Figure 14-24: Pulldown Brake Wear Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.29 Figure 14-25: Pulldown Brake Exploded View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.31 Figure 14-26: Pulldown Resolver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.34 SECTION 14, Pipe Handling Equipment Figure 14-1: Pipe Handling Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1 Figure 14-2: Deck Wrench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2 Figure 14-3: Breakout Wrench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3 Figure 14-4: Pipe Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.5 Figure 14-5: Legend for Figure 14-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.6 Figure 14-6: Pipe Wrenches and Liners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.7 Figure 14-7: Pipe Rack Gate Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.8 Figure 14-8: Pipe Rack Swing Cylinder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.12 Figure 14-9: Pipe Holder Limit Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.15 Figure 14-10: Deck Wrench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.17 Figure 14-11: Deck Wrench Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.20 Figure 14-12: Breakout Wrench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.22 Figure 14-13: Sure Wrench Hydraulic Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.25 Figure 14-14: Jaw Cylinder Pressure Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.27 SECTION 15, Water Injection System
P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development List of Figures, Version 00 - 03/06 Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation BD120149-00-MSLOF.fm

-xxii-

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

List of Figures

List of Figures (Continued)


Figure 15-1: Water Injection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1 Figure 15-2: Multipoint Level Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2 Figure 15-3: Water Level Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3 Figure 15-4: Water Injection Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3 Figure 15-5: Water Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4 Figure 15-6: Legend for Figure 15-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.5 Figure 15-7: Pressure Relief Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.7 Figure 15-8: Relief Valve Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.9 SECTION 16, Lubrication Figure 16-1: Lubrication, Pulldown Gearcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.5 Figure 16-2: Lubrication, Hydraulic Pump Drive Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.6 Figure 16-3: Lubrication, Auxiliary Winch Gear Reducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.7 Figure 16-4: Lubrication, Cable Reel Gear Reducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.8 Figure 16-5: Lubrication, Propel Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.9 Figure 16-6: Lubrication, Rotary Gearcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.10 Figure 16-7: Lubrication, Air Compressor T-Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.11 Figure 16-8: Main Air System Oil Filter Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.12 Figure 16-9: Compressor Oil Filter Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.12 Figure 16-10: Checking Filter Pressure Differentials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.13 Figure 16-11: Main Compressor Oil Filter Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.14 Figure 16-12: Changing Main Compressor Oil Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.15 Figure 16-13: Hydraulic Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.17 Figure 16-14: Hydraulic Tank Level Sight Gauge and Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.18 Figure 16-15: Lubrication, Pipe Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.20 Figure 16-16: Lubrication, Mast Back Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.21 Figure 16-17: Lubrication, Backup Roller Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.22 Figure 16-18: Manual Lubricant Point Reference Diagram #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.23 Figure 16-19: Manual Lubrication Point Reference Diagram #2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.24 SECTION 17, Preventive Maintenance Figure 17-1: Metric Conversion Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5 Figure 17-2: Temperature Conversion Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.6 Figure 17-3: GUI Main Page, Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.14 Figure 17-4: First Sub-Page, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.15 Figure 17-5: Typical Fault List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.15 Figure 17-6: Hydraulic Tank Sight Glass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.18 Figure 17-7: T-Tank Sight Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.19 Figure 17-8: Rotary Carriage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.23 Figure 17-9: Right Angle Gear Reducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.27 Figure 17-10: Check Crawler Belt Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.31 Figure 17-11: Charge Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.32 Figure 17-12: Charge Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.33

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation BD120149-00-MSLOF.fm

-xxiii-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development List of Figures, Version 00 - 03/06

List of Figures

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

List of Figures (Continued)


Figure 17-13: Return Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.34 Figure 17-14: Main Compressor Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.35 Figure 17-15: Main Air Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.37 Figure 17-16: T-Tank (on Left Hand Platform) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.39 Figure 17-17: Main Compressor Air Cleaner Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.42 Figure 17-18: Propel Transmission Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.50 Figure 17-19: Filter Packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.53 Figure 17-20: Blade Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.53 Figure 17-21: Roller Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.54 Figure 17-22: Pump Drive Transmission (typ). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.58 SECTION A, General Maintenance SECTION B, General Hydraulic System Maintenance Figure B-1: Tightening SAE Flare Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3 Figure B-2: Incorrect O Ring Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.5 Figure B-3: Correct O Ring Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.6 Figure B-4: Split Flange Tightening Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.6 Figure B-5: Flat-face O Ring Seal Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.9

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development List of Figures, Version 00 - 03/06

-xxiv-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation BD120149-00-MSLOF.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

List of Tables

List of Tables
SECTION 1, Blasthole Drill Safety Table 1-1: Safety Hazard Decals and Signs (Ref. Drawing R7243) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9 SECTION 2, Introduction SECTION 3, Auxiliary Hydraulic System Table 3-1: System Data Sheet, Auxiliary Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.55 Table 3-2: Counterbalance Valve Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.83 Table 3-3: Valve Bank Pressure Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.92 Table 3-4: Auxiliary Hydraulic System Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.98 SECTION 4, Main Hydraulic System Table 4-1: Pump Adjustment Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14 Table 4-2: Main Hydraulic System Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.21 SECTION 5, Power Unit SECTION 6, Main Air System Table 6-1: Inlet Valve States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10 Table 6-2: Inlet Pressure Gauge Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12 Table 6-3: Troubleshooting Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.76 SECTION 7, Low Pressure Hydraulic System SECTION 8, Automatic Lubrication System Table 8-1: Automatic Lubrication System Lube Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8 Table 8-2: Troubleshooting Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.32 SECTION 9, Propel System SECTION 10, Levelling System Table 10-1: Auxiliary Hydraulic System Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.16 SECTION 11, Mast Table 11-1: Mast Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.41 SECTION 12, Rotary Machinery Table 12-1: Pinion Mounting Data (refer also to Figure 12-5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.6 Table 12-2: Troubleshooting Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.29 SECTION 14, Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation BD120149-00-MSLOT.fm

-xxv-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development List of Tables, Version 00 - 03/06

List of Tables

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

List of Tables (Continued)


Table 14-1: Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.37 SECTION 14, Pipe Handling Equipment Table 14-1: Jaw and Die Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.23 Table 14-2: Tools, Supplies and Parts Required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.24 Table 14-3: Troubleshooting Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.28 SECTION 15, Water Injection System Table 15-1: Troubleshooting Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.11 SECTION 16, Lubrication Table 16-1: Gear Oil Operating Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2 Table 16-2: Lubrication, Pulldown Gearcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.5 Table 16-3: Lubrication, Hydraulic Pump Drive Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.6 Table 16-4: Lubrication, Auxiliary Winch Gear Reducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.7 Table 16-5: Lubrication, Cable Reel Gear Reducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.8 Table 16-6: Lubrication, Cable Reel Gear Reducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.9 Table 16-7: Lubrication, Rotary Gearcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.10 Table 16-8: Lubrication, Miscellaneous Pins, Levers and Linkages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.19 Table 16-9: Lubrication Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.25 Table 16-10: Performance Requirements, Material Specification P&H 464 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.27 Table 16-11: Physical Requirements, Material Specification P&H 469. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.30 Table 16-12: Performance Requirements, Material Specification P&H 472 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.33 Table 16-13: Performance Requirements, Material Specification P&H 474 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.38 Table 16-14: Additional Performance Requirements, Material Specification P&H 474. . . . . . . 16.38 Table 16-15: Performance Requirements, Material Specification P&H 520 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.50 SECTION 17, Preventive Maintenance Table 17-1: Recommended Torque Values for American Standard Threads (Coarse Threads) 17.2 Table 17-2: Recommended Torque Values for American Standard Threads (Fine Threads). . . 17.3 Table 17-3: Recommended Torque Values for Metric Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.4 Table 17-4: A Maintenance Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.8 Table 17-5: B Maintenance Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.10 Table 17-6: C Maintenance Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.12 SECTION A, General Maintenance SECTION B, General Hydraulic System Maintenance Table B-1: Pipe Thread Leaks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4 Table B-2: Flare Connection Leakage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B.5 Table B-3: Split Flange Leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.7

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development List of Tables, Version 00 - 03/06

-xxvi-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation BD120149-00-MSLOT.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

List of Tables

List of Tables (Continued)


Table B-4: Split Flange Torque Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.8 Table B-5: Flat-face Seal Torque Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B.10

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation BD120149-00-MSLOT.fm

-xxvii-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development List of Tables, Version 00 - 03/06

List of Tables

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

List of Tables (Continued)

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development List of Tables, Version 00 - 03/06

-xxviii-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation BD120149-00-MSLOT.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Blasthole Drill Safety

Section 1

Blasthole Drill Safety


1.1 General Information
Since the earliest days of mining, the job of digging iron and other useful materials out of the earth has been considered one of the world's most dangerous occupations. Public concern about the toll of deaths, injuries and destruction in mine accidents has prompted passage of much-needed safety legislation and intensified the search for safer methods and improved training practices and technology. Growing cooperation among industry, labor and government also has contributed to making mining safer and more healthful, especially in recent years. Safety and health in the mining industry has improved greatly since the early 20th Century. Total mining fatalities reached the lowest level in history in 2004. Listed below are safety information websites that can assist in preventing mining accidents and injuries:

1.1.1 Safety Websites


www.msha.gov. The U.S. Department of Labors Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA) helps to reduce deaths, injuries, and illnesses in the nation's mines with a variety of activities and programs. The agency develops and enforces safety and health rules applying to all U.S. mines, helps mine operators who have special compliance problems, and makes available technical, educational and other types of assistance. MSHA works cooperatively with industry, labor, and other federal and state agencies toward improving safety and health conditions for all miners. MSHA's responsibilities are spelled out in the Federal Mine Safety and Health Act of 1977. www.osha.gov. The U.S. Department of Labors Occupational Safety and Health Administrations (OSHA) mission is to assure, so far as possible, every working man and woman in the nation safe and healthful working conditions. By authorizing enforcement of the standards developed under the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970; by assisting and encouraging the States in their efforts to assure safe and healthful working conditions; by providing for research, information, education, and training in the field of occupational safety and health; and for other purposes. www.cdc.gov/niosh. The National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) is the Federal agency responsible for conducting research and making recommendations for the prevention of work-related disease and injury. The Institute is part of the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC). NIOSH is responsible for conducting research on the full scope of occupational disease and injury ranging from lung disease in miners to carpal tunnel syndrome in computer users.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

-1.1-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

Blasthole Drill Safety

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

1.2 Safe Operating Practices for Users of P&H Mining Equipment - Large Rotary Blasthole Drills

NOTICE
A review of many safety sources including MSHA, NIOSH, OSHA, ANSI, and various individual mine safety policies was conducted to develop these safe operating practices recommendations. The purpose of these recommendations is to assist and support our customer in their safety efforts in preventing accidents.

1.2.1 Introduction
P&H drills are carefully designed, manufactured, and tested. When used properly by qualified operators, they will give safe, reliable service. There are P&H offices worldwide to answer any questions about P&H products or their safe use. The World Sales and Service Headquarters for P&H Mining Equipment is: P&H Mining Equipment 4400 West National Avenue P.O. Box 310 Milwaukee, WI 53201 USA Telephone: (414) 671-4400 Because drills are complex and contain massive pieces of equipment, they also have the potential for accidents if safe operating practices are not followed. This section is intended to help prevent accidents which could result in injury, death, or property damage. General safe practices for working machinery must be followed as well as safe operating practices. The following P&H Mining Equipment recommendations are provided to supplement customer/owner, local or national safety codes, rules or procedures.

1.2.2 Qualifications for and Conduct of Operators


The following P&H Mining Equipment recommendations are presented for the purpose of reducing the possibility of personal injury, either to the operator, or to those who work on or in the area adjacent to the drill. This documentation is general in nature, and your drill may not be equipped with all devices mentioned.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

-1.2-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Blasthole Drill Safety

The operator of this drill is urged to read this section carefully, and to avoid the hazardous operating conditions described. All situations described in the following have, at one time or another, contributed to serious accidents.

Figure 1-1: Look closely to see whats in the water...

However, it is impossible to foresee all such conditions, and it must remain the responsibility of the mining company and the operator to anticipate and avoid any unsafe conditions not described in detail in this manual. It is understood that safety rules within individual mining companies vary, and that, if a conflict exists, the rules of the company take precedence over the suggestions contained herein.

1.2.2.1 Operators of P&H Rotary Blasthole Drills


P&H Mining Equipment strongly recommends that only the following qualified personnel be permitted to operate a drill: 1. Designated qualified operators who have met the requirements of the operation tests and physical and mental conditions. 2. Trainees under the direct supervision of a qualified operator. 3. Qualified maintenance and test personnel when required to do so in the performance of their duties. 4. Inspectors qualified to operate the drill.

1.2.2.2 Operator Qualifications


P&H Mining Equipment strongly recommends that operators and operator trainees meet the following qualifications: 1. Operators of P&H rotary blasthole drills must be required by the employer to pass a written examination which accurately measures practical knowledge of the drill, and an evaluated demonstration of the proper methods and techniques to be used in operating the drill, facilitated by a P&H Factory Authorized Trainer. 2. An operator must have vision of at least 20/30 Snellen in one eye and 20/50 Snellen in the other, with or without corrective lenses. Good depth perception is required.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

-1.3-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

Blasthole Drill Safety

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

3. An operator must be able to distinguish colors, regardless of the position of the color, if color differentiation is required for operation of the drill. 4. An operator must have adequate hearing for the specific operation, with or without hearing aid. 5. An operator must have sufficient strength, endurance, agility, coordination, and speed of reaction to meet the demands of drill operation. 6. Evidence of physical defects or emotional instability that could render a hazard to the operator or others, or which in the opinion of a qualified person could interfere with the operators performance, may be cause for disqualification. In such cases, specialized clinical or medical judgements and tests may be required. 7. Evidence that an operator is subject to seizures or loss of physical control is reason for disqualification. Specialized medical tests may be required to determine these conditions. 8. Evidence that an operator is under the influence of alcohol or drugs is cause for disqualification. 9. An operator who is taking medication prescribed by a medical doctor must provide written assurance from that doctor that the medication will not affect the operator's ability to operate the drill in a safe manner. 10. The operator must have a good attitude towards safety at all times.

1.2.2.3 Operators Conduct

SAFETY FIRST
Safety must always be the operator's primary concern. An operator must refuse to operate the drill when a known unsafe condition exists. Consult your supervisor when safety is in doubt.
1. The operator must read and understand the Operator's Manual and be familiar with all instructions and signs on the drill. 2. The operator must see that the drill is in proper order before operating. 3. When physically or otherwise unfit, an operator must not engage in the operation of the drill. 4. The operator must not engage in any practice that will divert attention while actually engaged in operating the drill. 5. The operator will ensure that people, other mining equipment, and material are kept out of the work area. Do not operate the drill when people are on the drilling platform. 6. The operator must give a warning signal prior to starting, operating, or traveling the drill. 7. All controls must be tested by the operator before beginning a new shift. If any control does not operate properly, the operator must contact the appropriate maintenance department and have the controls repaired before operating the drill. 8. If adjustments or repairs are necessary, or any defects are known, the operator must promptly report the defects to the appropriate maintenance department who will be responsible for the repair of the drill. The operator must also notify the next operator of any remaining uncorrected defects upon changing shifts.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

-1.4-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Blasthole Drill Safety

1.2.2.4 Operators Functional Checks


The operator must make a safety check before starting to work each shift to see that the drill is in proper order. Some things to check are:

Check for warning tags or lockout tags on the starting controls; do not operate the controls until the tag has
been removed by the person who placed it there, or by a qualified person. Consult your minesites specific lockout-tagout procedures.

Check with mine maintenance and operations management to see that periodic maintenance and inspections have been performed and all necessary repairs made.

Consult with mine management that scheduled inspection of load carrying members such as wire rope (dipper trip lines, hoist rope, suspension lines), boom, dipper handle and dipper has been conducted.

Check that all equipment guards are in place and all inspection and cover plates are closed and locked. Look inside, outside and underneath the drill to make sure everything is clear before starting or energizing
the drill.

After starting the drill, check all gauges and indicators for proper readings and operation. Test all controls for proper operation and controllability before drill operation or travel, including a thorough
check of the brakes.

Check audible warning devices and alarms used for backup warning for proper operation. During operation, be alert for unusual noises or vibrations; look and smell for unusual smoke or fumes.

1.2.3 Responsibilities of All Crew Members


Any unsafe condition or practice must be reported to the job supervisor and drill operator. Everyone who works around drills, including support people and maintenance personnel, must obey all safety hazard signs and watch out for their own safety and the safety of others in the area. Crew members setting up machines or handling maintenance and repairs are expected to know proper procedures including lockout and tagout procedures. Watch for hazards during operations and alert the operator of potential safety hazards such as the unexpected presence of people, other equipment in the area, unstable ground, bank conditions, or approaching storms.

1.2.4 Planning the Job


Most accidents can be avoided by careful job planning. The person in charge must have a clear understanding of the work to be done, consider dangers or hazards, develop a plan to do the job safely, and then explain the plan to all concerned. Factors such as the following should be considered:

How can the drill trail cable be safely moved at the work site? Is there other equipment, power lines, or structures which must be moved or avoided during movement of
the drill?

Is the surface strong enough to support the drill and load?

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

-1.5-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

Blasthole Drill Safety

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Can the drill be moved with the mast up, or must the mast be lowered? What steps will be taken to keep unnecessary people and equipment at a safe distance from the work area?
These factors are not meant to be all encompassing, but only a starting point. Each job must be individually considered.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

-1.6-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Blasthole Drill Safety

1.3 Operation Near Electrical Lines Precautions


!

DANGER

Keep clear of power lines when machine is in operation. Death or injury could result should any part of the machine comes within minimum distance of an energized power line specified by local, state and federal regulations.
Working in the vicinity of electrical power lines presents a very serious hazard and special precautions must be taken. Safe operating practices require that you maintain the maximum possible distance from the lines and never violate the minimum clearances. Before working in the vicinity of power lines, the following precautions should be observed:

Contact the owners of the power lines or the nearest electric utility before beginning work. Machine operator and electrical utility representative must jointly determine what specific precautions are
taken.

Machine operator and electrical utility representative must confirm that all precautions are taken and followed.

Even when power lines are known to be locked out and tagged out, consider them to be energized. Inform all ground personnel to stand clear of the machine at all times.
Use a signal person to guide the machine into close quarters. The sole responsibility of the signal person is to observe the approach of the machine to the power line. The signal person must be in direct communication with the operator and the operator must pay close attention to the signals

1.4 Safety Decals and Signs


1.4.1 General
Hazard Indicators and Safety Hazard Decals and Signs identify potential safety hazards and prevent accidents by displaying standard symbols, headers and pictographs or custom graphics. Headers, graphics, and layouts of indicators, decals, and signs conform to current ANSI guidelines, and are consistent with the industry standards for such devices commonly used for high voltage, personal protection, confined space, and bilingual applications.

1.4.2 Hazard Indicators


DANGERS, WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, NOTICES, and SAFETY FIRSTS are used on signs and decals, and throughout our manuals to emphasize important and critical instructions. In written documentation, DANGERS, WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, and SAFETY FIRSTS will precede the paragraph or item to which they apply. NOTICES will follow the paragraph or item to which they apply. DANGERS, WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, NOTICES and SAFETY FIRSTS are identified and defined as follows:

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

-1.7-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

Blasthole Drill Safety

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

DANGER

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. This signal word is limited to the most extreme situations.

WARNING

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or major injury.

CAUTION
A Caution without a Safety Alert Symbol (Triangle and Exclamation Point) is used to warn of hazards that result only in property damage.

NOTICE
Used to indicate a statement of company policy directly or indirectly related to the safety of personnel or protection of property. This signal word is not associated directly with a hazard or hazardous situation and is not used in place of DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.

SAFETY FIRST
Used to indicate general instructions relative to safe working practices, remind of proper safety procedures, and indicate the location of safety equipment.

1.4.3 Safety Hazard Decals and Signs


Safety Hazard Decals and Signs use hazard indicators discussed in the preceding paragraphs, and also display pictographs to show, both graphically and verbally, where potential safety hazards exist around the rotary blasthole drill. These decals and signs do not represent every possible hazard. They are not intended to be a substitute for safe working practices and good judgement. The following Safety Hazard Decals and Signs are examples of those found on a typical rotary blasthole drill. Be certain everyone working on, or near, the drill understands, and knows how to avoid, the hazards they represent. Do not remove, cover, paint over, or deface these Safety Decals or Signs. If they become damaged or obscured, request replacement decals and signs from your local MinePro Services office.

1.4.3.1 Description

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

-1.8-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Blasthole Drill Safety

Safety Hazard Decals and Signs are located throughout the drill in various locations. Table 1-1 describes all Safety Hazard Decals and Signs used on the P&H Model 120A Rotary Blasthole Drill. The Item Number is the item number indicated on engineering drawing R7243, SIGN INSTL; the number in parentheses is the P&H part number.
Item Number 5 (32Z2536D2) Safety Hazard Decal/Sign Description Yellow and black caution tape. In compliance with official regulations that state Yellow shall be the basic color for designating caution and for marking physical hazards such as: Striking against, stumbling, falling, tripping, and caught in between.

20 (32Q1770D1)

This CAUTION decal alerts personnel that abnormal performance can cause personnel injury or property damage.

ABNORMAL PERFORMANCE CAN CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY OR PROPERTY DAMAGE.

DO NOT OPEN SWITCH DURING NORMAL OPERATION.

Do not open switch during normal operation.

32Q1770D1

ES02973a01

21 (32Q1752)

This WARNING decal alerts personnel that hazardous voltage inside can cause severe injury or death.
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE INSIDE. Keep all doors and covers closed. Do not open unless qualified and authorized. CAN CAUSE SEVERE INJURY OR DEATH. Use lockout and tagout procedures before servicing.
32Q1752

Keep all doors and covers closed. Do not open unless qualified and authorized. Disconnect power to all circuits. Use lockout and tagout procedures before servicing.

ES03009a01

Table 1-1: Safety Hazard Decals and Signs (Ref. Drawing R7243)

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

-1.9-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

Blasthole Drill Safety

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Item Number 22 (32Q1764D1)

Safety Hazard Decal/Sign

Description This WARNING decal alerts personnel that rotating parts can cause injury if contacted. Do not remove guard if machine is operating. Replace guard before operating machine. Use lockout and tagout procedures before servicing.

ROTATING PARTS. CAN CAUSE INJURY IF CONTACTED.


Do not remove guard if machine is operating. Replace guard before operating machine. Use lockout and tagout procedures before ser vicing.
ES02919a01

23 (32Q1780D3)

This NOTICE Decal is used with 32Q1805D_ to alert the user of level of voltage which may be present.

MAXIMUM LEVEL MAY BE PRESENT.


ES02915a01

24 (32Q1801)

This WARNING decal alerts personnel that hazardous voltages may be present. Can cause severe injury or death.

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE MAY BE PRESENT. CAN CAUSE SEVERE INJURY OR DEATH.

Disconnect Power to all Circuits. Use lockout and tagout procedures before servicing.
32Q1801D1
ES02956a01

Disconnect power to all circuits. Use lockout and tagout procedures before servicing.

Table 1-1: Safety Hazard Decals and Signs (Ref. Drawing R7243)

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

-1.10-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Blasthole Drill Safety

Item Number 30 (32Q1806)

Safety Hazard Decal/Sign

Description This DANGER Decal alerts personnel of hazardous voltage.

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE. DO NOT SERVICE UNLESS QUALIFIED AND AUTHORIZED.

Check for voltages present. Disconnect power to all circuits. Use lockout and tagout procedures before servicing. Will cause severe injury or death.

Do not service unless qualified and authorized. Check for voltages present. Disconnect power to all circuits. Use lockout and tagout procedures before servicing. Will cause severe injury or death. This CAUTION decal alerts personnel that opening the door stops the machine.

ES03011a01

31 (32Q1808)

OPENING DOOR STOPS MACHINE. UNEXPECTED STOPPING OR ABNORMAL PERFORMANCE CAN CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE.

Unexpected stopping or abnormal performance can cause personal injury and property damage. Do not open doors while machine is running.

Do not open doors while machine is running.


32Q1808D1

ES02942a01

32 (32Q1809)

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE INSIDE. CAN CAUSE SEVERE INJURY OR DEATH. Keep all doors and covers closed. Do not open unless qualified and authorized. Disconnect power to all circuits. Use lockout and tagout procedures before servicing.
32Q1809D1

This WARNING decal alerts personnel that hazardous voltage inside can cause severe injury or death. Keep all doors and covers closed. Do not open unless qualified and authorized. Disconnect power to all circuits.
ES02944a01

Use lockout and tagout procedures before servicing.

Table 1-1: Safety Hazard Decals and Signs (Ref. Drawing R7243)

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -1.11Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

Blasthole Drill Safety

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Item Number 33 (32Q1816)

Safety Hazard Decal/Sign

Description This WARNING decal alerts personnel of hazard voltage inside. Do not service unless qualified and authorized. Disconnect power to all circuits. Use lockout and tagout procedures before servicing. Can cause severe injury or death.

! WARNING
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE INSIDE. Disconnect power to all circuits. Use lockout and tagout procedures before servicing. Can cause severe injury or death. DO NOT SERVICE UNLESS QUALIFIED AND AUTHORIZED.

32Q1816D1

BD0321a01

34 (32Q1819)

This CAUTION sign alerts personnel of rotating parts. Keep fingers clear of rotating machinery. Use lockout/tagout procedures to service or maintenance.
ROTATING PARTS. KEEP FINGERS CLEAR OF ROTATING MACHINERY. Use lockout/ tagout procedures for service or maintenance. Can cause injury if contacted.
32Q1819
ES03014a01

Can cause injury if contacted.

Table 1-1: Safety Hazard Decals and Signs (Ref. Drawing R7243)

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

-1.12-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Blasthole Drill Safety

Item Number 35 (32Q1820)

Safety Hazard Decal/Sign

Description This WARNING decal alerts personnel of a hazardous area. Do not enter when machine is in operation. Can cause severe injury.

! WARNING

HAZARDOUS AREA. DO NOT ENTER WHEN MACHINE IS IN OPERATION. Can cause severe injury.
32Q1820 BD0323a01

36 (32Q1912)

This DANGER sign alerts personnel that no smoking or open flames are permitted.

ES02971a01

37 (32Q1913)

CAUTION

This CAUTION decal alerts personnel of nonpotable water. Do not drink. Do not use for cooking or washing. Can cause illness.

NON-POTABLE WATER. DO NOT DRINK. Do not use for cooking or washing. Can cause illness.
32Q1913

BD0322a01

Table 1-1: Safety Hazard Decals and Signs (Ref. Drawing R7243)

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -1.13Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

Blasthole Drill Safety

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Item Number 38 (32Q1914)

Safety Hazard Decal/Sign

Description This WARNING decal alerts personnel that flammable materials can burn or ignite. No smoking or open flames inside this room. Fire or explosion can cause severe injury, death or property damage.

FLAMMABLE MATERIALS. CAN BURN OR IGNITE. NO SMOKING OR OPEN FLAMES INSIDE THIS ROOM. FIRE OR EXPLOSION CAN CAUSE SEVERE INJURY, DEATH OR PROPERTY DAMAGE.
32Q1914

ES02970a01

39 (32Q1915)

This DANGER decal alerts personnel that hazardous voltage may be present.
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE MAY BE PRESENT. ENERGIZED OVERHEAD POWERLINES CAN BE CONTACTED BY RAISING THE DRILL MAST.

Energized overhead power lines can be contacted by raising the drill mast. Do not raise mast near power lines. Will cause severe injury or death to ground personnel near to or touching the machine.

Do not raise mast near power lines. Will cause severe injury or death to ground personnel near to or touching the machine.
BD180a01

Table 1-1: Safety Hazard Decals and Signs (Ref. Drawing R7243)

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

-1.14-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Blasthole Drill Safety

Item Number 40 (32Q1916)

Safety Hazard Decal/Sign

Description This CAUTION decal alerts personnel of compressed air. Can spray with force and noise. Wear eye and ear protection while venting the air. Do not service until pressure is relieved. Can cause injury or hearing loss.

COMPRESSED AIR. CAN SPRAY WITH FORCE AND NOISE. WEAR EYE AND EAR PROTECTION WHILE VENTING THE AIR. Do not service until pressure is relieved. Can cause injury or hearing loss.
32Q1916 ES03018a01

41 (32Q1917)

This WARNING decal alerts personnel that unexpected machine movement can cause severe injury or death. Always notify machine operator of your presence. Keep hands, body and clothing away from machinery.

UNEXPECTED MACHINE MOVEMENT CAN CAUSE SEVERE INJURY OR DEATH. Always notify machine operator of your presence. Keep hands, body and clothing away from machinery.
32Q1814 ES03019a01

Table 1-1: Safety Hazard Decals and Signs (Ref. Drawing R7243)

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -1.15Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

Blasthole Drill Safety

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Item Number 42 (32Q1948D1)

Safety Hazard Decal/Sign

Description This WARNING decal alerts personnel to high pressure hydraulic hoses and valves.

HIGH PRESSURE HYDRAULIC HOSES AND VALVES. Do not service until pressure is relieved. Can cause severe injury or death.
32Q1916 ES03020a01

Do not service until pressure is relieved. Can cause severe injury or death.

43 (32Q1921)

This WARNING decal alerts personnel to a tipping hazard. Do not exceed 8 tilt in any direction without consulting the stability diagram delivered with this machine. Note: 8 slope = 14% grade Can cause severe injury, death or property damage.
32Q1921

TIPPING HAZARD. DO NOT EXCEED 8 TILT IN ANY DIRECTION WITHOUT CONSULTING THE STABILITY DIAGRAM DELIVERED WITH THIS MACHINE.
NOTE: 8 SLOPE = 14% GRADE

CAN CAUSE SEVERE INJURY, DEATH OR PROPERTY DAMAGE.

BD181a01

44 (32Q1931)

This NOTICE decal alerts personnel to read operators manual before attempting to operate machine.

READ OPERATORS MANUAL BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO OPERATE MACHINE.


32Q1931D1
ES02939a01

Table 1-1: Safety Hazard Decals and Signs (Ref. Drawing R7243)

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

-1.16-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Blasthole Drill Safety

Item Number 45 (32Q1932)

Safety Hazard Decal/Sign

Description This CAUTION decal alerts personnel to drilling dust and projectiles.

DRILLING DUST AND PROJECTILES. KEEP AWAY FROM DRILL AND MACHINE DURING DRILL OPERATION. WEAR FACE AND BREATHING PROTECTION WHEN WORKING NEAR OPERATING DRILL. Always notify machine operator of your presence. Can injure eyes and lungs.
32Q1932

Keep away from drill and machine during drill operation. Wear face and breathing protection when working near operating drill. Always notify machine operator of your presence. Can injure eyes and lungs.

BD182a01

46 (32Q1933)

This WARNING decal alerts personnel to hazardous area. Falling or flying objects. Noise, tripping or slipping, moving machinery. Can cause injury.
HAZARDOUS AREA. FALLING OR FLYING OBJECTS. NOISE, TRIPPING OR SLIPPING, MOVING MACHINERY. CAN CAUSE INJURY. Wear head, hearing and eye protection. Keep hands, body and clothing away from machinery. Watch your step.
32Q1933

Wear head, hearing and eye protection. Keep hands, body and clothing away from machinery. Watch your step.

ES02938a01

Table 1-1: Safety Hazard Decals and Signs (Ref. Drawing R7243)

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -1.17Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

Blasthole Drill Safety

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Item Number 47 (32Q1934)

Safety Hazard Decal/Sign

Description This WARNING decal alerts personnel to an open serviceway. Falling objects and unexpected machine movement can cause severe injury or death. Do not enter when machine is in operation. Always notify operator of your presence. Keep hands, body and clothing away from machine. Use pathways, hold handrails and watch your step.
32Q1934

! WARNING

OPEN SERVICEWAY. FALLING OBJECTS AND UNEXPECTED MACHINE MOVEMENT CAN CAUSE SEVERE INJURY OR DEATH. DO NOT ENTER WHEN MACHINE IS IN OPERATION.

Always notify machine operator of your presence. Keep hands, body and clothing away from machine. Use pathways, hold handrails and watch your step.

BD0324a01

48 (R57305D1)

This WARNING decal alerts personnel to potential arc-flash hazards. Wear proper personal protective equipment while working inside energized cabinet. See NFPA 70E.*
*NFPA 70E is a booklet published by the National Fire Protection Association. NFPA 70E: Electrical Safety in the Workplace is available for sale at www.nfpa.org/catalog

POTENTIAL ARC-FLASH HAZARDS. Wear proper personal protective equipment while working inside energized cabinet (see NFPA 70E).
R57305D1

ES04423a01

50 (32Q1937)

This DANGER decal alerts personnel to hazardous voltage. Will cause severe injury or death. Insure that all high voltage is removed from the machine before servicing.

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE. WILL CAUSE SEVERE INJURY OR DEATH.

Insure that all high voltage is removed from the machine before servicing.

32Q1937

BD0325a01

Table 1-1: Safety Hazard Decals and Signs (Ref. Drawing R7243)

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

-1.18-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Blasthole Drill Safety

Item Number 51 (32Q1939)

Safety Hazard Decal/Sign

Description This WARNING sign alerts personnel of an open serviceway. Falling objects and unexpected machine movement can cause severe injury or death. Do not enter when machine is in operation.

OPEN SERVICEWAY. FALLING OBJECTS AND UNEXPECTED MACHINE MOVEMENT CAN CAUSE SEVERE INJURY OR DEATH. DO NOT ENTER WHEN MACHINE IS IN OPERATION. ALWAYS NOTIFY MACHINE OPERATOR OF YOUR PRESENCE. KEEP HANDS, BODY AND CLOTHING AWAY FROM MACHINE. USE PATHWAYS, HOLD HANDRAILS AND WATCH YOUR STEP
32Q1939

Always notify machine operator of your presence. Keep hands, body and clothing way from machine. Use pathways, hold handrails and watch your step.

ES03028a01

52 (32Q1942D1)

This WARNING decal alerts personnel that rotating parts and hazardous voltage inside can cause severe injury or death. Keep fingers clear of rotating machinery. Disconnect power to all circuits before opening covers. Use lockout and tagout procedures before servicing.
R42190D1

ROTATING PARTS AND HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE INSIDE. CAN CAUSE SEVERE INJURY OR DEATH. Keep fingers clear of rotating machinery. Disconnect power to all circuits before opening covers. Use lockout and tagout procedures before servicing.
ES02930a01

54 (32Q1930)

This DANGER decal alerts personnel that hazardous voltage will cause severe injury or death.
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE. WILL CAUSE SEVERE INJURY OR DEATH. DO NOT SERVICE UNLESS QUALIFIED AND AUTHORIZED. Insure that all high voltage is removed from the machine before servicing switch.

Do not service unless qualified and authorized. Insure that all high voltage is removed from the machine before servicing switch.

32Q1930

DL0116a01

Table 1-1: Safety Hazard Decals and Signs (Ref. Drawing R7243)

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -1.19Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

Blasthole Drill Safety

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Item Number 55 (32Q1945D1)

Safety Hazard Decal/Sign

Description This WARNING decal alerts personnel that exposure to harmful silica dust during rock drilling can cause serious respiratory disease, cancer or death. Use respiratory protection during drilling. Avoid dust contamination from work clothes, eating or drinking. Follow mine procedures for air monitoring, exposure limitations and protection methods.

EXPOSURE TO HARMFUL SILICA DUST DURING ROCK DRILLING CAN CAUSE SERIOUS RESPIRATORY DISEASE, CANCER OR DEATH. USE RESPIRATORY PROTECTION DURING DRILLING. AVOID DUST CONTAMINATION FROM WORK CLOTHES, EATING OR DRINKING. FOLLOW MINE PROCEDURES FOR AIR MONITORING, EXPOSURE LIMITATIONS AND PROTECTION METHODS.
32Q1945D1
BD183a01

58 (32Q1949D1)

This DANGER sign alerts personnel of fan blades. Fan may start without warning.
FAN BLADES FAN MAY START WITHOUT WARNING Will cause severe injury or death if contacted.
32Q1949

Will cause severe injury or death if contacted.

BD326a01

60 (R12771D1)

Climbing onto mast from ladder can cause falls resulting in severe injury or death.
CLIMBING ONTO MAST FROM LADDER CAN CAUSE FALLS RESULTING IN SEVERE INJURY OR DEATH. ALWAYS USE FALL PROTECTION WHEN CLIMBING A LADDER WITHOUT CAGE OR LADDER RINGS. MAST LADDER IS FOR INSPECTIONS OF MAST OR MAST EQUIPMENT. LOWER MAST FOR SERVICE OR MAINTENANCE.
R12771D1

Always use fall protection when climbing a ladder without cage or ladder rings. Mast ladder is for inspections of mast or mast equipment. lower mast for service or maintenance.

BD185a01

Table 1-1: Safety Hazard Decals and Signs (Ref. Drawing R7243)

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

-1.20-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Blasthole Drill Safety

Item Number 62 (R12773D1

Safety Hazard Decal/Sign

Description This WARNING decal alerts personnel of a falling load hazard. Maximum winch capacity not to exceed 15000# with bare drum. Maintain a minimum of 3 to 4 wraps of wire rope on the drum at all times.

FALLING LOAD HAZARD MAXIMUM WINCH CAPACITY NOT TO EXCEED 15000# WITH BARE DRUM. Maintain a minimum of 3 to 4 wraps of wire rope on the drum at all times.
R12773

BD0327a01

63 (R30729D1)

This CAUTION decal alerts personnel that improper use of stairway can cause tripping or falling resulting in injury. Always face stairway while using.

IMPROPER USE OF STAIRWAY CAN CAUSE TRIPPING OR FALLING RESULTING IN INJURY. ALWAYS FACE STAIRWAY WHILE USING.
R30729D1

ES03057a01

64 (R30809D1)

This CAUTION sign alerts personnel that improper use of stairway can cause tripping or falling resulting in injury. Always face stairway while using

IMPROPER USE OF STAIRWAY CAN CAUSE TRIPPING OR FALLING RESULTING IN INJURY. ALWAYS FACE STAIRWAY WHILE USING.

ES03058a01

Table 1-1: Safety Hazard Decals and Signs (Ref. Drawing R7243)

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -1.21Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

Blasthole Drill Safety

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Item Number 65 (R49498D1)

Safety Hazard Decal/Sign

Description This CAUTION decal alerts personnel that this machine can be remote controlled. Only one operator shall control the machine and the remote control box at the time. This CAUTION decal alerts personnel that this machine can be remote controlled.

THIS MACHINE CAN BE REMOTE CONTROLLED. ONLY ONE OPERATOR SHALL CONTROL THE MACHINE AND THE REMOTE CONTROL BOX AT THE TIME.
R49498D1

BD187a01

66 (R49499D1)
THIS MACHINE CAN BE REMOTE CONTROLLED. ONLY ONE OPERATOR SHALL CONTROL THE MACHINE AND THE REMOTE CONTROL BOX AT THE TIME.
R49499D1

BD188a01

Only one operator shall control the machine and the remote control box at the time.

Table 1-1: Safety Hazard Decals and Signs (Ref. Drawing R7243)

1.4.3.2 Description
Safety Hazard Decals and Signs are located throughout the drill in various locations. Figure 1-2 through Figure 1-16 illustrate the location of safety decals and signs on the drill. An index of the figures are shown in the bulleted list below. The callout numbers can be cross referenced to the item numbers in Table 1-1.

Mast and Drilling Deck, Figure 1-2 Mast Hoist Cylinder Boots, Figure 1-3 Machinery House Exterior Panels, Figure 1-4 Machinery Deck Layout (Overview), Figure 1-5 Operators Cab Door (Drill Deck), Figure 1-6 Oil Separator, Figure 1-7 Main Transformer (right side), Figure 1-8 Main Transformer (front view), Figure 1-9 Fan Room Door, Figure 1-10 Machinery House Door (front) (outside), Figure 1-11 Lube Room Door (outside), Figure 1-12 Power Skid (typical both sides), Figure 1-13 PLC Cabinet, Figure 1-14

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

-1.22-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Blasthole Drill Safety

Solenoid Junction Box, Figure 1-15 Machinery House Door (rear) (outside), Figure 1-16 Operators Cab Door (front) (outside), Figure 1-17 Machinery Deck Layout (electrical cabinets), Figure 1-18 Auxiliary Cabinet, Figure 1-19 Hoist/Rotary Junction Box, Figure 1-20 DC Hoist Drive Cabinet, Figure 1-21 DC Rotary Drive Cabinet, Figure 1-22 High Voltage Junction Box, Figure 1-23 460V Load Center, Figure 1-24 120V Load Center, Figure 1-25 High Voltage Cabinet (side view), Figure 1-26 High Voltage Cabinet (front view), Figure 1-27 Operators Cab (Inside), Figure 1-28

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -1.23Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

Blasthole Drill Safety

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

30 a 33 23 (575VDC)

34

34 23 (575VDC) 24 52 23

52 24 34 34

34 e

LEGEND Inside of door/panel/cover a Inside or facing inside Outside or facing outside b Eye level Both sides

45
BD0328

d e
45 55
Figure 1-2: Mast and Drilling Deck

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

-1.24-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Blasthole Drill Safety

Figure 1-3: Mast Hoist Cylinder Boots

51 b

34

34

51 b

51 b

55 d

47 d 34 e

63

45

41 e

51 b 51 c 64 c

60 63

55

47 d

43

64 c

51 c

41 e

a b c

LEGEND Inside front door/panel/cover Inside or Facing Inside Outside or Facing Outside

d e

Eye Level Both Sides

Figure 1-4: Machinery House Exterior Panels

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -1.25Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

Blasthole Drill Safety

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

02 03 01 04 05

23 d 07 06

10

12 11 09

08

LEGEND 01. Operators Cab Door (Drill Deck), Figure 1-6 02. Oil Separator, Figure 1-7 03. Main Transformer (right side), Figure 1-8 04. Main Transformer (front view), Figure 1-9 05. Fan Room Door, Figure 1-10 06. Machinery House Door (front) (outside), Figure 1-11 FOR ALL FIGURES: Inside front door/panel/cover Inside or Facing Inside Outside or Facing Outside

07. 08. 09. 10. 11. 12.

Lube Room Door (outside), Figure 1-12 Power Skid (typical both sides), Figure 1-13 PLC Cabinet, Figure 1-14 Solenoid Junction Box, Figure 1-15 Machinery House Door (rear) (outside), Figure 1-16 Operators Cab Door (front) (outside), Figure 1-17

a b c

d e

Eye Level Both Sides

Figure 1-5: Machinery Deck Layout (Overview)

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

-1.26-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Blasthole Drill Safety

62 d

46 d

LEGEND a Inside front door/panel/cover b Inside or Facing Inside c Outside or Facing Outside

d Eye Level Both Sides e

Figure 1-6: Operators Cab Door (Drill Deck)

40

Figure 1-7: Oil Separator

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -1.27Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

Blasthole Drill Safety

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

50 a 21 23

Figure 1-8: Main Transformer (right side)

30 a 21 c

50 a 21

50 a 21

23

23 21

50 a

23

Figure 1-9: Main Transformer (front view)

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

-1.28-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Blasthole Drill Safety

58*

35

46 d

55

47

*on fan duct


Figure 1-10: Fan Room Door

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -1.29Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

Blasthole Drill Safety

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

46 d

Figure 1-11: Machinery House Door (front) (outside)

36 a

38

Figure 1-12: Lube Room Door (outside)

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

-1.30-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Blasthole Drill Safety

40

22

22

23

24

22

52

Figure 1-13: Power Skid (typical both sides)

57

a 30 21

23

32

A-A*

*A-A refers to the constant voltage transformer inside the PLC cabinet.
Figure 1-14: PLC Cabinet

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -1.31Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

Blasthole Drill Safety

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

23

30 a

21

42*

*on back wall

Figure 1-15: Solenoid Junction Box

d 46

Figure 1-16: Machinery House Door (rear) (outside)

51 c

46 d

Figure 1-17: Operators Cab Door (front) (outside)

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

-1.32-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Blasthole Drill Safety

02 03 37 01 04

05

10

06

09

08

07

LEGEND 01. Auxiliary Cabinet, Figure 1-19 02. Hoist/Rotary Junction Box, Figure 1-20 03. DC Hoist Drive Cabinet, Figure 1-21 04. DC Rotary Drive Cabinet, Figure 1-22 05. High Voltage Junction Box, Figure 1-23 FOR ALL FIGURES: Inside front door/panel/cover Inside or Facing Inside Outside or Facing Outside

06. 07. 08. 09. 10.

460V Load Center, Figure 1-24 120V Load Center, Figure 1-25 High Voltage Cabinet (side view), Figure 1-26 High Voltage Cabinet (front view), Figure 1-27 Operators Cab (Inside), Figure 1-28

a b c

d e

Eye Level Both Sides

Figure 1-18: Machinery Deck Layout (electrical cabinets)

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -1.33Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

Blasthole Drill Safety

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

* In

31

31

23 21 30 a

23 21 30 a

* On Back Wall
50*
Figure 1-19: Auxiliary Cabinet

23 30 a 33
Figure 1-20: Hoist/Rotary Junction Box

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

-1.34-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Blasthole Drill Safety

23

30 a

31

21

Figure 1-21: DC Hoist Drive Cabinet

23

30 a

31

21

Figure 1-22: DC Rotary Drive Cabinet

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -1.35Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

Blasthole Drill Safety

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

33 50 a 23

48

BD0986a01

Figure 1-23: High Voltage Junction Box

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

-1.36-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Blasthole Drill Safety

23

Figure 1-24: 460V Load Center

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -1.37Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

Blasthole Drill Safety

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

23

Figure 1-25: 120V Load Center

20

Figure 1-26: High Voltage Cabinet (side view)

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

-1.38-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Blasthole Drill Safety

23 54 a

54

Figure 1-27: High Voltage Cabinet (front view)

62

39

43

66

44

Figure 1-28: Operators Cab (Inside)

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -1.39Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

Blasthole Drill Safety

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 1, Version 00 - 03/06

-1.40-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec01Safety.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Introduction

Section 2

Introduction

Figure 2-1: P&H Model 120A Rotary Blasthole Drill

2.1 General
This manual provides the information required to repair and maintain the P&H Mining Equipment Model 120A Rotary Blasthole Drill.

2.1.1 Part Numbers


Repair parts information is provided in the LinkOne electronic parts manual that is prepared for your drill. The drill serial number is located inside the operator's cab. Part numbers are sometimes shown in this manual to identify specific assemblies and the information and procedures that apply to that specific assembly. Since this book is not updated on a continuous basis, do not use these part numbers to order repair parts.

NOTICE
Always obtain the part numbers from the up-to-date LinkOne electronic parts manual.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec02Intro.fm

-2.1-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 2, Version 00 - 03/06

Introduction

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

2.1.2 Applicability
All information in this manual, including descriptions, specifications, and illustrations is for P&H model 120A Rotary Blasthole Drill, Serial Number BD120149, at the time of publication. Product improvements, owner modifications, or other changes introduced after this manual was published are not covered. 2.2 Questions concerning the drill or this manual should be referred to your P&H MinePro Services representative.

2.3 Description
2.3.1 General
The rotary blasthole drill is designed to drill blast holes. These holes are then filled with explosives, which fracture the material for most efficient removal. The drill can be equipped for single-pass drilling or multiple-pass drilling by coupling additional lengths of drill pipe to form a drill string. This drill only drills vertical holes. All drill motions use electric motors with the exception of the propel motion, which uses hydraulic power. Power for the drill is provided by a double-shafted electric motor, coupled on one end to the air compressor and on the other end to the hydraulic pump drive transmission (PDT).

2.3.2 Drill Description


The Model 120A rotary blasthole drill (hereafter, the drill) produces pulldown bit load up to 150,000 lbs and has been optimized to drill single-pass or multi-pass holes up to 22" (55.88 cm) in diameter (see Figure 2-2). The total machine weight is approximately 365,000 lbs (165,564 kg). The standard pipe rack provides storage for one 65foot (19.8-meter) pipe with 2-inch (50 mm) pipe wall thickness and up to 10.75 inches (273 mm) diameter. A second pipe rack is available as an option. Refer to Figure 2-3 for the drill deck plan.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 2, Version 00 - 03/06

-2.2-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec02Intro.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Introduction

01

02

03 04 05

10 09 06 07 08
BD00356b01

LEGEND 01. Mast 02. Rotary Carriage 03. Back Braces 04. Vent 05. Cable Reel

06. 07. 08. 09. 10.

Machinery House Crawler Assembly Operators Cab Drilling Deck Left Rear Levelling Jack

Figure 2-2: Model 120A Rotary Blast Hole Drill

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec02Intro.fm

-2.3-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 2, Version 00 - 03/06

Introduction

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

14

15

16

17

18

19 20 21 13 12 11 24 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 25 26
LEGEND 01. Valve Bank 3 02. Valve Bank 2 03. Valve Bank 1 04. Auxiliary Cabinet 05. Water Tank 06. PLC Cabinet 07.T-Tank 08. DC Hoist Cabinet 09. DC Rotary Cabinet 10. High Voltage Cabinet 11. Main Transformer 12. Control Load Center 13. Auxiliaries Load Center 14. Compressor Oil Cooler 15. Hydraulic Tank 16. Hydraulic Oil Cooler 17. Grease Reservoir 18. Lube Control Panel 19. Valve Bank 4 20 Valve Bank 5 21. Low Pressure/Head Brake Pumps 22. Propel Pumps 23. Auxiliary Hydraulic Pump 24. Main Motor 25. Main Air Control Panel 26. Compressor 27. Mast Cylinder (2) 28. Operators Cab

22 23

27

28

BD0378f01
Figure 2-3: Model 120A Deck Plan

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 2, Version 00 - 03/06

-2.4-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec02Intro.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Introduction

2.3.3 Power Unit R10433F1

Figure 2-4: Main Drive Motor

The Model 120A is powered by the 700HP main AC electric motor, which is configured for the voltage and frequency available at the mine site. The electrical system remains operational even when the mine voltage fluctuates up to plus 10% or minus 15% from nominal. The hydraulic pump drive transmission (PDT) and the main air compressor are both driven by the main AC motor rotating at 1,800 RPM (at 60 Hz; at 50 Hz, the motor rotation is 1500 RPM). The motor is designed to function well within the voltage fluctuation level specified.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec02Intro.fm

-2.5-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 2, Version 00 - 03/06

Introduction

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

2.3.4 Main Air Compressor 51U165D4

Figure 2-5: Main Air Compressor

The main air compressor is a rotary screw type which provides a rated output of 3,600 scfm. It is coupled to the main electric motor by means of a flexible coupling to ensure smooth operation. The main motor, air compressor and PDT are mounted on a skid to isolate the assembly from mainframe distortion that may occur while leveling or propelling the drill.

2.3.5 Undercarriage and Propel 100J6626F4

Figure 2-6: Undercarriage and Propel

The two crawler frames are attached to the underside of the main frame by a fixed rear axle and an oscillating front axle. This arrangement tends to increase stability and also to isolate the main frame from excessive loading when propelling over rough terrain. The heavy duty crawler units are rated for a drill weight of over 200 tons. The crawler shoes are of lug-and-tumbler design. There are 58 crawler shoes per crawler, approximately one-third of which are cleated, and two-thirds uncleated. The two crawlers are independently driven by drive tumblers with

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 2, Version 00 - 03/06

-2.6-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec02Intro.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Introduction

planetary transmissions directly bolted to the crawler frame. An individual plug-in hydrostatic motor powers each planetary transmission. The transmissions are nested within the drive tumbler for protection from travel damage in rough areas. Each planetary transmission has an integral spring-set, hydraulically released wet-type multiple disc parking brake. The propel motor can be manually disengaged from the transmissions to allow towing the drill with the optional towing package installed. The crawlers can be counter-rotated to provide maximum maneuverability for tight turns and rapid travel from point to point.

2.3.6 Rotary Carriage R54410F4

Figure 2-7: Rotary Carriage

Two electric drive motors drive the rotary driveshaft through the rotary gearcase (see Figure 2-8). The rotary drive shaft protrudes from the bottom of the rotary gearcase for connection to the drill string. The rotary motor output shaft fits into the rotary gearcase first reduction pinion shaft, which is supported by bearings on both the top and the bottom. An oil pump on the bottom of the first reduction shaft provides lubrication for the upper bearings in the gearcase. A rotary air swivel ensures sealed air flow through the rotary drive shaft. The rotary air seal also prevents water from entering the rotary gearcase oil when the drill is configured with water injection for dust suppression.

2.3.7 Pulldown Mechanism 916J204F1


Pulldown is accomplished by means of a rack and pinion drive (see Figure 2-8). The rack is mounted vertically on the mast and the drive pinion on the rotary carriage shipper shaft.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec02Intro.fm

-2.7-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 2, Version 00 - 03/06

Introduction

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

02

03

04

05

06

01

07

10

09
06. 07. 08. 09. 10.

08
BD0574a01

LEGEND 01. Pulldown Gearcase 02. Pulldown Brake 03. Shipper Shaft 04. Pulldown Motor 05. Pulldown Motor Blower

Drive Pinion Guide Roller Idler Rotary Drive Motor Rotary Gearcase

Figure 2-8: Rotary and Pulldown Mechanisms

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 2, Version 00 - 03/06

-2.8-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec02Intro.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Introduction

The rotary carriage guide rollers are provided with an eccentric arrangement for adjustment of rack/pinion gear backlash and alignment with the mast. An electric DC motor drives the hoist/pulldown pinions through the pulldown transmission.

2.3.8 Drill Pipe Storage


Drill pipe can be stored in the parallelogram-style pipe rack. The drill features two pipe racks. The main rack is 11.3 meters in length, while the additional rack is 8.4 meters. The racks are hydraulically controlled to move inward or outward. A mechanical mechanism is used to lock the drill pipe into place while stored.

2.3.9 Mast and Back Braces R14102F6


The mast chords utilize structural steel members. The mast safety sling ensures retention of a falling drill pipe without structural damage to the mast. The mast is raised and lowered by two hydraulic cylinders and is locked in the vertical position by two hydraulically actuated mast lock pins located below the drilling deck. The position of these pins is monitored by the Programmable Logic Controller (PLC). The back braces fold and unfold automatically when the mast is raised and lowered. Two back brace locking collars slide over the folding knee joints between the upper and lower back braces to keep the back braces rigid, locking the mast in the vertical drilling position.

2.3.10 Winch 23U52D1


A hydraulic motor driven winch is mounted on the machinery deck, between the mast hoist cylinders and generally below Valve Bank 2. The winch is used to handle tools and lift loads on the drilling platform. It features a one-way clutch, so that the winch will hold a load, yet will automatically release when the load is hoisted. The winch has a 11,000 lb. (5443 kg) lifting capacity. Winch wire rope feeds through guide sheaves mounted on a support bar on the mast crown. Either of two remote pendant controls (one outside the operators cab, the other inside) can be used to operate the winch.

2.3.11 Deck Wrenches GH5007463


The drill is equipped with opposing hydraulic ram type deck wrenches which are used to hold the drill string and prevent counter-rotation while adding or removing items from the drill string.

2.3.12 Operators Controls


The controls are arranged in functional groupings with frequently used controls located more closely to the operator. Refer to the Operators Manual for details. A Graphical User Interface (GUI) provides continuous information for the operator.

2.3.13 Hydraulic Systems


The hydraulic systems are electric-over-hydraulic.

2.3.13.1 Main Hydraulic System R57531


Two identical axial piston pumps with crossover-center variable displacement provide speed and direction control for the hydraulic motors that drive the propel motion. These two hydraulic circuits are closed-loop.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec02Intro.fm

-2.9-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 2, Version 00 - 03/06

Introduction

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

2.3.13.2 Auxiliary Hydraulic System R57351


The double vane auxiliary pump controls the many auxiliary cylinders, e.g., jacks, mast raise, deck wrenches, mast locks, deck hatch, back brace locks, etc.

2.3.14 Automatic Lubrication System 944J461F5


The automatic lubrication system is powered by a hydraulically driven pump controlled by the PLC. The system delivers lubricant from an on-board tank to injectors, which measure and deliver lubricant to selected points around the drill at regular intervals. The operator can manually initiate a lubrication cycle from the GUI when required.

2.3.15 Bailing Air System R45797


The purpose of the bailing air system is to blow drill cuttings out of the drill hole and to cool the rock bit bearings. The compressor output is adjustable to allow for optimum bailing air velocity. Compressor inlet valves control the air draw into the rotary screws. These valves are hydraulically closed during start-up. During operation, the inlet valves modulate air intake by means of pneumatic controls.

2.3.16 Towing System


The drill can be towed. The final drive is designed to allow the propel brakes to be released and the propel motors to be disengaged from the transmission while towing the drill. Refer to for details.

2.3.17 Hydraulically Operated Dust Curtains R6349F1-F2


Dust curtains surround the area beneath the drilling platform to contain the dust and chips created by drilling. The optional hydraulically operated rear dust curtains are operated from the operators cab. Along the sides of the drill, the curtains are fixed.

2.3.18 Serial Number Location


The drill serial number is located inside the operators cab.

2.4 Sign Maintenance


Signs of various types are located wherever required on the drill to warn personnel of potential hazards, identify controls and components, and to provide useful information. Because these signs aid in the safe and efficient operation of the drill, inspection of all signs must be a part of the inspection program. If signs are dirty, missing, or illegible, clean or replace them.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 2, Version 00 - 03/06

-2.10-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec02Intro.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Introduction

2.5 Reader Comment Form


Self addressed comment forms have been included at the rear of this manual. Please use them to communicate questions, suggestions, or comments regarding this manual.

2.6 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)


In order to transfer MSDS information from our suppliers to our customers, P&H Mining Equipment will provide this service upon customer request. All customer requests must be specific because of the volume and complexity of the MSDS system. To identify the appropriate MSDS, one of the following must be included: P&H part number, vendor trade name, or vendor name. Address inquiries concerning MSDS to your P&H MinePro Services representative.

2.7 Warranty
The terms of warranty for your drill are defined in the warranty document which accompanies each drill, including any special vendor operating or maintenance instructions. The warranty does not cover any damage caused by failure to follow operating instructions, abuse (including operation of the drill in excess of rated capacity), improper maintenance, accident, or unauthorized modification of the equipment. The warranty will be voided (in whole or part) if the drill is operated under any of the following conditions: 1. With hydraulic pressure in excess of the maximum allowable pressure limits. The maximum allowable pressures are provided in the Maintenance Manual. 2. Under unsafe operating conditions. 3. With accessories not designed, furnished, or approved by P&H Mining Equipment. 4. With modifications which affect the operation or capacity of the blasthole drill.

2.8 Drill Terminology


Certain commonly used drill terms are defined below. AIR SYSTEM (BIT OR MAIN). The sole function of the main air system is to supply a large volume of compressed air to the drill bit for cooling and to blow drill cuttings out of the drill hole. AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC SYSTEM. The auxiliary hydraulic system supplies pressure and controls to operate most of the open loop hydraulically operated equipment, including the leveling jacks, pipe racks, breakout wrench, deck hatch, mast hoist cylinders, anchor pin cylinders, deck wrench cylinders, winch, back brace locks, and the optional hydraulically operated dust curtain.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec02Intro.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -2.11Section 2, Version 00 - 03/06

Introduction

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

AUTOMATIC GREASE LUBRICATION SYSTEM. Hydraulic oil is supplied from the auxiliary hydraulic system to operate a hydraulic oil powered grease pump. The grease pump supplies all of the automatic grease lubrication points on the drill. BACK BRACES. The back braces are jointed tubular steel supports which support the mast in the drilling position. BACK BRACE LOCKING COLLARS. The locking collars slide over the back brace knee joints to prevent the back braces from folding when the mast is in the raised position. BREAKOUT WRENCH (Optional). The breakout wrench is mounted on the lower portion of the mast. It is a hydraulically operated pipe wrench controlled from the operators cab and used to loosen pipe joints. CABLE REEL (Optional). The function of the cable reel is to wind in or spool out the stored high-voltage trail cable when propelling the drill. COLLARING. Collaring is the procedure used to pilot a new drill hole. The pilot hole helps to center the drill string and minimizes material break-out and fall-in. CRAWLER TRACK. The crawler track is an assembly of crawler shoes and pins which provides a continuous path on which the drill is propelled. DECK WRENCHES. Deck wrenches are mounted on the deck on opposite sides of the deck bushing. They consist of a pair of opposed hydraulic rams that extend to grip and support drill pipe while adding or removing drill bits, stabilizers, or an additional section of drill pipe. DRILL BIT. The drill bit is a rotated tool used to penetrate rock formations. It is driven by drill pipe(s) in the drill string via the rotary carriage. DRILL PIPE. Drill pipe is a section of steel pipe, threaded male on one end and female on the other, on which the drill bit, stabilizer, or another drill pipe is mounted. DRILL STRING. The drill pipe, stabilizer, drill bit, and other components comprise the drill string. DRY DUST CONTROL SYSTEM (Optional). This system is designed to vacuum dust and small debris from inside the dust curtain area into a hopper which is dumped away from the drilling area. DUST CURTAIN. A standard fixed dust curtain encloses the area around the drill string immediately below the drilling platform. It restricts the travel of flying rock chips and dust which result from drilling. Available as an option, a hydraulic cylinder can raise a portion of the dust curtain to prevent it from pushing cuttings into the blasthole when relocating the drill. FRONT/REAR. The front of the drill is the end opposite the operators cab. The rear of the drill is the operators cab end. HOIST/PULLDOWN SYSTEM. An electric motor which powers a rack and pinion drive through the hoist/pulldown transmission. It provides continuous drill bit loading when drilling and lifts the drill string from the hole when done. HOIST BRAKE. The dual-disc, spring-set, hydraulic-released hoist brake is mounted on the pulldown gearcase intermediate shaft. It is used to stop and hold vertical movement of the rotary carriage. JACK PADS. Jack pads are metal plates attached to the lower end of the leveling jack spud. The jack pads provide a large surface area on which the leveling jack can bear.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 2, Version 00 - 03/06

-2.12-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec02Intro.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Introduction

LEVELING SYSTEM. Four leveling jacks are located at the four corners of the main frame. They are controlled from the operators cab or the optional remote propel controller. The two rear jacks (closest to the operators cab) are independently adjustable. The two front jacks are connected in parallel and operate as a self-equalizing pair. The optional auto-leveling system, when activated, automatically raises the drill to the lowest possible level operating plane. MACHINERY HOUSE. The machinery house is the enclosed room in which the power unit, electrical cabinets, and the majority of the hydraulic system and air system components are located. The machinery house is pressurized and filtered (standard) and can be heated by thermostatically controlled fans (optional). MAIN HYDRAULIC SYSTEM. The main hydraulic system propels the drill. It primarily consists of two closed-loop hydrostatic pumping systems with hydraulic motors, valves, filters, strainers, and propel motion controls. The system also provides pressure to release the propel parking brakes and to control propel motor speed/torque setting. MAST. The mast is a welded structural steel assembly that supports and guides the rotary carriage. The pipe racks, winch, and breakout wrench are also secured to and supported by the mast. The mast is raised or lowered by two hydraulic cylinders. MAST ANCHOR PINS. The mast anchor pins are hydraulic cylinder-operated locking pins used to secure the mast in the vertical position. They are located on the frame beneath the drilling deck. MAST CROWN. The mast crown is located at the top of the mast. It ties the mast legs together and supports the winch sheaves. MAST RAISING CYLINDERS. These two cylinders are deck mounted and are used to raise and lower the mast. MAST PIVOT PINS. The mast pivot pins are the pins about which the mast rotates when it is being raised or lowered. OPERATORS CAB. The operators cab contains the operating controls, indicators, gauges and the Graphic User Interface (GUI). All drill operations are controlled from the operators cab. PIPE RACK. The pipe rack is a mechanism located within the mast which can store a 65 ft. (19.8 m) length of drill pipe. PIPE SLING. The pipe sling is a permanent frame mounted part way up the mast to restrain pipe sections from falling if one should become uncoupled from the rotary carriage or pipe rack. POWER SUPPLY CABLE (TRAIL CABLE). The trail cable is the power conductor located between the front of the drill and the power sub-station. All electrical energy is supplied to the drill via this cable. POWER UNIT. The hydraulic pump drive transmission (PDT) and the main air compressor are mounted on opposite ends of the main AC electric motor, on a common sub-base. The motor provides the power to drive all of the drill functions. For purposes of this manual, the power unit is defined as the AC motor and the PDT. The air compressor is not considered to be part of the power unit. PROPEL BRAKES. Each crawler drive has a spring-set, hydraulically released parking brake that automatically releases when pressure is applied to the hydraulic propel motor. The brakes are integral with the propel transmissions. PROPEL SYSTEM. The drill is mounted on and propelled by individually powered and controlled crawlers. The rear axle is stationary and is bolted rigidly to the main frame. A floating equalizer axle at the front enables the crawl-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec02Intro.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -2.13Section 2, Version 00 - 03/06

Introduction

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

ers to maintain footing over rough terrain. Steering is accomplished by individual control of the speed and direction of travel of the left and right crawlers. PROPEL DIRECTION. The drill is propelled forward when the drilling platform and operators cab trail the drill in the direction of travel. The drill is propelled to the rear when the drilling platform and operators cab lead in the direction of travel. PULLDOWN. Pulldown is the downward force applied to the rotary bit by the hoist/pulldown motor while drilling. PUMP DRIVE TRANSMISSION (PDT). All of the pumps that power the main and auxiliary hydraulic systems, except the hoist brake pump and the low pressure pump, are mounted on and driven by the PDT. The PDT is a gear reducer having multiple output shafts, all driven from a common input shaft. Each hydraulic pump is flange mounted and direct coupled to a PDT output drive shaft. The PDT is coupled to the main AC drive motor as one of the components of the POWER UNIT. ROTARY CARRIAGE. The rotary carriage provides rotary and vertical motion to the drill string. Reversible DC motors drive the rotary gear reducer to impart bi-directional rotary motion to the drill string. A DC pulldown motor provides vertical motion to lift or lower the drill string. SINGLE-PASS DRILLING. Single-pass drilling is the process of drilling a blasthole to a depth no greater than the distance the rotary carriage can travel from top to bottom of the mast, using a single length of drill string. The drill string does not have to be removed from the drill while traveling to the next drill hole location. WATER INJECTION SYSTEM (Optional). The water injection system supplies an adjustable flow of water into the bailing air stream to control dust created by drilling. WINCH. A winch is provided for tool handling on the drilling platform. The winch is mounted inside the machinery house beneath the A Frame; wire rope feeds upward, passes over two guide sheaves mounted on the mast crown and back down to the drilling platform. The winch has a built-in clutch designed so that when hydraulic power is removed, the clutch will engage and the load will stop. When hydraulic power is applied, the clutch releases, allowing the drum to rotate in a controlled manner.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 2, Version 00 - 03/06

-2.14-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec02Intro.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

Section 3

Auxiliary Hydraulic System


3.1 General
This section describes the auxiliary hydraulic system and provides information for adjustment, removal, and installation of the major hydraulic components. Only the hydraulic portions of the various subsystems are described in this section. The mechanical components that take their movement from the auxiliary hydraulic system will be discussed in the mechanical sections that pertain to them. For example, the hydraulic circuit that moves the mast anchor pins is discussed here; discussion of the mast anchor pins themselves is in the mast section.

3.2 Theory of Operation


The auxiliary hydraulic system provides controlled hydraulic pressure and flow to the following assemblies:

Back brace locks Dust curtain .Deck wrench .Mast anchor pins Mast hoist cylinders Pipe racks Pipe rack gates Pipe rack holdbacks Deck Hatch Breakout Wrench Levelling jacks Auxiliary winch
All directional valves on the three valve banks in this system are operated by electrical solenoids, which receive operating signals from a programmable logic controller (PLC) located in a dedicated cabinet inside the machinery house. See Figure 2-3.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

-3.1-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Numbers in the circles refer to the Bill of Material (Subtopic 3.2.6). Numbers in the triangles refer to the System Data Sheet (Table 3-1). Figure 3-1: .Auxiliary Hydraulic Schematic, R57351

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.2-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

R57349-1

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

3.2.1 Hydraulic Tank R6908D1


07 06 05 02 03 04

01

08 09 10

11
LEGEND 01. Suction Filters 02. Temperature Probe 03. Hydraulic Tank 04. Low Level Switch 05. 06. 07. 08. Breather Return Filters OIl Level Gauge Placard Oil Level Sight Glass

BD0361a01

Figure 3-2: Hydraulic Tank

The auxiliary tank, located in the lubrication room on the forward right portion of the machinery deck, provides oil for all hydraulic functions on the drill, including both the main hydraulic system and the auxiliary hydraulic system. The hydraulic tank is partitioned by a baffle to separate the suction lines from the return lines. The baffle plate is ported to permit cross-flow of oil from the return side to the suction side of the tank. Refer to Subtopic 3.3.2 for maintenance information regarding the hydraulic tank.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

-3.3-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

3.2.1.1 Suction Filters R16280D1

Figure 3-3: Handwell Valves and Suction Filters

The pump suction filters are located at the rearward end of the hydraulic oil tank.They feature a Handwell Valve which serves as a shut-off valve for the suction line of the auxiliary hydraulic pump. To shot off the oil flow, turn the knob anticlockwise until it stops. The Handwell Valve includes a limit switch to prevent the start-up of the drill when the valve is closed. The suction filter is equipped with a vacuum by-pass valve that permits oil to flow around the filter element if the element becomes excessively fouled. The indicator switch is not a visual switch. When the filter goes into bypass, the switch will inform the PLC, which will issue a fault on the GUI. Refer to Subtopic 3.3.3 for maintenance information regarding the suction filters.

3.2.1.2 Temperature Probe 89Z724D2

Figure 3-4: Hydraulic Tank Temperature Probe

The temperature probe is a resistive temperature device (RTD) that detects the temperature of the hydraulic oil in the tank and transmits that information to the PLC. It is installed on the rearward side of the hydraulic tank above

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.4-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

the Handwell valves. The temperature probe controls the operation of the oil cooler fans. When the oil temperature reaches 140F (60C), the fans turn on. Refer to Subtopic 3.3.4 for maintenance information regarding the temperature probe.

3.2.1.3 Low Level Switch R16982D1

Figure 3-5: Hydraulic Tank Oil Level Switch

The low level switch is located on the top of the hydraulic tank. The unit is a float type switch that detects when the oil level has reached the allowable minimum. Functionally, the switch provides input to the programmable logic controller (PLC). When a low hydraulic oil level condition is indicated, the PLC shuts down the main drive motor to the pump drive transmission and records a fault on the GUI. Refer to Subtopic 3.3.5 for maintenance information regarding the low level switch.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

-3.5-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

3.2.1.4 Hydraulic Tank Breather 1046Z994

Figure 3-6: Hydraulic Tank Breather

The hydraulic tank breather is mounted at the top of the tank. The breather is fitted with a synthetic 3-micron filtration medium to filter out contaminants when the oil cools and air is drawn through the breather into the tank. The breather should be replaced during each Preventive Maintenance period.

3.2.1.5 Magnetic Rod R17038D1

Figure 3-7: Magnetic Rod

A magnetic rod is installed into the top of the tank. The rod extends into the tank and attracts metal contaminants, holding them in suspension and preventing them from entering more sensitive hydraulic components. The magnetic rod should be cleaned at each Preventive Maintenance period.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.6-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

3.2.1.6 Return Filters 46Z529

BD0781b01

Figure 3-8: Hydraulic Return Filters

The two return line filters for the hydraulic systems are flange-mounted on top of the hydraulic tank. The two filters are identical, and can be serviced without removal from the tank. The filters are rated at 80 gpm (303 lpm) and contain two 3-micron filter elements, mounted in tandem. Return oil flows through the center of the element and exits the outside to tank. The filter is equipped with a bypass valve that begins to bypass unfiltered oil at 25 psi (1.7 bar). A dirt alarm gauge is mounted to the body of each filter to indicate the operating condition of the filter elements. The gauge faces are marked with red and green areas. Red indicates the need to replace the filter elements.There is also a bypass indicator that informs the operator via the GUI that the filters are in a bypass condition. Refer to Subtopic 3.3.8 for maintenance information regarding the return filters.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

-3.7-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

3.2.1.7 Level and Temperature Gauge R16998D1

JACKS RETRACTED MAST DOWN

- 250 GALLONS - (946 LITERS) -

MAX OIL LEVEL ** DO NOT OVERFILL **

JACKS EXTENDED MAST VERTICAL

- 215 GALLONS - (814 LITERS) -

HYDRAULIC TANK FILL REQUIREMENTS 6.25 GALLONS PER INCH MAXIMUM OF 250 GALLONS (946 LITERS)

LOW LEVEL FAULT

- 130 GALLONS - (492 LITERS) -

| | | | | | | | | | | |

| | | | | | | | |

| | | | | | | |

BD0560a01

Figure 3-9: Level and Temperature Gauge

The level gauge is a sight glass used in conjunction with the associated placard to determine the appropriate level based on the condition of the drill (i.e., mast up or down, jacks up or down, etc.). At the lower end of the sight glass is a thermometer that indicates oil temperature.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.8-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

3.2.1.8 Filter Panel R34567F2

Figure 3-10: Filter Panel

An additional oil reservoir and filter panel is mounted to the right of the PDT. This additional oil reservoir contains 80 gallons (303 liters) that can be used to replenish the oil in the air compressor as well as in the hydraulic tank.Three-micron filters provide additional filtration before the oil is returned to the reservoir.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

-3.9-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

3.2.2 Auxiliary Hydraulic Pump 37U153D1


LEGEND 01. Main Pumps 02. PDT 03. Auxiliary Pump

01

Figure 3-11: Auxiliary Pump Location

Hydraulic flow for the auxiliary hydraulic system is produced by a vane-type, double hydraulic pump. This pump is driven by a mechanical pump drive transmission (PDT). The PDT is driven by the main AC electric drive motor.

Figure 3-12: Auxiliary Hydraulic Pump

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.10-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

Oil for the auxiliary hydraulic pump comes from the hydraulic tank, through a suction filter and a Handwell valve. The pump delivers 20 gpm (76 lpm) from the lower-volume cover-end pump, and 37 gpm (140 lpm) from the higher-volume shaft-end pump. The pump shaft is driven at 2070 rpm via the gear ratio of the PDT. The output flow from the lower-volume pump section is directed into the pressure inlet port of valve bank 1 and valve bank 2. The output flow from the higher-volume pump section is directed into the pressure inlet port of valve bank 3. When the Auto Level System is operating, or when the operator manually operates all four of the leveling jacks simultaneously, the oil supply to the pressure inlet port of valve bank 3 comes from two sources. The first source is the full output from the low pressure/higher volume pump section. The second supply source is an interruptible flow of high pressure oil from the B 1 port of valve bank 1. In addition to valve banks 1 and 2, the lower-volume section of the pump also supplies flow to the hydraulic pipe rack gate. Oil discharged from the three valve banks combines with the pump and motor drain lines from the main hydraulic system. This combined stream of hot oil flows through an air-blown heat exchanger for cooling, then returns to the tank by way of a pair of low pressure filters. The oil cooler has a built-in check valve to allow for bypass of oil in the event the cooler core oil flow were to be restricted.

3.2.2.1 Theory of Operation


Fluid enters the pumping cartridge through the inlet port and is discharged through pressure plates to the outlet ports. The action of the pumping cartridge is illustrated in Figure 3-13 The rotor is driven within the cam ring by the driveshaft, which is splined to the pump drive transmission. As the rotor turns, centrifugal force on the vanes, aided by under-vane pressure fed from the outlet port, causes the vanes to follow the elliptical inner surface of the cam ring.
LEGEND 01. Rotor 02. Outlet 03. Vane 04. Cam Ring 05. Inlet 06. Rotation 07. Outlet 08. Inlet 09. Drive Shaft 10. Outlet 11. Rotation 12. Inlet

05 04 06 03

10 11

02 07 01 09 08
Figure 3-13: Pump Cartridge Operation

12

BD0374a01

Radial movement of the vanes and turning of the rotor cause the chamber volume between the vanes to increase as the vanes pass the inlet section of the cam ring. This results in a low pressure condition which allows atmo-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.11Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

spheric pressure to force fluid into the chambers. This fluid is trapped between the vanes and carried past a sealing land to the outlet section of the cam ring. As the outlet section is approached, the chamber volume decreases and the fluid is forced out into the system. The intra-vane design provides a means of controlling the outward thrust of the vane against the cam ring to maintain the tip loads within reasonable limits. In the intra-vane cartridge, full system pressure is continuously applied for outward vane thrust only over the area between the vane and the insert. This area is small, and thrust is correspondingly light. During vane travel through the pressure areas, full system pressure is also applied against the bottom of the vane. The valving of pressure to and from the bottom area of the vane is through holes drilled in the rotor, as shown in Figure 3-14. This selective application of pressure maintains the vane in constant radial hydraulic balance in all positions.

01

01

03
LEGEND 01. Pressure to Intra-Vane 02. Pressure to Bottom of Vane 03. Vane 04. Rotor 05. Direction of Rotation 06. Ring 07. Sharper edges lead direction of rotation

04

05 02 02 06 07
BD0375a01

Figure 3-14: Pressure Feed to the Vanes

The cam ring is shaped so that the two pumping chambers are formed 180 degrees apart (refer to Figure 3-13). Thus, opposing hydraulic forces, which would impose side loads on the driveshaft, cancel each other out.The pressure plate seals the pump chamber, as shown in Figure 3-15. System pressure is effective against the area at the back of the plate, which is larger than the area exposed to the pumping cartridge. Thus, an unbalanced force holds the plate against the cartridge, sealing the cartridge, and providing the correct running clearance for the rotor and vanes. The pressure plate also contains passages for feeding pressure to the space between the vanes and inserts.

01

02

03

04

05 06 07 08 09

LEGEND 01. Pressure Plate 02. Cover 03. Pressure Feed under vanes 04. Vane 05. Rotor 06. Shaft 07. Wear Plate

BD0377a01

Figure 3-15: Pressure Plate Operation

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.12-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

3.2.3 Valve Bank 1 36R198D3

Figure 3-16: Valve Bank 1

Valve Bank 1 is mounted between the two mast hoist cylinders inside the machinery house (see Figure 2-3). Seven hydraulic circuits are controlled by the valve assemblies mounted on valve bank 1: the relief unload/oil diverter, mast hoist, mast anchor pins, deck wrench, dust curtain, back brace lock, and the cable reel. Refer to Figure 3-17.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.13Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Figure 3-17: Valve Bank 1(spares removed for clarity)

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.14-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

R57349-2

Numbers in the circles refer to the Bill of Material (Subtopic 3.2.6). Numbers in the triangles refer to the System Data Sheet (Table 3-1).

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

3.2.3.1 Relief/Unload Oil Diverter Valve

R57349-2b

Numbers in the circles refer to the Bill of Material (Subtopic 3.2.6). Numbers in the triangles refer to the System Data Sheet (Table 3-1). Figure 3-18: Relief/Unload/Oil Diverter Valve

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.15Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

One of the primary functions of valve bank 1 is to control the maximum hydraulic pressure available to the three valve banks, and to implement the timing of when high pressure is available for system operation. This function is managed by the relief unload/oil diverter valve. The relief/Unload Oil Diverter Valve is a three-position, four way valve. The valve is solenoid actuated with manual override in both directions. It is spring-centered, and the center is open. When in the spring-centered open position, this valve allows oil from the auxiliary pump to bypass the system pressure relief valve, flowing directly back to the tank without building pressure. This is an energy-saving provision for periods when the auxiliary hydraulic circuits are at rest. Whenever the operator initiates movement for any of the devices controlled by the valves on either Valve Bank 1 or on Valve Bank 2, the PLC causes the relief unload/oil diverter valve A solenoid to energize. This causes the valve to shift so that oil from the P port of the valve flows to the A port and to the blocked port A1. Oil flow backs up against the pressure relief valve and system pressure builds to the maximum setting of the relief valve (2900 psi (200 bar)). This establishes the maximum pressure available to the equipment using the high pressure flow stream.

WARNING

Do not exceed the maximum relief valve setting of 2900 psi. Pump and hoses have a maximum specified pressure of 3000 psi. Overpressurizing the system could result in equipment failure, which could result in severe personal injury or death. Do not exceed 2900 psi.
When the operator activates the Auto Level System, or when all four leveling jacks are manually operated simultaneously, the PLC causes the B solenoid to energize. Oil flow from the P port of the valve flows to the B port and through valve bank port B1, where the oil is diverted out of valve bank 1 and merges with the high volume flow stream to valve bank 3.

3.2.3.2 Pressure Transducer and Pressure Switches

LEGEND 01. Hydraulic Pressure Transducer 02. Hydraulic Pressure Switch 03. Relief Pressure Switch Figure 3-19: Pressure Transducer and Pressure Switches

Mounted to the right of valve bank 1 on the bulkhead below valve bank 2 are the pressure transducer and pressure switches that monitor pressures in the auxiliary hydraulic system. The pressure transducer (Item 01, Figure 3-19) senses pump discharge pressure and indicates system operating pressure to the PLC. The hydraulic pressure switch (Item 02, Figure 3-19) confirms that the auxiliary pump is oper-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.16-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

ating at pressure. The relief pressure switch (Item 03, Figure 3-19) senses when system pressure is excessive, and automatically shuts down the pump drive. Refer to Figure 3-19.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.17Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

3.2.3.3 Mast Hoist Valve

R57349-2c

Numbers in the circles refer to the Bill of Material (Subtopic 3.2.6). Numbers in the triangles refer to the System Data Sheet (Table 3-1). Figure 3-20: Mast Hoist Valve

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.18-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

The mast hoist valve assembly controls the direction and flow rate of oil to and from the large-bore mast-raising cylinders. It is a three-position, four way valve. The valve is solenoid actuated with manual override in both directions. It is spring-centered, and the center is open to tank. When in the spring-centered open position, this valve blocks pressure from the pump and opens all other ports to tank. Flow control valves in both the hoist and lower circuit control the speed of cylinder movement. Flow Control for the Extend (Raise) circuit is set for 20 GPM; this causes the mast cylinder to extend in 76.5 seconds. Flow Control for the Retract (Lower) circuit is set for 13 GPM; this causes the mast cylinder to retract in 79.2 seconds.

CAUTION
Counterbalance valve pressures are pre-set at the factory. Changing the settings can cause severe equipment damage. Do not adjust counterbalance valve pressure settings. If adjustments are necessary, contact your local P&H MinePro Services.
Each mast cylinder circuit is equipped with dual counterbalance valves to prevent uncontrolled movement in either the up or down direction should a malfunction disrupt oil flow. Counterbalance valve pressures are pre-set at the factory and are not to be adjusted. When the operator places the mast hoist button in the RAISE position, the PLC causes solenoid A to energize. The valve spool shifts so that oil from the P port of the valve flows to the A port of the valve and out the A2 port of the valve bank. Oil flows through the 20 GPM flow control valve and over the check valve portion of the directional flow control valve into the head end of the hydraulic cylinders. As pressure increases, the crossover ports on counterbalance valves cause the valve ports on the opposite line to open. Oil from the rod end of the cylinders is then able to flow through the counterbalance valves, over the directional flow control valve and back to tank. When the operator places the mast hoist button in the LOWER position, the PLC causes solenoid B to energize. The valve spool shifts so that oil from the P port of the valve flows to the B port of the valve and out the B2 port of the valve bank. Oil flows through the 13 GPM flow control valve and over the check valve portion of the directional flow control valve into the rod end of the hydraulic cylinders. As pressure increases, the crossover ports on counterbalance valves cause the valve ports on the opposite line to open. Oil from the head end of the cylinders is then able to flow through the counterbalance valves, over the directional flow control valve and back to tank. Refer to Figure 3-20.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.19Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

3.2.3.4 Mast Anchor Pins

R57349-2d

Numbers in the circles refer to the Bill of Material (Subtopic 3.2.6). Numbers in the triangles refer to the System Data Sheet (Table 3-1). Figure 3-21: Mast Anchor Pins

The mast anchor pin valve controls the direction of oil flow to two anchor pin cylinders. It is a three-position, four way valve. The valve is solenoid actuated with manual override in both directions. It is spring-centered, and the center is closed. When this valve is in its centered position, the closed lines tend to keep the pins in their current

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.20-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

position. A limit switch on the rod end sends a signal to the PLC when the pins are in the engaged position. Pins should extend in 1.8 seconds and retract in 1.0 second. Refer to Figure 3-21.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.21Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

3.2.3.5 Deck Wrench

R57349-2e

Numbers in the circles refer to the Bill of Material (Subtopic 3.2.6). Numbers in the triangles refer to the System Data Sheet (Table 3-1). Figure 3-22: Deck Wrench

The deck wrench valve assembly controls the direction and maximum operating pressure of oil flow to the two deck wrench cylinders.It is a three-position, four way valve. The valve is solenoid actuated with manual override in both

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.22-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

directions. It is spring-centered, and the center is partially open. When this valve is in its centered position, pressure from the pump is blocked and the remaining ports are open to the tank.

CAUTION
Dual counterbalance valve pressures are pre-set at the factory. Changing the settings can cause equipment damage. Do not adjust counterbalance valve pressure settings. If adjustment becomes necessary, contact your local P&H MinePro Services.
A dual counterbalance valve is used in the cylinder circuit to prevent the wrenches from extending into the drill string when the control valve is in the spring-centered neutral position. It also provides a means to help hold the drill pipe when the pipe is uncoupled from the rotary carriage (the cylinder pressure is maintained by the counterbalance valve). Refer to Figure 3-22.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.23Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

3.2.3.6 Dust Curtain Valve

R57349-2f

Numbers in the circles refer to the Bill of Material (Subtopic 3.2.6). Numbers in the triangles refer to the System Data Sheet (Table 3-1). Figure 3-23: Dust Curtain Valve

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.24-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

The dust curtain valve assembly controls the oil flow direction, rate of flow, and maximum operating pressure available for operation of the dust curtain raising and lowering cylinder. It is a three-position, four way valve. The valve is solenoid actuated with manual override in both directions. It is spring-centered, and the center is partially open. When this valve is in its centered position, pressure from the pump is blocked. The remaining ports are open to the tank. Cross port relief valves protect the dust curtain raising system from damage. Adjust the relief valve on the raise side of the circuit to 1000 psi and the lower side to 350 psi. The pilot operated check valves in both raising and lowering circuits provide positive position locking for the dust curtain cylinders. Adjust flow control valves to achieve a raising and lowering time between 4 and 5 seconds. Refer to Figure 3-23.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.25Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

3.2.3.7 Back Brace Lock

R57349-2g

Numbers in the circles refer to the Bill of Material (Subtopic 3.2.6). Numbers in the triangles refer to the System Data Sheet (Table 3-1). Figure 3-24: Back Brace Lock Valve

The back brace lock valve controls the direction of oil flow back brace lock cylinders. Each back brace has a lock that slides over the articulating joint; each lock is controlled by three cylinders.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.26-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

3.2.4 Valve Bank 2 36R199D7

Figure 3-25: Valve Bank 2

Valve Bank 2 is mounted between the two mast hoist cylinders inside the machinery house (see Figure 2-3). The hydraulic circuits that are controlled by the valve assemblies mounted on valve bank 2 are the two pipe racks, the deck hatch and the breakout wrench. The availability of high pressure oil to operate these circuits is dependent upon the position of the relief unload/oil diverter valve on valve bank 1, as described under Subtopic 3.2.3.1. Refer to Figure 3-26.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.27Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Numbers in the circles refer to the Bill of Material (Subtopic 3.2.6). Numbers in the triangles refer to the System Data Sheet (Table 3-1). Figure 3-26: Valve Bank 2 (spares removed for clarity)

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.28-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

3.2.4.1 Pipe Rack

R57349-3b

FROM PIPE RACK HOLDBACK VALVE

Numbers in the circles refer to the Bill of Material (Subtopic 3.2.6). Numbers in the triangles refer to the System Data Sheet (Table 3-1). Figure 3-27: Pipe Rack Valve

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.29Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

The pipe rack valve assembly controls the direction and flow rate of oil to and from the pipe rack cylinder. It is a three-position, four way valve. The valve is solenoid actuated with manual override in both directions. It is springcentered, and the center is partially open. When this valve is in its centered position, pressure from the pump is blocked; the remaining ports are open back to the tank. Flow control valves in both the extend (over hole) and retract (store) circuit control the speed of cylinder movement. Flow Control for the extend circuit is set for 12.5 GPM; Flow Control for the retract circuit is set for 15.5 GPM.

CAUTION
Counterbalance valve pressures are pre-set at the factory. Changing the settings can cause severe equipment damage. Do not adjust counterbalance valve pressure settings.
The pipe rack cylinder circuit is equipped with a dual counterbalance valve to prevent uncontrolled movement in either the centering or storing direction should a malfunction disrupt oil flow. Dual counterbalance valve pressures are pre-set at the factory and are not to be adjusted. When the operator places the pipe rack button in the OVER HOLE position, the PLC causes solenoid B to energize. The valve spool shifts so that oil from the P port of the valve flows to the B port of the valve and out of the valve bank. Oil flows through the 12.5 GPM flow control valve and over the check valve portion of the directional flow control valve into the head end of the hydraulic cylinder. As pressure increases, the crossover port on counterbalance valve causes the valve port on the opposite line to open. Oil from the rod end of the cylinders is then able to flow through the counterbalance valve, over the directional flow control valve and back to tank. When the operator places the pipe rack button in the STORE position, the PLC causes solenoid A to energize. The valve spool shifts so that oil from the P port of the valve flows to the A port of the valve and out the A1 or A2 port of the valve bank (depending on which rack is active). Oil flows through the 15.5 GPM flow control valve and over the check valve portion of the directional flow control valve into the rod end of the hydraulic cylinder. As pressure increases, the crossover port on counterbalance valve causes the valve port on the opposite line to open. Oil from the head end of the cylinders is then able to flow through the counterbalance valve, over the directional flow control valve and back to tank. When the pipe rack is in the stowed position, a limit switch will cause indication on the operators console. Refer to Figure 3-27.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.30-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

3.2.4.2 Pipe Rack Gate

R57349-3c

Numbers in the circles refer to the Bill of Material (Subtopic 3.2.6). Numbers in the triangles refer to the System Data Sheet (Table 3-1). Figure 3-28: Pipe Rack Gate

The pipe rack gate valve is a two-position, four way valve. The valve is solenoid actuated with manual override and

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.31Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

spring return. It is mounted on the bulkhead to the right of valve bank 2 and above valve bank 3.
LEGEND 01. Main Pipe Rack Gate Valve 02. Secondary Pipe Rack Gate Valve

Figure 3-29: Pipe Rack Gate Valve

Oil to operate the pipe rack gate is provided by the low-volume side of the auxiliary hydraulic pump. The line providing oil to the pipe rack gate valve connects to the line between Valve Bank 1 and Valve Bank 2. See Figure 3-1.

WARNING

When short pipes are used in the drill string, the shorter sections may not reach up to the point where the pipe rack gate will hold them in the rack. The short pipe could fall out and cause severe personal injury or death. Always be sure that the length of pipe in the pipe rack is sufficient to allow the pipe rack gate to hold the pipe in the rack.
The pipe rack gate is located at the top of the pipe rack. It consists of a curved rod, or gate arm, that rotates down and in front of the drill pipe when it is stored in the pipe rack, protecting the drill pipe from falling out of the pipe rack. When a loaded pipe rack is moved into the OVER HOLE position and the pipe is lifted from the rack by the rotary carriage machinery, the pipe rack gate arm rotates up and out of the way. This permits rack to return to the STORE position. When the pipe rack is back in the STORE position, the gate arm rotates back down. When the empty pipe rack moves out of the STORE position, the gate arm rotates up, allowing the rack to be placed in position to receive the pipe. When the pipe is placed into the pipe rack, the gate arm rotates back down and prevents the pipe from falling out. Refer to Figure 3-28.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.32-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

3.2.4.3 Pipe Rack Holdback

To Pipe Rack Valves

R57349-3d

Numbers in the circles refer to the Bill of Material (Subtopic 3.2.6). Numbers in the triangles refer to the System Data Sheet (Table 3-1). Figure 3-30: Pipe Rack Holdback Circuit

When the drill is started, the head brake motor and pump turn on. At the same time, the pipe rack holdback solenoid energized. Oil pressure is provided to the pipe rack circuit, and acts to maintain the pipe rack cylinder in the retracted position. This is to prevent the pipe rack from drifting into the drill string during normal drilling operations. When the operator energizes the pipe rack solenoid, the pipe rack holdback solenoid is de-energized and the pipe rack circuit can cause the pipe rack cylinder to extend or retract as required.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.33Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

3.2.4.4 Deck Hatch

R57349-3e

Numbers in the circles refer to the Bill of Material (Subtopic 3.2.6). Numbers in the triangles refer to the System Data Sheet (Table 3-1). Figure 3-31: Deck Hatch

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.34-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

The deck hatch valve assembly controls the oil flow direction, rate of flow, and maximum operating pressure available for operation of the deck hatch raising and lowering cylinder. It is a three-position, four way valve. The valve is solenoid actuated with manual override in both directions. It is spring-centered, and the center is partially open. When this valve is in its centered position, pressure from the pump is blocked; the remaining ports are open back to the tank. A pair of connected pilot-to-open check valves maintain the deck hatch in the desired position. Adjustable flow control valves determine raising and lowering speed for the deck hatch. Refer to Figure 3-31.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.35Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

3.2.4.5 Breakout Wrench Engage/Disengage

R57349-3f

Numbers in the circles refer to the Bill of Material (Subtopic 3.2.6). Numbers in the triangles refer to the System Data Sheet (Table 3-1). Figure 3-32: Breakout Wrench Engage / Disengage

The Breakout Wrench Engage/Disengage Valve is used after the breakout wrench has been moved out to the drill pipe. It is a three-position, four way valve. The valve is solenoid actuated with manual override in both directions. It is spring-centered, and the center is closed. When this valve is in its centered position, all ports are blocked.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.36-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

When the operator places the breakout wrench control button in the ENGAGE position, the PLC causes the A solenoid to energize and the valve spool shifts. Oil from the P port passes through the A port on the valve, out the A7 port on the valve bank and to the head end of the jaw cylinder. When the jaw cylinder extends, the jaws of the breakout wrench close around the pipe. Oil from the rod end of the cylinder returns unrestricted to the valve (port B to port T) and back to tank. Once the jaws are in contact with the pipe and cannot move anymore, hydraulic pressure builds. When hydraulic pressure reaches the setting of the sequencing valve (2400 psi), the sequencing valve opens. Oil flows to the head end of the break cylinder, causing the cylinder to extend. As the cylinder extends, the breakout wrench jaws rotate anticlockwise to break the pipe joint. Oil from the rod end of the cylinder passes through the check valve on the sequencing valve to the low pressure line, from there to the valve (port B to port T) and back to tank. When the operator places the breakout wrench control button in the DISENGAGE position, the PLC causes the B solenoid to energize and the valve spool shifts. Oil from the P port passes through the B port on the valve, out the B7 port on the valve bank and to the rod end of the jaw cylinder. When the jaw cylinder retracts, the jaws of the breakout wrench open. Oil from the head end of the cylinder returns unrestricted to the valve (port B to port T) and back to tank. Once the jaws are completely open and cannot move anymore, hydraulic pressure builds. When hydraulic pressure reaches the setting of the sequencing valve (2400 psi), the sequencing valve opens. Oil flows to the rod end of the break cylinder. When the cylinder retracts, the breakout wrench jaws rotate back to their original position. Oil from the head end of the cylinder passes through the check valve on the sequencing valve to the low pressure line, from there to the valve (port B to port T) and back to tank. Refer to Figure 3-32.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.37Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

3.2.4.6 Breakout Wrench In / Out

R57349-3g

Numbers in the circles refer to the Bill of Material (Subtopic 3.2.6). Numbers in the triangles refer to the System Data Sheet (Table 3-1). Figure 3-33: Breakout Wrench In / Out

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.38-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

The Breakout Wrench In/Out Valve causes the breakout wrench to move to and away from the drill pipe. When the operator places the breakout wrench control button in the OUT position, the PLC causes the A solenoid to energize and the valve spool shifts. Oil from the P port passes through the A port on the valve, out the A8 port on the valve bank, over the directional flow control valve and to the head end of the cylinder. When the cylinder extends, the breakout wrench moves outward toward the pipe. Oil from the rod end of the cylinder returns through the flow control valve. The oil then travels to the valve (port B to port T) and back to tank. Set the flow control valve so that the time to fully extend is between 5 and 6 seconds. When the operator places the breakout wrench control button in the IN position, the PLC causes the B solenoid to energize and the valve spool shifts. Oil from the P port passes through the B port on the valve, out the B8 port on the valve bank, over the directional flow control valve and to the rod end of the cylinder. When the cylinder retracts, the breakout wrench moves back inward to the stowed position. Oil from the head end of the cylinder returns through the flow control valve. Set the flow control valve so that the time to fully retract is between 4 and 5 seconds. The oil then travels to the valve (port A to port T) and back to tank. Refer to Figure 3-33.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.39Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

3.2.5 Valve Bank 3

Figure 3-34: Valve Bank 3

Valve Bank 3 is mounted between the two mast hoist cylinders inside the machinery house (see Figure 2-3). All of the leveling jack circuits are controlled by the valve assemblies mounted on valve bank 3, as well as the auxiliary winch. Oil to operate these circuits is provided by the 37GPM cartridge of the auxiliary hydraulic pump (see Figure 3-1) during normal operation. When the drill is in Auto Level mode, or when the operator is manually operating all four leveling jacks simultaneously, oil from the 20 GPM cartridge is diverted from Valve Bank 1 and is also provided to Valve Bank 3. Refer to Figure 3-35.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.40-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

Numbers in the circles refer to the Bill of Material (Subtopic 3.2.6). Numbers in the triangles refer to the System Data Sheet (Table 3-1). Figure 3-35: Valve Bank 3 (spare removed for clarity)

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.41Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

R57349-4

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

3.2.5.1 Solenoid Relief/Unloading Valve

R57349-4

Numbers in the circles refer to the Bill of Material (Subtopic 3.2.6). Numbers in the triangles refer to the System Data Sheet (Table 3-1). Figure 3-36: Relief Unloading Valve

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.42-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

The function of the solenoid relief/unloading valve is to reduce system pressure during periods when high volume portion of the auxiliary pump is not needed to support operation. This function conserves energy and prevents overloading of the high volume pump. This is a four-position, four way valve. It is solenoid actuated with a manual override. The valve is spring centered, and the center is open. When in the spring-centered open position, this valve allows oil from the high volume section of the auxiliary pump to bypass the high flow relief valve, flowing directly back to the tank without building pressure. This is the energy-saving provision for periods when the auxiliary hydraulic circuits are at rest. Whenever the operator initiates movement for any of the devices controlled by the valves on Valve Bank 3, the PLC causes the solenoid relief/unloader valve A solenoid to energize. This causes the valve to shift so that oil from the P port of the valve flows to the A port, which is blocked. Oil flow backs up against the pressure relief valve and system pressure builds to the maximum setting of the relief valve (2850 psi (169 bar)). This establishes the maximum pressure available to the equipment. When the operator activates the Auto Level System, or when all four leveling jacks are manually operated simultaneously, the PLC causes the B solenoid to energize. Oil flow from the P port of the valve flows to the B port, which is blocked. Oil flow backs up against the pressure relief valve and system pressure builds to the maximum setting of the relief valve (2850 psi (169 bar)). The difference between the A solenoid position and the B solenoid position is that in B position, oil returning from the leveling jacks is ported to the A port of the unloading valve, which causes the oil to go through a .040" orifice before returning to tank. Refer to Figure 3-36.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.43Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

3.2.5.2 Auxiliary Winch Circuit

R57349-4c

Numbers in the circles refer to the Bill of Material (Subtopic 3.2.6). Numbers in the triangles refer to the System Data Sheet (Table 3-1). Figure 3-37: Auxiliary Circuit

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.44-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

The auxiliary winch valve controls the direction and maximum pressure of the oil flow to the auxiliary winch hydraulic motor. This is a proportional, three-position, four way valve.The valve is spring centered, and the center is open. When in the spring-centered open position, this valve blocks pressure from the pump. All other circuits are open back to the tank. An adjustable, pressure-compensated flow control valve in the valve bank manifold controls the flow rate of oil through the winch motor, thereby controlling the maximum speed of the winch. Set the flow control valve at 17 gallons per minute (64 lpm), which should provide a maximum drum rotation speed of 8.5 rpm. Two pressure relief valves determine the maximum pressure in the circuit. One is active in the hoisting direction, and the other is active in the lowering direction. Set both relief valves for 2200 psi. A setting of 2200 psi on the relief valves results in a 12,000 pound (9,072 kg) line pull. Refer to Figure 3-37.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.45Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

3.2.5.3 Front Jack Valve

R57349-4d

Numbers in the circles refer to the Bill of Material (Subtopic 3.2.6). Numbers in the triangles refer to the System Data Sheet (Table 3-1). Figure 3-20: Front Jack Valve Assembly

The front jack valve controls the direction of oil flow to the front jacks. This is a four-position, four way valve. It is solenoid actuated with a manual override. The valve is spring centered, and the center is open. The jacks are hydraulically connected in parallel so that the pressure will tend to equalize between the cylinders during the machinery leveling procedure, and also while drilling. The flow rate is determined by a fixed flow control valve which allows a flow of 27 gallons per minute (102 lpm). The circuit includes regeneration and dual counterbalance valves, described in the following paragraphs.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.46-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

3.2.5.4 Rear Jack Valves

R57349-4e

Numbers in the circles refer to the Bill of Material (Subtopic 3.2.6). Numbers in the triangles refer to the System Data Sheet (Table 3-1). Figure 3-21: Left or Right Rear Jack Valve

The rear jack valves are identical in form and function to that of the front jacks; however, the circuit differs in three respects.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.47Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

1. The front jacks are joined hydraulically, whereas the two rear jacks are controlled independently. Each of the rear jacks has its own valve and associated circuit components. 2. There is only one pressure switch on each of the circuits. This is the pressure switch that determines that the jack pads have come in contact with the ground. Adjust these pressure switches (one on each jack) to 950 psi 50 psi. 3. The flow control valves are fixed at 15 gallons per minute (57 lpm). For more detailed information on the jack operation, refer to Subtopic 3.2.5.3. For a representation of the circuit schematic, refer to Figure 3-21. A valve block is mounted on the jack housing. This block contains the regeneration valve and the dual counterbalance valve.

Figure 3-22: Regeneration and Dual Counterbalance Valves

Regeneration Valve
The regeneration circuit is used to permit fast cylinder movement when the jacks are being lowered. The regeneration circuit is actuated when the jack is being extended, but not yet lifting the weight of the drill. It functions by circulating the oil being displaced from the rod end of the jack cylinder back into the head end of the cylinder (hence regeneration). This causes the jack to extend at a faster rate than it would if the oil from the cylinder rod end were directed back to the tank.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.48-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

Since the regeneration has only about one-half the force necessary to lift the drill, the regeneration circuit must turn off once the jacks begin to lift the drill. A Pressure Switch in each circuit detects when the jack pads have reached the ground, and have started to pick up the weight of the drill. Once the pressure switch is actuated, the regeneration circuit is shut off.

Dual Counterbalance Valve


The dual counterbalance valve prevents the jack cylinder from drifting, either under load or from the retracted position, when the control valve is in the neutral position.

CAUTION
Dual counterbalance valve pressures are pre-set at the factory. Changing the settings incorrectly can cause severe equipment damage. Follow correct procedures.
Refer to Figure 3-20. When the operator places the levelling jack button in the RAISE DRILL position (or during Auto Level operation), the PLC causes solenoid A to energize. The valve spool shifts so that oil from the P port of the valve flows to the A port of the valve and out the A2 port of the valve bank. Oil flows over the counterbalance valve check valve into the head end of the hydraulic cylinders. As pressure increases, pressure through the crossover ports on the head end counterbalance valve causes the valve port on the rod side of the cylinder to open. Oil from the rod end of the cylinders is then able to flow through the counterbalance valve, and either regenerates (if the jacks are not both on the ground) or returns to the B port to tank. When the operator places the levelling jack button in the LOWER DRILL position (or during Auto Level operation), the PLC causes solenoid B to energize. The valve spool shifts so that oil from the P port of the valve flows to the B port of the valve and out the B2 port of the valve bank. Oil flows through the regeneration valve, over the counterbalance valve check valve, and into the rod end of the hydraulic cylinders. As pressure increases, the crossover pressure through the ports on the rod side of the counterbalance valve causes the valve ports on the head end to open. Oil from the head end of the cylinders is then able to flow through the counterbalance valve and back to tank.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.49Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

3.2.5.5 Pressure Switch

Figure 3-23: Pressure Switch

The front jack circuit features two pressure switches. The Front Pressure Switch detects when the jacks are on the ground so that the regeneration circuit can be turned off. Adjust the Front Pressure Switch to 950 psi 50 psi. The Front Over Pressure Switch will cause an immediate shutdown of the drill when it is activated. To adjust, attach a 3000 psi gauge to port GA2 on the front regeneration valve and record the pressure required to support the front of the machine on jacks (mast down with cable reel is worst case). Adjust the Front Over Pressure Switch to 1750 psi 50 psi.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.50-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

3.2.5.6 Limit Switches

Figure 3-22: Jack Limit Switch

Limit Switches at the upper end of the jack housing indicate when the jack cylinders are fully retracted and the jacks are in their stowed positions.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.51Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

3.2.5.7 Hydraulic Oil Cooler R6907D1.

Figure 3-23: Hydraulic Oil Cooler

The cooler for the hydraulic oil is mounted on the forward wall of the lubrication room on the front right area of the machinery deck. The two electric fans, controlled through the PLC by the temperature probe in the hydraulic tank, draw air from the outside over the cooler fins. Only oil from the auxiliary hydraulic circuit is routed through the cooler. The main hydraulic system oil from the main pumps uses the cool oil from the tank but is not a part of the cooler circuit. The cooler has a rated operating pressure of 300 psi with built-in 60 psi relief bypass.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.52-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

3.2.5.8 Return Filters 46Z529

Figure 3-24: Hydraulic Return Filters

The two return line filters for the hydraulic systems are flange-mounted on top of the hydraulic tank. The two filters are identical, and can be serviced without removal from the tank. These by-pass type filters are rated at 80 gpm (303 lpm) and contain two 3-micron filter elements, mounted in tandem. The bypass opens at 25 psig (1.7 bar). A visual-type dirt gauge is mounted to the body of each filter to indicate the operating condition of the filter elements. The gauge faces are marked with red and green areas. Red indicates the need to replace the filter elements. Oil returns to the tank via the return filters mounted on top of the tank.
07 06 05 02 03 04

LEGEND 01. Suction Filters 02. Hydraulic Tank 03. Breather 04. Return Filters 05. OIl Level Gauge Placard 06. Oil Level Sight Glass

01

08 09 10

11

BD0361a01

Figure 3-25: Return Filter Location

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.53Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

3.2.6 Bill of Material


On the engineering drawings, numbers in circles refer to the Bill of Material, which provides component name, part number, and quantity. The list below, extracted from the Bill of Material, identifies components by name.
1. Double vane pump 2. Pressure Switch 3. Pressure Transducer 4. Pressure Switch 5. Oil Cooler 6. Return Filter 7. Valve Bank #1 8. Cylinder 9. Cylinder 10.Dual Counterbalance Valve 11.Cylinder 12.Cylinder 13.Cylinder 14.Cylinder 15.Cylinder 16.Valve Bank #2 17.Cylinder 18.Cylinder 19. 20.Directional Valve 21.Cylinder 22.Valve Bank #3 23.Winch 24.Regeneration Valve 25.Cylinder 26.Dual Sequence Valve 27.Proportional Valve 28.Tapping Plate 29.Cylinder 30.Manifold Pressure Tap 31.Manifold Pilot Operated Check Valve 32.Manifold Transition 33.Manifold Pressure Tap 34.Manifold Pressure Reducing valve 35.Solenoid Valve 36.Pressure Compensated Flow Control Valve 37.Pressure Compensated Flow Control Valve 38.Cylinder

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.54-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

3.2.7 System Data Sheet


On the engineering drawings, numbers in triangles refer to the System Data Sheet, which provides expanded or clarifying information regarding the item or function to which it applies.
TEST POINT ITEM/FUNCTION CHECKED SETTING

Limit Switch

Pipe rack gate limit switch indicates gate closed

2
3

Item #20: Directional Valve, 2 position, 4 way Item #6: Return Filter Solenoid Relief/ Unload Diverter Valve, solenoids A and B Relief/Unload Diverter Valve Item #4:

Pipe rack gate solenoid controlled by pope rack limit switch (test point 18) and pope rack seal limit switch (not shown)

3
4

Verify visual bypass indicator pointer is in acceptable range (green area of dial). Replace filter element if necessary. Solenoid A is activated when required by Valve Bank 1 or 2 operations. Solenoid B is activated when required by Valve Bank 3 operations.

4
5

5
6

Verify low flow relief pressure setting of 2900 psi. Adjust accordingly.

Relief Pressure Switch Item #4:

Set relief pressure switch to 2825 psi. Used in auto-level program to detect full cylinder extension. Set hydraulic pressure switch to 100 psi. Used to detect hydraulic back pressure. No hydraulic controls will operate unless switch has been tripped. With rotary head in lowered position, verify raising and lowering times of 2.5 to 3 minutes. Adjust flow controls on Valve Bank One accordingly.

Hydraulic Pressure Switch

Mast Hoist

Items #8, 10, 17 and 24:

Cylinders, Dual Counterbalance Valves, and Regeneration Valves

FACTORY SET: DO NOT ADJUST!

10

Limit Switch

Mast Anchor Pin limit switch indicates mast is pinned or unpinned

Table 3-1: System Data Sheet, Auxiliary Hydraulic System

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.55Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

TEST POINT

ITEM/FUNCTION CHECKED

SETTING

11

Deck Wrench

Verify work port pressure relief setting of 2000 psi when fully extended or retracted. Adjust relief valve accordingly.

12

Dust Curtains

Verify work port relief valve settings of 350 psi to lower and 1000 psi to raise. Adjust accordingly.

13

Dust Curtains

Verify times of 4.0 - 5.0 seconds to raise and lower dust curtains. Adjust flow control accordingly.

17

Pipe Rack

Verify in and out travel times of 8.0 - 12.0 seconds. Adjust flow control accordingly.

18

Limit Switch

Pipe rack limit switch indicates pipe rack stowed in mast.

24

Solenoid Relief/ Unloading Valve

Solenoid A is activated for auto-level or when all three jack controls are manually operated. Solenoid B is activated for manual operation of the winch or manual operation of individual jacks. Verify high flow relief pressure setting to be 2850 psi. Adjust relief valve accordingly.

25

Solenoid Relief/ Unloading Valve

26

Item #24: Regeneration Valve

Solenoid controlled by auto-level program.

27

Limit Switch

Pressure switch and limit switch produce feedback signals for auto-level program sequence. Attach 3000 psi gauge to port GA on front regen valve (Item #24) and record pressure required to support front of machine on jacks. Adjust front over pressure switch to trip at approximately 150% of recorded pressure. Adjust pressure switch to trip when jack pad comes in contact with the ground. Table 3-1: System Data Sheet, Auxiliary Hydraulic System

28

Item #4: Front Overpressure Switch Item #4: Front Pressure Switch

29

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.56-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

TEST POINT

ITEM/FUNCTION CHECKED

SETTING

30

Breakout Wrench

Verify work port pressure relief setting to be 1500 psi. Adjust accordingly.

31

Breakout Wrench

Verify extend time of 5 to 6 seconds, and 4 to 5 seconds to retract. Adjust flow control accordingly.

Table 3-1: System Data Sheet, Auxiliary Hydraulic System

3.3 Auxiliary Hydraulic System Maintenance


3.3.1 General
P&H recommended general maintenance practices can be found in Appendix A P&H recommended maintenance practices for hydraulic systems can be found in Appendix B. The paragraphs that follow provide information regarding installation, adjustment, lubrication, periodic maintenance, repair and replacement that are appropriate for general field maintenance of the auxiliary hydraulic system for this drill. For information on repair procedures not covered in this manual, contact your local P&H MinePro Services representative. The inspections that follow are not intended to dictate constant and tedious inspection of every component on the drill on a daily basis; however, when appropriate, these are areas that should not be overlooked when other maintenance services are being performed. In other words, whenever the opportunity arises, check the items indicated.

CAUTION

Pressurized fluid escaping from a hydraulic system can penetrate the skin causing serious injury. Always relieve pressure by connecting a microbore hose from the appropriate test port to the tank test port before disconnecting hydraulic lines. Tighten all connections before reapplying pressure. Keep hands and body away from pinholes and nozzles which eject fluid under high pressure. Use a piece of paper to search for leaks. Do not use your hands. If any fluid is injected into the skin, it must be surgically removed within a few hours by a medical doctor or gangrene can result. 3.3.1.1 lnspect Hoses And Hydraulic Lines
Visually inspect hydraulic and lubrication hoses and tubing for abrasion, damage, kinks, or other signs of wear or decay. Report any problems that are found. Damaged hoses and piping must be replaced prior to continued operation of the drill.

Technician Tip
The types of hoses and associated fittings and adapters specified for use on P&H drills provide the best performance to withstand the high pressures of the hydraulic system. Always replace hoses, fittings and adapters in accordance with P&H specifications.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.57Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

3.3.1.2 lnspect Hydraulic Fittings For Leaks


Inspect hydraulic and lubrication connections, and use the appropriate tightening sequence to secure the connection if necessary. Refer to Appendix B for further guidance if these appropriate tightening procedures are unfamiliar to you.

3.3.1.3 lnspect Hydraulic System Components


Visually inspect each hydraulic component for damage and leaks. Operate control valves and solenoids to check for correct component operation. Repair or replace damaged or malfunctioning hydraulic components. Inspections should include, but not be limited to, the following components:

hydraulic control valves and connections. hydraulic hoses, fittings and adapters.
drive-to-pump couplings.

hydraulic pumps. suction filters/return filters. cylinders, pins, and bushings. hydraulic motors.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.58-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

3.3.2 Hydraulic Tank R6908D1


07 06 05 02 03 04

01

LEGEND 01. Suction Filters 02. Temperature Probe 03. Hydraulic Tank 04. Low Level Switch 05. Breather 06. Return Filters 07. Lube Room 08. Top Cover 09. Oil Level Gauge Placard 10. Oil Level Sight Gauge 11. Auxiliary Pump

08 09 10

11
Figure 3-26: Hydraulic Tank

BD0361a01

3.3.2.1 Installation
The hydraulic tank is located in the lubrication room on the front right portion of the drill. It is bolted to the machinery deck, with the drain tube extending downward to the underside of the deck.

3.3.2.2 Services Daily or 8 hours


Check hydraulic fluid level. Check the sight glass daily and/or at the beginning of each shift. The placard next to the sight glass provides minimum and maximum oil levels depending on the physical condition of the drill (mast up or down, jacks up or down). Replenish the oil level using supplemental oil tank mounted near the air compressor. The hydraulic tank holds approximately 64 gallons (242 liters) of Dexron ATF.

Two weeks or 250 hours P&H Mining Equipment recommends that a sample of oil be drawn from the hydraulic tank during every PM inspection. This sample should be about two quarts and should be taken when the oil is warmed through normal operation. The sample should be analyzed by a qualified lubrication specialist to deter-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.59Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

mine whether it is suitable for continued use. The interval between oil changes as defined below may be extended based upon the operating conditions and on the care used in the handling oils and keeping them clean during the handling process. Annually or 2000 hours Drain the hydraulic system. Remove the top cover and observe the condition of the inside of the tank. If there is a heavy deposit of
debris, flush the tank.

Refill the hydraulic system with approximately 64 US gallons (242 liters) of Dexron ATF. 3.3.2.3 Repair

WARNING

Hydraulic oil is flammable and could explode if exposed to welding heat and/or sparks, resulting in serious injury or death. Always be certain that the tank is properly cleaned of any flammable material before welding.
The hydraulic tank is made of mild steel. Any repairs can be accomplished by draining the tank and welding in accordance with accepted welding practices.

3.3.3 Suction Filters R16280D1

Figure 3-27: Handwell Valves and Suction Filters

3.3.3.1 Installation
Two suction filters are flange-mounted at the rearward end of the hydraulic oil tank.

3.3.3.2 Service
It is normally unnecessary to remove the filter assembly from the pump suction line to service the filter unit. To replace the filter element, refer to Figure 3-28 and proceed as follows:

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.60-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

01

02

03

04

03

BD0563a01

06

05

LEGEND 01. Limit Switch 02. Knob 03. Seals

04. Filter Element 05. Valve 06. Indicator Switch

Figure 3-28: Suction Filter

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.
Step 1:

Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance activities. Close the Handwell Valve to shut off the suction line valve by turning the knob anticlockwise. Remove the six capscrews and lockwashers from the filter cover, then remove the cover assembly from the filter body. Inspect the seal and O-ring between the cover and the body. Replace as required. Remove and discard the filter element. Replace with a new element. Install the cover assembly on the filter body. Confirm the correct arrangement of seals and be certain that the seals are properly seated. Install the six capscrews and lockwashers to secure the filter cover. Open the Handwell Valve and remove locks and tags from the operator controls.

Step 2: Step 3:

Step 4: Step 5: Step 6:

Step 7: Step 8:

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.61Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

3.3.3.3 Cleaning, Inspection, and Repair


1. Check the filter weekly, or every 50 hours of operation, for visible damage, leaking seals, and leaking connections. 2. Clean and inspect all auxiliary hydraulic pump suction filter components in accordance with the general cleaning and inspection procedures described in Appendix A of this manual. Replace any worn or damaged components. See the LinkOne electronic parts manual for component identification.

3.3.4 Temperature Probe 89Z724D2

Figure 3-29: Hydraulic Tank Temperature Probe

3.3.4.1 Installation
The probe threads into the side of the hydraulic tank. When installing the probe, pack the well with grease. The grease will act as a thermal conductor.

3.3.4.2 Service and Repair


No service is required, and the temperature probe is not repairable. If the unit fails, it must be replaced.

3.3.4.3 Replacement

WARNING

Electric current can cause burns, injury, or even death. Disconnect, lock open, and tag the power source which feeds this device to prevent power from being applied while inspection and repairs are being performed. Before beginning repairs, try the operational controls to verify that the intended power source is disconnected.
Step 1:

Lock out and tag out the controls to the hydraulic pumps to prevent activation while the temperature probe is being serviced. Tag and disconnect the electrical wiring to the temperature probe, if not already disconnected.

Step 2:

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.62-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

Step 3:

Remove the temperature probe from the hydraulic tank.

NOTICE
The temperature probe assembly is not repairable, and must be replaced if damaged or inoperable. Refer to the LinkOne electronic parts manual for temperature probe identification.
Step 4: Step 5:

Pack the well with grease. The grease will act as a thermal conductor. Thread the probe into the well. Install the electrical wiring to the probe in accordance with the identification tags placed during removal.

3.3.5 Low Level Switch R16982D1

Figure 3-30: Hydraulic Tank Oil Level Switch

The oil level switch is threaded into a fitting on the top of the hydraulic tank.

3.3.5.1 Testing the Switch

NOTICE
Thoroughly clean the top of the hydraulic tank before disconnecting or removing any of the hydraulic components.
To check the function of the switch, unthread the float switch assembly from the tank and pull the float rod about 2 feet ( meter) out of the tank. The GUI should register a fault. If it does not register a fault, replace the float.

3.3.5.2 Service and Repair


No service is required, and the low level switch is not repairable. If the unit fails, it must be replaced.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.63Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

3.3.5.3 Replacement

WARNING

Electric current can cause burns, injury, or even death. Disconnect, lock open, and tag the power source which feeds this device to prevent power from being applied while inspection and repairs are being performed. Before beginning repairs, try the operational controls to verify that the intended power source is disconnected.
Step 1:

Lock out and tag out the controls to the hydraulic pumps and the level switch to prevent activation while the level switch is being serviced. Tag and disconnect the electrical wiring to the level switch, if not already disconnected. Remove the level switch from the hydraulic tank.

Step 2: Step 3:

NOTICE
The level switch assembly is not repairable, and must be replaced if damaged or inoperable. See the LinkOne electronic parts manual for switch identification.
Step 4:

Apply a thin film of pipe sealant to the male pipe threads on the level switch, then install the switch in the tank. Install the electrical wiring to the switch in accordance with the identification tags placed during removal.

Step 5:

Add oil as necessary to attain the correct operating level.

3.3.6 Hydraulic Tank Breather 1046Z994

Figure 3-31: Hydraulic Tank Breather

3.3.6.1 Installation
The hydraulic tank breather is threaded onto a stud mounted at the top of the tank.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.64-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

3.3.6.2 Service
Replace the breather at every PM.

3.3.6.3 Replacement
Remove the old breather by spinning it off the stud. Coat the new gasket (O-ring) with oil and install the new gasket into the new breather. Install the new breather onto the stud until the gasket makes contact, then turn the breather another 1/4 turn.

3.3.7 Magnetic Rod

Figure 3-32: Magnetic Rod

3.3.7.1 Installation
The magnetic rod is threaded into a fitting in the top of the tank. The rod extends into the tank and attracts metal contaminants.

3.3.7.2 Service
Each PM, remove the magnetic rod and inspect it. Determine the source and severity of the contaminants captured by the rod. Record these findings for follow-up analysis. Wipe the rod clean and reinstall it into the fitting in the top of the tank.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.65Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

3.3.8 Return Filters 46Z529

BD0781b01

Figure 3-33: Hydraulic Return Filters

3.3.8.1 Installation
The two return line filters for the hydraulic systems are flange-mounted on top of the hydraulic tank. The two filters are identical, and can be serviced without removal from the tank.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.66-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

3.3.8.2 Inspection, Service and Repair

LEGEND 01. Filter Cap 02. O-ring 03. Head 04. Square O-ring 05. Dirt Alarm Gauge

06. 07. 08. 09. 10. 11.

Bypass Indicator Switch Filter Element Filter Elements Connector Bowl Filter Mounting Gasket Check Valve

Figure 3-34: Return Filter

1. Check the filter indicators weekly to ensure that the filters are still operating in the green zone of the indicator. Also check filter status at the GUI. 2. Check the filters for visible damage, leaking seals, and leaking connections. 3. If the filter indicators are in the red zone, or after six months or 2000 hours of operation the filter elements must be replaced. Replace the hydraulic return line filter elements as follows: DISASSEMBLY. Disassemble the return line filters for replacement of filter elements as follows:

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Follow lockout and tagout procedures to prevent inadvertent machine startup during maintenance.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.67Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

1. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine startup during maintenance activities. 2. Clean all dirt from the filter housings and fittings.

WARNING

Hot hydraulic oil can spray with extreme force and volume causing injury or death. Use lockout and tagout procedures to guard against inadvertent hydraulic system or machine start up during service or maintenance. Allow the hydraulic system to cool before maintenance or repair. Slowly release pressure or vent circuits before disconnecting hydraulic lines. Wear appropriate face and body protective devices while carefully loosening any connection or fitting.
3. Be sure that no pressure exists in any of the hydraulic system circuits before opening the filter assembly. 4. Remove the four capscrews from the filter cap, then remove the cap assembly and O-ring from the filter body. 5. Remove the two filter elements and the intermediate connector from the bowl. 6. Inspect the filter element for signs of damage or heavy buildup of debris collected on the inside of the element. Note the type of debris found; debris can be a clue to potential component failures.

7. Inspect the element for damage. Damage can warn that there is or has been a high pressure spike, or a surge of return oil. Spikes would indicate a potential problem with a pump or hydraulic motor. 8. Inspect the filter bowl. Note any damage as well as the presence and type of debris buildup. 9. Discard the filter elements, but do not discard the element connector. 10. Cover the opening of the filter body to prevent dirt or other small items from inadvertently falling into the bowl or tank. CLEANING AND INSPECTION. Clean and inspect all of the return filter components in accordance with the general cleaning and inspection procedures described in Appendix A of this manual. Replace any worn or damaged components. The cap assembly including the spring and element retainer must be replaced as a unit. See the LinkOne electronic parts manual for component identification. ASSEMBLY. Assemble the new filter elements in the return filter assembly as follows (refer to Figure 3-34): 1. Install the two new filter elements and element connector in the filter bowl. 2. Lightly oil the O-ring, then position it with the cover assembly on the filter head. Be certain that the spring-loaded element retainer is correctly positioned on the top filter element, and the O-ring is accurately positioned under the filter cap to prevent leakage during operation. 3. Install the four capscrews and lockwashers into the cap assembly, and torque them securely.

3.3.8.3 Service
Replace the filter elements when:

indicators are in the red zone and/or the GUI is registering a fault

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.68-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

after 6 months or 1000 hours of operation when the hydraulic oil is changed
Refer to Figure 3-34 and replace the filter elements as follows:
Step 1:

Lock out and tag out the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine startup during maintenance activities. Clean all dirt from the filter housings and fittings.

Step 2:

CAUTION

Hot hydraulic oil can burn. Use lockout and tagout procedures to guard against inadvertent hydraulic system or machine startup during service or maintenance. Allow the hydraulic system to cool before maintenance or repair. Wear appropriate face and body protective devices while changing filter elements.
Step 3:

Remove the four capscrews from the filter cap, then remove the cap assembly and O-ring from the filter body. Remove the two filter elements and the intermediate connector from the bowl. Discard the filter elements, but do not discard the element connector. Cover the opening of the filter body to prevent dirt or other small items from inadvertently falling into the bowl or tank. Clean and inspect all of the return filter components in accordance with the general cleaning and inspection procedures described in Appendix Z of this manual. Replace any worn or damaged components. The cap assembly including the spring and element retainer must be replaced as a unit. See the LinkOne electronic parts manual for component identification. Install the two new filter elements and element connector in the filter bowl. Lightly oil the O-ring, then position it with the cover assembly on the filter body. Confirm that the springloaded element retainer is correctly positioned on the top filter element, and the O-ring is accurately positioned under the cover to prevent leakage during operation. Install the four capscrews and lockwashers into the cap assembly, and torque them securely.

Step 4:

Step 5:

Step 6:

Step 7: Step 8:

Step 9:

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.69Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

3.3.9 Auxiliary Hydraulic Pump 37U153D1

Figure 3-35: Auxiliary Pump

3.3.9.1 Location
The auxiliary hydraulic pump is flange-mounted to the back side of the PDT.

3.3.9.2 Maintenance and Repairs


No periodic maintenance is required. Repairs in the field are not recommended. If the pump requires service, remove it and send it to a qualified repair facility.

3.3.9.3 Removal
Remove the pump from the system as follows:

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.
1. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance activities. 2. Clean all dirt away from the pump, hose assemblies, and fittings. 3. Turn the Handwell valve on the tank suction filter assembly fully counterclockwise to the closed position.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.70-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

WARNING

Hot hydraulic oil can spray, causing injury or death. Use lockout and tagout procedures to guard against inadvertent hydraulic system or machine start up during service or maintenance. Allow the hydraulic system to cool before maintenance or repair. Slowly release pressure or vent circuits before disconnecting hydraulic lines. Wear appropriate face and body protective devices while carefully loosening any connection or fitting.
4. Check to be certain that the hydraulic pressure is completely vented from the high-pressure and control pressure circuits.To vent system pressure, attach a Microbore hose from the hydraulic test kit between the appropriate test port and the test port that is open to the tank. 5. Tag and remove the hydraulic hoses from the pump. Cap plug all hose fittings and pump ports to prevent the entry of foreign material into the pump or hydraulic system. 6. Support the pump (pump weighs approximately 30 lbs (14 kg)) so that its entire weight will not be supported by the shaft when the mounting capscrews are removed. Remove the two capscrews and lockwashers that secure the pump to the pump drive transmission. Slide the pump back from the pump drive until the driveshaft is clear of the pump drive, and remove the pump.

3.3.9.4 Installation

CAUTION
Exercise care when installing the pump on the pump drive transmission to prevent misalignment, which can lead to premature pump failure.
Install the pump on the pump drive as follows: 1. Check the mounting flange on the pump drive, the pilot diameter on the pump, and the splined shaft and bore for burrs and imperfections that would prevent the pump from seating correctly on the pump drive. Carefully remove any imperfections by lapping. 2. Apply a light coat of grease to the pilot diameter and driveshaft splines. Position the gasket on the pump. 3. Carefully install the pump on the drive, and install the mounting capscrews and lockwashers. Be careful to prevent misalignment when tightening the capscrews. 4. Install the suction and outlet lines, then turn the suction line valve to the open position. 5. Start the pump drive with no load applied to the pump to prime the pump. Operate the system at moderate loading (such as the deck wrenches or the deck hatch) for a short period of time. 6. Check the reservoir oil level, and add oil if required.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.71Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

3.3.10 Valve Banks


3.3.10.1 General
Valve banks 1, 2 and 3 control the operation of the auxiliary hydraulic system. They are located at the rear of the machinery house, between the mast hoist cylinders. Refer to Figure 2-3.

08

07

06

05

04

03

02

01

BD0380a01
LEGEND 01. Relief Unload/Oil Diverter consists of four stacked valves. The top valve is a double solenoid, spring centered, 3 position/4 way directional valve with manual override. The second valve down is a single check valve that prevents backflow from the low pressure discharge of the auxiliary hydraulic pump.The third valve down is a shuttle valve that connects externally to the auxiliary hydraulic system pressure transducer and two of the auto level pressure switches.The bottom valve is a single, adjustable pressure relief valve. 02. Mast Hoist. Top valve is a double solenoid, spring centered, 3 position/4 way directional valve with manual override. Bottom valve contains a pair of one-way flow control valves. 03. Mast Anchor Pins. A double solenoid, spring centered, 3 position/4 way directional valve with manual override. 04. Deck Wrench. Top valve is a double solenoid, spring centered, directional valve with manual control. Bottom valve is a double, adjustable pressure relief valve. 05. Dust Curtain. Top valve is a double solenoid, spring centered, 3 position/4 way directional valve with manual override. The second valve down contains two pilot check valves. The third valve down is a double, adjustable pressure relief valve. Bottom valve contains a pair of one-way flow control valves. 06. Back Brace Lock. A double solenoid, spring centered, 3position/4 way directional valve with manual override. 07. Spare 08. Spare Figure 3-36: Valve Bank 1

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.72-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

Figure 3-37: Valve Bank 1

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.73Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

08

07

06

05

04

03

02

01

BD0397a01

LEGEND 01. Pipe Rack. Top valve is a double solenoid, spring centered, 3 position/4 way directional valve with manual override.The bottom valve contains a pair of one-way flow control valves. Set the flow control valves to achieve a travel time in both directions of 8.0 - 12.0 seconds (typically 12.5 - 15.5 gpm). 02. Pipe Rack. Top valve is a double solenoid, spring centered, 3 position/4 way directional valve with manual override.The bottom valve contains a pair of one-way flow control valves. Set the flow control valves to achieve a travel time in both directions of 8.0 - 12.0 seconds (typically 12.5 - 15.5 gpm) 03. Pipe Rack Holdback. Top valve is a single solenoid, spring return, 2 position/4 way directional valve with manual override.The second valve contains a pressure relief valve. Set the pressure relief valve to 400 psi (27.6 bar) 04. Spare 05. Spare 06. Deck Hatch. Top valve is a double solenoid, spring centered, 3 position/4 way directional valve with manual override. The second valve down is a dual pilot-to-open check valve with a 15 psi crack pressure. The third valve down is a dual relief valve. Each relief valve is to be set at 150 psi (10.35 bar). The bottom valve is a dual flow control valve. Outflow is metered to 3 GPM on the A side and 4 GPM on the B side. 07. Spare 08. Spare

Figure 3-38: Valve Bank 2

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.74-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

Figure 3-39: Valve Bank 2

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.75Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

02

01

03

04

05

06

BD0382a01

LEGEND 01. Solenoid Relief Unloading Valve. Top valve is double solenoid, spring centered, 3 position/4 way directional valve with a manual override. The second component down is a special porting block to provide a means to install pilot line between the solenoid relief unloading valve and the three jack control valves, also on valve bank #3. The third valve down contains a single adjustable, pilot operated pressure relief valve, which function as a pilot stage relief valve. Bottom valve is a pressure relief valve, which operates as the main stage relief valve for the valve bank #3 circuits. 02. Auxiliary Winch. Top valve is a double solenoid, spring centered, 3 position/4 way proportional directional valve with manual override. Bottom valve is a double counterbalance valve. A flow control valve installed in the valve bank manifold regulates the inflow rate to the directional valve. 03. Right Rear Jack. A double solenoid, spring centered, directional valve with manual control. A flow control valve installed in the valve bank manifold regulates the inflow rate to the directional valve. 04. Left Rear Jack. Valve configuration is identical to the right rear jack valve. 05. Front Jacks. Valve configuration is identical to the right rear jack valve. Figure 3-40: Valve Bank 3

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.76-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

Figure 3-41: Valve Bank 3

3.3.10.2 Removal
Under normal circumstances, it is unnecessary to replace an entire valve bank assembly for maintenance or repair of its control circuits. Each individual control valve block can be removed from its position in a stacked valve assembly without need for removal of the manifold, hydraulic hoses, or fittings.

NOTICE
The following contains procedures for replacement of the hydraulic valve assembly components mounted on manifolds. These procedures are typical, and apply to all of the hydraulic system valve banks.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.77Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

3.3.10.3 Solenoid Replacement


Figure 3-42 illustrates the components of a typical solenoid-operated directional valve. It is unnecessary either to remove the valve from the manifold or to disassemble its hydraulic components in order to replace a valve solenoid coil.

01

02

03

04

05

04

06

07

08

11
LEGEND 01. Name Plate Screw 02. Valve Body Capsrew (under body) 03. Connector Screw 04. Seal 05. Name Plate

10
06. 07. 08. 09. 10. 11.

09
Electrical Connector Solenoid Cap Solenoid Core Solenoid Locating Pin Valve Body

Figure 3-42: Solenoid Operated Directional Valve

1. Remove the solenoid from the directional valve as follows:

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.
A. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance activities. B. Tag the electrical connector(s) on the solenoid, or solenoids, to be removed.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.78-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

C. Loosen the retainer screw on the electrical connector, then remove the connector from the solenoid. Be certain to remove the seal as well. D. Unthread the solenoid cap, then remove the cap and O-ring from the solenoid core. Save the O-ring for reassembly. E. Slide the solenoid assembly from the end of the solenoid core. 2. Clean and inspect the exterior of the directional valve and the solenoid in accordance with the general procedures provided in Appendix A. 3. Install the solenoid on the directional valve as follows: A. Position a solenoid assembly over the end of the core, and locate it against the directional valve body.B. Lightly lubricate the O-ring, and install it over the core and against the end of the solenoid housing. B. Install the solenoid cap, and tighten it firmly by hand. C. Install the electrical connector and seal onto the solenoid in accordance with the identification tag, and fasten securely with the retaining screw.

3.3.10.4 Directional Valve Replacement


Depending on the specific circuit configuration, the solenoid-operated directional valves are mounted either as a single unit assembly on the manifold, or as the top valve in a stacked valve assembly. Refer to Figure 3-42 and proceed as follows: 1. Prepare the drill for hydraulic system maintenance as follows: A. Move the drill to firm level ground. B. If not already in position, lower the drill until it is supported completely by the crawler tracks. C. Position the leveling jacks until the jack pads are resting on the ground without pressure. D. Be certain that the mast is either fully up and locked in position, or that it is in the down position and resting completely on its supports. E. Have adequate lighting available. F. Have tools and replacement parts with you before starting the job.

CAUTION

Hydraulic fluid can enter water supplies and cause illness. Never drain hydraulic fluid onto the ground.
G. Since some minor leakage of hydraulic fluid is unavoidable, keep a good supply of cleaning materials on hand. H. Be sure that the auxiliary winch is not supporting any load, and that its hook is secured to the mast.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.79Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.
2. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance activities. 3. Tag, loosen and remove the electrical connector(s) from the valve solenoid(s). It is not necessary to remove the solenoid(s) from the valve at this time.

WARNING

Hot hydraulic oil can spray with extreme force and volume causing injury or death. Use lockout and tagout procedures to guard against inadvertent hydraulic system or machine start up during service or maintenance. Allow the hydraulic system to cool before maintenance or repair. Slowly release pressure or vent circuits before disconnecting hydraulic lines. Wear appropriate face and body protective devices while carefully loosening any connection or fitting.
4. Make certain that no control pressure exists in any of the auxiliary hydraulic system circuits. 5. Remove the four round head machine screws from the valve identification plate on top of the valve body, then remove the plate. 6. Remove the four valve body capscrews, previously hidden by the identification plate, and carefully remove the valve from the manifold or intermediate valve (if part of a stacked valve subassembly). The valve is located on its mounting surface by a pair of dowel pins. Use care to avoid scratching or nicking the mounting surfaces during the removal process. 7. Remove and discard the used O-rings from the valve body. 8. Clean and inspect the exterior of the directional valve in accordance with the general procedures for cleaning and inspection in Appendix A. Replace any faulty valve, and all O-rings. 9. Install the directional valve as follows:

CAUTION
Always use O-rings specified by P&H Mining Equipment. Using the wrong material or size of O-ring may cause the O-ring to fail under high pressure.
A. Lubricate the new O-rings with hydraulic oil and insert them into the seats in the valve body.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.80-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

B. Make sure that the locating pins are correctly seated, then carefully position the valve body on the manifold mounting surface, or on top of the intermediate valve in the valve assembly.

Figure 3-43: Valve Ports

C. Insert the pins into the pin holes to correctly align the valve. Install the four body retaining capscrews to fasten the valve body to the manifold. Torque the capscrews uniformly using a crosswise pattern. D. Position the identification plate on top of the directional valve and fasten securely with four round head machine screws. E. Install the electrical connector(s) and seal(s) onto the valve solenoid(s) in accordance with the identification tags, and fasten securely with the retaining screw. F. Start the power unit, and bleed all air from the auxiliary hydraulic system.

3.3.10.5 Intermediate Stacked Valve Replacement


All valve bodies that are sandwiched between the solenoid-operated directional valves and the manifold are replaced using the following typical procedure. 1. Remove the solenoid-operated valve from the valve assembly as described above. 2. Loosen the four body retaining capscrews that fasten the valve body to the adjacent valve or manifold, and carefully remove the valve body. The valve body is located on its mounting surface by a pair of dowel pins. Use care to avoid scratching or nicking the mounting surfaces during the removal process. 3. Remove and discard the used O-rings from the valve body. 4. Clean and inspect the exterior of the directional valve in accordance with the general procedures provided in Appendix A. Replace any faulty valves, and all O-rings. See the LinkOne electronic parts manual for valve and seal kit information. 5. Lubricate the new O-rings with hydraulic oil and insert them into the seats in the valve body. 6. Make sure that the locating pins are correctly seated, then carefully position the valve body on the manifold mounting surface. Insert the pins into the pin holes to correctly align the valve. 7. Install four special capscrews to fasten the valve body to the manifold. Torque the capscrews uniformly using a crosswise pattern. 8. Install the solenoid-operated valve from the valve assembly as described under Subtopic 3.3.10.4.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.81Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

9. Start the power unit, and bleed all air from the auxiliary hydraulic system.

3.3.11 Dual Counterbalance Valves R6268D1

Figure 3-44: Dual Counterbalance Valve

3.3.11.1 Theory of Operation


Dual counterbalance valves are used in several auxiliary hydraulic system branch circuits. Figure 3-44 illustrates a typical application on one of the jack cylinders. The function of dual counterbalance valves is to prevent the flow of fluid in a hydraulic circuit when the circuit is not sufficiently pressurized. This function prevents components, such as jack cylinders, from drifting under load when the hydraulic systems have been turned off or there is an unexpected loss of hydraulic pressure. All dual counterbalance valves on this drill are cartridge type, which means that the valve bodies do not need to be removed from the circuits to enable replacement of the working components of the valve. The circuits using dual counterbalance valves as shown in Table 3-2.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.82-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

Circuit Pipe Rack In/Out Mast Hoist Deck Wrench Right Rear Jack Left Rear Jack Front Jacks

Valve Description One Dual CB Valve per pipe rack One dual CB Valve per cylinder One Dual CB Valve One Dual CB Valve One Dual CB Valve One Dual CB Valve

Table 3-2: Counterbalance Valve Locations

Cartridge type counterbalance valve assemblies consist of a valve body that is drilled, tapped, and counter-bored to accept one or more valve cartridges, the valve cartridge assemblies, and the O-rings and back-up rings that seal the land areas of the valve cartridge.

3.3.11.2 Service
Counterbalance valves should not be serviced, except for two conditions: Valve Leakage. Remove the cartridge and replace the O-ring seals. Valve Malfunction. Replace the cartridge as a unit.

3.3.11.3 Cartridge Removal


To remove a counterbalance valve cartridge from a valve body, proceed as follows:
Step 1:

Position the drill in a flat, level area. The ground must be stable and the area must be safe from hazards.

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.
Step 2:

Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance activities.

WARNING

Hot hydraulic oil can spray with extreme force and volume causing injury or death. Use lockout and tagout procedures to guard against inadvertent hydraulic system or machine start up during service or maintenance. Allow the hydraulic system to cool before maintenance or repair. Slowly release pressure or vent circuits before discon-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.83Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

necting hydraulic lines. Wear appropriate face and body protective devices while carefully loosening any connection or fitting.
Step 3:

Be sure that no pressure exists in any of the auxiliary hydraulic system circuits.

A. Position the components so that there is no load being held by the cylinder. B. If test ports directly into the cylinder are available, connect a microbore hose to both sides of the cylinder. If no ports are available, proceed slowly and with caution.

NOTICE
Clean any dirt away from the valve assembly and hydraulic hose fittings before loosening any of the hydraulic components.
Step 4:

Cover the cartridge with a shop rag. With a wrench, use the wrench flats provided for removal. Do not attempt to loosen the cartridge by turning on the pressure adjustment assembly. Loosen and slowly unscrew the cartridge; any trapped pressure will be released before the cartridge is fully unscrewed. Plug the hole in the valve body to prevent entry of loose or airborne dirt.

3.3.11.4 Cleaning, Inspection, and Repair


Clean and inspect the valve assembly in accordance with the general procedures for cleaning and inspection in Appendix A. Repair is limited to replacing O-rings and back-up rings. The cartridge valves are not field repairable. Replace any faulty valve cartridges. Replace O-rings and back-up rings as follows:
Step 1:

Remove and discard the O-rings and back-up rings from the O-ring grooves on the outside diameter of the valve cartridge. Replace all O-rings and back-up rings in the order indicated in Figure 3-45. Refer to the LinkOne electronic parts manual for cartridge and seal kit information.

Step 2:

Refer to Figure 3-45.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.84-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

01 02

03 04 05 04 06 07 06 08 09 08

10

26

21 19

22

23

20

24

13 25

14

13

15

12 16 17 18 17

11

10

18

17

13

14

13

15

16

12 11

17

18

17

18

17

F7357

LEGEND 01. Directional Valve 02. Seal Kit 03. O-Ring 04. Backup Ring 05. O-Ring 06. Backup Ring 07. O-Ring 08 Backup Ring 09. O-Ring 10. Test Port Connector 11. Counterbalance Valve 12. Seal Kit 13. Backup Ring

14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26.

O-Ring Backup Ring O-Ring Backup Ring O-Ring Directional Solenoid Valve Seal Kit O-Ring O-Ring Backup Ring O-Ring Backup Ring Solenoid Coil

Figure 3-45: Cartridge Service

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.85Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

3.3.11.5 Cartridge Installation


To install the counterbalance valve cartridge into the valve body, proceed as follows:
Step 1:

Lightly lubricate the O-rings and back-up rings for the cartridge valve, and install them in the grooves on the outside diameter of the valve cartridge. Carefully install the valve cartridge into its seat in the manifold. Avoid displacement or cutting of the O-ring seals during installation. Torque the valve 150-160 ft-lbs (203 - 217 Nm).

Step 2:

3.3.12 Main Hydraulic Pressure Transducer 36Q549

LEGEND 01. Main Hydraulic Pressure Transducer

02. Hydraulic Pressure Switch 03. Relief Pressure Switch

Figure 3-46: Auxiliary Hydraulic System Pressure Components

3.3.12.1 Location
One pressure transducer is used in the auxiliary hydraulic system. It is mounted on the wall behind and below valve bank 2 (refer to Figure 3-46), and is connected to a shuttle valve installed as part of the relief/unload oil diverter valve assembly on valve bank 1. The pressure transducer has a 1/4" NPT female pipe thread for connection to the hydraulic circuit. It is connected to the electrical system with a four prong DIN electrical connector.

3.3.12.2 Removal
To remove the pressure transducer from the system, proceed as follows:
Step 1:

Position the drill in a flat, level area. The ground must be stable and the area must be safe from hazards.

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.86-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.
Step 2:

Lock out and tag out the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance activities. Clean all dirt away from the pressure transducer and pipe fittings before loosening any components. Remove the signal wire connector from the connector on the transducer.

Step 3: Step 4:

WARNING

Hot hydraulic oil can spray with extreme force and volume causing injury or death. Use lockout and tagout procedures to guard against inadvertent hydraulic system or machine start up during service or maintenance. Allow the hydraulic system to cool before maintenance or repair. Slowly release pressure or vent circuits before disconnecting hydraulic lines. Wear appropriate face and body protective devices while carefully loosening any connection or fitting.
Step 5: Step 6:

Confirm that hydraulic pressure is completely vented before loosening the pressure transducer. Unthread and remove the transducer from the 1/4" high pressure pipe fitting.

3.3.12.3 Cleaning, Inspection, and Repair


Clean and inspect the pressure transducer in accordance with the general procedures for cleaning and inspection in Appendix A. The pressure transducer is non-repairable, and therefore must be replaced with a new unit if damaged. See the LinkOne electronic parts manual for pressure transducer information.

3.3.12.4 Installation
Install the pressure transducer as follows:
Step 1:

Apply a coating of pipe thread sealant to the 1/4" male pipe threads, and install the transducer in the shuttle valve circuit. Install the signal wire connector and seal to the connector on the transducer.

Step 2:

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.87Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

3.3.13 Hydraulic Pressure Switch R24844D1

Figure 3-47: Hydraulic Pressure Switch

3.3.13.1 Location
The hydraulic pressure switch (Item 02, Figure 3-46) is mounted on the wall behind and below valve bank 2, and is connected to a shuttle valve installed as part of the relief/unload oil diverter valve assembly on valve bank 1. The pressure transducer has a 1/4" NPT female pipe thread for connection to the hydraulic circuit. It is connected to the electrical system with a 1/2 NPT conduit connection.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.88-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

3.3.13.2 Adjustment
Adjust the hydraulic pressure for 100 psi as follows:

LEGEND 01. Cover 02. Indicator 03. Pressure Setting Gauge 04. Self-Locking Adjustment Screw 05. Screwdriver Figure 3-48: Hydraulic Pressure Switch Adjustment Step 1: Step 2:

Remove cover (01) to gain access to the self-locking adjustment screw (04). Use a screwdriver to adjust the setting on the pressure switch. Observe the indicator (02) to determine the switch is set to 100 psi (6.9 bar). Electrical testing can confirm that the switch closes when hydraulic pressure reaches 100 psi, and remains closed until pressure drops below 80-95 psi.

Step 3:

3.3.13.3 Maintenance and Repair


Clean and inspect the pressure switch in accordance with the general procedures for cleaning and inspection in Appendix A. The pressure switch is non-repairable, and therefore must be replaced with a new unit if damaged. See the LinkOne electronic parts manual for pressure switch information.

3.3.13.4 Removal
To remove the pressure switch from the system, proceed as follows:
Step 1:

Position the drill in a flat, level area. The ground must be stable and the area must be safe from hazards.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.89Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.
Step 2:

Lock out and tag out the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance activities. Clean all dirt away from the pressure switch and pipe fittings before loosening any components. Remove the wire connector from the switch.

Step 3: Step 4:

WARNING

Hot hydraulic oil can spray with extreme force and volume causing injury or death. Use lockout and tagout procedures to guard against inadvertent hydraulic system or machine start up during service or maintenance. Allow the hydraulic system to cool before maintenance or repair. Slowly release pressure or vent circuits before disconnecting hydraulic lines. Wear appropriate face and body protective devices while carefully loosening any connection or fitting.
Step 5: Step 6:

Confirm that hydraulic pressure is completely vented before loosening the pressure switch. Unthread and remove the switch from the 1/4" high pressure pipe fitting.

3.3.13.5 Installation
Install the pressure switch as follows:
Step 1:

Apply a coating of pipe thread sealant to the 1/4" male pipe threads, and install the transducer in the shuttle valve circuit. Attach the wire connector to the switch.

Step 2:

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.90-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

3.3.14 Leveling System Pressure Switches 79Z2750D2

LEGEND 01. Setting Adjustment 02. Lock Nut 03. Range Scale 04. Setting Indicator 05. Operation Indicator 06. Differential Adjustment

Figure 3-49: Hydraulic Pressure Switch

3.3.14.1 Location
The relief pressure switch (Item 03, Figure 3-46) is mounted on the wall behind and below valve bank 2, and is connected to a shuttle valve installed as part of the relief/unload oil diverter valve assembly on valve bank 1. The pressure transducer has a 3/8" SAE connector for connection to the hydraulic circuit. It is connected to the electrical system with a 1/2 NPT conduit connection. Jack pressure switches are located on the upper jack housing. Pressure switches for the front jacks are mounted on the upper housing of the right front jack. Pressure switches for the rear jacks are mounted on each jack housing.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.91Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

3.3.14.2 Adjustment
Levelling system pressure switches and their settings are described in Table 3-3:
Circuit Location Function Indicates that all jacks are in contact with the ground and starting to lift the drill. Indicates that pressure is significantly higher than normal. Indicates that the front jacks are in contact with the ground. Indicates that the left rear jack is in contact with the ground. Indicates that the right rear jack is in contact with the ground. Set to trip when jack pad comes in contact with the ground Setting

Relief Pressure Switch

Near Valve Bank 2

2825 psi

Overpressure Switch

Right Front Jack Housing

150% of recorded lifting pressure (refer to Overpressure Switch)

Front Jack Pressure Switch Left Rear Jack Pressure Switch Right Rear Jack Pressure Switch

Right Front Jack Housing

Left Rear Jack Housing

Right Rear Jack Housing

Table 3-3: Valve Bank Pressure Switch Settings

Relief Pressure Switch


The relief pressure switch indicates to the PLC that all of the leveling jacks have reached the ground. Refer to Figure 3-49 and adjust the relief pressure switch for 2825 psi as follows:
Step 1: Step 2:

Loosen lock nut (02) to allow movement of the adjustment screw (01). Use a screwdriver to adjust the setting on the pressure switch. Observe the indicator (04) to determine the switch is set at 2825 psi (195 bar). Electrical testing can confirm that the switch closes when hydraulic pressure reaches 2825 psi.

Step 3:

Overpressure Switch
Step 1:

Attach a 3000 psi gauge to Port GA on the front regeneration valve.

WARNING

Contact with rotating machinery and live electrical circuits can cause personnel injury or death. Before starting the drill be sure all personnel are clear of drill mast, moving machinery, rotating shafts, electrical cabinets and other areas that may be hazardous.
Step 2: Step 3:

Start the drill. Actuate the front jack raise sequence until the front jacks are supporting the weight of the drill.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.92-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

Step 4: Step 5: Step 6:

Record the pressure required to support the front of the drill on jacks. Actuate the front jack lower sequence until the jacks are fully retracted. Turn off the drill.

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.
Step 7:

Lock out and tag out the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance activities. Refer to Figure 3-49. Loosen lock nut (02) to allow movement of the adjustment screw (01). Use a screwdriver to adjust the setting on the pressure switch. Observe the indicator (04) to determine the switch is set to approximately 150% of the pressure recorded in Step 4 above.

Step 8: Step 9:

Jack Pressure Switches


The jack pressure switches indicates to the PLC that the associated leveling jack(s) have reached the ground. Refer to Figure 3-49 and adjust all three jack pressure switches to close when the jack has reached the ground as follows:
Step 1: Step 2:

Loosen lock nut (02) to allow movement of the adjustment screw (01). Use a screwdriver while observing the indicator (04) to adjust the setting on the pressure switch to approximately 200 psi (13.8 bar).

WARNING

Contact with rotating machinery and live electrical circuits can cause personnel injury or death. Before starting the drill be sure all personnel are clear of drill mast, moving machinery, rotating shafts, electrical cabinets and other areas that may be hazardous.
Step 3: Step 4: Step 5:

Start the drill. Actuate the jack raise sequence for the front jacks circuit until the jacks contact the ground. Confirm that the pressure switch closes when both jacks contact the ground. If it does not, note that the pressure setting must be decreased. Actuate the jack raise sequence for the left rear jack circuit until the jack contacts the ground. Confirm that the pressure switch closes when the jack contacts the ground. If it does not, note that the pressure setting must be decreased. Actuate the jack raise sequence for the right rear jack circuit until the jack contacts the ground.

Step 6: Step 7:

Step 8:

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.93Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Step 9:

Confirm that the pressure switch closes when the jack contacts the ground. If it does not, note that the pressure setting must be decreased.

Step 10: Turn off the drill. Step 11: For any switch that did not close when the jack(s) came in contact with the ground, adjust the pressure

switch to a lower pressure and re-test.

3.3.14.3 Maintenance and Repair


Inspect the pressure switch in accordance with the general procedures for cleaning and inspection in Appendix A. Test the switch for satisfactory hydraulic pressure and electrical function. The pressure switch is non-repairable, and therefore must be replaced with a new unit if damaged. Refer to Figure 3-50 and pre-adjust the replacement switch on a test bench to the pressure setting specified in Subtopic 3.3.14.2. See the LinkOne electronic parts manual for pressure switch information.
LEGEND 01. Port-a-Power 02. Gauge 03. Tee Fitting 04. Hose 05. Adapter 06. Pressure Switch

01 02 03

04

05

06

BD0575a01

Figure 3-50: Bench Test Set-up

3.3.14.4 Removal
To remove the pressure switch from the system, proceed as follows:
Step 1:

Position the drill in a flat, level area. The ground must be stable and the area must be safe from hazards.

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.
Step 2:

Lock out and tag out the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance activities. Clean all dirt away from the pressure switch and pipe fittings before loosening any components. Remove the wire connector from the switch.

Step 3: Step 4:

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.94-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

WARNING

Hot hydraulic oil can spray with extreme force and volume causing injury or death. Use lockout and tagout procedures to guard against inadvertent hydraulic system or machine start up during service or maintenance. Allow the hydraulic system to cool before maintenance or repair. Slowly release pressure or vent circuits before disconnecting hydraulic lines. Wear appropriate face and body protective devices while carefully loosening any connection or fitting.
Step 5: Step 6:

Confirm that hydraulic pressure is completely vented before loosening the pressure switch. Uncouple the 3/8" SAE fitting and remove the switch.

3.3.14.5 Installation
Install the pressure switch as follows:
Step 1: Step 2:

Couple the 3/8" SAE fitting to install the transducer in the shuttle valve circuit. Attach the 1/2 wire connector to the switch.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.95Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

3.3.15 Regeneration Valve 36U437D1

Figure 3-51: Regeneration Valve

3.3.15.1 Description
One regeneration valve is used in each of the three jack circuits. Figure 3-51 illustrates one of the valves installed on a jack housing. These valves are cartridge type valves, and, therefore, do not require removal from the piping to replace a cartridge or the seals.

3.3.15.2 Service
Remove a regeneration valve cartridge assembly as follows:
Step 1:

Position the drill so that it is supported on the crawler tracks, and the jack pads are resting on firm ground with no applied load.

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.
Step 2:

Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance activities. Tag and disconnect the electrical connector from the solenoid valve operator.

Step 3:

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.96-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

Step 4:

Remove the nut that retains the solenoid coil, and remove the coil from the valve.

WARNING

Hot hydraulic oil can spray with extreme force and volume causing injury or death. Use lockout and tagout procedures to guard against inadvertent hydraulic system or machine start up during service or maintenance. Allow the hydraulic system to cool before maintenance or repair. Slowly release pressure or vent circuits before disconnecting hydraulic lines. Wear appropriate face and body protective devices while carefully loosening any connection or fitting.
Step 5:

Confirm that no pressure exists in any of the auxiliary hydraulic system circuits.

CAUTION
Clean any dirt away from the valve assembly and hydraulic hose fittings before loosening any of the hydraulic components.
Step 6:

With a wrench, loosen and remove the valve cartridge from the valve body. Be sure to use the wrench flats provided for removal. Do not attempt to loosen the cartridge by turning on the pressure adjustment assembly. Plug the hole in the valve body to prevent entry of loose or airborne dirt. Inspect the O-rings and back-up rings on the outside diameter of the valve cartridge. Remove and discard them if they are damaged.

Step 7:

3.3.15.3 Cleaning, Inspection, and Repair


Clean and inspect the valve assembly in accordance with the general procedures for cleaning and inspection in Appendix A. The cartridge valves are not field repairable. Replace any faulty valve cartridges, all O-rings. and back-up rings. See the LinkOne electronic parts manual for cartridge and seal kit information.

3.3.15.4 Cartridge Installation


To install the valve cartridge into the valve body, proceed as follows:
Step 1:

Lightly lubricate the new O-rings and back-up rings for the cartridge valve, and install them in the grooves on the outside diameter of the valve cartridge. Carefully install the valve cartridge into its seat in the manifold. Avoid displacement or cutting of the seals during installation. Torque the valve to 225 12 ft-lbs (305 16 Nm). Install the solenoid coil on the valve with the solenoid nut. Connect the electrical connector to the valve solenoid. Start the hydraulic systems, bleed the air from the jack circuit, and test the function of the replaced regeneration valve.

Step 2:

Step 3: Step 4: Step 5:

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -3.97Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

3.3.16 Troubleshooting
Problem Possible Cause Control valve does not shift correctly System oil level is low External leak in system dirty filters System fails to build pressure clogged inlet line clogged tank breather fluid is too cold main drive motor is not operating pump drive coupling failed relief or unloading valve set too low pump is damaged pump is cavitating Excessive hydraulic pump noise Remedy Replace the Relief/unload/oil diverter valve Replenish tank supply Tighten components and bleed air from system Replace the filters Clean the inlet line Clean or replace the breather Heat the fluid Repair or replace the main drive motor Repair or replace the coupling Adjust the valve to the correct setting Repair or replace the pump Refer to System fails to build pressure Leak in the inlet line to the pump. Tighten the fittings Faulty pump shaft seal. Replace the seal pump is cavitating Refer to System fails to build pressure Leak in the inlet line to the pump. Tighten the fittings Faulty pump shaft seal. Replace the seal contaminated fluid Drill pipe racks operate too slow or too fast the needle valve is out of adjustment or faulty the needle valve is out of adjustment or faulty Change filters and replace the fluid Adjust the needle valve for correct operating speed. If unable to adjust, replace the needle valve Adjust the needle valve for correct operating speed. If unable to adjust, replace the needle valve Adjust the unloading relief valve to operate at 1100 psig (75.9 bar). If unable to adjust, repair or replace valve Adjust or replace the flow control valves

air in the fluid

Excessive system heat

air in the fluid

Leveling jacks and winch move slowly

The unloading relief valve is faulty Breakout Wrench moves too fast or too slow

faulty flow control valves

Table 3-4: Auxiliary Hydraulic System Troubleshooting

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 3, Version 00 - 03/06

-3.98-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec03AuxHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Hydraulic System

Section 4

Main Hydraulic System


4.1 General
The Main Hydraulic System provides fluid power to operate the propel function of the drill. Two main pumps supply hydraulic flow, one to each of the side frames. This section describes the theory of operation of the main hydraulic system and provides information for adjustment, removal, and installation of the major components.

4.2 Theory of Operation


The system consists of two independent closed loop hydrostatic drives, which provide the torque to operate the propel transmissions. The major components include: a hydraulic tank, two identical variable-displacement hydraulic pumps, two variable-displacement hydraulic motors, system control valves, and hydraulic oil filters. The propel motors and brakes are an integral part of the propel transmission. Each of the propel circuits is an independent closed loop system. The system is pressurized by a small-volume charge pump, which is tandem mounted on the main piston pump drive shaft. In addition to maintaining the basic loop system pressure, the charging pump provides pressure for the pump servo controls, motor displacement control, and the brake release circuits. When the drill is operating in propel mode, and the operator moves the joystick controller away from the NEUTRAL position, the electro-hydraulic servo control on the pump is energized. Energizing the servo control causes the pump pistons to begin to stroke. The direction and amount of movement of the joystick away from NEUTRAL position determines the direction of oil flow from the pump main ports (through A or B) and establishes the volumetric displacement of the pump pistons. When the displacement of the pistons is increased, the flow rate of oil discharging from the pump into the motor circuit increases, causing the propel motor to turn faster.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec04MainHyd.fm

-4.1-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 4, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

The block diagram at Figure 4-1 demonstrates system operation.

R57531-2

Figure 4-1: Main Hydraulic System Block Diagram

4.2.1 Hydraulic Tank R6908D1


The oil for the main hydraulic system comes from the hydraulic tank. The main hydraulic system and the auxiliary hydraulic system share a common oil tank. The tank is located in the lubrication room on the forward right portion of the machinery deck. For a detailed description of the hydraulic tank and its components, refer to Subtopic 3.2.1.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 4, Version 00 - 03/06

-4.2-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec04MainHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Hydraulic System

4.2.2 Main Hydraulic Pumps R51924D1

Figure 4-2: Main Pump

4.2.2.1 Description
The two main hydraulic pumps, mounted on the forward side of the pump drive transmission (PDT), are identical. They are axial piston pumps with a rotary servo, trimmer, adjustable volume stops, and a neutral bypass with detent (not spring or pressure centered). The pumps are configured to supply hydraulic fluid to the hydraulic motors and brakes for the propel system. The pumps also provide braking for the propel motors when the controls are placed in neutral position. Servo pressure from the right pump is used to release the hoist brake and to adjust the displacement of the propel motors.The pumps contain: an axial piston crossover-center variable pump which controls the speed and direction of the motor actuator; the auxiliary gerotor pump which supplies servo pressure (for controlling the displacement of the variable pump) and replenishment pressure; the servo pressure relief valve; the replenishment pressure relief valve; and the replenishment check valves for legs A & B.

4.2.2.2 Theory of Operation


When the main motor starts, the PDT causes the pump to turn; however, during normal start-up, the pump is in the neutral position and oil pressure does not develop in the main hydraulic circuit. When the operator places the drill in PROPEL mode and moves the joystick, a signal is provided to the electrohydraulic stroker. The stroker (or servo) causes the swash plate within the motor to rotate. The movement of the swash plate causes oil to move through the main hydraulic circuit. The movement of the servo determines the rate of oil flow through the circuit as well as the direction.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec04MainHyd.fm

-4.3-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 4, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

R57531-3a

Figure 4-3: Main Hydraulic Pump

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 4, Version 00 - 03/06

-4.4-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec04MainHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Hydraulic System

4.2.3 Propel Motors 41U100D2

Figure 4-4: Propel Motor

Motors receive oil flow from the main pump. The variable displacement motors can be controlled for either high speed and low torque, or low speed and high torque, through the operators speed control. The propel motors are integral components with the propel transmissions; brakes are internal to the component. Brakes are hydraulically released and spring set. In order for the brakes to release, the switch on the operators console must be in the RELEASE position, and the joystick must be moved off neutral. This permits oil to flow from the pilot control valve bank to cause the brakes to release.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec04MainHyd.fm

-4.5-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 4, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

R57531-3b

Figure 4-5: Propel Motor Schematic

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 4, Version 00 - 03/06

-4.6-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec04MainHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Hydraulic System

4.2.4 Pilot Control Valve Bank 36U435D4

LEGEND 01. Propel Speed Valve

02. Left Brake Valve 03. Right Brake Valve Figure 4-6: Pilot Control Valve Bank

The pilot control valve bank is in the lubrication room, between the hydraulic tank and the low pressure valve stand. It contains three valves: the speed control valve, the left brake valve and the right brake valve.

4.2.4.1 Speed Valve


In its de-energized state, the speed valve directs oil from the pumps H port to a blocked port on the pilot control valve bank. The motor then receives no pressure through its X port, and the motor is fully stroked (low speed, high torque). When the operator places the speed switch in the high speed position, this causes the propel speed solenoid to energize. When the valve spool shifts, oil from port B of the speed valve enters the motor through port X and destrokes the motors swash plate, providing higher speed and lower torque.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec04MainHyd.fm

-4.7-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 4, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

4.2.4.2 Brake Valve

WARNING

Uncontrolled drill movement can cause severe personal injury or death. Always confirm that the tow bar is attached to both the drill and the tow vehicle before using the hand pump to release the propel brakes.
The brake valve solenoids energize when the operator presses the brake release switch on the operators console. Oil is not provided to release the brakes, however, until the joystick is moved, which causes the pumps internal porting to open and allows oil to flow through the Z port to the brake valve.

Figure 4-7: Pilot Control Valve Bank

4.2.4.3 Towing System

CAUTION
Excessive speed can cause substantial damage to propel system components. Never tow the drill faster than the drill can propel itself.
When the drills motor is not running, the pumps that supply the oil to release the propel brakes cannot perform that function. When it is necessary to tow the drill, the propel brakes must be released by hydraulic pressure provided by a hand pump located near the front right corner of the drill. The hand pump also includes an accumulator and a pressure gauge to assist with maintaining pressure to the brake during long moves. Spring-loaded breakaway valves are provided to allow the brakes to set if the tow vehicle should separate from the drill.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 4, Version 00 - 03/06

-4.8-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec04MainHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Hydraulic System

4.3 Main Hydraulic System Maintenance


4.3.1 Hydraulic Tank R6908D1
07 06 05 02 03 04

01

08 09 10

11

BD0361a01

LEGEND 01. Suction Filters 02. Temperature Probe 03. Hydraulic Tank 04. Low Level Switch

05. 06. 07. 08.

Breather Return Filters OIl Level Gauge Placard Oil Level Sight Glass

Figure 4-8:

4.3.1.1 Description
The auxiliary hydraulic system and the main hydraulic system share a common oil tank. The tank is located in the lubrication room on the forward right portion of the machinery deck. For detailed description about maintaining the hydraulic tank and its components, refer to Subtopic 3.2.1.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec04MainHyd.fm

-4.9-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 4, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

4.3.2 Main Hydraulic Pumps R51924D1

Figure 4-9: Main Pump

4.3.2.1 Pump Start-up, Adjustment and Functional Testing


This procedure is to be used for start-up and functional testing of the main hydraulic pumps and propel system after installation on the drill. The procedure is suitable for periodic testing of the pumps to confirm normal operation. Onthe-drill testing of these pumps is limited to a few basic pressure measurements, observations and adjustments. However, more thorough testing can be done only by removing the pumps from the system, installing them on a hydraulic test stand, and implementing complete pressure, flow, and controls functional tests to rated design capacity.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 4, Version 00 - 03/06

-4.10-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec04MainHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Hydraulic System

Refer to Figure 4-10 and proceed with pump start-up and functional checkout as follows:
03

01 08

02

07 06

05

04

BD0051b03

LEGEND 01. Valve Block 02. Port V 03. Port D 04. Indicator

05. 06. 07. 08.

Port VA (Port VB opposite) Port A Port B Compensator Adjustment

Figure 4-10: Pump Start-up and Functional Check Step 1: Step 2: Step 3:

Fill the hydraulic oil tank to the correct level with oil as specified in Topic 16.5. Confirm that all of the main hydraulic system suction and pressure filters are clean. Confirm that there is hydraulic oil present at drain port D. If oil is present, the pumps are primed. Add if necessary. Back out the compensator adjustment on the pump valve block assembly (behind the acorn nut) until there is no spring resistance.

Step 4:

CAUTION
Do not over-tighten the compensator adjustment screw assembly when making adjustments, or damage to the screw may result.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec04MainHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -4.11Section 4, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Step 5:

Disconnect the electrical connectors from the right and left propel brake solenoid valves on the Propel Control Valve Bank in the lubrication room. Refer to Figure 4-11.

02

01 03

04

05

BD0577a01

LEGEND 01. Electrical Connectors 02. Propel Brake Valves

03. Propel Speed Valve 04. Spare 05. Pilot Valves (towing system)

Figure 4-11: Pilot Control Valve Bank

NOTICE
With the electrical connectors disconnected from the brake valves, the propel brakes should not be able to release and the propel drive should not be able to rotate.
Step 6: Step 7:

Install a 0 - 1500 psi (103.5 bar) gauge onto the pressure taps, one for each charge filter. Install a 5000 psi (345 bar) (minimum) pressure gauge on the A port of each pump.

CAUTION
Operating the pump with low charge pressure could cause substantial damage to the pump. If the gauge does not register specified pressure within a few seconds, shut down the drill and determine the cause. Do not operate the drill if charge pressure is low.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 4, Version 00 - 03/06

-4.12-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec04MainHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Hydraulic System

Step 8: Step 9:

Start the main drive motor. Confirm the charge pressure reading on the 0 - 1500 psi gauges registers 250 - 350 psi (17.5 - 24 bar). of the ground.

Step 10: Raise and level the drill on the jacks. The drill must be raised until the crawler belts are completely clear

Step 11: Allow the hydraulic systems to operate until normal operating temperature is reached (usually about 15

minutes).
Step 12: Set the propel mode normal/maintenance switch to MAINTENANCE position.

WARNING

Unexpected machine movement or operation can cause serious injury or death. When necessary to operate the drill to make an adjustment or perform a check on the propel drive system, position a person to watch the crawler mechanism and to keep personnel at a safe distance from the drill. Always use the cab horn (in accordance with local policy) to signal that the drill is about to move.
Step 13: Set the mode select propel/hoist/drill switch to PROPEL position. Step 14: Assign someone to watch the crawler mechanism for motion, and to keep others away from the drill dur-

ing the propel drive adjustment and testing.


Step 15: Have the operator move the propel joystick to the FORWARD position, and turn the compensator adjust-

ment screw on the pump inward until the pump port A pressure reads 4200 psi (283 bar).

NOTICE
The indicator should remain on, or very near, the zero position.
Step 16: Confirm that there is no rotation of the crawler tumblers. Step 17: Move the gauges to the B port of each pump. Step 18: Move the propel joystick to the REVERSE position. Pressure in the pump port B circuit should now be

4200 psi (283 bar).

NOTICE
The indicator should remain on, or very near, the zero position.
Step 19: Confirm that there is no rotation of the crawler tumblers. Step 20: Return the propel joystick to NEUTRAL position, and confirm that the pressures at ports A and B are

equal. If they are not, adjust the NULL of the pump as follows: a. Turn the spring stop adjustment in or out until it just contacts the spring and there is no free play. Lock in place. Then proceed with step 2 below.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec04MainHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -4.13Section 4, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

b. Turn the trimmer screw to place the input shaft in the zero stroke position. Check for positive centering. Lock in place. For cross-center pumps, set maximum volume stops so that the servo shaft link touches stop pins when the handle is stroked each side of center. For one side of center pumps, set maximum stop so that the servo shaft link touches the stop pin. Set the minimum stop to prevent crossing over center. Lock the stops in place. c.

Apply signal current to one proportional valve. Adjust current from minimum to maximum. Note the pressure and current values at which the pump just starts to stroke and at which the pump reaches full stroke. These must be within the values shown in Table 4-1.
COIL 12V CONT PR MIN DISPL 75 15 psi 5.17 1 bar 24V 75 15 psi 5.17 1 bar 180 30 MA MIN DISPL 360 60 CONT. PR MAX. DISPL 250 25 psi 17.2 1.7 bar 250 25 psi 17.2 1.7 ba 325 55 MA MAX DISPL 650 110

Table 4-1: Pump Adjustment Data

d. If control pressure is off the same amount at the start and end of the stroke, the control may be disassembled and the spring adjusted. One flat (1/6 of a turn) of adjustment will change the pressure by 4.6 psi (0.31 bar). e. If the change in pressure from start to end of stroke is incorrect, the spring is incorrect and must be replaced. f. g. If pressures are correct but current is incorrect, then either the coil is incorrect or the proportional valve is bad. With minimum signal, the pump must return to zero stroke within 200 psi (13.8 bar) maximum.

h. For cross-center pumps, repeat the test on the opposite side of center. i. Increase and decrease current between minimum and maximum several times. Pump stroke should follow control pressure smoothly and proportionally. Full stroke to zero or zero to full stroke should be achieved in no more than two seconds. Adjust stroke from zero stroke up to approximately 50% stroke and then adjust down from full stroke to the same current value. The flow at the two settings must not vary more than 25%.

Step 21:

Check the propel brake set/release switch to be sure it is in the SET position. lubrication room.

Step 22: Connect the electrical connectors to the right and left brake solenoids Propel Control Valve Bank in the

Step 23: Move the propel brake set/release switch to RELEASE position. Step 24: Check the hydraulic pressure on the gauges at pressure test points G1 and G2 on the Propel Control

Valve Bank in the lubrication room.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 4, Version 00 - 03/06

-4.14-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec04MainHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Hydraulic System

NOTICE
Brake operating pressure must be at least 250 psi (18 bar) at pressure test points G1 and G2.
Step 25: Move the propel speed hi/low switch to the LOW position.

WARNING

Unintentional machine movement or operation can cause serious injury or death. When necessary to operate the drill to make an adjustment or perform a check on the propel drive system, position a person to watch the crawler mechanism and to keep personnel at a safe distance from the drill.
Step 26: Be sure that someone is still positioned to watch the crawler mechanism for motion, and to keep others

away from the drill during the propel drive adjustment and testing.
Step 27: Move the propel joystick to the full FORWARD position and check the rotational speed and direction of

the left and right crawler drive tumblers. Both should rotate at 4 rpm in the forward direction.
Step 28: Return the propel joystick to the NEUTRAL position. There should be no movement of the crawler drives. Step 29: Move the propel joystick to the REVERSE position and check the rotational speed and direction of the left

and right crawler drive tumblers. Both should rotate at 4 rpm in the reverse direction.
Step 30: Return the propel joystick to the NEUTRAL position. There should be no movement of the crawler drives. Step 31: Move the propel speed hi/low switch to the HIGH position. Step 32: Move the propel joystick to the full FORWARD position and check the rotational speed and direction of

the left and right crawler drive tumblers. Both should rotate at 6.6 rpm in the forward direction.
Step 33: Return the propel joystick to the NEUTRAL position. There should be no movement of the crawler drives. Step 34: Move the propel joystick to the REVERSE position and check the rotational speed and direction of the left

and right crawler drive tumblers. Both should rotate at 6.6 rpm in the reverse direction.
Step 35: Return the propel joystick to the NEUTRAL position. There should be no movement of the crawler drives. Step 36: Move the propel brake set/release switch to the SET position. Step 37: Lower the drill off the jacks, and raise the jacks to fully stored position. Step 38: Check the pump compensator adjustment to be certain the locknut is tight and the acorn nut is securely in

place on the adjustment screw.

NOTICE
Over-tightening of the locknut can damage the compensator adjustment.
Step 39: Remove the test gauges from the pressure tap fittings, and check the entire system for leaks.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec04MainHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -4.15Section 4, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Technician Tip
When the main pumps and the propel motors are set up and functioning correctly, the appropriate speeds will be achieved in the propel system. If the crawlers still do not track straight after the pumps have been adjusted (and flow and pressure confirmed), refer to motor adjustment procedure in Subtopic 9.3.1.4.

4.3.3 Removal
To remove either of the hydrostatic pumps from the pump drive transmission, proceed as follows:

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.
Step 1:

Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance activities. Clean all dirt away from the pump, hose, and electrical fittings.

Step 2:

WARNING

Hot hydraulic oil can spray with extreme force and volume causing injury or death. Use lockout and tagout procedures to guard against inadvertent hydraulic system or machine start up during service or maintenance. Allow the hydraulic system to cool before maintenance or repair. Slowly release pressure or vent circuits before disconnecting hydraulic lines. Wear appropriate face and body protective devices while carefully loosening any connection or fitting.
Step 3:

Check to be certain that the hydraulic pressure is completely vented from the high-pressure and control pressure circuits. Close the hydraulic tank Handwell valves. Tag and remove the hydraulic hoses from the pump. Cap or plug all hose fittings and pump ports. Tag and disconnect the electrical control wiring from the electrohydraulic stroker control on the pump. Attach a suitable hoist to the pump to prevent an overhung load on the shaft when the mounting bolts are loosened. Protect the external tubing on the pump from being bent or crushed. Mark the pump, if more than one is being removed, to assure that it is remounted at the same shaft position on the transmission.

Step 4: Step 5: Step 6: Step 7:

Step 8:

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 4, Version 00 - 03/06

-4.16-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec04MainHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Hydraulic System

Step 9:

Remove the capscrews and lockwashers from the mounting flange of the pump, and pull the pump away from the pump drive transmission. Use care to prevent binding of the shaft or damage to the spline teeth when withdrawing the pump from its mounting.

Step 10: Inspect the pump and pump drive transmission splines for damage.

4.3.4 Installation
To install the pump on the pump drive transmission, proceed as follows:

CAUTION

Disassembling heavy components with inadequate hoisting apparatus can injure personnel and/or damage equipment. Use suitable rigging and hoisting equipment to stabilize and lift heavy objects.
Step 1:

Using a suitable hoist, lift the pump into position at the rear of the pump drive transmission. Be careful to avoid bending or pinching the external tubing on the pump with the sling. Grease the female spline with lithium grease before inserting the splined pump shaft. Insert the shaft of the pump into the bore of the pump drive transmission. Be careful to avoid side loading and/or binding of the shaft as the pump is moved into position against the transmission. Coat the threads of two 5/8" capscrews with sealing grease (P&H Spec 499). Insert capscrews with lockwashers to fasten the pump to the pump drive transmission. Fill the pump case with clean oil, then install the hydraulic hose assemblies in accordance with the identification tags placed during pump removal. Install the electrical wiring to the electrohydraulic stroker control in accordance with the identification tags placed during pump removal. Open the Handwell valve. Install a 0 - 1500 psi (103.5 bar) gauge into the charge pump circuit (atop the charge filter). Start the pump and monitor charge pressure. Refer to the start-up procedure in steps 6 through 9 in Subtopic 4.3.2.1.

Step 2: Step 3:

Step 4:

Step 5:

Step 6:

Step 7: Step 8: Step 9:

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec04MainHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -4.17Section 4, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

4.3.5 Pilot Control Valve Bank (Valve Bank 4) 36U445D4

02

01 03

04

05

BD0577a01

LEGEND 01. Electrical Connectors 02. Propel Brake Valves

03. Propel Speed Valve 04. Spare 05. Pilot Valves (towing system)

Figure 4-12: Pilot Control Valve Bank

The Pilot Control Valve Bank, also known as Valve Bank 4, contains three identical solenoid valves: Right Propel Brake, Left Propel Brake, and Propel Speed. It also includes two pilot valves for the tow circuit. Each valve is a twoposition, four-way valve with solenoid and manual actuation with a spring return. Field repair of the valves is limited to the replacement of the solenoid coil and O-rings.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 4, Version 00 - 03/06

-4.18-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec04MainHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Hydraulic System

4.3.6 Charge Filter 46Z547

Figure 4-13: Charge Filters

The charge filter assembly is mounted in-line between ports G and H on each of the two main hydraulic pumps, mounted on a bracket over the PDT. The function of these filters is to ensure the cleanliness of the pressurized oil stream from the control pressure (charge pressure) section of the main hydraulic pump, and to prevent fouling of the main pump control valves. These by-pass type filters are rated at 30 gpm (113.6 lpm) maximum flow, and 2500 psi (172.5 bars). The by-pass is set to open when flow pressure differential across the filter exceeds 30 psid (2.1 bars differential). A single 3-micron element is used for oil filtration. The filter assembly includes a by-pass indicator that sends a signal to the PLC, which will initiate a fault indicator on the GUI. It is not necessary to remove the filter assembly from the line to replace the element or seals. Inspect the filter units during PM for visible damage, leaking seals, or leaking fittings. If the GUI indicates that the filter is bypassing, the element should be replaced. Replace the charge filter elements as follows:

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine startup during maintenance.
A. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine startup during maintenance activities.

WARNING

Hot hydraulic oil can spray with extreme force and volume causing injury or death. Use lockout and tagout procedures to guard against inadvertent hydraulic system or

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec04MainHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -4.19Section 4, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

machine start up during service or maintenance. Allow the hydraulic system to cool before maintenance or repair. Slowly release pressure or vent circuits before disconnecting hydraulic lines. Wear appropriate face and body protective devices while carefully loosening any connection or fitting.
B. Be sure that no pressure exists in any of the main hydraulic system circuits.

01 02
LEGEND 01. Pressure Test Port 02. Filter Cap 03. Bleed Port

03

BD0579a01

Figure 4-14: Charge Filter Ports

C. Remove the bleed plug located on bottom of the filter. Drain oil from the filter into a pail before removing the filter element.

NOTICE
Clean dirt from the filter assembly before loosening the bleed plug and filter cap.
D. Loosen and remove the cap from the filter body. E. Remove the old filter element and examine its condition for clues to potential problems. Discard the old filter element only after it has been examined. F. Inspect the bottom of the filter bowl for debris. Look here as well for clues to potential problems. Clean the bowl if necessary. G. Check the cap seal O-ring and back-up ring for nicks or damage. Replace these components as necessary. H. install a new filter element into the body of the filter. Be sure the element is correctly located on the bottom seat. I. Apply a coating of hydraulic oil to the O-ring and back-up ring, and install with the filter cap. Torque the cap securely. J. Install the bleed plug securely in the filter.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 4, Version 00 - 03/06

-4.20-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec04MainHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Hydraulic System

K. Start the hydraulic pumps, and bleed the trapped air from the main hydraulic system. This can be done using the Microbore hose in the hydraulic test kit. Attach to the pressure test port on the top of the charge filter and allow the discharge to shoot into a pail.

4.4 . Troubleshooting
Component problems and circuit problems are often interrelated. An incorrect circuit may operate with apparent success, but will cause failure of a particular component within it. The component failure is the effect, not the cause of the problem.
Problem Noisy Pump Possible Cause Air in fluid Remedy Repair leak in suction line Repair leak at shaft seal Fill tank to correct fluid level Eliminate fluid turbulence in tank Cavitation in pump or motor rotating group Increase fluid temperature, but do not exceed 180F (82C) Decrease fluid viscosity Clean suction strainer Misaligned shaft Check pump shaft for misalignment Check and relieve any axial interference Mechanical fault in pump Return the pump to P&H MinePro Services for repair, or replace the pump

Table 4-2: Main Hydraulic System Troubleshooting

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec04MainHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -4.21Section 4, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Problem High wear in pump or motor

Possible Cause Contaminant in fluid

Remedy Replace filters Replace dirty hydraulic fluid Keep all tank openings covered Check tank breather Clean fittings before replacement

Incorrect fluid

Use correct fluid for operating temperature Replace fluid broken down due to time/temperature/ shearing effects

Incorrect repair

Return the pump to P&H MinePro Services for repair, or replace the pump.

Water in fluid

Eliminate source of condensation in tank Replace faulty breather Eliminate faulty clean-up practices Check for water in make-up fluid

Erosion on barrel port and port plate

Air in fluid

Repair leak in suction line Repair leak at shaft seal Fill tank to correct fluid level Eliminate fluid turbulence in tank

Cavitation

Increase fluid temperature, but do not exceed 180F (82C) Decrease fluid viscosity Clean suction strainer

Table 4-2: Main Hydraulic System Troubleshooting

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 4, Version 00 - 03/06

-4.22-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec04MainHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Hydraulic System

Problem Pressure shocks

Possible Cause Clogged load Worn relief valve Worn compensator Slow response in check valves Servo pressure too low to maintain firm control Barrel low-off

Remedy Look for mechanical problems Repair as required Repair as required Replace valve Increase pressure and check pressure drop through the servo filter Re-check the pump holddown, rotating group and drain pressure Re-check case drain flow and repair as required Replace fluid that is too thin Inspect for incorrect port timing

Heating of Fluid

Excessive pump or motor leakage

Relief valve

Adjust pressure that is set too low Eliminate instability caused by back pressure, worn parts

Compensator

Adjust pressure that is set too high (compared to relief) Replace worn parts

Heat exchanger

Clean cooling fan Remove mud or scale deposits from the heat exchanger Eliminate cause of intermittent fluid flow

Tank

Maintain correct fluid level

Table 4-2: Main Hydraulic System Troubleshooting

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec04MainHyd.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -4.23Section 4, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 4, Version 00 - 03/06

-4.24-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec04MainHyd.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Power Unit

Section 5

Power Unit
5.1 General
The power unit provides a single source of torque with which to drive the main air compressor and the three pumps for the auxiliary and main hydraulic systems. Major components of the power unit include the electric main drive motor, the hydraulic pump transmission, and the main air compressor. These are mounted on a rigid base as a unitized assembly. The structural section of the base is sized to retain alignment of all components, regardless of the mounting support. Refer to Figure 5-1.

01

02

03

04

05

06 11

10
BD0398b01

09

08

07
06. 07. 08. 09. 10. 11. Main Air Compressor Compressor Coupling Base PDT Coupling Pump Drive Transmission (PDT) Main Hydraulic Pump

LEGEND 01. Charge Filter 02. Auxiliary Pump 03. Main Drive Motor 04. Compressor Air Cleaner 05. Main Air Compressor Inlet Valve

Figure 5-1: Power Unit

5.1.1 Power Unit Assembly Alignment


The power unit components -- that is, the main AC drive motor, the main air compressor and the pump drive transmission -- are mounted to a steel skid. This arrangement is intended to reduce the flexing between the motor and

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec05PowerUnit.fm

-5.1-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 5, Version 00 - 03/06

Power Unit

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

compressor and thus preventing premature failure of the coupling, and secondly to be used as a tool to keep realignment adjustments to a minimum in field installations. If any of these components is replaced in the field, first check to ensure that:

Shaft is concentric to the motor end cover pilot Both pilots and faces of adapter mounting are concentric and parallel Compressor input shaft is concentric to the bell housing pilot
The following steps needs to be carried out for either motor or compressor field installation: 1. Make sure the machine is level (use a spirit level). 2. Make sure that all mating surfaces and foot mounting pads are clean. 3. Remove adapter from motor or compressor. 4. Fit motor or compressor to respective mounting pads on the skid. Tighten mounting bolts. (Do not install coupling at this stage.) 5. Use a magnetic base dial indicator to determine height difference between compressor and motor shaft. Add shims to foot mountings on the lowest component. Max .015" (.381mm) TIR. If motor is lower than compressor, motor base bolts must be loosened and shimmed accordingly. (If motor is lower, pump drive transmission will have to be re-aligned.) 6. Loosen compressor foot mounting bolts and remove compressor. 7. Slide coupling hubs onto their respective shafts. Do not tighten. 8. Re-install adapter to motor. Install and tighten bolts. Torque to 266 ft-lbs (360 Nm) dry. Remove inspection covers. 9. Re-install compressor using shims as established in step 5. Install base mounting bolts, do not tighten. 10. Fasten adapter to compressor/motor foot mounting bolts and torque compressor bolt's 266ft-lbs (360Nm) dry, motor bolt's 650 ft-lbs. (880 Nm) dry. 11. Remove adapter inspection cover to gain access to coupling. 12. Slide coupling hubs together. Inside gap should be a nominal 1/8" (3.175mm). Install flexible inserts into either coupling half. Slide flexible insert retainer cover onto hub and fasten. 13. Insure that equal length of shaft extends into each hub, secure both hubs with set screws provided and torque to 110 in-lbs. (12Nm) 14. Insert dowels on either end of mounting adapter.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 5, Version 00 - 03/06

-5.2-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec05PowerUnit.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Power Unit

NOTICE
If new or different compressor/motor is installed, new holes are to be drilled and reamed for dowels in new locations. Do not use existing holes. Holes are to be drilled 29/64" (11.508mm) then reamed with number 8 taper pin reamer.
15. Dowel both compressor and motor feet to base. If either the compressor or the motor is a new or service exchange unit, new dowel holes are to be drilled in different locations. Holes are to be drilled .500" (12.7mm) and reamed with a number 9 tapered pin reamer. If pump drive transmission coupling has to be re-aligned then the following steps should be followed. 16. Loosen bolts on the PDT mounting plate. Do not remove. 17. Remove dowel pins from mount to skid and dowel pins from mount to PDT. Remove coupling guard. 18. Check and align coupling. Max TIR .008" (2.03mm) 19. Fasten bolts mounted to PDT and mount to skid. Torque to 266 ft-lbs (360Nm). 20. Confirm alignment within .008" (2.03mm). If alignment is within tolerance, lubricate the spacer with grease and install the spacer between the coupling halves. 21. Drill one pilot hole, 15/32" (11.907mm) diameter, through the mounting plate and into PDT. Do not drill deeper than 1" (25mm) into PDT. Drill one hole, 15/32" (11.907mm) in diameter, through the mounting plate into the skid. Ream hole to .4996" (12.67mm) and install dowels. Do not use old holes. 22. 22. Install coupling guards.

5.2 Theory of Operation


5.2.1 Main Drive Motor 5100A1368F12
The drill is powered by a double-shafted, high-voltage AC electric motor. The motor is sized, at 700 HP (at 60 Hz), to provide the total torque needed to operate the main air compressor and the pumps for both the main and auxiliary hydraulic systems.

5.2.2 Air Compressor 51U165D4


The air compressor is coupled to the motor drive shaft at one end of the motor. Compression of the air is accomplished by the main and secondary rotors synchronously meshing in a one-piece cylinder. The main rotor has four helical lobes spaced 90 apart. The secondary rotor has five matching helical grooves 72 apart to allow meshing with the main rotor lobes.

NOTICE
The Air Compressor is covered in Section 6, Bailing Air System.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec05PowerUnit.fm

-5.3-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 5, Version 00 - 03/06

Power Unit

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

5.2.3 Hydraulic Pump Drive Transmission (PDT) GH5829479


The hydraulic pump drive transmission is coupled to the motor shaft at the other end of the motor. The power unit is mounted to the machinery house deck with four isolator mounts to minimize the effects of machinery vibration. All four hydraulic pumps are flange-mounted to the output shafts of the pump drive transmission.

5.3 Main Hydraulic System Components


5.3.1 Main Drive Motor
5.3.1.1 General
The power unit is driven by a double-shafted, high-voltage AC electric motor. The motor operates the main air compressor and the pumps for the main and auxiliary hydraulic systems. The motor is direct coupled to the compressor and pump drive transmission with flexible couplings.

5.3.1.2 Removal
Remove the main drive motor from the power unit base as follows:

WARNING

Hazardous voltage can cause burns, injury, or death. Disconnect, lock open, and tag the power source which feeds the main drive motor to prevent power from being applied while inspection and repairs are being performed. Before beginning repairs, try the operational controls to verify that the intended power source is disconnected.
1. Disconnect, lock out, and tag the power source to the main drive motor to prevent power from being applied while service being performed. 2. Clean all dirt from the pumps, hoses, and electrical fittings. 3. Tag and disconnect the electrical wiring and conduit from the main drive motor. 4. Tag and disconnect the electrical control wiring from the electrohydraulic stroker controls on the main hydraulic pumps.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 5, Version 00 - 03/06

-5.4-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec05PowerUnit.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Power Unit

5. Refer to Figure 5-2 and remove the capscrews, lockwashers, and the two cover plates from the compressormotor mount adapter.

Figure 5-2: Power Unit, Exploded View

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec05PowerUnit.fm

-5.5-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 5, Version 00 - 03/06

Power Unit

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

LEGEND 01. Nut 02. Band 03. Capscrew 04. Air Cleaner 05. Service Indicator 06. Bracket 07. Hose Clamp 08. Hose O9. tube 10. Capscrew 11. Lockwasher 12. Inlet Manifold 13. Gasket 14. Inlet Manifold 15. Capscrew 16. Lockwasher 17. Oil Filter 18. Filter Gasket 19. Nut 20. Capscrew 21. Shim Set

22. Filter 23. Adapter 24.tapered Pin 25. Cover 26. Lockwasher 27. Capscrew 28. Flexible Coupling 29. Key 30. Flexible Coupling 31. Key 32. Guard 33. Capscrew 34. Capscrew 35. Dowel Pin 36. Base 37. Capscrew 38. Mounting Pad 39. Mounting Pad 40. Mounting Pad 41. Mounting Pad 42. Shim 43. Shim

44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. 61. 62. 63. 64. 65.

Capscrew Dowel Pin Mount Dowel Pin Capscrew Lockwasher Nut Lockwasher Pipe Nipple Drain Cock Hex Nipple Elbow Hydraulic Pump Capscrew Pump Drive Trans. Hydraulic Pump Lockwasher Capscrew Capscrew Cover Gasket Cover Electrical Indicator

Figure 5-3: Legend for Figure 5-2

6. Remove the nuts, lockwashers, and capscrews from the motor and adapter flanges. 7. Remove the four dowel pins, nuts, lockwashers, and capscrews from the motor feet. 8. Open roof (if mast is vertical) to lift motor out.

CAUTION

Disassembling heavy components with inadequate hoisting apparatus can injure personnel and/or damage equipment. Use suitable rigging and hoisting equipment to stabilize and lift heavy objects.
9. Attach a suitable lifting device to the motor, and lift enough of the motor weight to enable sliding it away from the compressor-motor adapter. Do not lift the motor off the base until the flexible coupling halves are separated. Retain the coupling insert with to the compressor half of the coupling. 10. Lift the motor away from the power unit base and set it on wooden blocking to protect the mounting foot surfaces. Keep the motor shim set for re-use. 11. Clean and inspect the motor and power unit base components in accordance with the cleaning and inspection procedures described in Appendix A of this manual.

5.3.1.3 Installation
12. Install the main drive motor as follows (refer to Figure 5-2): A. Position the motor shim set on the power unit base.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 5, Version 00 - 03/06

-5.6-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec05PowerUnit.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Power Unit

CAUTION

Assembling heavy components with inadequate hoisting apparatus can injure personnel and/or damage equipment. Use suitable rigging and hoisting equipment to stabilize and lift heavy objects.
B. Attach a suitable lifting device to the motor, and position the motor on top of the shims. Continue to support most of the motor weight with the lifting device until the motor is in final position. C. Carefully slide the motor into position against the compressor-motor mounting adapter. Rotate the motor shaft as necessary so the coupling halves mate correctly. Be certain that the flexible insert is installed in the coupling. If the compressor has not been moved, the motor and compressor shafts should be correctly aligned by the mounting adapter. D. Position the shims as necessary under the motor feet, then install the dowel pins, capscrews, lockwashers, and nuts. Torque the nuts securely. E. Install the covers on the compressor-motor adapter with capscrews and lockwashers. F. Install the hydraulic pump drive transmission on the gear box mounts, as described under Subtopic 5.3.2.6. G. Install the electrical wiring to the main drive motor. H. Confirm alignment in accordance with Subtopic 5.1.1.

5.3.2 Hydraulic Pump Drive Transmission GH5429879


5.3.2.1 Description
The pump drive transmission (PDT) is a multi-shafted gear reducer that distributes torque from the electric main drive motor to the three attached hydraulic pumps. The output shafts to the pumps all rotate at the same speed. The input shaft of the hydraulic pump drive is connected to the main drive motor shaft by means of a flexible coupling. The hydraulic pumps are flange-mounted to the hydraulic pump drive transmission housing. A single pump on the forward side of the pump drive provides flow and pressure to the auxiliary hydraulic system. The two hydrostatic pumps for the main hydraulic system are located on the rear side of the pump drive. The pump drive transmission has a ventilated gear case. The gears are lubricated by a splash-type oil bath.

5.3.2.2 Removal
Removal. Remove the PDT as follows:

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.
1. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent operation of the machine during maintenance work.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec05PowerUnit.fm

-5.7-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 5, Version 00 - 03/06

Power Unit

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

2. Open the drain cock located on the bottom front side of the pump drive housing and drain the lubricating oil into a suitable container. The housing contains approximately 2 gallons (7.6 liters) of oil. 3. Remove the guard which encloses the flexible coupling between the main drive motor and the pump drive transmission. 4. Disconnect the pump drive from the main drive motor at the flexible coupling by removing the capscrews, washers, and locknuts which secure the pump drive to the coupling flange extension. Do not remove the attaching capscrews, washers, or nuts from the motor end of the flexible coupling at this time. The hydraulic pump drive can be removed from the power unit assembly with all pumps installed. The following procedure, however, assumes that all of the hydraulic pumps have been removed from the pump drive as described under the topics, Auxiliary Hydraulic Pump, Removal, and Main Hydraulic Pump.

CAUTION

Disassembling heavy components with inadequate hoisting apparatus can injure personnel and/or damage equipment. Use suitable rigging and hoisting equipment to stabilize and lift heavy objects.
5. Attach a suitable lifting device to stabilize the pump drive transmission. 6. Remove the pipe nipple, oil drain cock, hex nipple, and pipe elbow from beneath the pump drive housing. 7. Remove the four locating dowel pins from mount and the pump drive housing. Two dowel pins are on each side of the pump drive housing. 8. Remove the four capscrews and lockwashers which secure the pump drive housing to mount. 9. Open roof (mast vertical only) to access pump drive with a crane. 10. Remove the pump drive from the power unit assembly.

5.3.2.3 Disassembly
Disassemble the hydraulic pump drive transmission as follows:

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 5, Version 00 - 03/06

-5.8-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec05PowerUnit.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Power Unit

1. Remove the coupling hub and sleeve from the pump drive input shaft as follows (refer to Figure 5-4):

06 05 07 04 03 02 09
BD0371a01

08

01 010
LEGEND 01. Capscrew 02. Sleeve 03. Hub 04. Gasket 05. Coupling Extension Figure 5-4: Pump Drive Flexible Coupling

06. 07. 08. 09. 10.

Gasket Sleeve Hub Locknut Washer

NOTICE
The following equipment is required: A suitable hydraulic puller with an adjusting assembly and a crosshead leg assembly having SAE Grade 8 studs, two rosebud torches, heat resistant gloves and a fire extinguisher.
A. Thoroughly clean the coupling hub to be removed to avoid combustion when heat is applied. B. Place the pump drive housing on a support with the input shaft facing up.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec05PowerUnit.fm

-5.9-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 5, Version 00 - 03/06

Power Unit

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

C. Drill and tap the face of the coupling hub for the appropriate puller leg thread size, as shown in Figure 5-5.

02 01

03

04 05 06 07 08
LEGEND 01. Gauge 02. Adjusting Screw 03. Plate 04. Hydraulic Cylinder 05. Bar Stock 06. Shaft 07. Coupling Hub 08. Torch

BD0372b01

Figure 5-5: Coupling Hub Removal

D. Assemble the puller as illustrated in Figure 5-5. Check to be sure the puller has enough stroke to pull the hub off the input shaft.

SAFETY FIRST
Surfaces will be extremely hot. Be certain to wear all appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE).
E. Heat the hub evenly with a rosebud torch to approximately 300 - 500F (150-260C) while applying pressure with the puller. The temperature of the hub may be measured with a heat sensitive crayon.

CAUTION
Excessive heat can damage hub teeth. Avoid placing the heat directly on the hub teeth. Apply the heat as shown in Figure 5-5.
F. Apply puller pressure until the hub clears the shaft. 2. Refer to Figure 4-5 and disassemble the pump drive housing as follows: A. Thoroughly clean the split housing exterior using a suitable solvent. Make sure the disassembly area is clean. Place the assembled pump drive so the oil drain side of the housing is facing down on the work support, and the input shaft facing up. B. Remove the dowel pins which align the two housing halves.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 5, Version 00 - 03/06

-5.10-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec05PowerUnit.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Power Unit

C. Separate the housing halves using bolts as jacking screws in the tapped holes provided in the housing flanges.

CAUTION

Disassembling heavy components with inadequate hoisting apparatus can injure personnel and/or damage equipment. Use suitable hoisting equipment to stabilize and lift heavy objects.
D. Using a suitable lifting device, remove the upper housing half. Bearings will remain on the input shaft and pump drive (output) shafts in the lower housing half. The bearing/seal carrier will remain with the upper housing half along with seal, O-ring and snap ring. E. Note the orientation of the seal lip and bearing seal carrier to ensure proper reassembly. Then, remove all necessary parts from the upper housing. It is normally unnecessary to remove the pump adapters (14) from the housings in order to disassemble the pump drive transmission.

NOTICE
The disassembly method for each pump drive (output) shaft is identical. The following procedure will apply equally to each.
F. Remove snap ring and the splined adapter from each end of output shaft. G. Press against the lower end of the output shaft and remove the shaft with bearings in place on the shaft. H. Remove the bearings from the shaft using a puller which contacts only the inner race of the bearings. I. Remove the gear spacers and the gear from the shaft.

5.3.2.4 Repair
Clean and inspect all of the pump drive transmission components in accordance with the general cleaning and inspection procedures described in Appendix A of this manual. Replace all worn or damaged parts. Replace all gaskets.

5.3.2.5 Assembly
Assemble the pump drive transmission as follows: 1. Reinstall the bearings on their respective shafts, being careful to press only on the inner race. Be sure the bearings are pressed fully onto the shaft. 2. Lubricate bearings with light oil and install seal using Loctite Plastic Gasket 54931 on the outer diameter. Assemble seal carrier with Loctite 609. Grease the seal surface before installing. 3. Install all pump drive shafts in the lower housing half and secure with snap rings. 4. Install all splined adapters and secure with snap rings. 5. Use SAF-T-LOK Silicone Sealant No. 732 to seal the pump drive housing halves and install the upper housing half on the lower half.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec05PowerUnit.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -5.11Section 5, Version 00 - 03/06

Power Unit

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

6. Install the locating dowel pins in the housings. 7. Tighten bolts and nuts to 60 ft-lbs (81 Nm), following the bolting sequence illustrated in Figure 5-6.

BD0399a01

Figure 5-6: Bolt Tightening Sequence

8. Reinstall the coupling hub and coupling half on the input shaft as follows: A. Place the sleeve on the input shaft with the flange facing away from the pump drive transmission housing. B. Heat the hub to 275T (135C) using one of the following methods: 1). For oven heating, set the oven thermostat to 275F (135C) and heat the hub at least one hour for each inch of wall thickness. Do not allow the hub teeth to come into contact with the heat source.

WARNING

Use of an open flame in a combustible atmosphere can ignite the atmosphere or cause an explosion resulting in the injury or death of personnel and damage to equipment. Do not use an open flame in a combustible atmosphere or near combustible materials.
2). For oxy-acetylene or blow torch heating, mark the hub with a 275T temperature sensitive crayon in several places near the teeth. Direct the flame toward the hub bore and keep it in motion while heating to avoid overheating an area. Do not apply heat directly to the hub teeth. When using an oxy-acetylene torch, use an excess acetylene mixture. C. Mount the hub on the shaft as quickly as possible to avoid heat loss. Make certain that the position of the hub teeth relative to the shaft end is correct before assembling. Line up the bore with the shaft and slide the hub onto the shaft until the hub face is flush with the end of the shaft.

NOTICE
If it is necessary to drive the hub into position, tap lightly with a soft brass or lead hammer. Do not strike the hub teeth or pound hard enough to damage bearings.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 5, Version 00 - 03/06

-5.12-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec05PowerUnit.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Power Unit

D. Allow the hub to cool.

5.3.2.6 Installation
Install the pump drive transmission as follows (refer to Figure 5-2): 1. Using a suitable lifting sling, position the pump drive housing in mount on the power unit base, and secure it lightly with the mounting capscrews and lockwashers. Do not tighten fully at this time. 2. Install the four dowel pins which accurately position the pump drive housing relative to the two gear box mounts, then complete tightening of the mounting capscrews. 3. Using a dial indicator, check the alignment of the coupling hubs on the motor shaft and pump drive shaft. Alignment must be parallel within 0.002" TIR. Always rotate the hub on which the dial indicator is mounted and mount the dial indicator on the most easily rotated hub.

NOTICE
The coupling extension will need to be removed from the coupling assembly to enable checking overall hub-to-hub alignment.
4. Install the coupling extension with two new gaskets, capscrews, lockwashers and locknuts. 5. Lubricate the coupling using the lubricant specified in the Lubrication Chart. To do so, fill the front section with lubricant until an excess appears at an open hole. Plug that hole. Continue with the rear section until lubricant appears out the rear hole. Plug that hole. 6. Install the coupling guard between the motor and the pump drive housing with capscrews and lockwashers. 7. Install the pipe elbow, hex nipple, drain cock, and pipe nipple beneath the pump drive housing. 8. Confirm alignment in accordance with Subtopic 5.1.1. 9. Install the hydraulic pumps. Refer to Subtopic 4.3.4. 10. Fill the pump drive with 2 gallons (7.6 liters) of gear oil. Refer to Subtopic 17.3.2.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec05PowerUnit.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -5.13Section 5, Version 00 - 03/06

Power Unit

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 5, Version 00 - 03/06

-5.14-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec05PowerUnit.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Air System

Section 6

Main Air System


6.1 General
In order to drill most effectively, the rock chips and dust generated by the drill bit at the bottom of the blasthole must be removed. The main air system provides a large volume of air under pressure to blow these particles out of the hole. An additional benefit to providing air through the drill bit is that it helps keep the drill bit cool.

Figure 6-1: Main Air Compressor

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

-6.1-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Air System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

6.2 Theory of Operation

07 06 05 04 03 08

09 10

02 01
BD0384b01

LEGEND 01. Compressor Base 02. Isolation Mounts 03. Main Air Compressor 04. Main Air Compressor Oil Filter 05. Inlet Valve Manifold

06. 07. 08. 09. 10.

Inlet Valves Air Cleaner Support Bracket Air Cleaner Filters Bearing Oil Filter Main Motor

Figure 6-2: Main Air Compressor and Main Motor

6.2.1 Main Air Compressor 51U165D4


The main air compressor (Figure 6-2) is a single-stage, positive-displacement oil-flooded rotary screw compressor using two meshing helical rotors to effect compression. The compressor is protected against dust contamination by a pair of two-stage air filters, which are attached to the air inlet valves. The compressor is ported to accept an external, re-circulating supply of oil for cooling and lubrication. Oil is supplied at the compressor inlet, and mixes directly with the air being compressed. The compressed air-oil mixture flows from the compressor into the T tank (a combination oil reservoir and air-oil separator) where the majority of oil separates from the air stream. The separated oil, retained temporarily in the enlarged bottom of the T tank, is circulated through the oil temperature control and filter circuit, then back to the inlet of the compressor.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.2-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Air System

6.2.1.1 Compression Principle


The Compression Principle is demonstrated in Figure 6-3:

02

02

02

01

01

01
BD0388a01

LEGEND 01. Air In 02. Discharge Port Figure 6-3: Compression Principle

Compression of the air is accomplished by the main and secondary rotors synchronously meshing in a one-piece cylinder. The main rotor has four helical lobes spaced 90 apart. The secondary rotor has five matching helical grooves 72 apart to allow meshing with the main rotor lobes. The air inlet port is located on top of the compressor near the center. The discharge port is near the bottom at the opposite end of the compressor cylinder. The compression cycle begins as the rotors unmesh at the inlet port and air is drawn into the cavity between the main rotor lobes and the secondary rotor grooves (A, Figure 6-3). When the rotors pass the inlet port cutoff, air is trapped in the interlobe cavity and flows axially with the meshing rotors (B). As meshing continues, more of the main rotor lobe enters the secondary rotor groove, normal volume is reduced, and pressure increases.Volume reduction and pressure increase continues until the air/oil mixture trapped in the inter-lobe cavity by the rotors passes the discharge port and is released to the oil reservoir (C). Each rotor cavity follows the same fill-compress-discharge cycle in rapid succession to produce a continuous, smooth, and shock-free discharge air flow.

6.2.1.2 Air Flow


Air enters the compressor after first passing through the main compressor air cleaner and the inlet valves (refer to Figure 6-2). After compression, the air/oil mixture passes into the oil reservoir in the bottom of the T-Tank, where most of the entrained oil is removed by velocity change and impingement. The air and any remaining oil -- now a mist -- then pass through the oil separator in the upper leg of the T-Tank; the separated oil is returned to the system through tubing connecting the separator to the compressor. The air passes through the T-Tank discharge manifold, discharge minimum pressure relief valve, and bailing air control (butterfly) valve.

6.2.1.3 Lubrication, Cooling, And Sealing


An oil circulation pump draws oil from the oil reservoir. Oil is pumped through the oil cooler, thermal control (thermostatic mixing) valve, main oil filter, and bearing oil filter, and discharges into the main oil gallery of the compressor. A portion of the oil flow is directed through internal passages to the bearings, gears, and shaft oil seal. The

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

-6.3-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Air System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

balance of the oil is injected directly into the compression chamber to remove heat of compression, seal internal clearances, and to lubricate the rotors.

6.2.1.4 Turn Valve

Figure 6-4: Turn Valve

The turn valve is a rotary helical valve located near the discharge port. The turn valve is locked in place at the factory to produce maximum output. The turn valve can be unlocked via a set screw, enabling the turn valve to be turned to open and close cylinder ports that communicate with the inlet passage. This varies the compressor rotor volume to match the demand for air required for drilling.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.4-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Air System

6.2.2 Overview
Figure 6-5 shows the main air system schematic.

BD0515a01

Figure 6-5: Main Air System Schematic

For the purposes of this manual, discussion will be broken into three groups:

Air Intake (green outline). Refer to Subtopic 6.2.3. Oil Circulation (blue outline). Refer to Subtopic 6.2.4. Bailing Air Control (orange outline). Refer to Subtopic 6.2.5.
Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.5-

Main Air System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

6.2.3 Air Intake

06 05

07

04

04

08 03 09

02

02

BD0515b01

01

01

LEGEND 01. General 02. Vacuum Switches 03. Check Valve 04. Inlet Valves Figure 6-6: Air Intake

05. 06. 07. 08. 09.

Main Air Compressor Main Drive Motor Subtractive Pilot Valve Pilot Pressure Gauge Compressor Inlet Pressure Switch CIPS

6.2.3.1 General
Air from atmosphere is filtered through a pair of dual-stage air cleaners and a pair of inlet valves prior to entering the compressor. The inlet valves are closed at main motor start and modulated during operation by the subtractive pilot valve. Refer to Figure 6-6 as the functions of the components are described in the following subsections.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.6-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Air System

6.2.3.2 Main Compressor Air Cleaner 46Z534D1

Figure 6-7: Main Compressor Air Cleaner

Two double-element filters are installed, one in each air intake line. These filter the air going to the compressor.

6.2.3.3 Vacuum Switches R15628D1

Figure 6-8: Vacuum Switches

A vacuum switch is plumbed between the air cleaner and the inlet valve in each of the two air intake lines. The vacuum switch indicates to the PLC when a filter needs to be changed.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

-6.7-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Air System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

6.2.3.4 Inlet Valves

Figure 6-9: Compressor Inlet Valve Assembly

The inlet valves are piston-actuated devices. They close when the system is operating at full pressure, and the degree of opening changes as the system pressure changes. Refer to Figure 6-10, views A, B, C, D and E, which illustrate how the inlet valve assemblies operate

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.8-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Air System

.
Inlet

LEGEND 01. Adjusting Screw 02. Subtractive Pilot Valve 03. Spring 04. Poppet 05. Diaphragm 06. From Air Valve 07. Inlet Pressure Gauge 08. To Inlet Valve 09. From Low Pressure Hydraulic System 10. Control Piston 11. Piston 12. Piston Spring 13. Inlet Valve Stem 14. Inlet Valve Spring 15. Inlet Valve 16. Air from Filters 17. Air to Compressor

11

12 13 14 15 16

09 06 07 08

10

05 04 03 02 01

17

E
BD0527a01

Figure 6-10: Inlet Valve Modulation Operation

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

-6.9-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Air System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

A. COMPRESSOR IS OFF. Air pressure in line from air valve is zero. The subtractive pilot valve is closed, and pressure on the inlet pressure gauge is zero. No air pressure is acting on the cylinder cap, and no hydraulic pressure is acting on the cylinder cap. The piston spring holds the piston in the open position; however, the small, weak valve spring is strong enough to keep the valve over the opening so that dust and other contaminants do not enter the compressor. B. MAIN MOTOR STARTS. Air pressure in line from air valve is zero. The subtractive pilot valve is closed, and pressure on the inlet pressure gauge is zero. No air pressure is acting on the cylinder cap. Until the motor is running at normal speed, pilot hydraulic pressure from the low pressure hydraulic system moves the control piston in the cylinder. The main piston compresses the piston spring and pushes against the inlet valve stem, closing the valve. C. NORMAL OPERATION, FULLY UNLOADED. When pressure at the air valve is between 0 and 58 psi, the subtractive pilot valve is closed, and pressure on the inlet pressure gauge is zero. No air pressure is acting on the cylinder cap, and no hydraulic pressure is acting on the cylinder cap. The piston spring holds the piston in the open position. As the compressor lobes turn, sufficient vacuum is created to pull the inlet valve open against the small, weak inlet spring. Full air volume is available for compression. D. NORMAL OPERATION, MODULATING. When pressure at the air valve is between 58 and 65 psi, the subtractive pilot valve is partially open. Pressure on the inlet pressure gauge is between 0 and 21 psi.Air pressure working on the piston causes the piston to move in the cylinder. This causes the inlet valve to partially close off the flow of air through the inlet valve. E. NORMAL OPERATION, FULLY LOADED. When pressure at the air valve is over 65 psi, the subtractive pilot valve is fully open. Pressure on the inlet pressure gauge is 21 psi. Air pressure working on the piston causes the piston to move to the fully closed position, causing the inlet valve to completely close off the flow of air through the inlet valve. In this way, the inlet valves control air going to the air compressor based on demand. The condition of the inlet valves at various stages is recapped in Table 6-1
Drill State Shut down Startup (5 seconds) Running: fully unloaded Running: partially loaded Running: fully loaded Control Mechanism Valve spring Hydraulic pressure Subtractive Pilot Valve Subtractive Pilot Valve Subtractive Pilot Valve Table 6-1: Inlet Valve States Inlet Valve State Fully closed Fully closed Fully open Partially open Fully closed

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.10-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Air System

6.2.3.5 Compressor Inlet Pressure Switch CIPS R7090D1

Figure 6-11: Compressor Inlet Pressure Switch CIPS

The compressor inlet pressure switch is mounted on the air control panel in the machinery house. It indicates to the PLC that the low pressure hydraulic system is sending hydraulic fluid to the intake valves to keep the intake valves closed during start-up. When the CIPS closes, it sends a signal to the PLC that pressure in the low pressure hydraulic line reaches 275 psi, and the main motor can start.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -6.11Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Air System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

6.2.3.6 Pilot Air Pressure

LEGEND 01. Inlet Pressure Gauge 02. Subtractive Pilot Valve

Figure 6-12: Pilot Air Pressure Gauge and Subtractive Pilot Valve

The pilot air pressure gauge is mounted on the air control panel, above the subtractive pilot valve. The pilot air pressure is a function of main air pressure acting through the subtractive pilot valve. Refer to Table 6-2.
Inlet Valve State Shut down: closed Startup (15 seconds): closed Open: fully unloaded Modulating: partially unloaded Closed: fully loaded Main Air Pressure 0 psi 0 psi 0-58 psi 58-65 psi over 65 psi Table 6-2: Inlet Pressure Gauge Readings Pilot Pressure Gauge Reading 0 psi 0 psi 0 psi 0-21 psi 21 psi

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.12-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Air System

6.2.3.7 Check Valve 36Z1245D1

Figure 6-13: Inlet Valve Bypass Line Check Valve

When system air pressure is at or above 65 psi, inlet valves are closed and no air is allowed into the system; however, the compressor continues to turn. If a vacuum develops between the inlet valve and the air compressor, noisy operation results. To avoid this undesired operation, a line with a check valve has been installed between the main compressor air cleaner and the compressor that bypasses the inlet valve on the left side and permits a small amount of air to enter the system. The check valve works in conjunction with the Air Pilot Valve to move some air through the compressor, which also serves to keep the screws lubricated. Quiet, smooth operation results.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -6.13Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Air System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

LEGEND 01. Oil line from low pressure hydraulic system (only functions at startup) 02. Air line from subtractive pilot valve 03. Oil return line from T-Tank oil separator (scavenger line) 04. Bypass air line (from check valve) Figure 6-14: Inlet Valve Lines

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.14-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Air System

6.2.4 Oil Circulation

12 10 11 09 07 13 14 06 08

05 15 17 02 18 16
BD0515c01

04 M 03

19 01 01

LEGEND 01. Inlet Valve 02. Main Air Compressor 03. Main Motor 04. Compressor Air Temperature Gauge 05. Compressor Air Temperature Probe 06. Compressor Oil Temperature Probe 07. T-Tank 08. Main Air Pressure Differential Gauge 09. Main Air Pressure Differential Switch

10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19.

Oil Separator Element Shut-off (Drain) Valve Circulation Pump Thermostatic Mixing Valve Compressor Oil Cooler Compressor Oil Flow Switch Compressor Oil Pressure Switch Compressor Main Oil Filter Compressor Oil Pressure Differential Switch Compressor Oil Pressure Differential Gauge

Figure 6-15: Oil Circulation

6.2.4.1 General
Oil is induced into the air compressor to lubricate the lobes and to act as an air seal. As the air moves through the compressor, the oil is entrained with it. This oil is removed from the air before the air is sent out to the bit. The oil is then cooled and filtered and returned to the compressor. Refer to Figure 6-15 as the functions of the components are described in the following subsections.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -6.15Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Air System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

6.2.4.2 Compressor Air Temp Gauge 5826907

Figure 6-16: Compressor Air Temperature Probe and Gauge

The Compressor Air Temperature Gauge is located on the discharge pipe exiting on the right side of the compressor. It indicates the current temperature of the discharge air/oil mixture. During operation, the compressor should maintain a normal operating temperature of 180-185F (82-85C).

6.2.4.3 Compressor Air Temp Probe 89Q136D1


The Compressor Air Temperature Probe is located on the discharge pipe exiting on the right side of the compressor. It sends a signal to the PLC indicating the current temperature of the air discharge.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.16-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Air System

6.2.4.4 T-Tank R55420F1

Figure 6-17: T-Tank

T-Tank is the common name for the oil separator/reservoir. It is mounted on the When the oil and air mixture enters from the compressor, the majority of the oil falls out of the air by gravity and impaction. The oil is recirculated through the cooler and the filter, then returned to the air compressor.

6.2.4.5 Compressor Oil Temp Probe 89Q136D1


The Compressor Oil Temperature Probe is inside the T-Tank, and sends a signal to the PLC indicating the current temperature of the oil inside the T-Tank.

6.2.4.6 Oil Separator Elements 5010587, 5010588


Part of the T-Tank, the two oil separator filter sections extend upward from the main reservoir. Each contains a twostage oil remover, which removes oil that is still entrained as a mist in the main air flow. The oil removed by the separators returns by a different path from the path of the majority of the oil in the T-Tank. It returns to the compressor through the scavenger lines, filtered but without going through the oil cooler.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -6.17Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Air System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

6.2.4.7 Main Air Pressure Differential Switch 5000261 and Gauge 89Z559

Figure 6-18: Main Air Pressure Differential Switch and Gauge

This two-position manual switch is mounted on the air control panel. Changing the position of the knob causes the associated gauge to read the air pressure either before the oil separators or after the oil separators, depending on its position. Decisions regarding changing or cleaning the oil separator filter elements can be based on the differential between the two readings.

6.2.4.8 Shutoff Valve R6902D4

Figure 6-19: T-Tank Shutoff Valve

The shutoff valve is located on the underside of the T-tank. It is used to isolate system components during maintenance.

6.2.4.9 Circulation Pump R56963D1


An oil circulation draws oil from the oil reservoir. Oil is pumped through the oil cooler, thermal control (thermostatic mixing) valve, main oil filter, and bearing oil filter, and discharges into the main oil gallery of the compressor. A portion of the oil flow is directed through internal passages to the bearings, gears, and shaft oil seal. The balance of the oil is injected directly into the compression chamber to remove heat of compression, seal internal clearances, and to lubricate the rotors.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.18-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Air System

The oil circulation pump is a self-contained assembly that incorporates a mounting frame, a 20 horsepower motor, coupling and gear pump rated at 150GPM. The assembly mounts horizontally between the T-tank and the house wall on the left hand platform next to the T-tank. Refer to Figure 6-20.

Figure 6-20: Oil Circulation Pump and Motor

Pump discharge piping includes an in-line check valve to provide pump relief. A second in-line oil check valve is included to limit T-tank back-pressure. These components are positioned below the left hand platform near the pump package. Pump discharge piping parallels the outside of the house, then enters the cooler room and terminates at the compressor cooler inlet. A bypass line plumbs off a tee connection to the check valve located inside the cooler room. The cooler discharge piping re-enters the house and joins into the compressor oil filter.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -6.19Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Air System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

6.2.4.10 Thermostatic Mixing Valve R38039D2

Figure 6-21: Thermostatic Mixing Valve

The thermostatic mixing valve is mounted in the fan room at the front left corner of the drill. Access to the fan room is only from the left-hand platform. The thermostatic mixing valve has a 130F (54C) element. Oil moves through the valve and bypasses the cooler until the fluid temperature reaches approximately 120F (49C). As the temperature of the oil continues to rise, the valve slides farther open until it is fully open, porting all oil through the cooler, when oil temperature is 140F (60C).

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.20-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Air System

6.2.4.11 Compressor Oil Cooler R56899F1

Figure 6-22: Compressor Oil Cooler

The compressor oil cooler is mounted on the left front of the drill. Oil from the compressor is cooled by a fan drawing air through cooling fins on the cooler. The fan is driven by an electric motor.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -6.21Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Air System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

6.2.4.12 Compressor Oil Flow Switch COFS R29648D1

Figure 6-23: Compressor Oil Flow Switch COFS (typical; for reference only)

The compressor oil flow switch is mounted in the oil line just before the main compressor oil filter, to the right of the compressor. Its primary function is to indicate to the PLC that oil is flowing through the lines. During the main motor start-up sequence, the circulation pump is started. To confirm that the pump is on, the PLC monitors the flow switch. Once the flow switch closes, the PLC issues a 2-seconds delay to allow time for the oil to build pressure within the compressor. Then the main motor starts. The PLC continues to monitor the flow switch.

6.2.4.13 Compressor Oil Pressure Switch COPS 79Z5680D1

Figure 6-24: Compressor Oil Pressure Switch COPS

The compressor oil pressure switch is mounted on the air control panel. It indicates to the PLC that sufficient oil pressure exists to ensure proper compressor operation. The switch is set at 15 psi with a 7 psi differential; that is, the switch closes when oil pressure reaches 15 psi and stays closed until pressure drops below 8 psi (8 psi is the minimum operating pressure). The pressure switch is not recognized during the initial start of the main motor; how-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.22-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Air System

ever, during the first 5 seconds of motor operation, the PLC monitors oil flow. If the initial 5 seconds has elapsed and the pressure switch is not closed, the main motor will shut down and the GUI will register a fault.

6.2.4.14 Compressor Oil Filter R51071F1

Figure 6-25: Compressor Oil Filter

The compressor oil filter, mounted to the right of the air compressor, removes contaminates from the recirculated oil as it returns to the compressor.

6.2.4.15 Scavenger Oil Return Filter 5000348

Figure 6-26: Scavenger Oil Filter

Oil recovered from the T-Tank oil separator returns to the compressor through the scavenger lines. Scavenger oil is filtered by a spin-on filter at the air control panel.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -6.23Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Air System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

6.2.4.16 Compressor Oil Pressure Differential Switch 5000261 and Gauge 89Z559

Figure 6-27: Compressor Oil Pressure Differential Switch and Gauge

A two-position manual switch mounted on the air control panel causes the associated gauge to read the air pressure either before the oil separators or after the oil separators, depending on its position. Decisions regarding changing or cleaning the oil separator filter elements can be based on the differential between the two readings.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.24-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Air System

6.2.5 Bailing Air Control

10

09 08

07 06

02

01 03 04

BD0515e01

05
LEGEND 01. Moisture Removal Orifice 02. Main Air Pressure Switch MAPS 03. Bailing Air Pressure Transducer BAPT 04. Main Air Pressure Transducer MAPT 05. 06. 07. 08. 09. 10. Subtractive Pilot Valve Air Pilot Valve Muffler Relief Valve Butterfly Valve Dump Valve

Figure 6-28: Bailing Air Control

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -6.25Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Air System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

6.2.5.1 General
Bailing air provides sufficient quantity of air at sufficient pressure to remove rock chips and dust from the blasthole. Although the compressor is functioning the entire time the main motor is running, the air needs to be controllable so that compressed air is permitted to flow through the drill string only when required. Refer to Figure 6-28 as the functions of the components are described in the following subsections.

6.2.5.2 Subtractive Pilot Valve 36Q577D1

Figure 6-29: Subtractive Pilot Valve

After the main motor has been running for six seconds, the air compressor inlet valves open and air is compressed until a pressure of the subtractive pilot valve setting (typically 65 psig) is achieved. At that point, the subtractive pilot valve will cause the inlet valves to close again. The subtractive pilot valve continues to react to system pressure, and the compressor will compress air when and only when it is needed. The function of the subtractive pilot valve is described in greater detail in Subtopic 6.2.3.4.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.26-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Air System

6.2.5.3 Main Air Pressure Transducer MAPT 44Q1536

Figure 6-30: Main Air Pressure Transducer MAPT

The Main Air Pressure Transducer is mounted on the air control panel. Sensing before the butterfly valve, it indicates to the PLC that sufficient air pressure exists and the bailing air system can be used.

6.2.5.4 Bailing Air Pressure Transducer BAPT 44Q1536

Figure 6-31: Bailing Air Pressure Transducer BAPT

The Bailing Air Transducer is mounted on the air control panel. Sensing after the butterfly valve, it indicates to the PLC the pressure of air going to the bit.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -6.27Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Air System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

6.2.5.5 Main Air Pressure Switch MAPS R7090D1

Figure 6-32: Main Air Pressure Switch MAPS

The main air pressure switch is mounted on the air control panel. It closes when main air is 40 psi or greater, and opens when air pressure is 34 psi or less. When closed, it allows the butterfly valve motor control to energize.

6.2.5.6 Air Pilot Valve R56220D1

Figure 6-33: Air Pilot Valve

The air pilot valve is mounted on the bailing air pipe after the T-Tank. When the butterfly valve opens, pressure from the main line is piloted to the air pilot valve, which blocks the path to the muffler. When the butterfly valve closes, the pilot valve opens, allowing approximately 350 CFM of air to pass through. This valve is required to allow the compressor to still produce air flow, which is necessary to prevent the rotors inside the compressor from rumbling. The pilot valve works in conjunction with the bypass line and Check Valve to move some air through the compressor.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.28-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Air System

6.2.5.7 Muffler 27U762D1

Figure 6-34: Muffler

The muffler is clamped to the back brace support between the T-Tank and the machinery house. When the main air compressor is running and the bailing air is turned off, approximately 350 CFM exhausts to atmosphere through the muffler.

6.2.5.8 Relief Valve R6902D4

Figure 6-35: Relief Valve

The relief valve is mounted in the T-Tank. The setting for the relief valve is calibrated at the factory. At that time, the valve is preset and a tag is attached to the valve that contains the calibration numbers. No field adjustment is required.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -6.29Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Air System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

6.2.5.9 Butterfly Valve R51305D1

Figure 6-36: Butterfly Valve with Electric Actuator

The butterfly valve is mounted in the bailing air pipe between the relief valve and the dump valve. It features an electric actuator that is controlled through the PLC by a switch on the operators console. In order for the switch signal to be active, the Main Air Pressure Switch must be closed (i.e., main air pressure must be at least 40 psi).

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.30-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Air System

6.2.5.10 Dump Valve GH5000369

Figure 6-37: Dump Valve

This is a normally open, pressurize to close check valve. When pressure from the main air system acts on the valve, the valve closes. When the pressure is removed, the valve opens to allow air to exhaust without going through the drill string.

6.2.5.11 Water Injection


Water is injected into the air stream when the operator turns on the function on the operators console. The amount of water varies from 0 to 5 GPM. Refer to Section 16, Water Injection System for a detailed description.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -6.31Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Air System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

6.3 Main Air System Components


6.3.1 Main Compressor Air Cleaner 46Z534

LEGEND 01. Housing 02. Filter 03. Wing Nut/Indicator 04. Primary Filter 05. Wing Nut 06. Cover 07. Gasket

08. 09. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

Washer Cotter Pin Band Clamp O-ring Primary Body Band Clamp Cup Restriction Adapter

Figure 6-38: Main Compressor Air Cleaner

Service the main compressor air cleaner when necessary, as follows: 1. Shut down the main motor. 2. Remove primary element by removing attaching hardware. 3. Check the status of the safety element restriction indicator, which is part of the safety element retaining nut. Replace the safety element only if the indicator on the wing nut shows red. Reset the wing nut indicator by applying suction in accordance with the instructions on the wing nut. 4. Wipe out the filter housing with a damp cloth.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.32-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Air System

CAUTION
Filter damage will result if the air pressure is too high or if the air nozzle is held too close to the filter. Follow instructions to avoid damage to the filter element. Clean the elements away from the compressor, such as outside the machinery house or in a shop, to avoid contaminating the safety element (or the compressor inlet, if the safety element has been removed).
5. Clean primary element using compressed air on the pleated paper inside the element. Keep the air nozzle at least one inch from the pleated paper while rotating the element. Air pressure must not exceed 100 psi (6.9 bar). 6. Inspect the cleaned element by holding a light bulb inside it. Rotate the element slowly and inspect for damage. If the element is ruptured or has holes or gasket damage, replace it. Primary element can be cleaned up to six times if care is used. However, inner (safety) element should never be cleaned. Replace the safety element instead of cleaning it. Always replace safety element after three cleanings of primary element, more often if necessary. 7. Remove the primary body and clean either by using compressed air or by washing the tubes out with water. 8. Check the condition of the wing nut indicator. If the center has changed 9. Install parts in reverse order of removal, start the motor and see that the vacuum switches do not actuate.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -6.33Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Air System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

6.3.2 Main Air Compressor 51U165D4

07 06 05 04 03 08

09 10

02 01
BD0384b01

LEGEND 01. Compressor Base 02. Isolation Mounts 03. Main Air Compressor 04. Main Air Compressor Oil Filter 05. Inlet Valve Manifold

06. 07. 08. 09. 10.

Inlet Valves Air Cleaner Support Bracket Air Cleaner Filters Bearing Oil Filter Main Motor

Figure 6-39: Main Air Compressor

The main air compressor (Figure 6-39) is a single-stage, positive-displacement rotary machine using two meshing helical rotors to effect compression. The compressor is protected against dust contamination by a pair of two-stage air filters, which are attached to the air inlet valves. The compressor is ported to accept an external, re-circulating supply of oil for cooling and lubrication.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.34-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Air System

6.3.2.1 Removal
Refer to Figure 6-40 and remove the compressor from the compressor base for disassembly as follows:

Figure 6-40: Power Unit (exploded view)

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -6.35Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Air System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

LEGEND 01. Nut 02. Band 03. Capscrew 04. Air Cleaner 05. Service Indicator 06. Bracket 07. Hose Clamp 08. Hose 09. Tube 10. Capscrew 11. Lockwasher 12. Inlet Manifold 13. Gasket 14. Inlet Manifold 15. Capscrew 16. Lockwasher 17. Oil Filter 18. Filter Gasket 19. Nut 20. Capscrew 21. Shim Set

22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43.

Filter Adapter Tapered Pin Cover Lockwasher Capscrew Flexible Coupling Key Flexible Coupling Key Guard Capscrew Capscrew Dowel Pin Base Capscrew Mounting Pad Mounting Pad Mounting Pad Mounting Pad Shim Shim

44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. 61. 62. 63. 64. 65.

Capscrew Dowel Pin Mount Dowel Pin Capscrew Lockwasher Nut Lockwasher Pipe Nipple Drain Cock Hex Nipple Elbow Hydraulic Pump Capscrew Pump Drive Trans. Hydraulic Pump Lockwasher Capscrew Capscrew Cover Gasket Cover Electrical Indicator

Figure 6-41: Legend for Figure 6-40

WARNING

Working on or near rotating machinery while in operation is hazardous and can result in the injury or death of personnel. Shut down the main air compressor, and use lockout/ tagout procedures prior to starting any service on the machinery.
1. Lock out and tag the high-voltage main circuit breaker switch to prevent operation of the main drive motor during disassembly.

CAUTION

Pressurized oil will spray with extreme force from oil line fittings when being loosened, and can cause severe injury. Slowly release air pressure or vent the T-Tank before loosening any oil line fittings. Wear appropriate face, ear, and body protective devices while opening pressurized systems.
2. Vent any residual air pressure from the T-Tank. The T-Tank will self-vent through the pilot air valve and out the main air system muffler in approximately 2 minutes when the main air compressor is not operating and all controls are in the OFF position. 3. Tag and disconnect the oil pressure hose that is connected to the main oil filter flanged connection port on the compressor housing. This hose leads from the main oil filter element differential pressure test valve, which is mounted on the air control panel. 4. Disconnect the wires from the oil filter indicator, air filter indictors, and temperature probe.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.36-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Air System

5. Disconnect the compressor oil filter from the compressor housing by removing the capscrews, lockwashers, and gasket. Discard the used gasket.

CAUTION
Cap or plug all open oil lines to prevent entry of contaminants and dirt, and also to prevent spillage of oil.
6. Tag and remove the oil return line from the air-oil separator to the housing of the compressor air inlet valve(s). 7. Tag and remove the two hydraulic hoses attached to each compressor inlet valve from the low pressure hydraulic system. 8. Tag and remove the air pilot piping from the subtractive pilot valve and low-torque start-up circuits to the two inlet air valves. 9. Disconnect the air discharge pipe from the compressor by removing the eight bolts holding the compressor and pipe flanges together. Discard the used flange gasket. 10. Remove the two air inlet tubes that connect the air cleaner filters with the compressor inlet valves. Loosen hose clamps and slide hose sections onto the air inlet tubes. 11. Open house roof (if the mast is vertical) to allow components to be hoisted in and out. 12. Attach suitable hoisting equipment to the air cleaner support bracket during its removal from the compressor assembly. Unbolt and remove the bracket from the motor mount adapter flange and the inlet valve manifold flange. The two air cleaner filters can remain assembled to the bracket. 13. Attach suitable hoisting equipment to the inlet valve manifold, remove the 12 capscrews and lockwashers from the inlet manifold/compressor mounting flange, then remove the inlet manifold and manifold gasket from the top of the compressor. The two inlet valves need not be disassembled from the manifold. 14. Remove the adapter cover from each side of the compressor motor adapter to expose the drive coupling. 15. Disconnect adapter from the compressor by removing the eight capscrews, nuts, lockwashers, and the two taper pins from the compressor-side flange. 16. Disconnect the compressor from the power unit base by removing the four cap screws and lockwashers that fasten the compressor feet and shims to the base. Match mark the shims for later re-assembly.

CAUTION

Incorrect lifting of the compressor can cause serious injury or property damage. Be certain lifting rigging is secure and the hoist is of sufficient capacity before attempting the lift. (Weight of the bare compressor is approximately 4,000 pounds (1814 kg).
17. Using a suitable lifting device, lift the compressor enough to take most of the weight off the feet. Carefully slide the compressor axially away from compressor motor adapter to disengage the two halves of motor drive coupling. 18. Remove the flexible insert from motor drive coupling.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -6.37Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Air System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

19. Lift the bare compressor from the power unit base, and place it on secure wooden supports. 20. Loosen the motor drive coupling set screw, and use a suitable gear puller to remove the coupling from the compressor input shaft. 21. Remove the coupling key from the compressor input shaft with a soft drive plug.

6.3.2.2 Repair
Repair of the main air compressor requires special tools, test equipment, and experience to be performed correctly. Whenever the main air compressor requires repair or overhaul, contact your P&H MinePro Services representative.

6.3.2.3 Installation
Install the compressor on the compressor base and interconnect it into the system as described below. Refer to Figure 6-40 for identification and location of components. 1. Remove any nicks or burrs from the compressor input shaft keyway and drive coupling key, then install the key into the keyway. Be certain that the key is firmly seated on the bottom of the keyway, and that the key fits snugly in the keyway. 2. Heat the compressor half of drive coupling (refer to Figure 6-42) in oil, or an electric oven, to 350F (177C). Allow sufficient time for the heat to thoroughly penetrate the half-coupling, then install it on the compressor input shaft.

Figure 6-42: Flexible Coupling

3. Position the end of the compressor input shaft even with the bottom of the counterbore in the half-coupling, then tighten the set screw onto the key, and allow the half-coupling to cool. 4. When the half-coupling has cooled, remove the set screw, apply a coating of Loctite to the threads, then install and tighten the set screw securely. 5. Install the flexible insert for drive coupling onto the motor half of the coupling. 6. Position the four shims on the power unit base where the compressor feet are to be located.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.38-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Air System

WARNING

Incorrect lifting of the compressor can cause serious injury or property damage. Be certain that lifting rigging is secure and the hoist is of sufficient capacity before attempting the lift. Weight of the bare compressor is approximately 4,000 pounds (1850 kg).
7. Attach a suitable lifting device, and move the compressor into approximate mounting position over the power unit base. 8. Lower the compressor until it almost touches the shims, then push the compressor axially toward the motor until the drive coupling halves engage.

NOTICE
The motor shaft may need to be rotated and the elevation of the compressor may need to be adjusted with the hoist to accomplish engagement of the coupling halves.
9. Push the compressor mounting flange and compressor adapter flange together and fasten loosely with eight capscrews, lockwashers, and nuts. 10. Install two taper pins in the compressor mounting/motor adapter flanges, then torque the capscrews and nuts securely. 11. Install four capscrews and lockwashers through the compressor mounting feet and shims, then tighten securely. 12. Working through the access openings in compressor motor adapter, check the axial position of the drive coupling halves with a feeler gauge to confirm the 0.13" (3.302 mm) gap between faces (refer to Figure 6-42). If the gap is not within 0.020" (0.508 mm) of 0.13" (3.302 mm), the compressor must be removed from the base, and the half coupling position on the compressor input shaft must be adjusted accordingly. Then re-install the compressor in accordance with Steps 7 through 12. 13. Install the two adapter covers on the compressor motor adapter with cap screws and lockwashers. 14. Attach suitable hoisting equipment to the inlet valve manifold, and install the compressor inlet valve manifold and two inlet valves, as a subassembly, onto the top of the compressor. Install with a new flange gasket and torque the 12 mounting bolts and lockwashers securely. 15. Attach suitable hoisting equipment to the air cleaner support bracket, including the two air cleaner filters, and hoist the subassembly into place for installation. Install the bracket by bolting it to the compressor-side flange of the compressor motor adapter and the inlet valve manifold flange on the compressor. 16. Close the roof after the last heavy piece has been placed. 17. Position one of the air inlet tubes between an inlet valve and an air cleaner filter and slide a hose onto the inlet manifold. Slide the opposite hose onto the air filter. Adjust the engagement of hoses on the tube, manifold, and air filter so there is sufficient overlap for clamping; Fasten hoses in position with hose clamps. Repeat this step for the other tubing assembly. 18. Install main oil filter assembly to the mounting flange of the compressor with four capscrews and lockwashers. Install the filter assembly with a new gasket.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -6.39Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Air System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

19. Install the compressor air discharge pipe to the compressor with eight bolts, lockwashers, and nuts. Install a new gasket in the flange assembly. 20. Install the air piping from the subtractive pilot valve and low-torque start-up circuits to the two inlet air valves. 21. Install the two hydraulic hoses from the low pressure hydraulic system to each compressor inlet air valve. 22. Install the oil return line from the air-oil separator to the housing of the compressor air inlet valve(s). 23. Install the oil pressure hose assembly from the main oil filter element differential pressure test valve onto the flanged main oil filter connection port of the compressor. 24. Connect wires that were removed earlier.

CAUTION
Check that the oil level in the compressor T-Tank reservoir is at the correct fill level prior to starting the main air compressor.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.40-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Air System

6.3.3 Compressor Inlet Valves


6.3.3.1 Removal
In most cases, it is possible to service the inlet valve assemblies without removing them from the compressor. If it is desirable or necessary, either inlet valve assembly can be removed from the compressor as follows (refer to Figure 6-43):

14

13 12 11 10

09 08 07 06 05 04 03 01

02

BD0528b01

01 02 LEGEND 01. Lock Washer 02. Capscrew 03. Pilot Hydraulic Port 04. Pilot Air Port 05. Cylinder Cap 06. Gasket 07. Piston Rings

08. 09. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

Piston Piston Spring Cylinder Cylinder Gasket Valve Spring Inlet Valve Assembly Housing

Figure 6-43: Compressor Inlet Valve Assembly

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -6.41Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Air System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

WARNING

Working on or near rotating machinery while in operation is hazardous and can result in the injury or death of personnel. Shut down the main air compressor, and use lockout/ tagout procedures prior to starting any service on the machinery.
1. Lock out and tag the high-voltage main circuit breaker switch to prevent operation of the main air compressor drive motor during service on the machinery. 2. Remove the air inlet tube, which connects the air filter with the compressor inlet valve, and the other hose assemblies connected to the inlet valves. Refer to Subtopic 6.3.3.1, for procedures.

CAUTION

Incorrect lifting of the valve assembly can cause serious injury or property damage. Be certain lifting rigging is secure and the hoist is of sufficient capacity before attempting the lift.
3. Attach a suitable hoist to the inlet valve assembly to be removed, then remove the capscrews, lockwashers, and nuts holding the valve assembly onto the inlet valve manifold, and lift the valve assembly away from the compressor.

6.3.3.2 Disassembly
Refer to Figure 6-43 and disassemble the inlet valve assembly as follows: 1. If the valve assembly has been removed from the compressor, position and clamp the assembly, with the outlet flange side down, on sturdy blocking.

CAUTION

Removal of the cylinder cap bolts without using spring retainers will enable the cap to rapidly release resulting in the injury of personnel and damage to equipment. Attach suitable spring retainers before removing all of the cylinder cap bolts.
2. Remove the spring loaded cylinder cap as follows: A. Remove two cylinder cap bolts located 180" apart, and install two studs in the threaded bolt holes. B. Install two nuts on the studs, and position the, finger tight, against the cylinder cap. C. Remove the remaining cylinder cap bolts. D. Loosen the nuts on the studs uniformly until the spring compression is completely released, then remove the studs. 3. Remove the cylinder cap and cylinder cap gasket. Discard the gasket. 4. Pull the piston and piston spring from the bore of the cylinder.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.42-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Air System

Technician Tip
If the piston is seized or stuck inside the cylinder, it will be necessary to remove the cylinder from the inlet housing. This will enable application of force from the back side to move the piston out of the bore.
5. Remove the eight capscrews and lockwashers that retain the cylinder to the housing, then pull the cylinder and cylinder gasket from the housing. Discard the cylinder gasket. 6. Remove the inlet valve assembly and the valve spring from inside the inlet valve housing.

6.3.3.3 Repair
Clean the components of the inlet valve assembly thoroughly. See Appendix A of this manual for general instructions and precautions regarding the cleaning of components. Inspect the components of the inlet valve assembly as follows: 1. Inspect the housing and cylinder bores for nicks, burrs, scratches or cracks. 2. Inspect the piston and inlet valve for nicks, burrs, scratches or cracks. Also check for broken piston ring land areas. 3. Inspect the piston rings for wear, cracks and loss of spring compression. 4. Inspect the springs for worn or broken coils and loss of compression force. 5. Inspect the cylinder cap for nicks, burrs, scratches and distortion. 6. Inspect the pipe and straight threads on all parts for cleanliness and damage.Replace all defective parts if significant damage or wear is found. Dress down all burrs, nicks and scratches with a fine file or emery cloth. All gaskets should be replaced.

6.3.3.4 Assembly
Refer to Figure 6-43 and assemble the components of the inlet valve assembly as follows: 1. Insert the shaft of the inlet valve into the small bore end of the cylinder, and position the cylinder flange-end up on top of the inlet valve disc. 2. Install the valve spring into the counterbore of the inlet valve shaft. 3. Position the piston spring over the spring guide in the bottom of the cylinder. 4. Install the piston rings in the grooves of the piston. Position the ring gaps so that they are approximately 180 apart. 5. Lubricate the bore and OD of the piston and rings with compressor oil, then install the piston into the cylinder with the valve spring guide entering first. Assure that the spring guide enters the valve spring.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -6.43Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Air System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Technician Tip
Use a piston ring compressor to insert the piston into the bore. Do not use sharp objects such as screwdrivers to aid in compressing the piston rings. Do not use excessive force to insert the piston rings into the cylinder bore. Compress each ring as it enters the lead-in taper at the top of the cylinder.
6. Place a new flange gasket on the cylinder, and install the cylinder in the inlet valve housing. Torque the eight capscrews and lockwashers evenly to uniformly compress the gasket. 7. Install the cylinder cap with a new gasket as follows: A. Install two temporary studs, positioned 180 apart, in the cylinder cap bolt holes. B. Install the cylinder cap and new gasket over the studs, and position them against the piston. C. Install a nut on each stud and position them against the cylinder cap. D. Tighten the nuts uniformly until the cap and gasket are in position against the cylinder flange, then install four cylinder cap bolts finger tight. E. Remove the two temporary studs and nuts and install the remaining cylinder cap bolts finger tight. F. Torque the cylinder cap bolts uniformly to avoid distorting the cap and to uniformly compress the gasket. 8. Confirm that the valve spring will freely move the inlet valve disc to its seat in the housing when the inlet valve is in normal operating position. It is important that the disc seats completely, because it is the only device to prevent back-flow of oil from the compressor into the inlet filters.

6.3.3.5 Installation
Install the inlet valve assemblies as follows:

CAUTION

Incorrect lifting of the valve assembly can cause serious injury or property damage. Be certain lifting rigging is secure and the hoist is of sufficient capacity before attempting the lift.
1. Attach a suitable hoist to the inlet valve assembly, lift it from the work area, and position it for installation over the inlet valve manifold. 2. Place a new gasket in the correct position on top of the inlet manifold, and slowly lower the valve assembly onto the top of the gasket. 3. Secure the inlet valve assembly to the manifold with capscrews, lockwashers, and nuts. Torque the bolts evenly with a crosswise pattern to uniformly compress the gasket. 4. Install the air inlet tube, and the other hose assemblies that attach to the air inlet valves, in accordance with Subtopic 6.3.2.3.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.44-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Air System

6.3.4 T-Tank R55420F1

06

07 08

05 04

05

03 09 02

01 11
LEGEND 01. Sight Tube 02. Fill Plug 03. Oil Separators 04. Main Air Pipe 05. Sling Lift Point 06. 07. 08. 09. 10. 11.

10

BD0501b01

Union Safety Relief Valve Air Pilot Valve Air/Oil Reservoir Compressor Oil Temperature Probe Shutoff (Drain) Valve

Figure 6-44: T-Tank (on Left Hand Platform)

The T-Tank is a pressure vessel that serves two functions within the main air system. Its first function is to provide reservoir space for oil that is circulated through the compressor. The second function is to contain the air-oil separator which removes the oil mist that remains entrained in the air flow after passing through the reservoir section of the T-Tank. The T-Tank is mounted on a platform on the left side of the drill, outside the machinery house (Figure 6-44). It is located directly behind the main power transformer. Two oil separators extend vertically from the horizontal lower part of the T-Tank. A flanged port located near the bottom of the T-Tank is used to connect piping for circulating oil from the T-Tank, through the cooler and main oil filter, then into the compressor. The air-oil separators (Figure 6-45) each have two filter elements that remove the remaining oil mist from the air stream. Oil that is stripped by the outer oil separator element drains by gravity into the T-Tank. The oil that becomes trapped between the outer and the inner element,

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -6.45Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Air System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

and also at the center of the inner element, is forced by air pressure into oil pickup scavenger tubes and is circulated directly back to the compressor.

LEGEND 01. Outer Separator 02. Inner Separator 03. Capscrew 04. Lockwasher 05. Gasket 06. Lines to Compressor 07. Separator Cover 08. Straight Fittings 09. Scavenger Tubes 10. Insert

06

07 05 08 04 09 03 02 01

BD0529a01

10

Figure 6-45: Air/Oil Separator

An outlet in the separator cover is connected to the main air delivery and control piping. Other fittings on the T-Tank include an oil fill port, a tank drain and thermocouple port, pilot air pressure port, oil level sight tube, and a tank inspection port. The T-Tank does not need to be removed from the drill for service of its components. The only components requiring periodic maintenance and/or replacement are the oil level sight-tube and the two filter elements in each of the oil separators. These components are not repairable and should be replaced if they show signs of failure. Procedures for replacement of these components follow:

6.3.4.1 Replace Oil Separator Elements GH5010587, GH5010588


Refer to Figure 6-44 and replace the filter elements inside the oil separator as follows:

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.46-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Air System

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.
1. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance activities.

CAUTION

High pressure hydraulic or air systems can spray with extreme force and noise causing severe injury. Shut down system and slowly release pressure or vent circuits before loosening fittings or connections. Wear appropriate face, ear, and body protective devices while venting air or hydraulic systems.
2. Vent any residual air pressure from the T-Tank. The T-Tank will vent through the main air system muffler when the main air compressor is not running and the controls are de-energized. 3. Thoroughly clean the air-oil separator flange and fittings to remove any dirt that could fall into the T-Tank when the separator cover and other fittings are opened. 4. Tag and remove the hose assembly on top of the oil separator cover that connects to the scavenger tubes.

Technician Tip
It is not necessary to remove the fittings or interconnecting tubing from the oil separator cover.
5. Tag and remove the upstream pressure tap hose assembly on top of the oil separator cover. 6. Remove hose from the safety relief valve.

CAUTION

Lifting heavy components with inadequate hoisting apparatus can injure personnel and/ or damage equipment. Use suitable slings and hoisting equipment to stabilize and lift heavy objects.
7. Attach suitable hoisting equipment to the main air pipe assembly, and carefully take up the slack. 8. Remove nuts, lockwashers, and capscrews that attach main air pipe flange to the oil separator cover, and lift the main air pipe assembly from the T-Tank. 9. Remove and discard gasket. 10. Attach a suitable hoist to oil separator cover, remove capscrews and lockwashers from the separator cover, then lift the separator cover and attached inner separator element from the T-Tank. Lift the cover straight up when removing it from the T-Tank to avoid damaging the separator element.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -6.47Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Air System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

11. Remove outer separator element from the T-Tank. Discard the element in a suitable container, and cover the TTank opening to prevent entry of dirt. 12. Remove capscrews, lockwashers, retainer, and inner separator element from oil separator cover. Discard the element in a suitable container. 13. Clean away any deposits from inside the T-Tank and from the mounting surfaces of oil separator cover. 14. Inspect scavenger tubes for signs of deterioration or plugging. Replace as necessary. 15. Inspect the insert (Item 10, Figure 6-45) to be sure it is positioned correctly. The cut-out at the bottom must face the front of the drill away from the 6" inlet pipe.

CAUTION

Staples on the element gaskets eliminate static electricity, which could cause the oil to flash, resulting in personal injury and/or property damage. Do not remove the staples from the element gaskets.
16. Inspect the element gasket to ensure that the staples are in place. 17. Install new inner separator element to oil separator cover assembly with retainer, capscrews, and lockwashers. Position inner scavenger tube so that it rests on the bottom plate of the inner element.Install a new outer separator element into the top of the T-Tank. Align the holes in the element cover with those of the T-Tank flange.

CAUTION

Lifting heavy components with inadequate hoisting apparatus can injure personnel and/ or damage equipment. Use suitable slings and hoisting equipment to stabilize and lift heavy objects.
18. Attach suitable lifting equipment to separator cover assembly, and position on top of outer element flange on the T-Tank. Be sure outer scavenger tube is correctly positioned at the bottom of the outer element. Position the holes in the separator cover to align with the holes in the outer element flange. 19. Install oil separator cover to the T-Tank flange with capscrews and lockwashers. Torque the capscrews evenly in a crisscross pattern to uniformly compress the outer element flange. 20. Attach suitable lifting equipment to air inlet nozzle, and position the flange above the mating flange on top of separator cover assembly. 21. Install main air pipe to separator cover assembly with capscrews, lockwashers, nuts, and a new gasket. Do not tighten the nuts at this time. 22. Align the opposite end of air pipe with manifold and couple with union. Tighten the union securely, then uniformly tighten the nuts at the flange end of the air inlet nozzle. 23. Install the hose assembly to the scavenger tube fitting on top of oil separator cover. 24. Install the upstream pressure tap hose assembly on top of oil separator cover.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.48-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Air System

25. Check the level of compressor oil in the T-Tank, and fill as necessary. 26. Ensure the T-Tank shut-off valve is open and there are no leaks. Refer to Figure 6-46.

01

02 03

LEGEND 01. T-Tank 02. Closed Position 03. Open Position

Figure 6-46: T-Tank Shut-Off (Drain) Valve Positions

27. Start the main air system and check the T-Tank for leaks.

6.3.4.2 Oil Level Sight Tube R25778D1


The oil level sight-tube is installed on the side of the T-Tank. Replace the sight-tube assembly as follows:

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.
1. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance activities.

CAUTION

High pressure hydraulic or air systems can spray with extreme force and noise causing severe injury. Shut down system and slowly release pressure or vent circuits before loosening fittings or connections. Wear appropriate face, ear, and body protective devices while venting air or hydraulic systems.
2. Vent any residual air pressure from the T-Tank. The T-Tank will vent through the main air system muffler when the main air compressor is not running and the controls are de-energized.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -6.49Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Air System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

CAUTION
Be sure to thoroughly clean the areas around the tank drain cock and the oil level sighttube before draining down the T-Tank. Close clearances between running components in the compressor will not survive abrasive dirt in the oil.
3. Drain the oil in the reservoir so that the level of the remaining oil is below the lowest part of the sight tube assembly. Drain the oil into a suitable, clean container so that the oil can be salvaged and re-used. 4. Loosen the compression nuts on the top and bottom 90 degree tube fittings, then bend the plastic sight-tube enough to remove the tube from the compression fittings. 5. Coat the male pipe threads on the fittings with pipe thread sealant before installation. 6. Position compression nuts and new ferrules on each end of the replacement sight tube, and insert the tube ends into the 90 degree tube fittings. Use care when bending the tube for insertion that the tube does not become creased. 7. Tighten the compression nuts to seal and retain the tube. 8. Fill the reservoir with compressor oil to the correct level for operation.

6.3.5 Circulation Pump R56963D1


The circulation pump is used to ensure a flow of oil through the main air compressor during start-up, as well as when the compressor is running and the bit air flow is turned off. The pump system is connected in the compressor oil circulation circuit. In addition to the low pressure pump and electric motor, the system includes a pressure relief which is an integral part of the pump assembly. The circulation pump is mounted on the left hand platform between the T-Tank and the machinery house wall.

6.3.5.1 Removal
Remove the pump from the oil circulation circuit as follows:

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operators controls. Lock out and tag the operators control to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.
1. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during pump removal.

CAUTION

High pressure hydraulic or air systems can spray with extreme force and noise causing severe injury. Shut down system and slowly release pressure or vent circuits before

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.50-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Air System

loosening fittings or connections. Wear appropriate face, ear and body protective devices while venting air or hydraulic systems.
2. Vent any residual air pressure from the T-Tank. The T-Tank will vent through the main air system muffler when the main air compressor is not running and the controls are de-energized. 3. Close the shutoff valve, located in the oil discharge piping below the T-Tank. 4. Clean all dirt from the area around the pump and hoses. 5. Tag and disconnect the suction and pressure hoses from the circulation pump. Cap or plug the hose fittings and pump ports to prevent the entry of contaminants. 6. Remove wires from the motor junction box. 7. Remove the four capscrews and lockwashers from the pump feet and use a suitable lifting device to remove the pump. 8. Tag and remove the hose adapters and pipe fittings from the pump ports.

6.3.5.2 Cleaning, Inspection And Repair


Clean and inspect the oil circulation pump in accordance with the general cleaning and inspection procedures described in Appendix A of this manual. Inspect the pump for wear, housing cracks and leaks. If any leaks or cracks are found, replace the pump; it is not field repairable.

6.3.5.3 Installation
Install the oil circulation pump as follows: 1. Coat the male pipe threads with pipe thread sealant and install the pipe fittings and hose adapters in the suction and pressure ports of the pump. Position the fittings for ease of connection to the hoses. 2. Install the pump assembly with four capscrews and lockwashers. 3. Connect the suction and pressure hoses to the pump fittings. 4. Connect wires. 5. Open the shut-off valve located in the oil discharge piping below the T-Tank. 6. Check the oil level in the T-Tank. Add oil as necessary. 7. Operate the system and check for leaks. Also check pump rotation (the pump must turn clockwise when viewed from the motor fan). The circulation pump is non-adjustable.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -6.51Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Air System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

6.3.6 Compressor Oil Cooler R56568D1

Figure 6-47: Compressor Oil Cooler

6.3.6.1 Removal
Remove the compressor oil cooler from the system as follows (refer to Figure 6-47):

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.
1. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent start-up of the hydraulic systems and air systems during maintenance activities.

CAUTION

High pressure hydraulic or air systems can spray with extreme force and noise causing severe injury. Shut down system and slowly release pressure or vent circuits before loosening fittings or connections. Wear appropriate face, ear, and body protective devices while venting air or hydraulic systems.
2. Vent any residual air pressure from the T-Tank. The T-Tank will vent through the main air system muffler when the main air compressor is not running and the controls are de-energized. 3. Turn the shut-off valve located at the bottom of the T-Tank to closed position

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.52-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Air System

Technician Tip
.Detach the cable reel support bar and lower the reel to provide some working room.

CAUTION

Disassembling heavy components with inadequate hoisting apparatus can injure personnel and/or damage equipment. Use suitable slings and hoisting equipment to stabilize and lift heavy objects.
4. Attach suitable hoisting equipment to the cooling air louver and take up the slack in the slings. 5. Tag and disconnect the hose assemblies from the hydraulic oil cooler assembly. Collect any fluid that leaks from the hoses and fittings in a suitable container. Cap or plug the open end of the hose and the cooler ports to prevent entry of dirt. 6. Loosen and remove the pipe cap on top of the compressor oil cooler assembly. 7. Loosen and remove the drain plug at the bottom of the compressor oil cooler, and drain all of the oil into a suitable container for disposal. 8. Tag and disconnect the hose assemblies from the compressor oil cooler assembly. Collect any fluid that leaks from the hoses and fittings in a suitable container. Cap or plug the open end of the hose and the cooler ports to prevent entry of dirt.

CAUTION

Lifting heavy components with inadequate hoisting apparatus can injure personnel and/ or damage equipment. Use suitable slings and hoisting equipment to stabilize and lift heavy objects.
9. Attach a suitable hoist to the cooler to provide support while the fasteners are removed. 10. Remove the capscrews, washers, and nuts which fasten the cooler to the shroud assembly, then lift the cooler away from the shroud. 11. Disassemble the hose fittings from the cooler.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -6.53Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Air System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

6.3.6.2 Cleaning, Inspection, and Repair


Clean and inspect the compressor oil cooler in accordance with the general cleaning and inspection procedures described in Appendix A of this manual. Inspect the cooler for cracks, leaks, and/or damaged fins. The cooler assembly is not field repairable, and therefore must be replaced with a new or reconditioned cooler if it is damaged or leaking.

6.3.6.3 Installation
Install the compressor oil cooler as follows: 1. Apply pipe thread sealant to the pipe threads of the hose adapters, and install the adapters in the inlet and outlet ports of the cooler. Tighten the adapters so the hose connection ends will couple easily with the hoses when the cooler is installed.

CAUTION

Lifting heavy components with inadequate hoisting apparatus can injure personnel and/ or damage equipment. Use suitable rigging and hoisting equipment to stabilize and lift heavy objects.
2. Attach a suitable hoist to the compressor oil cooler assembly, and lift the cooler to its mounting position. Leave the hoist in place until the fasteners have been installed. 3. Install the compressor oil cooler to the cooler shroud with capscrews, washers, and nuts. Torque the nuts securely. 4. Install the inlet and outlet oil hoses to the bottom of the cooler. 5. Be sure the drain plug at the bottom of the cooler is sealed and tightened.

CAUTION

Lifting heavy components with inadequate hoisting apparatus can injure personnel and/ or damage equipment. Use suitable slings and hoisting equipment to stabilize and lift heavy objects.
6. Attach suitable hoisting equipment to the cooling air louver and install the louver on the oil cooler shroud with capscrews, lockwasher and nuts. 7. Add compressor oil to the T-Tank reservoir as necessary to replace the oil lost during cooler replacement. 8. Return the cable reel to its operating position (if it was lowered) and secure. 9. Confirm that the T-Tank shut-off valve is in the open position.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.54-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Air System

6.3.7 Thermostatic Mixing Valve R38039D2

LEGEND 01. O-ring 02. Capscrew 03. Lock Washer

04. 05. 06. 07.

Sleeve Bolt-in Seat Flange Gasket Element

Figure 6-48: Themostatic Mixing Valve

The thermal mixing valve is used to control temperature of the compressor oil in the oil cooling system. The elements are so designed that a portion of the oil is flowing through the oil cooler at all times. On start-up with the unit cold, the elements are open to the by-pass, allowing oil to pass directly from the T-Tank to the compressor during warm-up. As the oil warms, the elements gradually close the bypass flow, causing more oil to flow through the cooler. After the main air system is at normal operating temperature, the mixing valve maintains compressor discharge temperature.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -6.55Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Air System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

6.3.7.1 Removal
Refer to Figure 6-49 and remove the thermal mixing valve from the oil cooling circuit as follows):

Figure 6-49: Thermostatic Mixing Valve Piping

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.
1. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance activities.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.56-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Air System

CAUTION

High pressure hydraulic or air systems can spray with extreme force and noise causing severe injury. Shut down system and slowly release pressure or vent circuits before loosening fittings or connections. Wear appropriate face, ear, and body protective devices while venting air or hydraulic systems.
2. Vent any residual air pressure from the T-Tank. The T-Tank will vent through the main air system muffler when the main air compressor is not running and the controls are de-energized. 3. Match mark the three flanges that mate with the flanges on the thermal mixing valve for subsequent assembly. 4. Close the shut-off valve at the bottom of the T-Tank to prevent oil drainage from the tank while the system is open. 5. Slowly loosen and remove the capscrews, lockwashers, and nuts from the mixing valve flanges. Separate the flanges, then remove and discard the flange gaskets. Collect any oil leaking from the open flanges in a suitable container for disposal. 6. Plug the open fittings to prevent entry of dirt. 7. Lift the thermal mixing valve out of the valve support.

6.3.7.2 Disassembly
Refer to Figure 6-50 and disassemble the thermostatic mixing valve as follows:

Figure 6-50: Thermostatic Mixing Valve Components

1. Remove the four capscrews that retain the housing cover to the valve housing, then remove the cover and housing gasket. Discard the used gasket.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -6.57Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Air System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

2. Remove the two thermostatic elements with the element O-rings and O-ring sleeves.

6.3.7.3 Cleaning, Inspection, And Repair


Clean and inspect the compressor oil cooler in accordance with the general cleaning and inspection procedures described in Appendix A of this manual. Check the elements for correct operation by heating them in oil. They should be fully open at 10F above their rating. None of the thermal mixing valve components are repairable. See the LinkOne electronic parts manual for component identification. Provide the following new components for assembly:

Two thermostatic elements. Two element O-rings. Two O-ring sleeves. One housing O-ring. 6.3.7.4 Assembly
Refer to Figure 6-50 and assemble the thermostatic mixing valve as follows: 1. Install the two sets of O-rings and O-ring sleeves on the two thermostatic elements. 2. Install the elements in the valve housing. Make sure that the elements are correctly seated. 3. Position the new housing O-ring on the cover flange, then install the housing cover with four capscrews. Torque the capscrews evenly to obtain uniform compression of the gasket.

6.3.7.5 Installation
Install the thermostatic mixing valve in the cooler circuit as follows: 1. Position the thermal mixing valve in the valve support bracket. Be sure to match the flange locations with the assembly match marks on the mating pipe flanges. 2. Install new flange gaskets, and install the three pipe flanges to the thermal mixing valve with capscrews, lockwashers, and nuts. Torque the capscrews evenly to obtain uniform compression of the gaskets. 3. Open the shut-off valve at the bottom of the T-Tank. 4. Add oil to the T-Tank to make up for the oil lost during disassembly.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.58-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Air System

6.3.8 Compressor Oil Filter, R51071F1

LEGEND 01. Air Compressor Oil Filter Figure 6-51: Main Air Compressor Oil Filter

The main compressor oil filter is located to the right of the main air compressor. It has several indicators to help determine when the filter needs to be changed.

For element changes based on time, refer to Section 17, Preventive Maintenance. Refer to Figure 6-52. Change the element in the main compressor oil filter when the filter indicator indicates
in the CHANGE FILTER area.

CH

TE

GE

FI

GE

FI

BD0558a01

Normal Operation

Change Filter condition

Figure 6-52: Main Compressor Oil Filter Indicator

A pressure differential valve on the Main Air Control Panel allows monitoring of the condition of the filter element. Change the filter if the pressure differential exceeds 8 psi.

The GUI will register a fault if the filter element needs to be changed.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -6.59Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

TE

CH

Main Air System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

The element should be changed when indicated by any of the above monitoring systems. To change the main compressor oil filter element, refer to Figure 6-53 and proceed as follows:

LEGEND 01. Visual Indicator 02. Seal Kit 03. Bleed Valve 04. Nut Kit 05. Nut Retainer Kit 06. Electric Indicator 07. Sending Unit 08. Fill Plug and O-ring 09. Head O-ring 10. Baffle 11. Cup Seal 12. Bypass Valve 13. Bypass Indicator O-ring 14. Filter Element 15. Bypass Spring 16. Drain Plug

Figure 6-53: Changing Main Compressor Oil Filter

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine operation while performing manual lubrication tasks.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.60-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Air System

1. Lock out and tag out the operators controls to prevent inadvertent drill operation. 2. If the filter indicator is in the red CHANGE FILTER position or if it has been more than 160 hours of operation since the last filter element change, change the element as follows:

CAUTION

Pressurized oil will spray with extreme force from the compressor main oil filter when being loosened, and can cause severe injury. Slowly release air pressure or vent the TTank before loosening the filter canister. Wear appropriate face, ear, and body protective devices while opening the canister.
A. Vent any residual air from the T-tank. B. Remove the drain plug and drain the oil into a pail.

CAUTION
Do not remove the filter element from the housing until all the oil has drained to prevent unfiltered oil from contaminating the filtered compressor oil
C. Remove filter head by rotating handle counterclockwise until the head is free of housing. Carefully place the filter head to the side to avoid damaging the sensor. D. Hold baffle down and push down on indicator assembly to be sure it moves freely up and down within the baffle. E. Remove baffle and check the bore for nicks. Smooth the bore if necessary and replace seal if it is damaged. F. Remove element from housing. Remove indicator assembly from the element using a screwdriver between the indicator assembly and the element cap and carefully prying downward. Inspect O-ring and replace it with a new, oiled O-ring if necessary. G. Remove O-ring from head and replace it if necessary. Clean the O-ring area of the head, lubricate a new Oring with oil and reinstall the O-ring in the head. H. Install indicator assembly into new element. Place the element into housing being sure the large diameter of spring contacts the new element. Install baffle. I. Place head on housing and turn handle clockwise until it is hand tight. Do not exceed 20 ft-lb (26 Nm). J. If leakage appears around handle, remove snap ring and remove the handle from the head. Discard O-ring. Coat a new O-ring with oil and reassemble the unit with the new O-ring. To ensure unrestricted flow of oil to the main compressor, the oil filter assembly must be serviced at regular intervals. To determine when the filter media needs replacing, an indicator has been built into the body of the main compressor oil filter assembly. Change the filter before the indicator reads CHANGE FILTER. The main compressor oil filter is flange mounted to the oil return port on the main compressor. Check this indicator once each week or every 40 hours of operation. The element must be replaced when the top of the indicator on the filter is in the red Change Filter half of the window (refer to Figure 6-52). The compressor must be running and the oil at operating temperature for the indicator

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -6.61Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Air System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

to read accurately. Check the indicator with a bright light to be certain of the indicator position. Some lubricants will obscure the indicator. If the filter indicator is in the red Change Filter zone, or if there are filter faults on the GUI, the filter element must be replaced.

6.3.9 Subtractive Pilot Valve, 36Q577D1


10 11 08 12
LEGEND 01. Pressure Adjustment Screw 02. Locknut 03. Spring Button 04. Pressure Spring 05. Damper 06. Diaphragm Stop 07. Diaphragm 08. Disc Seat 09. Vale Body 10. Ring Seat 11. Gasket 12. Gasket 13. Pressure Plate 14. Lock Washer 15. Pressure Plate Nut 16. Valve Cover

09

07 06

13 14 15

05 04 03 02 01 16

Figure 6-54: Subtractive Pilot Valve

6.3.9.1 Description
The subtractive pilot is a spring-loaded diaphragm pressure regulator, which is used to control operation of the compressor inlet valve, after the compressor has achieved normal operating rpm (refer to Figure 6-54). The diaphragm cavity receives pressure from the oil separator. At the pilot setting, the diaphragm begins to unseat (open) a poppet to admit pressure to the compressor inlet unloading valve piston. This pressure begins to stroke the piston that closes the inlet valve, thereby restricting the inlet and partially unloading the compressor. As pressure in the oil separator rises, the subtractive pilot admits higher pressure to the unloader piston to further restrict the inlet, until the inlet is fully closed at the subtractive pilot valve's highest setting.

6.3.9.2 Adjustment
In order to obtain full compressor capacity at the maximum operating pressure, the subtractive pilot valve (refer to Figure 6-54) should be set to unload with the inlet valve fully closed at approximately 10 psig (0.7 bar) above the maximum operating pressure. Adjustment is accomplished by loosening the pressure screw locknut, then turning the screw in or out to achieve the desired pressure setting. The farther the pressure screw is turned clockwise, the higher the set pressure will be. After the desired setting has been achieved, tighten the pressure screw locknut securely.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.62-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Air System

6.3.9.3 Removal
Remove the subtractive pilot valve from the system as follows:

CAUTION

Compressed air will exit from air line fittings with extreme force when being loosened, and can cause severe injury. Slowly release air pressure or vent the T-Tank before loosening any air line fittings. Wear appropriate face, ear, and body protective devices while opening pressurized systems.
1. Vent any residual air pressure from the T-Tank. The T-Tank will vent through the main air system muffler when the main air compressor is not running and all controls are in the OFF position. 2. The subtractive pilot valve is located on the main air system control panel. To remove the valve from the system, remove the inlet and outlet pipe fittings from the body of the valve.

6.3.9.4 Disassembly

Technician Tip
In determining whether to rebuild or replace the subtractive pilot valve, consider that a simple repair error could result in significant system malfunctions. It may be more economical to discard the faulty subtractive pilot valve and replace it with a new one.
Disassemble the subtractive pilot valve as follows (refer to Figure 6-54 for identification and location of components): 1. Loosen the locknut and pressure screw to remove spring pressure from the diaphragm and valve cover. 2. Clamp the valve body in soft jaws in a vise, and unscrew the valve cover, and remove it from the valve body. 3. Remove the spring button, pressure spring, and damper from the assembly. 4. Lift the diaphragm stop out of the valve body. 5. Remove the pressure plate nut and lockwasher from the seat disc stem, then remove the pressure plate, diaphragm, diaphragm gasket, and the seat gasket from the seat disc. 6. Lift the seat ring out of the valve body.

6.3.9.5 Repair
None of the components from the subtractive pilot valve are repairable. Replace all defective parts. It is necessary to replace some components in groups to ensure satisfactory repair. When replacing the diaphragm, also replace both diaphragm and seat gaskets. When replacing the seat disc at seat ring, also replace the mating seat ring of disc and the seat disc gasket.

6.3.9.6 Assembly
Assemble the subtractive pilot valve as follows (refer to Figure 6-54 for component identification and location):

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -6.63Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Air System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

1. Install the seat ring in the counterbore in the valve body. 2. Assemble the diaphragm assembly by installing the following components over the stem of the seat disc in this order: seat gasket; diaphragm gasket, diaphragm, and pressure plate; then install and tighten the lock washer and pressure plate nut. 3. Install the diaphragm assembly in the valve body so that the seat disc mates with the seat ring. 4. Install the diaphragm stop in the valve body with the flange seated on top of the diaphragm. 5. Insert the damper inside of the pressure spring, then install the pressure spring and damper on top of the diaphragm assembly. 6. Position the spring button on top of the pressure spring with the pilot diameter inside the top coil of the spring. 7. Make sure that the pressure screw is only minimally engaged in the valve cover, then screw the cover on to the valve body and tighten securely.

6.3.9.7 Installation
Install the subtractive pilot valve in the main air system as follows: 1. Spread a thin film of pipe compound on the male pipe threads of the connecting fittings, and install them securely into the body of the valve. 2. Check the adjoining fittings and clamps to confirm that they are connected securely. 3. Adjust the pressure setting of the subtractive pilot valve in accordance with the procedure described in Subtopic 6.3.9.2.

6.3.9.8 Pilot Pressure Gauge


The pilot pressure gauge registers pressure from the subtractive pilot to the compressor inlet unloader piston. The gauge is installed in the air line between the subtractive pilot valve and the inlet valve assembly. The gauge pressure reading varies with pressure in the T-Tank, from a range of 0 psi to 21 psi. The pilot pressure gauge is not repairable and must be replaced if it fails.

NOTICE
The gauge is installed into a " pipe fitting. Wrap the male pipe threads with Teflon pipe thread tape before installation into the pipe fitting.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.64-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Air System

6.3.10 Main Air Control Panel

06 05

07

04
CIPS MAPS

MAPT

08

03

BACS
SUB PILOT VALVE OPENS AT 58 PSI

TANK FILTER

02

09 01
COPS BAPT

F E
COMP. FILTER

A 12

11

10

BD0509a01

LEGEND 01. Bit Air Pressure Transducer 02. Check Valve* 03. Bit Air Control Solenoid* 04. Main Air Pressure Transducer 05. Electrical Panel 06. Compressor Inlet Pressure Switch 07. Main Air Pressure Switch

08. Subtractive Pilot Valve 09. T-Tank Oil Separator Pressure Differential Manual Switch 10. Scavenger Oil Filter 11. Compressor Oil Filter Differential Manual Switch 12. Compressor Oil Pressure Switch (COPS)

* The check valve and the bit air control solenoid are for drills with pneumatic butterfly valves. They are not used on drills with electrically-operated butterfly valves.
PIPING LEGEND A. From Bit Air B. To Air Pilot Valve C. From Compressor Filter (inlet side) D. From Compressor Filter (outlet side) E. F. G. H. From Separator (outlet side) From Separator (inlet side) From T Tank To Compressor

Figure 6-55: Main Air Control Panel

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -6.65Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Air System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

The main air control panel is mounted inside the machinery house, at the left side of the main air compressor. This panel contains many of the control components required for operation and control of the main air compressor. It also supports the transducer for bit air pressure control. Figure 6-55 identifies the specific components mounted on the panel. The individual control components can be serviced without need to remove the entire panel from its location.

6.3.11 Bit Air Pressure Transducer (BAPT), 44Q1536


6.3.11.1 Removal
The bit air pressure transducer can be removed from the panel without disconnecting any other components. Remove the pressure transducer as follows:

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.
1. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance activities.

CAUTION

High pressure hydraulic or air systems can spray with extreme force and noise causing severe injury. Shut down system and slowly release pressure or vent circuits before loosening fittings or connections. Wear appropriate face, ear, and body protective devices while venting air or hydraulic systems.
2. Vent any residual air pressure from the T-Tank. The T-Tank will vent through the main air system muffler when the main air compressor is not running and the controls are de-energized. 3. Tag and disconnect the signal wiring from pressure transducer. 4. Turn the pressure transducer in a counter-clockwise direction to remove it from the pipe fitting.

6.3.11.2 Cleaning, Inspection, And Repair


Clean and inspect the transducer in accordance with the general cleaning and inspection procedures described in Appendix A of this manual. Check the transducer for correct operation by pressure testing on a test bench, if available. The pressure transducer is not field repairable. See the LinkOne electronic parts manual for component identification.

6.3.11.3 Installation
Install the pressure transducer on the panel as follows: 1. Apply pipe thread sealant to the male pipe threads, and install the transducer on the pipe fitting. Tighten securely to prevent leakage and loosening by vibration.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.66-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Air System

2. Install the signal wiring on top of pressure transducer. 3. Operate the main air system to test the repair.

6.3.12 Compressor Oil Pressure Switch (COPS), 79Z5680


6.3.12.1 Removal And Disassembly
Remove and disassemble the low-oil pressure switch as follows:

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.
1. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance activities.

CAUTION

High pressure hydraulic or air systems can spray with extreme force and noise causing severe injury. Shut down system and slowly release pressure or vent circuits before loosening fittings or connections. Wear appropriate face, ear, and body protective devices while venting air or hydraulic systems.
2. Vent any residual air pressure from the T-Tank. The T-Tank will vent through the main air system muffler when the main air compressor is not running and the controls are de-energized. 3. Tag and disconnect the pressure tubing from the pressure switch assembly. 4. Tag and disconnect the signal wiring from the low-oil pressure switch. 5. Remove the mounting capscrews from the pressure switch, and remove the pressure switch assembly from the panel. 6. Remove the elbow tube fitting from the pressure port of the switch.

6.3.12.2 Cleaning, Inspection, And Repair.


Clean and inspect the pressure switch in accordance with the general cleaning and inspection procedures described in Appendix A of this manual. Check the switch for correct operation by pressure testing on a test bench, if available. The pressure switch should be set to open at 8 psi (0.55 bar) and to close at 15 psi (1.0 bar). The pressure switch is not field repairable. See the LinkOne electronic parts manual for component identification.

6.3.12.3 Assembly And Installation


Assemble and install the low-oil pressure switch assembly as follows:

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -6.67Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Air System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

1. Coat the male pipe threads of the tubing elbow fitting with pipe thread sealant, and install in the pressure switch. Position the fitting as shown on Figure 6-55. 2. Position the pressure switch on the panel, and install with the mounting capscrews. 3. Connect the pressure tubing connector to the elbow fitting. 4. Install the signal wiring in the terminal box of the pressure switch. 5. Operate the main air system to test the repair.

6.3.13 Main Air Pressure Transducer (MAPT) 44Q1536


6.3.13.1 Removal
The main air pressure transducer can be removed from the panel without disconnecting any other components. Remove the pressure transducer as follows:

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.
1. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance activities.

CAUTION

High pressure hydraulic or air systems can spray with extreme force and noise causing severe injury. Shut down system and slowly release pressure or vent circuits before loosening fittings or connections. Wear appropriate face, ear, and body protective devices while venting air or hydraulic systems.
2. Vent any residual air pressure from the T-Tank. The T-Tank will vent through the main air system muffler when the main air compressor is not running and the controls are de-energized. 3. Tag and disconnect the signal wiring from pressure transducer. 4. Turn the pressure transducer in a counter-clockwise direction to remove it from the pipe fitting.

6.3.13.2 Cleaning, Inspection, And Repair


Clean and inspect the transducer in accordance with the general cleaning and inspection procedures described in Appendix A of this manual. Check the transducer for correct operation by pressure testing on a test bench, if available. The pressure transducer is not field repairable. See the LinkOne electronic parts manual for component identification.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.68-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Air System

6.3.13.3 Installation
Install the pressure transducer on the panel as follows: 1. Apply pipe thread sealant to the male pipe threads, and install the transducer on the pipe fitting. Tighten securely to prevent leakage and loosening by vibration. 2. Install the signal wiring on top of pressure transducer. 3. Operate the main air system to test the repair.

6.3.14 Scavenger Oil Return Filter GH5000348


6.3.14.1 Removal
The scavenger oil return filter assembly can be serviced for normal maintenance without removing the entire unit from the air panel. Remove the filter unit assembly for replacement as follows (refer to Figure 6-55):

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.
1. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance activities.

CAUTION

High pressure hydraulic or air systems can spray with extreme force and noise causing severe injury. Shut down system and slowly release pressure or vent circuits before loosening fittings or connections. Wear appropriate face, ear, and body protective devices while venting air or hydraulic systems.
2. Vent any residual air pressure from the T-Tank. The T-Tank will vent through the main air system muffler when the main air compressor is not running and the controls are de-energized. 3. Spin the filter counterclockwise until the filter clears the stud threads. Discard the filter.

6.3.14.2 Installation
Coat the gasket on a new filter with a thin coat of oil. Spin the filter onto the stud threads clockwise until the gasket contacts the housing. Rotate the filter another turn.

6.3.15 Air Pilot Valve R56220D1


The function of the air pilot valve is to vent air pressure from the main air line and T-Tank when the bit air flow is turned off. When pilot air pressure is removed from the pilot air valve, the air pilot valve opens to discharge air from the main air line into the muffler. The air pilot valve is mounted to a pipe nipple in the discharge air line between the safety valve and the muffler.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -6.69Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Air System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

6.3.15.1 Removal
Remove the air pilot valve as follows:

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.
1. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance activities.

CAUTION

High pressure hydraulic or air systems can spray with extreme force and noise causing severe injury. Shut down system and slowly release pressure or vent circuits before loosening fittings or connections. Wear appropriate face, ear, and body protective devices while venting air or hydraulic systems.
2. Vent any residual air pressure from the T-Tank. The T-Tank will vent through the main air system muffler when the main air compressor is not running and the controls are de-energized. 3. Tag and disconnect the pilot air and main air pressure hoses from the air pilot valve, and remove the hose adapters. 4. Remove the air pilot valve from the pipe nipple on which it is mounted.

6.3.15.2 Cleaning, Inspection, And Repair


Clean and inspect the air pilot valve in accordance with the general cleaning and inspection procedures described in Appendix A of this manual. The valve unit is not field repairable. See the LinkOne electronic parts manual for component identification.

6.3.15.3 Installation
Install the air pilot valve as follows: 1. Apply pipe thread sealant to the male pipe nipple, and install the air pilot valve on the nipple. If a directional arrow is indicated on the valve body, the flow should be in the direction toward the muffler. 2. Install the pilot pressure and main air pressure hoses and adapters as previously tagged. 3. Start the main air system, and test the function of the air pilot valve.

6.3.16 Pressure Relief Valve R12262D4


The main air system pressure relief valve is factory adjusted to open if the pressure in the main air line exceeds 130 psi (9.0 bar). The valve is mounted in a coupling in the main air line near the T-Tank.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.70-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Air System

6.3.16.1 Removal
Remove the pressure relief valve as follows:

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.
1. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance activities.

CAUTION

High pressure hydraulic or air systems can spray with extreme force and noise causing severe injury. Shut down system and slowly release pressure or vent circuits before loosening fittings or connections. Wear appropriate face, ear, and body protective devices while venting air or hydraulic systems.
2. Vent any residual air pressure from the T-Tank. The T-Tank will vent through the main air system muffler when the main air compressor is not running and the controls are de-energized. 3. Tag and disconnect the pilot air valve discharge hose from the pressure relief valve discharge piping. 4. Loosen the two upper hose clamps, and disconnect the air discharge hose from the pressure relief valve discharge pipe fittings. 5. Remove the pipe fittings, as a unit, from the discharge of the pressure relief valve. 6. Remove the pressure relief valve from the main air line.

6.3.16.2 Cleaning, Inspection, And Repair


Clean and inspect the pressure relief valve in accordance with the general cleaning and inspection procedures described in Appendix A of this manual. This valve is not field repairable. See the LinkOne electronic parts manual for component identification.

6.3.16.3 Installation
Install the pressure relief valve as follows: 1. Apply pipe thread sealant to the male pipe threads on the pressure relief valve, and install the valve on the main air line. Align the valve discharge to match the position of the air discharge hose leading to the muffler. 2. Apply pipe thread sealant to the male pipe threads on the pipe fittings for the discharge port of the pressure relief valve, and install the fittings. 3. Install the pressure relief valve discharge hose with two hose clamps.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -6.71Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Air System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

4. Apply pipe thread sealant to the male pipe threads, and connect the pilot air valve discharge hose to the pressure relief valve discharge piping. 5. Start the main air system, and check for air pressure leaks.

6.3.17 Butterfly Valve R51305D1

Electric Actuator

Air Valve Assembly

BD0570a01

Figure 6-56: Butterfly Valve Electric Actuator and Valve Assembly

The butterfly valve is used to start and stop the flow of air to the drilling bit. It is a 4-inch flange-mounted valve, located immediately downstream of the pressure relief valve in the main air line. The butterfly valve is operated by an electric actuator, which controls the timing and the extent of opening and closing. There is also a manual override in the event the actuator were to become inoperable.

6.3.17.1 Removal
Remove the butterfly valve from the main air piping as follows:

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.72-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Air System

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.
1. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance activities.

CAUTION

High pressure hydraulic or air systems can spray with extreme force and noise causing severe injury. Shut down system and slowly release pressure or vent circuits before loosening fittings or connections. Wear appropriate face, ear, and body protective devices while venting air or hydraulic systems.
2. Vent any residual air pressure from the T-Tank. The T-Tank will vent through the main air system muffler when the main air compressor is not running and the controls are de-energized. 3. Tag and disconnect the electrical connections from the butterfly valve.

CAUTION

Lifting heavy components with inadequate hoisting apparatus can injure personnel and/ or damage equipment. Use suitable slings and hoisting equipment to stabilize and lift heavy objects.
4. Attach a suitable hoist to the butterfly valve, and remove all slack from the sling or cables. 5. Remove the capscrews, lockwashers, and nuts that hold the pipe flanges and valve body together, then remove the butterfly valve and gaskets from the main air piping. Discard the used gaskets.

NOTICE
It may be necessary to spread the pipe flanges slightly to remove the valve assembly. 6.3.17.2 Cleaning, Inspection, And Repair
Clean and inspect the butterfly valve and the main air pipe flanges in accordance with the general cleaning and inspection procedures described in Appendix A of this manual. Repair is limited to the replacement of worn or damaged parts. Before repairing the valve for the first time, contact your local P&H MinePro Services representative for tool kit R51305D4. Refer to Figure 6-57.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -6.73Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Air System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

LEGEND 01. Hex Head Capscrew 02. Hex nut 03. Retainer Plate 04. Socket Head Capscrew 05. Liner 06. Seat 07. Inboard O-ring

08. 09. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

Outboard O-ring Top Gland Spring Spacer Bearing Stem Wedge Ring Stem Compression Ring Bottom Gland

Figure 6-57: Butterfly Valve Components

6.3.17.3 Installation
Install the butterfly valve assembly as follows:

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.74-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Main Air System

CAUTION

Lifting heavy components with inadequate hoisting apparatus can injure personnel and/ or damage equipment. Use suitable slings and hoisting equipment to stabilize and lift heavy objects.
1. Attach a suitable hoist to the butterfly valve, and lift the valve into position between the main air line pipe flanges. 2. Install two new gaskets between the valve body and the pipe flange faces, then install the mounting capscrews, lockwashers, and nuts through the pipe flanges. Torque the capscrews uniformly using a crisscross tightening pattern. 3. Install the electrical wiring on the butterfly valve as tagged. 4. Start the main air system, check for air leaks, and test the operation of the butterfly valve.

6.3.18 Muffler 27Q762D1


The muffler is mounted on the left-hand catwalk, just behind the T-Tank. It is mounted vertically on a back brace. The muffler is not field repairable. If it becomes unserviceable, it must be replaced.

6.3.19 Dump Valve GH5000369


This is a normally open, pressurize to close check valve. When pressure from the main air system acts on the valve, the valve closes. When the pressure is removed, the valve opens to allow air to exhaust without going through the drill string.

6.4 Troubleshooting
Table 6-3 identifies some potential compressor system problems and lists probable causes to be corrected:

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -6.75Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

Main Air System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Problem

Possible Cause

Remedy Check for low compressor oil level Check for clogged oil cooler or oil filter Check themostatic mixing valve for proper operation Remove dirt from oil cooler Check ventilation of unit and/or oil cooler Check that the optional inlet and exhaust cold weather dampers are operating properly.

Unit starts but then stops after short run

High discharge air temperature

Oil Flow Switch malfunction Oil Pressure too low

Replace oil flow switch Determine cause and take corrective action Check for over filling of the T-Tank Check for clogged, broken or loose oil return lines Check for ruptured separator element Check for loose assembly Check for incorrect oil, causing foam.

Excessive oil consumption

Oil carry-over through discharge

Oil leaks at fittings and gaskets Clogged air filter Restricted inlet valve Compressor low on delivery and pressure Broken inlet valve spring Binding inlet valve piston Turn valve and/or inlet valve pilot adjustment and/or malfunction

Tighten fittings or replace gaskets Clean or replace air filter Clean or replace air valve Replace spring Replace inlet valve piston Adjust or replace turn valve and/or inlet pilot valve Check compressor oil flow switch (COFS)

Compressor will not start on low torque start-up mode

No compressor oil flow or pressure detected

Check for clogged oil filter or cooler Check for inoperative oil circulation pump Check for faulty compressor oil pressure switch (COPS)

CIPS set too high Compressor shuts down with bit air flow turned on or off No compressor oil flow detected

Correct setting on CIPS Check compressor oil flow switch (COFS) Check for inoperative oil circulation pump

Table 6-3: Troubleshooting Guide

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 6, Version 00 - 03/06

-6.76-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec06MainAir.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Low Pressure Hydraulic System

Section 7

Low Pressure Hydraulic System


7.1 General

LEGEND 01. Hoist Brake motor and pump 02. Low Pressure Hydraulics motor and pump Figure 7-1: Low Pressure Motor/Pump Assemblies

The low pressure hydraulic system consists of an electric-motor-driven pumping unit (refer to Figure 7-1), which supplies hydraulic flow to valves on the low pressure hydraulic stand and the lube pump in the lubrication room. The low pressure hydraulic valves (refer to Figure 7-2) direct flow to the boarding ladder and cab roof hatch cylinders. Other valves present on the valve block are not connected and are considered spares.

Figure 7-2: Low Pressure Hydraulic Valve Bank (Valve Bank 4)

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec07LowPress.fm

-7.1-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 7, Version 00 - 03/06

Low Pressure Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

The pump-motor assembly is mounted inside the machinery house, forward and to the left of the main hydraulic pumps. The hydraulic valves are mounted on a valve stand in the lubrication room on the front right area of the drill frame.

02 01

03 04

BD0723a01

LEGEND 01. Low Pressure Hydraulic Valve Stand 02. Low Pressure Hydraulic Valve Bank (Valve Bank 4) 03. Pilot Control Valve Bank (Valve Bank 5) 04. Hydraulic Tank Figure 7-3: Low Pressure Hydraulic Valve Stand

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 7, Version 00 - 03/06

-7.2-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec07LowPress.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Low Pressure Hydraulic System

7.2 Theory of Operation

BD0519a01

Figure 7-4: Low Pressure Hydraulic Circuit Overview

7.2.1 General
The pump and motor are mounted in a stand to the left of the main hydraulic system pumps. The pump and motor share the stand with a pump and motor that are used for the hoist brake system (the hoist brake system is discussed at the back of this section). The following subsections will discuss each circuit of the low pressure hydraulic system.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec07LowPress.fm

-7.3-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 7, Version 00 - 03/06

Low Pressure Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

7.2.2 Intake and Delivery

BD0519a01

Figure 7-5: Intake and Delivery

The low pressure hydraulic system motor becomes energized when the drill main motor starts. For diagnostic and maintenance purposes, it also becomes energized when there is power on the drill and the DC SYSTEM switch (Figure 7-6) on the operators console is switched to the ON position.

Figure 7-6: DC Systems Switch

This system shares the same hydraulic reservoir as the main and auxiliary hydraulic systems. Hydraulic oil is drawn from the tank through a the Handwell valve suction filter. The system features a pump-motor package with a 460V electric motor driving a positive displacement hydraulic pump. A check valve internal to the 5-station manifold prevents back-flow of oil through the pump when the unit is not operating. An adjustable pressure relief valve,

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 7, Version 00 - 03/06

-7.4-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec07LowPress.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Low Pressure Hydraulic System

located immediately downstream of the check valve, establishes the maximum output pressure from the hydraulic pump.

7.2.3 Cab Roof Hatch Circuit

BD0519d01

Figure 7-7: Cab Roof Hatch Circuit

The cab roof hatch circuit actuates a pair of single-acting hydraulic cylinders to open the roof hatch. Each cylinder is equipped with a breather plug on the vented side of the piston to keep the inside (rod end) of the cylinders clean. A solenoid-operated directional valve is used to control the pressurized oil flow for hatch opening, to hold the hatch in its open position, and to allow the hatch to close by gravity. The configuration of the directional valve also enables the roof hatch to be manually opened. A pressure relief valve located downstream of the directional valve limits the force at which the roof hatch can be opened with hydraulic power. Set the pressure relief valve to 250 psi.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec07LowPress.fm

-7.5-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 7, Version 00 - 03/06

Low Pressure Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

7.2.4 Boarding Ladder Circuit

BD0519a01

Figure 7-8: Boarding Ladder Circuit

The boarding ladder circuit actuates a single-acting hydraulic cylinder to raise the boarding ladder. The cylinder is equipped with a breather plug on the vented side of the piston to keep the inside (rod end) of the cylinders clean. A solenoid-operated directional valve is used to control the pressurized oil flow for raising the ladder, to hold the ladder in its raised position, and to allow the hatch to lower by gravity. The configuration of the directional valve also enables the deck hatch to be manually lowered. A pressure relief valve located downstream of the directional valve limits the force at which the ladder can be raised with hydraulic power. Set the pressure relief valve to 300 psi. A limit switch senses when the ladder is fully raised. The drill cannot propel if the ladder is not fully raised.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 7, Version 00 - 03/06

-7.6-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec07LowPress.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Low Pressure Hydraulic System

7.2.5 Grease Pump Circuit


05 04

03

02

01

08 06
16

07
BD0519a01

Figure 7-9: Grease Pump Circuit

The grease pump is connected directly to the hydraulic pressure circuit with no intermediate control valves. An internal grease pump supply solenoid (GPSS) energizes when the PLC initiates a lubrication cycle. With the GPSS energized, oil flows through the grease pump supply valve, through a pressure reducing valve and to the grease pump cycle solenoid (GPCS) valve. The GPCS energizes for one second, then de-energizes for one second, as long as the GPSS is energized. This applies pressure alternately to the top and bottom of the pump piston, allowing lubricant to be drawn from the reservoir and pushed out through the vent valve to the automatic lubrication system components.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec07LowPress.fm

-7.7-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 7, Version 00 - 03/06

Low Pressure Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

7.3 Low Pressure Hydraulic System Maintenance


7.3.1 Hydraulic Pump-Motor

Figure 7-10: Hydraulic Pump-Motor Package

Either of the hydraulic pump-motor packages can be removed and replaced using similar procedures, Replace a hydraulic pump-motor assembly as follows:

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement during service can cause serious injury, or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine startup during maintenance work.
1. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine startup during maintenance activities. 2. Tag and disconnect the wiring from the pump motor electrical junction box.

WARNING

Hot hydraulic oil can spray with extreme force and volume, causing injury or death. Use lockout and tagout procedures to guard against inadvertent hydraulic system or machine start up during service or maintenance. Allow the hydraulic system to cool before maintenance or repair. Slowly release pressure or vent circuits before disconnecting hydraulic lines. Wear appropriate face and body protective devices while carefully loosening any connection or fitting.
3. Be sure that no pressure exists in any of the low pressure hydraulic system circuits.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 7, Version 00 - 03/06

-7.8-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec07LowPress.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Low Pressure Hydraulic System

CAUTION
Clean dirt from the pump-motor assembly and hydraulic hose fittings before loosening any of the hydraulic components.
4. Turn the Handwell valve off (fully counterclockwise).

NOTICE
Failure to execute step 4 will enable oil to siphon from the hydraulic oil tank during removal of the pump-motor assembly.
5. Tag and disconnect the pressure and suction hose assemblies and fittings from the pump. Cap and/or plug the hose fittings and pump ports to prevent contamination of the hydraulic system. 6. Remove the capscrews and lockwashers from the pump-motor mounting feet, and remove the pump-motor assembly from the low-pressure hydraulic system panel. The nuts are weld nuts and will remain attached below the panel floor. 7. Clean dirt and oil from the pump mounting surface of the low pressure hydraulic panel. Follow the cleaning procedures in Appendix A. 8. Position the replacement pump-motor assembly on the low-pressure hydraulic panel, and install securely with capscrews and lockwashers. 9. Attach SAE fittings. If SAE fittings are not used, coat the male pipe threads of the hose fittings with pipe thread sealant, and install the fittings in the suction and pressure ports of the pump-motor assembly. 10. Install the suction and pressure hose assemblies. 11. Open the Handwell valve. 12. Connect the electrical wiring to the pump motor as tagged. 13. Jog the pump-motor until the system is fully primed, and bleed air from the low pressure hydraulic system, as necessary.

7.3.2 Check Valve Cartridge


Check valves consist of a valve body that is drilled, tapped, and counterbored to accept a check valve cartridge, the valve cartridge assembly, and the O-rings and back-up rings that seal the land areas of the valve cartridge. Cartridge-type valve bodies need not be removed from the system to replace the cartridge assemblies. Check valves should not be serviced, except for two conditions:

Valve Leakage. Remove the cartridge and replace the O-ring seals. Valve Malfunction. Replace the cartridge as a unit.
Replace a cartridge-type check valve as follows:

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec07LowPress.fm

-7.9-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 7, Version 00 - 03/06

Low Pressure Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement during service can cause serious injury, or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine startup during maintenance work.
1. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine startup during maintenance activities.

WARNING

Hot hydraulic oil can spray with extreme force and volume causing injury or death. Use lockout and tagout procedures to guard against inadvertent hydraulic system or machine start up during service or maintenance. Allow the hydraulic system to cool before maintenance or repair. Slowly release pressure or vent circuits before disconnecting hydraulic lines. Wear appropriate face and body protective devices while carefully loosening any connection or fitting.
2. Be sure that no pressure exists in any of the low pressure hydraulic system circuits.

CAUTION

Clean dirt from the valve assembly and hydraulic hose fittings before loosening any of the hydraulic components.
3. Close the Handwell valve.

NOTICE
Failure to execute step 3 will enable oil to siphon from the hydraulic oil tank during removal of the check valve cartridge.
4. With a wrench, loosen and remove the check valve cartridge from the valve body. Be sure to use the wrench flats provided for removal. Plug the hole in the valve body to prevent contamination of the hydraulic system. 5. Remove and discard the O-rings and back-up rings from the O-ring grooves on the outside diameter of the valve cartridge. 6. Clean and inspect the valve assembly in accordance with the general procedures for cleaning and inspection in Appendix A. The cartridge valves are not field repairable. Replace any faulty valve cartridges, and all O-rings and back-up rings. Refer to the LinkOne electronic parts manual for cartridge and seal kit information. 7. Lightly lubricate the new O-rings and back-up rings for the cartridge valve, and install them in the grooves on the outside diameter of the valve cartridge. 8. Carefully install the valve cartridge into its seat in the manifold. Avoid displacement or cutting of the O-ring seals during installation. Torque the valve securely. 9. Open the Handwell valve.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 7, Version 00 - 03/06

-7.10-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec07LowPress.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Low Pressure Hydraulic System

10. Jog the pump-motor until the system is fully primed. Bleed air from the low pressure hydraulic system, as necessary.

7.3.3 Low Pressure Hydraulic System Valve Bank

LEGEND 01. Pressure Relief Valve 02. Directional Control Valve 03. Pressure Relief Valve 04. Flow Control Valve 05. Manifold

06. 07. 08. 09. 10. 11.

Test Port Connector Check Valve Pressure Reducing Valve Flow Control Valve Pilot Operated Check Valve Directional Control Valve

Figure 7-11: Low Pressure Hydraulic Valves

7.3.3.1 Cab Roof Hatch Relief Valve


The cab roof hatch pressure relief valve is a cartridge-type valve assembly. Cartridge-type pressure relief valve assemblies consist of a valve body that is drilled, tapped, and counterbored to accept a pressure relief valve car-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec07LowPress.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -7.11Section 7, Version 00 - 03/06

Low Pressure Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

tridge, the valve cartridge assembly, and the O-rings and back-up rings that seal the land areas of the valve cartridge. Cartridge-type valve bodies need not be removed from the system to replace the cartridge assemblies. Replace the pressure relief valve cartridge as follows: 1. Lower the cab roof hatch to the closed position.

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement during service can cause serious injury, or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine startup during maintenance work.
2. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine startup during maintenance activities.

WARNING

Hot hydraulic oil can spray with extreme force and volume causing injury or death. Use lockout and tagout procedures to guard against inadvertent hydraulic system or machine start up during service or maintenance. Allow the hydraulic system to cool before maintenance or repair. Slowly release pressure or vent circuits before disconnecting hydraulic lines. Wear appropriate face and body protective devices while carefully loosening any connection or refitting.
3. Be sure that no pressure exists in any of the low pressure hydraulic system circuits. 4. Turn the Handwell valve off.

CAUTION
Clean dirt from the valve assembly and hydraulic hose fittings before loosening any of the hydraulic components.
5. With a wrench, loosen and remove the pressure relief valve cartridge from the valve body. Be sure to use the wrench flats provided for removal. Plug the hole in the valve body to prevent contamination of the hydraulic system. 6. Remove and discard the O-rings and back-up rings from the O-ring grooves on the outside diameter of the valve cartridge. 7. Clean and inspect the valve assembly in accordance with the general procedures for cleaning and inspection in Appendix A. The cartridge valves are not field repairable. Replace any faulty valve cartridges, and all O-rings and back-up rings. Refer to the LinkOne electronic parts manual for cartridge and seal kit information. 8. Lightly lubricate the new O-rings and back-up rings for the cartridge valve, and install them in the grooves on the outside diameter of the valve cartridge. 9. Carefully install the valve cartridge into its seat in the valve body. Avoid displacement or cutting of the O-ring seals during installation. Torque the valve securely.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 7, Version 00 - 03/06

-7.12-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec07LowPress.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Low Pressure Hydraulic System

10. Open the Handwell valve. 11. Operate the pump-motor and cab roof hatch circuit to fill the circuit with hydraulic oil. Bleed all trapped air from the hatch operating cylinders.

7.3.3.2 Front Stairs Relief Valve


The front stairs pressure relief valve is a cartridge-type valve assembly. Cartridge-type pressure relief valve assemblies consist of a valve body that is drilled, tapped, and counterbored to accept a pressure relief valve cartridge, the valve cartridge assembly, and the O-rings and back-up rings that seal the land areas of the valve cartridge. Cartridge-type valve bodies need not be removed from the system to replace the cartridge assemblies. Replace the pressure relief valve cartridge as follows: 1. Lower the front stairs.

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement during service can cause serious injury, or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine startup during maintenance work.
2. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine startup during maintenance activities.

WARNING

Hot hydraulic oil can spray with extreme force and volume causing injury or death. Use lockout and tagout procedures to guard against inadvertent hydraulic system or machine start up during service or maintenance. Allow the hydraulic system to cool before maintenance or repair. Slowly release pressure or vent circuits before disconnecting hydraulic lines. Wear appropriate face and body protective devices while carefully loosening any connection or refitting.
3. Be sure that no pressure exists in any of the low pressure hydraulic system circuits. 4. Turn the Handwell valve off.

CAUTION
Clean dirt from the valve assembly and hydraulic hose fittings before loosening any of the hydraulic components.
5. With a wrench, loosen and remove the pressure relief valve cartridge from the valve body. Be sure to use the wrench flats provided for removal. Plug the hole in the valve body to prevent contamination of the hydraulic system. 6. Remove and discard the O-rings and back-up rings from the O-ring grooves on the outside diameter of the valve cartridge.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec07LowPress.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -7.13Section 7, Version 00 - 03/06

Low Pressure Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

7. Clean and inspect the valve assembly in accordance with the general procedures for cleaning and inspection in Appendix A. The cartridge valves are not field repairable. Replace any faulty valve cartridges, and all O-rings and back-up rings. Refer to the LinkOne electronic parts manual for cartridge and seal kit information. 8. Lightly lubricate the new O-rings and back-up rings for the cartridge valve, and install them in the grooves on the outside diameter of the valve cartridge. 9. Carefully install the valve cartridge into its seat in the valve body. Avoid displacement or cutting of the O-ring seals during installation. Torque the valve securely. 10. Open the Handwell valve. 11. Operate the pump-motor and front stair operating circuit to fill the circuit with hydraulic oil. Bleed all trapped air from the hatch operating cylinders.

7.3.3.3 Cab Roof Hatch Valve


The cab roof hatch directional control valve is a solenoid-operated, cartridge-type assembly. The valve assembly consists of a valve body that is drilled, tapped, and counterbored to accept two directional valve cartridges, the valve cartridge assemblies, and the O-rings and back-up rings that seal the land areas of the valve cartridges. Cartridge-type valve bodies do not need to be removed from the system to replace the cartridge assemblies. Replace the directional valve cartridges as follows: 1. Lower the cab roof hatch to the closed position.

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement during service can cause serious injury, or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine startup during maintenance work.
2. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine startup during maintenance activities. 3. Tag and disconnect the electrical connectors from the valve solenoids. 4. Remove the solenoid retaining nut from the outer end of the solenoid, then remove the solenoid from the valve.

WARNING

Hot hydraulic oil can spray with extreme force and volume causing injury or death. Use lockout and tagout procedures to guard against inadvertent hydraulic system or machine start up during service or maintenance. Allow the hydraulic system to cool before maintenance or repair. Slowly release pressure or vent circuits before disconnecting hydraulic lines. Wear appropriate face and body protective devices while carefully loosening any connection or fitting.
5. Be sure that no pressure exists in any of the low pressure hydraulic system circuits. 6. Turn the Handwell valve off.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 7, Version 00 - 03/06

-7.14-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec07LowPress.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Low Pressure Hydraulic System

NOTICE
Clean dirt from the valve assembly and hydraulic hose fittings before loosening any of the hydraulic components.
7. With a wrench, loosen and remove the directional valve cartridge from the valve body. Be sure to use the wrench flats provided for removal. Plug the hole in the valve body to prevent contamination of the hydraulic system. 8. Remove and discard the O-rings and back-up rings from the O-ring grooves on the outside diameter of the valve cartridge. 9. Clean and inspect the valve assembly in accordance with the general procedures for cleaning and inspection in Appendix A. The cartridge valves are not field repairable. Replace any faulty valve cartridges, and all O-rings and back-up rings. Refer to the LinkOne electronic parts manual for cartridge and seal kit information. 10. Lightly lubricate the new O-rings and back-up rings for the cartridge valve, and install them in the grooves on the outside diameter of the valve cartridge. 11. Carefully install the valve cartridge into its seat in the valve body. Avoid displacement or cutting of the O-ring seals during installation. Torque the valve securely. 12. Install the solenoid over the valve, and secure. 13. Connect the electrical connector to the solenoid as tagged. 14. Open the Handwell valve. 15. Operate the pump-motor and cab roof hatch circuit to fill the circuit with hydraulic oil. Bleed all trapped air from the hatch operating cylinders.

7.3.3.4 Front Stairs Valve


The front stairs directional control valve is a solenoid-operated, cartridge-type assembly. The valve assembly consists of a valve body that is drilled, tapped, and counterbored to accept two directional valve cartridges, the valve cartridge assemblies, and the O-rings and back-up rings that seal the land areas of the valve cartridges. Cartridgetype valve bodies do not need to be removed from the system to replace the cartridge assemblies. Replace the directional valve cartridges as follows: 1. Lower the front stairs.

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement during service can cause serious injury, or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine startup during maintenance work.
2. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine startup during maintenance activities. 3. Tag and disconnect the electrical connectors from the valve solenoids.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec07LowPress.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -7.15Section 7, Version 00 - 03/06

Low Pressure Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

4. Remove the solenoid retaining nut from the outer end of the solenoid, then remove the solenoid from the valve.

WARNING

Hot hydraulic oil can spray with extreme force and volume causing injury or death. Use lockout and tagout procedures to guard against inadvertent hydraulic system or machine start up during service or maintenance. Allow the hydraulic system to cool before maintenance or repair. Slowly release pressure or vent circuits before disconnecting hydraulic lines. Wear appropriate face and body protective devices while carefully loosening any connection or fitting.
5. Be sure that no pressure exists in any of the low pressure hydraulic system circuits. 6. Turn the Handwell valve off.

NOTICE
Clean dirt from the valve assembly and hydraulic hose fittings before loosening any of the hydraulic components.
7. With a wrench, loosen and remove the directional valve cartridge from the valve body. Be sure to use the wrench flats provided for removal. Plug the hole in the valve body to prevent contamination of the hydraulic system. 8. Remove and discard the O-rings and back-up rings from the O-ring grooves on the outside diameter of the valve cartridge. 9. Clean and inspect the valve assembly in accordance with the general procedures for cleaning and inspection in Appendix A. The cartridge valves are not field repairable. Replace any faulty valve cartridges, and all O-rings and back-up rings. Refer to the LinkOne electronic parts manual for cartridge and seal kit information. 10. Lightly lubricate the new O-rings and back-up rings for the cartridge valve, and install them in the grooves on the outside diameter of the valve cartridge. 11. Carefully install the valve cartridge into its seat in the valve body. Avoid displacement or cutting of the O-ring seals during installation. Torque the valve securely. 12. Install the solenoid over the valve, and secure. 13. Connect the electrical connector to the solenoid as tagged. 14. Open the Handwell valve. 15. Operate the pump-motor and front stairs circuit to fill the circuit with hydraulic oil. Bleed all trapped air from the hatch operating cylinders.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 7, Version 00 - 03/06

-7.16-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec07LowPress.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Low Pressure Hydraulic System

7.4 Hoist Brake Circuit

Figure 7-12: Hoist Brake Circuit

While the hoist brake circuit is considered a part of the low pressure hydraulic system, it uses a different pump than the one used for the low pressure hydraulic valve stand in the lubrication room. The low pressure pump and motor and the hoist brake pump and motor share the same low pressure hydraulic stand in the machinery house, but the hoist brake circuit is a completely independent circuit. The hoist brake circuit provides hydraulic pressure to release the brake on the carriage in the mast. It consists of a solenoid-activated directional control valve with an integrated heater and check valve. The hoist brake valve solenoid is energized when the operator presses the BRAKE RELEASE button on the operators console. There is no relief valve in the pump circuit. The pump is a pressure compensated pump that runs as long as the DC System switch on the operators console is in the ON position. Because the flow is low, little heat is generated; because the pump is always on, brake release is not delayed. The associated pressure switch indicates to the PLC that there is sufficient hydraulic pressure present to cause the release of the brake. Set the pressure switch to close at 900 psi.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec07LowPress.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -7.17Section 7, Version 00 - 03/06

Low Pressure Hydraulic System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 7, Version 00 - 03/06

-7.18-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec07LowPress.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Automatic Lubrication System

Section 8

Automatic Lubrication System


8.1 General
The automatic lubrication system provides measured amounts of lubricant to specified lubrication points at predetermined intervals. The drill uses the Lincoln Automatic Lubrication System. The lubrication tank, pumps and controls are located in a separate enclosure, called the lubrication room, on the front right corner of the drill frame. Also in the lubrication room are the hydraulic tank, the hydraulic oil cooler, and the low pressure hydraulic valve stand. The hydraulic grease pump is driven by the low pressure hydraulic pump in the machinery house.

8.1.1 Automatic Lubrication System Components


8.1.1.1 Tank-mounted Components.
05

01

02

03

04

LEGEND 01. Grease Tank 02. Grease Pump Cycle Solenoid GPCS 03. Grease Pump Supply Solenoid GPSS 04. Pressure Gauge 05. Lubrication Pump 06. Vent Valve 07. Dipstick 08. Filler/Breather
08 07 06

Figure 8-1: Automatic Lubrication System Componentsl

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec08AutoLube.fm

-8.1-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 8, Version 00 - 03/06

Automatic Lubrication System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Refer to Figure 8-1. The grease tank (01) holds approximately 60 gallons of multipurpose grease (refer to Section 16, Lubrication for lubricant specifications). Lubricant level is checked using the dipstick (07) and filled through the filler/Breather (07). The lubrication pump (05) is driven by a low pressure motor/pump in the machinery house (the same pump that supplies hydraulic fluid to the hoist brake. Refer to Section 7, Low Pressure Hydraulic System). Lubrication pump operation is controlled by the grease pump supply solenoid (GPSS), which opens to provide hydraulic flow to the pump when the PLC indicates that a lube cycle should begin. Intake and discharge are controlled by the grease pump cycle solenoid (GPCS), which alternately causes the pump to move upward (to provide intake) for one second and downward (to provide discharge) for one second for as long as GPSS is energized. The vent valve (06) is normally open, providing a path for pressure in the system to return to tank. When a cycle starts, pilot pressure from the GPSS closes the vent valve. When the cycle is complete and pilot pressure is removed from the vent valve, system pressure causes the vent valve to open and pressure is vented back to tank.

8.1.2 Control Panel Components

01

02

03

04

05

06

LEGEND 01. Grease Strainer 02. Gauge 03. Relief Valve

04. Grease Pressure Switch (GPS) 05. Upper Grease Solenoid (UGS) 06. Upper Grease Pressure Switch (UGPS) Figure 8-2: Lubrication Control Panel

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 8, Version 00 - 03/06

-8.2-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec08AutoLube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Automatic Lubrication System

On the control panel (Figure 8-2), a strainer (01) filters contaminants from the grease before it goes to the injectors. The gauge (02) provides visual indication of the pressure within the system. The system is protected by a 4000 psi relief valve (03). The grease pressure switch (GPS) (04) sends a signal to the PLC when the system reaches the pressure that indicates that the cycle is finished. The upper grease solenoid (UGS) (05) is normally closed. It opens when a lubrication cycle begins and the drill is in one of the drilling modes (lower systems are greased in every cycle). The upper grease pressure switch (UGPS) (06) sends a signal to the PLC when the system reaches the pressure that indicates that the upper has been lubricated. The PLC will de-energize the UGS and the pump will continue to operate until the GPS closes.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec08AutoLube.fm

-8.3-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 8, Version 00 - 03/06

Automatic Lubrication System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

8.2 Theory of Operation


03 04 05 06

02
16:1

07

01

M
11

09

08

12 15
A28 A27 A26 A25 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A24 A23 A22 A21 A20 A19 A18 A17 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1

17

D4 D3 D2 D1

C4 C3 C2 C1

B2 B1

18
H3 H2 H1 E1 F4 F3 F2 F1

E4

E3

E2

10

19

J14 J13

J12 J11

J10 J9

J8 J7 J6 J5 J4

J3 J2

J1

13

14

16

20 21

K14 K13

K12 K11

K8 K7 K6 K5 K4

LEGEND 01. Grease Tank 02. grease pump 03. Grease Pump Cycle Solenoid (GPCS) 04. Gauge 05. Reducing Valve 06. Grease Pump Supply Solenoid (GPSS) 07. Vent Valve 08. Auto Lube Motor and Pump 09. Hydraulic Tank 10. Grease Strainer

11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21.

Pressure Relief Valve Gauge Grease Pressure Switch (GPS) Tow Lube Pressure Switch Upper Grease Solenoid (UGS) Upper Grease Pressure Switch (UGPS) Mast Grease (A) Upper Machinery (B-D) Upper Machinery (E-H) Propel Machinery (J) Propel Machinery (K)

Figure 8-3: Automatic Lubrication System Circuit

The automatic lubrication system will be discussed in three sections:

Pump operation Lube control Lubrication points

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 8, Version 00 - 03/06

-8.4-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec08AutoLube.fm

K3 K2

K1

BD0666a01

K10 K9

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Automatic Lubrication System

8.2.1 Pump Operation


03 04 05

02

16 : 1

01

LEGEND 01. Grease Tank 02. Grease Pump 03. Grease Pump Cycle Solenoid (GPCS) 04. Reducing Valve 06 05. Grease Pump Supply Solenoid (GPSS) 06. Vent Valve 07. Auto Lube Motor and Pump 08. Hydraulic Tank

08

07

Figure 8-4: Pump Operation Circuit Schematic

The automatic lubrication system turns on based on signals from timers in the PLC. Typically, the PLC will start an automatic lubrication cycle every 60 minutes when the drill is in one of the drilling modes, and every five minutes when it is in propel mode. The system can also be operated manually through the operators touch screen. Hydraulic fluid used to power the Automatic Lubrication System is supplied by the low pressure hydraulic pump. The pump is active whenever the DC Systems are functioning. When the cycle starts, the motor turns the pump. The pump draws hydraulic fluid from the main hydraulic tank and sends it to the automatic lubrication system circuit.

8.2.1.1 Grease Pump Supply Solenoid (GPSS)


The GPSS is normally closed. Low pressure fluid is available at the GPSS whenever DC Systems are on. The GPSS energizes when the lubrication cycle begins. This permits hydraulic fluid to flow to the reducing valve.

CAUTION
Incorrect pressure can cause equipment damage. The reducing valve is factory preset at 220 psi. Do not adjust the reducing valve.
The grease pump has a 16:1 ratio, which means that for every 1 psi of hydraulic oil pressure, the pump can develop 16 psi of grease pressure. When the hydraulic oil pressure is 220 psi, the grease pressure could be as high as 3520 psi (16 x 220 = 3520) before the pump stalls. If the reducing valve is set too low, some lubrication points may not get lubricated; if it is set too high, it could cause damage to system components. After the reducing valve, an portion of the oil is used to provide pilot pressure to the vent valve. When this pilot pressure is present, the vent valve closes the grease return line to the grease tank.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec08AutoLube.fm

-8.5-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 8, Version 00 - 03/06

Automatic Lubrication System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

8.2.1.2 Grease Pump Cycle Solenoid (GPCS)


The Grease Pump Cycle Solenoid energizes and de-energizes. The intervals are adjustable up to one second by settings used on the GUI lube screen. When the solenoid is energized, hydraulic fluid flows to the rod end of the grease pump, causing the plunger to draw lubricant from the lube tank. When the solenoid is de-energized, hydraulic fluid flows to the head end of the grease pump, causing the plunger to press lubricant out to the auto lube system. Check valves on the inlet and outlet of the pump plunger ensure that grease flows in the correct direction. The GPCS continues to function in the same cycle as long as the GPSS is energized.

8.2.2 Lube Control


09 11

13

12

10

14

LEGEND 09. Relief Valve 10. Grease Pressure Switch (GPS) 11. Upper Grease Solenoid (UGS)

12. Upper Grease Pressure Switch (UGPS) 13. To upper machinery lube points 14. To propel machinery lube points

Figure 8-5: Lube Control Circuit Schematic

Lubricant supplied by the grease pump flows through a strainer. System pressure is limited by the relief valve and indicated by the gauge.

NOTICE
The 4000 psi relief valve is not adjustable. 8.2.2.1 Grease Pressure Switch (GPS)
The Grease Pump Supply Solenoid (GPSS, item 5, Figure 8-4) energizes with every lubrication cycle. The GPS monitors pressure in the lube lines and closes at 2500 psi, indicating that the lubrication cycle is complete. This causes the PLC to de-energize GPSS. If the GPS fails to close within three minutes, a lubrication system fault will occur; however, faults in the lubrication system will not cause automatic shutdown of the drill.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 8, Version 00 - 03/06

-8.6-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec08AutoLube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Automatic Lubrication System

8.2.2.2 Upper Grease System Operation


When the drill is in propel mode, only the propel machinery requires lubrication. Therefore, when the drill is in propel mode, the Upper Grease Solenoid (UGS) does not energize. Lubricant flows directly to the propel machinery lubrication points. When the drill is in one of the drill modes and the GPSS energizes, the UGS also energizes. This opens the line to the upper machinery lubrication points. As lubricant flows to the upper machinery lubrication points, pressure builds in the system. When pressure reaches 1500 psi, the Upper Grease Pressure Switch (UGPS) closes. This indicates to the PLC that the UGS energized as required. When the GPS senses 2500 psi, it closes, causing the GPSS to de-energize and the grease pump to stop pumping. At the same time, the pilot pressure to the vent valve (Item 6, Figure 8-4) is relieved, allowing the vent valve to open the return line back to the tank. The UGS remains open for two minutes after the GPSS de-energizes. The pressure that has built up in the upper and lower machinery lubrication lines relieves back to the grease tank. After the two minutes for depressurization, the UGS de-energizes and the cycle is complete.

8.2.3 Lubrication Points

Figure 8-6: Lubrication Injectors

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec08AutoLube.fm

-8.7-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 8, Version 00 - 03/06

Automatic Lubrication System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Table 8-1provides information for lube points lubricated by the automatic lubrication system.
Injector A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 S24 A25 A26 A27 A28 Lube Point Air Swivel Main Bearing Idler Pinion Gear Rack Drive Pinion-Inner Drive Pinion-Inner Gear Rack Idler Pinion Backup Roller Eccentric Lower RH Backup Roller Eccentric Lower LH Backup Roller Eccentric Upper RH Backup Roller Eccentric Upper LH Upper Rack Arm RH Upper Rack Arm RH Upper Rack Gate RH Upper Rack Arm LH Upper Rack Arm LH Upper Rack Gate LH Lower Rack Arm RH Lower Rack Arm RH Lower Rack Arm RH Lower Rack Arm RH Lower Rack Arm LH Lower Rack Arm LH Lower Rack Arm LH Lower Rack Arm LH Deck Wrench Deck Wrench Deck Wrench Mast Pipe Racks Mast Rotary and Hoist/ Pulldown Machinery Rotary Carriage Component Location of Injector Bank

Table 8-1: Automatic Lubrication System Lube Points

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 8, Version 00 - 03/06

-8.8-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec08AutoLube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Automatic Lubrication System

Injector B1 B2 C1-C4 D1-D4 E1-D4 F1-F4 H1 H2 H3 J1 J2 J3 - J9 J11 J10-J14 K1 K2 K3 - K9 K11 K10-K14

Lube Point Pivot Shaft Pivot Shaft Left Front Jack Right Front Jack Left Rear Jack Right Rear Jack Crawler Equalizer Right Crawler Axle Left Crawler Axle Front Lower Roller Rear Lower Roller Lower Rollers Idler Upper Rollers Front Lower Roller Rear Lower Roller Lower Rollers Idler Left Upper Rollers

Component

Location of Injector Bank Machinery Deck

Main Machinery Left Front Jack Right Front Jack Left Rear Jack Right Rear Jack Crawler Equalizer Right Crawler Axle Left Crawler Axle

At jack, below deck

Below deck

Left Crawler

Crawler, left side

Right Crawler

Crawler, right side

Table 8-1: Automatic Lubrication System Lube Points

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec08AutoLube.fm

-8.9-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 8, Version 00 - 03/06

Automatic Lubrication System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

8.3 Automatic Lubrication System Maintenance


8.3.1 Hydraulic Pump-Motor, 37Q117D2

Figure 8-7: Hydraulic Pump-Motor Package

The pump and motor package is part of the low pressure hydraulic circuit, located in the low pressure hydraulic pump stand in the machinery house. Replace the hydraulic pump-motor assembly as follows:

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement during service can cause serious injury, or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine startup during maintenance work.
1. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine startup during maintenance activities. 2. Tag and disconnect the wiring from the pump motor electrical junction box.

WARNING

Hot hydraulic oil can spray with extreme force and volume, causing injury or death. Use lockout and tagout procedures to guard against inadvertent hydraulic system or machine start up during service or maintenance. Allow the hydraulic system to cool before maintenance or repair. Slowly release pressure or vent circuits before disconnecting hydraulic lines. Wear appropriate face and body protective devices while carefully loosening any connection or fitting.
3. Be sure that no pressure exists in any of the low pressure hydraulic system circuits.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 8, Version 00 - 03/06

-8.10-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec08AutoLube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Automatic Lubrication System

CAUTION
Clean dirt from the pump-motor assembly and hydraulic hose fittings before loosening any of the hydraulic components.
4. Turn the Handwell valve off.

NOTICE
Failure to execute step 4 will enable oil to siphon from the hydraulic oil tank during removal of the pump-motor assembly.
5. Tag and disconnect the pressure and suction hose assemblies and fittings from the pump. Cap and/or plug the hose fittings and pump ports to prevent contamination of the hydraulic system. 6. Remove the capscrews and lockwashers from the pump-motor mounting feet, and remove the pump-motor assembly from the low-pressure hydraulic system panel. The nuts are weld nuts and will remain attached below the panel floor. 7. Clean dirt and oil from the pump mounting surface of the low pressure hydraulic panel. Follow the cleaning procedures in Appendix A. 8. Position the replacement pump-motor assembly on the low-pressure hydraulic panel, and install securely with capscrews and lockwashers. 9. Coat the male pipe threads of the hose fittings with pipe thread sealant, and install the fittings in the suction and pressure ports of the pump-motor assembly. 10. Install the suction and pressure hose assemblies. 11. Disconnect the hose assembly from above the suction filter and fill the suction line with hydraulic oil. Refer to the Lubrication section for oil specifications. 12. Connect the hose assembly above suction filter, and tighten securely. 13. Connect the electrical wiring to the pump motor as tagged. 14. Jog the pump-motor until the system is fully primed, and bleed air from the low pressure hydraulic system, as necessary.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec08AutoLube.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -8.11Section 8, Version 00 - 03/06

Automatic Lubrication System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

8.3.2 Grease Pump 37U154D1

07

09 08

10

05

06 04 03

11

02

01
BD0517a01

LEGEND 01. Grease Inlet 02. Grease Tank 03. Cover Plate 04. Grease Outlet 05. Oil Return Port 06. Vent Valve Pilot Port 07. Oil Supply Port 08. Grease Pump Supply Solenoid 09. Reducing Valve 10. Pressure Gauge 11. Grease Pump Cycle Solenoid

Figure 8-8: Grease Pump

The grease pump is a Lincoln 16:1 hydraulic reciprocating-type unit. The pump consists of an intensifier cylinder pump, two solenoids valves, and a pressure-reducing valve. The pressure setting is adjustable. Disassembly and repair of this pump requires special tools and methods. If the pump malfunctions, replace it, and send the old unit to a qualified repair facility.

8.3.2.1 Removal

CAUTION

High-pressure oil or grease can spray and penetrate skin or eyes causing severe injury. Use extreme caution when working around operating lubrication system and wear appropriate face and body protective devices. Shut down, lock out, and tag the machine before performing inspection, service, and maintenance of the lubrication system. Obtain medical aid immediately for lube spray into eyes or penetration into the skin. Be sure that the hydraulic and air systems are not pressurized before loosening or removing any connections or parts for maintenance.
1. Shut down the machine, and lock out and tag the controls. 2. Turn off the main PLC.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 8, Version 00 - 03/06

-8.12-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec08AutoLube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Automatic Lubrication System

3. Tag and disconnect the electrical wiring to the valve solenoids. 4. Tag and disconnect the hoses from the grease pump. 5. Disconnect the grease hose at the pump. 6. Remove the bolts from the cover plate and remove the pump. 7. Remove the capscrews and pump mounting fitting from the grease pump.

8.3.2.2 Cleaning, Inspection and Repair


Refer to Appendix A for general mechanical maintenance procedures, and to Appendix B for general hydraulic component maintenance procedures. Repair of the grease pump is limited to the replacement of worn or damaged parts.

8.3.2.3 Installation

CAUTION

High-pressure oil or grease can spray and penetrate skin or eyes causing severe injury. Use extreme caution when working around operating lubrication system and wear appropriate face and body protective devices. Shut down, lock out, and tag the machine before performing inspection, service, and maintenance of the lubrication system. Obtain medical aid immediately for lube spray into eyes or penetration into the skin. Be sure that the hydraulic and air systems are not pressurized before loosening or removing any connections or parts for maintenance.
1. Fasten the pump mounting fitting to the pump. 2. Mount the pump to the cover plate. 3. Insert the grease pump in the tank and attach the cover plate to the tank. 4. Connect the grease supply hose to the pump. 5. Connect the oil pressure supply to the grease pump. 6. Connect the grease return hose to the grease pump. 7. Connect the vent valve to the grease pump. 8. Turn on the main PLC. 9. Bleed the system. Refer to the topic. Bleeding Grease System.

8.3.2.4 Adjustment
The pressure reducing valve is set at 190 psi (13.1 bar). The valve is factory-set and normally should not be changed.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec08AutoLube.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -8.13Section 8, Version 00 - 03/06

Automatic Lubrication System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

8.3.3 Lubrication Control Panel R7686F1

01

02

03

04

05

06

LEGEND 01. Grease Strainer 02. Gauge 03. Relief Valve

04. Grease Pressure Switch (GPS) 05. Upper Grease Solenoid (UGS) 06. Upper Grease Pressure Switch (UGPS) Figure 8-9: Lubrication Control Panel

8.3.3.1 Grease Strainer 46Z503


The grease strainer is mounted on the control panel. To clean or replace the grease strainer, 1. Shut down the lubrication system, and lock out and tag the controls. 2. Remove the filter plug and element, clean the element in nonflammable solvent, and replace the element and plug. 3. If the strainer in the Lincoln system must be replaced. refer to Figure 8-9 and proceed as follows: A. Disconnect the supply hose at the strainer. B. Replace the strainer and connect the supply hose. C. Disconnect the grease return hose at the vent valve,

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 8, Version 00 - 03/06

-8.14-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec08AutoLube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Automatic Lubrication System

D. Place a catch basin under the end of the hose to collect drained grease. E. Turn on the lubrication system and initiate a lube cycle. Observe the discharge from the grease return hose and continue to cycle the system until all air is purged from the grease line. F. Connect the grease return hose to the vent valve.

8.3.3.2 Relief Valve 36Z879D68

CAUTION

High-pressure oil or grease can spray and penetrate skin or eyes causing severe injury. Use extreme caution when working around operating lubrication system and wear appropriate face and body protective devices. Shut down the machine, and lock out and tag the controls before performing inspection, service, and maintenance of the lubrication system. Obtain medical aid immediately for lube spray into eyes or penetration into the skin. Be sure that the grease system is not pressurized before loosening or removing any connections or parts for maintenance. The pressure relief valve is set at 4000 psi (276 bar) and is not adjustable.
The relief valve is not adjustable, and cannot be repaired by the user. To replace the valve, proceed as follows. 1. Use lockout-tagout procedures to shut down the drill. 2. Unscrew the valve from the manifold. 3. Install a new valve. Be sure that the connection is tight.

8.3.3.3 Pressure Switches 79Z4843


Pressure switches GPS and UGPS are SPDT snap-action type with automatic reset. The range is adjustable between 235 and 3000 psi (16 to 205 bar) on decreasing pressure, and between 295 and 3400 psi (20.2 to 233 bar) on increasing pressure. The switches are connected normally open.

WARNING

Hazardous voltage can cause burns, injury, or even death. Disconnect, lock out, and tag the power source which feeds this device to prevent power from being applied while inspection and repairs are being performed. Before beginning repairs, try the operational controls to verify that the intended power source is disconnected. Removal

CAUTION

High-pressure oil or grease can spray and penetrate skin or eyes causing severe injury. Use extreme caution when working around operating lubrication system and wear appropriate face and body protective devices. Shut down machine, and lock out and tag the controls before performing inspection, service, and maintenance of the lubrication

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec08AutoLube.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -8.15Section 8, Version 00 - 03/06

Automatic Lubrication System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

system. Obtain medical aid immediately for lube spray into eyes or penetration into the skin. Refer to Figure 7-7 or 7-8 and proceed as follows:
1. Disconnect, lock out, and tag the power source that feeds the system to prevent power from being applied while service is being performed. 2. Disconnect and tag the wiring to the switch to be removed. 3. Unscrew the pressure switch from the fitting.

Repair
Refer to Appendix A for general mechanical maintenance procedures, and to Appendix B for general hydraulic component maintenance procedures. Replace the pressure switch if faulty.

Installation
1. Install the pressure switch onto the fitting. 2. Connect the wiring to the switch. 3. Connect the power source after service is being performed. 4. Bleed the grease system. Refer to the topics, Bleeding Grease System.

Adjustment
To adjust the pressure switches the main PLC must be on. Refer to Figure 8-10 and proceed as follows:

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 8, Version 00 - 03/06

-8.16-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec08AutoLube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Automatic Lubrication System

Figure 8-10: Pressure Switch Adjustment

1. Remove the pressure adjustment screw cover to gain access to the adjustment screw. 2. Turn the adjustment screw clockwise to lower the actuation pressure setting. Turn the adjustment screw counterclockwise to raise the actuation pressure setting. Pressure settings are as follows: GSPS - 2500 psi (172.5 bar) UGPS - 1500 psi (103.5 bar) 3. After adjustment, install the pressure adjustment screw cover.

8.3.3.4 Upper Grease Solenoid 36Z1412D2


The Upper Grease Solenoid valve is installed in the line to the upper machinery.

WARNING

hazardous voltage can cause burns, injury, or even death. Disconnect, lock out, and tag the power source that feeds this device to prevent power from being applied while inspection and repairs are being performed. Before beginning repairs, try the operational controls to verify that the intended power source is disconnected.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec08AutoLube.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -8.17Section 8, Version 00 - 03/06

Automatic Lubrication System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

CAUTION

High-pressure oil or grease can spray and penetrate skin or eyes causing severe injury. Use extreme caution when working around operating lubrication system and wear appropriate face and body protective devices. Shut down the machine, and lock out and tag the controls before performing inspection, service and maintenance of the lubrication system. Obtain medical aid immediately for lube spray into eyes or penetration into the skin. Removal
1. Disconnect, lock out, and tag the power source that feeds the system to prevent power from being applied while service is being performed. 2. Disconnect and tag wiring to the solenoid. 3. If the solenoid is not actuating the valve, remove the screws on top of the valve to detach the solenoid. Inspect the valve for signs of malfunction. If the valve is damaged, replace the entire solenoid valve. 4. Check operation of the solenoid with a 125VAC power source, If faulty, replace the solenoid. Check operation of the valve after installation. 5. If the entire valve must be removed, it will be necessary to remove the components from the panel to access the valve. A. Disconnect and tag wiring to the pressure switches. Remove the pressure switches. B. Disconnect and tag the lube hoses. C. Remove attaching hardware to unfasten the manifold, valve, and fittings.

Repair
Refer to Appendix A for general mechanical maintenance procedures, and to Appendix B for general hydraulic component maintenance procedures. Repair of the solenoid valve is limited to the replacement of worn or damaged parts.

Installation
1. Assemble the solenoid, manifold and fittings, and mount these parts on the panel. 2. Connect wiring to the solenoid. 3. Install pressure switches and connect wiring. 4. Connect lube hoses to the tee fittings. 5. Bleed the grease system. Refer to the topic, Bleeding Grease System.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 8, Version 00 - 03/06

-8.18-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec08AutoLube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Automatic Lubrication System

8.3.4 Vent Valve 36Q525


05 06

04

01 03 02

LEGEND 01. Vent Valve 02. Lubricant Inlet Port 03. Tank Return Port

04. 05. 06. 07.

07 Lubricant Outlet Port From Grease Pump To Injectors To Lube Tank


Figure 8-11: Vent Valve

The vent valve is mounted on top of the lubrication tank near the grease pump. It is a hydraulically piloted valve that is normally open to vent the lube system. During lubrication the valve is closed to shut off grease flow to the tank.

8.3.4.1 Removal
Refer to Figure 8-11 and proceed as follows:

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec08AutoLube.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -8.19Section 8, Version 00 - 03/06

Automatic Lubrication System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

CAUTION

High-pressure oil or grease can spray and penetrate skin or eyes causing severe injury. Use extreme caution when working around operating lubrication system and wear appropriate face and body protective devices. Shut down the machine, and lock and tag the controls before performing inspection, service, and maintenance of the lubrication system. Obtain medical aid immediately for lube spray into eyes or penetration into the skin.
1. Use lockout/tagout procedures to shut down the drill. 2. Tag and disconnect each of the hoses leading to vent valve. 3. Remove the vent valve from the tank bracket.

8.3.4.2 Disassembly

LEGEND 01. Cylinder 02. Piston 03. V Seal 04. Needle 05. Packing Assembly 06. Valve Seat 07. Valve Seat Gasket 08. Valve Body

Figure 8-12: Vent Valve Assembly

Refer to Figure 8-12 and proceed as follows: 1. Loosen and remove the valve body from cylinder. 2. Unthread valve seat. Remove the seat and gasket from the valve body. 3. Remove packing assembly from cylinder. 4. Remove piston from the cylinder. 5. Remove V-seal from piston. 6. Remove needle from the packing assembly.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 8, Version 00 - 03/06

-8.20-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec08AutoLube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Automatic Lubrication System

8.3.4.3 Cleaning, Inspection and Repair


Refer to Appendix A for general mechanical maintenance procedures, and to Appendix B for general hydraulic component maintenance procedures. Repair of the vent valve is limited to the replacement of worn or damaged parts.

8.3.4.4 Assembly
Refer to Figure 8-12 and proceed as follows: 1. Apply a light coating of oil to V-seal and install on piston as shown. 2. Apply a light coating of oil to the inside wall of cylinder. 3. Install piston in cylinder, rotating the piston so that the lip of V-seal will not invert. 4. Install needle in packing assembly, and place the packing assembly in the cylinder as shown. 5. Place gasket in valve body; then thread valve seat into the valve body. 6. Thread valve body into cylinder.

8.3.4.5 Installation
1. Mount the vent valve on the tank bracket. 2. Connect the hoses to the valve.

8.3.5 Lubrication Injectors 44Z1169D__


The lubrication injectors are pressure-operated and spring-reset. They are mounted on manifolds, located in groups strategically positioned on the drill. The Lincoln SL-1 injector used on this drill delivers a measured volume of lubricant to the lubrication point. The volume is adjustable from .008 - .080 in3 (131 - 1310 mm3) (refer to Subtopic 8.3.5.2). The injectors have dual outlets, allowing them to be crossported to deliver increased amounts of lubricant to the lube point. The injectors operate within a pressure range between 1,850 and 3000 psi. (typical pressure switch setting is 2500 psi). Maximum vent pressure (the pressure the system must get below to allow the injectors to reset after a cycle) is 300 psi.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec08AutoLube.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -8.21Section 8, Version 00 - 03/06

Automatic Lubrication System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

8.3.5.1 Theory of Operation

Figure 8-13: Injector Operation, Position 1

As shown in Figure 8-13 for Position 1, when the lubrication cycle starts, pressure from lubricant entering the injector forces the slide valve to open and allows lubricant to enter the passage leading to the measuring chamber.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 8, Version 00 - 03/06

-8.22-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec08AutoLube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Automatic Lubrication System

Figure 8-14: Injector Operation - Position 2

After the slide valve opens, lubricant is directed into the measuring chamber above the injector piston. The injector piston is pushed down, forcing lubricant from the discharge chamber, through the outlet port to the lube point.

Figure 8-15: Injector Operation - Position 3

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec08AutoLube.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -8.23Section 8, Version 00 - 03/06

Automatic Lubrication System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

The injector piston completes its stroke by pushing the slide valve, blocking the lubricant supply through the passage to the measuring chamber. The injector piston remains in this position until all the injectors have finished the first half of their cycle. After all the injectors have cycled, pressure builds up until the pressure switch trips, de-energizing the solenoid valve and stopping the lubrication pump. Excess lube pressure in the supply lines relieves through the vent valve back to the tank.

Figure 8-16: Injector Operation - Position 4

Position 4 in Figure 8-16 shows the injector spring expanding after pressure has been vented from the supply lines. The injector spring expands, pushing the slide valve to its original position, pushing lubricant from the measuring chamber though the passage and valve port, and into the discharge chamber. The injector cycle is completed and the injector is ready for the next cycle.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 8, Version 00 - 03/06

-8.24-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec08AutoLube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Automatic Lubrication System

8.3.5.2 Adjustment

CAUTION
In addition to lubricating the various components in the lubrication system, the lubricant supplied to the lube point flushes dirt and other impurities from the lube point (component). Reducing the amount of lubricant to the lube point can result in excessive wear and premature component failure. Contact your P&H MinePro Services representative before changing (especially before reducing) the amount of lubricant being supplied to the lube point.
1. Loosen output adjusting screw locknut. 2. Adjust the injector to deliver the desired amount of lubricant to the lube point. Turn the output adjustment screw outward (anticlockwise) to increase the amount of lubricant to the lube point (maximum .08 in3 or 131 mm3), or turn the output adjustment screw inward (clockwise) to decrease the amount of lubricant delivered to the lube point (minimum .008 in3 or 1310 mm3). 3. Tighten the output adjusting screw locknut to lock the adjusting screw in place.

Figure 8-17: Injector Adjustment

8.3.5.3 Removal

WARNING

Accidental shovel movement during service procedures can result in serious personal injury or death. Always park on level ground, and use lockout and tagout procedures to prevent accidental start-up and/or motion.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec08AutoLube.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -8.25Section 8, Version 00 - 03/06

Automatic Lubrication System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Figure 8-18: SL-1 Injector Removal/Installation

1. Use lockout and tagout procedures to prevent accidental movement or startup. 2. Remove the feeder line from the injector being removed. 3. Loosen and remove the adapter bolt. 4. Remove the injector and gasket from the injector manifold. Discard the gasket.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 8, Version 00 - 03/06

-8.26-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec08AutoLube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Automatic Lubrication System

8.3.5.4 Disassembly

LEGEND 01. Adjusting Nut 02. Locking Nut 03. Piston Stop Plug 04. Gasket 05. Packing 06. O-ring 07. Fitting Assembly 08. Slide Valve 09. Washer 10. Adapter Gasket 11. Adapter Bolt 12. Gasket 13. Manifold 14. Packing 15. Inlet Disc 16. Packing 17. Spring Seat 18. Injector Spring 19. Injector Piston 20. Injector Body 21. Washer Figure 8-19: Injector Components

1. Loosen locknut. 2. Loosen and remove adjusting nut with locknut. 3. Loosen and remove piston stop plug with packing and washer. 4. Remove packing and washer from piston stop plug. Discard the packing. 5. Remove injector piston assembly with o-ring. Remove the o-ring and discard. 6. Remove injector spring. 7. Remove spring seat through the top of the injector body. 8. Remove washer, packing, inlet disc packing and slide valve through the bottom of the injector.

8.3.5.5 Repair
Repair of SL-1 injector is limited to replacing worn or defective parts. Whenever an SL-1 injector is disassembled, all gaskets, o-rings, and packings should be replaced.

8.3.5.6 Assembly
Refer to Figure 8-19 and assemble the injector as follows: 1. Install spring seat in injector body with the flat side of the seated flat against the bottom of the cylinder in the injector body.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec08AutoLube.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -8.27Section 8, Version 00 - 03/06

Automatic Lubrication System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

2. Place injector spring into the cylinder bore in the injector body. 3. Lubricate a new o-ring with a light coating of grease and install in the groove of injector. 4. Place piston assembly with installed o-ring into the cylinder bore of the injector body. Make sure that the tapered portion on the piston assembly is pointed toward the top of the injector body 5. Place washer and new packing into the bore at the bottom of piston stop plug. 6. Place piston stop plug over injector piston onto the injector body. Torque to 25-30 ft-lbs (33.9-40.7 Nm). 7. Install the lock nut onto the adjusting nut. Install the adjusting nut over the injector into the threaded bore in piston stop plug. 8. Install new packing into the bore inside the bottom of the injector body. 9. Place slide valve into the bore of packing. 10. Place inlet disc in the bore at the bottom of the injector. 11. Place new packing in the bore at the bottom of the injector.

8.3.5.7 Installation
Refer to Figure 8-18 and install the injector as follows: 1. Place the injector at the top of the manifold. 2. Install new gasket on the adapter bolt. 3. Install adapter bolt through the bottom of the manifold and thread into the bottom of the injector. Tighten the adapter bolt to 45-50 ft-lbs (61-68 Nm). 4. Install the feeder line into the injector body. 5. Bleed the air from the injector and feeder line, refer to Bleeding Air from Feeder Lines. 6. Start up the drill using lockout and tagout procedures.

8.3.5.8 Bleeding The System


During component replacement procedures, or as a means of resolving a lubrication fault, it may become necessary to remove air from the supply or feeder lines. Air can be introduced into the lubrication system for several reasons:

Because lubricant levels in the reservoir become too low before refilling. Because the lubrication pump is improperly primed. During component replacement. It is necessary to bleed air from the system to prevent lack of proper lubrication from causing damage to drill
components and to keep the lubrication fault alarm from sounding.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 8, Version 00 - 03/06

-8.28-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec08AutoLube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Automatic Lubrication System

The following procedures are provided for bleeding air from the automatic lubrication system.

WARNING

Inadvertent movement of the drill during the following procedures can result in injury or death. Be sure that an operator is stationed at the controls to prevent inadvertent operation of any drill components. Bleeding Air From Supply Lines (System)

CAUTION

High-pressure oil or grease can spray and penetrate skin or eyes causing severe injury. Use extreme caution when working around operating lubrication system and wear appropriate face and body protective devices. Obtain medical aid immediately for lube spray into eyes or penetration into the skin.
1. Set all brakes. 2. Start the machine. Station the operator at the controls to prevent inadvertent operations of the drill. 3. Be sure that the grease pump is primed and free of air. If necessary, adjust the lube cycle time and interval at the GUI to slow grease pump operation. 4. Start a manual lubrication cycle using the GUI. It will be necessary to start a manual lubrication cycle several times to complete the bleeding process. 5. Bleed each supply line in the lubrication system to be bled starting with the shortest section and working up to the longest section. Bleed each section as follows: A. If there are fittings that could trap air, as shown in Figure 8-20, start with the fitting closest to the grease pump; remove each plug in order and run the grease pump until lubricant flow is free of air or foreign matter. Then install and tighten the plug, and move on to the next fitting.

Figure 8-20: Bleeding Air at Fitting

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec08AutoLube.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -8.29Section 8, Version 00 - 03/06

Automatic Lubrication System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

B. Remove the plug(s) at the end of the section. It will be located on the injector manifold as shown in Figure 821.

Figure 8-21: Bleeding Air at Manifold

C. Operate the lubrication pump until lubricant flow is free of air or foreign matter. Use a drain pan to collect the lubricant discharged during the bleeding process. D. Replace the plug. 6. Bleed air from each section in the lubrication system until all sections of the lubricant supply lines are bled. 7. After all air is removed from the grease system, manually cycle the lubrication system via the GUI Lube screen and check all injectors for proper operation.

Bleeding Air from Supply Lines After Component Replacement


When installing new or repaired lubrication components such as the injectors, air is introduced into the grease system supply lines. This air will cause a fault warning alarm to sound, or, if undetected, could cause excessive wear and premature component failure. When bleeding air from the supply lines after installation of a component, it is only necessary to bleed air from the section of supply line into which the component was installed. To bleed air from the supply lines after installation of a component, proceed as follows: 1. Start the drill. Station the operator at the controls to prevent anyone from operating the drill while performing bleeding procedures. 2. If necessary, adjust the lube cycle time and interval at the GUI to slow grease pump operation. 3. If an injector, or set of injectors, was installed, remove the plug(s) at the injector (Figure 8-21). If a pressure switch was installed, or if a hose or pipe was replaced, loosen the next fitting in that section of the supply line. Collect the lubricant discharged during the bleeding process in a drain pan. A. Start a manual lubrication cycle using the GUI. It will be necessary to start a manual lubrication cycle several times to complete the bleeding process.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 8, Version 00 - 03/06

-8.30-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec08AutoLube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Automatic Lubrication System

B. Close the air flow control valve. Record the number of turns required to close the valve. C. Open the flow control valve enough so that the grease pump runs slowly. 4. Operate the grease pump until lubricant flow is free of air or foreign matter. 5. Replace the plug and tighten the fitting. 6. After all air is removed from the system, manually cycle the lubrication system via the GUI Lube screen and check the injector(s) for proper operation.

Bleeding Air from Feeder Lines

Figure 8-22: Bleeding Air from Feeder Lines

To bleed air from feeder lines, refer to Figure 8-22 and proceed as follows: 1. Disconnect the feeder line at the lube point. 2. Remove the cap from the filler fitting on the injector. 3. Using a grease gun containing the same type of grease being used in the lubrication system, attach the grease gun nozzle and pump grease through the feeder line until clean grease, free of dirt and contaminants, exits the feeder line. 4. Remove the grease gun, replace the cap on the filler fitting, and connect the feeder line at the lube point.

8.3.5.9 System Start-up After Repair


When returning the drill to service after repairs, make the following checks: 1. Check the lubrication intervals on the GUI Lube screen. Adjust if necessary. 2. Manually cycle the grease system and check the following for proper operation:

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec08AutoLube.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -8.31Section 8, Version 00 - 03/06

Automatic Lubrication System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

A. Observe the pressure gauge, pressure switches and the Upper Grease Solenoid to verify proper operation and adjustment. Adjust as required. B. Observe injectors for proper operation. Check injector indicators for complete motion. SL-1 injector indicators will lower when the injector discharges lubricant. The indicator will remain in the lowered state until the pump turns off, and will then raise when the injector is reset.

8.4 Troubleshooting
Problem Grease pump does not run Possible Cause Circuit breaker off or PLC off Low or no drive oil pressure Faulty grease pump Grease pump does not build pressure Leak at hoses or connections Remedy Turn on circuit breaker or PLC Identify and correct problem in low pressure hydraulic system. Repair or replace grease pump Check condition of hoses and tightness of connections. Replace faulty hoses. Tighten all connections. Bleed lube lines Clean pump inlet and check valves as required. Drain and clean tank interior to remove debris as required. Adjust reducing valve setting to 220 psi (15.2 bar). Repair or replace valve. Repair or replace grease pump. Identify and correct problem in low pressure hydraulic system. Repair or replace solenoid Repair or replace cylinder Repair or replace reducing valve Set pressure switch to 2500 psi. Repair or replace pressure switch. Adjust reducing valve setting to 220 psi (15.2 bar). Clean, repair or replace valve.

Pockets of air in system Obstructed pump inlet

Grease pump reducing valve set too low Faulty vent valve Faulty pump Grease pump runs erratically Erratic drive oil pressure Faulty pump solenoid Faulty pump cylinder Faulty reducing valve Grease pump operates but cycle does not complete Incorrect pressure switch setting Faulty pressure switch Grease pump reducing valve set too low Faulty vent valve Table 8-2: Troubleshooting Guide

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 8, Version 00 - 03/06

-8.32-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec08AutoLube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Automatic Lubrication System

Problem Lack of grease at lube point

Possible Cause Leaking lines

Remedy Inspect hose from lube point to injector for loose connections or ruptured hose. Correct deficiencies. Check injector stem for movement during lube cycle. If unit is not working, disconnect supply hose and flush at the fitting with a grease gun to clear line. Connect supply hose. Repair or replace faulty injector. Disconnect supply hose and flush using a grease gun to clear the line. Replace faulty hose and connect hose after service. Remove injectors or measuring valves. Disconnect supply hose and flush manifold using a grease gun to clear. Install injectors or valves and connect hose after service. Check grease tank and replenish as required. Check grease weight. Grease may be too heavy for operating environment. Inspect applicable lines for leakage. Correct deficiencies. Repair or replace grease pump.

Blocked line

Faulty injector Lack of grease at injector manifolds Clogged or ruptured supply hose(s)

Blocked manifold

Inadequate grease at lube points

No grease supply Incorrect viscosity

Leaking lines Faulty grease pump Table 8-2: Troubleshooting Guide

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec08AutoLube.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -8.33Section 8, Version 00 - 03/06

Automatic Lubrication System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 8, Version 00 - 03/06

-8.34-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec08AutoLube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Propel System

Section 9

Propel System
9.1 General
The drill is propelled by left and right hand crawler tracks mounted on crawler side frames. The crawler assemblies are identical to each other except that they are configured as left- and right-hand units.

LEGEND 01. Drive Tumbler

02. Transmission 03. Track

Figure 9-1: Propel Drive Components

9.2 Theory of Operation


Each crawler track is driven by a reversible hydrostatic drive system. Pressurized hydraulic oil is supplied to each hydraulic motor by individual pumps in the main hydraulic system. The direction of crawler travel is reversed by reversing the direction of fluid flow through the motors. This is accomplished when the operator moves the propel control levers on the operator console. Propel speed is controlled by modulating the volumetric rate of hydraulic fluid passed through the motors. Each propel drive transmission is flange-mounted at the front end of the crawler frame. The transmission consists of a three stage planetary gear reducer with an integrated spring-set, hydraulically released, disc brake. The propel motor is flange-mounted to the input shaft end of the transmission, as an integral part of the transmission unit. Each transmission has a manually operated mechanical coupling (only used with the optional towing package, which is included with this drill).

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec09Propel.fm

-9.1-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 9, Version 00 - 03/06

Propel System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

The propel brakes are automatically released when hydraulic pressure is applied to the propel motors. When hydraulic pressure is removed or lost, the brakes automatically apply, thus preventing uncontrolled machine travel. The crawler transmissions multiply the torque received from the hydraulic motors and produce output torque to rotate the drive tumblers, which are bolted to the transmission hub. The drive tumblers engage and drive the crawler tracks. The crawler side frames are connected to the main frame at the rear of the machine by a rigidly mounted main axle. A compensating equalizer axle at the front of the crawlers is designed to maintain the machine in a stable condition while traversing uneven terrain.

NOTICE
Power for the propel system is provided by the main hydraulic system. Because of its complexity, the main hydraulic system is covered as a separate section in this manual. Refer to Section 4, Main Hydraulic System..

9.2.1 Propel Motor 41U100D2

Figure 9-2: Propel Motor

The propel transmissions are driven by variable-displacement, plug-in type, axial piston hydraulic motors of bent axis design. The propel motor is an integral component of the propel transmission assembly, but it can be removed independently. When the operator places the drill in PROPEL mode, the PLC allows the joystick to control the propel pump servos. As the joystick is moved, hydraulic pressure is ported to the propel motor, and the propel motor causes the propel transmission to turn. The propel brakes are an integral part of the propel transmission. When the operators BRAKE RELEASE button is in the RELEASE position and when the joystick is moved off its neutral position, oil is ported from the main pumps

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 9, Version 00 - 03/06

-9.2-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec09Propel.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Propel System

to special brake ports in the motor (not the same pressure lines as those that drive the motor) to cause the brakes to release. When the joystick is in the neutral position, the brakes are not released. The piston displacement is hydraulically actuated, and can be controlled by the drill operator. When the operator places the DRILL SPEED switch to LOW speed setting, the motors maximum displacement provides high torque, low speed propelling. When the switch is in the HIGH speed setting, the motors minimum displacement provides low torque, high speed propelling. The high speed/low torque setting provides for a specific minimum motor displacement. The motors swash plate is in its destroked configuration. The amount the swash plate can move in the destroked direction is limited by a physical stop that can be adjusted by turning the stop in or out, adjusting the degree to which the plate can be destroked. The low speed/high torque setting provides for a specific maximum motor displacement. The motors swash plate is in its fully stroked configuration. The amount the swash plate can move in the stroked direction is limited by a physical stop that can be adjusted by turning the stop in or out, adjusting the degree to which the plate can be stroked.

9.2.2 Propel Transmission 53R176D2

Figure 9-3: Propel Transmission

The propel transmission (refer to Figure 9-3) is a three-stage planetary gear reducer with an integral hydraulicallyreleased, multiple-disc brake. The transmission and motor can be removed or installed as a unit, without need for disassembly or subassembly of its components. The drive tumbler, R54640D2, meshes with lugs on the crawler track shoes, causing them to move. The crawler track shoes are supported by rollers at the top of the crawler frames and provide a continuous track on which the drill propels.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec09Propel.fm

-9.3-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 9, Version 00 - 03/06

Propel System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

9.2.3 Crawler Assembly R6575F3


03

02

01

06 09 07 08
LEGEND 01. Propel Transmission 02. Equalizer Axle 03. Propel Motor 04. Idler Roller 05. Crawler Frame

05 04

05
06. 07. 08. 09.

BD177b01

Main (Pivot) Axle Crawler Track Lower Rollers Upper Rollers (not visible under crawler track)

Figure 9-4: Crawler Assembly

There are two crawler assemblies, one on either side of the drill. They are connected to the drills main frame by means of two axles:

9.2.3.1 Equalizer Axle R11405F1


The equalizer axle is mounted to the forward end of the main frame by a large pin and clevis at the center bottom of the frame. It attaches to the two crawler frames by means of pins. This arrangement permits some flexibility sideto-side as the drill propels over uneven terrain.

9.2.3.2 Main (Pivot) Axle R41245D1


The main axle, also called the pivot axle, is mounted to the underside of the main frame by two split collars. To attach the crawler frames, the axle extends through an unbushed bore at the rear of each crawler frame. The connection is secured by a retainer plate bolted into the end of the shaft. This arrangement permits some flexibility front-to-back as the drill propels over uneven terrain.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 9, Version 00 - 03/06

-9.4-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec09Propel.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Propel System

9.2.3.3 Crawler Frames R6570D3/D4

Figure 9-5: Crawler Frame

The crawler frames support and distribute the weight of the drill to the ground. In addition to the propel transmission assembly and the two axles, the crawler frames contain three upper rollers, ten lower rollers, and an idler roller.

9.2.3.4 Upper and Lower Rollers 13P627F1

Figure 9-6: Upper Roller

On each crawler frame, thirteen rollers support the track as it moves around the crawler frame. Three upper rollers support the weight of the track as it moves across the top of the crawler frame. Ten lower rollers support and distribute the weight of the drill to the crawler track.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec09Propel.fm

-9.5-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 9, Version 00 - 03/06

Propel System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

9.2.3.5 Idler Roller 13N385D1F1

Figure 9-7: Idler Roller

At the rear of each crawler frame, an idler roller is used to maintain alignment of the track shoes as they move around the crawler frame. The idler roller is mounted in sliding bearing blocks, which enable it to move fore and aft in the crawler frames. This provides a means of adjusting track tension.

9.2.3.6 Crawler Track R3122F2


The crawler track provides a surface on which the drill propels. It consists of a series of shoes pinned together to form a continuous track. The shoes are 36" wide. The original set includes 58 shoes, 1/3 of which are cleated.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 9, Version 00 - 03/06

-9.6-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec09Propel.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Propel System

9.3 Propel System Maintenance

01

02

LEGEND 01. Motor 02. Transmission

BD0053c01

Figure 9-8: Propel Motor and Transmission

9.3.1 Propel Motor 41U100D2


The propel transmissions are driven by variable-displacement, plug-in type, axial piston hydraulic motors of bent axis design. The piston displacement control is hydraulically actuated, and can be positioned by the drill operator to either the maximum displacement for high-torque/low-speed propelling, or to the minimum displacement for low-torque/highspeed propelling. The minimum and maximum displacement adjustments are factory set. The motor is an integral part of the propel transmission. However, it can be removed from the transmission for replacement without having to remove the transmission from the crawler frame.

9.3.1.1 Removal
To remove either propel motor proceed as follows: 1. Position the machine on level ground. Block the machine to prevent movement in either direction.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec09Propel.fm

-9.7-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 9, Version 00 - 03/06

Propel System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.
2. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance activities. 3. Clean all dirt away from the hydraulic motor and hose assemblies.

WARNING

Hot hydraulic oil can spray with extreme force and volume causing injury or death. Use lockout and tagout procedures to guard against inadvertent hydraulic system or machine start up during service or maintenance. Allow the hydraulic system to cool before maintenance or repair. Slowly release pressure or vent circuits before disconnecting hydraulic lines. Wear appropriate face and body protective devices while carefully loosening any connection or fitting.
4. Check to be certain that the hydraulic pressure is completely vented from the high-pressure and control pressure circuits. 5. Close the Handwell valves. 6. Tag and remove the hydraulic hoses from the motor. Cap or plug all hose fittings and motor ports.

CAUTION

Lifting heavy components with inadequate hoisting apparatus can cause the load to drop, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to equipment. Use suitable slings and hoisting equipment to stabilize and lift heavy objects.
7. Attach a suitable hoist to the motor to prevent an overhung load on the shaft when the mounting bolts are loosened. 8. Mark the mounting position of the motor on the transmission so that the hose connection ports will be correctly located when the motor is reinstalled. Identify the motor, if more than one is being removed, to assure that it is remounted on the same transmission. 9. Remove the capscrews and lockwashers from the mounting flange of the motor, and pull it away from its mounting. Use care to prevent binding of the shaft or damage to the spline teeth when withdrawing the motor. 10. Remove and discard O-ring from the pilot diameter on the motor.

9.3.1.2 Cleaning, Inspection, And Repair


Clean and inspect the propel motor and motor mounting area in accordance with the general cleaning and inspection procedures described in Appendix A of this manual. Inspect the drive splines for wear or tooth damage. Inspect the hydraulic hoses and fittings for damage or signs of leaking. The motor shaft seal can be replaced, but

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 9, Version 00 - 03/06

-9.8-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec09Propel.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Propel System

the propel motors are not field repairable, and must be replaced if they become worn or damaged. Replace O-ring whenever the motor is removed from the transmission. Refer to the LinkOne electronic parts manual for component identification.

9.3.1.3 Installation
Install the hydraulic motor on the propel transmission as follows: 1. Lubricate O-ring with oil, and install on the hydraulic motor pilot diameter. 2. Grease the motor output shaft spline with lithium grease.

CAUTION

Assembling heavy components with inadequate hoisting apparatus can injure personnel and/or damage equipment. Use suitable slings and hoisting equipment to stabilize and lift heavy objects.
3. Using a suitable lifting device, lift the hydraulic motor and insert the shaft into the bore of the transmission input shaft. Note the identification markings to ensure correct location of the motor. The motor case drain fitting should be positioned at the top. Be careful to avoid side loading and/or binding of the shaft as the motor is moved into position against the transmission. 4. Fasten the motor to the transmission with socket head capscrews, M30X180, DIN 10.9. 5. Fill the motor case with clean oil, then install the hydraulic hose assemblies in accordance with the identification tags placed during motor removal. 6. Open the Handwell valves. 7. Start the hydraulic pumps, and bleed air from the control and high-pressure circuits.

9.3.1.4 Adjustment

Technician Tip
Propel motors are preset and should only need adjustment in rare instances. Consider that the motors receive their flow from the main pumps, and the main pump minimum and maximum displacement settings affect the propel speed as much as the motor displacement. Before adjusting any motor settings, be certain that all pump settings are as specified and that the other components of the propel system are working properly.
The propel motor features variable displacement, and provides either high speed and low torque, or low speed and high torque. This feature is activated by a switch on the operators console. The motors are adjusted at the factory for both high speed and low speed, and in most instances do not require readjustment once the drill is in production. In the event that the drill does not propel evenly, however, the capability to adjust the high speed and low speed settings is provided. Confirm that the pumps are properly adjusted prior to adjusting the propel motors.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec09Propel.fm

-9.9-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 9, Version 00 - 03/06

Propel System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Refer to Figure 9-9 and adjust the propel motor settings as follows:

01

BD0523a01

02
LEGEND 01. Maximum Displacement Adjustment 02. Minimum Displacement Adjustment Figure 9-9: Propel Motor Adjustments

NOTICE
The motor displacement adjustments are not capable of modulating the servo settings to intermediate positions. Their function is limited to establishing the maximum and minimum setpoints for motor piston displacement. At the maximum displacement position, the motor has the lowest output speed and highest torque capability. At minimum displacement, the motor has the highest speed and lowest torque capability.
1. Start the main drive, and raise the drill with the jacks until the crawler tracks are completely clear of the ground.

CAUTION

Operation of the propel system with the drill partially supported on the jacks can cause injury to personnel and damage to the equipment. Check visually to be certain that the crawler tracks are raised completely off the ground before operating the propel drive.
2. Place the PROPEL MODE - MAINTENANCE switch, located on the operator console, in the MAINTENANCE position to enable operation of the propel drive while the drill is supported on the jacks.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 9, Version 00 - 03/06

-9.10-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec09Propel.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Propel System

3. Remove the motor displacement caps.


+

Figure 9-10: Motor Displacement Cap

NOTICE
Motor displacement caps are part of the sealing system designed to prevent oil from leaking around the adjusting screw. Always re-install the cap after adjustments have been made.
4. Adjust the maximum displacement stops on each propel motor to obtain drive tumbler speed of 4.0 rpm at maximum pump output. Turn the adjusting screw inward (clockwise) to increase tumbler speed. 5. Adjust the minimum displacement stops to obtain drive tumbler speed of 8.0 rpm at maximum pump output. Turn the adjusting screw outward (counterclockwise) to increase tumbler speed. Lower the drill from the jacks, and test the propel mode for straightness of tracking.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec09Propel.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -9.11Section 9, Version 00 - 03/06

Propel System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Figure 9-11: Propel Transmission Assembly

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 9, Version 00 - 03/06

-9.12-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec09Propel.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Propel System

LEGEND 01. Bolt 02. Cap 03. Spacer 04. Bolt 05. Shift Ring 06. Locking Nut 07. Bearing 08. Snap Ring 09. Bolt 10. O-ring 11. Snap Ring 12. Locating Ring 13. First Stage Planetary 14. Snap Ring 15. Sun Gear 16. O-ring 17. Thrust Washer 18. Face Seal 19. Roller Bearing 20. Shaft Nut

21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40.

Snap RIng Ball Bearing Retaining Collar Locating Ring Third Stage Planetary Second Stage Planetary Sun Gear Shaft Snap Ring Not Used Plug Snap Ring Snap Ring Shifter Shaft Input Shaft Coupler Back-Up Plate Brake Disk Kit Inner Disk Outer Disk Brake Seal Kit

41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57.

Back-Up Ring O-ring O-ring Back-Up Ring Piston Back-Up Plate Snap Ring Gearshift Hub Snap Ring Hex Head Bolt Locating Ring Input Sleeve Not used Not used Hex Head Bolt Hydraulic Motor O-ring

Figure 9-12: Legend for Figure 9-11

9.3.2 Propel Transmission 53R176D2


The transmission and motor can be removed or installed as a unit, without need for disassembly or subassembly of its components.

9.3.2.1 Removal
Refer to Figure 9-11 and remove the propel transmission from the crawler frame assembly as follows: 1. Position the drill on firm even ground, and rotate the crawler drive so that the transmission oil drain plug is at the six o'clock position. 2. Raise the drill with the jacks to relieve the weight from drive tumbler, and place blocking under the machine frame for support.

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.
3. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance activities. 4. Separate two track links (08), and remove the crawler track from the top of the drive tumbler (Refer To Subtopic 9.3.5.1).

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec09Propel.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -9.13Section 9, Version 00 - 03/06

Propel System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

5. Clean all dirt away from the hydraulic motor and hose assemblies.

WARNING

Hot hydraulic oil can spray with extreme force and volume causing injury or death. Use lockout and tagout procedures to guard against inadvertent hydraulic system or machine start up during service or maintenance. Allow the hydraulic system to cool before maintenance or repair. Slowly release pressure or vent circuits before disconnecting hydraulic lines. Wear appropriate face and body protective devices while carefully loosening any connection or fitting.
6. Check to be certain that the hydraulic pressure is completely vented from the high-pressure and control pressure circuits. 7. Turn Handwell valves off. 8. Tag and remove the hydraulic hoses from the motor. Cap or plug all hose fittings and motor ports. 9. Tag and remove the hydraulic hose assembly from the brake pressure supply fitting on the transmission. Cap or plug the hose fitting and brake hydraulic supply port. 10. Remove thirty capscrews from drive tumbler.

CAUTION

Lifting heavy components with inadequate hoisting apparatus can cause the load to drop, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to equipment. Use suitable slings and hoisting equipment to stabilize and lift heavy objects.
11. Attach suitable lifting equipment to drive tumbler, and remove it from transmission. 12. Remove the transmission lubricant fill and drain plugs, and drain the oil into a suitable disposal container. Install the plugs again, when all of the lubricant has been drained.

CAUTION

Lifting heavy components with inadequate hoisting apparatus can cause the load to drop, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to equipment. Use suitable slings and hoisting equipment to stabilize and lift heavy objects. The transmission and motor assembly weighs approximately 2800 lbs (1270 kg).
13. Support propel transmission with adequate lifting/moving equipment. Be sure it is positioned straight and level in relation to the crawler frame bore. 14. Remove thirty capscrews that fasten transmission to crawler frame. 15. Slide transmission out of the pilot bore in the crawler frame, being careful to move straight out to prevent cocking of the spindle in the frame bore. Protect the motor from contacting the frame as it is being withdrawn through the frame.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 9, Version 00 - 03/06

-9.14-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec09Propel.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Propel System

16. Transport the transmission to a suitable, clean work area for disassembly.

9.3.2.2 Disassembly
Disassemble the propel transmission as follows: 1. Place the transmission on blocks with the hydraulic motor located at the top. 2. Remove the hydraulic motor from the input end of the transmission, as described under the Subtopic 9.3.1.1, Steps 6 through 8, inclusive. 3. Remove bolt, retaining plate and coupler. 4. Remove hydraulic hose adapter and ring seal from the spindle. 5. Attach a spring cage fixture and protective buffer (Figure 9-13) to the spindle, and apply enough axial force against coupler to enable removal of snap ring.

01

02

03

04

LEGEND 01. Spring Cage Fixture 02. Buffer 03. Adjusting Screw 04. 20MM Screw

BD0524a01

Figure 9-13: Spring Cage Fixture

6. Back out the adjustment screw slowly to allow concentric compression springs to completely relax while they push back-up plate and coupler away from piston. 7. Remove the spring cage fixture from the spindle, then pull coupler and back-up plate out of the spindle counterbore. 8. Remove compression springs from the spring pockets in piston. Discard the springs.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec09Propel.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -9.15Section 9, Version 00 - 03/06

Propel System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

9. Place a large, clean, protective rag into the counterbore of the spindle, then apply very-low-pressure compressed air through the brake hydraulic pressure supply port. Increase the air pressure slowly until piston is forced out of the bore and onto the rag. Remove the piston and rag from the spindle. 10. Remove and discard the O-ring and back-up ring from piston. Notice the relative positions of the O-ring and back-up ring for reassembly. 11. Remove snap ring from the inside end of shifter shaft, then remove coupler from the shifter shaft. 12. Remove and discard the O-ring and back-up ring from the spindle bore. Notice the relative positions of the Oring and back-up ring for reassembly. 13. Remove and discard the eleven inner and five outer brake disks.

01 02

BD0525a01

03

LEGEND 01. Piston 02. Outer disk (5 pieces) 03. Inner disk (11 pieces)

Figure 9-14: Brake Disk Arrangement

14. Remove brake back-up plate from the assembly. 15. Remove snap ring from the counterbore of the spindle. 16. Remove snap ring from bearing carrier.

CAUTION

Lifting heavy components with inadequate hoisting apparatus can cause the load to drop, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to equipment. Use suitable slings and hoisting equipment to stabilize and lift heavy objects
17. Attach suitable hoisting equipment, and reposition the transmission assembly so that the motor-mounting face of the spindle is down, and well supported on wooden blocking. 18. Remove bolts from spacer, then remove spacer and cap from the end cover. 19. Remove the twenty-four bolts, and remove the end cover.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 9, Version 00 - 03/06

-9.16-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec09Propel.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Propel System

CAUTION

Lifting heavy components with inadequate hoisting apparatus can cause the load to drop, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to equipment. Use suitable slings and hoisting equipment to stabilize and lift heavy objects
20. Place lifting eyes in the threaded screw holes in the end cover, support the cover with adequate lifting/moving equipment, then lift the end cover and entire shifter shaft assembly away from the transmission.

CAUTION
To avoid damage to the shifter shaft, be sure to lift the end cover straight up to enable the shifter shaft to be withdrawn without binding.
21. Loosen the thrust washer from the pilot diameter in the end cover, then remove the thrust washer from shifter shaft. 22. Remove snap ring from shift ring. 23. Remove bolts from shift ring, then remove the shift ring, with shifter shaft and ball bearing intact, from the end cover. 24. Remove snap ring from shift ring, and remove shifter shaft and ball bearing from shift ring. 25. Remove and discard O-ring from shift ring bore. 26. Remove locking nut, then press the ball bearing from the shifter shaft. 27. Carefully lift the third stage planetary out of the ring gear, and away from input shaft. 28. Loosen ring gear A from the pilot diameter in ring gear B, and remove ring gear A from the assembly. 29. Remove and discard the two O-rings from ring gear A. 30. Remove input shaft and thrust washer. Be careful to prevent the thrust washer from dropping off the end of the input shaft. 31. Remove thrust washer from input shaft. 32. Lift sun gear shaft, including snap ring, out of the assembly. Then, remove snap ring from the sun gear shaft. 33. Carefully lift the second planetary stage gear assembly out of ring gear B. 34. Lift sun gear shaft out of engagement with the first stage planetary. 35. Remove locating ring from bearing carrier. 36. Carefully lift the first stage planetary, bearing carrier, ball bearing, and coupler as a unit out of ring gear B. 37. Remove coupler and ball bearing from bearing carrier by removing snap ring.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec09Propel.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -9.17Section 9, Version 00 - 03/06

Propel System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

38. Remove ball bearing from coupler by removing snap ring. 39. Remove the crimping on the eight locations of shaft nut, then loosen and remove the shaft nut from the spindle.

CAUTION

Lifting heavy components with inadequate hoisting apparatus can cause the load to drop, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to equipment. Use suitable slings and hoisting equipment to stabilize and lift heavy objects.
40. Attach a suitable lifting device to ring gear B, and lift the ring gear away from the spindle. The cups and one cone of the two tapered roller bearings, and one half of face seal, will remain with the ring gear. 41. Remove tapered roller bearing cone from inside ring gear B. 42. Remove the other tapered roller bearing cone from the hub of the spindle. 43. If bearings are going to be replaced, remove the two bearing cups from ring gear B. 44. Remove each half of face seal from ring gear B and the spindle.

9.3.2.3 Cleaning, Inspection, And Repair


Clean and inspect the propel transmission components in accordance with the general cleaning and inspection procedures described in Appendix A of this manual. None of the components are repairable, and, therefore must be replaced if worn or damaged. If a component in any one of the three planetary gear assemblies needs replacement, that entire planetary unit must be replaced. It is recommended that all O-rings be replaced whenever the transmission is disassembled for repair. Refer to the LinkOne electronic parts manual for component identification.

9.3.2.4 Assembly
Refer to Figure 9-11 and assemble the propel transmission as follows: 1. Position the spindle with the motor mounting side down on clean wooden blocking. 2. Install the two cups from tapered roller bearings (19) in the bearing seats of ring gear (B). Be certain that the cups remain seated firmly against the shoulder in the counterbore.

NOTICE
Dry ice may be used to freeze the cups, so they may be installed. If the cups are pressed into the housing, extreme care should be taken so they are not damaged.
3. Install one half of face seal (18) on the spindle. 4. Install one cone of tapered roller bearing (19) on the spindle. 5. Pack the half of face seal (18) and bearing cone (19) with an excess of clean grease. 6. Install the other half of face seal (18) in ring gear (B).

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 9, Version 00 - 03/06

-9.18-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec09Propel.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Propel System

CAUTION

Lifting heavy components with inadequate hoisting apparatus can cause the load to drop, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to equipment. Use suitable slings and hoisting equipment to stabilize and lift heavy objects.
7. Attach suitable hoisting equipment to ring gear (B), and position the ring gear on the spindle so bearing (19) and face seal (18) halves are correctly mated. 8. Pack bearing (19) seat area with an excess of clean grease. 9. Install remaining tapered bearing cone (19) with shaft nut (20). Tighten the nut finger tight. Be sure that the bearing cone seats correctly in the cup. 10. Measure the axial position of ring gear (B) relative to the spindle, then torque shaft nut (20) until the bearing is preloaded 0.3mm (0.012"). Crimp the torque nut flange in eight equally spaced locations.

NOTICE
Ring gear (B) may be rotated in only one direction during preloading of the tapered roller bearings.
11. Install ball bearing (22) on coupler (39), and retain it with snap ring (11). 12. Install coupler (35) and mounted bearing (22) in the bore of bearing carrier (23), and fasten with snap ring (21).

NOTICE
The bearing retainer should already be assembled as a factory-installed component of the third stage planetary (25).
13. Install the third stage planetary (25) in ring gear (B). Mesh the planetary gear/ring gear teeth and the planetary gear carrier/spindle splines with care to avoid causing nicks and burrs. Lubricate the teeth with gearcase oil before assembly.

CAUTION

Lifting heavy components with inadequate hoisting apparatus can cause the load to drop, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to equipment. Use suitable slings and hoisting equipment to stabilize and lift heavy objects.
14. Attach a suitable hoisting apparatus to ring gear assembly (B), and position the unit on its side. 15. Install snap ring (31) on bearing carrier (23). Access can be gained through the input shaft opening in the spindle. 16. Reposition the transmission assembly so the unit is resting securely on wooden blocking with the motor mounting face of the spindle down.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec09Propel.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -9.19Section 9, Version 00 - 03/06

Propel System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

17. Install locating ring (24) in pilot counterbore of bearing carrier (23). 18. Install sun gear shaft (27) in the third stage planetary (25). Be sure the relieved face of the sun gear is inserted first, and that it seats against locating ring (24). 19. Install the second stage planetary (26) into ring gear (B) and over the end of sun gear shaft (27). Retain the planetary gear assembly with snap ring (28). 20. Install the sun gear (15) in the second stage planetary (27). Be sure that the counterbored end of the gear is positioned at the top after installation. 21. Slide thrust washer (15) over end of the input shaft (34), then insert the splined-end of the input shaft through the center of the sun gear shafts, and mesh the splines with those in coupler (35). The thrust washer bottom face should be seated on the bottom of the counterbore in sun gear (15). 22. Lubricate two O-rings (16) with oil, and install them in O-ring grooves of ring gear (A). 23. Line up the through-bolt holes in ring gear (A) with the tapped holes in ring gear (B), then insert ring gear (A) pilot diameter into the counterbore of ring gear (B). Be sure that the matching faces of the two ring gears are tight together, when installed. Do not install the mounting bolts at this time. 24. Carefully install the first stage planetary (13) in ring gear (A) and over input shaft (34). 25. Install ball bearing (07) on shifter shaft (33), and retain the bearing securely with lock nut (06).

NOTICE
Apply Loctite compound to the threads of the lock nut before assembling to the shifter shaft.
26. Install shifter shaft (33) and mounted bearing (07) into the counterbore of shift ring (05), and fasten in place with snap ring (08). 27. Lubricate and install O-ring (10) in the bore of the end cover. 28. Assemble shift ring (05) with mounted shifter shaft to the end cover, and fasten with bolts (04). Torque the bolts to 38 ft lbs (51 N.m).

NOTICE
Apply molybdenum-based protectant/sealant to sealing surfaces and threads. AVOID contact with sealant and O-ring (10). Assemble the parts only after sealant has cured (dried).
29. Install snap ring (11) on shift ring (05). 30. Slide thrust washer (12) over shift shaft (33) and position in the pilot counterbore of the end cover.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 9, Version 00 - 03/06

-9.20-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec09Propel.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Propel System

CAUTION

Lifting heavy components with inadequate hoisting apparatus can cause the load to drop, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to equipment. Use suitable slings and hoisting equipment to stabilize and lift heavy objects.
31. Attach suitable hoisting equipment to the end cover assembly and lift it into position above the ring gear. Lower the end cover so that the shift shaft feeds through the center of input shaft (34), and the cover closes completely over the pilot diameter of ring gear (A). Install twenty-four bolts (09) and torque in a crisscross pattern evenly, and uniformly to 85 N.m (63 ft-lbs).

NOTICE
Input shaft (34) should have 0.039-0.079" (1-2 mm) end play after the end cover is installed.
32. Apply molybdenum-based protectant/sealant to the sealing surfaces of the cap (02) and spacer (03), and to the threads of bolts (01). Allow to dry before assembling to the end cover. Torque the bolts to 38 ft-lbs (51 N.m).

CAUTION

Lifting heavy components with inadequate hoisting apparatus can cause the load to drop, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to equipment. Use suitable slings and hoisting equipment to stabilize and lift heavy objects.
33. Attach suitable hoisting apparatus to the propel transmission and position it so that the end cover is on the bottom and the input shaft side is exposed on top for assembly. 34. Install snap ring (32) in the brake disk area of the spindle. 35. Install back-up plate (36) against snap ring (32). 36. Install inner and outer brake disks (38 and 39), and be sure that they are correctly engaged with the spindle and coupler (35). Refer to Figure 9-14 for the arrangement of the inner and outer brake disks. 37. Lubricate back-up ring (41) and O-ring (42) with gear oil, and install in the spindle. The back-up ring must be installed before the O-ring. 38. Install coupler (48) on shifter shaft (33), and retain it with snap ring (49). Lubricate splines with gear oil before inserting coupler (48) into coupler (35). 39. Lubricate back-up ring (44) and O-ring (43) with gear oil, and install on the outside diameter of piston (45). The back-up ring must be installed before the O-ring. 40. Install piston (45) in the counterbore of the spindle, and push it in as far as it will go against the brake disks. Lubricate the counterbore with gear oil before installing the piston. 41. Position back-up plate (46) subassembly in the counterbore of the spindle until it contacts the brake springs.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec09Propel.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -9.21Section 9, Version 00 - 03/06

Propel System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

42. Attach the spring cage fixture and protective buffer to the spindle, and apply enough axial force against coupler (48) to enable compression of the brake springs. Press the shaft in only to the point where back-up plate (46) seats firmly against the bottom of the counterbore in the spindle. Over-tightening can cause damage. 43. Install snap ring (47) in the spindle to retain back-up plate (46). 44. Remove the spring cage fixture from the spindle. 45. Install seal ring (29) and adapter (30) in the brake hydraulic pressure port, and tighten securely. 46. Install coupler (52) on the motor spindle with retaining plate (51) and bolt (50). 47. Install the hydraulic motor on the propel transmission as described above under Subtopic 9.3.1.3, Step 1 through Step 4. 48. Open Handwell valves.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 9, Version 00 - 03/06

-9.22-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec09Propel.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Propel System

9.3.2.5 Installation

LEGEND 01. Roller Shaft Tube 02. Cotter Pin 03. Roller Shaft Pin 04. Lower Roller Shaft 05. Upper Roller Shaft 06. Thrust Washer 07. Roller Assembly

08. 09. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

Bushing Link Assembly Roller Shaft tube Capscrew Washer Shoe Guide Shim Shoe Guide Screw

16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23.

Transmission Drive Tumbler Capscrew Crawler Frame Upper Shim Pin Lower Shim Pin Idler Shim Idler Shim

24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30.

Cotter Pin Idler Bearing Idler Shaft Pin Idler Thrust Washer Idler Roller Assembly Idler Bushing Idler Shaft

Figure 9-15: Crawler Frame Assembly

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec09Propel.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -9.23Section 9, Version 00 - 03/06

Propel System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Refer to Figure 9-15 and install the propel transmission on the crawler frame as follows:

CAUTION

Lifting heavy components with inadequate hoisting apparatus can cause the load to drop, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to equipment. Use suitable slings and hoisting equipment to stabilize and lift heavy objects. The transmission and motor assembly weigh approximately 2800 lbs (1270 kg).
1. Attach suitable hoisting apparatus to propel transmission (15) and position it so that the hydraulic motor end is aligned with the pilot bore in crawler frame (18). Be sure that the lube drain plug is located at the six o'clock position, then insert the transmission into the frame. 2. Align the screw holes in the transmission with those in the frame, then install the thirty capscrews (14). Torque the capscrews to 1526-1873 ft-lbs (2070-2540 N.m).

CAUTION

Lifting heavy components with inadequate hoisting apparatus can cause the load to drop, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to equipment. Use suitable slings and hoisting equipment to stabilize and lift heavy objects.
3. Attach suitable lifting equipment to drive tumbler (16), and install it on transmission (15) with thirty capscrews (17). Torque the capscrews to 1526-1873 ft-lbs (2070-2540 N.m). 4. Install crawler track (08) on drive tumbler (16). Refer to Subtopic 9.3.5.3 for installation procedures. 5. Install the hydraulic pressure hose assembly for the brake to the fitting on the transmission spindle. 6. Install the high-pressure and control pressure hoses to the motor. 7. Remove the transmission lubrication fill/level plug and fill the transmission with approximately 9.5 gallons (36 liters) of gear oil (refer to Subtopic 16.3.5). Check and replace the fill plug seal if damaged, then install the plug securely.

9.3.3 Idler Roller 13N385D1F1


The idler roller keeps the crawler track aligned. The idler roller is mounted in sliding bearing blocks, which enable it to move fore and aft in the crawler frames. This provides a means of adjusting track tension.

9.3.3.1 Removal
Remove the idler roller assembly as follows: 1. Position the machine on level ground.

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 9, Version 00 - 03/06

-9.24-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec09Propel.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Propel System

tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.
2. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance activities. 3. Separate the crawler track as described under Subtopic 9.3.5.1 and remove it from the idler roller. 4. Remove two cotter pins (02) from each upper shim pin (20) on the inside and outside frame locations, then remove both upper shim pins from the crawler frame. 5. Note the locations of shims (22 and 23) ahead of and behind inner and outer idler bearings (25), then remove all shims (refer to Subtopic 9.3.5.4 for shim removal procedure). 6. Remove the lubrication hose assembly from idler shaft (30). 7. Remove cotter pins (24) from each idler shaft pin (26), and remove the idler shaft pins from two idler bearings (25).

CAUTION

Lifting heavy components with inadequate hoisting apparatus can cause the load to drop, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to equipment. Use suitable slings and hoisting equipment to stabilize and lift heavy objects.
8. Attach suitable lifting equipment to the idler roller, and lift the weight of the idler from idler shaft (30). 9. Remove two idler bearings (25) and idler thrust washers (27) from each end of idler shaft (30). 10. Remove idler shaft (30) from idler roller (28), then lift the idler away from the crawler frame.

9.3.3.2 Cleaning, Inspection, And Repair


Clean and inspect the idler roller components in accordance with the general cleaning and inspection procedures described in Appendix A of this manual. None of the components are repairable, therefore, replace any that are damaged or worn. Refer to the LinkOne electronic parts manual for component identification.

9.3.3.3 Installation
Refer to Figure 9-15 and install the idler roller assembly as follows:

CAUTION

Lifting heavy components with inadequate hoisting apparatus can cause the load to drop, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to equipment. Use suitable slings and hoisting equipment to stabilize and lift heavy objects.
1. Using suitable lifting equipment, position idler roller (28) in the pocket of crawler frame (19). 2. Lubricate idler shaft (30) with oil and install it in the bore of idler roller (28). Position the shaft so that the grease hole is horizontal, and is pointed toward the tumbler end of the crawler.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec09Propel.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -9.25Section 9, Version 00 - 03/06

Propel System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

3. Install thrust washer (27) on idler shaft 30) at each side of the idler roller. 4. Install idler bearing (25) on each end of idler shaft (30), and fasten it with idler shaft pin (26) and two cotter pins (24). 5. Install shims (22 and 23) in the same positions on each side of inner and outer idler bearings (25) as before removal. 6. Lock the shims in place with upper shim pins (20) and two cotter pins (03). 7. Install the lubrication hose assembly to idler shaft (30). 8. Refer to Subtopic 9.3.5.3 and reassemble the crawler track. 9. Adjust the crawler track tension as described under Subtopic 9.3.5.4.

02 03 01 04 05 06 07

BD0526a01

LEGEND 01. Crawler Track Link 02. Upper Roller Shaft 03. Upper Roller

04. 05. 06. 07.

Lower Roller Lower Roller Shaft Roller Shaft Pin Cotter Pin

Figure 9-16: Upper and Lower Rollers

9.3.4 Upper and Lower Rollers 13P627F1


On each crawler frame, thirteen rollers support the track as it moves around the crawler frame. Three upper rollers support the weight of the track as it moves across the top of the crawler frame. Ten lower rollers support and distribute the weight of the drill to the crawler track. Each roller is supported by a shaft mounted in a bushing along the side frame. The rollers are lubricated by the auto-lube system.

9.3.4.1 Removal

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 9, Version 00 - 03/06

-9.26-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec09Propel.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Propel System

To remove the upper or lower rollers, proceed as follows: 1. Position the machine on level ground.

WARNING

Inadequate blocking of a raised drill can enable the machine to drop causing severe injury, death, and/or equipment damage. Do not perform maintenance work under the drill until it is securely blocked.
2. Raise the machine and position secure blocking beneath the frame.

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.
3. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance activities. 4. Separate the crawler track as described under Subtopic 9.3.5.1. Remove the lubrication hose assembly from the roller shaft. 5. Remove the cotter pins from the roller shaft pin. 6. Remove the roller shaft pin from lower or upper roller shaft. 7. Place blocking below the roller to prevent the roller from dropping when the roller shaft is removed. 8. Remove the lower or upper roller shaft from the roller, then remove the roller and thrust washers from the frame.

9.3.4.2 Cleaning, Inspection, and Repair


Clean and inspect the track support roller components in accordance with the general cleaning and inspection procedures described in Appendix A of this manual. None of the components are repairable; therefore, replace any that are damaged or worn. Refer to the LinkOne electronic parts manual for component identification.

9.3.4.3 Installation
Install the roller as follows: 9. Block the support roller with shim thrust washers in position within the crawler frame. 10. Lubricate the roller shaft with grease, and install the shaft through the frame supports and roller. 11. Install roller shaft pin in the roller shaft, and fasten it with two cotter pins. 12. Install the grease lubrication hose to roller shaft.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec09Propel.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -9.27Section 9, Version 00 - 03/06

Propel System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

13. Manually operate the lubrication system and bleed the lines to the crawlers as required. Refer to Section 8, Automatic Lubrication System..

9.3.5 Crawler Track Assembly

NOTE: Nut is tack welded to pin retainer. Nut must be tight prior to welding. Torque nut to 75 ft lbs (102 Nm) and tack weld.

LEGEND 01. Track Link 02. Cleated Link 03. Link Pin 04. Pin Retainer 05. Nut Figure 9-17: Crawler Links

The crawler track assembly consists of a series of individual links (shoes), which are connected with link pins to form the continuous track upon which the drill is propelled. The links are available in various widths and configurations to accommodate differing soil conditions. The links on this drill are 36 wide; 2/3 of the links are cleated.

9.3.5.1 Track Link Removal


Remove track links as follows: 1. Propel the drill so the link to be removed is located behind the idler roller, and as near to ground level as possible, but with sufficient clearance to drive out the link pins. 2. Place temporary blocking between the under-side of the track links and the top of the crawler frame to support the track when the link pins are removed.

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 9, Version 00 - 03/06

-9.28-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec09Propel.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Propel System

3. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance activities. 4. Remove the link pin retaining capscrew and hex nut from the track link (refer to Figure 9-17). The hex nut is tack welded to the capscrew to prevent it from vibrating loose during operation. Cut off the weld, or break the capscrew to remove it from the track link. 5. Remove the link pins at the place where the track is to be separated using one of the following two methods:

WARNING

The weight of a falling track can cause serious injury or death. Do not stand in the path of a crawler track when the link pin is being removed. Slide Hammer Method

Figure 9-18: Slide Hammer Method

CAUTION

Sparks or flying metal chips can injure eyes or face. Wear eye and face protection when using hammers.
A. Obtain a rod with one end threaded for a nut. B. Grind a 3/4" (19mm) x 45 degree chamfer on the other end of the rod. C. Weld the ground end to the link pin (refer to Figure 9-18). Use sufficient weld to prevent the rod separating from the pin. D. Slide the slap hammer onto the rod, and install the hex nut on the rod end. E. Remove the rod by slapping the hammer against the rod nut (refer to Figure 9-19).

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec09Propel.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -9.29Section 9, Version 00 - 03/06

Propel System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Drive Rod Method

Figure 9-19: Drive Rod Method

A. Obtain a smooth threaded rod of sufficient length and strength, with a mating hex nut on one end. The threaded rod must be less than 1.5 inches (38 mm) diameter to fit into the bore of the track link. B. Thread the hex nut on the striking end of the threaded rod. C. Insert the rod into the bore of the track link, and drive the link pin out. The rod will need to be bent slightly at the pin end to clear the link.

CAUTION

Lifting heavy components with inadequate hoisting apparatus can cause the load to drop, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to equipment. Use suitable slings and hoisting equipment to stabilize and lift heavy objects.
D. Attach suitable lifting equipment to stabilize the link being removed, then disassemble the remaining link pins that fasten the link to the track. Link weight is approximately 450 Ibs (200 kg). E. Remove the uncoupled link from the crawler track.

9.3.5.2 Cleaning, Inspection, and Repair


Clean and inspect the idler roller components in accordance with the general cleaning and inspection procedures described in Appendix A of this manual. Repair of the crawler track is limited to replacement of defective link pins and welding of the damaged track links. Repair a damaged link as follows:

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 9, Version 00 - 03/06

-9.30-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec09Propel.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Propel System

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.
1. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance activities, if the track link is being repaired while mounted to the drill. 2. Check suspected cracks with liquid dye penetrant or Magnaflux. 3. Clean the area to be welded. Remove all surface grease, oil, etc. 4. Grind or air-gouge the crack completely. 5. Pre-heat the weld zone to 600-700F (315-370C) and maintain this temperature during welding, checking with a temperature indicating crayon. 6. Weld the track link with 10018-M electrodes. Pre-heat the electrodes in an oven at 350F (175C). Remove only two electrodes from the oven at a time for use. 7. Slowly cool the track link after welding by wrapping the weld area with an insulating blanket.

9.3.5.3 Track Link Installation


Refer to Figure 9-17 and install track links as follows:

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator - controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.
1. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance activities.

CAUTION

Lifting heavy components with inadequate hoisting apparatus can cause the load to drop, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to equipment. Use suitable slings and hoisting equipment to stabilize and lift heavy objects.
2. Using a lifting device of sufficient capacity, align the open track ends. Use a drift pin to help align the link pin bores. 3. Install the link pins in the bores in the track links. There should be a slip-fit between the pin and the bore. 4. Install the link pin retaining capscrew and hex nut. Tighten the nut to 75 ft-lbs (102 Nm) maximum.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec09Propel.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -9.31Section 9, Version 00 - 03/06

Propel System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

5. Tack weld the hex nuts to the capscrews to prevent loosening. 6. Repeat Step 2 through Step 5 to install addition track links and pins.

9.3.5.4 Track Tension Adjustment

TC0706

Figure 9-20: Track Tension Adjustment

Adjustment of crawler track tension is accomplished by adding or removing shims to the track adjustment mechanism. A manually-operated hydraulic pump and two hydraulic rams with the required connecting hoses are furnished with the machine, and are used to assist with track adjustment. To adjust track tension, proceed as follows: 1. Position the machine on level ground, then use the drill jacks to raise the drill enough to lift the crawler tracks clear of the ground.

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.
2. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance activities. 3. Remove two cotter pins from each upper shim pin on the inside and outside frame locations, then remove both upper shim pins from the crawler frame. 4. Remove loose shims from behind inner and outer idler roller bearings (24). 5. Install one ram on the inboard side of the crawler frame between the ram support bracket on the crawler frame and the idler bearing. Position the other cylinder similarly on the outboard side of the frame. 6. Connect the hydraulic hand pump to the two rams.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 9, Version 00 - 03/06

-9.32-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec09Propel.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Propel System

7. Operate the hand pump to pressurize the rams. This action moves the idler bearings to the rear, and removes slack from the crawler track. Continue operating the pump until the crawler track sag is approximately 12" - 14" (300mm - 350 mm), as measured at the track midpoint, between the top of the crawler link and the underside of the crawler frame. Refer to Figure 9-21

BD0530b01

Figure 9-21: Track Tension Measurement

8. Add shims as required on the ram side of the idler bearings to maintain the new position and ensure that the track sag will remain as set. Use the shims which were removed from behind the idler bearings to fill the required gap. The number and sizes of shims used should be identical at both idler bearing locations.

NOTICE
Shims are furnished in two thicknesses, 0.5 and 0.75 inch (12.7 and 19 mm).
9. Relieve the pressure on the rams, then remove them from the crawler frame brackets. 10. Lower the machine to the ground.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec09Propel.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -9.33Section 9, Version 00 - 03/06

Propel System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 9, Version 00 - 03/06

-9.34-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec09Propel.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Levelling System

Section 10

Levelling System
10.1 General
This section provides descriptive and maintenance information for the leveling jacks and jack hydraulic cylinders.

NOTICE
During maintenance procedures, apply standard torque to fasteners, unless otherwise specified. Refer to Appendix A for general mechanical maintenance procedures, and to Appendix B for general hydraulic component maintenance procedures. It is advisable to replace all seals and O-rings whenever hydraulic components are disassembled. Refer to the Parts Manual for identification of components and service kits.

10.2 Theory of Operation


The four leveling jacks, attached to the corners of the main frame, are hydraulically actuated units that establish and maintain a level and stable position for the drill during drilling operations. Hydraulic pressure is supplied from the auxiliary hydraulic system. Refer to Section 3, Auxiliary Hydraulic System.. Operation of the jacks is controlled from the operator cab. The rear jacks (nearest the mast) are independently adjustable. The front jacks cylinders are connected in parallel so that they raise or lower as a self-equalizing pair. The jacks can also be placed in the automatic mode, which automatically raises the drill deck to the lowest level elevation for good drill stability.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec10Level.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -10.1Section 10, Version 00 - 03/06

Levelling System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

10.2.1 Rear Jacks 100J6691F5 and 100J6691F6

LEGEND 01. Jack Cap 02. Lockwasher 03. Capscrew 04. Housing 05. Upper Cylinder Pin

06. 07. 08. 09. 10. 11.

Cotter Pin Washer Hydraulic Cylinder Pipe Plug Lower Cylinder Pin Jack Spud

Figure 10-1: Rear Jack (left shown, right similar)

Each of the two rear jacks consists of a hydraulic cylinder, spud, and shoe with housing and mounting hardware. The rod end of the cylinders is pinned to the jack cap on top of the jack housing. The cylinder barrel is pinned to the spud; the spud, in turn, is pinned to the shoe. The operator controls each jack independently by separate switches on the operators console. Hydraulic pressure is applied to the cylinder piston through internal passages in the rod, causing the spud and shoe to extend or retract.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 10, Version 00 - 03/06

-10.2-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec10Level.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Levelling System

10.2.2 Front Jacks 100J6692F3 and 100J6693F3

Figure 10-2: Front Jack (left shown, right similar)

Each of the two front jacks consists of a hydraulic cylinder, spud, and shoe with housing and mounting hardware. The rod end of the cylinders is pinned to the jack cap on top of the jack housing. The cylinder barrel is pinned to the spud; the spud, in turn, is pinned to the shoe. The operator actuates both jacks simultaneously through a single switch on the operators console. Hydraulic pressure is applied to both cylinder pistons through internal passages in the rods, causing the spuds and shoes to extend or retract.

10.2.3 Leveling Jack Shoes R56352D1, R56353D1

Figure 10-3: Jack shoe

On the lower end of each front and rear jack is the jack shoe. Jack shoes provide a wide area of support, distributing the drills weight over a relatively large surface area. Jack shoes are 127 cm (50") in diameter and weigh approximately 730 kg (1610 lbs).

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec10Level.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -10.3Section 10, Version 00 - 03/06

Levelling System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

10.3 System Maintenance


10.3.1 Leveling Jack Shoes R56352D1, R56353D1
10.3.1.1 Removal
1. Lower the drill so that the shoes rest on the ground, but without weight bearing on the shoes.

WARNING

Inadvertent operation of the blasthole drill during maintenance could cause severe injury and/or death. Lock out and tag out the drill operating controls to prevent operation.
2. Lock out and tag out the drill operating controls to prevent inadvertent start-up or movement of the drill during maintenance activities. 3. Remove the cotter pin and lockwasher that attaches the retainer pin to the to the spud. 4. Drive out the retainer pin.

WARNING

Some blasthole drill components are extremely heavy. Dropping or mishandling of these parts can cause severe injury or death, and damage to the equipment. Always support heavy components using a suitable hoist or other means for removal, disassembly, assembly and installation. Provide appropriate support for any components that are not supported by the machinery during maintenance. Jack shoes weigh approximately 730 kg (1610 lbs).
5. Remove the shoe.

10.3.1.2 Repair
Clean and inspect the jack components in accordance with the general cleaning and inspection procedures provided in Appendix A of this manual. Repair consists of the replacement of all worn or damaged components. Refer to the LinkOne electronic parts manual for component identification.

10.3.1.3 Installation
1. Position the shoe under the spud and align the mounting holes. 2. Push or drive in the retainer pin. 3. Install the cotter pins to attach the retainer pin to the to the spud.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 10, Version 00 - 03/06

-10.4-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec10Level.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Levelling System

10.3.2 Jack Hydraulic Cylinders R4102D2

LEGEND 01. Ingression Ring 02. Wear Ring 03. Backup Ring 04. Seal 05. O-ring 06. Ingression Ring

07. 08. 09. 10. 11. 12.

O-ring Backup Ring Wear Ring Seal Backup Ring Wiper

NOTE: Numbered items are part of a seal kit.

Figure 10-4: Hydraulic Cylinder Components (typical)

Removal of all jack cylinders and spuds is similar. To remove the front cylinders or spuds, the mast must be raised and locked in position and the back braces disconnected at the jack caps. Refer to Section 11, Mast. for instructions.

10.3.2.1 Removal
It is advisable to service one jack at a time, as follows: 1. Lower the drill so that the shoes rest on the ground, but without weight bearing on the shoes. 2. If necessary, raise the mast and lock it in position. 3. Disconnect the applicable back brace from the jack cap and secure the brace. Refer to Section 11, Mast. for instructions.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec10Level.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -10.5Section 10, Version 00 - 03/06

Levelling System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

WARNING

Inadvertent operation of the blasthole drill during maintenance could cause severe injury and/or death. Lock out and tag out the drill operating controls to prevent accidental operation.
4. Lock out and tag out the drill operating controls to prevent inadvertent start-up or movement of the drill during maintenance activities. 5. Remove the cotter pins that attach the retainer pin to the spud. Drive out the retainer pin. 6. Close the Handwell valve.

WARNING

Hot hydraulic oil under pressure can spray and burn with extreme force and volume, causing injury or death. Use lockout and tagout procedures to guard against inadvertent hydraulic system or machine start-up during service or maintenance. Allow the hydraulic system to cool prior to any maintenance or repair. Slowly release pressure or vent circuits before disconnecting hydraulic lines. Wear appropriate face and body protective devices while carefully loosening any connection or fitting.
7. Install a pressure gauge into the test port on the regeneration valve. Check pressure on both the head end and the rod end of the cylinder. If any pressure remains, take action to remove the pressure before beginning any disassembly. 8. Tag and disconnect the hydraulic hoses to the jack cylinder. Allow oil to drain into a catch basin. Cap and/or plug all hoses and fittings to prevent contamination of the hydraulic system. 9. Remove the mounting hardware that attaches the jack cap.

WARNING

Some blasthole drill components are extremely heavy. Dropping or mishandling of these parts can cause severe injury or death, and damage to the equipment. Always support heavy components using a suitable hoist or other means for removal, disassembly, assembly and installation. Provide appropriate support for any components that are not supported by the machinery during maintenance.
10. Support and lift the jack cap with a suitable hoist to withdraw the cap, cylinder, and spud as a unit. 11. Remove the cotter pins, flat washers, and upper cylinder pin. Remove the jack cap. 12. Remove the pipe plugs and drive out the lower cylinder pin. Remove the spud.

10.3.2.2 Disassembly
Refer to Figure 10-4 and proceed as follows: 1. Use a spanner wrench to remove retainer (03) from barrel (10).

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 10, Version 00 - 03/06

-10.6-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec10Level.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Levelling System

2. Remove rod (01) and related components from the barrel. 3. Remove parts from the rod and barrel to access the seals and other parts of the service kit.

10.3.2.3 Repair
Clean and inspect the cylinder components in accordance with the general cleaning and inspection procedures provided in Appendix B of this manual. Repair consists of the replacement of all service kit components. If other parts are worn or damaged, the entire cylinder must be replaced. See the LinkOne electronic parts manual for component identification.

10.3.2.4 Assembly
Refer to Figure 10-4 and proceed as follows: 1. Lubricate service kit parts and other sliding parts with clean hydraulic oil before installation. 2. Install and assemble parts in the reverse order of removal. 3. When installing the piston, pre-set nylon plug (08) in place using a grade 8 hex head capscrew to 150 ft-lbs (203 Nm). Then remove the capscrew, install setscrew (09), and tighten the setscrew to 75 ft-lbs (102 Nm).

10.3.2.5 Installation
Refer to Figure 10-1 or 10-2 and proceed as follows: 1. Align the cylinder and spud. Drive in the lower cylinder pin and install he pipe plugs. 2. Align the cylinder and jack cap. Be sure that the cylinder ports are aligned correctly to mate with the hydraulic hose assemblies. Install the upper cylinder pin, flat washers, and cotter pins. 3. Support and position jack cap, cylinder, and spud with a suitable hoist. Lower the unit into the housing. 4. Install the mounting hardware to attach the jack cap. 5. Align the shoe and spud. Push in the retainer pin. Install the capscrew and lockwasher to attach the retainer pin to the spud. 6. Install the hydraulic hose assemblies in accordance with their identification tags. 7. If necessary, connect the applicable back brace to the jack cap and secure. Refer to Section 11, Mast. for instructions. 8. Bleed the hydraulic circuits. Refer to Section 10, Levelling System..

10.4 Troubleshooting
10.4.1 Basic Operational Test for Auto Level System
P&H Mining Equipment provides detailed procedures to be use when setting up the Auto Level System in the Auto Level Setup Procedure, ELEC 3724. It is expected that once the drill is commissioned, there will be little or no need

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec10Level.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -10.7Section 10, Version 00 - 03/06

Levelling System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

(unless major components of the system need to be replaced) to engage in the extensive setup procedures defined in ELEC 3724. During Preventive Maintenance Inspection periods, this procedure provides a quick way to check the Auto Level System without executing the meticulous and time-consuming process required by the Auto Level Setup Procedure. If unexpected results are noted, contact your local MinePro Services representative to obtain a copy of the Auto Level Setup Procedure, ELEC 3724.

WARNING

It is essential that any repairs be completed to the jack circuit prior to initiating the Auto Level Basic Operational Test.
The pages that follow provide a checklist for the Basic Operational Test. It is also recommended that a copy of the current auxiliary hydraulic schematic (R57349. Contact P&H MinePro Services for latest change mark) be available during this test.
MECHANICAL 1.0) Make sure Jack Spuds are well greased to prevent binding. 1.1) Check Hydraulic Oil tank for proper amount of oil. 1.2) Operate system components to warm oil to at least 70F (21C) before testing. 1.2) Manually Level Drill ensuring all jacks are taking load 1.3) Visually check all four Leveling Jack cylinders and their components for leaks or cylinder drift. Note: Repairs to the Leveling Jack circuit should be made if cylinder drift exceeds inch (13mm) per hour before continuing on with this procedure. HYDRAULIC 2.0) Verify Jack System Pressure (2900 PSI on VB1, 2850 PSI on VB3 [maximum]). To Test: Retract all four Jack Cylinders to the full retract position. Next, select and press one of the Jack Leveling rocker switches in the retract position (dead heading the pump) while observe the Hydraulic Pressure Meter (HPM) on the cab console. To Adjust [see 10-5]: Install a 0 - 5000 psi Pressure Gauge into the Relief/Unload Oil Diverter Valve test port. Set controls at neutral and manually depress the valve plunger on Valve Bank 1. Adjust to a maximum of 2900 psi. Leave the pressure gauge installed and depress the valve plunger on Valve Bank 3. Adjust to 2850 psi. Remove gauge. Note: To prevent hunting between the two relief valves, differential should always be at least 50 psid. 2.1) Verify Right Rear Leveling Jack Counterbalance Valve Pressure To Test: Manually Extend the Right Rear Leveling Jack Cylinder from the full retracted position. As the jack is moving freely downward and before the jack touches the ground, observe the Hydraulic Pressure Meter (HPM) on the cab console. Jack pressure should range from 650-800* psi. Note: During the Auto Leveling mode the instant the Jack pressure exceeds that of the Jack Pressure Switch setting, the switch will close signaling the PLC to stop that particular Jack operation. _______OK CHECKED _______OK _______OK _______OK _______OK

_______OK

CHECKED

_______OK

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 10, Version 00 - 03/06

-10.8-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec10Level.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Levelling System

HYDRAULIC 2.2) Verify Left Rear Leveling Jack Counterbalance Valve Pressure To test: Manually Extend the Left Rear Leveling Jack Cylinder from the full-retracted position. As the Jack is moving freely downward and before the Jack touches the ground, observe the Hydraulic Pressure Meter (HPM) on the cab console. Jack pressure should range from 650-800* psi. Note: During the Auto Leveling mode the instant the Jack pressure exceeds that of the Jack Pressure Switch setting, the switch will close signaling the PLC to stop that particular Jack operation. 3.0) Verify Front Leveling Jack Counterbalance Valve Pressure To test: Manually Extend the Front Leveling Jack Cylinders from the full-retracted position. As the jacks are moving freely downward and before the jacks touch the ground, observe the Hydraulic Pressure Meter (HPM) on the cab console. Jack pressure should range from 650-800* psi. Note: During the Auto Leveling mode, the instant the Jack pressure exceeds that of the Jack Pressure Switch setting, the switch will close signaling the PLC to stop that particular Jack operation.

CHECKED

_______OK

_______OK

*If pressure exceeds 800 psi, contact your local P&H MinePro Services representative.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec10Level.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -10.9Section 10, Version 00 - 03/06

Levelling System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Install 0 - 5000 psi gauge at Test Port

Manual Override* System Adjustment Test Port

Valve Bank 3

Valve Bank 1

* Use a small Allen wrench or screwdriver to manually press in and hold the plunger.

Figure 10-5: Verify Jack System Pressure

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 10, Version 00 - 03/06

-10.10-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec10Level.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Levelling System

ELECTRICAL 4.0) Ensure GUI Auto Level screen is in working order. 4.1) Verify Jack Pressure Switches operation To confirm operation: Manually extend the front & rear Leveling Jack Cylinders one at a time from their full-retracted position. When the jack pad makes contact with the ground and just begins to lift the drill, the pressure switch for that jack will mechanically close the electric contacts, turning ON the input signal to the PLC. Next, manually retract the jack cylinder. As soon as the jack pad retracts from the ground, the pressure switch contacts will mechanically open turning OFF the input signal. Jack a. Right Rear b. Left Rear c. Front d. Front Over-pressure Input Signal I:07/15 I:07/16 I:07/14 I:07/13 PS Setting 950 psi 50 psi 950 psi 50 psi 950 psi 50 psi 950 psi 50 psi

CHECKED _______OK

_______OK _______OK _______OK _______OK

Note: Pressure Switches produce a feedback signal to the PLC for the Auto Level sequence. To ensure consistent Auto Leveling function and performance, pressure switches must be working properly. Repairs and or adjustments must be made before continuing on with this procedure. Refer to 10-6. 4.2) Verify level sensors operation (located inside the PLC cabinet on 120125 & future) To test (Refer to 10-7): Manually tilt each sensor and observe the GUI screen or PLC input card I:30. Shims can be placed under the Sensor to simulate drill angle of tilt. _______OK a. Tilt LS3 towards the front of drill = I:30/5 ON @ b. Tilt LS3 towards the rear of drill = I:30/4 ON @ c. Tilt LS2 towards the right of drill = I:30/3 ON @ d. Tilt LS2 towards the left of drill = I:30/2 ON @ e. Tilt LS1 any direction = I:30/1 OFF @ 6 Note: There is a slight time delay on the sensor outputs as observed on the GUI or the PLC card. The LED indicators on the bottom of the sensors are real-time corresponding to the PLC inputs. Refer to Figure 2. _______OK _______OK _______OK _______OK

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec10Level.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -10.11Section 10, Version 00 - 03/06

Levelling System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Pressure Adjusting Screw and Locknut

Pressure Setting Indicator 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500


Set to 900 psi Minimum

Figure 10-6: Auto Level Pressure Switch Adjustment

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 10, Version 00 - 03/06

-10.12-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec10Level.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Levelling System

Tilt Sensor (Typ.)


Degrees 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 Shims (approx.) .014" .027" .054" .082" .109" .136" .163"

Press sensor down, place shims under locknut to simulate drill angle

X-Y LED

Time Delay Adjustment

NOTE: Rough Setting. May need to be fine-tuned after setup by adjusting locknut(s).

LS1 Over-tilt

LS3 Front & Rear Sensor Panel

LS2 Right & Left

Figure 10-7: Auto Level Tilt Sensors (LS1, 2, & 3)

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec10Level.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -10.13Section 10, Version 00 - 03/06

Levelling System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

MANUAL AND AUTO LEVELING 5.0) Verify Machine is Level (refer to Figure 10-8 on page 15) Position a 3 foot (1m) level along main frame I-beam = bubble centered Position a 3 foot (1m) level along the rear axle = bubble centered Note: Manually adjust individual Jacks until machine is level. Refer to Figure 3. 5.1) Verify Clinometer Gauges inside operators cab are set at zero once machine is level. Adjust if necessary. 5.2) When the Machine is Level, the 'MACHINE LEVEL' lamp on the operator's console should illuminate. 5.3) Verify That All Four (4) Jacks Indicate Ground Pressure on GUI Auto Level Screen Note: It is essential that repairs be completed to the jack circuit to ensure the Auto Level testing is accurately measured. 5.4) Press the Auto Level Switch to LOWER. a. The front Jacks should retract lowering the front of the machine until the load is off of the front jacks. b. Both rear jacks should retract and maintain L-R level while lowering the rear of the machine until the load is off of the rear jacks. c. When all jacks are fully retracted, the auto level system will turn off. 5.5) Press the Auto Level Switch to Raise. a. The front and rear jacks will begin to extend. b. When all four (4) Jacks just make contact with the ground, the rear will equalize side-to-side. c. If the machine is level side-to-side, all jacks will extend simultaneously. d. When the machine is level side-to-side and the front is low, the front will continue to rise until the machine is level front-to-back. e. Once the machine is level for 6 seconds, the system will not react to a change f. If the machine is out-of-level for longer than 4 seconds and there is no movement, the MACHINE LEVEL light will blink. See note. Note: If pump pressure and or pump flow is low, jack(s) may stall during Auto Level. As a result, the 4-second timer will cause a fault. Check pump operation, pressures, etc. 5.6) After the previous tests are complete, the system should be checked at different positions to simulate different operating conditions. a. With the machine level, turn the auto level system off and retract one jack to force the machine out of level. b. Turn the Auto Level system on again to RAISE. Monitor system for proper leveling c. During Auto Level raise operation, side to side and front to back movement should be smooth and steady. d. If, during the Auto Level process the drill ratchets from one Jack to the other, it's possible that the Level Sensor(s) time delay adjustment interval is too short. Refer to Step 5.1. e. Repeat Auto Leveling Raise & Lowering after adjustments if necessary. 5.7) Basic Operational Test Completed

CHECKED _______OK _______OK

_______OK _______OK

_______OK

_______OK _______OK _______OK

_______OK _______OK _______OK _______OK _______OK _______OK

_______OK _______OK _______OK _______OK _______OK _______OK

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 10, Version 00 - 03/06

-10.14-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec10Level.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Levelling System

Use a 3-foot (1 meter) carpenter's box level along the main frame and the rear axle for front-to-back and side-to-side conditions. It time permits, using surveying equipment would provide more accurate results.

Main Frame
Figure 10-8: Check Machine Level

Rear Axle

TEST VERIFICATION Model/Serial Number ______________ / _________________________________ Customer ________________________ Checked By: ______________________ Checked By: ______________________ Checked By: ______________________ Comments: Machine Hours _______________ Date: ______________________ Date: ______________________ Date: ______________________

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec10Level.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -10.15Section 10, Version 00 - 03/06

Levelling System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

10.4.2 Troubleshooting Chart


Problems with the leveling system will almost always be caused by hydraulic system malfunction or electrical control circuit malfunction. the troubleshooting chart from Section 3, Auxiliary Hydraulic System. is included here for convenience.
Problem Possible Cause Control valve does not shift correctly System oil level is low External leak in system dirty filters System fails to build pressure clogged inlet line clogged tank breather fluid is too cold main drive motor is not operating pump drive coupling failed relief or unloading valve set too low pump is damaged pump is cavitating Excessive hydraulic pump noise Remedy Replace the Relief/unload/oil diverter valve Replenish tank supply Tighten components and bleed air from system Replace the filters Clean the inlet line Clean or replace the breather Heat the fluid Repair or replace the main drive motor Repair or replace the coupling Adjust the valve to the correct setting Repair or replace the pump Refer to System fails to build pressure Leak in the inlet line to the pump. Tighten the fittings Faulty pump shaft seal. Replace the seal pump is cavitating Refer to System fails to build pressure Leak in the inlet line to the pump. Tighten the fittings Faulty pump shaft seal. Replace the seal contaminated fluid Drill pipe racks operate too slow or too fast the needle valve is out of adjustment or faulty the needle valve is out of adjustment or faulty Change filters and replace the fluid Adjust the needle valve for correct operating speed. If unable to adjust, replace the needle valve Adjust the needle valve for correct operating speed. If unable to adjust, replace the needle valve Adjust the unloading relief valve to operate at 1100 psig (75.9 bar). If unable to adjust, repair or replace valve Adjust or replace the flow control valves

air in the fluid

Excessive system heat

air in the fluid

Leveling jacks and winch move slowly

The unloading relief valve is faulty Breakout Wrench moves too fast or too slow

faulty flow control valves

Table 10-1: Auxiliary Hydraulic System Troubleshooting

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 10, Version 00 - 03/06

-10.16-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec10Level.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Mast

Section 11

Mast
11.1 Theory of Operation

Figure 11-1: 120A Mast (Typ.)

The mast supports the drilling components including the rotary machinery, pulldown/hoisting mechanism and brakes, guide rollers, pipe handling components, and some of the bit air components. The mast is mounted on hinge pins to allow the mast to be raised to the vertical position from the stored horizontal position and back. The hinge pins are located at the top of the mast support frame uprights. Raising and lowering of the mast is accomplished by two operator-controlled hydraulic cylinders that are connected to the mast and the main frame. The mast is locked in the vertical drilling position by the two operator-controlled, hydraulically-actuated anchor pins. The mast is also supported in the drilling position by two articulated back braces that are pinned to the mast and

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -11.1Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

Mast

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

the front jack caps. Hydraulically-actuated locking collars slide over the back brace joints to secure the extended braces. When the mast is lowered, the locking collars are retracted and the back braces automatically fold. Each back brace has an adjusting screw to allow adjustment of fixed length.

11.1.1 Mast Weldment R53818D1


The mast is 20.1 meters (66 feet) in length, and is made of structural steel welded in a lattice arrangement to provide strength and light weight. The four legs of the mast are tied together at the top by a crown block; the crown block also supports the auxiliary winch sheaves. The winch acts as a support structure for the rotary carriage, which contains the rotary motion motor and transmission as well as the pulldown motor and transmission. The rotary machinery is covered in Section 12, Rotary Machinery.. The rearward part of the mast is provided with racking on both sides. This racking meshes with drive pinions on the carriage to permit the pulldown and hoist systems to move up and down the mast. The pulldown machinery is covered in Section 12, Rotary Machinery..

11.1.2 Ladder 29J333F3


A ladder is mounted to the right side of the mast to permit inspection of the upper structure. The ladder is equipped with safety hoops and the Saf-T-Climb system.

Figure 1. Pawl in unlocked position as worker climbs. The mechanism allows hands-free climbing. Figure 2. Pawl automatically slides into locked position during fall. When descending, the pawl must be manually released at each catch point. Always use the correct harness when using the Saf-T-Climb system.

Figure 11-2: Saf-T-Climb

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

-11.2-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Mast

11.1.3 Back Braces 100J6487F3

Figure 11-3: Back Braces (Typical)

Two articulated structures are pinned to the mast and to the front jack caps. When the mast is hoisted to its vertical position, the back braces extend to form a support for the mast. Hydraulically-actuated locking collars slide over the articulated joints to secure the extended braces. When the mast is lowered, the locking collars are retracted and the back braces automatically fold. Each back brace has an adjusting screw to allow adjustment of fixed length.

11.1.4 Mast Lock Pins GH1302T14

Figure 11-4: Mast Lock Pin

The mast is locked in the vertical drilling position by the two pins, one on either side. These operator-controlled, hydraulically-actuated anchor pins are mounted under the drilling deck.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -11.3Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

Mast

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

11.1.5 Mast Hoist Cylinders R6268D1


.The mast is raised and lowered by two large-bore, long stroke hydraulic cylinders. The cylinder rod end is mounted with a clevis and pin joint to the mast. The cylinder head end is clevis and pin mounted to brackets on the drill main deck.

11.2 Mast Maintenance


11.2.1 Mast Weldment R53818D1
It should seldom, if ever, be necessary to remove the entire mast assembly, except in the event of severe damage to structural parts. Most service and replacements of components can be performed in the field. During maintenance procedures, apply standard torque to fasteners, unless otherwise specified. Refer to Appendix A for general mechanical maintenance procedures, and to Appendix B for general hydraulic component maintenance procedures

11.2.2 Auxiliary Winch 23U52D1


11.2.2.1 General
The winch is mounted inside the machinery house, between the mast hoist cylinders.

11.2.2.2 Removal
1. Remove the clamps, hook and thimble from the end of the winch wire rope. 2. Tie one end of a 30 meter (200 foot) nylon, poly, or hemp line to the free end of the wire rope. Fasten the other end of the line to the mast frame at a convenient point. This line will be used to pull the winch wire rope back through the sheaves when the winch is reinstalled. 3. Operate the winch to rewind the wire rope onto the drum, allowing the line to pass over the guide sheave and down to the drill deck. Fasten the wire rope to the drum to prevent unspooling, then untie the line, and fasten the end to the mast frame at a convenient point. 4. Lock out and tag the drill operator controls to prevent inadvertent startup during maintenance procedures.

WARNING

Hot hydraulic oil under pressure can spray and burn with extreme force and volume causing injury or death. Use lockout and tagout procedures to guard against inadvertent hydraulic system or machine startup during service or maintenance. Allow the hydraulic system to cool prior to any maintenance or repair. Slowly release pressure or vent circuits before disconnecting hydraulic lines. Wear appropriate face and body protective devices while carefully loosening any connection or fitting.
5. Tag and disconnect the hydraulic hoses and fittings from the winch motor and brake housing. Cap and/or plug all hoses and motor ports to prevent undesired drainage and contamination of the hydraulic system. Refer to Appendix B for information on the hydraulic connections.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

-11.4-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Mast

WARNING

Some blasthole drill components are extremely heavy. Dropping or mishandling of these parts can cause severe personal injury or death, and damage to the equipment. Always support heavy components using a suitable hoist or other means for removal, disassembly, assembly and installation. Provide appropriate support for any components which are not supported by the machinery during any maintenance.
6. Remove the capscrews and lockwashers that attach the winch to the deck. Remove the auxiliary winch. 7. Note the direction that the wire rope is wound on the winch drum. Remove the wire rope from the winch drum if necessary. If components of the winch require repair, refer to the following component repair instructions as necessary: Subtopic 11.2.3 Subtopic 11.2.4 Subtopic 11.2.5 Subtopic 11.2.6

11.2.2.3 Installation

WARNING

Some blasthole drill components are extremely heavy. Dropping or mishandling of these parts can cause severe personal injury or death, and damage to the equipment. Always support heavy components using a suitable hoist or other means for removal, disassembly, assembly and installation. Provide appropriate support for any components which are not supported by the machinery during any maintenance.
1. Position the winch on the deck. Check the mounting surface for unevenness. Be sure that all four mounting pads contact the mounting surface. If not, one pad should be shimmed to compensate. Install three mounting capscrews and lockwashers. Measure the space underneath the fourth pad with a feeler gauge and install shim stock of corresponding thickness with the capscrew and lockwasher. Apply new lockwire to the capscrew heads. 2. Install the hydraulic hoses and fittings in accordance with the identification tags previously attached. 3. Be sure that the planetary is filled with lubricant. Refer to the lubrication section. 4. Start the drill and operate the winch to bleed air from the hydraulic circuit. Check for flow through the return line when the winch is run in reverse to make sure that oil is being circulated through the brake. If not, investigate the hydraulic circuit for the cause of malfunction and correct the problem. 5. Pull the wire rope through the sheave on the upper mast by using the temporary reeving line. Secure the free end of the wire rope to the mast to prevent it from being pulled too far through the sheaves. Leave enough length of wire rope to enable attachment to the winch drum.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -11.5Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

Mast

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

WARNING

Inadvertent operation of the blasthole drill during maintenance on the machine could cause severe bodily injury and/or death. Lockout and tagout the drill operating controls to prevent accidental operation.
6. Lock out and tag the drill operator controls to prevent inadvertent startup during maintenance procedures. 7. Remove the temporary reeving line. Install the hook (04) and thimble (03) with clamps (02) on the free end of the wire rope.

CAUTION

Use the slot for clockwise rotation. Do not use the slot for counterclockwise rotation. The slots are marked. If the wire rope is wound onto the drum for counterclockwise rotation, the winch will not have any braking. This could result in uncontrolled lowering of a load, resulting in personal injury and property damage. Be sure that the wire rope is installed into the slot for clockwise forward rotation (clockwise when looking at the motor end of the winch).
8. Detach the other end of the wire rope. Wrap the wire rope around the drum anchor and pull the anchor firmly into the slot in the winch drum. 9. Operate the winch to wind the wire rope onto the winch drum. The wire rope will wind around the drum in the proper direction.

NOTICE
The drum should always have at least four wraps around the drum to be sure that the rope does not come off the drum

11.2.3 Winch Motor Repair


Motor repair requires removal of the motor from the winch motor adapter. If the motor does not need repair, do not remove it from the adapter.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

-11.6-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Mast

11.2.3.1 Removal And Disassembly

LEGEND 01. Thrust Plate 02. Body Seal 03. Hex Head Capscrew 04. Lockwasher 05. Motor Assembly 06. CCW Rotation Port 07. Pipe Plug 08. CW Rotation Port 09. End Cover 10. Needle Bearing 11. Dowel Pin

12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21.

Gear Housing Pocket Seal Gear Set Motor Adapter Ring Seal (Consists of Items 06 through 18) Pipe Plug O-ring Hex Head Capscrew Lockwasher Pipe Plug

Figure 11-5: Auxiliary Winch

Refer to Figure 11-5 and proceed as follows: 1. 1. Remove capscrews (03) and lockwashers (04).

NOTICE
When prying off parts, take care not to damage the machined surfaces of parts. This particularly true of the cover and housing. Surface damage will cause motor leakage or other malfunction.
2. Remove end cover (09) with bearings (10), seal (16) and thrust plate (01). Pry the cover if necessary. The thrust plate may remain in the housing (12). Leave the dowel pins (11) in the housing. 3. If the thrust plate came off with the cover, pry it off the bearings (10). Remove and discard pocket seals (13). 4. Remove gear set (14) and thrust plate, if necessary, from the housing.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -11.7Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

Mast

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

5. Carefully pry off the housing from the adapter (15). Use care to avoid damage to the splined shaft and gear bore. The thrust plate may remain in the housing. Leave the dowel pins (11) in place. 6. If the thrust plate remained in the adapter, pry it off the bearings (10). Remove and discard pocket seals (13). 7. Remove bearings (10). Remove and discard ring seals (16) and body seals (02).

11.2.3.2 Cleaning, Inspection and Repair


Clean and inspect parts as specified inAppendix A. Replace all worn and/or damaged parts. Replace all seals using the motor seal kit. The seal kit includes two strips of rubber. The pocket seals must be cut to length from the strips with a sharp knife to fit the openings in the thrust plates.

11.2.3.3 Assembly and Installation


Refer to Figure 11-5 and proceed as follows: 1. Apply grease liberally to all seals. 2. Install new ring seals (16) in end cover (09) and adapter (15), followed by the bearings (10). 3. Install six new pocket seals (16) in each thrust plate (01). Press one thrust plate with seals onto the bearings and adapter. 4. Install a new body seal (02) into one side of housing (12). Position the housing over dowel pins (11) in the adapter and press into place. Tap the housing with a soft faced hammer if necessary. 5. Install gear set (14) into the housing. The longer gear goes on top with the internal spline toward the adapter. 6. Install a new body seal (02) into the other side of the housing. Press the second thrust plate with seals onto the housing with the pocket seals facing away from the gears 7. Position the assembled end cover over the dowel pins and press into place. Tap the end cover with a soft faced hammer if necessary. 8. Install capscrews (03) and lockwashers (04). Tighten the cap- screws evenly to 270 Nm (200 ft-lbs) torque.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

-11.8-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Mast

11.2.4 Winch Brake Repair

LEGEND 01. Thrust Washer 02. Support Washer 03. Sprag Clutch 04. Divider Plate 05. Piston 06. O-ring 07. O-ring 08. O-ring 09. O-ring 10. Circlip 11. Circlip 12. Clutch Aligner 13. Brake Spring 14. Brake Hub

15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28.

Clutch Aligner Brake Housing Plug (Oil Return) Friction Plate Brake Spacer Circlip Base Thrust Bearing Oil Seal Needle Bearing Drive Shaft Drum Connecting Shaft Sun Gear

Figure 11-6: Auxiliary Winch Brake Components

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -11.9Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

Mast

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

NOTICE
If the motor does not require repair, do not remove it from the adapter. 11.2.4.1 Removal and Disassembly
Refer to Figure 11-6 and proceed as follows

CAUTION

The brake springs (13, Figure 11-6) are under considerable tension against the motor adapter. They can release unexpectedly with great force and cause severe personal injury. Unscrew capscrews one turn at a time in sequence until the spring pressure is relieved. Then remove capscrews (19) and lockwashers (20) to detach the winch motor and adapter.
1. Remove and discard O-rings (08 and 09). O-ring (09) is located on the brake housing flange. 2. Remove brake springs (13). 3. Pull drive shaft (25) from brake housing (16) with the brake hub assembly. 4. Remove circlip (11) from the drive shaft. Remove washers (02), brake hub (14), and clutch aligners (12 and 15). Note the position of the sprag clutches (03) and remove them. 5. Pull piston (05) from the brake housing. 6. Remove and discard O-rings (06 and 07). 7. Remove friction plates (18) and divider plates (04). 8. Remove brake spacer ((19). 9. Remove thrust bearing (22) and thrust washers (01). 10. Remove and discard oil seal (23). 11. Do not remove brake housing (16) unless repair of the drum is required. Refer to Winch Drum Repair.

11.2.4.2 Cleaning, Inspection and Repair


Clean and inspect parts as specified in Appendix A. Replace all seals and O-rings using the winch seal kit. Replace all scored, worn and/or damaged parts. 1. If the outside diameter of the piston is scratched. polish it with fine emery cloth. Wash the piston thoroughly after polishing. 2. Inspect the bore of the brake hub and outside of the drive shaft where both places contact the sprag clutches. If these areas are indented or otherwise damaged, replace the shaft and/or hub.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

-11.10-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Mast

11.2.4.3 Assembly and Installation


Refer to Figure 11-6 and proceed as follows: 1. Apply grease liberally to new seals and O-rings. 2. Install sprag clutches (03) in the bore of the brake hub (14). The clutches must be positioned so that the motor end of the drive shaft (25) will turn freely in the clockwise direction and lock in the counterclockwise direction. 3. Install washers (02) and clutch aligners (12 and 15) on each side of brake hub (14). Slide the hub assembly onto the drive shaft. Install circlip (11). 4. Install a new oil seal (23) in the bore of the connecting shaft (27). 5. Slide thrust bearing (22) with a thrust washer (01) on each side onto the large end of the drive shaft against circlip (20). Insert the end of this assembly through the connecting shaft (25) so that the splines engage the sun gear (28). Take care not to damage the oil seal (23) or needle bearing (24) during installation. 6. Install brake spacer (19) and one divider plate (04). Then starting with a friction plate (18), alternately install a friction plate and a divider plate until all plates are in place. The brake disc stack must finish with a divider plate. 7. Install O-rings (06 and 07). 8. Install brake piston (05) in the brake housing(l6) so that the spring holes facing outward. 9. Install sixteen brake springs (13) into the piston. There are 18 holes for the springs. The two empty holes should be opposite each other. 10. Apply grease to O-rings (08 and 09) and install. O-ring (09) should be placed over the transfer hole for the automatic release pressure on the motor adapter flange. 11. Slide the winch motor and adapter over the drive shaft so the splines engage and the pressure transfer holes and brake spring holes are aligned.Install capscrews (19) and lockwashers (20) to attach the winch motor and adapter. Tighten the capscrews evenly one turn at a time in a cross sequence until the adapter is fully in place.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -11.11Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

Mast

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

11.2.5 Winch Planetary Repair

LEGEND 01. Breather 02. Thrust Washer 03. Planet Gear 04. Needle Bearing 05. Circlip 06. Circlip 07. Ball Bearing 08. Oil Seal 09. Cable Anchor

10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.

Clrclip Pipe Plug Circlip Sun Gear Cable Drum Hex Head Capscrew Base Lockwasher Planetary Housing

19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27.

Planet Hub O-ring Retaining Rings Pipe Plug Planet Hub Stopper Sun Gear Stopper End Cover Planet Pin Circlip

Figure 11-7: Auxiliary Winch Planetary Components

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

-11.12-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Mast

11.2.5.1 Removal and Disassembly


Refer to Figure 11-7 and proceed as follows: 1. Remove pipe plug (21) and drain the oil from the planetary and drum interior. Tip the unit at an angle to drain all oil from the drum. 2. Remove capscrews (15) and lockwashers (17) to detach base (16) from the planetary and drum. 3. Remove internal retaining ring (22) and end cover (25) with O-ring (20). Discard the O-ring. 4. Remove stoppers (23 and 24). 5. Withdraw planet hub assembly from housing (18). 6. To remove planet gears (03), remove circlips (05) and press pins (26) from hub (19). Slide out the planet gears with needle bearings (04) and thrust washers (02). 7. Withdraw sun gear (I 3) from drum (1 4). 8. Remove circlip (10). Insert two pry bars between the flange of drum (14) and housing (18) and carefully pry the drum from bearing (07). 9. Remove circlip (06) and bearing (07). disassemble the position the (08) in the (I8). Re- move and discard the oil seal.

11.2.5.2 Cleaning, Inspection and Repair


Clean and inspect parts as specified in Appendix A. Replace all seals and O-rings using the winch seal kit. Replace all scored, worn and/or damaged parts. 1. Inspect stoppers for excessive wear. Minimum thickness of the stoppers is 114 inch (6.4 mm). Replace excessively worn or damaged stoppers. 2. Inspect thrust washers for excessive wear. Replace excessively worn or damaged washers.

11.2.5.3 Assembly and Installation


Refer to Figure 11-7 and proceed as follows: 1. Install a new oil seal (08) in housing (18). 2. Install circlip (06) and bearing (07) in the housing. 3. Align drum (14) with bearing (07). Apply pressure to the bearing inner race to press the drum and bearing into place. Install circlip (10). 4. Install sun gear (13) in drum (14). 5. Slide planet gear (03) with needle bearing (04) and thrust washers (02) into hub (19). Align the bores and push pin (26) into o place. Install circlips (05 and 27). 6. Repeat preceding step 5 for the other planet gears.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -11.13Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

Mast

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

7. Install planet hub assembly into housing (18). 8. Install stoppers (23 and 24). 9. Coat the O-ring (20) with grease and install in the groove in end cover (25). 10. Install end cover (25) with O-ring (20) and secure with internal retaining ring (22).

NOTICE
If the winch drum was disassembled, do not proceed further until the drum components have been installed. Refer to Subtopic 11.2.6.
11. Install capscrews (15) and lockwashers (17) to attach base (16) to the planetary and drum. 12. Fill the winch with oil. Refer to Subtopic 16.3.3. 13. Install pipe plug (21).

11.2.6 Winch Drum Repair


11.2.6.1 Removal and Disassembly

NOTICE
The brake and planetary components must be removed before the drum can be disassembled. Refer to Subtopic 11.2.4 and Subtopic 11.2.5.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

-11.14-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Mast

Refer to Figure 11-8 and proceed as follows:


LEGEND

LEGEND 01. Needle Bearing 02. Retaining Ring 03. Clrclip (3) 04. Internal Gear Stopper (3) 05. Needle Bearing (3) 06. Thrust Washer (6) 07. Circlip (3) 08. Planet Pin (3) 09. Planet Gear (3) 10. Sun Gear Stopper 11. Sun Gear

12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22.

Planet Hub Internal Gear Connecting Shaft Ball Bearing Drive Shaft Ball Bearing O-ring Oil Seal Brake Drum Base Brake Housing

Figure 11-8: Auxiliary Winch Drum Components

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -11.15Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

Mast

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

1. Insert two pry bars between the flange of drum (20) and housing (22) and carefully pry the housing from bearings (15 and 17). The connecting shaft (14) will come off with the housing. 2. Pull connecting shaft (14) from brake housing (22). Remove and discard O-ring (18). 3. Remove needle bearing (01) and retaining ring (02) from the connecting shaft. 4. Withdraw sun gear (11) from the planet assembly in the drum. 5. Remove and discard oil seal (19). 6. Using a standard puller, remove bearings (15 and 17). 7. Remove the planet assembly with internal gear (13) from the drum. 8. To remove planet gears (09), remove circlips (03) and press pins (08) from hub (12). Slide out the planet gear with needle bearing (05) and thrust washers (06). 9. Remove stoppers (04 and 10)

11.2.6.2 Cleaning, Inspection and Repair


Clean and inspect parts as specified in Appendix A. Replace all seals and O-rings using the winch seal kit. Replace all scored, worn and/or damaged parts. 1. Inspect sun gear stopper for excessive wear. Minimum thickness of the sun gear stopper is 114 inch (6.4 mm). Replace an excessively worn or damaged stopper. 2. Inspect internal gear stoppers and thrust washers for excessive wear. Replace excessively worn or damaged washers and/or stoppers.

11.2.7 Assembly and Installation


The planetary components should be assembled before the drum components. Refer to Subtopic 11.2.5. Refer to Figure 11-8 and proceed as follows: 1. Slide planet gear (09) with needle bearing (09) and thrust washers (09) into hub (12). Align the bores and push pin (08) into o place. Install circlips (03 and 07). 2. Repeat preceding step 2 for the other planet gears. 3. Install stoppers (04 and 10). 4. Install planet assembly in internal gear (13) and install sun gear (1 1) in the planet assembly. Place the unit in the drum so the splines on the planetary sun gear mesh with the planet hub (12). 5. Install bearings (15 and 17). 6. Install new oil seal (19). 7. Install needle bearing (01) in connecting shaft (14). Install retaining ring (02)

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

-11.16-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Mast

8. Apply grease to O-ring (18) and install on connecting shaft (14). Install connecting shaft (14) in brake housing (22). 9. Insert the assembled brake housing into bearings (15 and 17) so that the connecting shaft (14) engages internal gear (13). Press into place. If necessary, use a soft faced hammer to tap the brake housing. 10. Install capscrews (15, Figure 10-4) and lockwashers (17) to attach base (16) to the planetary and drum. 11. Assemble and install the brake components. Refer to topic, Winch Brake Repair 12. Fill the winch with oil. Refer to Subtopic 16.3.3. 13. Install pipe plug.

11.2.8 Auxiliary Winch Sheaves

Figure 11-9: Auxiliary Winch Sheaves

The two removable sheaves for the auxiliary winch wire rope are installed at the ends of a support on top of the mast crown block. The support and one sheave are extended beyond the rear side of the mast so that the wire rope drops just behind the drilling centerline.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -11.17Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

Mast

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

11.2.8.1 Removal

NOTICE
Lower the mast to its horizontal position to gain access to the mast crown block and sheaves. Refer to Figure 11-9 and proceed as follows:

WARNING

Inadvertent operation of the blasthole drill during maintenance on the machine could cause severe bodily injury and/or death. Lock out and tag out the drill operating controls to prevent accidental operation.
1. Lock out and tag out the drill operating controls to prevent inadvertent startup or movement of the drill during maintenance activities. 2. To remove the sheaves, remove the cotter pins from the lock pins. 3. Support the sheave parts, then remove the capscrews and lockwashers, and withdraw the lock pins. 4. Remove and disassemble the bearings, retainers, and sheaves.

CAUTION
To remove the sheaves without first removing the wire rope, place steel rods under the wire rope and clamp them in position on the sheave support. This will hold the wire rope in place, and away from the sheaves, so that they can be removed. Do not clamp the wire rope in a working section; this can cause rope damage, crushing, or kinking. 11.2.8.2 Cleaning, Inspection, and Repair
Clean and inspect the sheave components in accordance with the general cleaning and inspection procedures described in Appendix A of this manual. Sheave repair consists of the replacement of all worn or damaged components. See the LinkOne electronic parts manual for component identification.

11.2.8.3 Installation
Refer to Figure 11-9 and proceed as follows: 1. Install the bearings and retainers in the sheaves. 2. Support the sheave parts and position them in the crown block support. 3. Insert the lock pins through the support holes and sheave assemblies. 4. Install the capscrews, lockwashers, and cotter pins to secure the assembly.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

-11.18-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Mast

5.

Back Braces 100J6487F3

Figure 11-10: Back Brace (exploded view)

11.2.8.4 Adjustment

CAUTION
The back braces must be adjusted when the crawlers are on the ground on a smooth level surface. If back brace adjustment is made when the drill is elevated on jacks, or if the back brace adjustment in not correct, unnecessary loading will be placed on the back braces, mast and front jack assemblies that could result in early fatigue cracking and/or structural failure.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -11.19Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

Mast

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

NOTICE
This procedure assumes the mast has been correctly adjusted to be vertical when the mast anchor pins are engaged and the drill is correctly leveled.
1. Raise the mast to the vertical position. Ensure that the mast anchor pins are engaged and that the back brace locks are extended. 2. Place drill on a smooth level surface with the crawlers on the ground and the leveling jacks fully raised. 3. Retract the mast anchor pins and note if mast anchor pin bores on mast move relative to the anchor pin bores on the main frame. No misalignment between the bores should be noted when the crawlers are on the ground. If misalignment is noted with crawlers on the ground, the back brace length needs to be adjusted until there is very little misalignment between the mast anchor in bores on the mast and main frame when the anchor pins are removed. 4. Back brace length adjustment is accomplished by turning the threaded adjusting nuts/rods on the ends of the back brace legs. Refer to Figure 11-11.

03

02 04

01

05

BD0983a01

LEGEND 01. Adjusting Rod 02. Lower Brace

03. Locknuts 04. Clevis 05. Top of Front Leveling Jack

CAUTION
Minimum of 102mm (4") of thread engagement is required on both ends of the extension rod.
Figure 11-11: Back Brace Adjustment

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

-11.20-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Mast

5. After length adjustment, the back brace appearance will be a slight bow downward due to gravity with the crawlers on the ground and the mast anchor pins engaged. When the machine is raised on jacks, the main frame deflects in a direction that will reduce tension on the back brace members, resulting in a slack condition when the machine is on jacks and drilling. This slack condition will produce slightly more sag in the back braces when the drill is on jacks as compared to when the drill is on the ground.

NOTICE
It is critical to adjust both back braces to have equal loading on each side. This can be verified by ensuring that each back brace has approximately the same amount of sag, verified by line of sight viewing along the axis of each back brace leg.
6. After adjustments have been made, lower the mast, propel for about one machine length, raise the mast, engage the mast anchor pins and then retract the mast anchor pins. Check the mast anchor pin displacement with the machine still on the ground. If the bores displace more than 0.06" from each other, repeat the adjustment procedure. 7. Engage the mast anchor pins and raise machine on leveling jacks to the point that both crawler belts are off the ground and the machine is level. 8. Retract the mast anchor pins and note if the mast anchor pin bores move relative to the anchor pin bores on the main frame. Note that adjusting back brace length to result in little anchor pin bore displacement when the drill is on the ground will result in some anchor pin bore displacement when the drill is sitting on the jacks. Slight bore misalignment (less than 3mm or 1/8") when the pins are removed is acceptable. 9. With mast anchor pins disengaged, lower the mast to the mast rests, then raise the mast to the vertical position. 10. Engage the mast anchor pins to verify that the anchor pins can be readily inserted. If the mast pins are difficult to engage, slight modifications may have to be made to remove some of the anchor pin bore misalignment with the drill on jacks.

NOTICE
Any adjustments must result in approximately the same amount of sag on each back brace, verified by line of sight viewing along the axis of each back brace leg. Also, any adjustment must still result in the minimum amount of anchor pin bore misalignment when the drill is on the ground.
After final adjustments are made, it is recommended to lock the back brace adjustment. This can be done by welding a small plate across the back brace and the adjusting block, being careful not to weld to the adjustment threads.

11.2.8.5 Removal

CAUTION
The mast must be locked in the vertical upright position to service the back brace assemblies. Back braces should be serviced one at a time.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -11.21Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

Mast

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

To remove one back brace assembly, refer to Figure 11-10 and proceed as follows:

WARNING

Inadvertent operation of the blasthole drill during maintenance could cause severe bodily injury and/ or death. Lockout and tagout the drill operating controls to prevent accidental operation.
1. Lock out and tag the drill operating controls to prevent inadvertent startup or movement of the drill during maintenance activities. 2. Securely fasten locking collar (03) and cylinders (02) in the extended (locked) position with rope, or other means, to prevent retraction of the cylinders when the hydraulic hoses are disconnected.

WARNING

Hot hydraulic oil under pressure can spray and burn with extreme force and volume causing injury or death. Use lockout and tagout procedures to guard against inadvertent hydraulic system or machine startup during service or maintenance. Allow the hydraulic system to cool prior to any maintenance or repair. Slowly release pressure or vent circuits before disconnecting hydraulic lines. Wear appropriate face and body protective devices while carefully loosening any connection or fitting.
3. Tag and disconnect the hydraulic hoses and fittings to the back brace cylinders. Cap and/or plug all hoses and fittings to prevent contamination of the hydraulic system. Refer to Appendix B for information on hydraulic connections.

WARNING

Some blasthole drill components are extremely heavy. Dropping or mishandling of these parts can cause severe personal injury or death, and damage to the equipment. Always support heavy components using a suitable hoist or other means for removal, disassembly, assembly and installation. Provide appropriate support for any components which are not supported by the machinery during any maintenance.
4. Support the upper and lower braces with a suitable hoist and sling. 5. Remove four pins (5) and drive out clevis pins (6) to unfasten the brace assembly. Remove the brace assembly and place it in an appropriate location for disassembly.

11.2.8.6 Disassembly
Refer to Figure 11-10 and proceed as follows: 1. Remove lockwire (l8), capscrews (19), lockwashers (20) and hex nuts 21). 2. Remove six cotter pin (16), flat washers (15) and collar pins (17). Remove band (01) and cylinders (03). 3. Note the position of the extension rod engagement before disassembly. Unscrew lower clevis (08), nuts (9 and 11) and extension rod (10). Use the special spanner wrench tool 5002096 to loosen the nuts.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

-11.22-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Mast

4. Remove roll pins (12), hinge pins (13) and link (14) 5. Separate braces (04 and 07) and collar (03).

11.2.8.7 Cleaning, Inspection and Repair


Clean and inspect the back brace components in accordance with the general cleaning and inspection procedures described in Appendix A of this manual. Repair consists of the replacement of all worn or damaged components. Refer to the Parts Manual for component identification.

11.2.8.8 Assembly
Refer to Figure 11-10 and proceed as follows: 1. Place collar (03) onto the upper brace (04). Connect link (14) to upper brace (04) and lower brace (07) with pins (13) and roll pins (12). 2. Apply anti-seize compound to the threads of the lower clevis (08), nuts (9 and 11) and extension rod (10). Screw these parts into the into lower brace (07). Use special tool, backbrace spanner (PN 5002096) to install the nuts. 3. Attach the base ends of the hydraulic cylinders (03) to the brackets on the upper brace (04) with cotter pins (16), flat washers (15) and collar pins (17).

NOTICE
Be sure that the cylinder ports are aligned correctly to mate with the hydraulic hose assemblies.
4. Position and install band (01) onto the lower base ends of cylinders (03). Secure the band with two capscrews (19), lockwashers (20) and hex nuts (21). Apply lockwire (18). 5. Attach the rod ends of the hydraulic cylinders to the brackets on the collar (06) with cotter pins (16), flat washers (15) and collar pins (17).

11.2.8.9 Installation
Refer to Figure 11-10 and proceed as follows: 1. Position the upper and lower braces in a straight line, then slide locking collar (03) into locking position over the middle joint. 2. Securely fasten locking collar (03) and cylinders (02) in the extended (locked) position with rope, or other means, to prevent unlocking the back braces.

WARNING

Inadvertent operation of the blasthole drill during maintenance on the machine could cause severe bodily injury and/or death. Lockout and tagout the drill operating controls to prevent accidental operation.
3. 3. Lock out and tag the drill operating controls to prevent inadvertent startup or movement of the drill during maintenance activities.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -11.23Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

Mast

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

WARNING

Some blasthole drill components are extremely heavy. Dropping or mishandling of these parts can cause severe personal injury or death, and damage to the equipment. Always support heavy components using a suitable hoist or other means for removal, disassembly, assembly and installation. Provide appropriate support for any components that are not supported by the machinery during any maintenance.
4. Using a suitable hoist and sling, lift up the back brace assembly and position it so that the upper and lower ends are aligned with the mounting caps.

NOTICE
If the back brace cannot be connected because the brace is too short or too long, adjust the extension rod as required. Refer to Subtopic 11.2.9.5.
5. Insert pin (06) and install pins (05) to attach the brace to the front jack caps.

CAUTION

There must be a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) of adjusting screw threads engaged with both the clevis and upper brace. Less thread engagement could result in brace failure.
6. Align the upper brace end with the mast cap. If the cap and clevis cannot be aligned, loosen nuts (9 and 11) and adjust the rod (10) to permit alignment. Measure and record the distance between the clevis and lower brace. This distance will be used in checking and adjusting the other back brace if serviced. 7. Check the length adjustment for the back brace on the other side. Adjust as required. 8. Connect the hydraulic hose assemblies in accordance with their identification tags. 9. Bleed the back brace hydraulic circuits.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

-11.24-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Mast

11.2.9 Back Brace Locking Collar Cylinder R7187D1

Figure 11-12: Back Brace Locking Collar Cylinder

11.2.9.1 Removal
The back brace locking collar cylinder is removed as part of the back brace removal procedure. Refer to Subtopic 11.2.8.5. Move the cylinder to a clean work area for disassembly.

11.2.9.2 Disassembly
Refer to Figure 11-12 and proceed as follows: 1. Extend piston rod to make clearance for spanner wrench. 2. Clamp the cylinder body in a vise and loosen the cylinder head with a spanner wrench.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -11.25Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

Mast

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

3. Unscrew the cylinder head until the threads become disengaged from the cylinder body, then remove the piston/piston rod and cylinder head assembly from the cylinder body. 4. Remove the locknut from the piston rod. Then separate the piston, wipers (01), seal assembly (02), O-ring (03), backup ring (04), washer, and cylinder head assembly from the piston. Discard all seal parts. 5. Remove and discard O-rings (05 and 09), backup ring (06), rod seal (07), and rod wiper (08) from the cylinder head. Note the orientation of these components for assembly.

11.2.9.3 Cleaning, Inspection and Repair


Clean and inspect all cylinder components in accordance with the general cleaning and inspection procedures described in Appendix A of this manual. After cleaning and inspection, cover all parts with a light film of oil and protect the parts from dirt and moisture. Cylinder repair consists of the replacement of wipers, seals, and all worn or damaged components. See the LinkOne electronic parts manual for component identification.

11.2.9.4 Assembly
Refer to Figure 11-12 and proceed as follows: 1. Lubricate and install O-rings (05 and 09), backup ring (06), rod seal (07), and rod wiper (08) on the cylinder head. 2. Install the cylinder head assembly on the piston rod. 3. Lubricate and install piston, wipers (01), seal assembly (02), O-ring (03), and backup ring (04) on the piston. 4. Install the washer and piston assembly on the piston rod with the locknut and torque securely. 5. Lubricate the bore of the cylinder body (with hydraulic oil, and insert the piston/cylinder head assembly). Take care to avoid cutting or pinching the seals and O-rings during insertion. 6. Thread the cylinder head into the bore of the cylinder body, and torque securely with a spanner wrench. 7. Retract the piston rod and install port plugs to prevent contamination of the hydraulic system with dirt.

11.2.9.5 Installation
Cylinder is installed as a part of installing the back braces. Refer to Subtopic 11.2.8.8

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

-11.26-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Mast

11.2.10 Mast Lock Pin 19T6502D3 And Cylinder R51992D2

Figure 11-13: Mast Lock Pin Cylinder Installation

The mast lock cylinders may removed from the drill with the mast either raised or lowered. The lock pins may be removed and replaced with the mast vertical but only one at a time. The mast must be locked in the vertical position with the back braces before starting the removal procedure.

11.2.10.1 Removal
Refer to Figure 11-13 and proceed as follows: 1. Check to be sure that the mast back brace locking collars are in locked position and the other lock pin is engaged.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -11.27Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

Mast

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

WARNING

Inadvertent operation of the blasthole drill during maintenance on the machine could cause severe bodily injury and/or death. Lock out and tag out the drill operating controls to prevent accidental operation.
2. Lock out and tag out the drill operator controls to prevent inadvertent startup during maintenance procedures.

WARNING

Hot hydraulic oil under pressure can spray and burn with extreme force and volume causing injury or death. Use lockout and tagout procedures to guard against inadvertent hydraulic system or machine startup during service or maintenance. Allow the hydraulic system to cool prior to any maintenance or repair. Slowly release pressure or vent circuits before disconnecting hydraulic lines. Wear appropriate face and body protective devices while carefully loosening any connection or fitting.
3. Tag and disconnect the hydraulic hoses and fittings from the mast lock cylinders. Cap and/or plug all hoses and cylinder ports to prevent contamination of the hydraulic system. Refer to Appendix B, General Hydraulic System Maintenance, for information on hydraulic connections. Plug the cylinder ports tightly to keep the cylinder rod from extending or retracting during transport off the drill.

WARNING

Some blasthole drill components are extremely heavy. Dropping or mishandling of these parts can cause severe personal injury or death, and damage to the equipment. Always support heavy components using a suitable hoist or other means for removal, disassembly, assembly and installation. Provide appropriate support for any components which are not supported by the machinery during any maintenance. 4. Remove the cotter pins and push the end bar and cylinder pins from the ends of the cylinder(s) 5. If a locking pin is to be replaced, drive it out and replace immediately to maintain the locked condition.

11.2.10.2 Disassembly
Refer to Figure 11-13 and proceed as follows: 1. Extend piston rod to provide clearance for a spanner wrench. 2. Clamp the cylinder body in a vise and loosen the cylinder head with a spanner wrench. 3. Unscrew the cylinder head until the threads become disengaged from the cylinder body, then remove the piston/piston rod, bearing retainer and cylinder head assemblies from the cylinder body. 4. Remove the locknut from the piston rod. Then remove the U-cup retainers, O-rings (07), and U-cups (06) and piston bearing. Note the orientation of these components for assembly. Discard all seal parts. 5. Remove the bearing/seal retainer and cylinder head assembly from the piston rod.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

-11.28-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Mast

6. Remove O-ring (05), backup ring (04), rod bearings, and packing set (03) from the bearing/seal retainer. Discard all seal parts. 7. Remove O-ring (02) and rod wiper (01) from the cylinder head.

11.2.10.3 Cleaning, Inspection, and Repair


Clean and inspect all cylinder components in accordance with the general cleaning and inspection procedures described in Appendix A of this manual. After cleaning and inspection, all parts must be covered with a light film of oil and protected from dirt and moisture. Cylinder repair consists of the replacement of wipers, seals, and all worn or damaged components. See the LinkOne electronic parts manual for component identification.

11.2.10.4 Assembly
Refer to Figure 10- 11 and proceed as follows: 1. Lubricate and install O-ring (02) and rod wiper (01) on the cylinder head. 2. Lubricate and install packing set (03) and rod bearings in the bearing/seal retainer. 3. Lubricate and install O-ring (05) and backup ring (04) on the bearing retainer.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -11.29Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

Mast

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Figure 11-14: Mast Lock Cylinder

4. Install the cylinder head and bearing/seal retainer assemblies on the piston rod. 5. Lubricate and install the U-cup retainers, O-rings (07), piston bearing and U-cups (06) on the piston rod. Be sure that the orientation of these parts is correct. 6. Install the locknut on the piston rod and torque securely. 7. Lubricate the bore of cylinder body with hydraulic oil, and insert the piston cylinder head assembly. Take care to avoid cutting or pinching the seals and O-rings during insertion. 8. Thread the cylinder head into the bore of the cylinder body, and torque securely with a spanner wrench. 9. Retract the piston rod, and install port plugs to prevent contamination of the hydraulic system with dirt.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

-11.30-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Mast

11.2.10.5 Installation
Refer to Figure 10-10 and proceed as follows:

WARNING

Inadvertent operation of the blasthole drill during maintenance on the machine could cause severe bodily injury and/or death. Lock out and tag out the drill operating controls to prevent accidental operation.
1. Lock out and tag out the drill operator controls to prevent inadvertent startup during maintenance procedures.

WARNING

Some blasthole drill components are extremely heavy. Dropping or mishandling of these parts can cause severe personal injury or death, and damage to the equipment. Always support heavy components using a suitable hoist or other means for removal, disassembly, assembly and installation. Provide appropriate support for any components which are not supported by the machinery during any maintenance.
2. Position the cylinders in the guide plates and lock pins. 3. Install the cylinder and end bar pins and the cotter pins to secure the ends of the cylinder(s). 4. Install the hydraulic hose assemblies to the cylinder ports in accord with the identification tags. 5. Operate the mast lock cylinders until full hydraulic pressure is achieved. This will ensure that the air has been purged from the system. 6. Check operation of the mast lock indicating lamps. 7. If the lock pins are in position and the lamps are illuminated, continue with operation or shutdown as desired.

11.2.11 Mast Raise/Lower Cylinder R6268D1


The mast is raised and lowered by two large-bore, long-stroke hydraulic cylinders. The cylinder rod end is mounted with a clevis-and-pin joint to the mast. The cylinder head end is clevis-and-pin-mounted to brackets on the drill main deck.

11.2.11.1 Removal
The mast raise/lower hydraulic cylinders must be removed from the drill to service the seals and rod wipers. The mast must be locked in the vertical position with the back braces, also in locked position, before starting the removal procedure. To remove the cylinders, Refer to Figure 11-15 and proceed as follows:

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -11.31Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

Mast

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

1. Check to be sure that the mast locking pins and the back brace locking collars are in locked position.

Figure 11-15: Mast Raise/Lower Cylinder Installation

WARNING

Inadvertent operation of the blasthole drill during maintenance on the machine could cause severe bodily injury and/or death. Lock out and tag out the drill operating controls to prevent accidental operation.
2. Lock out and tag out the drill operator controls to prevent inadvertent startup during maintenance procedures.

WARNING

Hot hydraulic oil under pressure can spray and burn with extreme force and volume causing injury or death. Use lockout and tagout procedures to guard against inadvertent hydraulic system or machine startup during service or maintenance. Allow the hydraulic system to cool prior to any maintenance or repair. Slowly release pressure or vent circuits before disconnecting hydraulic lines. Wear appropriate face and body protective devices while carefully loosening any connection or fitting.
3. Tag and disconnect the hydraulic hoses and fittings from the mast raise/lower cylinders. Cap and/or plug all hoses and cylinder ports to prevent contamination of the hydraulic system. Refer to Appendix B, General Hydraulic System Maintenance, for information on the hydraulic connections. Plug the cylinder ports tightly to keep the cylinder rod from extending or retracting during transport off the drill.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

-11.32-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Mast

WARNING

Some blasthole drill components are extremely heavy. Dropping or mishandling of these parts can cause severe personal injury or death, and damage to the equipment. Always support heavy components using a suitable hoist or other means for removal, disassembly, assembly, and installation. Provide appropriate support for any components which are not supported by the machinery during any maintenance.
4. Support the rod end (top) of the cylinder with a suitable hoist. 5. Remove the two capscrews, lockwashers, and retainer bar from each end of the pin that fastens the rod end of the cylinder to the mast, then drive out the pin. 6. Remove the pin from the head end clevis and mounting bracket, and lift the cylinder free of the bracket. 7. Move the cylinder to a clean work area for disassembly.

11.2.11.2 Disassembly
Refer to Figure 11-16 and proceed as follows: 1. Disconnect and remove tube (04). Remove adapters (03 and 05): 2. Remove screws (02) and counterbalance valve (01). 3. Extend piston rod to make clearance for spanner wrench.

CAUTION
Do not clamp on the body diameter. Damage to the cylinder could result.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -11.33Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

Mast

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

4. Secure the fixed end of the cylinder in a suitable vise or fixture.

Figure 11-16: Mast Raise/Lower Cylinder

5. Using a spanner wrench, unscrew retainer (03) from barrel (12). Pull the entire piston rod assembly from the body. 6. Remove bearings (07) and seal (08) from the piston. Unscrew the piston from the piston rod. Remove O-ring (16) from the piston rod and discard. 7. Remove O-ring (10) and backup ring (1 1) from the cylinder head. Discard all seal parts. 8. Slide the cylinder head and retainer with rod bearing (09), seal (12), O-rings (13 and 14) and wiper (15) from the piston rod. Remove and discard all seal parts.

11.2.11.3 Cleaning, Inspection and Repair


Clean and inspect the cylinder as described in Appendix A. Repair of the mast cylinder is limited to replacement of the rod wipers, O-rings, bearings and seals. Refer to the LinkOne electronic parts manual for component identification.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

-11.34-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Mast

11.2.11.4 Assembly
Refer to Figure 11-16 and proceed as follows: 1. Lubricate and install O-ring (14) on the retainer. Slide assembled retainer onto the piston rod. 2. Lubricate and install rod bearing (09), seal (12), O-rings (13 and 14) and wiper (15) in the cylinder head. Slide the assembled cylinder on the piston rod. 3. Lubricate and install O-ring (10) and backup ring (1 1) on the cylinder head. 4. Lubricate and install O-ring (16) on the piston rod. Screw the piston onto the piston rod. 5. Lubricate and install bearings (07) and seal (08) on the piston. 6. Lubricate the bore of cylinder body with hydraulic oil, and insert the piston/cylinder head assembly. Take care to avoid cutting or pinching the seals and O-rings during insertion. 7. Thread the retainer into the bore of the cylinder body and torque securely with a spanner wrench. 8. Attach counterbalance valve (01) to he cylinder with screws (02). 9. Retract the piston rod and install port plugs to prevent contamination of the hydraulic system with dirt. 10. Install adapters (03 and 05). Connect tube (04).

11.2.11.5 Installation
Refer to Figure 11-15 and proceed as follows:

WARNING

Inadvertent operation of the blasthole drill during maintenance on the machine could cause severe bodily injury and/or death. Lock out and tag out the drill operating controls to prevent accidental operation.
1. Lock out and tag out the drill operator controls to prevent inadvertent startup during maintenance procedures.

WARNING

Some blasthole drill components are extremely heavy. Dropping or mishandling of these parts can cause severe personal injury or death, and damage to the equipment. Always support heavy components using a suitable hoist or other means for removal, disassembly, assembly, and installation. Provide appropriate support for any components which are not supported by the machinery during any maintenance.
2. Support the rod end (top) of the cylinder with a suitable hoist, and lift the cylinder into mounting position on the drill deck. 3. Install the head end clevis to the mounting bracket on the drill deck, while supporting the cylinder directly above the bracket. Do not apply side force with the hoist to avoid damaging the cylinder or mounting bracket.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -11.35Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

Mast

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

4. While continuing to support the top end of the cylinder with the hoist, swing the top of the cylinder toward the mast. Adjust the extension of the cylinder until the rod mounting hole is aligned with the mounting bracket on the mast. 5. Insert the pin through the mast bracket and cylinder, and lock the pin in position with the pin retainer bars, capscrews, and lockwashers. 6. Remove the hoist from the top of the cylinder. 7. Install the hydraulic hose assemblies to the cylinder ports in accordance with the identification tags. 8. Before lowering the mast, operate the mast raise/lower cylinder several times, holding the valve in the raise and lower positions until full hydraulic pressure is achieved. This will ensure that the air has been purged from the system.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

-11.36-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Mast

11.2.12 Mast Bottom Plate R11834D2


S

LEGEND 01. Retainer 02. Lock Washer 03. Hex Head Cap Screw 04. Grease Fitting 05. Mast Hinge Pin 06. Hex Head Cap Screw 07. Hex Head Cap Screw 08. Flex Lock Nut 09. Boss Drillers Platform

10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19.

Pin Retainer Lock Washer Hex Head Cap Screw Bottom Assembly Plate Door Installation Door Panel Upper Plate Hinge Cotter Pin Drilled Pin

20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29.

Hex Head Cap Screw Lower Arm Hinge Lower Block Hinge Hardened Washer Nut Jam Nut Cotter Pin Drilled Pin Hydraulic Cylinder Rod End

Figure 11-17: Mast Bottom Plate

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -11.37Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

Mast

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

The mast bottom plate is pinned and bolted to the bottom of the lower mast. A drill bushing is welded to the deck plate in line with the drilling centerline. The bushing is fitted with a dust deflector which is secured with four removable T-bolts and a deflector ring. Clean and inspect components as described in Appendix A. Refer to the LinkOne electronic parts manual for component identification. Remove components selectively for repair or replacement. The location and method of attachment is shown in Figure 10-14.

WARNING

Inadvertent operation of the blasthole drill during maintenance on the machine could cause severe bodily injury and/or death. Lockout and tagout the blasthole drill operating controls to prevent accidental operation. 11.2.12.1 Deflector Ring
Refer to Figure 11-17. To remove loosen hex nuts (7), lockwashers (8) and flat washers (9) from the four T-bolts (6) to free the deflector ring (5) from underneath the drill deck plate. Remove dust deflector (3 1). Install in the parts in the reverse order of removal.

WARNING

Some blasthole drill components are extremely heavy. Dropping or mishandling of these parts can cause severe personal injury or death and damage to the equipment. Always support heavy components using suitable hoist or other means for removal, disassembly, assembly and installation. Provide appropriate support for any units which are not supported by the equipment machinery during any maintenance. 11.2.12.2 Adjustable Platform
Refer to Figure 11-17. 1. Support access cover (10) with a suitable hoist. Remove two straight cover pins (12) and hardware, and remove the access cover. 2. Support adjustable work platform (18) with a suitable hoist. Drive two roll pins (14) from each of four platform brace pins (15), withdraw the brace pins, and remove the two braces. Lower platform (1 8). 3. Drive eight roll pins (16) from four platform hinge pins (17), withdraw the brace pins, and remove the platform (18). 4. Install in the parts in the reverse order of removal

11.2.12.3 Mast Hinge Pins


The mast must be lowered to the horizontal position before replacing pivot pins. Support the lower end of the mast with a suitable crane. Replacement parts should be available so that repair can be effected as soon as possible after hinge pin removal.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

-11.38-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Mast

Refer to Figure 11-17.Remove two capscrews (03) and lockwashers (02) to free the retainers (01). Push out the hinge pins (04). Remove the lube fittings (30) from the hinge pins Install in the parts in the reverse order of removal. Lubricate the hinge pins as specified in Subtopic 16.6.1.1.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -11.39Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

Mast

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

11.2.12.4 Bailing Air Components

LEGEND 01. Union 02. Hose Clamp 03. Upper Air Hose 04. Upper Hose Trough 05. Hex Head Capscrew 06. Locknut 07. Nut 08. Hex Head Capscrew

09. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

Tray Bracket Bracket Tray Bracket Bracket Lower Hose Trough Lower Air Hose Standpipe Bracket Bracket Figure 11-18: Mast

19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25.

18. Sheave Bearing Hex Head Capscrew Lockwasher Retainer Shaft Cotter Pin Trademark Plate

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

-11.40-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Mast

The location the bailing air components is shown on Figure 11-18. The hoses are attached to the air pipes with unions and hose clamps. Remove and install to as required to replace any parts that are deteriorated or otherwise damaged.

11.2.12.5 Upper Mast Repair


Under most conditions, the mast need not be removed from the drill either to service the components it supports or to repair its structure. Contact your local P&H MinePro Services representative regarding mast structural repairs and/or physical removal from the drill.

11.3 Troubleshooting
Figure 11-1 provides generic guidelines to aid in troubleshooting problems of the mast and related components.

Problem Winch does not run at rated speed

Probable Cause Winch sheaves are not turning freely

Remedy Inspect winch sheaves for obstruction, binding or damage. Remove any obstruction, lubricate bearings, or replace damaged parts. Leak at brake piston Relief valve should be set to 2200 psi (152 bar). Refer to Section 3, Auxiliary Hydraulic System.. Check mounting of winch. Winch must be level. Refer to installation instructions. Repair winch motor. lnspect O-rings at brake piston. Replace O-rings. Check for leakage between motor adapter and brake housing which indicates O-ring failure. Replace Orings. Remove winch motor and adapter. Clean brake release passage. Check pressure. Brake releases at approximately 600 psi (41 bar). Refer to Section 3, Auxiliary Hydraulic System..

Relief valve set too low

Binding winch drum

Winch motor malfunction Winch will not reverse Leak at brake piston Defective seal at brake release channel

Plugged brake release passage Insufficient hydraulic pressure.

Table 11-1: Mast Troubleshooting

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -11.41Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

Mast

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Problem Oil leakage at winch breather and/ or at brake housing and drum

Probable Cause Damaged seal between drum interior and brake housing

Remedy Replace oil seal. Seal failure may be caused by excessive pressure doe to incorrect hydraulic oil or a restriction in the return line to the tank. Check for deficiencies and correct. Tighten mounting screws Replace O-rings Check wire rope installation. Correct deficiency.

Oil leakage at winch motor flange and adapter

Loose motor mounting Faulty O-rings between adapter and motor flange Wire rope is attached to wrong cable anchor slot Excessive back pressure causes brake to release Damaged brake plates

Winch brake will not hold

Check for obstruction in the return line to tank. Correct deficiency. lnspect brakes. Replace damaged brake plates. Check oil for contamination which will cause failure. Replace oil in system if contaminated. Hydraulic control malfunction Check for foam in oil. Check system for leaks.lnvestigate cause. Correct deficiency.

Hydraulic control malfunction Winch brake vibrates when lowering a load Entrained air in hydraulic oil

Winch brake running hot due to insufficient oil flow

lnvestigate cause. Correct deficiency. Return line oil flow should be approximately 3.5 gpm (13 Ipm) when the winch is reversed.

Damaged over-running clutch Damaged brake plates

Inspect clutch sprags. Repair clutch. Inspect brakes. Replace damaged brake plates. Check oil for contamination which will cause failure. Replace oil in system if contaminated. Replace lamp. Adjust limit switch. Repair sticking switch linkage. Replace faulty limit switch.

Mast anchor pins secure but indicators do not illuminate

Indicator lamp burned out Repair sticking switch linkage.

No power at switch or lamp Table 11-1: Mast Troubleshooting

Investigate. Correct deficiency.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

-11.42-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Mast

Problem Mast bounces during raising or lowering

Probable Cause Air trapped in cylinders

Remedy Bleed air from hydraulic control circuit. Pressurize cylinders at end of stroke and hold at pressure until pressure reaches maximum. Stroke cylinders to full length of stroke.

Faulty counterbalance valve

Replace counterbalance valve. Refer to Section 3, Auxiliary Hydraulic System.. Bleed the circuit and stroke the cylinder(s) full travel. Lubricate the mechanism. Check alignment and repair any deficiencies. Replace failed cylinder

Erratic movement of hydraulic cylinder(s)

Air trapped in cylinder(s) and/or hydraulic circuit Binding mechanism

Hydraulic control circuit malfunction Table 11-1: Mast Troubleshooting

lnvestigate cause of malfunction. Refer to Section 3, Auxiliary Hydraulic System. for information

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -11.43Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

Mast

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 11, Version 00 - 03/06

-11.44-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec11Mast.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Rotary Machinery

Section 12

Rotary Machinery
12.1 Theory of Operation
06

01

07
LEGEND 01. Pulldown Gearcase 02. Pulldown Brake 03. Shipper Shaft 04. Pulldown Motor 05. Pulldown Motor Blower 06. Drive Pinion 07. Roller 08. Idler 09. Rotary Drive Motor 10. Rotary Gearcase

10

09

08
BD0574a01

Figure 12-1: Carriage Assembly

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec12Rotary.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -12.1Section 12, Version 00 - 03/06

Rotary Machinery

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

12.1.1 Rotary Motor 83013-1


There are two rotary motors. The rotary drive motors are variable speed electric motors that are mounted to the top of the rotary gearcase. Each motor is fitted with a pinion to transmit power to the intermediate drive shaft.

12.1.2 Rotary Gear Case R10678F2


Two reversible electric motors are coupled to a double-reduction rotary gearcase (refer to Figure 12-1). The motors are mounted on top of the gearcase. The drive shaft spindle terminates at the drill pipe coupling, which connects to the drill pipe. Internal lubrication is provided by a gear-driven oil pump. Pressurized bit air for the pipe string is connected to the main drive shaft through a rotary seal and piping. The rotary gearcase is mounted to the lower end of the carriage. Hoisting/pulldown components, which provide vertical gearcase motion, are also mounted on the carriage. Refer to Section 14, Hoist/Pulldown Machinery. for information.

12.1.3 Rotary Drill Pipe Coupling R12253F9

Figure 12-2: Rotary Drill Pipe Coupling

The rotary subassembly adapter is a short section of pipe that allows transition with the fine API thread on the rotary head to the coarse BECO thread on the drill pipe. The coarse BECO thread is used in mine drilling applications because it can better withstand the frequent coupling and breaking of pipe without being damaged beyond use. A Duraquest Smoothdrive shock sub is used as an adapter. This shock absorber coupling reduces the severity of rotary and vertical vibrations. These are largely absorbed by the rubber element in the device. The reduction in vibration severity translates into longer bit life and higher penetration rates. In addition, it will compensate for minor drill stem misalignment.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 12, Version 00 - 03/06

-12.2-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec12Rotary.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Rotary Machinery

Reducing the harshness vibrations also has benefits for the blasthole drill. These repeated shocks are often the cause of fatigue cracks in the rotary head, mast and other structural components. Dampening these shocks can reduce the amount of downtime for maintenance and increase the life of the drill and its components.

12.2 Rotary Machinery Maintenance

Figure 12-3: Rotary Machinery

12.2.1 Rotary Motor 83013-1


There are two rotary motors. The rotary drive motors are variable speed electric motors that are mounted to the top of the rotary gearcase. Each motor is fitted with a pinion to transmit power to the intermediate drive shaft.

12.2.1.1 Removal
The rotary carriage should be positioned at deck level to permit convenient access to the rotary gearcase. Support the drive motor during removal using a suitable hoist or other appropriate means.

WARNING

Hazardous voltage can cause burns, injury, or death. Disconnect, lock out, and tag the power source which feeds this device to prevent power from being applied while inspection and repairs are being performed. Before beginning repairs, try the operational controls to verify that the intended power source is disconnected.
1. Disconnect, lock out, and tag the disconnect switch which feeds the machine to prevent power from being applied while service is being performed. 2. Tag and disconnect the wiring to the motors. 3. Remove eight capscrews and lockwashers to free the motor.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec12Rotary.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -12.3Section 12, Version 00 - 03/06

Rotary Machinery

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

WARNING

Dropping or mishandling of heavy drill parts can cause personal injury, or death. Always move heavy components using the auxiliary winch, or other suitable lifting device, and slings for removal and installation. Provide support for components that may release or move during any maintenance.
4. Carefully raise the motor straight up from the gearcase until the pinion clears the intermediate gear to prevent damage to gear teeth. 5. Remove the hex nut and lockwasher from the motor shaft. Pull the pinion off the shaft using a suitable puller. It may be necessary to heat the pinion before removal. 6. Remove the key from the motor shaft. 7. Place the motor in an appropriate repair area.

12.2.1.2 Cleaning, Inspection and Repair


Clean and inspect parts as described in Appendix A of this manual. Repair consists of the replacement of worn or damaged parts. Observe all safety precautions.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 12, Version 00 - 03/06

-12.4-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec12Rotary.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Rotary Machinery

12.2.1.3 Assembly of Motor Pinion

01

02

03

04

LEGEND 01. Motor 02. Pinion

03. Nut 04. Gear

Figure 12-4: Installing Motor Pinion

Refer to Figure 12-4 and proceed as follows: 1. Remove any scoring from the motor pinion bore and the motor shaft. 2. Thoroughly clean the bore of the pinion and the pinion seating surface on the motor shaft using Toluol or Perchloroethylene. Do not use kerosene. 3. Spot the pinion on the shaft by hand to obtain at least a 75% fit. Check the fit with bluing. Remove the pinion. 4. Break all sharp edges on the motor key and keyway with a file to obtain approximately 0.4 mm (1/64") radius at each edge. 5. Install the key in the motor shaft to obtain a 75% fit. Check the fit with bluing.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec12Rotary.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -12.5Section 12, Version 00 - 03/06

Rotary Machinery

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

6. Try the pinion on the shaft to be sure it does not bind on the key. Rework the key if binding is evident. 7. Clean the pinion and shaft again. 8. Place the pinion on the shaft and snap it into position by hand. Measure the cold position of the pinion using a micrometer depth gauge. Mark the places where the depth gauge was resting so that measurements can be made from the same positions after the pinion has been mounted.

CAUTION
Excessive heat can damage the pinion. The pinion must never be heated to a temperature above 374F (190C).
9. Remove the motor pinion from the motor shaft. Heat the pinion in a suitable oven to the temperature specified in Table 12-1
Frame Shaft Diameter Pinion Dimension D K504T 3.000" 2.9935" X 4.75" Shrunk On Pinion Advance .020 to .025" Estimated Temperature Difference C 70 F 126

Table 12-1: Pinion Mounting Data (refer also to Figure 12-5)

"X"

"D" .0015"

Figure 12-5: Pinion Dimensions

10. If the pinion is heated in oil, the bore must be thoroughly cleaned before mounting. The use of an oven is recommended to avoid the cleaning step. 11. Pinion temperature is indicated as a temperature difference between the motor shaft and pinion. This temperature is estimated only, and can be adjusted to maintain the specified advance. Heat the pinion in the oven until the temperature is uniform at the required number of degrees above the shaft temperature. For example: if the shaft temperature is 25C (78F) and the estimated difference is 125C (225F), heat the pinion to 150C (302F) for mounting.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 12, Version 00 - 03/06

-12.6-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec12Rotary.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Rotary Machinery

12. A quick accurate method must be provided for measuring pinion temperature and the shaft before mounting the pinion. This can best be done with a hand pyrometer. When a hand pyrometer is not available, a celsius thermometer can be used by placing putty over the thermometer to hold it against the pinion. Heat the pinion to a few degrees above the desired temperature before removing the pinion from the oven. Wait until the pinion has cooled to the desired temperature, remove the thermometer, and quickly mount the pinion as described in the following steps. A. After assuring that the pinion bore is clean, quickly mount the hot pinion on the motor shaft. When the pinion is nearly engaged with the taper fit (but not in contact), snap it forcibly into place with a quick push. It is important that the pinion be instantly snapped into position before it has cooled appreciably; otherwise the pinion will freeze to the shaft and cannot be adjusted further. B. Check the hot, or shrunk-on, position of the pinion on the shaft using a micrometer depth gauge. The actual advance is the difference between the depth gauge readings at the hot and cold positions. To control stresses in the pinion, the advance must be within the limits specified in Table 12-1. C. If the advance is not within limits, the pinion must be pulled and remounted. D. Assemble the lockwasher and hex nut on the motor shaft, tighten firmly, and then lock.

12.2.1.4 Motor Installation


. Refer to Figure 12-4 and proceed as follows: 1. Immediately before installation, thoroughly clean the mounting surfaces on the motor and gearcase with Perchloroethylene or Toluol. Keep dust off the surfaces. 2. Raise the motor with the winch and position it over the gearcase. Be sure that the motor duct is correctly positioned so it will mate with the blower duct when installed. 3. Apply a continuous, thin coat of non-hardening gasket sealer (Permatex No. 2 or equivalent) to the mounting surface of the gearcase and around the eight bolt holes. 4. Without allowing extra setting up time for the sealer, mount the motor without damaging the sealer surface. 5. Carefully lower the motor straight down into the gearcase so the pinion engages the intermediate gear without damage. 6. Apply a no gall thread lubricant to the entire thread and bearing surfaces of all eight mounting capscrews. Remove excess lubricant. 7. Install the capscrews and the flanged lockwashers. 8. Torque the capscrews in stages to between 678 and 780 Nm (500 and 575 ft-lbs) using a tightening pattern.

NOTICE
Capscrews must be Grade 5 or better.
9. If any capscrews will not accept a torque wrench due to mechanical interference, use the following method: A. Snug all capscrews to approximately the same initial torque, using a hand wrench.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec12Rotary.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -12.7Section 12, Version 00 - 03/06

Rotary Machinery

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

B. Using a tightening pattern in several stages of tightening for all the accessible capscrews, torque to the specified torque (preceding Step 8). Record how far the capscrews turn from the initial torque. C. Using a hand wrench, tighten the remaining capscrews the same number of turns. D. Retorque the original capscrews that were tightened down with a torque wrench. E. Tighten the remaining capscrews the same amount. 10. Connect the electrical wiring to the rotary drive motor. 11. Check and fill the rotary gearcase to the required lubrication level. Refer to Subtopic 16.4.1.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 12, Version 00 - 03/06

-12.8-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec12Rotary.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Rotary Machinery

12.2.2 Rotary Gear Case R10678F2

Figure 12-6: Rotary Gearcase

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec12Rotary.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -12.9Section 12, Version 00 - 03/06

Rotary Machinery

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

LEGEND 01.Lubrication Pump Gear 02. Snap Ring 03. Lubrication Pump Mounting 04. Hex Head Capscrew 05. Lock Washer 06. Plain Washer 07. Shoulder Bolt 08. Self-Locking Nut 09. Motor Pinion 10. Seal Retainer 11. Seal Retainer Gasket 12. Tapered Bearing 13. Spacer 14. Lock Washer 15. Take Up Nut 16. O-ring 17. Seal 18. Breather 19. Pipe Coupling 20. Pipe Nipple 21. Hose Assembly 22. JEC Male Pipe Elbow 23. Hose Assembly 24. Straight Fitting 25. Close Nipple 26. Hose Assembly 27. JIC Male Pipe Elbow 28. Hose Assembly 29. JIC Male Pipe Adapter 30. Fitting 31. Male Cross 32. Rotary Gear Case 33. Tapered Bearing 34. Snap Ring 35. First Intermediate Gear 36. Spacer 37. Intermediate Pinion 38. Tapered Bearing 39. Shim

40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. 61. 62. 63. 64. 65. 66. 67. 68. 69. 70. 71. 72. 73. 74. 75. 76. 77. 78.

Shim Shim O-ring Pump Housing Cover Gasket Cover Drain Cock Socket Head Capscrew Lock Washer Drill Head Capscrew Lock Wire Magnetic Plug Seal Retainer Seal Carrier Grease Fitting Seal Seal Spacer Relief Fitting Drill Head Capscrew Main Rotary Shaft Tapered Bearing Spacer Fitting Magnetic Plug Main Gear Pipe Bushing Close Nipple Drain Cock Cover Gasket Gear Case Cover Drill Head Capscrew Inspection Cover Inspection Cover Gasket Socket Head Capscrew Lubrication Pump Key O-ring Socket Head Capscrew Straight Fitting

Figure 12-7: Legend for Figure 12-6

The gearcase assembly consists of gear-driven main and intermediate drive shafts, main-gear driven oil pump for internal lubrication, bit air coupling and tubing, and gearcase housing with drive motor mounts, access covers, and breather. The drive shafts are supported in tapered roller bearings. The main drive shaft is bored so that bit air entering the shaft at the top flows through to the drill pipe coupling and drill pipe. It should seldom, if ever, be necessary to remove the entire rotary gearcase assembly. All adjustments, service, and repair of components can be accomplished in the field, except in the event of extreme damage to internal parts.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 12, Version 00 - 03/06

-12.10-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec12Rotary.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Rotary Machinery

12.2.3 Bit Air Components

LEGEND 01. Air Pipe 02. Hose Clamp 03. Air Hose 04. Self-Locking Nut 05. Stud 06. Housing Cover 07. Pipe Coupling

08. 09. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

Air Swivel Special Flange O-ring Take Up Nut Lock Wire, Lock Drill Head Capscrew Swivel Housing

Figure 12-8: Bit Air Components

The bit air components consist of a rotary air pipe with seals, swivel housing, pipe joint, and air pipe with seals and related hardware. These components are mounted above the main drive shaft on the gearcase.

12.2.3.1 Removal And Disassembly


The rotary machinery carriage should be positioned at deck level to permit convenient access to the gearcase assembly. Refer to Figure 12-8 and proceed as follows:

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec12Rotary.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -12.11Section 12, Version 00 - 03/06

Rotary Machinery

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

WARNING

Inadvertent operation of the drill during service, inspection, or maintenance on the machine can cause severe bodily injury, or death. Use lockout and tagout procedures to prevent accidental operation of the drill.
1. Shut down the drill. Lock out and tag the disconnects that supply electrical power to prevent inadvertent movement of the drill during inspection, service, or maintenance. 2. Disconnect and remove the flexible pipe joint (03) at the air pipe (01) and remove clamps (02) as required. 3. Remove air pipe (01) and pipe coupling (07) from the air swivel (08). 4. Disconnect lube hoses and related hardware (refer to inset A on Figure 12-6). If necessary, tie up the lower lube hose to prevent oil from draining from the gearcase. Remove parts as required. 5. Remove lockwire (12) and capscrews (13) that attach swivel housing (14) to the gearcase. Remove housing. This will expose the main drive shaft adjustment components and seals.

12.2.3.2 Cleaning, Inspection And Repair


Clean and inspect parts as described in Appendix A of this manual. Observe all safety precautions. Replace all worn or damaged parts. Refer to the LinkOne electronic parts manual for parts identification.

12.2.3.3 Assembly And Installation


Install parts in the reverse order of removal. Refer to Figures 12-6, and 12-8. A. Position the swivel housing (14) on the gearcase so that the lube holes in the housing and in the seal retainer are aligned. This is necessary to permit proper lube venting. Refer to Figure 12-9.

BD0536a01

01

LEGEND 01. Housing

Figure 12-9: Swivel Housing and Air Pipe

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 12, Version 00 - 03/06

-12.12-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec12Rotary.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Rotary Machinery

12.2.4 Oil Pump and Lines

BD0633a01

Figure 12-10: Oil Pump Arrangement

The oil pump circulates lubricating oil to the gearing through hoses and fittings to both sides of the gearcase. The pump is mounted behind the front covers on a bracket that is attached to the larger front cover. The main drive gear meshes with the oil pump gear; meshing is adjustable. Oil flows through external hoses to fittings on top of the gearcase.

12.2.5 Removal And Disassembly


The rotary machinery carriage should be positioned at deck level to permit convenient access to the gearcase assembly. Refer Figure 12-10 (see also Figure 12-6) and proceed as follows:

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec12Rotary.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -12.13Section 12, Version 00 - 03/06

Rotary Machinery

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

WARNING

Inadvertent operation of the drill during service, inspection, or maintenance on the machine can cause severe bodily injury, or death. Use lockout and tagout procedures to prevent accidental operation of the drill. Determine and provide support for components which may release or move during any maintenance. Lock out and tag the disconnects that supply electrical power to the drill to prevent inadvertent movement of the machinery during inspection, service, or maintenance.
1. Shut down the drill. Lock out and tag the disconnects that supply electrical power to the drill, to prevent inadvertent movement of the machinery during inspection, service, or maintenance. 2. Drain the oil from the rotary gearcase. 3. Disconnect the external hoses at the fittings and indicator on the gearcase assembly. 4. Remove the lockwire and capscrews to detach the small cover and its gasket, and gain access to the oil pump. 5. Disconnect the hose from the gearcase cover bulkhead fitting to the pump flange. 6. Remove capscrews and lockwire to detach the large cover with attached pump, mount, and cover gasket. 7. Remove the retaining ring from the oil pump shaft. Pull the pump gear up off the pump shaft. The shaft is keyed. 8. Remove socket head screws and lockwashers to detach the flange from the pump. 9. Remove two socket head screws and lockwashers to detach the pump from the mount. 10. Remove the capscrew and lockwasher from the slot in the pump mount. 11. Remove the capscrew and hex nut to detach the pump mount from the cover. 12. Remove fittings from the pump and case as required.

12.2.5.1 Cleaning, Inspection and Repair


Clean and inspect parts as described in Appendix A of this manual. Observe all safety precautions. Replace all worn or damaged parts. Refer to the LinkOne electronic parts manual for parts identification.

12.2.5.2 Assembly and Installation


Refer to Figures 12-6, and 12-10 and proceed as follows:

WARNING

Inadvertent operation of the drill during service, inspection, or maintenance on the machine can cause severe bodily injury, or death. Use lockout and tagout procedures to prevent inadvertent operation of the drill.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 12, Version 00 - 03/06

-12.14-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec12Rotary.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Rotary Machinery

1. Lock out and tag the disconnects that supply electrical power to the drill to prevent inadvertent movement of the machinery during inspection, service, or maintenance. 2. Install the fittings into the pump and case. 3. Install the capscrew and hex nut to attach the pump mount to the large cover. Install the capscrew and lockwasher through the cover bracket and into the pump mount. Do not tighten at this time. 4. Attach the flange to the pump with four socket head screws and lockwashers. 5. Attach the oil pump with the flange to the pump mount with two socket head screws and lockwashers. 6. Push the pump gear onto the keyed pump shaft. Install the snap ring into the groove in the oil pump shaft to secure the gear. 7. Position the large cover with attached pump and cover gasket on the gearcase. Apply a thin coat of sealant (GE RTV-102 or Permatex No. 2) to the gasket and mounting surfaces. Install capscrews with lockwire to secure. 8. Connect the hose from the gearcase bulkhead fitting to the pump flange. 9. Adjust the drive gear to pump gear mesh. Refer to the topic, Adjustment, below. 10. If removed, screw the indicator into the elbow. 11. Connect the hoses at the fittings on the gearcase assembly. 12. Apply a thin coat of sealant (GE RTV-102 or Permatex No. 2) to the small cover, gasket, and mounting surfaces. Install the small cover and gasket with twelve capscrews. Apply lockwire to the capscrews. 13. Check hose connections and fittings to be sure that connections are tight. Tighten loose connections as required.

12.2.5.3 Adjustment
Refer to Figure 12-10 and proceed as follows:

WARNING

Inadvertent operation of the drill during service, inspection, or maintenance on the machine can cause severe bodily injury, or death. Use lockout and tagout procedures to prevent inadvertent operation of the drill.
1. Lock out and tag the disconnects that supply electrical power to the drill to prevent inadvertent movement of the machinery during inspection, service, or maintenance. 2. Remove the lockwire and capscrews to detach the small cover and its gasket, and gain access to the oil pump. 3. Loosen the adjusting capscrew in the slot in the mount. 4. Loosen the pivot capscrew and hex nut slightly

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec12Rotary.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -12.15Section 12, Version 00 - 03/06

Rotary Machinery

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

5. While holding the pump gear against the main drive gear for full tooth engagement without binding, tighten the adjusting capscrew. Then tighten the pivot capscrew and hex nut. 6. Install the small cover and gasket with twelve capscrews and lockwire.

12.2.6 Intermediate Drive


The intermediate shafts and gears are supported on roller bearings. Access is through the bottom of the gearcase and the front cover. Shaft end play should be checked and adjusted anytime that the gearcase is down for other service or repair.

12.2.6.1 Check And Adjust end play


Lower the carriage to a convenient level for access to the gearcase. A minimum of disassembly is required to check and adjust intermediate shaft end play. The procedure is the same for each intermediate shaft. Refer to Figure 12-6 and proceed as follows:

WARNING

Inadvertent operation of the drill during service, cause severe bodily injury, or death. Use lockout and tagout procedures to prevent inadvertent operation of the drill.
1. Disconnect, lock out, and tag the disconnect switch which feeds the machine to prevent power from being applied while service is being performed. 2. Remove the two drain cocks (46) from their covers (45). Allow oil to drain from the gearcase into a suitable container. 3. Remove socket head screws (47) and lockwashers (48) that attach the cover and gasket (44). 4. Remove plug (62). Install a dial indicator so that the spindle contacts the upper end of the intermediate shaft through the plug hole. Zero the indicator. 5. Apply force to the bottom of the intermediate shaft and check the indicator reading. Intermediate shaft end play should be 0.076 to 0.127 mm (0.003 to 0.005"). 6. If end play is not within tolerance, remove lockwire (50) and capscrews (49) which attach the bearing housing. Remove housing (43), O-ring (42), and shims (39, 40 and 41).

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 12, Version 00 - 03/06

-12.16-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec12Rotary.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Rotary Machinery

7. Adjust for correct end play using existing shims and shims from the available shim pack. Refer to Figure 11-12 for a sectional view of installation.

03 02

04

05

06

01

14 13

12 11
BD0538a01

10
LEGEND 01. Motor Pinion 02. Drive Motor 03. Intermediate Gear 04. Spacer 05. Intermediate Shaft 06. Main Drive Gear 07. Snap Ring

09

08 07

08. Socket Head Screws and Lockwashers 09. Drain Cock 10. Housing with Shims 11. Capscrew with Lockwire 12. O-ring 13. Cover and Gasket 14. Roller Bearing

Figure 12-11: Intermediate Drive Shaft Installation

8. If further work is to be done on the rotary gearcase, shimming can be performed during assembly of the gearcase. Note the thickness of the shim pack. 9. Apply a thin coat of sealant (GE RTV- 102 or Permatex No. 2) to the shims the mounting surface. Reinstall pump housing and shims. Re-check end play. 10. Install cover (45) and gasket (44) with mounting hardware. Install lockwire (50) on capscrews (49) to secure the housing. Apply lockwire to screw heads in pairs similar to the arrangement shown in Figure 12-9. 11. Install drain cock (46).

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec12Rotary.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -12.17Section 12, Version 00 - 03/06

Rotary Machinery

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

12.2.6.2 Removal and Disassembly


The rotary machinery carriage should be positioned at a convenient level to permit access to the gearcase assembly. For drills with two drives the procedure is the same for each. Refer to Figure 12-6 and proceed as follows:

WARNING

Dropping or mishandling of heavy drill parts can cause personal injury, or death. Always move heavy components using the auxiliary winch, or other suitable lifting device, and slings for removal and installation. Provide support for components that may release or move during any maintenance. Inadvertent operation of the drill during service, inspection, or maintenance on the machine can cause severe bodily injury, or death. Use lockout and tagout procedures to prevent inadvertent operation of the drill.
1. Disconnect, lock out and tag the disconnect switch that feeds the machine to prevent power from being applied while service is being performed. 2. Check intermediate shaft end play. Refer to Subtopic 12.2.6.1.

NOTICE
Note the number and size of the shims. This will be helpful information when adjusting shaft end play.
3. Remove the front cover and oil pump. Refer to Subtopic 12.2.4. 4. Remove the drive motor. Refer to Subtopic 12.2.1. 5. Remove snap ring (34) from intermediate shaft (37). 6. Support gear (35). Carefully push the intermediate shaft, with bearings in place, down through spacer (36), the intermediate gear, and gearcase. Bearing (33) may tend to hang up and remain in its seat. To prevent damage to the bearing, do not allow it to fall from the bearing seat. 7. 7. Remove bearings (33 and 38) from the shaft and gearcase. 8. Remove intermediate gear (35) and spacer (36) through the front case opening.

12.2.6.3 Cleaning, Inspection and Repair


Clean and inspect parts as described in Appendix A of this manual. Observe all safety precautions. Replace all worn or damaged parts. Refer to the LinkOne electronic parts manual for parts identification.

12.2.6.4 Assembly and Installation


Refer to Figure 12-6 and proceed as follows: 1. Position intermediate gear (35) in the gearcase above main gear (64), and over the intermediate shaft bore. Support the intermediate gear to prevent binding and damage during installation of the shaft. 2. Install upper bearing (33) and lower bearing (38) on intermediate shaft (37).

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 12, Version 00 - 03/06

-12.18-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec12Rotary.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Rotary Machinery

3. Carefully push the intermediate shaft with bearings in place through the lower shaft bore, spacer (36), and gear (35) so that the upper bearing seats in the upper bearing bore. Be sure that the splines on the shaft and in the gear are aligned to prevent binding and possible damage to the splines. 4. Install retaining ring (34) on the intermediate shaft. 5. Support the intermediate shaft assembly while installing housing (43). 6. Install the shims and adjust end play. Refer toSubtopic 12.2.6.1. 7. Install the oil pump. Refer to Subtopic 12.2.4. 8. Install the drive motor and pinion. Refer to Subtopic 12.2.1. 9. Fill the gearcase with oil. Refer to Subtopic 16.3.1.

12.2.7 Main Drive


The main shaft rotates on roller bearings and is fitted with seals. Provision has been made for adjustment of bearing preload. Refer to the topics, Main Drive Bearing Preload Check, and Main Drive Bearing Preload Adjustment.

12.2.7.1 Removal and Disassembly


The rotary machinery carriage should be positioned at deck level to permit convenient access to the gearcase assembly. Refer to Figure 12-6 and proceed as follows:

WARNING

Dropping or mishandling of heavy drill parts can cause personal injury, or death. Always move heavy components using the auxiliary winch, or other suitable lifting device, and slings for removal and installation. Provide support for components that may release or move during any maintenance.

WARNING

Inadvertent operation of the drill during service, inspection, or maintenance on the machine can cause severe bodily injury, or death. Use lockout and tagout procedures to prevent inadvertent operation of the drill.
1. Lock out and tag the disconnects that supply electrical power to the drill to prevent inadvertent movement of the machinery during inspection, service, or maintenance. 2. Drain the oil from the rotary gearcase. 3. Remove the bit air components on the gearcase. Refer to the topic, Bit Air Components. 4. 4. Remove lock washer (14), take up nut (15), and O Ring (16). 5. Remove retainer (10) and gasket (11). Remove seal (17) from the retainer.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec12Rotary.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -12.19Section 12, Version 00 - 03/06

Rotary Machinery

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

6. Disconnect the lube hose that is connected to the seal carrier (53) on the bottom of the rotary gearcase. Cap the hose to prevent leakage. 7. Remove lockwire (24), capscrews (64) and carrier (54) with retainers (53). 8. If necessary, remove lockwire (50), capscrews (58), retainer (52) and seals (55), and spacer (56), from carrier (53).

CAUTION

The main drive shaft could slip out of the case, causing personal injury or equipment damage. Provide support under the shaft when it is removed to prevent accidental damage. Keep away from shaft during lifting, lowering, or moving.
9. Carefully push the main drive shaft at the top to force the shaft out of the main gear and gearcase. The lower main bearing cone (60) will come out with the shaft (59). 10. Remove main bearing (12) and spacers (13 and 61). 11. Remove main bearing (60). 12. Remove gear (64) through the front opening in the gearcase.

12.2.7.2 Repair
Clean and inspect parts as described in Appendix A of this manual. Observe all safety precautions. Replace all worn or damaged parts. Refer to the LinkOne electronic parts manual for parts identification.

12.2.7.3 Assembly and Installation


Refer to Figure 12-6 and proceed as follows: 1. Place gear (64) into the gearcase through the front opening so that it is aligned with the main shaft bore. 2. Install bearing cup (13) into upper main shaft gearcase bore. 3. Install main bearing (60) and spacer (61) onto main shaft (66). 4. Carefully push the assembled main shaft through the gearcase, main gear (64), spacer (13) and bearing (12) until the lower bearing seats in the gearcase bore. Be sure that the splines on the shaft and in the gear are aligned to prevent binding and possible damage to the splines. Secure the shaft in this position. 5. If necessary, install new seal (17) into retainer (10). The seal spring must face the oil side (downward). 6. Install retainer with seal and gasket (11). 7. Install O-ring (18) and take up nut (15). Torque the take up nut enough to secure the main shaft. Install lockwasher (14). 8. If necessary, install new seals (55) and spacer (56) into carrier (53). The seal springs must face the oil side (upward) with the spacer in between.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 12, Version 00 - 03/06

-12.20-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec12Rotary.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Rotary Machinery

9. Install retainer (52) on carrier (53) with lockwire (50) and capscrews (58). 10. Install assembled carrier and seal unit with lockwire (50) and capscrews (58). 11. Adjust preload in accordance with instructions under Subtopic 12.2.7.5. Be sure O-ring (16) is in position in the bottom side of the take up nut. 12. Install oil pump and lines. Refer to Subtopic 12.2.4. 13. Install the bit air components. Refer to Subtopic 12.2.3. 14. Check gearcase lubrication level and replenish if necessary. Refer to the Lubrication section. 15. If necessary, install the drill coupling components. Refer to Subtopic 12.1.3. 16. Start up and operate the drill to verify proper operation. Inspect for leakage. Correct any deficiencies.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec12Rotary.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -12.21Section 12, Version 00 - 03/06

Rotary Machinery

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

12.2.7.4 Main Drive Bearing Preload Check

01 02

03

04

BD0533b01

LEGEND 01. Rotary Gear Case 02. Dial Indicator

03. Coupling 04. Main Drive Shaft Spindle

Figure 12-12: Checking Main Drive Bearing Preload

The rotary gearcase main bearing preload should be checked every 1000 hours of operation, or 6 months, as a minimum. Refer to Figure 12-12 and proceed as follows: 1. While drilling a hole, stop operation with the rotary gearcase 3 to 4 feet from the drill platform. 2. With the drill pipe weight suspended on the machinery, mount a dial indicator on the main shaft spindle to indicate to the bottom of the gearcase. 3. Apply a 311,360 N (70,000 lb) pulldown force and observe the dial indicator. Any dial movement indicates the need for preload adjustment. No dial movement indicates that preload is correct. 4. Release the pulldown force and remove the dial indicator. 5. Proceed with operation. If necessary, schedule adjustment at the earliest opportunity.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 12, Version 00 - 03/06

-12.22-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec12Rotary.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Rotary Machinery

12.2.7.5 Main Drive Bearing Preload Adjustment


The rotary machinery carriage should be positioned above deck level to permit convenient access to the gearcase assembly. Support the unit so that it is stable during removal and installation of components. Refer to Figure 12-6 and proceed as follows:

WARNING

Inadvertent operation of the drill during service, inspection, or maintenance on the machine can cause severe bodily injury, or death. Use lockout and tagout procedures to prevent accidental operation of the drill.
1. Shut down the drill. Lock out and tag the disconnects that supply electric power to the machine to prevent inadvertent movement of the machinery during inspection, service, or maintenance. 2. Disconnect and remove the bit air components from the gearcase. Refer to Subtopic 12.2.3. 3. Remove lockwasher (14) and remove the lockwasher. 4. Loosen take up nut (15), then Re-tighten to obtain zero main shaft end play. Check with a dial indicator. 5. Tighten take up nut from 9 to 15 beyond 0 end play to obtain 0.08 to 0.13 mm (0.003 to 0.005") preload on the bearings. 6. Hold the position of the take up nut. Apply anti-seize compound to the main shaft threads. Wipe off excess compound, then install lockwasher (14), lock down take up nut (15) and bend a tab on the lockwasher. 7. Install slinger ring (15) and retaining rings 16). 8. Install bit air components that were removed in Step 2. Refer to the topic, Assembly and Installation, under Bit Air Components. 9. Check gearcase lubrication level and replenish if necessary. Refer to the Lubrication section.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec12Rotary.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -12.23Section 12, Version 00 - 03/06

Rotary Machinery

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

12.2.8 Rotary Drill Pipe Coupling R12253F9

01

02

03

04

05

06

04

07

08
BD0571b01

LEGEND 01. Hex Head Cap Screws 02. Lift Ring 03. Pin Connection 04. Hex Head Bolt

05. 06. 07. 08.

Torque Limiter Rubber Element Housing BECO Box Connection

Figure 12-13: Rotary Drill Pipe Coupling

The rotary drill pipe coupling is a Duraquest Smoothdrive unit manufactured to a strict set of design specifications that ensure control over unwanted shock and vibrations, resulting in savings on equipment repair as well as savings on the overall drilling operation. Since the drill pipe coupling is designed to function as a system, all parts and components that are a part of the system are required to ensure proper operation. Additionally, replacements should be made using OEM parts.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 12, Version 00 - 03/06

-12.24-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec12Rotary.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Rotary Machinery

WARNING

Inadvertent movement of the drill during maintenance activities can cause severe bodily injury or death. When it is necessary to operate the machine before making an adjustment, or during an operational inspection, obtain the assistance of a second operator who is thoroughly familiar with the machine. Maintain constant communication and have the operator at the control panel to be sure that nothing is actuated that can be hazardous to you or the machine. 12.2.8.1 Inspection
The rubber element should be checked every 500 hours of operation as follows: 1. Drill down to the point where the rotary coupling is at eye level. Rest the drill bit at the bottom of the hole. 2. Inspect the rubber element. The rubber should maintain its original look and feel. If the rubber appears discolored or deteriorated, or if it feels sticky or gummy, replace the element. 3. Inspect the housing in the area of the torque limiter lugs. If the lugs have peened the edge of the housing, the metal could cut the rubber element. Remove peened metal from the housing using a hand grinder or sander.

12.2.8.2 Removal and Disassembly


The rotary machinery carriage should be positioned at deck level to permit convenient access to the rotary drill coupling. Remove welded straps and disconnect the rotary drive shaft from the rotary coupler. Support the coupling parts during removal of components. Refer to Figure 12-13 and proceed as follows:

WARNING

Inadvertent operation of the drill during service, inspection, or maintenance on the machine can cause severe bodily injury, or death. Use lockout and tagout procedures to prevent accidental operation of the drill.
1. Disconnect, lock out, and tag the disconnect switch that feeds the machine to prevent power from being applied while service is being performed. 2. Remove the lift ring capscrews and remove the lift ring from the rotary coupling. 3. Remove the torque limiter capscrews and discard them. Torque limiter capscrews should not be re-used. 4. Remove the torque limiter. 5. Remove the lower capscrews and discard them. Lower capscrews should not be re-used. 6. Remove the element from the housing. 7. If the body or the BECO box connector require replacement, remove them from the drill string.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec12Rotary.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -12.25Section 12, Version 00 - 03/06

Rotary Machinery

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

12.2.8.3 Cleaning, Inspection and Repair


Clean, inspect, and repair parts as described Appendix A. Observe all safety precautions. Replace all worn or damaged parts. Refer to the LinkOne electronic parts manual for parts identification.

12.2.8.4 Assembly and Installation


Support the coupling parts during installation of the components. Refer to Figure 12-13 and proceed as follows: 1. If the housing or the BECO box connector was removed, replace the housing and/or the BECO box connector onto the drill string. 2. Place the new element into the housing. 3. Use new bolts. Visually inspect bolt threads prior to installation. Threads must be clean and free of damage, and the yellow Nylok patch must be in good condition. 4. Spray bolt threads and threaded holes in the element with a light cote of dry film corrosion preventative and let dry. 5. Apply a small amount of grease to the first two or three threads of the bolt and screw it into the rubber element as far as possible by hand.

CAUTION
Install bolts slowly to minimize heat buildup, which could cause galling of the threads.
6. Using a 1" impact wrench, slowly run the bolts into the element the rest of the way. 7. Torque bolts to 3,000 ft-lbs (4067 Nm). Verify torque after application. Re-check torque after bolts have had a chance to settle.

12.2.9 Gearcase Removal and Installation


The following procedures can be used if it is necessary to remove the entire gearcase. The pipe string must be removed. Proceed as follows:

12.2.9.1 Removal
The rotary carriage positioned to permit convenient access to the gearcase assembly. The unit may be serviced with the mast up or down. Use appropriate support in all cases.

WARNING

Inadvertent operation of the drill during service, inspection, or maintenance on the machine can cause severe bodily injury, or death. Use lockout and tagout procedures to prevent inadvertent operation of the drill.
1. Lock out and tag the disconnects that supply electrical power to the drill to prevent inadvertent movement of the machinery during inspection, service, or maintenance.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 12, Version 00 - 03/06

-12.26-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec12Rotary.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Rotary Machinery

2. Drain the rotary gearcase. 3. Disconnect the bit air components. Refer to Subtopic 12.2.3.

WARNING

Dropping or mishandling of heavy drill parts can cause personal injury, or death. Always move heavy components using the auxiliary winch, or other suitable lifting device, and slings for removal and installation. Provide support for components that may release or move during any maintenance.
4. Remove the drive motors. Refer to Subtopic 12.2.1. 5. Remove the drill pipe coupling. Refer to Subtopic 12.1.3. 6. Disconnect the lube hose that is connected to the seal carrier on the bottom of the rotary gearcase. Cap the hose to prevent leakage. 7. Place jack(s) underneath the rotary gearcase for support, and/ or a hoist from above. 8. Remove the idler pinions and related mounting parts. Refer to Section 14, Hoist/Pulldown Machinery.. 9. Remove the lower guide rollers. Refer to Section 14, Hoist/Pulldown Machinery.. 10. Remove lockwires, capscrews, bolts and nuts to detach the rotary gearcase. 11. If used, lower the jack(s) so that the rotary gearcase clears the carriage legs. Move the rotary gearcase to an appropriate area for repair.

12.2.9.2 Installation

WARNING

Inadvertent operation of the drill during service, inspection, or maintenance on the machine can cause severe bodily injury, or death. Use lockout and tagout procedures to prevent inadvertent operation of the drill.
1. Lock out and tag the disconnects that supply electrical power to the drill to prevent inadvertent movement of the machinery during inspection, service, or maintenance.

WARNING

Dropping or mishandling of heavy drill parts can cause personal injury, or death. Always move heavy components using the auxiliary winch, or other suitable lifting device, and slings for removal and installation. Provide support for components that may release or move during any maintenance.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec12Rotary.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -12.27Section 12, Version 00 - 03/06

Rotary Machinery

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

2. Position rotary gearcase between the carriage legs so that the mounting holes in the case and carriage pads are aligned. 3. Install capscrews, bolts, and nuts. Install lockwire. 4. Install the idler pinions and related mounting parts. Refer to Section 14, Hoist/Pulldown Machinery.. 5. Install the lower guide rollers. Refer to Section 14, Hoist/Pulldown Machinery.. 6. Install the drive motor(s). Refer to Subtopic 12.2.1. 7. Install the drill pipe coupling. Refer to Subtopic 12.1.3. 8. Install the bit air components. Refer to Subtopic 12.2.3. 9. Connect the lube hose to the seal carrier on the bottom of the rotary gearcase. 10. Check and fill gearcase. Refer to Subtopic 16.4.1. 11. Be sure all fasteners and connections, electrical and hydraulic, are secure. 12. Start up and operate the drill to verify proper operation.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 12, Version 00 - 03/06

-12.28-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec12Rotary.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Rotary Machinery

12.3 Troubleshooting
Table 12-2 provides general guidelines to aid in troubleshooting problems of the rotary machinery.
Problem No Rotary Power Probable Cause No voltage to drive motor Remedy Check for tripped circuit breaker in power or control circuits. Investigate cause of power interruption. Refer to Section 15 for troubleshooting of electrical circuits. Repair deficiencies. Faulty drive motor or pinion If motor does not run, inspect rotary motor for signs of overheating and burnout. Refer to Section 15 for troubleshooting of motor. Repair deficiencies. If motor runs, drain gearcase.Remove front cover and inspect for stripped pinion. Repair as required Damaged rotary gearcase Check gearcase oil level and inspect for leakage at seals. Drain gearcase. Remove magnetic plug and inspect for metal particles indicating excessive wear or damage. Remove front cover and inspect internal components for wear and damage. Repair as required. Insufficient Rotary Power Faulty rotary gearcase Drain gearcase. Remove magnetic plug and inspect for metal particles indicating excessive wear. Remove front cover and inspect internal components for binding and damage. Repair as required. Incorrect voltage to drive motor Faulty drive motor Investigate control and power circuits for cause of incorrect voltage and repair any deficiencies. Refer to Section 15 for troubleshooting of electrical system. If motor control and power circuits are functioning properly, inspect rotary motor for evidence of overheating or other damage. Refer to Section 15 for troubleshooting of motor. Repair deficiencies If motor control and power circuits are functioning properly, check gearcase oil level and inspect for leakage at seals.

Faulty rotary gearcase

Table 12-2: Troubleshooting Guide

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec12Rotary.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -12.29Section 12, Version 00 - 03/06

Rotary Machinery

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 12, Version 00 - 03/06

-12.30-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec12Rotary.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

Section 14

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery
14.1 Theory of Operation

02

03

04

05

06

01
LEGEND 01. Pulldown Gearcase 02. Pulldown Brake 03. Shipper Shaft 07 04. Pulldown Motor 05. Pulldown Motor Blower 06. Drive Pinion 07. Roller 08. Idler 09. Rotary Drive Motor 10. Rotary Gearcase

10

09

08
BD0574a01

Figure 14-1: Rotary Carriage Assembly

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec13Pulldown.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -14.1Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

The Hoist/Pulldown drive system is mounted in the Rotary Carriage (refer to Figure 14-1).

14.1.1 Pulldown Motor 83013-1

Figure 14-2: Pulldown Motor

An electric motor is mounted to the upper end of the carriage. It is coupled to a two-reduction transmission. The pulldown motor is cooled by air through an electric motor blower.

14.1.2 Pulldown Motor Blower R37819D2

Figure 14-3:

The pulldown motor is air-cooled by the electric motor blower (2 HP, 380 V, 50 Hz @ 1470 RPM 3.2 F.L.A.) attached to the motor housing.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

-14.2-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec13Pulldown.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

14.1.3 Pulldown Transmission 914J434F1

Figure 14-4: Pulldown Transmission

The electric motor drives a triple-reduction pulldown gearcase (refer to Figure 14-4). A disc-type hydraulic brake is attached to the transmission intermediate shaft to hold the carriage when it is at rest. This is a holding brake only. Dynamic braking is accomplished using the electric motors reversing capabilities. The transmissions output shaft, the shipper shaft, extends out both sides of the pulldown gearcase. On either end of the shipper shaft is a pinion that meshes with racking that is attached to the mast legs. These pinions drive against the racking to move the drill bit and pipe string.

14.1.4 Pulldown Drive Pinions R5544D1

Figure 14-5: Pulldown Drive Pinion

The pulldown drive pinions are mounted to the ends of the shipper shaft, which is driven by the pulldown motor and gearcase. The idler pulldown pinions are mounted on shafts on the rotary gearcase. Grease to lubricate the pulldown pinion bearings and the gear racks is provided by the automatic lubrication system.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec13Pulldown.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -14.3Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

14.1.5 Pulldown Idler Pinions R7560D3

Figure 14-6: Pulldown Idler Pinion

The pulldown idler pinions are mounted to shafts that extend from the sides of the rotary gearcase. Grease to lubricate the idler pinion bearings and the gear racks is provided by the automatic lubrication system. The drive pinions and idler pinions engage the racks welded to the mast verticals.

Figure 14-7: Mast Racking (typical)

Idler pinions do not drive, but engage the racks to provide stability in carriage movement. Guide rollers, mounted to the carriage on the side opposite the pinions, maintain proper carriage tracking.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

-14.4-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec13Pulldown.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

14.1.6 Upper Guide Rollers R54361F3

Figure 14-8: Upper Guide Roller

The upper guide roller mounts to the rotary carriage. It limits the movement of the carriage to maintain the correct engagement between the drive pinion teeth and the mast racking teeth.

14.1.7 Lower Guide Rollers R54362F3

Figure 14-9:

The lower guide roller mounts to the rotary carriage. It limits the movement of the carriage to maintain the correct engagement between the idler pinion teeth and the mast racking teeth.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec13Pulldown.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -14.5Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

14.1.8 Pulldown Brake 15R55D1

Figure 14-10: Pulldown Brake

The hoist/pulldown brake is spring set and hydraulic released. Braking action is provided by a stack of two rotating brake discs and three stationary plates (wear, center, and pressure). The lined brake discs are splined to a hub on the pulldown gearcase intermediate shaft. When the brake is set, powerful springs apply braking force to the pressure plate, holding the pulldown gearcase and preventing it from moving.

14.1.9 Pulldown Resolver Assembly 975N20F1

Figure 14-11: Pulldown Resolver (typical)

The pulldown resolver is attached through a flexible speedometer-type cable linkage to a shaft on the pulldown brake. The resolver itself is mounted on a bracket inside the base. he resolver senses rotation of the pulldown gearcase and signals the PLC, which translates pulldown movement into the corresponding drilling depth.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

-14.6-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec13Pulldown.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

14.2 Pulldown System Maintenance


14.2.1 Pulldown Motor 83013-1

LEGEND 01. Pulldown Gearcase 02. Blower 03. Screw 04. Washer 05. Rain Shield 06. Gasket 07. Screw 08. Blower Base 09. Motor Gasket 10. Screw 11. Motor 12. Motor Support 13. Screw 14. Shim 15. Shim 16. Shim 17. Shim 18. Shim 19. Lock Washer 20. Screw 21. Special Washer 22. Conical Washer 23. Lock Nut 24. Pulldown Base 25. Tapped Block 26. Nut 27. Screw 28. Screw 30. Shim 31. Shim 32. Shim 33. Shim 34. Coupling 35. Screw 36. Motor Support 37. Pipe Cap 38. Nipple 39. Stopcock 40. Screw 41. Dowel 42. Magnetic Drain Plug 43. Coupling Guard 44. Top Guard 45. Front Guard 46. Screw

Figure 14-12: Pulldown Assembly

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec13Pulldown.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -14.7Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

14.2.1.1 Removal
The machinery carriage should be positioned at deck level to permit convenient access and resting on the drill bit, or otherwise supported, to prevent falling. Refer to Figure 14-12 and proceed as follows:

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.

WARNING

Hazardous voltage can cause burns, injury, or death. Disconnect, lock out, and tag the power source which feeds this device to prevent power from being applied while inspection and repairs are being performed. Before beginning repairs, try the operational controls to verify that the intended power source is disconnected.

WARNING

Dropping or mishandling of heavy drill parts can cause severe injury, or death. Always move heavy components using the auxiliary winch, or suitable lifting device, and slings for removal and installation. Determine and provide support for components, which may release or move any during maintenance.
1. Disconnect, lock out, and tag the power source that feeds system to prevent power from being applied while service is being performed. 2. Remove the blower. Refer to Subtopic 14.2.2.1. 3. Tag and disconnect wiring to the pulldown motor. 4. Remove the mounting hardware and disconnect the halves of coupling (34). 5. Refer to Figure 12-5. Remove locknuts (23), conical washers (22), washers (21), and capscrews (35) from the motor flange. 6. Use a lifting device to support motor (11). Remove locknuts (23), conical washers (22), washers (21), and capscrews (13) to detach motor support (12) and motor. Record the thickness and number of shims (14 through 18). Maneuver the motor to clear the flanged support (36), and remove to an appropriate area. 7. Remove capscrews (20), washers (19), and support (12). 8. Remove the nut, bent washer, and key from the end of the motor shaft.

14.2.1.2 Cleaning, Inspection and Repair


Clean and inspect parts as described in Appendix A of this manual. Repair consists of the replacement of worn or damaged parts. Observe all safety precautions.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

-14.8-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec13Pulldown.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

14.2.1.3 Assembly and Installation

02 03

04

01
LEGEND 01. Adjusting Capscrew and Nut 02. 0.19" (4.8 mm) Shaft-to-Shaft Clearance 03. Key, Bent Washer, and Nut are supplied with the motor 04. Key is supplied with the pinion Figure 14-13: Pulldown Motor Alignment

Refer to Figure 14-12 and assemble the pulldown motor components in the reverse order of disassembly. Note the following: 1. On the coupling, bend the tab on the lockwasher to lock the nut.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec13Pulldown.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -14.9Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

2. Using a suitable lifting device, position motor (11), with support (12), over shims (14 through 18) on base (24). Install the same shim stack that was removed. 3. Install the motor mounting hardware. 4. Refer to and align the motor to the transmission within 0.05 mm (0.002") TIR. If necessary, remove or add shims to adjust the vertical position of the motor. Loosen nuts and adjust the capscrews to align the horizontal position of the motor. Tighten the nuts after adjustment. Confirm that the coupling is aligned within 0.05mm (.002") TIR. 5. Install the coupling mounting hardware. 6. Be sure all mounting hardware and electrical connections are tight.

14.2.2 Pulldown Motor Blower R37819D2

LEGEND 01. Blower 02. Wheel 03. Motor

Figure 14-14: Pulldown Motor Blower

14.2.2.1 Removal and Disassembly


The machinery carriage should be positioned at deck level to permit convenient access and resting on the drill bit, or otherwise supported, to prevent falling. The blower can be serviced in place unless complete replacement is required. Proceed as follows:

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

-14.10-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec13Pulldown.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury, or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.

WARNING

Hazardous voltage can cause burns, injury, or death. Disconnect, lock out, and tag the power source that feeds this device to prevent power from being applied while inspection and repairs are being performed. Before beginning repairs, try the operational controls to verify that the intended power source is disconnected.
1. Disconnect, lock out, and tag the power source that feeds the system to prevent power from being applied while service is being performed. 2. Refer to Figure 14-12. Tag and disconnect wiring to the blower motor). 3. Remove locknuts (04), lock screws (05), and shield (06). 4. If necessary, remove lock screws (02) to remove blower (03), gaskets (07 and 09), and base (08). 5. Refer to Figure 14-14. Remove wheel (02) and motor (03).

14.2.2.2 Cleaning, Inspection and Repair


Clean and inspect parts as described in Appendix A of this manual. Repair consists of the replacement of worn or damaged parts. Observe all safety precautions.

14.2.2.3 Assembly and Installation


Assemble the motor blower components in the reverse order of disassembly. Note the following: 1. Be sure that wheel (02, Figure 14-14) is locked and properly positioned on the shaft of motor (03). The wheel should not contact the housing. 2. Be sure all mounting hardware and electrical connections are tight.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec13Pulldown.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -14.11Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

14.2.3 Pulldown Transmission 914J434F1

Figure 14-15: Pulldown Transmission

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

-14.12-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec13Pulldown.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

LEGEND 01. Gearcase 02. Cover 03. Hex Hd Capscrew 04. Dowel 05. Locknut 06. Base 07. O-ring 08. Cover Gasket 09. Inspection Cover 10. Breather Filter 11. Lockwire 12. Drilled Head Capscrew 13. Pipe Nipple 14. Pipe Coupling 15. Breather Filter

16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31.

Gear Shipper Shaft Key Shipper Shaft Snap Ring Gear Key Ball Bearing Spacer Quill Pinion Drilled Hd Capscrew Retaining Ring Seal Seal Lockwire Seal Housing

32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47.

Tapered Bearing Ball Bearing Input Pinion Ball Bearing Spacer Roller Bearing Shim Shim Shim O-ring Seal Housing Seal Lockwire Drilled Hd Capscrew Gear Oil Level Gauge

48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. 58. 59. 60.

Pipe Reducer Countersunk Plug Ball Bearing Seal Seal O-ring Seal Housing Drilled Hd Capscrew Disc Brake Spacer Low Speed Pinion Ball Bearing Shim Shim Shim End Cover

Figure 14-16: Legend for Figure 14-15

The pulldown gearcase assembly is a triple-reduction-type unit. The input pinion is direct-coupled to the pulldown DC drive motor. Power is transmitted from the input pinion to the gear on the quill pinion-gear set, which rotates on its own bearings on the shipper shaft. The quill pinion drives the low-speed gear that is splined to the low-speed pinion. The low-speed pinion drives the main gear that is keyed to the shipper shaft. The pulldown brake is mounted to the low-speed pinion. The pulldown gearcase can be serviced in place providing suitable lifting and handling equipment is available to remove heavy components.

14.2.3.1 Removal
The rotary machinery carriage should be positioned at deck level to permit convenient access to the pulldown gearcase and resting, or supported on the deck. Refer to Figure 14-15 and proceed as follows:

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury, or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.Dropping or mishandling of heavy drill parts can cause severe injury or death. Always move heavy components using the auxiliary winch, or suitable lifting device, and slings for removal and installation. Provide support for components which may release or move any during maintenance.
1. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work. 2. Disconnect coupling (34). Refer to Subtopic 14.2.1. 3. Remove the pulldown brake if desired. Refer to Subtopic 14.2.7.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec13Pulldown.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -14.13Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

4. Remove the pulldown pinions. Refer to Subtopic 14.2.4.

Figure 14-17: Rotary Carriage Components

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

-14.14-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec13Pulldown.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

LEGEND 01. Bearing Housing 02. Angle Support 03. Spreader 04. Hex Nut 05. Cotter Pin 06. Hardened Washer 07. Guide Roller 08. Hex Head Capscrew 09. Locking Compound 10. Conical Lockwasher 11. Retainer 12. Shim, 12GA 13. Shim, 16GA 14. Shim, .020" 15. Bushing 16. Spacer 17. Guide Roller Pin 18. Drilled Shank Capscrew 19. Shaft Retainer 20. Capscrew 21. Tie wire 22. Conical Washer 23. Drive Pinion 24. Socket Head Capscrew 25. Bearing Retainer

26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50.

Shim, .1046" thick Shim, .0598" thick Shim, .020" thick Spherical Bearing Tapered Sleeve Bearing Housing Lock Nut Hardened Washer Hex Nut Angle Support Hex Coupling Bolt Drilled Shank Capscrew Guide Roller Hex Coupling Bolt Snap Ring Bearing Retainer Snap Ring Spherical Bearing Idler Pinion Bearing Spacer Bearing Retainer Idler Pinion Shaft Relief Fitting Bushing Hex Coupling Bolt

51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. 61. 62. 63. 64. 65. 66. 67. 68. 69. 70. 71. 72. 73. 74. 75.

Drilled Head Capscrew Hex Coupling Bolt Drilled Shank Capscrew Guide Roller Pin Retainer Idler Shaft Retainer Motor Rotary Gearcase Washer Drilled Head Capscrew Deflector Bar Deflector Bar Conical Lock Washer Drilled Head Capscrew Tie Wire Tapped Block Resolver Bracket Pulldown Assembly Drilled Shank Capscrew Hex Coupling Bolt Air Pipe Conduit U-Bolt Hex Bolt Moving End Bracket Plain Washer Locking Flange Nut

Figure 14-18: Legend for Figure 14-17

5. Refer to Figure 14-17 and remove the spreader (03) from the mast to allow access to the pulldown machinery. 6. Remove bearing housings (01 and 31) from the mast. 7. Refer to Figure 14-15. Remove locknuts (23), capscrews (40), and conical washers (22) from the pulldown gearcase base. 8. Remove pulldown gearcase assembly (01).

14.2.3.2 Disassembly
The machinery carriage should be resting or supported on the deck to permit convenient access to the pulldown gearcase. Disassembly can be accomplished with the gearcase on the drill.

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury, or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec13Pulldown.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -14.15Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

WARNING

Dropping or mishandling of heavy drill parts can cause severe injury, or death. Always move heavy components using the auxiliary winch, or suitable lifting device, and slings for removal and installation. Provide support for components which may release or move any during maintenance.
Follow general maintenance instructions provided in Appendix A. Refer to Figure 14-15 and proceed as follows: 1. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work. 2. Remove the pulldown brake. Refer to Subtopic 14.2.7. 3. Drain the gearcase. 4. Remove lockwire (41) and capscrews (42). Pull seal housing (39) and shims (36, 37, and 38). 5. Remove capscrews (03) and locknuts (04). Remove cover (02) and gasket (07). 6. Lift the entire shipper shaft (with gears, spacers, and bearings) from gearcase base (06). Remove this unit to an appropriate area for repair. Support the shaft and components on suitable blocking to permit disassembly. Remove parts as required. Pinion (22) and gear (18) are keyed and held together with snap ring (17). 7. Remove lockwire (28) and capscrews (27). Remove end cover (60) and shims (57, 58, and 59). 8. Remove lockwire (12) and capscrews (52). Remove seal housing (51): O-ring (50), and seals (49 and 48). 9. Support gear (43). Push pinion (55), with bearing (56 and 47), from the base. Remove bearings and spacer (54). 10. Remove pinion (55) from gear (43). 11. Remove the coupling halve from input pinion (32). 12. Remove lockwire (28) and capscrews (27). Remove the input pinion seal housing (29), O-ring (30), bearings (31 and 33) with ring (24), and seals (25 and 26). 13. Remove lockwire (12) and capscrews (23). Remove ring (24) and seals (25 and 26). 14. Remove seal housing (29), O-ring (30), and bearings (31 and 33).

14.2.3.3 Cleaning, Inspection and Repair


Clean and inspect parts as described in Appendix A of this manual. Repair consists of the replacement of worn or damaged parts. Observe all safety precautions.

14.2.3.4 Assembly
Assemble parts in the reverse order of disassembly. Refer to Figure 14-15 and note the following: 1. Shim low-speed pinion (55) for 0.13 to 0.25 mm (0.005" to 0.010") axial endplay, using shims (57,58, and 59).

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

-14.16-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec13Pulldown.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

2. Shim shipper shaft (15) for 0.025 to 0.075 mm (0.001" to 0.003") axial preload using shims (36, 37, and 38). 3. When installing seals in housing (29), the lip (spring side) on inner seal (25) must face inward and the lip on outer seal (26) must face outward. Fill the cavity between the seals with grease.

14.2.3.5 lnstallation
Install components in the reverse order of removal. Refer to Figure 14-12 and note the following: 1. Align coupling (34) as described under PULLDOWN MOTOR on page 12-6. 2. Be sure breather/filter (10: Figure 12-10) and stopcock (39, Figure 12-51 are installed properly, 3. Fill the pulldown gearcase with oil.

14.2.4 Pulldown Pinions R5544D1


The pulldown drive pinions are mounted to the ends of the shipper shaft, which is driven by the pulldown motor and gearcase. The idler pulldown pinions are mounted on shafts on the rotary gearcase. Grease to lubricate the pulldown and idler pinion bearings and the gear racks is provided by the automatic lubrication system.

14.2.4.1 Pinion Maintenance


The machinery carriage should be positioned at deck level to permit convenient access to the pulldown pinions, and resting on the drill bit or otherwise supported to prevent falling.

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury, or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.
Refer to Figure 14-17 and proceed as follows: 1. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work. 2. Remove lockwire (08), capscrews (20), lockwashers (22), and drive pinions (23). 3. Remove snap ring (40). 4. Clean, inspect, and repair parts as described in Appendix A. 5. Install pinions in the reverse order of removal.

NOTICE
Be sure to align the indexing marks on the pinions (23) and shipper shaft splines.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec13Pulldown.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -14.17Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

14.2.5 Idler Pinions R7560D3


The idler pinions should be repaired or replaced if the splines are worn excessively, or if rotation is not true. The mast should be lowered to its horizontal position to repair or replace the drive pinions. Refer to Figure 14-17 and proceed as follow:

WARNING

Inadvertent operation of the drill during service, inspection, or maintenance on the machine can cause severe bodily injury, or death. Use lockout and tagout procedures to prevent accidental operation of the drill.
1. Lock out and tag the drill operator controls to prevent inadvertent start-up during maintenance procedures. 2. Remove snap ring (40) and bearing retainer (41) from one idler pinion (44). 3. Remove second snap ring (42) from idler pinion shaft (47), and remove pinion (44) from the shaft. Remove a third snap ring (40), spacer (46), and bearing (43) from pinion (44). 4. Remove capscrews (08), and lockwashers (10) from the rotary gearcase. Remove idler shaft retainer (55) and shims (12, 13 and 14). Record the number of shims used. 5. Withdraw idler shaft (47) from the gearcase. 6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for the other idler pinion. 7. Clean, inspect and repair parts as described in Appendix A. 8. Assemble and install parts in the reverse order of removal. Use shims (12, 13 and 14), as needed, so that the shoulder on idler shaft (47) is tight against the gearcase. 9. Before operating the hoist/pulldown system, initiate a manual lubrication cycle to be sure that the pinions are adequately greased.

14.2.6 Guide Rollers


14.2.6.1 Roller Adjustment

WARNING

Rotary Carriage Rollers must be maintained within specified parameters at all times. Failure to keep rollers properly adjusted could cause the drive and idler pinions to disen-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

-14.18-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec13Pulldown.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

gage from the mast rack, allowing the rotary carriage to free-fall, resulting in severe personal injury or death and substantial property damage.

BD0552a01

Figure 14-19: Roller Adjustment

Refer to Figure 14-19 and proceed as follows: 1. Lower the rotary carriage to the lowest point on the mast. 2. Lower the mast so that the pinion shrouds are resting on the rack shrouds. 3. Remove the four socket head capscrews from the eccentric bushing. 4. Turn the eccentric bushing until a gap of 3mm (.125") is obtained between all of the rollers and the back of the mast chord. 5. Follow steps 1 through 3 for all three remaining roller carriers.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec13Pulldown.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -14.19Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

14.2.6.2 Removal
01 02 06 03 04 05

10

09 08 07

10

09

08

07

06 05 04 03 02 01

LEGEND 01. Cap Screw 02. Washer 03. Shim 04. Shim 05. Shim 06. Retainer 07. Pin 08. Roller Assembly 09. Spacer 10. Bushing
BD0987a01

Figure 14-20: Roller Assembly Removal

Lower the mast so the weight of the carriage is resting on the pinions.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

-14.20-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec13Pulldown.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury, or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.
1. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work. 2. Refer to Figure 14-20 and remove the Guide Roller Assemblies from the rotary carriage as follows: A. Remove capscrews (01) and lockwashers (02) from the rotary gearcase. B. Remove guide roller pin retainer (06) and shims (03, 04, 05). Record the number of shims used. C. Withdraw roller pin (07) with roller assembly (08) from the gearcase. D. Remove spacer (09) and bushing (10). E. Repeat steps A through D for the other guide rollers.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec13Pulldown.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -14.21Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

14.2.6.3 Upper Guide Roller R54361F3 Disassembly


05 06 07 06 07 04

03 05

01 14 12 05 09 03 05

06

11

02 10

08

F7601A

LEGEND 01. Roller Carrier 02. Eccentric Bushing 03. Backup Roller with Bearings 04. Roller Pin 05. Thrust Washer 06. Hex Head Capscrew

07. 08. 09. 10. 11. 12.

Hex Locking Nut Socket Head Capscrew Hex Locking Nut Bumper Washer Grease Fitting

Figure 14-21: Guide Rollers (Upper shown; Lower similar)

Technician Tip
The Guide Roller Assembly must be removed from the rotary carriage (refer to Removal above) before attempting to disassemble the guide roller.
Refer to Figure 14-21 and proceed as follows:

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

-14.22-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec13Pulldown.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

1. Remove nuts (07) and capscrews (06) from roller pins (04). Remove roller pins (04), rollers (03) and thrust washers (05). 2. Remove capscrews (06), washers (11) and bumper (10). 3. Remove capscrews (08) and eccentric bushings (02).

Cleaning, Inspection and Repair


Clean and inspect parts as described in Appendix A. Repair consists of the replacement of worn or damaged parts. Observe all safety precautions.

Assembly
Assemble the rollers in the reverse order of disassembly. Refer to Figure 14-21. 1. Position eccentric bushing (13) so that the eccentric is closest to rollers (03). 2. Install one capscrew (08) and locknut (09) to attach the eccentric bushing until the guide rollers are installed.

Installation
Refer to Figure 14-20 and proceed as follows: 1. Lubricate the guide rollers at installation. 2. Insert idler pin (07) through roller assembly (08), spacer (09) and bushing (10). 3. Mount roller assembly and pin to the mounting thrust washer on the gear case or the bearing housing (refer to Figure 14-17) 4. Re-install shims (03, 04, 05) that were removed during the removal operation and assemble and install retainer (06) using cap screws (01) and washers (02).

14.2.6.4 Lower Guide Roller Assembly R54362F3


The lower carriage roller assemblies are mounted on bearing housings and the rotary gearcase. The clearance between the rollers and mast legs can be adjusted to maintain proper pinion contact with the pulldown racks.

14.2.6.5 Removal
The mast should be positioned in the down or lowered position so the weight of the carriage is resting on the pinions. Refer to Figure 14-17 and proceed as follows:

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury, or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.
1. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec13Pulldown.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -14.23Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

2. Remove capscrews (08) and lockwashers (10) from the rotary gearcase. Remove guide roller pin retainer (54) and shims (12, 13 and 14). Record the number of shims used. 3. Withdraw roller pin (17) with roller assembly (38) from the gearcase. Remove spacer (16) and bushing (15). 4. Repeat preceding steps 2 through 3 for the other guide rollers.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

-14.24-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec13Pulldown.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

14.2.6.6 Disassembly
05 03

06 05 07

01 14 04

12 09

11 06

10

02 13

08

F7602A

LEGEND 01. Roller Carrier 02. Eccentric Bushing 03. Backup Roller with Bearings 04. Roller Pin 05. Thrust Washer 06. Hex Head Capscrew

07. 08. 09. 10. 11. 12.

Hex Locking Nut Socket Head Capscrew Hex Locking Nut Bumper Washer Grease Fitting

Figure 14-22: Upper Carriage Roller Assembly

Technician Tip
The Guide Roller Assembly must be removed from the rotary carriage (refer to Removal above) before attempting to disassemble the guide roller.
Refer to Figure 14-21 and proceed as follows: 1. Remove nuts (07) and capscrews (06) from roller pins (04). Remove roller pins (04), rollers (03) and thrust washers (05).

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec13Pulldown.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -14.25Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

2. Remove capscrews (06), washers (11) and bumper (10). 3. Remove capscrews (08) and eccentric bushings (02).

Cleaning, Inspection and Repair


Clean and inspect parts as described in Appendix A. Repair consists of the replacement of worn or damaged parts. Observe all safety precautions.

Assembly
Assemble the rollers in the reverse order of disassembly. Refer to Figure 14-21. 1. Position eccentric bushing (13) so that the eccentric is closest to rollers (03). 2. Install one capscrew (08) and locknut (09) to attach the eccentric bushing until the guide rollers are installed.

Installation
Refer to Figure 14-17 and proceed as follows: 1. Lubricate the guide rollers at installation. 2. Insert idler pin (14) through each guide roller (07) and thrust washer (13), and mount on gearcase (47) or housing (01 or 22). 3. Assemble and install keeper plate (11) with mounting hardware in the reverse order of removal. Use shims (12) as needed so that there is minimum clearance between the guide roller and thrust washer.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

-14.26-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec13Pulldown.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

14.2.7 Pulldown Brake 15R55D1

LEGEND 01. Pulldown Gearcase 02. Intermediate Shaft 03. Spacer 04. Brake Hub 05. Housing 06. Wear Plate 07. Brake Discs 08. Pressure Plate 09. Tapped Lifting Holes

10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.

Hydraulic Ports (2) Resolver Shaft Cover Ring Piston Spring Drive Plate Shims Center Plate

Figure 14-23: Pulldown Brake

The brake should be inspected for hydraulic leaks and disc contamination every month. Brake wear should also be checked every month.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec13Pulldown.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -14.27Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

14.2.7.1 Inspection
The machinery carriage should be positioned at deck level to permit convenient access to the pulldown brake and resting on the drill bit, or otherwise supported, to prevent falling. Proceed as follows: 1. Inspect the brake and lines for hydraulic leaks and disc contamination. 2. Listen for unusual noise or clatter when the brake is turning (released). This may indicate brake unbalance or excessive wear. 3. Check for heat buildup after the brake has been free-running for a period of time. Excessive heat could indicate insufficient clearance. 4. Visually inspect the area near the brake for friction pad particles, which would indicate a problem.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

-14.28-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec13Pulldown.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

14.2.7.2 Checking Lining Wear

01

B C

02

04
LEGEND 01. Piston 02. Drive Plate 03. Stud Nut 04. Shims

03
A: Brake Set Position B: Brake Released Position C: Piston Stroke

Figure 14-24: Pulldown Brake Wear Check

Lining wear is checked by measuring piston movement. Refer to Figure 14-24 and proceed as follows:

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement or operation can cause serious injury, or death. When necessary to operate the blasthole drill while making an adjustment or performing a check, obtain the assistance of a second person who is thoroughly familiar with the machine. Have the assistant at the control panel to be sure that nothing is actuated that may be hazardous to you or the machine.
1. Lower the carriage to provide convenient access to the pulldown brake. The carriage must be resting on the drill bit, or other suitable support.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec13Pulldown.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -14.29Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

2. With the brake set, measure and record how far the piston protrudes from the drive plate (Dimension A). 3. With the brake released, measure and record how far the piston protrudes from the drive plate (Dimension B). 4. The difference between Dimension A and Dimension B is the piston stroke. If the piston stroke exceeds 6.6 mm (0.260"), proceed as follows: A. Release the brake. B. Back off the stud nuts evenly and in steps until sufficient gap exists between the drive plate and the housing to slide the drive plate back approximately 1.6 mm (1/16"). C. Spread a shim at the split line and remove it by slipping the shim over the drive plate. D. Tighten the stud nuts to93.5 to 108 Nm (70 to 80 ft-lbs). E. Engage the brake. Check for approximate 4 mm (0.16") stroke.

CAUTION
Before removing the second and third shims, remove the brake discs and inspect for equal wear on the lining surfaces. If wear is unequal, interchange the positions of the brake discs within the brake as an attempt to equalize wear. When all shims have been removed and piston travel approaches 6.6 mm (.260"), the brake must be replaced.

SAFETY FIRST
Only qualified technicians should rebuild these brakes. P&H Mining Equipment recommends that brakes be returned to the nearest P&H MinePro Services facility for rebuild.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

-14.30-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec13Pulldown.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

14.2.7.3 Disassembly

LEGEND 01. Hex Nut 02. Lock Pin 03. Rod Bolt 04. Housing 05. Wear Ring 06. Brake Disc 07. Drive Plate 08. Shim 09. Pressure Plate 10. Center Plate 11. Hex Head Screw

12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23.

Lock Washer Cover Socket Head Capscrew Spring Breather Piston O-ring O-ring O-ring Ring Seal Seal

Figure 14-25: Pulldown Brake Exploded View

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec13Pulldown.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -14.31Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

The rotary machinery carriage should be positioned at deck level to permit convenient access to the brake and resting on the drill bit, or otherwise supported, to prevent falling. Disassemble to the extent necessary to make repairs.

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury, or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.

CAUTION

High-pressure oil could cause the free lines to whip or spray hot oil, causing injury. Be sure the hydraulic system is not pressurized before loosening or removing connections.

WARNING

Dropping or mishandling of heavy drill parts may cause personal injury, or death. Always move heavy components using the auxiliary winch, or other suitable lifting device, and slings for removal and installation. Provide support for components that may release or move during any maintenance.
1. Disconnect, lock out, and tag the power source that feeds the system to prevent power from being applied while service is being performed. 2. Remove the setscrew and disconnect the flexible shaft from the end of the resolver shaft. Refer to Figure 1423. 3. Refer to Figure 14-25. Remove cover screws (11), lockwashers (12), and cover (13). 4. Refer to Figure 14-23 Remove the shaft plate screws and resolver shaft. 5. Refer to Figure 14-25. Remove capscrews (14) from piston (16).

NOTICE
Do not remove stud nuts (01) while capscrews (14) are out. This will release brake spring pressure and make assembly more difficult.
6. Pull piston (16) from drive plate (07). Two threaded bores in the piston facilitate piston removal. 7. Remove O-ring (17) and seal (21 and 22) from the piston. Remove O-rings and seals carefully to avoid scratching or marring sealing surfaces, which could cause leakage and brake malfunction. 8. Remove ring (20) and O-rings (18 and 19). 9. Back off hex nuts (01) incrementally and uniformly to release spring pressure. Remove nuts and withdraw drive plate (07) and remove shims (08).

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

-14.32-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec13Pulldown.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

10. Remove pressure plate (09), discs (06), center plate (10) and wear ring (05) from housing (04).

WARNING

Dropping or mishandling of heavy drill parts can cause personal injury, or death. Always move heavy components using the auxiliary winch, or other suitable lifting device, and slings for removal and installation. Provide support for components that may release or move during any maintenance.
To remove the entire assembled brake, remove nuts (01), support the brake with a suitable lifting device, and pull the unit from the pulldown gearcase. Remove lock pins (02).

14.2.7.4 Cleaning, Inspection and Repair


Clean and inspect parts as described in Appendix A of this manual. In particular, inspect brake discs for damaged linings. Inspect plates for gouging of brake surfaces. Repair consists of the replacement of worn or damaged parts. Observe all safety precautions.

14.2.7.5 Assembly
Assemble the brake in the reverse order of disassembly. Note the following: 1. Clean the brake hub splines and brake disc splines. Apply a light coating of hydraulic oil to the splines. Refer to Figure 14-23. 2. Refer to Figure 14-25. Install the same number of shims (08) as removed. If new brake discs (06) have been installed, use three shims. 3. When installing drive plate (07), tighten hex nuts (01) uniformly and in a pattern to compress the brake springs (15). Torque the stud nuts to 93.5 - 108 Nm (70 - 80 ft-lbs). Apply Loctite, or equivalent sealing agent, to the stud nuts.

CAUTION
Do not permit outer O-rings or seals to become pinched when installing the ring and piston. If damaged, the O-rings or seals will not seal properly, causing leakage and malfunction.
4. Before installation, lubricate new O-rings and seals with a light coating of clean hydraulic oil.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec13Pulldown.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -14.33Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

14.2.8 Pulldown Resolver

75Z1252D6

LEGEND 01. Resolver Assembly 02. Hex Head Capscrew 03. Tapped Plate 04. Rubber Shim 05. Resolver Bracket 06. Socket Head Set Screw 07. Hub (welded in place) 08. Drilled Head Capscrew 09. Tie Wire 10. Resolver Clamp

11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21.

Plain Washer Self-Locking Nut Resolver Flexible Shaft Coupling Resolver Shaft Flexible Shaft Cable Insulating Bushing Conduit Insulated Clamp Hex Head Capscrew Self-Locking Nut

Figure 14-26: Pulldown Resolver

14.2.8.1 Removal
The machinery carriage should be positioned so it is resting on the deck. Refer to Figure 14-26 and proceed as follows:

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury, or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

-14.34-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec13Pulldown.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.
Proceed as follows: 1. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work. 2. Remove the hex socket capscrews in coupling (14). 3. Loosen nuts (12), and remove resolver (13). 4. Remove coupling (14) and shaft (15). 5. If cable (16) needs to be replaced, proceed as follows: A. Remove the setscrew in the bushing on the flexible shaft cable at the resolver end. B. Refer to Figure 12-9. Remove the setscrew and disconnect the flexible shaft cable from the brake end. C. Remove setscrew (06) and withdraw cable (16). D. Remove the cable from bushing (17) and conduit (18). E. Remove bushing (17) and conduit (18) if replacement is required. 6. Remove bracket clamp (lo), bracket (05), plate (03), and shim (04) if necessary. 7. Remove related connecting parts for the cable that are on the pulldown brake as required. Refer to PULLDOWN BRAKE on page 12-1.

14.2.9 Cleaning, Inspection and Repair


Clean and inspect parts as described in Appendix A of this manual. Repair consists of the replacement of worn or damaged parts. Observe all safety precautions. 1. Examine the coupling for stretching, bending, and twisting distortion. Replace damaged coupling. 2. Check for continuity across the resolver stator windings S1- S3 (terminals 2 and 5) and S2-S4 (terminals 4 and 6) and rotor winding R1-R2 (terminals 1 and 2) with an ohmmeter. Replace the resolver if there is an open or dead short across any winding.

14.2.10 Assembly and Installation


Assemble and install parts in the reverse order of removal. Refer to Figure 14-26 and note the following: 1. After installing shaft (15) in cable (16), and tightening the cable setscrew, install coupling (14) on shaft (15). 2. Position resolver (13) in clamp (10) so the resolver keyway is in line with the case connector. Slide the resolver into the coupling so there is approximately " (6.4 mm) between the resolver and coupling. Tighten the coupling capscrews to10.8 to 13.6 Nm (8 to 10 ft-lbs) 3. Inspect the coupling to be sure it is not distorted. Apply Loctite, or equivalent sealant, to the coupling capscrews.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec13Pulldown.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -14.35Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

4. Start up the drill and check pulldown operation. Verify the zero setting of the resolver.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

-14.36-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec13Pulldown.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

14.3 Troubleshooting
Problem Erratic Hoist/Pulldown Operation Probable Cause Electrical malfunction Remedy Investigate control and power circuits for cause of incorrect operation. Check operation of brake. Inspect the pulldown gearcase for interference, damaged components or other malfunction. Investigate control and power circuits for cause of incorrect voltage. If motor control and power circuits are functioning properly, inspect motor for evidence of overheating or other damage. Check for tripped circuit breaker in power or control circuits. Investigate cause of power interruption. Check blower operation. Failure could cause motor overheating and shutdown. If motor does not run, inspect rotary motor for signs of overheating and burnout. Check condition on coupling. Check gearcase oil level and inspect magnetic plug for evidence of internal failure. Inspect hydraulic lines and connections to brake. Check hydraulic system. Pinions jammed or damaged Clean any debris or other material from racks. Inspect pinions for damage. Electrical malfunction Investigate control and power circuits for cause of lack of power and repair any deficiencies. Remove shim Replace brake discs Damaged or broken springs Pulldown Brake does not release No hydraulic pressure to brake Replace springs Inspect hydraulic lines for loose connections (leaks) and breaks. Check reservoir oil level. Internal leakage in brake Table 14-1: Troubleshooting Replace brake seals.

Insufficient Hoist/Pulldown Power

Pulldown brake not fully released Mechanical failure of gearcase

Incorrect voltage to drive motor Faulty drive motor

No Hoist/Pulldown Power

No voltage to drive motor

Motor blower inoperative

Faulty drive motor

Broken drive coupling Failure of pulldown gearcase

Hoist/Pulldown Operation Stalls

Pulldown brake does not release

Pulldown Brake does not hold

Worn linings

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec13Pulldown.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -14.37Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

Hoist/Pulldown Machinery

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

-14.38-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec13Pulldown.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Pipe Handling Equipment

Section 14

Pipe Handling Equipment


14.1 Theory of Operation

01

02 10 09 10

08

LEGEND 01. Upper Arm 02. Mast 03. Mast 04. Hydraulic Cylinder 05. Lower Arm 06. Pipe Holder 07. Pipe Rack (retracted) 08. Pipe Wrenches 09. Deck Wrenches 10. Hydraulic Hoses

07

03 06 04

BD0544a01

05

Figure 14-1: Pipe Handling Equipment

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec14Pipes.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -14.1Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

Pipe Handling Equipment

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

14.1.1 Pipe Racks


The pipe rack forms a long vertical cradle to handle a single length of drill pipe. Refer to Figure 14-1. The pipe rack is connected to inside mast members at the top and bottom by swing arms that allow the rack to be lowered from the retracted (stored) position to the drill centerline and vice versa. Movement of the pipe rack is accomplished by extension or retraction of a hydraulic cylinder that is attached between the mast and lower arm. The pipe section is held in the pipe rack by a pipe holder at the bottom and by a swing gate at the top. Two spring-loaded pipe wrenches or pawls in the pipe holder grab the outside surface of the pipe to hold the pipe during disconnection from the rotary head before returning the pipe to its stored position. The upper swing gate is opened or closed by a hydraulic cylinder. Operation of the racks is controlled by the operator through the PLC. Limit switches signal the PLC to indicate operational conditions of the pipe rack; that is, the pipe is in the pipe holder, the rack is retracted, and the gate is closed. The deck wrench units each consist of a housing, a sliding body with spring-loaded pawl, and a hydraulic cylinder that provides clamping power.

14.1.1.1 Left Pipe Rack 100J6766F6


The left pipe rack is a parallelogram-style pipe rack that is 11.3 meters (37 feet) in length. The rack is hydraulically controlled to move inward or outward. A mechanical mechanism is used to lock the drill pipe into place while stored. A hydraulic holdback system prevents the pipe rack from drifting into the drill string area when the drill is operating.

14.1.1.2 Right Pipe Rack R4081F1


The right pipe rack is a parallelogram-style pipe rack that is 8.4 meters (27.5 feet) in length. The rack is hydraulically controlled to move inward or outward. A mechanical mechanism is used to lock the drill pipe into place while stored. A hydraulic holdback system prevents the pipe rack from drifting into the drill string area when the drill is operating.

14.1.2 Deck Wrench GH5007463

Figure 14-2: Deck Wrench

The deck wrench allows the operator to hold the pipe string while tools or pipe sections are being connected or disconnected. It consists of a pair of hydraulically actuated rams mounted on the drilling platform. Each ram is located on opposite sides of the drill hole, just off of centerline.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

-14.2-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec14Pipes.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Pipe Handling Equipment

14.1.3 Breakout Wrench R46448F1

Figure 14-3: Breakout Wrench

The breakout wrench is used to loosen a pipe joint that is tighter than the joint at the rotary coupling. Refer to Figure 14-3. The breakout wrench is permanently mounted to the mast structure, and is operated by a set of hydraulically actuated cylinders. These cylinders operate in conjunction with each other to make the breakout wrench operation smooth and simple. The breakout wrench is stored in the retracted position. The breakout wrench is fitted with inserts for gripping the drill pipe sections. These inserts are interchangeable, based on the drill pipe diameter being handled.

14.2 Pipe Handling Equipment Maintenance

NOTICE
Apply standard torque to fasteners unless otherwise specified. Refer to Appendix A for general mechanical maintenance procedures, and to Appendix B for general hydraulic component maintenance procedures. It is advisable to replace all seals and O-rings whenever hydraulic

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec14Pipes.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -14.3Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

Pipe Handling Equipment

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

components are disassembled. Refer to the LinkOne electronic parts manual for identification of components and service kits.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

-14.4-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec14Pipes.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Pipe Handling Equipment

14.2.1 Pipe Racks


The two pipe racks are identical except for their length. The left-hand pipe rack (100J6766F6) is 11.3 meters (37 ft) long, while the right-hand pipe rack (R4081F1) is 8.4 meters (27.5 ft) in length.

Figure 14-4: Pipe Rack

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec14Pipes.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -14.5Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

Pipe Handling Equipment

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

LEGEND 01. Link Actuator 02. Gate Arm Support 03. Bronze Bushing 04. Upper Arm 05. Upper Pin 06. Retaining Ring 07. Hex Head Capscrew 08. Anchor Block 09. Upper Block 10. Anchor Block Shim 11. Anchor Block Shim 12. Anchor Block Shim 13. Washer 14. Self-Locking Nut 15. Hex Head Capscrew 16. Lock Washer 17. Upper Rack Pin 18. Cylinder Link

19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36.

Flat Bar Grease Fitting Pivot Pin Rod Clevis Limit Switch Limit Switch Arm Gate Limit Switch Bracket Socket Head Capscrew Lock Washer Gate Hydraulic Cylinder Drilled Head Capscrew Tie Wire Cylinder Mount Plate Tapped Block Drill Pipe Rack Hydraulic Cylinder Cylinder Pin Tapped Bar

37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54.

Limit Switch Bracket Hex Head Capscrew Lower Block Lower Pin Retaining Ring Lock Washer Hex Nut Lower Arm Spring Seat Spring Weldment Pin Drilled Head Capscrew Tie Wire Limit Switch Cover Limit Switch Pipe Wrench Pin Hex Nut Socket Head Set Screw

Figure 14-5: Legend for Figure 14-4

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

-14.6-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec14Pipes.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Pipe Handling Equipment

14.2.1.1 Pipe Wrenches and Liners


02 03 02 04

05

06

01 07 01

BD0546a01

07

08

LEGEND 01. Wrench 02. Wrench Pin 03. Setscrew and Nut 04. Wrench Seat

05. 06. 07. 08.

Setscrew Spring Liner Plunger

Figure 14-6: Pipe Wrenches and Liners

Adjustment
Check engagement of the wrenches with pipe to be sure that the wrenches grab when pipe is being disconnected. If not, loosen the locknut and adjust the setscrew at the front of the pot to obtain correct holding action. The setscrew bears against the wrenches to set the closed position of the wrenches. Tighten locknut after adjustment. The pipe wrenches are installed in the pipe holder. The liners are installed in the pipe holder and pipe gate. Refer to the LinkOne electronic part manual for parts information.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec14Pipes.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -14.7Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

Pipe Handling Equipment

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

14.2.1.2 Pipe Rack Gate

01

02

03 04 01

05 06

BD0547a01

LEGEND 01. Gate Arm 02. Gate Arm Bearing 03. Clevis

04. Upper Rack 05. Limit Switch 06. Gate Cylinder

Figure 14-7: Pipe Rack Gate Mechanism

Removal
Refer to Figure 14-4 and proceed as follows:

WARNING

The rotating drill or its associated moving components can entrap and crush people, resulting in severe injury, or death. Do not enter the drill string and mast area while the drill is operating. Shut down the machine before performing inspections, service, or maintenance. Establish a procedure to guard against inadvertent equipment operation or movement while conducting inspections. Use lockout and tagout procedures prior to conducting maintenance or service.
1. Disconnect, lock out and tag the power source that feeds the system to prevent power from being applied while service is being performed.

WARNING

Falls from elevated mast can cause severe injury or death. Always use fall protection devices, such as the Saf-T-Climb system, when climbing the mast ladder. Do not attempt to perform maintenance or service from the ladder with the mast elevated. Lower the mast or use appropriate work platforms to perform maintenance or service to the mast or mast components.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

-14.8-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec14Pipes.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Pipe Handling Equipment

WARNING

Dropping or mishandling of heavy drill parts may cause severe personal injury, or death. Always move heavy components using the auxiliary winch or other suitable lifting device and rigging for removal and installation. Provide support for components which may release or move during any maintenance. Removal And Disassembly
The pipe rack should be in the drilling position to perform repairs which allows better access to components. It also eliminates the possibility of the rack dropping from the stored position. Remove components selectively for repair or replacement. Refer to Figure 13-6 and proceed as follows:

WARNING

The rotating drill or its associated moving components can entrap and crush people resulting in severe injury or death. Do not enter the drill string and mast area while the drill is operating. Shut down the machine before performing inspections, service, or maintenance. Establish a procedure to guard against inadvertent equipment operation or movement while conducting inspections. Use lockout and tagout procedures prior to conducting maintenance or service.
1. Disconnect, lock out, and tag the power source that feeds the system to prevent power from being applied while service is being performed. 2. Refer to Subtopic 14.2.1.8, for service instructions for cylinder (29). 3. Remove cotter pins (20) and sleeve pins (21). Withdraw gate arm (01) and remove gate support (02) and assembled sleeve (19). 4. Remove pivot pin (24) to detach assembled sleeve (19) with link (18) and bar (22). 5. Tie or otherwise support the upper end of the rack. 6. Remove capscrews (15) and lockwashers (16) to detach upper rack pin (17). 7. Loosen locknuts (14) and capscrews (07), remove retaining rings (06), and push out upper pin (05). Remove upper arm (04).

14.2.1.3 Cleaning, Inspection and Repair


Clean and inspect components in accordance with the general cleaning and inspection procedures in Appendix A of this manual. Repair consists of the replacement of all worn or damaged components. Refer to the LinkOne electronic parts manual for component identification.

14.2.1.4 Assembly and Installation


Install the components in the reverse order of removal. Refer to Figure 13-6. Note the following instructions. 1. Refer to Subtopic 14.2.1.8, for service instructions for the gate cylinder (29).

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec14Pipes.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -14.9Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

Pipe Handling Equipment

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

2. After installation, check gate operation. Gate arm (01) should fully close and limit switch (26) should trip with the cylinder extended. Adjust the clevis on the cylinder rod to achieve these conditions. 3. If a new gate link and sleeve assembly are to be installed, the clearance between the gate arm bearing and the sleeve should be 0.060" (1.5 mm). Refer to Figure 14-7. This dimension is set at assembly of the parts when the sleeve assembly and gate arm are installed and clamped to dimension. Then the sleeve and arm can be drilled to allow insertion of the roll pin. Hole size is " (12.7 mm). 4. Start the drill and operate to verify operation of the gates and latches.

14.2.1.5 Pipe Holder and Swing Arm

WARNING

Dropping or mishandling of heavy drill parts may cause severe personal injury, or death. Always move heavy components using the auxiliary winch or other suitable lifting device and rigging for removal and installation. Provide support for components which may release or move during any maintenance. Removal and Disassembly
The pipe rack should be in the drilling position to perform repairs which allows better access to components. It also eliminates the possibility of the rack dropping from the stored position. The location and arrangement of the pipe holder (pot), lower swing arm and related parts are shown on Figure 14-4. Remove components selectively for repair or replacement. Refer to Figure 14-4 and proceed as follows:

WARNING

The rotating drill or its associated moving components can entrap and crush people resulting in severe injury or death. Do not enter the drill string and mast area while the drill is operating. Shut down the machine before performing inspections, service, or maintenance. Establish a procedure to guard against inadvertent equipment operation or movement while conducting inspections. Use lockout and tagout procedures prior to conducting maintenance or service.
1. Disconnect, lock open, and tag the power source which feeds the system to prevent power from being applied while service is being performed.

CAUTION

High-pressure hydraulic or air systems can spray with extreme force and noise causing severe injury. Shut down system and slowly release pressure or vent circuits before loosening fittings or connections. Wear appropriate face, ear, and body protective devices while venting air or hydraulic systems.
2. Remove the wrenches. Refer to Subtopic 14.2.1.1. 3. Remove the limit switch. Refer to Subtopic 14.2.2.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

-14.10-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec14Pipes.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Pipe Handling Equipment

4. Tie or otherwise hold the bottom of the rack in position 5. Remove capscrews (15) and lockwashers (16) to detach pins (36 and 42). 6. Loosen hex nuts (45) and capscrews (40), remove retaining rings (43), and push out pin (42). Remove arm (46). 7. Refer to Subtopic 14.2.1.6, for service instructions for the cylinder (35).

Cleaning, Inspection and Repair


Clean and inspect components in accordance with the general cleaning and inspection procedures described in Appendix A of this manual. Repair consists of the replacement of all worn or damaged components. Refer to the LinkOne electronic parts manual for component identification.

Assembly and Installation


Refer to Figure 14-4 and install the components in the reverse order of removal. Note the following instructions: 1. Refer to Subtopic 14.2.1.6, for service instructions for cylinder (35). 2. Confirm that all grease fittings (23) are installed. 3. Confirm that the mounting and air and hydraulic connections are secure. 4. Start the drill and check operation of the racks and confirm that all functions work properly.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec14Pipes.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -14.11Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

Pipe Handling Equipment

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

14.2.1.6 Pipe Rack Swing Cylinder

LEGEND 01. Seal Kit 02. O-ring 03. Back-Up Ring 04. Wear Ring 05. Rod Seal

06. 07. 08. 09. 10. 11.

Rod Seal Rod Wiper Back-Up Ring O-ring Piston Seal Wear Ring

Figure 14-8: Pipe Rack Swing Cylinder

The pipe rack swing cylinder is a double-acting hydraulic cylinder with rod eye and clevis type mounting provisions.

Removal
The pipe rack should be in the drilling position to perform repairs which allows better access to components. It also eliminates the possibility of the rack dropping from the stored position. Refer to Figure 14-4 and proceed as follows:

WARNING

Inadvertent operation of the blasthole drill during maintenance on the machine could cause severe bodily injury and/or death. Lock out and tag the drill operating controls to prevent accidental operation.
1. Lock out and tag the drill operator controls to prevent inadvertent startup during maintenance procedures.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

-14.12-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec14Pipes.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Pipe Handling Equipment

CAUTION

High-pressure hydraulic systems can spray with extreme force and noise causing severe injury. Shut down system and slowly release pressure or vent circuits before loosening fittings or connections. Wear appropriate face, ear, and body protective devices while venting air or hydraulic systems.
2. Tag and disconnect the hydraulic hoses from swing cylinder (35). Cap or plug hydraulic fittings to prevent contamination of the hydraulic system. 3. Support swing cylinder (35). Remove capscrews (15) and lockwashers (16) and withdraw pins (36). Remove the cylinder.

Disassembly
Refer to Figure 14-8 and proceed as follows: 1. Loosen and back out the cylinder head with a spanner wrench. 2. Remove the cylinder rod with head assembly and piston assembly from cylinder body. 3. Remove the piston and cylinder head assembly from the cylinder rod. 4. Remove and discard O-rings (02) and back-up ring (03) from the head. 5. Remove and discard wear rings (04), and seals (05 and 06) and wiper (07) from inside of the head. 6. Remove and discard wear ring (11), seal (10), O-ring (09), and back-up rings (08) from the piston.

Cleaning, Inspection and Repair


Clean and inspect the hydraulic cylinder components in accordance with the general cleaning and inspection procedures in Appendix B of this manual. None of the components are repairable, and must be replaced if worn or damaged. It is advisable to replace all parts in the seal kit whenever the unit is disassembled. Refer to the LinkOne electronic parts manual for component identification.

Assembly
Lubricate all seals, O-rings, back-up rings and rod wiper with hydraulic oil prior to installation. Refer to Figure 14-8 and proceed as follows: 1. Install new wear O-rings (02) and back-up ring (03) on the head. 2. Install new wear rings (04), seals (05 and 06) and wiper (07) inside of the head. 3. Install new wear ring (11) and seal (10) on the piston. 4. Install new O-ring (09), and back-up rings (08) in the piston. 5. Install the assembled piston and cylinder head on the cylinder rod. 6. Install the cylinder rod with head assembly and piston assembly into the cylinder body.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec14Pipes.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -14.13Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

Pipe Handling Equipment

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

7. Install the cylinder head with a spanner wrench.

14.2.1.7 Installation
Refer to Figure 13-6 and proceed as follows: 1. Support swing cylinder (35) in position on the pipe rack and clevis. 2. Insert cylinder pin (36) into rack clevis and the head end of cylinder (35). Install capscrew (15) and lockwasher (16) to secure the pivot pin. 3. Insert a second pivot pin (36) on the rod end of cylinder (35) as described in preceding step 2. 4. Connect the tagged hydraulic hoses to cylinder. 5. Start up the drill hydraulic system and bleed the hydraulic system at the cylinder. 6. Start the drill and confirm operation of the rack lower and retract action.

14.2.1.8 Pipe Rack Gate Cylinder


The pipe rack should be in the drilling position to perform repairs which allows better access to components. It also eliminates the possibility of the rack dropping from the stored position. Refer to Figure 14-4 and proceed as follows: 1. If necessary, lower the affected pipe rack to the drilling position.

WARNING

Inadvertent operation of the blasthole drill during maintenance on the machine could cause severe bodily injury and/or death. lock out and tag the drill operating controls to prevent accidental operation.
2. Lock out and tag the drill operator controls to prevent inadvertent startup during maintenance procedures.

CAUTION

High-pressure hydraulic systems can spray with extreme force and noise causing severe injury. Shut down system and slowly release pressure or vent circuits before loosening fittings or connections. Wear appropriate face, ear, and body protective devices while venting air or hydraulic systems.
3. Tag and disconnect the hydraulic hoses from gate hydraulic cylinder. 4. Plug and/or cap all hose assemblies and hydraulic fittings to prevent contamination of the hydraulic system. 5. Support cylinder (29). Remove the pivot pin from the cylinder clevis and the head end of cylinder. Remove the attaching capscrews to detach the cylinder. Unscrew the clevis.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

-14.14-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec14Pipes.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Pipe Handling Equipment

14.2.1.9 Cleaning, Inspection and Repair


Clean and inspect the hydraulic cylinders in accordance with the general cleaning and inspection procedures in Appendix B of this manual. Replace faulty cylinders.

14.2.1.10 Installation
The location and method of attachment is shown on Figure 13- 6. Assemble the cylinder and related hardware in the reverse order of removal. 1. Support gate cylinder (29) in position on the pipe rack 2. Connect the tagged hydraulic hoses to the cylinder. 3. Start up the drill hydraulic system and bleed the hydraulic system at the cylinder. 4. Start the drill and check the operation of the rack gate and/or latch.

14.2.2 Limit Switches

LEGEND 01. Socket Head Capscrew 02. Lock Washer 03. Limit Switch 04. Mounting Base

05. 06. 07. 08. 09.

Spring Plunger Roll Pin Trip Bar Roll Pin

Figure 14-9: Pipe Holder Limit Switch

There are three limit switches mounted on each pipe rack. If a fault or malfunction occurs that is related to the limit switch functions, isolate the cause and locate the switch. Refer to Figures 14-4, and 13-10.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec14Pipes.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -14.15Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

Pipe Handling Equipment

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Inspect the applicable switch for loose mounting and loose or disconnected wires. Repair any faulty condition. If the wiring is good, inspect the switch for damage, distortion and wear. For the pot switch also examine the spring (Item 05, Figures 14-9,) and plunger (06). Replace all worn or damaged parts.

WARNING

Inadvertent operation of the blasthole drill during maintenance on the machine could cause severe bodily injury and/or death. Lock out and tag the drill operating controls to prevent accidental operation.
1. Lock out and tag the drill operator controls to prevent inadvertent startup during maintenance procedures. 2. Disconnect, lock out, and tag the power source which feeds the system to prevent power from being applied while service is being performed. 3. Tag and disconnect the wiring from the limit switch. 4. Remove the mounting hardware and related parts to detach the switch. 5. Check the on-off switch functions with an ohmmeter while actuating the switch manually. Replace a switch that does not operate properly. 6. Install a new switch with the same hardware and related parts. 7. Connect the wiring to the limit switch. 8. Start the drill and check operation of the limit switch.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

-14.16-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec14Pipes.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Pipe Handling Equipment

14.2.3 Deck Wrench GH5007463

LEGEND 01. Capscrew 02. Lock Washer 03. Retainer 04. Grease Fitting 05. Housing 06. Cylinder

07. 08. 09. 10. 11. 12. 13.

Body Grease Fitting Roll Pin Compression Spring Pawl Anchor Pin Cotter Pin

Figure 14-10: Deck Wrench

The deck wrench units each consist of a housing, a sliding body with spring-loaded pawl, and a hydraulic cylinder that provides clamping power.

14.2.3.1 Removal
Refer to Figure 14-10 and proceed as follows:

WARNING

Inadvertent operation of the blasthole drill during maintenance on the machine could cause severe bodily injury, or death. Lockout and tag the drill operating controls to prevent accidental operation.
1. Lock out and tag the drill operator controls to prevent inadvertent startup during maintenance procedures.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec14Pipes.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -14.17Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

Pipe Handling Equipment

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

CAUTION

High-pressure hydraulic or air systems can spray with extreme force and noise causing severe injury. Slowly release pressure or vent circuits before loosening fittings or connections. Wear appropriate face, ear, and body protective devices while venting air or hydraulic systems.
2. Tag and disconnect the hydraulic hoses from the deck wrenches. 3. Remove the hydraulic fittings from the deck wrenches. 4. Tag and disconnect the lubrication hose assemblies from the deck wrenches. 5. Plug and/or cap all hose assemblies and hydraulic fittings to prevent contamination of the hydraulic system. 6. Remove cotter pins (13) and withdraw anchor pin (12) to free each deck wrench.

14.2.3.2 Disassembly
Refer to Figure 14-10 and proceed as follows: 1. Remove capscrews (1) and lockwashers (2). Separate retainers (3) and remove from the cylinder rod. 2. Withdraw housing (07) with pawl (11), spring (10), cylinder (06), and roll pin (09) from the working end of wrench housing (05). 3. Drive out roll pin (09), and remove pawl (11) and spring (10). 4. Tag and disconnect the hydraulic hoses from the deck wrenches. 5. Remove cylinder (06) from body (07). 6. Remove grease fittings (04), if necessary to replace.

14.2.3.3 Cleaning, Inspection and Repair


Clean and inspect the deck wrench components in accordance with the general cleaning and inspection procedures provided in Appendix A of this manual. Repair consists of replacement of all worn or damaged components. Refer to the LinkOne electronic parts manual for component identification.

14.2.3.4 Assembly
Refer to Figure 14-10 and proceed as follows: 1. Install new grease fittings (04) if necessary. 2. Position hydraulic cylinder (06) in body (07). 3. Place spring (10) and pawl (11) in body (07). Align the mounting holes on the pawl and the body, and install roll pin (09) to secure. 4. Install body (07) with pawl (11), spring (10), cylinder (06) and roll pin (09) into housing (05).

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

-14.18-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec14Pipes.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Pipe Handling Equipment

5. Place retainers (03) on rod end of cylinder (06). Install capscrews (01) and lockwashers (02) to secure the retainers.

14.2.3.5 Installation
Refer to Figure 14-10 and proceed as follows: 1. Place each deck wrench in its position on the drill platform. Install anchor pin (12) and secure with cotter pins (13). 2. Repeat the preceding Step 1 for the other deck wrench. 3. Install the lubrication hose assemblies on the deck wrenches. Manually lubricate the wrench pawls, as specified in Section 16, Lubrication.. 4. Install the hydraulic fittings on the deck wrenches. 5. Connect the hydraulic hoses to the deck wrenches. Bleed the hydraulic system. 6. Recheck the security of the mounting and hydraulic connections. 7. Start the drill and check operation of the deck wrenches to be sure all functions work properly.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec14Pipes.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -14.19Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

Pipe Handling Equipment

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

14.2.4 Deck Wrench Cylinders GH5010453

LEGEND 01. Piston Rod 02. Cylinder Head 03. Piston 04. Locknut 05. Barrel 06. Service Kit 07. Rod Wiper

08. 09. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

Rod Seal O-ring Backup Ring O-ring Wear Ring Seal Assembly O-ring

Figure 14-11: Deck Wrench Cylinder

The deck wrench cylinders are double acting hydraulic cylinders, which are ported through the rod end. One cylinder is located inside each wrench slide assembly. Refer to Subsection 14.2.3 for removal and installation procedures.

14.2.4.1 Disassembly
Refer to Figure 14-11 and proceed as follows: 1. Use a spanner wrench to loosen cylinder head (02); back it out, free of barrel (05). 2. Pull the entire piston and piston rod assembly out of barrel (05). Pull the assembly straight out, very carefully, to avoid scoring the cylinder bore. 3. Remove locknut (04) and the slide piston assembly off piston rod (01).

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

-14.20-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec14Pipes.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Pipe Handling Equipment

4. Remove and discard O-ring (14) from inside of piston (03). 5. Remove two wear rings (12) and seal assembly (13) from the piston (03). Use care to avoid damage to the piston land areas during disassembly. 6. Remove cylinder head assembly off piston rod (01). 7. Remove backup ring (10) and O-ring (11) from the outside of cylinder head (02). 8. Remove rod wiper (07), rod seal (08), and O-ring (09).

14.2.4.2 Cleaning, Inspection and Repair


Clean and inspect the hydraulic cylinder components in accordance with the general cleaning and inspection procedures described in Appendix B of this manual. None of the components are repairable, and must be replaced if worn or damaged. Replace all seals and rings using available service kit. Refer to the LinkOne electronic parts manual for component identification.

14.2.4.3 Assembly
Refer to Figure 14-11 and proceed as follows: 1. Lubricate and install rod wiper (07), rod seal (08), and O-ring (09). 2. Install cylinder head (02) on piston rod (01). 3. Lubricate and install backup ring (10) and O-ring (11) on the outside of cylinder head (02). 4. Lubricate and install new O-ring (14) the inside of piston (03). Install piston with O ring on piston rod (01). 5. Lubricate and install two wear rings (12) and seal assembly (13) on piston (03). Use care to avoid damage to the piston land areas during assembly. 6. Install locknut (04) on piston rod (01). 7. Lubricate the bore of barrel. 8. Install the entire piston and piston rod assembly into barrel (05). Insert the assembly, very carefully, to avoid scoring the cylinder bore. 9. Install cylinder head (02) into the barrel, and torque securely with a spanner wrench.

14.2.4.4 Cleaning, Inspection And Repair


Clean and inspect components in accordance with the general cleaning and inspection procedures described in Appendix A of this manual.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec14Pipes.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -14.21Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

Pipe Handling Equipment

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

14.2.5 Breakout Wrench R46448F1


The breakout wrench, the P&H SureWrench II, is used to assist in the separation of pipe joints. Refer to Figure 14-12 .

05 02

01

03 04

10 02 09 08 07 06

BD0642a01

LEGEND 01. Pivot Tube 02. Lube Fitting 03. Jaw Die 04. Jaw Bushing 05. Jaw Pin Cover

06. 07. 08. 09. 10.

Breakout Wrench Arm Breakout Wrench Clamping Cylinder Wrench Pin Cover Breaking Cylinder

Figure 14-12: Breakout Wrench

WARNING

The rotating drill string or its associated moving components can entrap and crush personnel, resulting in severe injury or death. Do not enter the drilling platform and/or mast area while the drill is operating. Notify the operator to shut down the drill and use lockout/tagout procedures before conducting maintenance or service. When working in the drilling and/or mast area while power is supplied to the drill, establish a procedure to maintain communications between the work crew and the person controlling the drill operation and shut down. 14.2.5.1 Sure Wrench Alignment

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

-14.22-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec14Pipes.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Pipe Handling Equipment

Step 1: Step 2: Step 3: Step 4: Step 5: Step 6: Step 7:

Mount wrench to mast. Add proper jaws and dies to match diameter of drill pipe. Refer to Subtopic 14.2.5.2. Swing the breakout wrench into position to clamp around the pipe. Loosen the bolts on the breakout wrench mounting bracket. Using the hydraulics, clamp the drill pipe with the wrench. Tighten the bolts on the mounting brackets to secure the position of the wrench. Swing the wrench in and out to check the final alignment. If better alignment is needed, repeat steps 3 through 7.

14.2.5.2 Jaw and Die Chart

CAUTION
Having unequal die lengths will result in the dies aligning incorrectly against the drill pipe. The hydraulic force applied to the jaws as they are rotated can be sufficient to cause the teeth to chip, resulting in slippage and premature wear on the dies.
Use the jaws and dies that correspond to the pipe diameter. Refer to Table 14-1.
Part No. R46538F1 R46538F2 R46538F3 R46538F4 Pipe Size (inch dia) 14 - 3/8 13 - 3/8 10 - 3/4 11- 3/4

Table 14-1: Jaw and Die Chart

14.2.5.3 Worn pins, bores, bushings, bushing guides, slots and pivots
As the working parts wear, the clamping and breaking performance will suffer. Wearing parts cause the Sure Wrench geometry to be distorted when clamping around a drill pipe as designed. As a result, the dies will not maintain the required perpendicularity to the drill pipe. Thus, the dies will encounter point loading, which will result in the dies slipping and chipping teeth instead of biting into the drill pipe as the jaws are rotated.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec14Pipes.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -14.23Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

Pipe Handling Equipment

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

14.2.6 Hydraulic Circuit Inspection and Adjustments


Table 14-2 shows tools, supplies, and parts required for the procedures that follow..
* 1 ea. 0-5000 psi gage 1 ea. 5/32" allen wrench 1 ea. 9/16" open end wrench 1 ea. Spray Cleaner 2 ea. #8 JIC Cap, 44Z511D4 1 ea. #8 JIC Union, 44Q44D15 ** 1 ea. #8 JIC Tee, 44Z487D6 ** 1 ea. Test Gage Connector, 44Z2664D4 * ** Use pressure test kit provided with the drill. These components will remain with the sequence valve. Table 14-2: Tools, Supplies and Parts Required

The procedures to adjust the hydraulic pressure (clamping force) will require two individuals with prior knowledge of the P&H drill. It is essential that everyone working on this adjustment understand all aspects of the procedure before work begins.

CAUTION
Remove dirt build-up from in and around the hydraulic fittings before repairs or adjustments are made to limit contamination from entering the system.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

-14.24-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec14Pipes.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Pipe Handling Equipment

14.2.6.1 Hydraulic Component Inspection


O

02 01 02 01 03

04

03

B 05

06

LEGEND 01. Sequence Valve 02. Break Sequence Cartridge Adjustment 03. Port H 04. Arm 05. Break Cylinder 06. Jaw Cylinder 07. Pivot 08. Slot

01

07

A = Install tee and test connector B = Connect both hoses together using the #8 JIC union

05 08

06

Figure 14-13: Sure Wrench Hydraulic Components

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec14Pipes.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -14.25Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

Pipe Handling Equipment

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Refer to Figure 14-13 and inspect hoses, fittings, sequence valve and hydraulic cylinders for oil leaks on a regular basis. Repair or replace damaged components before continuing on with the following steps:

14.2.6.2 Pressure Test Setup


Turn off power to the drill. Refer to Figure 14-13 and proceed as follows:

CAUTION

High pressure hydraulic systems can spray oil with extreme force, causing severe injury. Test system pressure before loosening fittings or connections. Check pressure at Test Ports GA7 and GB7 on Valve Bank 2. Pressure must be zero before loosening any fittings or connections. Wear appropriate face, ear, and body protective devices when venting hydraulic systems.
Step 8:

Refer to Letter A on Figure 14-13. Remove the hose that connects the break cylinder to the sequence valve H port. Temporarily cap the open end of the hose. Install the tee fitting to the male fitting on the open port of the sequence valve. Reconnect the hose to the tee fitting.

Step 9:

Step 10: Install the test gage connector to the branch port of the tee fitting. Install the 0-5000 psi gage.

NOTICE
Tee fitting and test gage connector will remain with the sequence valve.
Step 11: Refer to Letter B on Figure 14-13. Remove both break cylinder hoses. Cap the open ports on the cylinder.

Connect the two hoses together using the union fitting.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

-14.26-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec14Pipes.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Pipe Handling Equipment

14.2.6.3 Sure Wrench Jaw Cylinder Pressure Adjustment

0-5000 psi
4000 5000 3000 2000

03
Figure 14-14: Jaw Cylinder Pressure Adjustment Step 1:

Start the drill. When the hydraulic oil reaches normal operating temperature, continue with the following steps. From the operators cab, press and hold the rocker switch that controls the Sure Wrench Jaw and Break motions. Observe the pressure reading on the test gage. Make the necessary adjustments by adjusting cartridge (02, Figure 14-13) on the dual sequence valve facing towards the front of the drill. Turning the adjustment clockwise will increase pressure; turning anticlockwise will decrease the pressure.

Step 2:

Step 3:

1000

PSI

er.0.9

NOTICE
There are two cartridges on the dual sequence valve. Be certain to adjust the cartridge that is facing the front, not the cartridge that is facing the rear.
Step 4: Step 5: Step 6: Step 7:

Adjust cartridge (02, Figure 14-13) to 2400 psi. Turn power off; remove test gage. Reconnect hoses onto the Break Cylinder. Start the drill and operate the Sure Wrench. Check for oil leaks.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec14Pipes.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -14.27Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

Pipe Handling Equipment

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

14.3 Troubleshooting
Table 14-3 provides basic guidelines to aid in the troubleshooting problems of the pipe handling equipment.
Problem Deck Wrench Slide Does Not Operate Possible Cause Binding mechanism Remedy Clean and lubricate slide. lnspect slide and housing for galling.Repair as required. lnspect for internal jamming. Check parts and repair as necessary. Hydraulic control circuit malfunction lnspect hydraulic lines for leaks and/or loose connections. Repair any deficiencies. Investigate control circuits for cause of incorrect operation and repair any deficiencies. Refer to Section 3, Auxiliary Hydraulic System. for troubleshooting of the auxiliary hydraulic system. Hydraulic cylinder malfunction Deck Wrench Pawl Does Not Return to Extended Position Binding mechanism Repair or replace faulty cylinder. Clean and lubricate the pawl mechanism. Galled retainer pin. lnspect parts and repair as necessary. Weak or broken compression spring lnspect spring for damage or breakage. Repair faulty spring.

Table 14-3: Troubleshooting Guide

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

-14.28-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec14Pipes.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Pipe Handling Equipment

Problem Pipe Rack Does Not Swing Properly

Possible Cause Binding mechanism

Remedy lnspect upper and lower swing mechanisms for foreign materials. Remove any debris. Lubricate pivot pins. lnspect for broken or binding arm pivot pins. Repair as required. lnspect for distortion of arms and supports. Repair or replace parts as necessary.

Hydraulic cylinder circuit malfunction

lnspect hydraulic lines to swing cylinder for leaks and/or loose connections. Repair any deficiencies. Investigate control circuits for cause of incorrect operation and repair any deficiencies. Refer to Section 3, Auxiliary Hydraulic System. for troubleshooting of the auxiliary hydraulic system.

Swing hydraulic cylinder malfunction Pipe Rack Gate Does Not Operate Properly Gate mechanism out of adjustment Binding gate mechanism.

Repair or replace faulty cylinder. Adjust mechanism linkage. lnspect mechanism for broken or binding pivot pins, rods, levers and rod ends. Repair or replace parts as required. lnspect for broken or deformed latch compression spring. Replace faulty spring.

Pipe Rack Pot Wrenches Do Not Hold Pipe

Binding wrenches or pivot pins

lnspect pot for foreign materials. Remove any debris. Lubricate wrench pins. lnspect wrench pins for galling. Replace damaged pins.

Wrenches our of adjustment Weak or broken wrench spring Worn wrenches

Adjust wrench position in pot. Replace faulty springs. Replace worn wrenches.

Table 14-3: Troubleshooting Guide

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec14Pipes.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -14.29Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

Pipe Handling Equipment

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 14, Version 00 - 03/06

-14.30-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec14Pipes.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Water Injection System

Section 15

Water Injection System


15.1 Theory of Operation

09

07 06

04

05

02

03

01

01

LEGEND 01. 1000-Gallon Water Tank, Insulated 02. Water Pump 03. Variable Speed Motor 04. Air Piloted Water Dump Valve

05. 06. 07. 08. 09.

Relief Valve Heated, Insulated Enclosure Solenoid Operated Pilot Valve Flow Transducer Butterfly Valve

Figure 15-1: Water Injection System

The water injection system injects a metered amount of water to the bit air to help control dust from drilling operations. The water flow is regulated and monitored by a control potentiometer and flow meter in the operators cab.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec15Water.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -15.1Section 15, Version 00 - 03/06

Water Injection System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

The system consists of a 1000 gallon (3785 liter) water tank, motor-driven pump, flow sensor, check valve, directional control valve, relief valve, and related lines and fittings. Refer to Figure 15-1.

NOTICE
The water injection system should not normally be operated in sub-freezing ambient conditions.
The pump, the air-piloted dump valve, and the relief valve are mounted in the water tank. Water from the pump is discharged through the relief valve, which is factory preset at 55 psi (3.8 bar). A multipoint level switch, consisting of three float switches, is mounted inside the water tank. The normally open switches close when the tank is filled with water, and send signals to the PLC as follows:

Figure 15-2: Multipoint Level Switch

High water level switch HWLS opens to indicate that the tank is less than full. Quarter water level switch QWLS opens to indicate that the tank is less than full. Empty water level switch EWLS opens to indicate that the tank is empty.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 15, Version 00 - 03/06

-15.2-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec15Water.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Water Injection System

The GUI in the operators cab indicates the level of water in the tank as well as the flow rate to the bit. Refer to Figure 15-3

Figure 15-3: Water Level Indicators

The pump is operated from the cab by turning the water injection switch ON. Water flow is adjusted with the flow control knob. Refer to Figure 15-4

Figure 15-4: Water Injection Controls

For the water injection pump to operate, bit air must be ON, bit air pressure must be at least 15 psi, the tank level must be above empty, and the drill must be in drill or hoist mode.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec15Water.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -15.3Section 15, Version 00 - 03/06

Water Injection System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

15.2 Water Injection System Maintenance

Figure 15-5: Water Tank

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 15, Version 00 - 03/06

-15.4-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec15Water.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Water Injection System

LEGEND 01. 250 Watt Strip Heater 02. Flat Washer 03. Lock Washer 04. Hex Head Capscrew 05. Strip Heater Guard 06. Hex Head Capscrew 07. Strip Heater Spacer 08. Slotted Pan Head Machine Screw 09. Lock Washer 10. Heater Control Thermoswitch 11. Hex Nut 12. 1000 Gallon Tank, Insulated and Epoxy Coated 13. Self-Adhesive Gasket 14. Junction Box 15. Padlock Handle 16. Adjustable Latch 17. Hex Nut 18. Water Level Indicator Multiswitch 19. Swivel Fitting 20. Reducer Fitting

21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43.

Air Piloted Solenoid Valve Breather Straight Fitting Lock Washer Hex Head Capscrew Top Clamp Plate Hose Clamp Body Hose Assembly Plug Fitting Hose Assembly Plug Fitting Hex Head Capscrew Top Clamp Plate Hose Clamp Body Fitting Flow Transducer Valve Male Fitting Nipple Female Cross Fitting Hex Nipple Fitting Relief Valve Hose Assembly Elbow Fitting

44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. 61. 62. 63. 64. 65. 66.

Reducer Fitting Check/Relief Valve Hex Nipple Fitting 2 HP Pump Gasket Submersible Pump Frame Mounting Plate Water Pump Cap Lock Washer Hex Head Capscrew Chain Chain Link Connector Hose Assembly Elbow Fitting Air Piloted Valve Fitting Plug Fitting Plug Fitting Plug Fitting Drain Valve Gasket Drain Valve Gasket Drain Valve Assembly Hex Head Capscrew

Figure 15-6: Legend for Figure 15-5

15.2.1 1000 Gallon Water Tank R33238F1

CAUTION
Never weld to the water tank. The tank is lined with epoxy on the inside. Epoxy will burn, causing corrosion on the inside of the tank.
The water tank is mounted on the left-hand platform. It is a steel tank, lined with epoxy on the inside, and is heated and insulated. The tank holds the pump and motor assembly as well as associated components.

15.2.1.1 Installation and Removal


The tank is mounted to the left-hand platform by 12 hex head capscrews, nuts and washers. Torque fasteners as indicated in Appendix A of this manual.

15.2.2 Submersible Water Pump 37U152D3


The submersible water pump has an integral sealed electric motor, check valve and suction screen. The unit is not field repairable and must be replaced if failure occurs. The pump rests at the bottom of the tank in a 15 angle support. The angle provides drainage when the tank is emptied to prevent trapped water from freezing and damaging the water pump. The water pump can produce 5 gpm @ 75 psi.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec15Water.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -15.5Section 15, Version 00 - 03/06

Water Injection System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

15.2.2.1 Removal
Refer to Figure 15-5 and proceed as follows:

WARNING

Hazardous voltage can cause burns, injury, or death. Disconnect, lock open, and tag the power source which feeds this device to prevent power from being applied while inspection and repairs are being performed. Before beginning repairs, try the operational controls to verify that the intended power source is disconnected.
1. Disconnect, lock open, and tag the power source which feeds the system to prevent power from being applied while service is being performed. 2. Tag and disconnect the wiring to the pump at the electrical junction box on the tank. 3. Disconnect the water discharge hose from the access cover on the tank. 4. Pull the lock pins that secure the access cover to the tank.

WARNING

Some blasthole drill components are extremely heavy. Dropping or mishandling of these parts can cause severe personal injury or death, and damage to the equipment. Always support heavy components using a suitable hoist or other means for removal, disassembly, assembly and installation. Provide appropriate support for any components which are not supported by the machinery during any maintenance.
5. Attach a suitable hoist to the lifting chains attached to the access cover. Lift the cover, pump and related hose, valve, cradle, frame and fittings from the tank, tanking care not to damage parts in the process. 6. Remove the hose, electrical wiring and fittings from the pump. Use these parts to install the new pump. 7. Remove the pump caps and pump.

15.2.2.2 Repair
Clean and inspect parts as specified in Appendix A. Replace deteriorated hose, gasket and wiring.

15.2.2.3 Installation
Refer to Figure 15-5 and proceed as follows: 1. Install the new pump on the cradle with the pump caps. Be sure that the check valve is pointed straight up before locking the pump in the cradle. 2. Install the hose, electrical wiring and fittings on the pump. Use pipe thread sealant in threaded fittings. 3. Attach a suitable hoist to the lifting chains attached to the access cover. Lower the cover, pump and related hose, valve, cradle, frame and fittings into the tank, tanking care not to damage parts in the process.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 15, Version 00 - 03/06

-15.6-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec15Water.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Water Injection System

4. Position the access cover on the tank. Use a new cover gasket if necessary. 5. Install the lock pins to secure the cover. 6. Connect the water discharge hose to the access cover. 7. Connect the wiring to the pump at the electrical junction box on the tank. 8. Operate the system to verify proper operation.

15.2.3 Pressure Relief Valve R12410D1

01 02

03

04

05 06 07

BD0550a01

LEGEND 01. Cap 02. Spring 03. Locknut

04. 05. 06. 07.

Outlet Port Poppet Valve Body Inlet Port

Figure 15-7: Pressure Relief Valve

15.2.3.1 Replacement
Refer to Figure 15-7 and proceed as follows:

CAUTION

Pressurized water systems can spray with extreme force, causing severe injury. Shut down the system and slowly release pressure or vent circuits before loosening any fittings or connections. Wear appropriate face, ear and body protective devices while vent-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec15Water.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -15.7Section 15, Version 00 - 03/06

Water Injection System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

ing pressurized water systems.Inadvertent operation of the blasthole drill during maintenance could cause severe bodily injury and/ or death. Lockout and tagout the drill operating controls to prevent accidental operation.
1. Lockout and tagout the drill operating controls to prevent inadvertent start-up of the drill during maintenance activities. 2. Disconnect the water discharge hose from the access cover on the tank. 3. Pull the lock pins that secure right side of the access cover to the tank. Swing the cover open. 4. Remove the pressure relief valve and close nipple. 5. Check the pressure setting of the relief valve or its replacement on a test stand. The correct relief pressure setting is 80 psi (5.5 bar). Adjust as necessary. If a test stand is not available, check and adjust as specified in topic, Relief Valve Adjustment. 6. Install the relief valve and nipple. 7. Close and secure the tank cover. Connect the water discharge hose.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 15, Version 00 - 03/06

-15.8-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec15Water.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Water Injection System

15.2.3.2 Adjustment
07 08 07 09 10

06

05

04

03 02

07

01

BD0551a01

LEGEND 01. Pressure Relief Valve 02. Water Tank Access Cover 03. Reducer, 1.00" - .50" 04. Pressure Gauge 0 - 150 psi (0-10 bar)

05. 06. 07. 08. 09. 10.

Reducer .50" - .25" " Valve " Nipple " Elbow Hose Clamp Drain Hose

Figure 15-8: Relief Valve Adjustment

The pressure relief valve is set to 55 psi (3.8 bar). The valve can be adjusted on a test stand or using a setup similar to the one shown in Figure 15-8. To adjust the valve on the drill, proceed as follows: 1. Lock and tag out the drill and relieve pressure. Open the tank cover as described under Subtopic 15.2.3.1. 2. Assemble test components as shown in Figure 15-8. 3. Remove the elbow from the cover and install the test equipment. Place the free end of the hose in the tank, open the test valve.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec15Water.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -15.9Section 15, Version 00 - 03/06

Water Injection System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

NOTICE
To start the water pump without the main air compressor running, temporarily jumper the main air pressure switch (MAPS) (item 7, Figure 6-55).
4. Turn ON the water injection system switch to start the water pump. Adjust water flow with the control potentiometer. 5. When water is flowing through the test equipment and back into the tank, partially close the test valve until the pressure gauge reads 80 psi (5.5 bar). 6. Confirm that the valve starts to vent at 80 psi (5.5 bar). Tighten the locknut after adjustment to retain the setting. 7. Check the pressure setting by opening and partially closing the test valve several times to be sure that the relief valve continues to vent at the setting. 8. Shut down the water injection system. 9. Remove the test equipment from the tank. 10. Remove the jumper from the MAPS.

15.3 Sensing Components


The sensing components such as the level switches, flow sensor and two-way valve should be inspected in place before service. If these parts do not function, check the electrical connections and lines to other electrical parts before replacement. Replace any faulty parts. The location and method of installation are shown on the applicable exploded view illustrations. After replacement check all joints and connections for security.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 15, Version 00 - 03/06

-15.10-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec15Water.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Water Injection System

15.4 Troubleshooting
The following table provides general troubleshooting information on the water injection system.
Problem Pump does not run. Possible Cause No water in tank Bit air off Drill in propel mode Insufficient bit air pressure No power to pump Broken drive belt (if applicable Faulty bit pressure switch Faulty pump or pump motor Pump runs erratically Faulty relief valve Remedy Check if tank empty light (red) is on. Add water to tank as required Turn on bit air Place drill in hoist or drill mode Investigate cause of low bit air pressure. Correct deficiency Check power and control circuits to pump. Correct deficiency Replace belt and adjust Check pressure switch and replace if faulty Replace pump or motor Check relief valve setting and adjust as required. If valve will not hold setting, disassemble and clean valve. Repair or replace valve Check power and control circuits to pump. Correct deficiency. Remove and inspect pump and motor. Replace faulty pump or motor. Inspect check valve and replace if faulty. Check two-way valve and replace if faulty.

Low voltage or control circuit malfunction Faulty pump or pump motor

Tank will not vent

Faulty check valve Faulty two-way valve Table 15-1: Troubleshooting Guide

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec15Water.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -15.11Section 15, Version 00 - 03/06

Water Injection System

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Problem Water flow is low

Possible Cause Leak at hoses or connections

Remedy Check condition of hoses and tightness of connections. Replace faulty hoses. Tighten all connections. Adjust belt tension Inspect flow control valve and circuits. Repair valve Inspect control potentiometer and circuits. Correct deficiency Remove and inspect inlet strainer. Clean strainer as required. Drain and clean tank interior to remove debris as required. Remove and inspect pump. Replace faulty pump or motor Inspect and check wiring between sensor and flow meter. Correct deficiency. Replace sensor Replace flow meter. Clean check valve or replace if damaged

Loose pump drive belt (if applicable) Faulty flow control valve Faulty control potentiometer Obstructed pump inlet

Faulty pump or pump motor Water flow meter does not register Open circuit between flow sensor and flow meter Faulty flow sensor Faulty flow meter Water being added to bit air with pump off Faulty check valve Table 15-1: Troubleshooting Guide

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 15, Version 00 - 03/06

-15.12-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec15Water.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Lubrication

Section 16

Lubrication
16.1 General
16.1.1 P&H Lubricant Specifications

NOTICE
Without reference to specific lubricant manufacturers products, this manual makes reference only to the appropriate P&H Mining Equipment lubricant specifications. P&H Mining Equipment lubricant specifications are listed in their entirety under Subsection 16.8. Each P&H material specification pertaining to lubricants provides the equipment owner with the minimum requirements for the lubricant. Conformance to these requirements does not constitute the only basis of acceptance. Lubricants must be judged further on their satisfactory field performance.
In order for equipment to perform properly, the lubricant supplier and the equipment owner must work together to determine if the type of lubricant being considered will meet P&H Mining Equipment lubricant requirements (that is, specifications and performance). The lubricant supplier must confirm that the lubricant meets specifications; the equipment owner must confirm that the lubricant is suitable for and performs in the operating environment.

16.1.2 Operating in Cold Conditions


Automatic lubrication systems can malfunction when the lubricant becomes too cold to flow smoothly or vent properly. This can cause the system cycle to end before lube points are properly lubricated.

16.1.2.1 Possible Effects Of Excessively Cold Lubricant Improper venting after the cycle may prevent the injectors from reloading. If pressure is not vented back to
the tank, the injector springs stay compressed and can not reload. The next cycle the injectors will not output any lube if they have not recharged. As a result, the lube points may not receive proper lubrication.

Cold grease can make it difficult to pump the lubricant. A restriction to flow in one area can cause a local
pressure drop to some components. The pressure switch on the lubrication control panel may reach the set point pressure before it is high enough to cycle all the injectors. The lube pump turns off prematurely before the lube points get the needed lubricant. If cold weather problems occur, contact your P&H MinePro Services representative to assist in choosing which of the following solutions should be selected.

16.1.2.2 Possible Solutions Use a grease more appropriate for colder temperatures. Refer to the lubrication specifications in this section
of this manual for details.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -16.1Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

Lubrication

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Slow the lubrication pump to allow more time for the cold grease to move through the lube piping. Refer to
Section 8, Automatic Lubrication System. for more details.

16.1.3 Viscosity
The viscosity is a critical parameter in determining film thickness under operating conditions. Too low viscosity will allow tooth surfaces to contact each other. Viscosity varies exponentially with operating temperature. The viscosity grade selection is dependent on the maximum and minimum operating temperatures. If the extreme or peak operating sump temperatures are not known, measure the sump oil temperature during a period of extreme or peak ambient temperature, after working the machine continuously for at least shift. Maximum oil viscosity (and, therefore, its suitability for application in cold weather) is also temperature-dependent and is primarily determined by the pour point of the oil. Refer to minimum operating sump temperatures in Table 16-1.
Oil Grade P&H Specification Viscosity (cSt) 40C ISO 150 ISO 220 ISO 320 ISO 460 ISO 680 ISO 1000 SYN 220 SYN 320 SYN 460 SYN 680 SYN 1000 SYN 1500 497 497 497 497 497 497 474 474 474 474 474 474 152 223 320 452 680 1070 210 305 440 645 947 1387 100C 16 20 24 30 36 55 25 35 45 60 80 102 Max Operating Sump Temp C 28 30 37 42 48 55 32 39 46 54 62 69 F 82 87 98 107 118 131 89 102 115 129 143 156 Min Operating Sump Temp C -24 -21 -18 -15 -12 -6 -37 -34 -29 -26 -31 -26 F -11 -6 0 5 10 21 -35 -30 -20 -15 -24 -15

Table 16-1: Gear Oil Operating Limits

NOTICE
The maximum sump temperatures are based on a minimum allowable viscosity of 400 cSt. Exceeding limits, especially the maximum limits, for even short periods can result in progressive surface deterioration. If maximum and minimum temperature limits cannot be met with any one product, seasonal oil changes should be considered. In cold environments exceeding lower limits, drives should be run at no load to warm up the oil prior to operation. Sump temperatures should be monitored in extreme ambient conditions.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

-16.2-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Lubrication

The channel point of an oil is about 8-14F below the pour point. If the ambient temperature drops below the pour point, the oil will not flow through a pump. This condition is unacceptable, even though some lubrication of gearing might be possible if the gearing dips into oil in a sump. If the ambient temperature falls below the channel point, no lubrication is possible as the oil will become semi-solid and will be displaced (channeled) as the gearing dips into the sump. This condition will result in destruction of the gearing. If it is desired to use a single grade of oil year round, users must be certain that at no time will either the maximum or minimum operating sump temperature be exceeded for the grade of oil being used. The minimum operating sump temperature represents the pour point of the oil, but it is still possible to operate the machine if the ambient temperature drops below the pour point. Temperature below the pour point is mainly a concern if the machine is not operating. If a machine has been shut down for an extended period of time, and the ambient temperature drops below the pour point during this time, observe carefully while the motions are run slowly under no load. Warm up the oil to the point where it will flow before putting the gearing under load. This task is critical to avoid serious damage to gearing. If the sump temperature is still below the pour point, a lighter grade of oil should be used. Oil selection will affect filter performance. When selecting filter elements, the viscosity, grade, and operating temperature must be considered. The viscosity of the oil will change with temperature. Normally, a 10 psi pressure drop is permitted across filters. To ensure that the filter element type and mesh is appropriate for the oil viscosity at the highest and lowest temperature, the oil temperature, oil viscosity at that temperature, and the flow through the filter must be known. Generally, the curves for filter elements are available from filter suppliers. The selection of gearcase oils must be made on the basis of conformance to P&H Specification 497 or 474, on the minimum viscosity requirements of 400 cSt at maximum operating temperature, and on the pour point of the oil vs. the minimum ambient temperature.

16.1.4 ISO Grade


It is recommended that only oils with an ISO grade designation be used. If a type of oil other than an ISO grade is to be used, consult with the manufacturer. Oils of the same ISO grade will typically have similar viscosity and pour point parameters. If unsure, compare proposed oils properties with those listed in Table 16-1. If significantly different, consult the manufacturer regarding suitability.

NOTICE
If the lubrication service recommendations in this manual conflict with those of the original equipment manufacturer, the original equipment manufacturers specifications take precedence.

CAUTION
Grease lubricants with different formulation bases are incompatible. Before using a different grease, check to be sure that the base of the new grease is compatible with the original. If not, all components in contact with the lubricant, including shafts and bearings, must be thoroughly purged of the old grease, removed from the system, and cleaned with solvent. Component failure will result if thorough cleaning is not done.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -16.3Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

Lubrication

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

16.2 Automatic Lubrication System


The automatic lubrication system supplies grease lubricant, Material Specification P&H 472 to specified lube points on the upper machinery, the crawlers, and each of the four leveling jacks. The NLGI grade of the grease must be appropriate for the prevailing ambient temperature range. P&H 472C is the preferred grade for all temperature ranges; however, at lower ambient temperature ranges, P&H 472A or 472B may be recommended by the lubrication supplier. Check the lubricant level at least weekly. Refill the reservoir as necessary. The auto lube system is controlled by the programmable logic controller (PLC). Refer to Section 8, Automatic Lubrication System. for a complete description.

16.3 Oil Bath Lubrication


All gear drives, including the pump drive transmission, and some of the other rotating equipment on the blasthole drill, are lubricated through self-contained oil bath reservoirs. Most of the equipment units that have self-contained lubricant reservoirs lubricate their internal components by immersion in the oil bath, or by splashing lubricant from the surface of the oil bath. The equipment within this category includes the following:

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

-16.4-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Lubrication

16.3.1 Pulldown Gearcase

LEGEND 01. Oil Level Sight Gauges 02. Inspection Cover with Breather

02

01

Figure 16-1: Lubrication, Pulldown Gearcase

The pulldown gearcase uses oil, Material Specification P&H 497. Viscosity is indicated by a letter, and should be selected according to expected extreme ambient temperatures. Refer to Table 16-2
<-20F (<-29C) 497C -20 to +20F (-29 to -7C) 497D +20 to 110F (-7 to 43C) 497F > 110F (>43C) 497H Capacity 70 Gallons (265 liters)

Table 16-2: Lubrication, Pulldown Gearcase

Check oil level at the sight glass every week and add oil as required. Change oil as specified in Table 16-9 or as indicated by oil analysis.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -16.5Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

Lubrication

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

16.3.2 Hydraulic Pump Drive Transmission


02 03
LEGEND 01. Magnetic Drain Plug 02. Vent Plug 03. Dipstick

01

BD0362b01

Figure 16-2: Lubrication, Hydraulic Pump Drive Transmission

The hydraulic pump drive transmission uses gear oil, Material Specification P&H 497. Viscosity is indicated by a letter, and should be selected according to expected extreme ambient temperatures. Refer to Table 16-3
< 85F (<29C) 497F >85F (>29C) 497H Capacity 2 Gallons (7.6 liters)

Table 16-3: Lubrication, Hydraulic Pump Drive Transmission

Check oil level on the dipstick every month and add oil as required. Change oil as specified in Table 16-9 or as indicated by oil analysis.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

-16.6-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Lubrication

16.3.3 Auxiliary Winch Gear Reducer

01

02

03

LEGEND 01. Relief Breather 02. Fill Plug 03. Drain Plug

BD0554a01

Figure 16-3: Lubrication, Auxiliary Winch Gear Reducer

The auxiliary winch gear reducer uses gear oil, Material Specification P&H 497. Viscosity is indicated by a letter, and should be selected according to expected extreme ambient temperatures. Refer to Figure 16-3.
<-20F (<-29C) 497C -20 to +20F (-29 to -7C) 497D +20 to 110F (-7 to 43C) 497F > 110F (>43C) 497H Capacity 1.3 Gallons (4.9 liters)

Table 16-4: Lubrication, Auxiliary Winch Gear Reducer

Check oil level in the auxiliary winch gear reducer every month and add oil as required. Change oil as specified in Table 16-9 or as indicated by oil analysis. Lubricate the auxiliary winch wire rope as required using Open Gear and Wire Rope Lubricant, Material Specification P&H 464.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -16.7Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

Lubrication

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

16.3.4 Cable Reel Gear Reducers

01

LEGEND 01. Right Angle Gearcase 02. Drum Bearing Grease Fitting (both sides) 03. Planetary Gear Reducer

02

03

BD0555a01

Figure 16-4: Lubrication, Cable Reel Gear Reducer

The cable reel gear reducers use gear oil, Material Specification P&H 497. Viscosity is indicated by a letter, and should be selected according the expected extreme ambient temperatures. Refer to Table 16-5.
<-20F (<-29C) 497C -20 to +20F (-29 to -7C) 497D +20 to 110F (-7 to 43C) 497F > 110F (>43C) 497H Capacity Right Angle Gear Drive 1.3 quarts (1.2 liter) Planetary Drive 5 quarts (4.7 liter) Table 16-5: Lubrication, Cable Reel Gear Reducer

Check oil level at the level plugs every week and add oil as required. Change oil as specified in Table 16-9 or as indicated by oil analysis. On either side of the frame, lubricate drum bearing grease fittings every week or after 40 hours of operation using extreme pressure grease, Material Specification P&H 472. P&H 472C is the preferred grade for all temperature

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

-16.8-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Lubrication

ranges; however, at lower ambient temperature ranges, P&H 472A or 472B may be recommended by the lubrication supplier.

16.3.5 Propel Transmissions

03 02

01

BD195a01

LEGEND 01. Drain Plug 02. Fill/Level Plug 03. Housing Figure 16-5: Lubrication, Propel Transmission

The propel transmissions use gear oil, Material Specification P&H 497. Viscosity is indicated by a letter, and should be selected according to the expected extreme ambient temperatures. Refer to Table 16-6
<-20F (<-29C) 497C -20 to +20F (-29 to -7C) 497D +20 to 110F (-7 to 43C) 497F > 110F (>43C) 497H Capacity 9.5 Gallons (36 liters)

Table 16-6: Lubrication, Cable Reel Gear Reducer

Check oil level at the level plugs every week and add oil as required.Change oil as specified in Table 16-9 or as indicated by oil analysis.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -16.9Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

Lubrication

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

16.4 Oil Pressure Lubrication


The rotary gearcase and the air compressor have enclosed, dedicated oil lubrication systems.

16.4.1 Rotary Gearcase

01

02

BD0556b01

03

LEGEND 01. Breather

02.Dipstick

03.Drain Plug

Figure 16-6: Lubrication, Rotary Gearcase

The rotary gearcase is a sealed unit with a self-contained oil bath sump and gear-driven pump that circulates lubricating oil, under pressure, to the bearings and gears. The rotary gearcase uses gear oil, Material Specification P&H 497. Viscosity is indicated by a letter, and should be selected according the expected extreme ambient temperatures. Refer to
<-20F (<-29C) 497C -20 to +20F (-29 to -7C) 497D +20 to 110F (-7 to 43C) 497F > 110F (>43C) 497H Capacity 40 Gallons (151 liters)

Table 16-7: Lubrication, Rotary Gearcase

Check oil level at the level plugs every week and add oil as required. Change oil as specified in Table 16-9 or as indicated by oil analysis.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

-16.10-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Lubrication

16.4.2 Air Compressor


16.4.2.1 T-Tank

01

02

03

BD0557b01

LEGEND 01. Fill Plug

02.Sight Gauge

03.Manual Drain Valve

Figure 16-7: Lubrication, Air Compressor T-Tank

The air compressor uses Dexron ATF in all ambient temperatures. The capacity is 100 US Gallons (378.54 liters). Check the oil level at the T-Tank sight gauge each shift or after each 8 hours of operation. Change oil as specified in Table 16-9 or as indicated by oil analysis.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -16.11Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

Lubrication

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

16.4.2.2 Main Air System Oil Filters

02

01

03

04

BD0729a01

LEGEND 01. Main Compressor Oil Filter (on compressor) 03. Oil Removal Filters (T-Tank) 04. Scavenger Oil Filter (on air control panel) Figure 16-8: Main Air System Oil Filter Locations

16.4.2.3 Compressor Oil Filters

02

01

03
LEGEND 01. Main Compressor Oil Filter (on compressor) 02. Compressor Bearing Oil Filter (on compressor) 03. Oil Removal Filters (T-Tank) 04. Scavenger Oil Filter (on air control panel) Figure 16-9: Compressor Oil Filter Locations

04

BD0729a01

Oil filters associated with the main air compressor are (refer to Figure 16-9):

The Main Compressor Oil Filter (01), mounted on the compressor, is a replaceable-element filter that filters
the majority of the oil returning to the compressor from the T-Tank.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

-16.12-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Lubrication

The Compressor Bearing Oil Filter (02), mounted on the compressor, is a spin-on filter that filters the oil
used to lubricate the bearing on the air end.

The two Oil Removal Filters (03) are an integral part of the T-Tank. They remove the oil vapor from the outgoing pressurized air for return to the compressor.

The Scavenger Oil Filter (04), mounted on the air control panel, is a spin-on filter that filters the oil returning
through the scavenger lines from the Oil Removal Filters (03). Check the condition of the Main Compressor Oil Filter and the two Oil Removal Filters every week or after 40 hours of operation. Refer to and check the filters as follows:

CIPS

MAPS

MAPT

TANK FILTER

SUB PILOT VALVE OPENS AT 58 PSI

01
COPS BAPT

COMP. FILTER

02

BD0509d01

LEGEND 01. Oil Separator Filter Pressure Differential Switch and Gauge 02. Main Compressor Oil Filter Pressure Differential Switch and Gauge Figure 16-10: Checking Filter Pressure Differentials

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -16.13Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

Lubrication

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Check the Oil Separator Filters by observing the gauge on valve (01) while turning the handle first to one position and then the other. Follow the same procedure for the Main Compressor Oil Filter by using valve (02). In both instances, if the difference in pressure is greater than 8 psi, change the filter. Procedure to change the main oil filter follows this subtopic; for the procedure to change the separator filters, refer to Subsection 6.3.4.1.

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine operation while performing manual lubrication tasks.
Lock out and tag out the operator controls to prevent inadvertent drill operation.

CAUTION

Pressurized oil will spray with extreme force from the compressor main oil filter when being loosened, and can cause severe injury. Slowly release air pressure or vent the TTank before loosening the filter canister. Wear appropriate face, ear, and body protective devices while opening the canister.
Change the Compressor Bearing Oil Filter and the Scavenger Oil Filter every month or after 160 hours of operation. Remove the filter by rotating the filter body anticlockwise. To install an new filter, coat the gasket with ATF and rotate the new filter body clockwise to thread it onto the stem. The main compressor oil filter has an indicator to help determine when the filter needs to be changed. Change the element in the main compressor filter after 160 hours of operation or when the filter indicator indicates in the CHANGE FILTER area (refer to

CH

TE

GE

FI

GE

FI

BD0558a01

Normal Operation

Change Filter condition

Figure 16-11: Main Compressor Oil Filter Indicator

Refer to Figure 16-12 and change the element as follows:

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

-16.14-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

TE

CH

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Lubrication

LEGEND 01. Spring 02. Filter Element 03. Seal 04. Baffle 05. Head O-ring 06. Indicator O-ring 07. Snap Ring 08. Tee Handle O-ring 09. Tee Handle 10. Head Assembly 11. Indicator Assembly 12. Housing 13. Flow Switch

04

08 07 06 05 03

09 10

11

12

02

13

01

BD0559a01

Figure 16-12: Changing Main Compressor Oil Filter

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine operation while performing manual lubrication tasks.
1. Lock out and tag out the operator controls to prevent inadvertent drill operation. 2. Change the filter element if any of the following conditions exists:

the filter indicator is in the red CHANGE FILTER position; the GUI has issued a fain compressor oil filter fault; it has been more than six months since the last filter element change; or the differential switch and gauge on the air control panel registers a difference of 8 psi or greater.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -16.15Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

Lubrication

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

CAUTION

Pressurized oil will spray with extreme force from the compressor main oil filter when being loosened, and can cause severe injury. Slowly release air pressure or vent the TTank before loosening the filter canister. Wear appropriate face, ear, and body protective devices while opening the canister.
A. Vent any residual air from the T-Tank. B. Remove the filter head (10) by rotating handle (09) anticlockwise until the head is free of the housing (12). C. Hold the baffle (04) down and push down on the indicator assembly (11) to be sure it moves freely up and down within the baffle. D. Remove the baffle (04) and check the bore for nicks. Smooth the bore if necessary and replace seal (03) if it is damaged. E. Remove the element (02) from the housing (12). Remove the indicator assembly (11) from the element using a screwdriver between the indicator assembly and the element cap and carefully prying downward. Inspect the O-ring (06) and replace it if necessary. F. Remove the O-ring (05) from the head (10) and replace it if necessary. Clean the O-ring area of the head, lubricate a new O-ring with oil and reinstall the O-ring in the head. G. Install indicator assembly (11) into the new element(02). Place the element into housing (12) being sure the large diameter of spring (01) contacts the new element. Install the baffle (04). H. Place the head (10) on the housing (12) and turn the handle (09) clockwise until it is hand tight. Do not exceed 20 ft-lb (26 Nm). I. If leakage appears around the handle (09), remove the snap ring (07) and remove the handle from the head. Discard the O-ring (08) and reassemble the unit with a new O-ring.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

-16.16-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Lubrication

16.5 Hydraulic Tank


07
LEGEND 01. Suction Filters 02. Temperature Probe 03. Hydraulic Tank 04. Low Level Switch 05. Breather 06. Return Filters 07. Oil Level Gauge Placard 008.Oil Level Sight Gauge

06 05 02 03 04

01

08 09 10

11
Figure 16-13: Hydraulic Tank

BD0361a01

The hydraulic tank uses Dexron ATF. Check the sight gauge at the beginning of each shift or after 8 hours of operation. Replenish the oil level using the supplemental oil tank mounted near the air compressor. Every week of operation, inspect the visual indicators on the suction filters and on the return filters. Also check the color of the desiccant in the breather cartridge. Change the filters and the breathers when indicated. Drain, flush and refill the hydraulic system as specified in Table 16-9 or as indicated by oil analysis. The stated capacity of the hydraulic tank is 125 US Gallons (482 liters); however, the placard next to the sight gauge is the final determiner of maximum and minimum oil levels, depending on the physical condition of the drill (mast up or down, jacks extended or retracted). Refer to Figure 16-14.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -16.17Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

Lubrication

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

MAXIMUM MAST DOWN AND JACKS FULLY RETRACTED

MAXIMUM MAST UP AND JACKS FULLY RETRACTED

MAXIMUM MAST DOWN AND JACKS FULLY EXTENDED

MAXIMUM MAST UP AND JACKS FULLY EXTENDED

MINIMUM 3.2 GALLONS / INCH


| | | | | | | | | | | |

4.8 LITERS / CENTIMETER


BD0560a01

| | | | | | | | |

Figure 16-14: Hydraulic Tank Level Sight Gauge and Temperature Gauge

P&H Mining Equipment recommends that a sample of oil be drawn from the hydraulic tank annually. This sample should be about two quarts (two liters) and should be taken when the oil is warmed through normal operation. The sample should be analyzed by a qualified lubrication specialist to determine whether it is suitable for continued use. The interval between oil changes may be extended based upon the operating conditions and on the care used in handling oils and in keeping them clean during the handling process.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

| | | | | | | |

NOTICE

-16.18-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Lubrication

16.6 Manual Lubrication Points


!

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine operation while performing manual lubrication tasks.

16.6.1 General
16.6.1.1 Lube Points Without Fittings
Miscellaneous pins, levers and linkages that move but are not considered wear surfaces should be lubricated weekly or as required by administering a few drops of motor oil as indicated on Figure 16-8.
< 20F (< -7C) SAE 10W +20 to 110F (-7 to 43C) SAE 15W40 >110F (>43C) SAE 30

Table 16-8: Lubrication, Miscellaneous Pins, Levers and Linkages

16.6.1.2 Lube Points with Grease Fittings


Lubrication points that are provided with grease fittings use extreme pressure lithium grease, Material Specification P&H 472. The preferred grade is a synthetic grade NLGI #1. A non-synthetic grade NLGI #2 is a suitable alternative. A non-synthetic NLGI #1 or #0 may be required for proper dispensing at low temperatures or by centralized lubrication systems.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -16.19Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

Lubrication

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

16.6.2 Pipe Rack


01

02

LEGEND 01. Grease Fittings (7 fittings per pipe rack) 02. Pivot Points (4 lube points per pipe rack)

01 01

BD0544b01

Figure 16-15: Lubrication, Pipe Racks

Lubricate pivot points with motor oil weekly or as required. Refer to Subtopic 16.6.1.1. Lubricate grease fittings on the pipe racks with EP grease every week of operation. Refer to Subtopic 16.6.1.2.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

-16.20-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Lubrication

16.6.3 Mast Back Braces

01

01 01 02

02

01
BD0562a01

LEGEND 01. Pin (4 pins) 02. Slide Area (6 slide areas) Figure 16-16: Lubrication, Mast Back Braces

Every month of operation, lubricate slide areas with EP Grease (refer to Subtopic 16.6.1.2) and lubricate pins on the mast back brace with motor oil (refer to Subtopic 16.6.1.1).

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -16.21Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

Lubrication

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

16.6.4 Rotary Carriage Roller Assemblies

01

LEGEND 01. Grease Fittings (4 fittings total)

01
BD0552b01

Figure 16-17: Lubrication, Backup Roller Assemblies

Lubricate the fittings on the rotary carriage roller carrier eccentric bushings with IP grease every month of operation. Refer to Subtopic 16.6.1.2.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

-16.22-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Lubrication

16.7 Lubrication Schedule


16.7.1 Reference Numbers
Figure 16-18 and Figure 16-19 provide reference numbers for the Lubrication Schedule in Figure 16-9.

01

05 06

07

03 04 08 09 10

02

01

11 12

BD00356b01

Figure 16-18: Manual Lubricant Point Reference Diagram #1

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -16.23Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

Lubrication

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

106

107 104 105 108

109 110 111

113 103 114

101 102 115

116

117 118

BD0378e01

Figure 16-19: Manual Lubrication Point Reference Diagram #2

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

-16.24-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Lubrication

16.7.2 Lubrication Schedule


Time Interval Ref Number from Diagram Component Description Required Service Lubricate References

Weekly or As Required

Miscellaneous Pins, Levers and Linkages without grease fittings

Table 16-8 Figure 16-15 Figure 16-16 Figure 16-16 Figure 16-3 Figure 16-13 Figure 16-7 Figure 16-15 Figure 16-2 Figure 16-6 Figure 16-5 Figure 16-13

114 Daily or Every 8-12 Hours 104 101 02 05 03 11 108 106 113 103 107 Monthly or Every 250-300 Hours 08 10 07 115 109

Auxiliary Winch Wire Rope Hydraulic Oil Reservoir Air Compressor Oil Reservoir (T-Tank) Pipe Racks Pulldown Gearcase Rotary Gearcase Propel Transmission Hydraulic Suction Filters Hydraulic Return Line Filters Air Compressor Oil Filter Air Compressor Oil Separator Auto-Lube Grease Reservoir Cable Reel Right Angle Gear Reducer Cable Reel Drum Bearings Rotary Carriage Roller Assemblies Auxiliary Winch Gear Case Pump Drive Transmission

Lubricate Check Level Check Level Lubricate Check Level Check Level Check Level Check Indicators Check Indicators Check Indicator Check Gauge Check Dipstick Check Level Lubricate Lubricate Check Level Check Dipstick

Weekly or Every 75-100 Hours

Figure 16-8 Figure 16-10 Subtopic 16.8.3 Figure 16-4

Figure 16-16 Figure 16-3 Figure 16-2

Table 16-9: Lubrication Schedule

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -16.25Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

Lubrication

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Time Interval

Ref Number from Diagram 04 12 112 102 110 111

Component Description

Required Service Change Oil Change Oil Replace Change Oil Change Oil Replace Change Oil Change Oil Change Oil Change Oil

References

Semi-Annually or Every 1800-2000 Hours

Rotary Gearcase Propel Transmission Main Compressor Bearing Oil Filter Main Compressor Oil Pump Drive Transmission Charge Filters Cable Reel Right Angle Drive Reducer Auxiliary Winch Gear Case Pulldown Gearcase Hydraulic Tank

Figure 16-6 Figure 16-5 Figure 16-8 Figure 16-7 Figure 16-2 Subsection 4.3.6 Figure 16-4 Figure 16-3 Figure 16-2 Figure 16-13 Figure 16-14

Annually or Every 3600-4000 Hours

09 116 06 105

Table 16-9: Lubrication Schedule

16.8 Lubricant Specifications


16.8.1 Material Specification P&H 464
Open Gear Lubricant
Ver 09, 04-93

CAUTION
Using incorrect lubricants can cause substantial equipment damage. The material specifications listed in this manual are current at the time of publication, and are intended to be used for reference only. Contact your local P&H MinePro Services representative for the current specifications.
1.0 SCOPE 1.1 This specification covers open gear lubricants with highly fortified blends of viscous oils combined with additives to form a stable, long lasting, high load carrying and wear resistant films that lubricate under boundary conditions. 1.2 Materials furnished under this specification are intended to lubricate open gears, racks, bushings, rails, rollers, dipper handles and walk mechanisms. These applications are subject to extreme contact pressures, reversing loads and peripheral speeds of up to 1,200 feet per minute/366 meters per minute, while operating under varied weather conditions.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

-16.26-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Lubrication

1.3 Materials furnished under this specifications are intended to be dispensed intermittently by centralized lubrication systems of the single line parallel, single line progressive series, and/or dual line progressive construction. 1.4 This specification covers all grades of open gear lubricants that are usable from -50F/-46C to 120F/49C. The particular grade selected must perform in the specific temperature range in which it is utilized. 1.5 Materials furnished under this specification may be semi-fluid asphaltic or non-asphaltic, greases or pastes. Specific product selection will depend on climate, application, performance and regulatory requirements. 1.6 Materials furnished under this specification are not intended for use in moderate to high speed anti-friction bearings. 2.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS 2.1 ASTM D92/ISO 2592 - Flash Point, COC Method 2.2 ASTM D1404 - Deleterious Particles Test 2.3 ASTM D1743 - Rust Protection 2.4 ASTM D2266 - Four Ball Wear Test 2.5 ASTM D2596 - Four Ball EP Test 2.6 ASTM D4048 - Copper Strip Corrosion Test 2.7 Grease Pumpability, Lincoln Ventability (Ventmeter) test 3.0 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS 3.1 These open gear lubricants must have excellent adhesive and cohesive qualities, must not chip or throw off, and must provide sufficient film thickness to prevent metal to metal contact between applications under all operating conditions. 3.2 These open gear lubricants must have excellent water resistant and rust preventive qualities. 3.3 These open gear lubricants must have retarded dripping qualities for operation at various temperatures. 3.4 These open gear lubricants must be specifically formulated to protect surfaces, reduce wear, and provide normal component service life under all anticipated operating conditions. 3.5 These material shall meet applicable safety, health and environmental regulations. 4.0 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
PROPERTY Flash point, ASTM D92/ISO 2592, minimum F/C Four ball EP test, ASTM D2596, weld point, minimum kgf, Asphaltic Compounds Non-asphaltic Compounds, Greases, Pastes Table 16-10: Performance Requirements, Material Specification P&H 464 REQUIREMENT 175/79 250 400

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -16.27Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

Lubrication

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Four ball wear test, ASTM D2266, 60 minutes @ 40 kgf, maximum scar, mm Rust protection, ASTM D1743 Rating Copper strip corrosion, ASTM D4048 Max. rating, 24hrs @ 100C/212F Deleterious particles, ASTM D1404, Max. number of scratches Adhesive properties

1.0 Pass 1b 20 Must adhere to surfaces at lowest anticipated temperature 400 (1)

Pumpability, Lincoln ventability test, nominal maximum psi @ lowest anticipated ambient temperature

Table 16-10: Performance Requirements, Material Specification P&H 464

(1) Consult lubricant system component manufacturer regarding any deviations from this requirement. 5.0 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS 5.1 The material furnished under this specification must be dispensable through the distribution lines of a centralized lubrication system to the most remote application point, at the lowest anticipated operating temperature. It must not plate or plug components of the centralized lubrication system such as injectors, metering blocks or spray nozzles. 5.2 When the material furnished under this specification is formulated with solid film additives, particle size must not exceed 100 microns. 5.3 Should the material furnished under this specification contain a diluent to improve dispensability, special care must be exercised to insure its compatibility with all centralized lubrication system components, i.e., gaskets, orings, vent valves, etc. 5.4 Diluent containing lubricants furnished under this specification must conform to the performance requirements provided in Section 4.0 after the diluent has evaporated. 6.0 IDENTIFICATION AND PACKAGING 6.1 Containers must be clearly identified by the supplier with the following information: 6.1.1 Purchase Order Number 6.1.2 Supplier's Name and Product Trade Name 6.1.3 P&H Material Specification Number followed by a brief description: 6.1.3.1 P&H No. 464 - Asphaltic Type Open Gear Lubricant or 6.1.3.2 P&H No. 464 - Paste Type Open Gear Lubricant 6.1.4 Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) - One (1) with each shipment

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

-16.28-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Lubrication

6.2 The lubricant furnished under this specification must be supplied in clean containers of the size(s) as specified on the purchase order. 7.0 INSPECTION AT PURCHASER'S WORKS 7.1 Acceptance of material furnished under this specification shall be subjected to confirmation by Customer's Quality Assurance Department. 7.2 The purchaser shall have the option of accepting or rejecting any material failing to meet the requirements of this specification. 8.0 ADDITIONAL CRITERIA OF ACCEPTANCE 8.1 Conformance to all specified requirements shall not constitute the sole basis of acceptance since all lubricants must be judged further on their satisfactory field performance Harnischfeger Corporation equipment. 8.2 Relubrication volume and frequency can directly affect the performance of a lubricant and the economies of operation. Consult the equipment shop manual and lubricant supplier for the relubrication volume, and frequency for each application. 8.3 The suitability of a lubricant is highly dependent upon environmental conditions. It is the consumer's responsibility to provide lubricant suppliers with the following: 8.3.1 Actual application and copy of this specification. 8.3.2 Environmental data - temperature range and weather conditions. 8.3.3 Type of centralized lubrication system(s). 8.4 It is the responsibility of the consumer to verify that lubricants conform to applicable environmental and safety codes governing their use and disposal.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -16.29Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

Lubrication

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

16.8.2 Material Specification P&H 469


Grease - Multi-purpose, Extreme Pressure, Aluminum Complex Soap Base, Liquilon Solid Lubricant Additive
Ver 01, 01-80

CAUTION
Using incorrect lubricants can cause substantial equipment damage. The material specifications listed in this manual are current at the time of publication, and are intended to be used for reference only. Contact your local P&H MinePro Services representative for the current specifications.
1.0 SCOPE 1.1 Material furnished under this specification is a multi-purpose aluminum complex soap grease lubricant. It is characterized by its excellent water resistance, thermal and shear stability, and compatibility with all other types of greases. 1.2 This grease contains a derivative of polytetrafluoroethylene as a solid lubricant additive. This additive has the registered trade name LIQUILON. 1.3 This grease is intended for lubricating components during assembly. It can be sued in equipment having grease fittings and in centralized distribution systems. (Note (a) under Paragraph 2). 2.0 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES 2.1 This lubricant must be an Aluminum Complex Soap Base, Multi-Purpose Extreme Pressure Grease containing LIQUILON. It must be formulated to resist oxidation and corrosion, oil separation, caking, and water washout. 2.2 Material furnished under this specification shall conform to the following physical requirements.
P&H Grade N.L.G.I. Consistency Suggested Operating Temperature Range oF (a) Penetration at 77 oF Worked 60 Strokes Dropping Point oF Minimum Bomb Oxidation Stability Pressure Drop 100 Hours, ASTM D942, Latest Issue Oil Separation 50 hours at 210 oF Extreme Pressure Properties Timken OK Load, Lbs. Weld Point Kg, Minimum 469 #2EP 0 to +400 265-295 475 5 psi 5.0% Max. 469A #1EP -15 to +400 330-340 475 5 psi 7.0% Max.

75 325

75 325

Table 16-11: Physical Requirements, Material Specification P&H 469

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

-16.30-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Lubrication

Mineral Oil Specifications Viscosity @ 100 oF Viscosity @ 210 oF Flash Point oF Minimum Pour Point oF Maximum

800-1200 75-90
425 0

800-1200 75-90
425 0

Table 16-11: Physical Requirements, Material Specification P&H 469

(a) Consult manufacturer's manual for correct consistency when used in centralized distribution systems. 2.3 Conformance to the above requirements shall not constitute the sole basis of acceptance since all lubricants must be judged further on their satisfactory field performance in Harnischfeger equipment. 3.0 PACKAGING 3.1 This grease lubricant is available in 400 lb. drums, 120 lb. kegs, 35 lb. pails, and hand gun cartridges. The container shall be specified on the purchase order to the supplier. 4.0 IDENTIFICATION 4.1 Containers must be clearly identified by the supplier with the following information: 4.1.1 Purchase Order Number 4.1.2 Supplier's Name and Product Trade Name 4.1.3 P&H Material Specification Number as specified by Purchase Order 5.0 INSPECTION AT PURCHASER'S WORKS 5.1 Acceptance of material furnished under this specification shall be subject to confirmation by Customer's Materials Engineering Department. 5.2 The Purchaser shall have the option of accepting or rejecting material that fails to meet any of the requirements of this specification. 5.3 In the event of rejection, the supplier will be notified, and the material will be returned at his expense. 6.0 SUPPLIERS AND TRADE NAMES 6.1 WESO Corporation P&H 469 - Allex EP-2L P&H 469A - Allex EP-1L

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -16.31Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

Lubrication

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

16.8.3 Material Specification P&H 472


Multipurpose Grease Extreme Pressure (EP)
Ver 12, 03-01

CAUTION
Using incorrect lubricants can cause substantial equipment damage. The material specifications listed in this manual are current at the time of publication, and are intended to be used for reference only. Contact your local P&H MinePro Services representative for the current specifications.
1.0 SCOPE 1.1 This specification covers premium multipurpose, extreme pressure greases with essential properties and characteristics that make them suitable for use in diversified applications through a wide range of ambient temperatures. Both mineral and synthetic base oils may be used to formulate greases that comply with this specification. 1.2 Materials furnished under this specification are intended to lubricate bushings, plain and rolling element bearings, and miscellaneous items on Harnischfeger Corporation equipment requiring a grease. 1.3 Materials furnished under this specification may be applied by hand, hand pressure guns, pneumatic or electric pressure guns, or centralized lubrication systems of the single line parallel, single line progressive series, and/or dual line progressive construction. 1.4 P&H 472 (no suffix) from Issue No. 9 is the same as P&H 472C in this specification. 1.5 P&H 472D is primarily intended to lubricate bearings in Magnetorque Assemblies, and bearings and gears in hoists and cranes where long life of lubricant is demanded, and high temperature operation may be expected in both intermittent and continuous duty. Other product uses include high speed electric motor bearings; ball, roller and journal bearings - medium to high temperature and high temperature applications; bearings subject to water, steam, chemicals and contaminants; and bearings subject to heavy thrust or shock loads. 2.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS 2.1 ASTM D217/ISO 2137 - Determination of Cone Penetration 2.2 ASTM D445/ISO 3104, D 2161 - Kinematic Viscosity 2.3 ASTM D566/ISO 2176 - Determination of Dropping Point 2.4 ASTM D942 - Oxidation Stability, Oxygen Bomb Method 2.5 ASTM D1264 - Water Washout Resistance 2.6 ASTM D1404 - Deleterious Particles Test 2.7 ASTM D1743 - Rust Protection 2.8 ASTM D1831 - Roll Stability Test 2.9 ASTM D2265 - Determination of dropping point over a wide temperature range 2.10 ASTM D2509 - Timken EP Test 2.11 ASTM D2596 - Four Ball EP Test 2.12 ASTM D4048 - Copper Strip Corrosion Test 2.13 DIN 51 802/IP220, EMCOR Rust Protection Test 2.14 Grease Pumpability, Lincoln Ventability (Ventmeter) Test 3.0 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

-16.32-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Lubrication

3.1 These lubricating greases shall be manufactured with a lithium 12-hydroxystearate, lithium complex, or other thickeners provided care is taken by the end user to avoid grease incompatibility in Harnischfeger equipment. Thickeners such as clay base, polyurea or calcium may result in incompatibilities. Always consult lubricant suppliers before changing types or brands of greases. 3.2 These lubricating greases must contain extreme pressure additives, and be formulated to resist oxidation, corrosion, separation, and water washout. 3.3 These lubricating greases must have chemical and mechanical stability to maintain consistency and performance characteristics throughout their intended service life. 3.4 The NLGI grade of the grease must be appropriate for the prevailing ambient temperature range. A lithium complex synthetic grease which meets the requirements of P&H 472B is the preferred grade for all temperature ranges. A lithium complex non-synthetic grease which meets the requirements of P&H 472C is a suitable alternative. At lower ambient temperature ranges, a lithium complex non-synthetic grease which meets the requirements of P&H 472A or P&H 472B may be recommended by the lubrication supplier. 3.5 These materials shall meet applicable safety, health, and environmental regulations. 4.0 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
P&H Grade NLGI grade (1) Worked penetration ASTM D217/ISO 2137 @ 60 strokes, 25C/77F Dropping point, ASTM D566/ISO 2176 or ASTM D2265, Min., C/F Base fluid viscosity, ASTM D445/ISO 3104; D2161, Min. mm2/s @ 40C Oxidation stability, ASTM D942, Max. pressure drop @ 100 hrs., kPa/psi Roll stability, ASTM D1831 Max. points change Water washout, ASTM D1264, Max. % loss @ 79C/175F Rust Protection, ASTM D1743 Rating EMCOR Rust Protection DIN 51 802/IP 220, Min. rating Copper strip corrosion, ASTM D4048 Max. rating, 24 hrs @ 100C/212F Timken EP Test, ASTM D2509 Min OK value, kg/lbs Four ball EP, ASTM D2596 - Weld load, Min. kgf Load wear index, Min. kgf 472A 0 355-385 Not Applicable 68 35/5 30 Not Applicable 472B 1 310-340 177/350 100 35/5 30 10 472C 2 265-295 177/350 220 35/5 30 10 472D 2 265-295 260/500 220 35/5 30 10

Pass
0,0 2 20/45

Pass
0,0 2 20/45

Pass
0,0 2 20/45

Pass
0,0 2 20/45

315 45

315 45

315 45

315 45

Table 16-12: Performance Requirements, Material Specification P&H 472

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -16.33Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

Lubrication

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Deleterious particles, ASTM D1404, Max. number of scratches Pumpability(2), Lincoln Ventability test, Nominal max. psi @ lowest anticipated ambient temperature,

20 400(3)

20 400(3)

20 400(3)

20 400(3)

(1) The preferred grade is NLGI #2. However, an NLGI #1 or #0 may be required for proper dispensing at low temperatures, or by centralized lubrication systems. See section 7.3 (2) This is applicable for use only in centralized lubrication systems. (3) Consult lubrication system component manufacturer regarding any deviations from this requirement.
Table 16-12: Performance Requirements, Material Specification P&H 472

5.0 IDENTIFICATION AND PACKAGING 5.1 Containers must be clearly identified by the supplier with the following information: 5.1.1 Purchase Order Number 5.1.2 Suppliers Name and Product Trade Name 5.1.3 P&H Material Specification Number followed by a letter which will indicate a particular consistency grade in accordance with the following: 5.1.3.1 P&H Number 472A - NLGI #0 EP 5.1.3.2 P&H Number 472B - NLGI #1 EP 5.1.3.3 P&H Number 472C - NLGI #2 EP 5.1.3.4 P&H Number 472D - NLGI #2 EP 5.1.4 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) - One (1) with each shipment. 5.2 The lubricant furnished under this specification shall be supplied in clean containers of the size(s) as specified on the purchase order. 6.0 INSPECTION AT PURCHASER'S WORKS 6.1 Acceptance of material furnished under this specification shall be subjected to confirmation by purchaser's Quality Assurance Department. 6.2 The purchaser shall have the option of accepting or rejecting any material failing to meet the requirements of this specification. 7.0 ADDITIONAL CRITERIA OF ACCEPTANCE 7.1 Conformance to all specified requirements shall not constitute the sole basis of acceptance, since all lubricants must be judged further on their satisfactory field performance in Harnischfeger Corporation equipment

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

-16.34-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Lubrication

7.2 Relubrication volume and frequency can directly affect the performance of a lubricant and the economies of operation. Consult the equipment shop manual and lubricant supplier for the proper relubrication volume and frequency for each application. 7.3 The suitability of a lubricant is highly dependent upon environmental conditions. It is the consumer's responsibility to provide lubricant suppliers with the following: 7.3.1 Actual application and copy of this specification. 7.3.2 Environmental data - ambient temperature range and weather conditions. 7.3.3 Type of centralized lubrication system(s). 7.4 It is the responsibility of the consumer to verify that lubricants conform to applicable environmental and safety codes governing their use and disposal.

NOTICE
The preferred grade is a synthetic grade NLGI #1. A non-synthetic grade NLGI #2 is a suitable alternative. A non-synthetic NLGI #1 or #0 may be required for proper dispensing at low temperatures or by centralized lubrication systems. See Section 7.3

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -16.35Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

Lubrication

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

16.8.4 Material Specification P&H 474


Synthetic Gear Oil - Extreme Pressure (EP)
Ver 05, 02-95

CAUTION
Using incorrect lubricants can cause substantial equipment damage. The material specifications listed in this manual are current at the time of publication, and are intended to be used for reference only. Contact your local P&H MinePro Services representative for the current specifications.
1.0 SCOPE 1.1 This specification covers premium gear oils produced from synthetic or semi-synthetic base stocks and compounded with extreme pressure additives for high load carrying ability. 1.1.1 Materials furnished to Issue No. 3 of this specification had a single flash point requirement whereas this issue now covers a variety of ambient temperatures. 1.2 Materials furnished under this specification are intended to lubricate gears, bushings, plain and rolling element bearings, sprockets, chain drives, and other components enclosed in oil-tight housings, and operating under high speed, high torque, high shock load, and/or high speed, low torque conditions. WARNING: Do not use oils containing EP additives or other friction modifiers in applications containing internal mechanical load brakes, backstops or clutches. Additionally, certain EP formulations may not be compatible with bronze gears as found in worm gear cases. 1.3 Materials furnished under this specification may be used in sump (splash), circulating, or total-loss applications. 1.4 Materials furnished under this specification may be used as replacements for P&H specification 496 or 498 gear oils, when extremes in ambient temperatures require seasonal changes to different viscosities. Consult Harnischfeger Corporate Engineering or Service prior to making such a substitution. 1.5 Materials furnished under this specification are intended for use in applications where MIL-L-2105 (latest issue) and/or API Service GL-5 gear oils are a requirement. 1.6 Materials furnished under this specification are not intended for use in applications where bulk oil operating temperatures routinely range from 77C/170F to 107C/225F. 2.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS 2.1 ASTM D92/ISO 2592 - Flash Point, COC Method 2.2 ASTM D97/ISO 3016 - Pour Point 2.3 ASTM D130/ISO 2160 - Copper Strip Corrosion Test 2.4 ASTM D445/ISO 3104, D2161 - Kinematic Viscosity 2.5 ASTM D665/ISO 7120 - Rust Test

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

-16.36-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Lubrication

2.6 ASTM D892 - Foam Stability 2.7 ASTM D2270/ISO 2909 - Viscosity Index 2.8 ASTM D2422/ISO 3448 - ISO Viscosity Classifications 2.9 ASTM D2711 - Demulsibility 2.10 ASTM D2782 - Timken EP Test 2.11 ASTM D2783 - Four Ball EP Test 2.12 ASTM D2893 - Oxidation Stability 2.13 DIN 51 354 - FZG Test 3.0 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS 3.1 These gear oils must be formulated with full synthetic or semi-synthetic base fluids.

CAUTION
Numerous types of synthetic and semi-synthetic fluid formulations may be applicable to this specification, some of which may be chemically incompatible. Therefore, to avoid equipment damage, different brands or types of synthetic or semi-synthetic fluids should not be intermixed such as during system top-off, without consulting the lubricant supplier(s).
3.2 These lubricants may not contain viscosity or viscosity index enhancers that are subject to breakdown under extended shearing conditions. 3.3 These lubricants must have chemical and physical stability to maintain viscosity and performance characteristics throughout their intended service life. 3.4 Any EP or other friction modifiers used in the formulation of these lubricants must be fully oil soluble, and/or be in a stable colloidal suspension. 3.5 These materials shall meet applicable safety, health and environmental regulations. 4.0 P&H IDENTIFICATION NUMBER AND VISCOSITY GRADE P&H No. 474A, ISO VG 32, AGMA 0 EP P&H No. 474B, ISO VG 46, AGMA 1 EP P&H No. 474C, ISO VG 68, AGMA 2 EP P&H No. 474D, ISO VG 100, AGMA 3 EP P&H No. 474E, ISO VG 150, AGMA 4 EP P&H No. 474F, ISO VG 220, AGMA 5 EP P&H No. 474G, ISO VG 320, AGMA 6 EP P&H No. 474H, ISO VG 460, AGMA 7 EP P&H No. 474I, ISO VG 680, AGMA 8 EP P&H No. 474J, ISO VG 1000, AGMA 8A EP P&H No. 474K, ISO VG 1500, AGMA 9 EP

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -16.37Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

Lubrication

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

5.0 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS


Viscosity grade Viscosity Viscosity index, ASTM D2270/ ISO 2909, Min. Cleanliness Additive solubility Pour point, ASTM D97/ISO 3016, Max. Flash point, ASTM D92/ ISO 2592, Min. Rust Test, ASTM D665/ ISO 7120 Procedure A Procedure B Copper strip corrosion, ASTM D130/ISO 2160, 3hrs @ 100C/ 212F, Max. Oxidation stability, ASTM D2893, @ 121C/250F Max. % viscosity increase ISO VG 32 - 1500, AGMA 0EP - 9EP. In accordance with ASTM D2422/ISO 3448 In accordance with ASTM D445/ISO 3104/ D2161 120 (1) Must be free of visible contaminants Must be filterable to 25 microns (Beta 25 = 200 filter rating) without loss of additive(s) 5C/9F below the lowest anticipated ambient temperature 240C/464F Pass Pass

1b

6 (Viscosity grades 32 thru 680) 10 (Viscosity grades 1000 thru 1500)

Table 16-13: Performance Requirements, Material Specification P&H 474

Foam Suppression, ASTM D892

Must be within these limits: Temperature Max. volume of foam (ml) after: 5 min blow Seq. I 24C/75F Seq. II 93.5C/200F Seq. III 24C/75F 75 75 75 10 min blow 10 10 10

Table 16-14: Additional Performance Requirements, Material Specification P&H 474

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

-16.38-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Lubrication

Demulsibility, ASTM D2711

Must be within these limits: (2) Max % water in oil after 5 hr test Max cuff after centrifuging Min total free water collected during entire test (start with 90 ml water) 1.0 2.0 ml 60.0 ml

Four ball EP test, ASTM D2783 Timken EP test, ASTM D2782 FZG test, DIN 51 354 with A/8.3/90C

Weld load, Min. kgf Load wear index, Min. kgf Min. OK value, kg/lbs

250 55 27/60

parameters, Min. fail stage

> 12

Table 16-14: Additional Performance Requirements, Material Specification P&H 474

(1) Esters having a lower viscosity index and meeting all other requirements of this specification may be used in specific applications where proper viscosity at operating temperature has been verified. (2) Polyglycols which will not pass the demulsibility test, but meet all other requirements of this specification, may be used in specific applications where there is no danger of water contamination. 6.0 IDENTIFICATION AND PACKAGING 6.1 Containers must be clearly identified by the supplier with the following information: 6.1.1 Purchase Order Number 6.1.2 Supplier's Name and Product Trade Name 6.1.3 P&H Material Specification Number followed by a letter which will indicate a particular viscosity grade in accordance with the following: 6.1.3.1 P&H No. 474A, ISO VG 32, AGMA 0 EP 6.1.3.2 P&H No. 474B, ISO VG 46, AGMA 1 EP 6.1.3.3 P&H No. 474C, ISO VG 68, AGMA 2 EP 6.1.3.4 P&H No. 474D, ISO VG 100, AGMA 3 EP 6.1.3.5 P&H No. 474E, ISO VG 150, AGMA 4 EP 6.1.3.6 P&H No. 474F, ISO VG 220, AGMA 5 EP 6.1.3.7 P&H No. 474G, ISO VG 320, AGMA 6 EP

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -16.39Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

Lubrication

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

6.1.3.8 P&H No. 474H, ISO VG 460, AGMA 7 EP 6.1.3.9 P&H No. 474I, ISO VG 680, AGMA 8 EP 6.1.3.10 P&H No. 474J, ISO VG 1000, AGMA 8A EP 6.1.3.11 P&H No. 474K, ISO VG 1500, AGMA 9 EP 6.1.4 Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) - One (1) with each shipment. 6.2 The lubricant furnished under this specification shall be supplied in clean containers of the size(s) as specified on the purchase order. 7.0 INSPECTION AT PURCHASER'S WORKS 7.1 Acceptance of material furnished under this specification shall be subjected to confirmation by customer's Quality Assurance Department. 7.2 The purchaser shall have the option of accepting or rejecting any material failing to meet the requirements of this specification. 8.0 ADDITIONAL CRITERIA OF ACCEPTANCE 8.1 Conformance to all specified requirements shall not constitute the sole basis of acceptance, since all lubricants must be judged further on their satisfactory field performance in Harnischfeger Corporation equipment. 8.2 Lubricant change frequency, or relubrication volume and frequency, can directly affect the performance of a lubricant and the economies of operation. Consult the equipment shop manual, and lubricant supplier for the proper change frequency, or relubrication volume and frequency, for each application. 8.3 The suitability of a lubricant is highly dependent upon environmental conditions. It is the consumer's responsibility to provide lubricant suppliers with the following: 8.3.1 Actual application and copy of this specification. 8.3.2 Environmental data - ambient temperature range and weather conditions. 8.3.3 Type of centralized lubrication system(s), including pump, filtration and reservoir data, when applicable. 8.4 It is the responsibility of the consumer to verify that lubricants conform to applicable environmental and safety codes governing their use and disposal.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

-16.40-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Lubrication

16.8.5 Material Specification P&H 497


Gear Oil - Single Viscosity Grade, Extreme Pressure (EP)
Ver 07, 02-93

CAUTION
Using incorrect lubricants can cause substantial equipment damage. The material specifications listed in this manual are current at the time of publication, and are intended to be used for reference only. Contact your local P&H MinePro Services representative for the current specifications.
1.0 SCOPE 1.1 This specification covers premium single grade gear oils produced from refined mineral oil base stocks, and compounded with extreme pressure additives for high load carrying ability. Synthetic lubricants are not covered in this specification. 1.2 Materials furnished under this specification are intended to lubricate gears, bushings, plain and rolling element bearings, sprockets, chain drives and other components enclosed in oil-tight housings, and operating under high speed, high torque, high shock load, and/or high speed, low torque conditions.

WARNING

Use of oils containing EP additives or other friction modifiers in applications containing internal mechanical load brakes, backstops or clutches could cause equipment failure, resulting in death or severe personal injury. Do not use oils containing EP additives or other friction modifiers in applications containing internal mechanical load brakes, backstops or clutches. Additionally, certain EP formulations may not be compatible with bronze gears as found in worm gear cases.
1.3 Materials furnished under this specification may be used in sump (splash) circulating, or total loss applications. 1.4 When extremes in ambient temperatures may dictate seasonal changes to different viscosity grades, or where MIL-L-2105 oils are required, P&H specification 496 or 498 gear oils may be suitable substitutions for these single grade EP gear oils. Consult Harnischfeger Corporation Engineering or Service prior to making such a substitution. 1.5 The designations 497A and 497B are being reserved for lighter viscosities than ISO VG 68 if required in the future. P&H 497A, B, and C from Issue No. 6 do not match the same designations in this specification. 1.6 Materials furnished under this specification are not intended for use in applications where MIL-L-2105 (latest issues), and/or API Service GL-5 gear oils are a requirement. 2.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS 2.1 ASTM D92/ISO 2592, Latest Issue: Flash Point, COC Method 2.2 ASTM D97/ISO 3016, Latest Issue: Pour Point 2.3 ASTM D130/ISO 2160, Latest Issue: Copper Strip Corrosion Test 2.4 ASTM D445/ISO 3104, D2161, Latest Issue: Kinematic Viscosity 2.5 ASTM D892, Latest Issue: Foam Stability

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -16.41Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

Lubrication

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

2.6 ASTM D665/ISO 7120, Latest Issue: Rust Test 2.7 ASTM D2270/ISO 2909, Latest Issue: Viscosity Index 2.8 ASTM D2422/ISO 3449, Latest Issue: ISO Viscosity Classifications 2.9 ASTM D2711, Latest Issue: Demulsibility 2.10 ASTM D2782, Latest Issue: Timken EP Test 2.11 ASTM D2783, Latest Issue: Four Ball EP Test 2.12 ASTM D2893, Latest Issue: Oxidation Stability 2.13 DIN 51 354, Latest Issue: FZG Test 3.0 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS 3.1 These gear oils must be manufactured from highly refined mineral oil base stocks. 3.2 These lubricants may not contain viscosity or viscosity index enhancers that are subject to breakdown under extended shearing conditions. 3.3 These lubricants must have chemical and physical stability to maintain viscosity, and performance characteristics throughout their intended service life. 3.4 Any EP or other friction modifiers used in the formulation of these lubricants must be fully oil soluble, and/or be in a stable colloidal suspension. 3.5 These materials shall meet applicable safety, health and environmental regulations. 4.0 P&H IDENTIFICATION NUMBER AND VISCOSITY GRADE 4.1 P&H No. 497C, ISO VG 68. AGMA 2 EP, SAE 80W 4.2 P&H No. 497D, ISO VG 100. AGMA 3 EP, SAE 80W 4.3 P&H No. 497E, ISO VG 150. AGMA 4 EP, SAE 85W 4.4 P&H No. 497F, ISO VG 220. AGMA 5 EP, SAE 90 4.5 P&H No. 497G, ISO VG 320. AGMA 6 EP, SAE 90 4.6 P&H No. 497H, ISO VG 460. AGMA 7 EP, SAE 140 4.7 P&H No. 497I, ISO VG 680. AGMA 8 EP, SAE 140 4.8 P&H No. 497J, ISO VG 1000. AGMA 8 A EP, SAE 250 4.9 P&H No. 497K, ISO VG 1500. AGMA 9 EP, SAE 250

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

-16.42-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Lubrication

5.0 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS


Viscosity Grade Viscosity Viscosity index, ASTM D2270/ISO 2909, Min. Cleanliness Additive solubility Pour point, ASTM D97/ISO 3016 Max. Flash point, ASTM D92/ISO 2592, Min. Rust test, ASTM D665/ISO 7120, Procedure A Procedure B Copper strip corrosion, ASTM D130/ISO 2160 3 hrs @ 100oC/212oF, Max. Oxidation stability, ASTM D2893, @ 121oC/250oF Max. % viscosity increase Foam Suppression, ASTM D892 Must be within these limits: ISO VG 68 - 1500, AGMA 2EP-9EP. In accordance with ASTM D2422/ISO 3448 In accordance with ASTM D445/ISO 3104/D2161 90 Must be free of visible contaminants Must be filterable to 25 microns (Beta 25 = 200 filter rating) without loss of additive(s) 5oC/9oF below the lowest anticipated ambient temperature 204oC/400oF Pass Pass 1b 6 (Viscosity grades 68 thru 680) 10 (Viscosity grades 1000 thru 1500)

Temperature

Max. volume of foam (ml) after: 5 min blow 10 min blow 10 10 10

Seq. I 24oC/75oF Seq. II 93.5oC/200oF Seq. III 24oC/75oF Demulsibility, ASTM D2711 Must be within these limits:

75 75 75 Viscosity Grades 68-460

680-1500 2.0 1.0 ml 50.0 ml

Max % water in oil after 5 hr test Max cuff after centrifuging Min total free water collected during entire test (start with 90 ml water) Four ball EP test, ASTM D2783 Weld Load, Min. kgf Load wear index, Min. kgf Timken EP test, ASTM D2782 Min. OK value, kg/lbs FZG test, ASTM D5182 with A/8.3/90oC parameters, Min. fail stage

2.0 1.0 ml 80.0 ml 250 55 27/60 >12

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -16.43Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

Lubrication

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

6.0 IDENTIFICATION AND PACKAGING 6.1 Containers must be clearly identified by the supplier with the following information: 6.1.1 Purchase Order Number 6.1.2 Suppliers Name and Product Trade Name 6.1.3 P&H Material Specification Number followed by a letter which will indicate a particular viscosity grade in accordance with the following: 6.1.3.1 P&H No. 497C, ISO VG 68. AGMA 2 EP, SAE 80W 6.1.3.2 P&H No. 497D, ISO VG 100. AGMA 3 EP, SAE 80W 6.1.3.3 P&H No. 497E, ISO VG 150. AGMA 4 EP, SAE 85W 6.1.3.4 P&H No. 497F, ISO VG 220. AGMA 5 EP, SAE 90 6.1.3.5 P&H No. 497G, ISO VG 320. AGMA 6 EP, SAE 90 6.1.3.6 P&H No. 497H, ISO VG 460. AGMA 7 EP, SAE 140 6.1.3.7 P&H No. 497I, ISO VG 680. AGMA 8 EP, SAE 140 6.1.3.8 P&H No. 497J, ISO VG 1000. AGMA 8 A EP, SAE 250 6.1.3.9 P&H No. 497K, ISO VG 1500. AGMA 9 EP, SAE 250 6.1.4 Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) - One (1) with each shipment 6.2 The lubricant furnished under this specification shall be supplied in clean containers of the size(s) as specified on the purchase order. 7.0 INSPECTION AT PURCHASER'S WORKS 7.1 Acceptance of material furnished under this specification shall be subjected to confirmation by purchaser's Quality Assurance Department. 7.2 The purchaser shall have the option of accepting or rejecting any material failing to meet the requirements of this specification. 8.0 ADDITIONAL CRITERIA OF ACCEPTANCE 8.1 Conformance to all specified requirements shall not constitute the sole basis of acceptance, since all lubricants must be judged further on their satisfactory field performance in Harnischfeger Corporation equipment. 8.2 Lubricant change frequency, or relubrication volume and frequency, can directly affect the performance of a lubricant and the economies of operation. Consult the equipment shop manual, and with the lubricant supplier for the proper change frequency, or relubrication volume and frequency, for each application. 8.3 The suitability of a lubricant is highly dependent upon environmental conditions. It is the consumer's responsibility to provide lubricant suppliers with the following:

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

-16.44-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Lubrication

8.3.1 Actual application and copy of this specification. 8.3.2 Environmental data - ambient temperature range and weather conditions. 8.3.3 Type of centralized lubrication system(s), including pump, filtration and reservoir data, when applicable. 8.4 It is the responsibility of the consumer to verify that lubricants conform to applicable environmental and safety codes governing their use and disposal.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -16.45Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

Lubrication

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

16.8.6 Material Specification P&H 499


Sealing Grease - Petroleum Resistant
Ver 02, 06-70

CAUTION
Using incorrect lubricants can cause substantial equipment damage. The material specifications listed in this manual are current at the time of publication, and are intended to be used for reference only. Contact your local P&H MinePro Services representative for the current specifications.
1.0 SCOPE 1.1 This specification covers a petroleum resistant sealing compound properly formulated to have oil sealant qualities. 2.0 APPLICATION 2.1 This sealing grease is intended for use in certain applications which require the use of a suitable sealant. 2.2 This sealing grease is primarily used as an oil seal on shafts, hubs and other keyway assemblies. The compound need not serve primarily as a lubricant but should not interfere with lubrication. 2.3 This sealing grease may also be used in other applications (as an oil seal) that are satisfied by a compound of this type. 3.0 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES 3.1 The material furnished under this specification shall conform to the following characteristics, requirements and conditions: 3.1.1 Insoluble in petroleum oil and petroleum by-products. 3.1.2 Have shelf life in excess of one year. 3.1.3 Must retain insolubility and exhibit no dispersal in mineral oil when in contact with agitated or flowing oil within a temperature range of -20oF to +225oF. 3.1.4 Must retain the properties of a high viscosity paste without hardening in application to machinery with rotating parts and adjacent moving surfaces. 3.2 The above mentioned properties are not a complete description of the product required and stated only as reference material for descriptive purposes. Conformance to the physical properties shall not constitute the sole basis of acceptance or application. 4.0 GENERAL INFORMATION 4.1 The accepted symbol used in the petroleum products industry to designate this standard is S.C. 5.0 PACKAGING

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

-16.46-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Lubrication

5.1 Sealing grease used for this purpose shall be supplied in cartons containing clean, one pound cans; unless otherwise specified on the Purchase Order. 6.0 IDENTIFICATION 6.1 Containers must be clearly identified by the supplier with the following information: 6.1.1 Purchase Order Number 6.1.2 Supplier's Name and Trade Name 6.1.3 P&H Material Specification Number 7.0 REJECTION 7.1 The purchaser shall have the option of accepting or rejecting material that fails to meet any of the requirements of this specification. 8.0 SUPPLIERS AND TRADE NAMES 8.1 General Electric Supply Co. G.E. Sealing Grease D6AD2

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -16.47Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

Lubrication

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

16.8.7 Material Specification P&H 520


16.8.7.1 Multi-service Mining Lubricant
Ver 00, 03-97

CAUTION
Using incorrect lubricants can cause substantial equipment damage. The material specifications listed in this manual are current at the time of publication, and are intended to be used for reference only. Contact your local P&H MinePro Services representative for the current specifications.
1.0 SCOPE 1.1 Multi service lubricants specified herein are partially or fully synthetic premium quality semifluid EP greases or polymer/gel thickened which are specifically formulated to provide the necessary load carrying and wear resisting characteristics required in a variety of applications found in large surface mining equipment in continuous operation. 1.2 These lubricants are intended to lubricate open gears, racks, bushings, rails, rollers, handles, walk mechanisms, multi-row slewing bearings, and low to moderate speed plane and rolling element bearings. These applications are subject to extreme contact pressures reversing loads that may dwell at zero velocity while loaded, gear peripheral speeds over 2000 feet per minute/610 meters per minute, and bearing speeds approaching 1000 rpm. 1.3 Lubricants furnished under this specification are intended to be dispensed intermittently from centralized lubrication systems of the single line parallel, single line progressive, and/or dual line progressive construction at the ambient operational temperature at which the equipment operates. 1.4 Lubricants furnished under this specification are not intended to lubricate electric motor bearings, Magnatorque clutches, and other applications where there may be service requirements of the lubricant that differ from or are beyond those described in this specification. Depending upon the consistency of semi-fluid products, they may not be appropriate for use in couplings or with labyrinth seals. 2.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS 2.1 ASTM D92/ISO 2592 - Flash Point, COC Method 2.2 ASTM D445/ISO 3104/D2161 - Standard Test Method for Kinematic Viscosity 2.3 ASTM D1743 - Rust Protection 2.4 ASTM D2266 - Four Ball Wear Test 2.5 ASTM D2509 - Timken EP Test, Grease 2.6 ASTM D2596 - Four Ball EP Test, Grease 2.7 ASTM D3279 - n-Heptane Insolubles Test 2.8 ASTM D4048 - Copper Strip Corrosion Test

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

-16.48-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Lubrication

2.9 US Steel Lubrication Manual - Grease Mobility Test 2.10 US Steel Lubrication Manual - Timken Retention Test 2.11 US Steel Lubrication Manual - Lincoln Ventmeter Test 3.0 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS 3.1 Multi service lubricants specified herein must have the necessary adhesive and cohesive properties to resist chipping, throw off, and run off, and provide the necessary film thickness and lubricating properties to prevent metal to metal contact between application intervals under all operating conditions. 3.2 These lubricants must be specifically formulated to protect surfaces from wear, have excellent water resisting and rust preventing properties, and have the necessary properties to provide exceptional service life of the components which they lubricate under all operating conditions. 3.3 Multi service lubricants specified herein must be dispensable through the distribution lines of a centralized lubrication system to the most remote application point at the lowest anticipated operating temperature. They must not plate or plug components of the centralized lubrication system such as injectors, metering blocks, lines, or spray nozzles. 3.4 When a lubricant furnished under this specification is formulated with a diluent to improve dispensibility, the lubricant must meet the performance requirements of section 4.0 both before and after the diluent has evaporated. 3.5 Materials specified herein must meet the performance requirements of section 4.0 when tested with samples taken from production batches of the lubricant. 3.6 Materials specified herein shall meet all applicable safety, health, and environmental regulations.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -16.49Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

Lubrication

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

4.0 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS


Property Flash point Copper Strip Corrosion Rust Protection Four Ball Wear Test Four Ball EP Test Load Wear Index Timken EP Test US Steel Retention Test (Timken) Base Oil Viscosity Solid Lubricant Particle Size Asphaltene Content Pumpability ASTM D3279 US Steel Mobility Test, DM 43, Test run at 150psi Lincoln Ventmeter Test, VE-1, Test run for 30 seconds Test Method ASTM D92/ISO 2592 ASTM D4048, 24 hrs @ 100C ASTM D1743 ASTM D2266, scar diameter, 60 minutes at 40 kgf ASTM D2596, weld point ASTM D2509, no score US Steel DM51, 4 grams, no refill, 33 lbs for 30 minutes ASTM D445/ISO3104/D2161 Requirement 130C (266F) minimum* 1b maximum Pass 0.7mm maximum 500 kg minimum 70 minimum 50 lb minimum pass 300 cSt minimum @ 40C** 20 micron maximum less than 0.10% 0.30 g/m minimum @ lowest operating temperature 400 psi maximum @ lowest operating temperature

Table 16-15: Performance Requirements, Material Specification P&H 520

* Note for diluent containing lubricants: Although the flashpoint requirement applies to the mixture of diluent and lubricant, it should be noted that the flashpoint of a diluent alone (i.e. the flashpoint of the diluent when it is not mixed with the lubricant) may be considerably lower than the flashpoint of the mixture of lubricant and diluent. ** Note: While 300 cSt is the minimum viscosity required for most climates, it may be necessary to formulate products with slightly lower base oil viscosity for use in arctic conditions. In such cases, these products should only be applied within their intended temperature range. 5.0 IDENTIFICATION AND PACKAGING 5.1 Containers must be clearly marked by the supplier with the product name and, if appropriate, the grade (i.e. arctic, heavy, summer, etc.) 5.2 Identification must remain legible upon outdoor storage of the containers. 5.3 If appropriate, a shelf life should be clearly marked on the container. 5.4 Any special considerations regarding the storage of the product such as protection of container openings, elimination of water build up, etc. should be clearly communicated to the end user. 5.5 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) must be supplied to the end user for each product delivered. 6.0 ADDITIONAL CRITERIA OF ACCEPTANCE

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

-16.50-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Lubrication

6.1 Conformance to all specified requirements shall not constitute the sole basis of acceptance since all lubricants must be judged further on their satisfactory field performance on the type and model equipment which they are intended to lubricate. 6.2 Relubrication volume and frequency can directly affect the performance of a lubricant and the economies of operation. Consult the equipment shop manual and lubricant supplier for the relubrication volume and frequency for each application. 6.3 The suitability of a lubricant is highly dependent upon environmental conditions. It is the consumers responsibility to provide the lubricant supplier(s) with the appropriate application data, material specification(s), environmental data such as temperature and weather conditions, and type of centralized lubrication system. 6.4 It is the responsibility of the consumer to verify that lubricants conform to applicable environmental and safety codes governing their use and disposal.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -16.51Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

Lubrication

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 16, Version 00 - 03/06

-16.52-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec16Lube.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Preventive Maintenance

Section 17

Preventive Maintenance
17.1 General
This section outlines the maintenance procedures that should be performed on the drill at regular intervals to ensure optimum performance. Each maintenance item is listed in one of the maintenance check sheets provided in this section. Specific descriptions of each maintenance or lubrication item are provided. Use these descriptions in conjunction with the maintenance check sheets to ensure that each item is performed at the prescribed time interval.

17.2 Lubrication
Preventive Maintenance means performing inspections and services that are necessary to keep the drill operating at peak performance. Lubrication is an essential component of Preventive Maintenance. The breakdown of lubrication services that must be performed are covered in detail in Section 16, Lubrication., and there are lubrication service checklists starting at Topic 16.7. Those procedures are incorporated in the recommended Preventive Maintenance procedures by reference.

17.3 Bolt Lubrication


Unless otherwise specified, all capscrews, bolts, and nuts used to secure or attach major components and assemblies should be lubricated with an anti-seize thread lubricant when repairs or replacements are made. Lubricant should be applied to the threads of fasteners and to the friction-bearing surface of bolt heads, nuts, and washers. Additionally, the threaded connections of all drill pipe joints, rotary head coupling- to-pipe, and drill bit-to-stabilizer connections must be lubricated with a silicone thread lubricant.

17.4 Bolts And Bolt Torques


Recommended bolt torques are listed in Tables 17-1, through 17-3. Unless otherwise specified, these torque values apply to all component mounting bolts that attach structural members of all machinery. At least bi-annually, all mounting and attachment bolts and capscrews should be checked using a torque wrench to ensure compliance with Table 17-1. Heavy duty mounting hardware as described in this manual is equivalent to SAE grade 5 hardware or equal. English to metric conversion factors are presented in Table 17-2.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -17.1Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

Preventive Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

17.4.1 Bolt Torques -- American Standard Coarse Thread


Screw, Stud, or Bolt Diameter (inches) Coarse Threads UNC & 8UNC 1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-3/8 1-1/2 1-3/4 2 2-1/4 2-1/2 2-3/4 3 3-1/4 3-1/2 3-3/4 4 Grade 2 (ft.-lbs) 6 11 20 32 49 70 97 172 170 250 355 500 660 870 1,370 2,060 3,020 4,130 5,590 7,390 9,520 12,030 14,940 18,280 10 20 36 58 90 130 180 315 505 760 1,075 1,520 1,990 2,640 4,160 6,250 9,140 12,500 16,950 22,390 28,850 36,450 45,300 55,400 Studs only Grade 4 (ft.-lbs) Grade 5 (ft.-lbs) 9 17 31 50 75 109 150 266 430 650 800 1,120 1,470 1,950 3,080 4,630 6,770 9,250 12,540 16,570 21,350 26,970 33,500 41,000 Grade 7 (ft.-lbs) 11 21 38 61 93 135 185 330 530 800 1,130 1,590 2,090 2,770 4,370 6,570 9,600 13,130 17,800 23,500 30,290 38,300 47,600 58,200 Grade 8 (ft.-lbs) 12 25 44 70 106 154 212 380 610 910 1,290 1,820 2,390 3,160 49,90 7,500 10,970 15,000 20,400 26,900 34,600 43,800 54,400 66,500

The above values assume dry As Received threads. The use of thread lubricant (oil, grease, etc.) will lower recommended torque values by approximately 25%. Type of lubricant used can cause significant variation. Table 17-1: Recommended Torque Values for American Standard Threads (Coarse Threads)

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

-17.2-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Preventive Maintenance

17.4.2 Bolt Torques -- American Standard Fine Thread


Screw, Stud, or Bolt Diameter (inches) Coarse Threads UNC & 8UNC 1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-3/8 1-1/2 1-3/4 2 2-1/4 2-1/2 2-3/4 3 3-1/4 3-1/2 3-3/4 4 Grade 2 (ft.-lbs) 6 12 22 34 53 75 105 183 180 260 380 525 710 930 1,500 2,270 3,260 4,500 6,030 7,860 10,040 12,600 15,500 18,900 11 22 39 62 95 136 190 332 530 790 1,150 1,600 2,150 2,820 4,540 6,860 9,860 13,630 18,260 23,800 30,400 38,200 47,100 57,300 Studs only Grade 4 (ft.-lbs) Grade 5 (ft.-lbs) 9 18 33 52 81 115 162 282 450 670 850 1,180 1,590 2,090 3,360 5,080 7,300 10,100 13,500 17,600 22,500 28,200 34,800 42,400 Grade 7 (ft.-lbs) 11 23 41 65 100 142 200 350 560 830 1,200 1,680 2,260 2,960 4,770 7,210 10,360 14,310 19,170 25,010 32,000 40,100 49,400 60,100 Grade 8 (ft.-lbs) 13 26 47 74 114 163 228 400 635 945 1,380 1,910 2,580 3,380 5,450 8,240 11,830 16,360 21,910 28,600 36,500 45,800 56,500 68,700

The above values assume dry As Received threads. The use of thread lubricant (oil, grease, etc.) will lower recommended torque values by approximately 25%. Type of lubricant used can cause significant variation. Table 17-2: Recommended Torque Values for American Standard Threads (Fine Threads)

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -17.3Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

Preventive Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Bolt Torques -- Metric Thread


Screw, Stud or Bolt Diameter (inches) Nominal Size (mm)Thread Pitch (mm) M6-1 M8-1.25 M8-1 M10-1.5 M10-1.25 M12-1.75 M12-1.25 M14-2 M16-2 M16-1.5 M18-2.5 M18-1.5 M18-2.5 M20-2.5 M20-1.5 M22-2.5 M22-1.5 M24-3 M24-2 M27-3 M30.3.5 M30-2 M33-3.5 M36-4 M36-3

4T
kg-m (ft.-lbs) 0.4-0.5 (2.89-3.61) 0.98-1.2 (7.09-8.68) 1.04-1.26 (7.52-9.11) 2.0-2.4 (14.5-17.4) 2.1-2.5 (15.2-18.1) 3.3-4.1 (23.9-29.7) 3.6-4.4 (26.0-31.8) 5.3-6.5 (38.3-47.0) 8.1-10 (58.6-72.3) 8.5-10.3 (61.5-74.5) 11.2-13.6 (81.0-98.4) 12.6-15.4 (91.1-111.4) 11.2-13.6 (81.0-98.4) 15.8-19.2 (114-149) 17.1-20.9 (124-151) 21-25 (152-181) 24-30 (174-217) 27-33 (195-238) 29-35 (210-253) 40-48 (289-347) 54-66 (390-477) 59-71 (427-513) 73-89 (528-644) 95-115 (687-831) 98-120 (709-868)

7T
kg-m (ft.-lbs) 0.88-1.08 (6.37-7.81) 2.2-2.6 (15.9-18.8) 2.3-2.7 (16.6-19.5) 4.2-5.2 (30.4-37.6) 4.4-5.4 (31.8-39.1) 7.3-8.9 (52.8-64.4) 7.8-9.6 (56.4-69.4) 11.5-14.1 (83.2-102) 17.5-21.5 (127-155) 18-22 (130-159) 24-30 (174-217) 27-33 (195-239) 24-30 (174-217) 34-42 (246-304) 37-45 (288-325) 46-56 (333-405) 52-63 (376-456) 58-72 (420-521) 63-77 (456-557) 86-106 (622-766) 118-144 (853-1041) 128-156 (926-1,128) 158-194 (1,143-1,403) 204-250 (1,476-1,808) 215-261 (1,555-1,888)

10T
kg-m (ft.-lbs) 1.59-1.95 (11.5-14.1) 3.9-4.7 (28.2-34.0) 4.1-4.9 (29.7-35.4) 7.6-9.4 (55.0-68.0) 8.1-9.8 (58.6-70.9) 13.1-16.1 (94.8-116) 14.1-17.3 (102-125) 21-25 (152-181) 31-39 (224-282) 33-41 (239-296) 44-54 (318-390) 50-60 (362-434) 44-54 (318-390) 61-75 (441-542) 67-81 (485-585) 83-101 (600-730) 95-115 (687-832) 106-130 (767-940) 114-138 (825-998) 156-190 (1,128-1,374) 211-259 (1,526-1,873) 229-281 (1,656-2,032) 285-349 (2,061-2,524) 368-450 (2,662-3,255) 385-471 (2,785-3,406)

Table 17-3: Recommended Torque Values for Metric Threads

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

-17.4-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Preventive Maintenance

17.4.3 Metric Conversion Charts

Multiply

by

to get equivalent number of:

Multiply

by

to get equivalent number of:

LENGTH Inch Foot Yard Mile (Statute) 25.4 0.3048 0.9144 1.609 milimetres (mm) metres (m) metres kilometres (km) in-lbs ft-lbs ft-lbs

TORQUE 0.11298 1.3558 0.1383 newton-metres (N.m) newton-metres kg-m

AREA Inch Foot Yard 645.2 6.45 0.0929 0.8361 milimetres (mm) centimetres (cm) metres (m) metres Horsepower

POWER 0.746 kilowatts (kW)

VOLUME Inch 16 387 16.387 0.0164 0.9464 3.7854 0.7646 mm cm litres (l) litres litres metres (m)

PRESSURE OR STRESS Inches of mercury water Pounds/sq. in. (psi) in. (psi) 3.377 0.2491 6.895 0.069 kilopascals (kPa) kilopascals kilopascals bars

Quart Gallon Yard

MASS Pound Ton (Short) Ton (Short) 0.4536 907.18 0.907 kilograms (kg) kilograms tonne (t) BTU Foot-pound Kilowatthour

ENERGY OR WORK 1 055. 1.3558


6

joules (J) joules

3.6 x 10 or joules (J = one W.s) 3600000

FORCE Kilogram Ounce Pound 9.807 0.278 4.448 newtons (N) newtons newtons Miles/hour

VELOCITY 1.6093 kilometres/hr (km/h)

TEMPERATURE F = 9 5 C = 5 9 (C + 32) (F - 32)

CONVERSION CHART
F -40 0 32 40 50 59 80 120 140 160 200 F 212

-20 -40 C 0

10 15

20

40 60

80 100 C

Figure 17-1: Metric Conversion Chart

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -17.5Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

Preventive Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

17.4.4 Temperature Conversion Chart

Celsius ( C) C = F - 32 x 5/9 -273.15 -200 -180 -160 -140 -120 -100 -80 -60 -40 -20 -17.77 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 140 160 180 200 250 300 350 400

Fahrenheit ( F) F = C X 9/5+ 32 -459.67 -328 -292 -256 -220 -184 -148 -112 -76 -40 -4 0 32 41 50 59 68 77 86 95 104 113 122 131 140 149 158 167 176 185 194 203 212 221 230 239 248 284 320 356 392 482 572 662 752

Figure 17-2: Temperature Conversion Chart

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

-17.6-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Preventive Maintenance

17.4.5 Special Bolt Tightening Requirements


Any special bolt tightening requirements that differ from standard torque values are identified within the appropriate assembly and installation instructions of this manual.

17.5 Maintenance Schedule Check Sheets


The actual operating environment of the drill governs the maintenance schedule. The check sheets on the following pages indicate the areas of the drill to be checked and the suggested intervals at which they should be checked. The order in which the items are listed is suggested only and does not constitute the order of performance. Maintenance items may be performed in any order desired within a given time interval. The following suggested schedule check sheets are based on average operating conditions. The type of work being done, the type and hardness of the materials being drilled, and the ground and weather conditions are all factors that must be considered when establishing a maintenance schedule for this drill. The suggested schedule is given for hours of operation and calendar intervals. Any changes in the established schedule check sheets should be preceded by a complete re-evaluation of drill operation. Carefully study previous maintenance check sheets and records before making changes in, or extending, the maintenance check intervals.

17.6 Using The Maintenance Schedule Check Sheets


The maintenance schedule check sheets are designed as a preventive maintenance guide until adequate experience is obtained to establish a schedule to meet a specific operating environment and machine. Detailed procedures for each check sheet operation are provided following the check sheets. The check sheets can be reproduced on any copy machine. Maintenance personnel should indicate on the sheet that the required check has been completed, and that the drill will be ready for continued operation until the next scheduled check is due. Completed check sheets should be retained as a permanent part of the drill maintenance records for future reference. .The following topics describe the maintenance procedures to be performed on this blasthole drill. Each topic covers a specific time period. Detailed maintenance instructions are provided for the individual lubrication and service points listed on the corresponding maintenance check sheets. The maintenance person may use the following procedures in conjunction with the maintenance check sheets to ensure that all service and lubrication points are correctly serviced at the appropriate time interval. The lubrication charts and figures shown in the Lubrication Section provide general locations of the individual service points and list the type of lubricant which should be used for each component. Refer to these charts for the location of lubrication points on this drill. The location of service points other than lubrication points are described in the following paragraphs as applicable.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -17.7Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

Preventive Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

P&H Model 120A Rotary Blasthole Drill A Maintenance Checks (Daily / 8-12 hours)
Maintenance Person: Date Performed: Machine Serial Number: Machine Hours:

WARNING

Unexpected machine movement can cause severe personal injury or death. Shut down the machine before performing inspections, service or maintenance. Establish a procedure to guard against inadvertent equipment operation or movement while conducting inspections. Use lockout and tagout procedures prior to conducting maintenance or service.

ITEMS TO BE VERIFIED Note and record any faults on the GUI Fault Log

REF Subsection 17.7.1 Subsection 17.7.2 Subsection 17.7.3 Subsection 17.7.4 Subsection 17.7.5 Subsection 17.7.6 Subsection 17.7.7 Subsection 17.7.8

COMMENTS

Fill water tank

Inspect machine for damage and leaks

Check hydraulic oil reservoir level

Check main air compressor oil reservoir level

Inspect operators cab air filter

Inspect drill pipe sling

Inspect auxiliary winch and rope

Table 17-4: A Maintenance Checks

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

-17.8-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Preventive Maintenance

P&H Model 120A Rotary Blasthole Drill A Maintenance Checks (Daily / 8-12 hours)
Maintenance Person: Date Performed: Machine Serial Number: Machine Hours:

WARNING

Unexpected machine movement can cause severe personal injury or death. Shut down the machine before performing inspections, service or maintenance. Establish a procedure to guard against inadvertent equipment operation or movement while conducting inspections. Use lockout and tagout procedures prior to conducting maintenance or service.

ITEMS TO BE VERIFIED Check rotary gearcase oil level

REF Subsection 17.7.10 Subsection 17.7.11 Subsection 17.7.12 Subsection 17.7.13 Subsection 17.7.14 Subsection 17.7.15 Subsection 17.7.16

COMMENTS

Check pulldown gearcase oil level

Check oil pressure to auto lube pump

Check deck wrenches

Inspect pipe racks

Inspect crawlers

Inspect jack shoes and retaining pins

Table 17-4: A Maintenance Checks

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -17.9Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

Preventive Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

P&H Model 120A Rotary Blasthole Drill B Maintenance Checks (Weekly / 40-100 hours)
Maintenance Person: Date Performed: Machine Serial Number: Machine Hours:

WARNING

Unexpected machine movement can cause severe personal injury or death. Shut down the machine before performing inspections, service or maintenance. Establish a procedure to guard against inadvertent equipment operation or movement while conducting inspections. Use lockout and tagout procedures prior to conducting maintenance or service.

ITEMS TO BE VERIFIED Perform A Maintenance Checks Inspect hydraulic system components

REF

COMMENTS

Subsection 17.8.1 Subsection 17.8.2 Subsection 17.8.3 Subsection 17.8.4 Subsection 17.8.5 Subsection 17.8.6 Subsection 17.8.7 Subsection 17.8.8

Check Cable Reel Oil Level

Inspect Breakout Wrench

Inspect Mast Racks and Pinions

Inspect Rotary Machinery

Inspect Bailing Air System Components

Inspect Crawler Belt Tension

Check Hydraulic Charge Filters

Table 17-5: B Maintenance Checks

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

-17.10-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Preventive Maintenance

P&H Model 120A Rotary Blasthole Drill B Maintenance Checks (Weekly / 40-100 hours)
Maintenance Person: Date Performed: Machine Serial Number: Machine Hours:

WARNING

Unexpected machine movement can cause severe personal injury or death. Shut down the machine before performing inspections, service or maintenance. Establish a procedure to guard against inadvertent equipment operation or movement while conducting inspections. Use lockout and tagout procedures prior to conducting maintenance or service.

ITEMS TO BE VERIFIED Check Hydraulic Return Line Filters

REF Subsection 17.8.9 Subsection 17.8.10 Subsection 17.8.11 Subsection 17.8.12 Subsection 17.8.13 Subsection 17.8.14

COMMENTS

Check Main Compressor Oil Filter

Check Main Compressor Oil Separator Filters

Check Main Compressor Air Intake Filters

Check Autolube Grease Reservoir Level

Inspect Trail Cable

Table 17-5: B Maintenance Checks

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -17.11Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

Preventive Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

P&H Model 120A Rotary Blasthole Drill C Maintenance Checks (Monthly / 160-250 hours)
Maintenance Person: Date Performed: Machine Serial Number: Machine Hours:

WARNING

Unexpected machine movement can cause severe personal injury or death. Shut down the machine before performing inspections, service or maintenance. Establish a procedure to guard against inadvertent equipment operation or movement while conducting inspections. Use lockout and tagout procedures prior to conducting maintenance or service.

ITEMS TO BE VERIFIED Repeat a and b maintenance checks Inspect mast back braces and slides

REF

COMMENTS

Subsection 17.9.1 Subsection 17.9.2 Subsection 17.9.3 Subsection 17.9.4 Subsection 17.9.5 Subsection 17.9.6 Subsection 17.9.7 Subsection 17.9.8

Inspect mast

Inspect auxiliary winch sheave

Clean main compressor and hydraulic oil cooler

Inspect main frame

Inspect crawler frames

Check auxiliary winch oil level

Inspect cable reel components

Table 17-6: C Maintenance Checks

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

-17.12-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Preventive Maintenance

P&H Model 120A Rotary Blasthole Drill C Maintenance Checks (Monthly / 160-250 hours)
Maintenance Person: Date Performed: Machine Serial Number: Machine Hours:

WARNING

Unexpected machine movement can cause severe personal injury or death. Shut down the machine before performing inspections, service or maintenance. Establish a procedure to guard against inadvertent equipment operation or movement while conducting inspections. Use lockout and tagout procedures prior to conducting maintenance or service.

ITEMS TO BE VERIFIED Clean/flush water tank

REF Subsection 17.9.9 Subsection 17.9.10 Subsection 17.9.11 Subsection 17.9.12 Subsection 17.9.13 Subsection 17.9.14

COMMENTS

Check pump drive transmission oil level

Change main compressor bearing oil filter

Check propel transmission oil level

Clean/inspect machinery house blowers and filters

Inspect rotary carriage rollers

Table 17-6: C Maintenance Checks

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -17.13Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

Preventive Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

17.7 A Maintenance Checks


The A Maintenance Checks should be performed daily, or at the beginning of each work shift. Park the drill on level ground or use the jacks to level the drill prior to the inspection. If an item is found to be incorrect, the problem must be corrected prior to start-up to ensure satisfactory operation of the drill.

17.7.1 Note and Record Any Faults on GUI Fault Log


The Graphical User Interface (GUI) provides a fault log that indicates conditions that need attention. To access the GUI fault log, proceed as follows: Touch the MAINTENANCE block on the GUI Main Page (Figure 17-3)

Figure 17-3: GUI Main Page, Maintenance

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

-17.14-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Preventive Maintenance

Touch the applicable block on the First Sub-Page, Maintenance (Figure 17-4).

Figure 17-4: First Sub-Page, Maintenance

If, for example, the Fault List block is touched, a fault list is displayed. The fault list is similar in appearance to the one shown in Figure 17-5.

000524.alg WinView Alarm Log File (c) 1995 Rockwell Software Inc. IN ALARM - B4/2 02:44:25PM 00/05/24 HYDRAULIC FLUID LEVEL LOW FAULT IN ALARM - B4/6 02:44:25PM 00/05/24 PROGRAMMABLE LIMIT SWITCH FAULT IN ALARM - B4/13 02:44:25PM 00/05/24 MAIN TRNSFMR OVERTEMP WARNING IN ALARM - B4/14 02:44:25PM 00/05/24 MAIN TRNSFMR OVERTEMP FAULT IN ALARM - B4/34 02:44:25PM 00/05/24 RELAY SUPPLY LOSS OC IN ALARM - B4/39 02:44:25PM 00/05/24 24VDC SUPPLY LOSS FAULT IN ALARM - B4/64 02:44:25PM 00/05/24 HOIST DRIVE FAULT IN ALARM - B4/65 02:44:25PM 00/05/24 ROTARY DRIVE FAULT IN ALARM - B4/66 02:44:25PM 00/05/24 HOIST DRIVE DID NOT RESET IN ALARM - B4/67 02:44:25PM 00/05/24 ROTARY DRIVE DID NOT RESET IN ALARM - B4/97 02:44:25PM 00/05/24 PLS CABLE DISCONNECT FAULT #1 IN ALARM - B4/115 02:44:25PM 00/05/24 24 VAC SUPPLY FAULT IN ALARM - B4/2 03:50:49PM 00/05/24 HYDRAULIC FLUID LEVEL LOW FAULT IN ALARM - B4/2 03:50:49PM 00/05/24 PROGRAMMABLE LIMIT SWITCH FAULT IN ALARM - B4/13 03:50:49PM 00/05/24 MAIN TRNSFMR OVERTEMP WARNING IN ALARM - B4/14 03:50:49PM 00/05/24 MAIN TRNSFMR OVERTEMP FAULT IN ALARM - B4/34 03:50:49PM 00/05/24 RELAY SUPPLY LOSS OC IN ALARM - B4/39 03:50:49PM 00/05/24 24VDC SUPPLY LOSS FAULT IN ALARM - B4/64 03:50:49PM 00/05/24 HOIST DRIVE FAULT IN ALARM - B4/65 03:50:49PM 00/05/24 ROTARY DRIVE FAULT IN ALARM - B4/66 03:50:49PM 00/05/24 HOIST DRIVE DID NOT RESET IN ALARM - B4/67 03:50:49PM 00/05/24 ROTARY DRIVE DID NOT RESET IN ALARM - B4/97 03:50:49PM 00/05/24 PLS CABLE DISCONNECT FAULT #1 IN ALARM - B4/115 03:50:49PM 00/05/24 24 VAC SUPPLY FAULT

BD158a01

Figure 17-5: Typical Fault List

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -17.15Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

Preventive Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

17.7.2 Fill Water Tank


The optional water tank is located on a platform at the left, rear outer side of the drill. At the start of each work shift or after each 8 hours of operation, fill the tank with water. The tank should be filled to approximately 1 inch (25 cm) from the bottom lip of the access cover.

17.7.3 Inspect Machine For Damage And Leaks


Make a complete and thorough visual inspection of the mast, jacks, lower frame, and underside of the drill, looking for leaks, loose connections, or any other unsatisfactory conditions. Ensure that problems found during inspection are corrected prior to continued drill operation. If repairs are necessary, refer to the applicable section of this manual, for detailed instructions. Additional specific inspection procedures are outlined elsewhere in this manual for various time intervals. This topic is intended to locate potentially hazardous conditions before they result in equipment damage or personal injury.

17.7.3.1 lnspect Air Lines For Leaks


Visually inspect each air system hose and pipe for leaks, abrasion, damage, kinks, or other signs of wear or decay. Report any problems. Damaged hoses and piping must be replaced prior to continued operation of the drill.

17.7.3.2 lnspect Hoses And Hydraulic Lines


Visually inspect each hydraulic and lubrication hose, and tubing for abrasion, damage, kinks, or other signs of wear or decay. Report any problems which are found. Damaged hoses and piping must be replaced prior to continued operation of the drill.

17.7.3.3 lnspect Hydraulic Fittings For Leaks


Refer to Appendix B and inspect all hydraulic and lubrication connections as described, and if necessary use the appropriate tightening sequence to secure the connection.

17.7.3.4 lnspect Dust Curtain


Weekly, or every 40 hours of operation, inspect the condition of the dust curtain. Visually inspect the curtain for damage caused by flying rocks and debris. Operate the dust curtain through a full cycle to ensure that it operates correctly. Repair or replace damaged dust curtains prior to continued drill operation.

17.7.4 Check Hydraulic Tank Oil Level


The hydraulic tank is located in the lubrication room on the right front corner of the machine. With the drill on level ground, check the oil level by reading the oil level sight glass, located on the side of the tank. The legend along side of the sight glass indicates the correct minimum and maximum permissible oil levels for the following positions of the mast and drill leveling jacks: MAX. MAST DOWN AND JACKS RETRACTED MAX. MAST UP AND JACKS RETRACTED MAX. MAST DOWN AND JACKS EXTENDED MAX. MAST UP AND JACKS EXTENDED MIN. MAST DOWN AND JACKS RETRACTED

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

-17.16-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Preventive Maintenance

MIN. MAST UP AND JACKS RETRACTED MIN. MAST DOWN AND JACKS EXTENDED MIN. MAST UP AND JACKS EXTENDED

CAUTION
Adding unfiltered oil can introduce contaminants that can damage the hydraulic system and its components. Always filter oil that is added to the hydraulic tank.
Fill the hydraulic oil tank as needed, using either the Wiggins Quick Fill system or by adding filtered oil directly to the hydraulic tank. Refer to Topic 16.5.

NOTICE
P&H Mining Equipment recommends that a sample of oil be drawn from the hydraulic tank at least annually. The sample should be about two quarts and should be taken when the oil is warmed through normal operation. The sample should be analyzed by a qualified lubrication specialist to determine whether it is suitable for continued use. The interval between oil changes depends upon operating conditions, on the care used in the handling of oils, and cleanliness during the handling process.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -17.17Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

Preventive Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

MAXIMUM MAST DOWN AND JACKS FULLY RETRACTED

MAXIMUM MAST UP AND JACKS FULLY RETRACTED

MAXIMUM MAST DOWN AND JACKS FULLY EXTENDED

MAXIMUM MAST UP AND JACKS FULLY EXTENDED

MINIMUM 3.2 GALLONS / INCH


| | | | | | | | | | | |

4.8 LITERS / CENTIMETER


BD0560a01

| | | | | | | | |

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

| | | | | | | |

Figure 17-6: Hydraulic Tank Sight Glass

-17.18-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Preventive Maintenance

17.7.5 Check Main Air Compressor Oil Reservoir Level

Figure 17-7: T-Tank Sight Glass

The main air compressor oil reservoir (T-Tank) contains the lubricant for the compressor components, including the screws, bearings, and gears. The reservoir is located on a platform on the left side of the drill, outside the machinery house. Check the oil level in the main air compressor oil reservoir as follows: 1. With the drill parked on level ground, check the reservoir oil level at the sight glass on the reservoir T-tank.

CAUTION
Operating the air compressor with insufficient oil can cause severe damage to the compressor lobes. Never operate the main air compressor when the oil level is below the LOW mark. Add oil of the type specified in the Lubrication Section any time the oil level falls below the LOW mark.
2. Wait for the main air system pressure to completely vent through the muffler.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -17.19Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

Preventive Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

CAUTION

Pressurized oil will spray with extreme force from the reservoir when opening the filler plug and can cause severe injury. Shut down the air compressor and allow air pressure vent before opening the filler plug. Wear appropriate face, ear, and body protective devices while venting the main air system and/or opening the filler plug.
3. Add oil to the main compressor oil tank by opening the filler plug, located on top of the tank. Add oil to the full mark on the sight gauge. Use the type specified in the Lubrication Section. 4. Install the filler plug. Use pipe thread sealant and tighten securely to prevent leakage.

17.7.6 lnspect Operator Cab Air Filter


The operator cab is pressurized with filtered air for operator comfort. To ensure that air entering the operator cab is satisfactorily filtered, the filter assembly must be visually inspected on a daily basis.

Visually inspect the operator cab air filters in the machinery house for dirt and contamination. If the filters are
fitted with a restriction indicator, visually check the indicator. When the indicator or visual inspection reveals the need to change the filters, install a new filters.

Visually inspect the air recirculation filter behind the panel in the ceiling of the operators cab. Replace the filter when it has accumulated a thin layer of dust.

17.7.7 lnspect Drill Pipe Sling


The pipe sling is located approximately half-way up the mast. It is a rigid structural framework and cable that serves to catch a loose pipe section and keep it from falling free of the mast should it separate from the rotary head coupling. Visually inspect the pipe sling components for damage, cracks, or missing hardware. All mounting hardware should be properly torqued. Replace any damaged or missing sections and/or hardware.

17.7.8 lnspect Auxiliary Winch Rope


The auxiliary winch used to raise and lower tools on the mast assembly utilizes a steel wire rope. Care of this wire rope is critical to the safe operation of the winch. Visually inspect the wire rope using the following procedure:

17.7.8.1 Daily Inspection


Visually inspect the winch rope at the start of each shift. This inspection is general, for the purpose of discovering gross damage, such as:

Distortion Corrosion Broken or cut strands. Excessive broken wires.


Presence of these conditions will prompt further inspection or rope replacement.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

-17.20-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Preventive Maintenance

17.7.8.2 250-Hour Inspection


A periodic detailed rope inspection will show damage over the entire rope. All individual outer wires in the strands of the rope are inspected, and any deterioration resulting in significant loss of original strength will be a factor in determining whether further use of the rope would constitute a hazard. A full written report of rope condition should be made by the inspector. This report must be dated, signed, and kept on file where it is readily available to designated personnel. The monthly inspection should be aimed at determining the degree of deterioration at the worst lay, since this will determine the suitability for continued service. By definition, a rope lay is the axial distance along the rope in which one strand makes one complete turn around the rope. These visual observations should be concerned with discovering damage, such as listed below: 1. Reduction of rope diameter below normal due to loss of core support, internal or external corrosion or wear of outside wires. 2. A number of broken outside wires and the degree of distribution or concentration of such broken wires. 3. Worn outside wires. 4. Corroded or broken wires at the end connections 5. Corroded, cracked, bent, worn, or improperly applied end connections. 6. Distortion of the rope, such as kinking, crushing, unstranding, birdcaging, main strand displacement, or core protrusion. 7. Evidence of improper lubrication. When such damage is discovered, the rope should be removed from service and replaced.

17.7.9 lnspect Winch


The winch is mounted inside the machinery house at the base of the mast, and is used for hoisting of drill pipe, drill bits, and other accessory tools and equipment. At the beginning of every shift, inspect the winch for loose mounting hardware, frame cracks, loose or leaking hydraulic hoses and fittings, and incorrectly spooled cable. Also confirm that the cable clamps attaching the hook to the cable are securely tightened.

17.7.10 Check Rotary Gearcase Oil Level


The rotary gearcase is mounted to the lower end of the rotary carriage. This double-reduction gear reducer drives the rotary head coupling, the drill bit, and the pipe string. Use the following procedure to check the rotary gearcase oil level at the start of each shift, or each 8 hours of operation (see Figure 17-3): 1. With the mast in the vertical position, lower the rotary carriage to the bottom of the mast and shut down operation of the drill.

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -17.21Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

Preventive Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

2. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent start-up of the machinery. Follow the lockout and tagout procedures outlined at the front of this manual. 3. Ensure that the machine is level, or as near level as possible. Check the oil level by inspecting the dipstick, located on the top surface of the rotary gearcase.

CAUTION
Operating the rotary machinery when the rotary gear case has been overfilled with oil will cause overheating and will damage gearcase components. Never operate the rotary gearcase when the oil level is below the LOW level or above the FULL level.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

-17.22-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Preventive Maintenance

4. .The oil level must be maintained between the upper and lower windows in the sight glass. Add oil of the type

01

02

BD0870b01

LEGEND 01. Inspection Cover with Breather: Fill gear case through this port.

02. Oil Level Sight Gauge: Oil should appear to fill the lower glass; the upper glass should appear empty.

Figure 17-8: Rotary Carriage

specified in the Section 16, Lubrication. through the vent pipe on top of the gearcase housing. 5. Recheck the oil level after adding oil. If oil appears in the upper sight glass, drain enough oil from the gearcase to maintain the oil level between the upper and lower sight glasses. 6. Securely reinstall the vent cap.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -17.23Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

Preventive Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

17.7.11 Check Pulldown Gearcase Oil Level


The pulldown gearcase is mounted at the upper level of the rotary carriage assembly. The torque output from this gear reducer drives the rotary carriage assembly up and down the mast. Use the following procedure to check the pulldown gearcase oil level at the start of each shift, or after each 8 hours of operation (see Figure 17-3): 1. Lower the rotary carriage to the bottom of the mast, and shut down operation of the drill.

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine startup during maintenance.
2. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent start-up of the machinery. Follow the lockout and tagout procedures outlined at the front of this manual. 3. Ensure that the drill is level, or as nearly level as possible. View the oil level on the sight gauge located on the right rear side of the pulldown gearcase.

CAUTION
Operating the pulldown gearcase after it has been overfilled with oil will cause overheating and will damage gearcase components. Never operate the pulldown gearcase when the oil level is either below the LOW level or above the FULL level on the sight gauge.
4. The oil level must be maintained between the LOW and FULL level markings on the sight gauge. As necessary, add oil of the type specified in Section 16, Lubrication. through the breather on top of the pulldown gearcase housing. Use care to avoid over-filling of the gearcase. 5. Apply pipe thread sealant to the male threads of the breather pipe, and install the breather pipe securely.

17.7.12 Check Grease Pump Hydraulic Supply Pressure


6. The hydraulic oil supply to operate the autolube grease pump comes from the low-pressure hydraulic system. Pressure is limited by a pressure reducing valve (the bottom valve in the first stack on the low pressure hydraulic valve bank). Check the pressure to confirm that the pressure is set at 220 psig (15.2 bar). The oil supply pressure gauge is located near the grease pump on top of the grease supply reservoir.

17.7.13 lnspect Deck Wrenches


1. Inspect the pawls, bodies, and housings for cracks, wear, corrosion, and distortion. 2. Check for broken or weak springs. 3. Check for worn, broken, or missing hardware items. 4. Check the hydraulic and lubrication hoses and fittings for wear and leaks. 5. Check for free rotation around the hinge pins.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

-17.24-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Preventive Maintenance

6. Refer to the Pipe Handling Section for repair procedures.

17.7.14 Inspect Pipe Racks


To ensure safe and satisfactory pipe rack operation, and correct positioning of the drill pipes, inspect the condition of each pipe rack weekly. 1. Before shutting down the drill, move the pipe racks in and out to confirm correct operation. 2. Lower the mast and shut down operation of the drill.

17.7.15 Inspect Crawler


1. Check for cracked or broken shoes 2. Check for excessively worn upper or lower rollers 3. Check both axles for wear, cracks, and loose or damaged mounting hardware 4. Check for smooth mesh between shoe and tumbler lugs

17.7.16 lnspect Jack Shoes And Retaining Pins


The leveling capability and stability of the drill depends on the integrity of the jack shoe assemblies. Inspect these assemblies weekly for cracked gussets, loose or broken retainer pin, and missing retainer pin capscrew and lockwasher.

17.8 B Maintenance Checks


The B Maintenance Checks should be performed every week, or after 100 hours of operation, whichever occurs first. If an item is checked and found to be incorrect, the problem must be corrected prior to machine start-up to ensure satisfactory operation of the drill. Refer to the maintenance check sheets and complete all A Maintenance Checks before proceeding with the B Maintenance Checks.

17.8.1 lnspect Hydraulic System Components


Visually inspect each hydraulic component for damage and leaks. Operate each control valve and solenoid and check for correct component operation. Repair or replace any damaged or malfunctioning hydraulic component. Inspect, but do not limit the inspection to the following components:

All hydraulic control valves and connections. All hydraulic hoses and fittings. Drive-to-pump couplings. Hydraulic pumps. Suction filter/return filters.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -17.25Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

Preventive Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Cylinders, pins, and bushings. Hydraulic motors.

17.8.2 Check Cable Reel Drive Reducer Oil Levels


The trail cable reel (optional equipment) is mounted across the front of the drill and stores the trail cable. The cable reel is driven through the use of gear reducers, driven by a hydraulic motor, and provides the rotary motion to rotate the cable drum and the level-wind assembly. Refer to Figure 17-9 and proceed as follows:

WARNING

Working on or near the cable reel while the drill is operating is hazardous and can result in injury or death. Shut down operation of the drill, and lock out and tag the operator controls prior to working on or near the cable reel. Follow the lockout and tagout procedures outlined in this manual.
1. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent movement during maintenance activities. 2. Remove the oil level plug, and check the oil level. The oil should reach up to the lower edge of the level plug opening. The oil level plug on the planetary gear reducer is located on the hydraulic motor end of the gear reducer. There are plugs located at the three o'clock and nine o'clock positions. The breather/filler cap is mounted on the same end of the reducer at the twelve o'clock position.

CAUTION
Operating the cable reel when the gear reducer has been overfilled with oil will cause overheating of the gear reducer components resulting in component damage. Never operate the cable reel when the oil level is below or above the lower edge of the level plug opening.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

-17.26-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Preventive Maintenance

3. If the oil is below the lower edge of the level plug opening, add oil, of the type specified in the Lubrication Section, through the reducer breather opening.

LEGEND 01. Right Angle Gear Reducer Figure 17-9: Right Angle Gear Reducer

WARNING

Inadvertent operation of the drill while working on or near the mast structure can result in injury or death. Lower the rotary carriage to the bottom of the mast, shut down drill operation, lock out and tag the operator controls prior to working on or near the mast structure. Follow the lockout and tagout procedures outlined at the front of this manual.
4. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent start-up of the machinery. Follow the lockout and tagout procedures outlined at the front of this manual. 5. Inspect for the following:

Breakout dogs on each pipe location, for wear.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -17.27Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

Preventive Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Hydraulic cylinders for oil leaks, wear, or damage. Pipe rack structure for damage. Pipe rack for correct operation. Linkages for looseness, wear, or damage.
Repair or replace worn or damaged pipe rack components. Refer to the applicable topic in this manual for repair instructions regarding the pipe rack.

17.8.3 lnspect Breakout Wrench


1. Inspect for cracked, broken, or distorted arm or hinge pins. 2. Inspect for missing die teeth, die retainers, shims, and pins. 3. Confirm that the arms move freely on the hinge pins.

17.8.4 lnspect Mast Racks and Pinions


Inspect the condition of the mast racks and pinions once weekly. Proceed as follows: 1. Lower the rotary carriage to the bottom of the mast, lower the mast to the stored position, and shut down operation of the drill.

WARNING

Working on or near the mast structure while the drill is operating is hazardous and can result in the injury or death of personnel. Lower the rotary carriage to the bottom of the mast, lower the mast to the stored position, shut down drill operation, lock out and tag the operator controls prior to working on or near the mast structure. Follow the lockout and tagout procedures outlined at the front of this manual.
2. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent start-up of the machinery. Follow the lockout and tagout procedures outlined at the front of this manual. 3. Inspect the gear racks and pinions for excessive wear, fractured or missing gear teeth, and other signs of damage which could effect the operation of the rotary carriage or pulldown system. Repair or replace any damaged rack segments or pinions. Refer to the applicable topic in this manual for repair instructions or procedures.

17.8.5 lnspect Rotary Machinery


Visually inspect the condition of the rotary machinery. Check for cracks, wear, or damage. Repair or replace any worn or damaged components. 1. Lower the rotary carriage to the bottom of the mast.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

-17.28-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Preventive Maintenance

WARNING

Inadvertent machine operation while working on or near the mast structure can result in the injury or death. Lower the rotary carriage to the bottom of the mast, shut down drill operation, lock out and tag the operator controls prior to working on or near the mast structure. Follow the lockout and tagout procedures outlined at the front of this manual.
2. 3. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent movement during maintenance activities. Inspect for the following:

Pulldown motor bolts for correct torque. Pulldown motor coupling for correct torque. Pulldown gearcase for secure mounting. Pulldown gearcase for oil leaks. Resolver for secure mounting. Hoist brake for assembly for secure mounting. Main rotary gearcase shaft for end play. Swivel for leaks. Rotary motor bolts for correct torque. Rotary gearcase for oil leaks. Rotary head side frames for cracks. Motor blowers for operation and cleanliness. Drill pipe coupling damper for correct clearances. Drill pipe coupling for thread wear or damage. Condition of hoses and cables.
Refer to the applicable sections of this manual for detailed instructions on inspection and adjustment of the rotary machinery.

17.8.6 Inspect Bailing Air System Components


Visually inspect the condition of the bailing air system components. Check for cracks, wear, or damage. Repair or replace any damaged components. Inspection should include but not be limited to the following bailing air system components:

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -17.29Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

Preventive Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Check the GUI to confirm functioning of the main air pressure transducer (MAPT), the bailing air pressure
transducer (BAPT), the main air temperature transducer (MATT), and the compressor oil temperature transducer (COTT).

Confirm functioning of the bailing air pressure gauge. Check all oil hoses and connections for leaks, wear, cracks, or damage. Check the thermostatic valve for leaks. Oil cooler for dirt and leaks. Cooling fan and motor. T-Tank for air/oil leaks. Scavenger line oil filter for leaks.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

-17.30-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Preventive Maintenance

17.8.7 Check Crawler Belt Tension

Figure 17-10: Check Crawler Belt Tension

Refer to Figure 17-10 and check crawler belt tension as follows: 1. Raise the drill until the crawler belt is free of the ground. 2. Measure the distance from the bottom of the side frame nearest the mid-point of the crawler to the top of the crawler pad where the roller normally contacts the pad. 3. Normally this distance will be from 12 to 14 inches (300 to 360 mm). If the distance exceeds 14 inches, adjustment is required.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -17.31Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

Preventive Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

17.8.8 Check Hydraulic Charge Filter

Figure 17-11: Charge Filter

Each main hydraulic system is equipped with a pressure filter which is inserted between the output of the control pressure charging pump and the input to the system control valves. The charge filters are located on a support bracket above the pump drive transmission. Check the filters as follows:

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

-17.32-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Preventive Maintenance

4. Inspect the filter unit for visible damage, leaking seals, or leaking fittings. If the GUI filter indicator shows that the element has become fouled (or, alternatively, after 6 months or 1000 hours of operation has passed), the element should be replaced. Refer to and replace the charge filter elements as follows:

01

02

BD0573a01

LEGEND 01. Pressure Test Port 02. Bleed Port

Figure 17-12: Charge Filter

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine startup during maintenance.
5. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine startup during maintenance activities.

WARNING

Hot hydraulic oil can spray with extreme force and volume causing injury or death. Use lockout and tagout procedures to guard against inadvertent hydraulic system or machine start up during service or maintenance. Allow the hydraulic system to cool before maintenance or repair. Slowly release pressure or vent circuits before disconnecting hydraulic lines. Wear appropriate face and body protective devices while carefully loosening any connection or fitting.
6. Turn off the Handwell valve and be sure that no pressure exists in any of the main hydraulic system circuits. 7. Remove the bleed plug located on bottom of the filter.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -17.33Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

Preventive Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

NOTICE
Clean dirt from the filter assembly before loosening the bleed plug.
8. Loosen and remove the cap from the filter body. 9. Remove and discard the old filter element. 10. Check the cap seal O-ring and back-up ring for nicks or damage. Replace these components as necessary. 11. Install a new filter element into the body of the filter. Be sure the element is correctly located on the bottom seat. 12. Apply a coating of hydraulic oil to the O-ring and back-up ring, and install with the filter cap. Torque the cap securely. 13. Install the bleed plug securely in the bottom of the filter. 14. Open the Handwell valve, start the hydraulic pumps, and check for leaks.

17.8.9 Check Hydraulic Return Line Filters

Figure 17-13: Return Filters

The hydraulic system is equipped with two return line filters. These filters are located in the top of the hydraulic reservoir (see Figure 17-9):

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

-17.34-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Preventive Maintenance

15. Check the filters for visible damage, leaking seals, and leaking connections. 16. If the filter indicators are in the red zone, or after six months or 1000 hours of operation the filter elements must be replaced. Replace the hydraulic return line filter elements as follows:

17.8.9.1 Disassembly.
Disassemble the return line filters for replacement of filter elements as follows (see Figure 17-1 1):

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lockout and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine startup during maintenance.

17.8.10 Check Main Compressor Oil Filter Indicator

TE

GE

FI

GE

FI

BD0559c01

Normal Operation

Change Filter

Figure 17-14: Main Compressor Oil Filter

To ensure unrestricted flow of oil to the main compressor, the oil filter assembly must be serviced at regular intervals. The main compressor oil filter is flange mounted to the oil return port on the main compressor. The compressor must be running and the oil at operating temperature for the indicator to read accurately. Check the indicator with a bright light to be certain of the indicator position. Some lubricants will obscure the indicator.The element must be replaced when one of the following conditions exists:

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -17.35Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

TE
L

CH
A

CH

Preventive Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

the top of the indicator on the filter is in the red Change Filter half of the window (refer to Figure 17-14). the GUI issues a main compressor oil filter fault. More than 6 months / 2000 hours has elapsed since the filter was last changed. When the pressure differential on the air control panel (refer to Figure 17-15) exceeds 8 psi.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

-17.36-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Preventive Maintenance

06 05

07

04
CIPS MAPS

MAPT

08

03

BACS
SUB PILOT VALVE OPENS AT 58 PSI

TANK FILTER

02

09 01
COPS BAPT

F E
COMP. FILTER

A 12

11

10

BD0509a01

LEGEND 01. Bit Air Pressure Transducer 02. directional flow control Valve 03. Bit Air Control Solenoid 04. Main Air Pressure Transducer 05. Electrical Panel 06. Compressor Inlet Pressure Switch 07. Main Air Pressure Switch PIPING LEGEND A. From Bit Air B. To Air Pilot Valve C. From Compressor Filter (inlet side) D. From Compressor Filter (outlet side)

08. Subtractive Pilot Valve 09. T-Tank Oil Separator Pressure Differential Manual Switch 10. Scavenger Oil Filter 11. Compressor Oil Filter Differential Manual Switch 12. Compressor Oil Pressure Switch (COPS) E. F. G. H. From Separator (outlet side) From Separator (inlet side) From T Tank To Compressor

Figure 17-15: Main Air Control Panel

Replace the main air compressor oil filter as follows:

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -17.37Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

Preventive Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lockout and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine startup during maintenance.
1. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine startup during maintenance activities.

CAUTION

Pressurized oil will spray with extreme force from the compressor main oil filter when being loosened, and can cause severe injury. Slowly release air pressure or vent the Ttank before loosening the filter canister. Wear appropriate face, ear, and body protective devices while opening the canister.
2. Vent any residual air pressure from the T-tank. The T-tank will vent through the main air system muffler when the main air compressor is not running. 3. Remove the head assembly by rotating tee handle counter-clockwise until head assembly is free of housing. 4. Holding baffle down, push down on indicator assembly to ensure that it moves up and down freely within the baffle. Remove baffle, and check the bore for burrs or deep scratches. Carefully smooth out the bore, if required. Check seal for cuts or excess wear. 5. Remove element from housing assembly. Remove the indicator assembly from element by inserting a screwdriver between the indicator assembly and the element cap, and carefully prying downward. Inspect indicator O-ring for cuts or excessive wear and discard element. 6. Remove O-ring from head assembly, and inspect it for cuts or excessive wear. Wipe the O-ring area of head with a clean cloth, and, after covering the O-ring with oil, reinstall it in the head assembly. 7. Reinstall indicator assembly into new element. Place the element into canister, being sure the large diameter of spring contacts the new element. Install baffle. 8. Place head assembly onto housing assembly and rotate tee handle clockwise until it is hand tight; do not exceed 20 ft-lbs (26 N.m). 9. Start the compressor. If leakage appears at the top of the canister, replace O-ring (02). If this does not stop the leakage, the canister may be nicked or distorted by over-torquing, and the canister should be repaired or replaced. 10. If leakage appears around tee handle (08), remove snap ring (lo), and, then, remove the tee handle from head assembly (01). Remove and discard O-ring (09). Wipe the tee handle and the 0 - ring groove. Oil and install a new O-ring, then insert the tee handle into the head assembly, and replace the snap ring.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

-17.38-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Preventive Maintenance

17.8.11 Check Main Compressor Oil Separator Element


11. The main compressor oil separator is equipped with inner and outer filter elements. The separator includes a system for measuring the pressure differential between the inlet and outlet ports of the oil separator. When the differential pressure exceeds 8 psi (0.5 bar), the oil separator element needs to be replaced.

06

07 08

05 04

05

03 09 02

01 11
LEGEND 01. Sight Tube 02. Fill Plug 03. Oil Separators 04. Main Air Pipe 05. Sling Lift Point 06. 07. 08. 09. 10. 11.

10

BD0501b01

Union Safety Relief Valve Air Pilot Valve Air/Oil Reservoir Compressor Oil Temperature Probe Shutoff (Drain) Valve

Figure 17-16: T-Tank (on Left Hand Platform)

Refer to Figure 17-16 and replace the filter elements inside the oil separator as follows:

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance work.
1. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine start-up during maintenance activities.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -17.39Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

Preventive Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

CAUTION

High pressure hydraulic or air systems can spray with extreme force and noise causing severe injury. Shut down system and slowly release pressure or vent circuits before loosening fittings or connections. Wear appropriate face, ear, and body protective devices while venting air or hydraulic systems.
2. Vent any residual air pressure from the T-Tank. The T-Tank will vent through the main air system muffler when the main air compressor is not running and the controls are de-energized. 3. Thoroughly clean the air-oil separator flange and fittings to remove any dirt that could fall into the T-Tank when the separator cover and other fittings are opened. 4. Tag and remove the hose assembly on top of the oil separator cover that connects to the scavenger tubes.

Technician Tip
It is not necessary to remove the fittings or interconnecting tubing from the oil separator cover.
5. Tag and remove the upstream pressure tap hose assembly on top of the oil separator cover. 6. Remove hose from the safety relief valve.

CAUTION

Lifting heavy components with inadequate hoisting apparatus can injure personnel and/ or damage equipment. Use suitable slings and hoisting equipment to stabilize and lift heavy objects.
7. Attach suitable hoisting equipment to the main air pipe assembly, and carefully take up the slack. 8. Remove nuts, lockwashers, and capscrews that attach main air pipe flange to the oil separator cover, and lift the main air pipe assembly from the T-Tank. 9. Remove and discard gasket. 10. Attach a suitable hoist to oil separator cover, remove capscrews and lockwashers from the separator cover, then lift the separator cover and attached inner separator element from the T-Tank. Lift the cover straight up when removing it from the T-Tank to avoid damaging the separator element. 11. Remove outer separator element from the T-Tank. Discard the element in a suitable container, and cover the TTank opening to prevent entry of dirt. 12. Remove capscrews, lockwashers, retainer, and inner separator element from oil separator cover. Discard the element in a suitable container. 13. Clean away any deposits from inside the T-Tank and from the mounting surfaces of oil separator cover. 14. Inspect scavenger tubes for signs of deterioration or plugging. Replace as necessary.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

-17.40-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Preventive Maintenance

15. Inspect the insert (Item 10, Figure 6-45) to be sure it is positioned correctly. The cut-out at the bottom must face the front of the drill away from the 6" inlet pipe.

CAUTION

Staples on the filter elements are required to eliminate static electricity, which could cause the oil to flash, resulting in personal injury and/or property damage. Do not remove staples from the gaskets.
16. Install a new gasket between the inner separator element and the T-Tank tower. 17. Install new inner separator element to oil separator cover assembly with retainer, capscrews, and lockwashers. Position inner scavenger tube so that it rests on the bottom plate of the inner element. 18. Install a new outer separator element into the top of the T-Tank. Align the holes in the element cover with those of the T-Tank flange.

CAUTION

Lifting heavy components with inadequate hoisting apparatus can injure personnel and/ or damage equipment. Use suitable slings and hoisting equipment to stabilize and lift heavy objects.
19. Attach suitable lifting equipment to separator cover assembly, and position on top of outer element flange on the T-Tank. Be sure outer scavenger tube is correctly positioned at the bottom of the outer element. Position the holes in the separator cover to align with the holes in the outer element flange. 20. Install oil separator cover to the T-Tank flange with capscrews and lockwashers. Torque the capscrews evenly in a crisscross pattern to uniformly compress the outer element flange. 21. Attach suitable lifting equipment to air inlet nozzle, and position the flange above the mating flange on top of separator cover assembly. 22. Install main air pipe to separator cover assembly with capscrews, lockwashers, nuts, and a new gasket. Do not tighten the nuts at this time. 23. Align the opposite end of air pipe with manifold and couple with union. Tighten the union securely, then uniformly tighten the nuts at the flange end of the air inlet nozzle. 24. Install the hose assembly to the scavenger tube fitting on top of oil separator cover. 25. Install the upstream pressure tap hose assembly on top of oil separator cover. 26. Check the level of compressor oil in the T-Tank, and fill as necessary.

17.8.12 Check Main Compressor Air Intake Filters


The main compressor is equipped with two filter systems, one at each intake. Each filter system has two filters in series (see Figure 17-14); a primary filter element, and a safety filter element. The air drawn into the main compressor passes through both filters. To ensure that the compressor retains its maximum output capacity, the air intake filters must be periodically cleaned.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -17.41Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

Preventive Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Inspect the filter assembly weekly. Visually inspect the main compressor intake filter(s) for dirt and contamination. The filters are fitted with restriction indicator fittings. Check the GUI fault log to determine the need for cleaning. Refer to the Main Air Section of this manual for removal and replacement procedures.

NOTICE
The safety element is not designed to be cleaned. For maximum compressor protection, install a new safety filter every third primary element cleaning (or replacement). Replace the main air compressor air intake filter elements as follows:

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lockout and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine startup during maintenance.

Figure 17-17: Main Compressor Air Cleaner Assembly

1. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine startup during maintenance activities. 2. Loosen the band clamp which secures air cleaner cover, and remove the cover.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

-17.42-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Preventive Maintenance

3. Remove wing nut and washer, and pull primary element from the air cleaner assembly. 4. Remove wing nut, and pull safety element from the air cleaner assembly. 5. If the filter body requires cleaning, loosen the band clamps which secure housing and cup to primary body, and separate the air cleaner assembly. 6. Clean or replace the primary element, and replace the safety element as required. 7. Refer to Figure 17-17 and assemble the air cleaner with clean or new elements.

17.8.13 Check Auto Lube Grease Reservoir Level


Weekly or every 40 hours of operation, check the level of the grease lubricant in the automatic lubrication system grease reservoir. Remove the cover of the grease reservoir and visually check the lubricant level. Refill the reservoir as necessary to maintain adequate lubrication. Continued drill use will provide a history of grease consumption, which may dictate varied grease reservoir level checks. If unsure of the lubricant level, shut down operation of the drill and check the reservoir level.

17.8.14 lnspect Trail Cable


Proceed as follows.

WARNING

Hazardous voltage can cause injury or death. Disconnect electric power to the tail cable at the power substation and use lockout and tagout procedures prior to visual inspection or handling of the tail cable. Use qualified inspection personnel equipped with appropriate devices for testing, handling, and personal protection. Power is fed to the blast hole drill via the trail cable power conductor cable. It is imperative that this cable not
be damaged, or cut. Visually inspect the tail cable to ensure that it is not damaged, crushed, or cut. Replace the trail cable if it is damaged.

17.9 C Maintenance Checks


The C Maintenance Checks should be performed monthly, or every 160 -250 hours. If an item is found to be incorrect, the problem must be corrected prior to start-up to ensure satisfactory operation of the drill. Refer to the maintenance check sheets and complete A and B Maintenance Checks before proceeding with the C Maintenance Checks.

17.9.1 lnspect Mast Back Braces And Slides


Proceed as follows:

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -17.43Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

Preventive Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

WARNING

Cracks in the back brace pivot anchors will result in the pivot anchors separating from the drill frame, or from the mast chords, resulting in the collapse of the mast. Collapse of the mast may result in injury or death. Visually inspect the pivot points of the back braces, and make repairs immediately if cracks are found.
The back braces restrain movement of the mast during drilling operations. These tubular braces absorb a large amount of the vibration from the drilling operation and as a result are common points for the development of structural cracks. Visually inspect the pivot points of the back braces for cracks.

SAFETY FIRST
Although cracks are most commonly found at the upper mast anchor point, each pivot should be carefully checked. If any doubt exists as to the presence of a crack, test the crack using chemical or magnetic crack detection methods.
If cracks are found, refer to the Mast Section of this manual, and repair the back braces. Inspect the slide surfaces of the back brace locking sleeves for wear or damage. If the slides are excessively worn or damaged, repair the slides and/or sleeves as described in Mast Section of this manual.

17.9.2 lnspect Mast


Visually inspect the structural condition of the mast. Check for cracks, wear, or damage. Repair or replace the components of the mast, mast bracing, or lacing as revealed through this inspection.

WARNING

Working on or near the mast structure while the drill is operating is hazardous and can result in injury or death. Lower the rotary carriage to the bottom of the mast, shut down drill operation, lock out and tag the operator controls prior to working on or near the mast structure.
Follow the lockout and tagout procedures outlined at the front of this manual. Inspect for the following:

Mast chords, for cracks or kinks. Lacings, for cracks or kinks. Mast hoist cylinder pins and retainers for wear or looseness. Ladders, platforms, and handrails for looseness. Hoist cylinder rods, pins, and seals for damage or wear. Hydraulic connections and cylinders for leakage. Pivot pins, anchors, and retainers for wear and looseness.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

-17.44-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Preventive Maintenance

Refer to the Mast Section of this manual for detailed instructions on inspection of the mast.

17.9.3 lnspect Auxiliary Winch Sheaves


Proceed as follows.

WARNING

Working on or near the mast structure while the drill is operating is hazardous and can result in injury or death. Lower the rotary carriage to the bottom of the mast, shut down drill operation, lock out and tag the operator controls prior to working on or near the mast structure. Follow the lockout and tagout procedures outlined at the front of this manual.
As wire rope passes over sheaves, the sheaves become worn. Inspect the condition of the winch sheaves monthly to ensure that the sheaves are not excessively worn. Measure the sheave groove wear pattern using a sheave gauge. Replace the sheaves as revealed through this inspection. Refer to the Mast Section of this manual for repair instructions regarding the winch sheaves. The mast must be lowered to facilitate inspection of the sheaves.

17.9.4 Clean Main Compressor and Hydraulic Oil Cooler


To ensure satisfactory cooling of the main compressor oil, the main compressor oil cooler must be periodically cleaned. At least monthly, or every 160 hours of operation, clean the oil cooler radiators as follows: 1. Shut down operation of the main air compressor and cooler.

WARNING

Working on or near rotating machinery while in operation is hazardous and can result in injury or death. Shut down operation of the drill, and use lockout/tagout procedures prior to working on or near rotating machinery.
2. Lock out and tag the electrical controls to the main air compressor pressor and cooler to prevent inadvertent start-up during service activities. 3. Remove the machinery house access covers to access to the main compressor oil cooler radiator.

CAUTION

Pressurized steam used for cleaning can cause injury. Exercise care and caution when using pressurized steam to clean machinery components. Wear protective clothing, gloves, and face shield when operating a pressurized steam cleaner.
4. Use a pressurized steam cleaner to flush dirt and contaminants from the fins of the main compressor oil cooler radiator. Ensure thorough cleaning of the entire radiator.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -17.45Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

Preventive Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

5. After the radiator has been thoroughly cleaned, use compressed air to blow the remaining dirt, contaminants, and water from the oil cooler fins. 6. Clean any dirt, contaminants, and water from the floor of the machinery house. 7. Reinstall any access covers which were removed to permit cleaning of the oil cooler.

17.9.5 Inspect Main Frame


Visually inspect the structural condition of the drill framework. Check for cracks, wear, or damage. Repair or replace the components of the frame as revealed through this inspection. Inadvertent machine operation during maintenance activities can cause injury or death. Shut down the drill before performing inspections, service, or maintenance. Establish a procedure to guard against inadvertent equipment operation or movement while conducting inspections. Use lockout and tagout procedures prior to conducting maintenance or service. 1. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent movement of the machine during maintenance activities. 2. Inspect the following:

Entire structural frame. Jack flanges and flange bolts. Stairways, ladders, and platforms. Machinery house framing. Jack assemblies/jack shoes. Machinery house panels. Machinery house doors. Water tank (optional equipment). Dust collector chutes (optional equipment).

17.9.6 Inspect Crawler Frames


Visually inspect the structural condition of each crawler side frame. Check for cracks, wear, or damage. Repair or replace the components of the crawler frames as revealed through this inspection.

WARNING

Working on or near rotating machinery while in operation is hazardous and can result in the injury or death of personnel. Shut down operation of the drill, and use lockout/tagout procedures prior to working on or near rotating machinery.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

-17.46-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Preventive Maintenance

Inspect the following components:

Entire structural crawler side frame. Track shoes. Crawler links. Idler rollers. Top guide rollers. Bottom guide rollers Main axle mounting bolts. Equalizer axle mounting pins. Track pins and retainers. Take-up adjustment assemblies. Drive tumblers.

17.9.7 Check Auxiliary Winch Oil Level


Monthly, check the auxiliary winch gearcase oil level as follows: 1. Shut down operation of the drill.

WARNING

Working on or near rotating machinery while in operation is hazardous and can result in the injury or death of personnel. Shut down operation of the drill, and use lockout/tagout procedures prior to working on or near rotating machinery. 2. Use lockout and tagout procedures to prevent inadvertent start-up during service activities. 3. Remove the oil level plug from the end opposite the hydraulic motor, and check the winch gearcase oil level. The oil should reach up to the lower edge of the level plug opening.

CAUTION
Operating the winch when the gearcase has been overfilled will cause overheating of the gearcase components resulting in component damage. Never operate the winch when the oil level is below or above the lower edge of the level plug opening.
4. The oil level must be even with the lower edge of the level plug opening. If the oil is below the lower edge of the level plug opening, add oil, of the type specified in the Lubrication Section through the gearcase breather opening.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -17.47Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

Preventive Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

5. Clean and securely reinstall the breather. 6. Apply pipe thread sealant to the level plug, and install securely.

17.9.8 Inspect Cable Reel Components


Visually inspect the condition of the optional cable reel components. Check for cracks, wear, or damage. Repair or replace the components of the cable reel as revealed through this inspection.

WARNING

Working on or near rotating machinery while in operation is hazardous and can result in the injury or death of personnel. Shut down operation of the drill, and use lockout/tagout procedures prior to working on or near rotating machinery.
1. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent movement of the machine during maintenance activities. 2. Inspect the following:

Hydraulic motor. for leaks Drive chain for wear and tension. Chain sprockets for wear. Right angle gear reducer for leaks. Cable reel structure, for cracks
Refer to the applicable section of this manual specific to this drill for detailed instructions on correct inspection of and/or adjustment of the cable reel machinery.

17.9.9 Clean/Flush Water Tank


Flush and clean the optional water tank periodically to remove dirt, sediment, and contaminants accumulated over time. Monthly, drain, clean, and flush the water tank. Refill the tank with fresh water.

17.9.10 Check Pump Drive Transmission Oil Level


The pump drive transmission mounted on the front end of the main power unit, drives the two main hydraulic pumps and one auxiliary hydraulic pump. Monthly, check the oil level in the pump drive transmission using the following procedure: 1. 1. Shut down operation of the main power unit.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

-17.48-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Preventive Maintenance

WARNING

Working on or near rotating machinery while in operation is hazardous and can result in injury or death. Shut down operation of the drill, and use lockout/tagout procedures prior to working on or near rotating machinery.
2. 2. Shut down, lock out, and tag the electrical controls to the drill to prevent inadvertent start-up during service activities. 3. 3. Check the pump drive transmission oil level using the dip stick. 4. 4. If the oil level is low, add oil to bring the level even with the full mark on the dip stick. (See the Lubrication Section, for lubricant specifications). Add oil through the oil filler plug located on top of the reducer housing.

CAUTION
Operating the pump drive transmission when it has been overfilled will cause overheating of the pump drive transmission components resulting in component damage. Never operate the pump drive transmission when the oil level is either too full or too low.

17.9.11 Change Main Compressor Bearing Oil Filter


A spin-on type oil filter (located on the motor-end face of the compressor) is used to filter the bearing oil as it passes through the main air compressor. This filter removes dirt and abrasives from the circulated oil before it reaches the bearings. The filter is disposable, and is equipped with a relief valve that opens in the event the element becomes dirty enough to block the flow of oil. Replace this filter each time the main oil filter element is replaced. Use only the replacement filter shown in the parts list; others may not have sufficient burst pressure strength. Replace the main compressor bearing oil filter as follows:

WARNING

Working on the main air system while the compressor is in operation is hazardous and can result in injury or death. Shut down the main air compressor, and use lockout/tagout procedures prior to starting any service on the machinery.
1. Lock out and tag the high-voltage main circuit breaker switch to prevent operation of the main air compressor drive motor during system service.

WARNING

Pressurized oil will spray with extreme force from the compressor bearing oil filter when being loosened, and can cause severe injury. Slowly release air pressure or vent the Ttank before loosening the filter canister. Wear appropriate face, ear, and body protective devices while removing the filter from the compressor housing.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -17.49Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

Preventive Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

2. Vent any residual air pressure from the T-tank. The T-tank will vent through the main air system muffler when the main air compressor is not running. 3. Spin off the old filter and discard. Apply a film of oil to the filter gasket, then spin on the new filter. Tighten the filter firmly by hand to prevent oil leaks. Be sure the filter sealing surfaces are clean before installing the new filter.

NOTICE
When changing this filter between oil changes, add one quart of compressor oil to the system to replace that retained in the old filter (see the Lubrication Section for specifications of the compressor oil to use).

17.9.12 Check Propel Transmission Oil Level

Figure 17-18: Propel Transmission Plugs

The propel transmissions are mounted at the front of each crawler assembly. Each propel transmission is driven by a hydraulic motor and together with the transmission. serves as the drive mechanism to propel the drill. Monthly, check the oil level in the propel transmissions using the following procedure: 1. Rotate the transmission until the level/fill plug and drain plug are positioned as shown in Figure 17-15. 2. Shut down operation of the main power unit.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

-17.50-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Preventive Maintenance

WARNING

Working on or near rotating machinery while in operation is hazardous and can result in injury or death. Shut down operation of the drill, and use lockout/tagout procedures prior to working on or near rotating machinery.
3. Shut down, lock out, and tag the electrical controls to the drill to prevent inadvertent start-up during service activities. 4. Remove the propel transmission oil level/fill plug. 5. Check that the oil level is up to the bottom of the oil level plug hole. 6. If the oil level is low, add oil to bring the level even with the bottom of the oil level plug hole (see the Lubrication Section for lubricant specifications). Add oil through the oil level/fill plug. 7. Apply pipe thread sealant to the oil level/fill plug, and install the plug securely.

CAUTION
Operating the propel transmission when it has been overfilled will cause overheating of the propel transmission components resulting in component damage. Never operate the propel transmission when the oil level is either too full or too low.

17.9.13 Clean/inspect Machinery House Blowers And Filters


The following paragraphs describe the inspection and maintenance procedures that should be followed when servicing the machinery house blowers and impingement filters that provide pressurized air to the machinery house. An electric-motor-driven blower provides air under slight positive pressure to the machinery house. The fan is located in the upper section of the mast. Air is drawn from atmosphere and blown through filter assemblies into the machinery house. Air flows through the house and is exhausted to atmosphere through openings in the house. This ensures that cooling air within the house is clean and fresh. The blowers maintain a slight positive pressure within the machinery house, causing air to flow outward through any house openings, thus helping to keep dirt out. The blowers and motors are installed in-line within sheet metal housings that attached to impingement type filters. These filters separate dust and entrained particles from the input air stream and allow the resulting clean air to enter the machinery house while dropping the separated particulate out of the machine through tubes at the bottom of the air cleaners, as shown in Figure 17-17. Inspect the ventilation system as follows: 1. Check for large debris in air inlet passages and remove when found. 2. Check blower motor mounting for security. 3. Check that the blower blades are tight and set at the same angle.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -17.51Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

Preventive Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

4. Check the filters for accumulated dirt and debris. A light coating of dust on the cells is normal and will not impair operation or efficiency of the filters. However, the cell blades may accumulate a thicker deposit of surface dirt due to the sticky character of some types of dust, or the presence of oil mist or similar vapor in the outside air. When the accumulated deposit reaches a thickness of 118 inch (3.2 mm), the cell blades should be cleaned. In addition to the 160-hour inspection, a more detailed inspection should be made twice annually. Check that the blower blades are clean and set at the proper pitch Use the following procedure to clean the filter elements: 1. Gain access to the filters by removing the sheet metal which encloses them. 2. Refer to Figure 17-22 and loosen the nuts which hold the blade pack clamp bars in place. Then rotate the clamp bars 90 degrees and remove the bullnose strips. 3. Refer to Figure 17-22 and pull each of the blade packs out of the cell. 4. Thoroughly clean the blade packs in a detergent or other similar non-oily solution.

NOTICE
If the cleaning process removes paint from the blades, they should be repainted prior to installation.
5. After cleaning and drying the filter blade packs, coat the outside surfaces of the channels to which the blades are welded and the inside surfaces of the channels into which each blade pack slides with grease. This grease lubricates the edge of the blade pack for easier installation and serves as a seal to prevent air and dirt bypass. 6. Check bleed ducts for dirt buildup and clean if necessary. The only maintenance possible on the motor/blower assemblies is blower replacement, motor replacement, or replacement of the blower and motor unit as an assembly.

NOTICE
When ordering replacement parts for the blower/motor assembly always give all information on the blower data plate.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

-17.52-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Preventive Maintenance

Figure 17-19: Filter Packs

Figure 17-20: Blade Pack

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -17.53Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

Preventive Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

17.9.14 Inspect Rotary Carriage Rollers


Check the clearance of the carriage rollers monthly, or more often if there is extended use of the drill on a daily basis. The carriage rollers are mounted on eccentric shafts to permit adjustment of roller position, and to maintain proper pulldown pinion engagement due to roller wear. The 16 mounting holes in the shaft flanges permit adjustment in increments equivalent to the 22.5" difference in the location of the mounting holes.

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement or operation can cause injury or death. When necessary to operate the blasthole drill while making an adjustment or performing a check, obtain the assistance of a second person who is thoroughly familiar with the machine. Have the assistant at the control panel to be sure that nothing is actuated that may be hazardous to you or the machine. 17.9.14.1 Roller Adjustment

BD0552a01

Figure 17-21: Roller Adjustment

The mast should be positioned in the down, or lowered, position. Refer to Figure 17-21 and proceed as follows: 1. Lower the mast so that the pinion shrouds are resting on the rack shrouds. 2. Remove the four socket head capscrews from the eccentric bushing. 3. Turn the eccentric bushing until a gap of 1/8" (.125"; 3mm) is obtained between all of the rollers and the back of the mast chord. Follow steps 1 through 3 for all three remaining roller carriers.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

-17.54-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Preventive Maintenance

17.9.15 Check And Adjust Water Pump Drive Belt


The water pump (see Figure 17-21) is mounted on a bracket at one end of the water supply tank. It is protected from the environment by a louvered enclosure. The pump is V-belt driven by an independently-mounted electric motor. The tension of the V-belt should be checked at least once monthly, and adjusted as needed. Adjust the drive belt tension as follows:

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lockout and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine startup during maintenance.
1. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine startup during maintenance activities. 2. Remove the pump enclosure. 3. Loosen, but do not remove, the motor mounting hardware. 4. Loosen the adjustment locknuts. 5. Turn the belt tensioning screws as required until there is 112 inch (13 mm) deflection of the belt at a point midway between the sheaves. Adjust the screws evenly so the motor sheave remains parallel to the belt. 6. Tighten the adjustment locknuts. 7. Tighten the motor mounting hardware securely. 8. Install the pump enclosure.

17.10 D Maintenance Checks

- 500 Hours (Quarterly)

The D Maintenance checks should be performed every 500 hours, or quarterly. If an item is checked and found to be incorrect, the problem must be corrected prior to start-up to ensure satisfactory operation of the drill. Repeat A, B and C Maintenance Checks before proceeding with the D Maintenance Checks, refer to the maintenance check sheets and complete all of the A, B, and C Maintenance Checks.

17.10.1 Replace Oil Line Scavenger Filter Element


The oil line scavenger filter is located on the main air control panel. This filter cleans oil scavenged from between the two oil separator elements. Replace the filter as follows:

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine startup during maintenance.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -17.55Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

Preventive Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

1. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine startup during maintenance activities.

WARNING

Hot hydraulic oil can spray with extreme force and volume causing injury or death. Use lockout and tagout procedures to guard against inadvertent hydraulic system or machine start up during service or maintenance. Allow the hydraulic system to cool before maintenance or repair. Slowly release pressure or vent circuits before disconnecting hydraulic lines. Wear appropriate face and body protective devices while carefully loosening any connection or fitting.
2. Be sure that no air or hydraulic pressure exists in the main air system. 3. Loosen and remove the filter housing from the body.

CAUTION
Small amounts of contaminants in the air compressor recirculation system can cause significant equipment damage. Clean dirt from the filter assembly before loosening the housing.
4. Remove and discard the used filter element. 5. Check the filter seal for nicks and cuts. Replace as necessary. 6. Install a new filter element in the housing. 7. Lubricate the seal with hydraulic oil, and install the housing securely in the filter body.

17.10.2 Check Bolts, Mounting And Attachment Torques


It is recommended that all mounting and attachment bolts and capscrews be checked periodically for correct torque to ensure that all components remain securely mounted. This mounting bolt check should be made quarterly at first and adjusted as experience dictates. Refer to the bolt and capscrew torque values provided in Table 17- 1 for applicable bolt and capscrew torques.

17.11 E Maintenance Checks

- Semi-annual/1000 Hours

The E Maintenance checks should be performed every 1000 hours, or semi-annually. If an item is checked and found to be incorrect, the problem must be corrected prior to start-up to ensure satisfactory drill operation. Refer to the maintenance check sheets and complete all of the A, B, C, and D Maintenance Checks.

17.11.1 Change Rotary Gearcase Oil


The rotary gearcase is mounted to the lower end of the rotary carriage. This double-reduction gear reducer drives the rotary head coupling, the drill bit, and the pipe string. Change the rotary gearcase oil as follows (see Figure 173):

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

-17.56-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Preventive Maintenance

1. Lower the rotary carriage to the bottom of the mast.

WARNING

Working on or near rotating machinery while in operation is hazardous and can result in injury or death. Lower the rotary carriage to the bottom of the mast; use lockout/tagout procedures to shut down the drill before performing service procedures.
2. Use lockout/tagout procedures to prevent inadvertent start-up during service procedures. 3. Open the gearcase bearing drain valve and remove the drain plug from the bottom of the gearcase, and drain the oil from the gearcase into a suitable container. 4. When the old oil is completely drained, close the gearcase bearing drain valve. Clean the drain plug, apply pipe thread sealant, and install it in the back of the gearcase. 5. Remove the vent cap from the top of the gearcase. 6. Add oil, of the type and amount specified in the Lubrication Section, through the fill pipe until oil reaches the FULL mark on the dipstick. 7. Clean and install the vent cap.

CAUTION
Operating the rotary machinery when the rotary gearcase has been overfilled will cause overheating of the gearcase components resulting in damage to the gearcase components. Never operate the rotary machinery with the rotary gearcase oil level above the FULL mark on the dipstick.

17.11.2 Change Pump Drive Transmission Oil


The pump drive transmission provides the rotational power to drive the three main hydraulic pumps and one auxiliary hydraulic pump. Every six months, or each 1000 hours of operation, change the pump drive transmission oil as follows (see Figure 17-22):

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -17.57Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

Preventive Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

WARNING

Working on or near rotating machinery while in operation is hazardous and can result in injury or death. Lower the rotary carriage to the bottom of the mast; use lockout/tagout procedures to shut down the drill before performing service procedures.

Figure 17-22: Pump Drive Transmission (typ)

1. Use lockout/tagout procedures to prevent inadvertent start-up during service procedures. 2. Open the gearcase drain valve and drain the oil from the gearcase into a suitable container. The outlet for the pump drive transmission drain is located below the machinery deck. 3. When the old oil is completely drained, close the crankcase drain valve. 4. Remove the vent/fill cap.

5. Add oil, of the type and amount specified in the Lubrication Section, until oil reaches the full mark on the dip stick.
6. Clean and install the fill/vent cap.

CAUTION
Operating the pump drive transmission when the transmission has been overfilled will cause transmission components to overheat, resulting in damage to the transmission. Never operate the pump drive transmission with the oil level above the level plug.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

-17.58-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Preventive Maintenance

17.11.3 Change Hoist/Pulldown Gear Reducer Oil


The hoist/pulldown gear reducer (see Figure 17-3) provides the torque required to power the rotary carriage assembly along the vertical length of the mast. Every six months, or 1000 hours of gearcase operation, use the following procedure to change the oil in the reducer:

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lockout and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine startup during maintenance.
1. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine startup during maintenance activities. 2. Using a suitable container to catch the used oil, remove the drain plug from the bottom of the reducer housing, and drain all of the oil. 3. Install the drain plug with pipe thread sealant. 4. 4. to the correct level, indicated on the sight gauge, with oil specified in the Lubrication Section of this manual. 5. Install the filler plug with pipe thread sealant.

17.11.4 Change Propel Transmission Oil


The propel transmission is equipped with a planetary drive gearcase, hydraulically driven, which functions to provide rotary motion to drive the crawler belt and propel the drill. Use following procedure to change the oil in the propel transmission once each year, or every 2000 hours of operation (see Figure 17- 15): 1. Rotate the transmission until the level/fill plug and drain plug are positioned as shown on Figure 17-15.

WARNING

Unexpected movement of the propel system could result in injury or death. Use lockout tagout procedure to shut down the drill before starting propel transmission oil change procedures.
2. Shut down the drilling operations. Use lockout/tagout procedures to prevent inadvertent drill movement. 3. Remove the propel transmission drain and level plugs, and drain the oil into a suitable container. 4. Clean the oil drain plug. Apply a coating of pipe thread sealant, and install the drain plugs.

17.11.5 Change Hoist/Pulldown Gear Reducer Oil


The hoist/pulldown gear reducer (see Figure 17-3) provides the torque required to power the rotary carriage assembly along the vertical length of the mast. Every six months, or 1000 hours of operation, use the following procedure to change the oil in the reducer:

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -17.59Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

Preventive Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

WARNING

Inadvertent machine movement can cause serious injury or death. Do not perform maintenance work on a machine without first disabling the operator controls. Lockout and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine startup during maintenance.
1. Lock out and tag the operator controls to prevent inadvertent machine startup during maintenance activities. 2. Using a suitable container to catch the used oil, remove the drain plug from the bottom of the reducer housing, and drain all of the oil. 3. Install the drain plug with pipe thread sealant. 4. Remove the filler plug from the top of the reducer housing, and fill the reducer to the correct level, indicated on the sight gauge, with oil specified in the Lubrication Section of this manual. 5. Install the filler plug with pipe thread sealant.

17.11.6 Change Propel Transmission Oil


The propel transmission is equipped with a planetary drive gearcase, hydraulically driven, which functions to provide rotary motion to drive the crawler belt and propel the drill. Use following procedure to change the oil in the propel transmission once each year, or every 2000 hours of operation (see Figure 17- 15): 1. Rotate the transmission until the level/fill plug and drain plug are positioned as shown on Figure 17-15.

WARNING

Unexpected movement of the propel system could result in injury or death. Use lockout tagout procedure to shut down the drill before starting propel transmission oil change procedures.
2. Shut down the drilling operations. Use lockout/tagout procedures to prevent inadvertent drill movement. 3. Remove the propel transmission drain and level plugs, and drain the oil into a suitable container. 4. Clean the oil drain plug. Apply a coating of pipe thread sealant, and install the drain plugs. 5. Add oil, of the type specified in Lubrication Section, through the level/fill plug opening until the level reaches the bottom of the fill/level plug hole. 6. Apply pipe thread sealant to the vent plug, and install the plugs.

17.12 F Maintenance Checks

- Annual/2000Hours

The F Maintenance checks should be performed 2000 hours or annually. If an item is checked and found to be incorrect, the problem must be corrected prior to start-up to ensure satisfactory operation of the drill.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

-17.60-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Preventive Maintenance

Repeat A, B, C, D, and E Maintenance Checks before proceeding with the F Maintenance Checks

17.12.1 Change Hydraulic System Oil


It is recommended that the hydraulic system oil be changed once each year, or every 2000 hours of operation. Drain, flush, and refill the hydraulic system. Refill the hydraulic system with the type and amount of oil specified in the Lubrication Section.

NOTICE
It is recommended that a sample of oil be drawn from the hydraulic tank annually. This sample should be about two quarts and should be taken when the oil is warmed through normal operation. If possible, the sample should be analyzed by a qualified lubrication specialist to determine whether it is suitable for continued use. The interval between oil changes depends upon the operating conditions and on the care used in the handling oils and keeping the clean during the handling process.

17.12.2 Change Auxiliary Winch Gearcase Oil


The auxiliary winch gearcase contains a planetary-type trans- mission inside the winch assembly. Annually, or every 2000 hours of operation, the oil in the auxiliary winch gearcase needs to be changed. Use the following procedure to change the oil in the gearcase:

WARNING

Working on or near the mast and/or winch during drilling operation is hazardous and can result in injury or death. Lower the rotary carriage to the bottom of the mast and shut down the drill using lockout/tagout procedures.
1. Lower the rotary carriage to the bottom of the mast, and shutdown the drill using lockout/tagout procedures to prevent inadvertent start-up of the drill. 2. Remove the oil drain plug from the end opposite the hydraulic motor, and drain the oil into a suitable container, 3. Clean the oil drain plug, apply a coating of pipe thread sealant, and install the drain plug. 4. Remove the oil fill and level plugs. 5. Add oil of the type specified in the Lubrication Section, through the gearcase fill plug opening until the level reaches the bottom of the level plug hole. 6. Apply pipe thread sealant to the fill and level plugs, and reinstall the plugs.

17.12.3 Change Cable Reel Gear Reducer Oil


The tail cable reel (optional equipment) is mounted across the front of the machinery house and serves to store the tail cable. The gear reducer, driven by a hydraulic motor, provides rotary motion to rotate the cable drum. Annually, or every 2000 hours of operation, the oil in the cable reel gear reducer needs to be changed. Use the following procedure to change the oil in the reducer:

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development -17.61Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

Preventive Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

1. Shut down the drilling operations, and power down the drill.

WARNING

Working on or near the cable reel during drill operation is hazardous and can result in injury or death. Shut down operation of the drill, and use lockout/tagout procedures prior to working on or near the cable reel.
2. Lock out and tag the electrical controls to the auxiliary hydraulic system to prevent inadvertent start-up of the cable reel during service activities, 3. Remove the oil drain plug, and drain the oil into a suitable container. 4. Clean the oil drain plug. Apply a coating of pipe thread sealant, and install the drain plug. 5. Remove the oil level plug and the oil breather cap.

CAUTION
Operating the cable reel when the gear reducer has been overfilled will cause overheating of the reducer components resulting in component damage. Never operate the cable reel when the oil level is either below or above the lower edge of the level plug opening.
6. Add oil of the type specified in the Lubrication Section, through the gearcase breather opening until the level reaches the bottom of the filler plug hole. 7. Apply pipe thread sealant to the fill level plug, and install the plug securely. 8. Install the oil breather cap.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Section 17, Version 00 - 03/06

-17.62-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation Sec17PM.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

General Maintenance

Appendix A

General Maintenance
A.1 Removal General
The following general rules apply to removal of most major components. 1. Always make sure that all controls are in the OFF position. Main and emergency power switches must be opened and locked in the open (OFF) positions. Place warning signs on these switches so that others do not turn on the power while you are working on the machine.

WARNING

Unexpected machine operation could result in death or severe personal injury. Warning signs must always be removed by the person who placed them - never by anyone else.
2. Lifting heavy components with inadequate hoisting apparatus can injure personnel and/or damage equipment. Use suitable rigging and hoisting equipment to stabilize and lift heavy objects. 3. Before performing any work on any system, consider the effect that the work may have on the system. Be sure that the machinery will not move as a result of the work being performed. Be sure the system is not under pressure. Be sure electrical power is disconnected.

A.2 Disassembly General


1. Disassemble only what is required for specific repairs. 2. Never use a torch to assist in removing parts unless the parts to be heated are already damaged beyond repair, or the instructions recommend the use of heat for disassembly. Excessive heat may damage the part beyond repair. 3. Never use more force than necessary to dismantle an assembly. In most cases, a great deal of force is not required. 4. Handle parts carefully to prevent nicks or other damage while the parts are removed from the machine. 5. Tag all electrical leads and hydraulic lines before disconnecting them to ensure proper reconnections.

A.3 Inspection, Cleaning And Repair General


The following general recommendations should be followed during routine cleaning, inspection and repair of most machine components.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation AppendixA.fm

-A.1-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Appendix A, Version 00 - 03/06

General Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

WARNING

Gasoline, naphtha, and other highly flammable fluids will burn if ignited, and may explode if the fumes are ignited in a confined space, resulting in burns, severe bodily injury and/or death. Do not use these materials to clean, or for any other maintenance procedure. If necessary, use Toluol, Perchloroethylene, or other approved solvent.
1. Clean all parts thoroughly using kerosene, diesel oil, or a suitable commercial solvent. Never use a hot alkaline solution on finished parts or bearings. 2. Dry metal parts (except bearings) using low-pressure compressed air. Do not spin-dry bearings. 3. Inspect all gears as described under Subtopic A.5.7. 4. Inspect all bushings for wear, scoring or galling and replace when required. 5. If possible, replace all oil seals and O-rings, regardless of the reason for removal, even if no damage is apparent. 6. If possible, replace all gaskets. Be sure the new gasket is of the same material and thickness as the discarded gasket. 7. Inspect all anti-friction bearings as described under Subtopic A.5.1.

A.4 Assembly
The following general rules apply to assembly of any component. 1. When torque values are specified, be sure to use a torque wrench and tighten to the specified torque value. If a tightening sequence is specified, follow the sequence. If none is given, tighten evenly and alternately around the bolt circle. 2. Always pre-pack anti-friction bearings with suitable bearing grease before installation. 3. Install all bearings as instructed under Subtopic A.5.1. 4. Inspect all grease passages to be sure they are open and clean. 5. Smooth all nicks, burrs, or galled spots on shafts, bores, pins, gears and bushings. Pay particular attention to oil seal seating areas to ensure that shaft irregularities do not lead to seal wear and lubrication leaks. 6. Check the fit of keys in keyways. Shaft keyways have an interference fit which should not be altered.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Appendix A, Version 00 - 03/06

-A.2-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation AppendixA.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

General Maintenance

A.5 Maintenance Of Specific Components


A.5.1 Bearings
A.5.1.1 Removal
Most bearings are removed by means of a bearing puller or driver. In either case, the puller or driver should contact only the inner bearing race to prevent damage to the bearing. Inspection and repair. Inspect all bearings for wear, binding, excessive play, distorted races and roller wear or damage. Always replace worn or damaged bearings.

NOTICE
Some organizations make it a practice to replace all bearings in crucial applications whether or not damage is apparent. The cost of the part is often minor in comparison with the cost of redoing the job should the part fail. A.5.1.2 Installation
Prepack all anti-friction bearings with a good grade of bearing grease before installation. Many bearings require an interference fit between the inner race and the shaft on which the inner race is mounted. To obtain the required interference fit, the bearing must be heated, the shaft must be cooled, or a combination of both methods may be necessary. It is usually easiest to heat the bearing, and this is the method most commonly used. Use an oven, a bearing heater, or an oil bath for heating a bearing; do not use a torch. Once the bearing has been properly heated, it must be pressed into position on the shaft in one smooth and continuous operation. Do not allow the bearing to stop short of it's final position, since it will quickly freeze on the shaft and will then have to be removed and reheated before it can be properly installed.

CAUTION
Never use hot alkaline solutions on bearings (or other finished parts) because the alkaline solutions will score or damage finished surfaces.

CAUTION
Never spin dry bearings with compressed air since this will damage the bearings.

A.5.2 Couplings
Power transmission couplings are the usual means of connecting coaxial shafts so that one shaft can drive the other. For example, they may be used to connect an electric motor to a pump shaft or to connect two pieces of shafting together to obtain a longer shaft extension. Couplings are manufactured in many types, styles and sizes. However, they can be classified into two groups: Rigid couplings (sometimes called solid couplings) and flexible couplings. Each is discussed below.

A.5.2.1 Rigid (Solid) Couplings


These couplings connect shaft ends together rigidly, making the shafts so connected into a single continuous entity. They are generally used when true alignment and a solid coupling are required, as with line shafting. Solid

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation AppendixA.fm

-A.3-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Appendix A, Version 00 - 03/06

General Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

couplings are self-supporting and automatically align the shafts to which they are attached when the coupling halves on the shaft ends are connected. Solid couplings require the following for good service: 1. Coupling halves must be interference fits on shafts 2. After installation, all surfaces of the coupling must be checked for runout and surfaces found to be running out must be machined true. Checking of surfaces for runout is especially necessary if the coupling halves are assembled by driving or bumping rather than pressing. Rigid couplings should not be used to connect shafts of independent units which must be aligned at assembly.

A.5.2.2 Flexible Couplings


Flexible couplings are used to connect two independently supported coaxial shafts so one can drive the other. For example, prime movers such as internal combustion engines and electric motors are usually connected to gear reducers and pumps by means of flexible couplings. For this type of application, the flexible coupling is used because it is practically impossible to obtain perfect alignment of the adjacent shafts. Also, there is usually wear occurring in the connected components and their shaft bearings, as well as movement from temperature changes and external forces such as vibration. Therefore, to enable coaxial shafts to operate satisfactorily with slight misalignment, flexible couplings, depending on the design, may allow one or more of the following misalignments: Angular Misalignment Parallel Misalignment Axial Movement (End Float) Torsional Movement (Twisting) Most flexible couplings are made up of three basic parts: two hubs mounted on the shaft ends to be connected, and a flexing element that transmits power from one hub to the other. Most flexible couplings fall into one of the following categories:

Chain Couplings
A chain coupling is one having two sprockets with hubs for attachment to the shafts, connected by a length of double chain having links which mesh with the sprocket teeth. This type of coupling normally requires lubrication.

Gear Couplings
Gear couplings are made up of meshing internal and external gears or splines. Flexibility results from both the fit of the teeth and the special shaping of the teeth that permits them to pivot in relation to each other. This type of coupling normally requires lubrication.

Jaw and Slider Couplings


These couplings usually have two hubs which attach to the shafts. The hubs are connected by a sliding member which provides flexibility. The slider is connected to the hubs by jaws, keys, or splines. These couplings usually require lubrication.

Resilient Element Couplings

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Appendix A, Version 00 - 03/06

-A.4-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation AppendixA.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

General Maintenance

This is a very common type of coupling. The most commonly used resilient flexible materials are metal and rubber (or synthetic substitute). These couplings allow angular and parallel misalignment and end float. Those using rubber elements have more torsional flexibility than most other types of couplings. Most of these couplings do not need lubrication, except the ones using flexible metal elements.

A.5.3 Alignment
In preparing to align a coupling, it must be determined which unit is to be adjusted - the driving or the driven unit. Common practice is to position, level and secure the driven unit as required and then adjust the driver to align with it. The driven unit must be set with its shaft centerline slightly higher than the driver to allow for alignment shims. Coupling alignment consists of bringing the centerlines of two coaxial shafts into alignment, rather than aligning the surfaces of the coupling. For example: If the coupling hub surfaces do not run true with the shaft centerline, alignment of the untrue surfaces will result in misalignment of the shaft centerlines. True running surfaces are therefore a vital requirement if the alignment procedures that follow are to be successful. There are two kinds of shaft misalignment: Angular Misalignment and Parallel Misalignment. Note that misalignment of the shaft centerlines may occur in any plane within a full circle. Angular misalignment may be a tilt up, down, or to the side of one shaft in respect to the other. Parallel misalignment may be one shaft high, low, or to the side of the other. The usual method of correcting alignment is to check and adjust in the vertical and horizontal planes as illustrated in Figure A-4. To align centerlines of coaxial shafts in both the vertical and horizontal planes requires four distinct operations: An angular and parallel alignment in the vertical plane and the same in the horizontal plane. To do an alignment properly requires an organized procedure. Since adjustments are usually made by inserting shims at low support points, an important first step is to check the foundation of the unit to ensure that no rocking motion exists. If rocking does exist, eliminate it by shimming before proceeding. Tools best suited for coupling alignment are the straight edge, feeler gauge, and taper gauge. The taper gauge is just what it implies, a tapered piece of straight metal which allows direct reading instead of the trial and error type of reading obtained by a feeler gauge. Two methods of coupling alignment are commonly used: the straightedge-feeler gauge method and the dial indicator method. Each method will be illustrated using specific measurements as examples after the following general explanation. In both methods, four alignments are performed in a specific order, although the final two steps are combined into one in the numbered procedure below.

NOTICE
Only when adjustments are performed in the correct order can a succeeding adjustment be performed without disturbing prior settings. A.5.3.1 Vertical Face Alignment
To adjust vertical face alignment, it is necessary to tip the unit as required. First, measure the gap at the top and bottom of the coupling; then, shim as required to align these faces. The easiest way to determine the amount of shims required is as follows:

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation AppendixA.fm

-A.5-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Appendix A, Version 00 - 03/06

General Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

The tilt required at the coupling face is the same as the angle of change at the base of the unit. Therefore the shim thickness required is proportional to the misalignment. As an example, the misalignment at the coupling faces is 0.006" in 5 inches. Therefore, each five inches of base must be tilted 0.006" to correct misalignment. Since the base length is 10 inches, the shim thickness required is twice 0.006" or 0.012".

NOTICE
A rule for shim thickness selection is: Shim thickness is as many times greater than the misalignment as the base length is greater than the coupling diameter. A.5.3.2 Vertical Height Alignment
Measure the height difference from the coupling hub base to the shaft centerline. Then raise the lower unit as required without changing its angular position. This adjustment corrects parallel misalignment in the vertical plane.

A.5.3.3 Horizontal Face and OD Alignment


When the units are properly aligned vertically, shimming is complete. Then move the unit as required to align the coupling hub faces and O.D's at the sides of the coupling.

A.5.4 Coupling Alignment - Straightedge-Feeler Gauge Method


Align the coupling as follows: 1. Using feeler gauges, measure the width of the gap at top and bottom between the coupling faces. 2. Assume the gap at the top is 0.160 and at the bottom is 0.152. This equals 0.008" misalignment in 5 inches (the diameter of the coupling). Base length is 12 inches. Therefore, shim thickness required is about 2-112 times 0.008" or about 0.020". A shim placed under the low end of the driver will tilt it into approximate angular alignment with the driven unit. 3. Using a straightedge and feeler gauges, measure the height difference between driver and driven unit height at the OD of Figure A-8. Straight Edge Feeler Gauge Alignment the coupling halves. Then, place shims at all driver support points equal in thickness to the measured height difference. 4. Finally, use a straightedge to check alignment of O.D's at the sides of the coupling. Using a feeler gauge, check the gap between coupling hub faces at the sides of the coupling. Adjust the driver as necessary to align the O.D's and to set the gap equal at the sides.

A.5.5 Coupling Alignment - Dial Indicator Method


A dial indicator can be used in two ways to check coupling alignment. They are: 1. Attached to one shaft or coupling half while contacting the second hub or shaft while both shafts are rotating, or

2. Attached to one shaft or coupling half while contacting the second hub or shaft while one shaft is rotating. The ideal method is the first, dial indicating while both shafts are rotating. In this method, when the indicator is rotated its tip will proceed in a circle which is concentric with the shaft bearings. The mating unit shaft should also

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Appendix A, Version 00 - 03/06

-A.6-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation AppendixA.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

General Maintenance

be rotated, since the point contacted by the indicator tip will also describe a true circle. When these two circles coincide (zero runout on the indicator) the shafts will be in alignment in the plane being measured. The reason this method is ideal is that coupling surface runout does not affect the accuracy of shaft alignment. In other words, it is possible by this method to accurately align shafts in spite of coupling surfaces that are not running true to each other. However, in some cases, the above method is not possible. In such cases, it becomes necessary to use the method of attaching the dial indicator to one shaft or coupling half while contacting the second hub or shaft while one shaft is rotating. Refer to Figure A-9 and proceed as follows:

A.5.5.1 Vertical Face Alignment


Attach the indicator to the shaft or coupling half of the driver. Place the indicator tip in contact with the face of the coupling half on the driven unit. Rotate the shafts of both units together and note the total indicator readings (T.I.R.) at top and bottom. T.I.R. is a measure of vertical angular misalignment. Place shims (calculate the amount as previously described) under the driver at the low end to bring it into vertical alignment with the driven unit.

A.5.5.2 Vertical Height Alignment


Place the indicator tip in contact with the outside surface of the driven unit coupling half. Rotate shafts of both units. Note the indicator readings at top and bottom. The height difference between the units is one-half of the T.I.R. Place shims at all driver support points equal to one-half total indicator runout.

A.5.5.3 Horizontal Face Alignment


Place the indicator tip in contact with the face of the driven unit coupling half. Move the driver as necessary to obtain zero reading on the indicator.

A.5.5.4 OD Alignment
Place the indicator in contact with the OD surface of the driven unit coupling half. Move the driver as necessary to obtain zero reading on the indicator. Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary to obtain zero readings on both face and OD surfaces at the sides of the coupling. Do not disturb shims during horizontal alignment adjustments.

A.5.6 Sheaves
1. Inspect sheaves to see that belts or wire rope have not worn grooves into the sheaves. Replace sheaves when wear grooves appear since grooves will cause rapid and dangerous belt or rope damage. 2. Make sure the belt or wire rope is correctly sized for the sheave on which it is being used. If there is any doubt, check your operating and/or maintenance manual to determine the proper size for the application.

A.5.7 Gears
Some of the basic terms associated with gears are defined under the topic Terminology. Some of the defects for which gears should be inspected are defined under Inspection. TERMINOLOGY. ADDENDUM. The addendum is the distance a gear tooth extends above the pitch circle (or circular pitch). BACKLASH. Backlash is the difference between the thickness of a tooth and the width of the gap between the two gear teeth on it's mating gear. Backlash is necessary to compensate for variations in spacing and form of the gear

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation AppendixA.fm

-A.7-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Appendix A, Version 00 - 03/06

General Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

teeth, to provide space for lubricant, and to allow expansion of the teeth when their temperature increases during operation. BOTTOM LAND. The bottom land is the surface at the bottom between adjacent gear teeth. CIRCULAR PITCH. Circular pitch is the distance along the pitch circle or pitch line between the corresponding profiles of adjacent teeth. CIRCULAR THICKNESS OF TOOTH. The circular thickness of a tooth is the length of the arc between the two sides of a gear tooth as measured along the pitch circle unless otherwise specified. CLEARANCE. Clearance is the radial distance between the working depth circle and the root circle. DEDENDUM. The dedendum is the depth of the tooth space below the pitch circle or pitch line; the radial distance between the pitch circle and the root circle. FACE WIDTH. The face width is the length of a gear tooth in the plane parallel to the shaft centerline (the axial plane). FILLET CURVE. The fillet curve is the concave portion of the tooth profile where it joins the bottom land. PITCH CIRCLE. Pitch circle is the curve of intersection of a pitch surface of revolution and a plane of rotation. It is the imaginary circle that rolls without slipping with a pitch circle of a mating gear. ROOT CIRCLE. The root circle is tangent to the bottom of the tooth space when viewed in a cross section. TOOTH PROFILE. Tooth profile is one side of a gear tooth in a cross section between the outside circle and the root circle. WORKING DEPTH. The working depth is the depth of engagement of two gears; the sum of the operating addendum. TOP LAND. The top land is the surface of the top of the gear tooth. WHOLE DEPTH. The whole depth is the distance from the top land to the bottom land.

A.6 Gear Tooth Wear


A.6.1 Inspection
All gearing should be inspected for signs of wear or damage. If any of the problems illustrated and discussed below are found, the problem should be corrected and, if necessary, the gear or gear set should be replaced as soon as possible.

A.6.2 Gear Wear


Gear wear is usually caused by abrasion, corrosion or lubrication failure. Each is discussed below:

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Appendix A, Version 00 - 03/06

-A.8-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation AppendixA.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

General Maintenance

NOTICE
If a damaged or worn pinion or gear must be replaced always replace the mating gear or pinion. Do not run a new pinion or gear with a worn mating part as rapid failure of the parts will result.
1. Abrasion. Abrasive wear is typified by a lapped appearance, radial scratch markings or grooving of the tooth contact surfaces and is generally caused by foreign material in the lubricating oil. 2. Corrosion. Corrosive wear is a deterioration of the tooth surface caused by chemical action. It often results from active ingredients in the lubricating oil such as acid, moisture or extreme pressure additives. Lubricants can also be contaminated by atmospheric chemicals, or chemicals or other materials (such as salt water) which somehow leak into the lubricant supply. 3. Lubricant Failure. Lubricant failure results in allowing metal-to-metal contact of gear teeth. This causes overheating, which produces alternate welding and tearing of the metal, thus removing metal from the tooth surfaces. This is called scoring. The most common cause of this problem is localized overheating of the teeth at the point at which they mesh, causing breakdown of the lubricant film. Another similar condition called frosting is a form of scoring typified by micropitting under thin lubricant film conditions.

A.6.3 Surface Fatigue


Surface fatigue of gear teeth is divided into three primary categories. They are: 1. Pitting. Pitting occurs when the endurance limit of the tooth material is exceeded. The usual causes are overloading or excessive shock. 2. Spalling. Spalling is similar to pitting except that the pits are usually larger, very irregular in shape and quite shallow. Spalling is usually caused by high contact stress levels. The edges of the initial spalled areas break away rapidly and larger irregular voids are formed. These voids often join together and form still larger voids. 3. Case Crushing. Case crushing is a subsurface fatigue failure which occurs when the endurance level of the tooth material is dramatically exceeded. Severe shock loading is the most likely cause of case crushing.

A.6.3.1 Plastic Flow


Plastic flow consists of deformation of tooth surfaces caused by high contact stresses as the gear teeth mesh. There are two basic types of plastic flow. They are: 1. Cold Flow. Cold flow is the cold-working deformation of tooth surfaces caused by high contact stresses and the rolling and sliding action of the meshing teeth. The dents and battered appearance of the surfaces are a result of dynamic loading due to operation while the tooth profiles are being damaged by a combination of cold-working and wear. 2. Rippling. Rippling is generally caused by high contact stresses under cyclical operation. This has a tendency to roll and knead the contact surfaces, resulting in the rippling of the immediate surface.

A.6.3.2 Gear Backlash


Gear backlash is the play between teeth which prevents the gears from binding while in motion. It is built into the gearset during manufacture. In terms of tooth dimensions, it is the amount by which the width of the tooth spaces exceeds the thickness of the mating gear teeth. Backlash can also be described as the distance, measured along the pitch line, that a gear will move when engaged with another gear that remains motionless.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation AppendixA.fm

-A.9-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Appendix A, Version 00 - 03/06

General Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Normally, there must be some backlash present in gear drives to provide running clearance and room for lubricant. Without backlash, gear binding will result in heat generation, noise, abnormal wear, and possible failure of the gearset. Backlash is built into standard gears by cutting the gear teeth thinner by 50% of the backlash desired in the set. When two gears made in this manner are mated, at proper center-to-center distance, their two 50% allowances combine to give 100% of the backlash desired by the designer. On non-reversing drives, or where load is applied in only one direction, the increase in backlash that results from tooth wear does not adversely affect operation. However, on reversing drives and drives where timing is critical, excessive backlash cannot be tolerated. The following illustration and chart can be used as a rule of thumb to obtain the approximate backlash for a pair of gears operating at standard center distance. See Figure A-12. This chart should only be used when the manufacturer's recommendations can not be obtained. If any discrepancy between the chart and manufacturer's recommendations exists, the manufacturer's instructions take precedence. In general, check backlash as follows: 1. Hold one gear motionless. 2. Turn the mating gear until it contacts the motionless gear. 3. Install a dial indicator touching the gear which can be moved on the side toward which it can be moved and turn the gear as far as it will go. 4. Read the total backlash on the dial indicator. Note that feeler gauges can often be used in place of a dial indicator. The space which constitutes backlash is illustrated in Figure A-12. Backlash must be held within the limits specified by the manufacturer or rapid gear wear will result.

A.6.4 Shafts
All shafts should be inspected for nicks, burrs, and wear ridges prior to reinstallation. Smooth defective areas using crocus cloth, India Stone or a very fine file. It is particularly important that shaft seal surfaces (surfaces on which seal lips fit) be smooth to prevent seal lip wear, which will cause lubricant leaks. Keyways must be free of nicks and burrs.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Appendix A, Version 00 - 03/06

-A.10-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation AppendixA.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

General Hydraulic System Maintenance

Appendix B

General Hydraulic System Maintenance


B.1 General
Maintenance of individual hydraulic system components such as motors, pumps or valves is included in the system of which the component is a part. For example, maintenance and repair of the propel motor is covered under Propel System. The purpose of this section is to discuss maintenance of hydraulic systems in general. This section includes general procedures to be followed in the event of hydraulic component failure, preventive maintenance, bleeding procedures, flushing procedures, and recognition of trouble symptoms.

B.2 General Maintenance Rules


The following points should be kept in mind when working on the hydraulic system or any components of the system:

CAUTION

Pressurized fluid escaping from a hydraulic system can penetrate the skin causing serious injury. Always relieve pressure by connecting a microbore hose from the appropriate test port to the tank test port before disconnecting hydraulic lines. Tighten all connections before reapplying pressure. Keep hands and body away from pinholes and nozzles which eject fluid under high pressure. Use a piece of paper to search for leaks. Do not use your hands. If any fluid is injected into the skin, it must be surgically removed within a few hours by a medical doctor or gangrene can result.
1. All systems are designed to operate within minimum and maximum pressure limits. A pressure relief (unloading) valve is included in nearly all systems to limit maximum pressures to levels for which the system is designed.

WARNING

The setting of a pressure relief or unloading valve must never be increased in an attempt to get more out of the system. This could cause the system to operate at a pressure level for which it was not designed and equipment damage and/or personnel injury or death could result.
2. Because internal leaks waste the power of the system, working parts are designed for extremely close fits. Because of the necessary close fits, even very small amounts of dirt or foreign material can cause wear or damage to components, which will, in turn, cause faulty operation of the system. Every precaution must be

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation AppendixB.fm

-B.1-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Appendix B, Version 00 - 03/06

General Hydraulic System Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

taken to assure absolute cleanliness of hydraulic oil. This includes dirt, chips from failed parts of the system, as well as contaminants such as water or other fluids which are incompatible with the fluid in the system. 3. To ensure cleanliness of the system oil, samples should be drawn from the reservoir every 6 month (more often, if problems are experienced). Each sample should be taken by an approved sampling procedure (e.g. IS0 Standard 4021) and analyzed by a qualified lubrication specialist to determine whether it is suitable for further use. The interval between normal hydraulic fluid replacements depends on operating conditions and on successfully keeping contaminants out of the system. 4. Whenever there is a hydraulic system component failure that gives reason to believe that there are metal particles or other foreign materials in the system, drain and flush the entire system, clean strainer baskets and replace filter cartridges. A complete change of hydraulic oil must be made under these circumstances.

NOTICE
Flushing the hydraulic system is time consuming and expensive. Therefore, it should be done only when necessary. However, avoiding a flush when there is clear evidence of a contaminated system will prove to be a false economy in the long run.
5. Whenever the hydraulic system is drained, check the magnetic drain plugs for metal particles. If metal particles are present, flush the system and add a new charge of oil. 6. Never change the type of oil used in the system without first checking that the replacement oil is acceptable for use in the system. 7. All containers and funnels used in handling hydraulic oil must be very clean. Use a funnel with a 200 mesh screen for filling the hydraulic oil reservoir and fill the reservoir only through the filler opening. The use of cloth to strain the oil is not acceptable because this will allow lint to enter the system. 8. When removing any hydraulic component, be sure to cap and tag all hydraulic lines involved. Always plug the ports of the removed components. 9. All hydraulic components must be disassembled and assembled in spotlessly clean surroundings. During disassembly, pay particular attention to the identification of parts to ensure correct reassembly. Clean all metal parts in a clean mineral oil solvent. Be sure to clean all internal passages. After the parts have dried, lay them on a clean lint-free surface for inspection. 10. Replacement of all O-rings, back-up rings and seals is recommended when overhauling any component. Lubricate all parts with hydraulic oil before reassembly. Use small amounts of petroleum jelly to hold O-rings in place during reassembly. 11. Replace all lost hydraulic oil after completing installation of repaired components. Always maintain a sufficient quantity of clean hydraulic fluid of the proper type and viscosity in the reservoir. 12. Bleed air from the system after components have been removed from the system or when it is suspected that air has entered the system. 13. Keep all hydraulic connections tight. A loose connection in a hydraulic line will permit the oil to leak out or air to be drawn into the system. Air in the system can cause damage to components as well as noisy or erratic system operation. 14. Change filter elements and clean strainers when necessary.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Appendix B, Version 00 - 03/06

-B.2-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation AppendixB.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

General Hydraulic System Maintenance

B.2.1 Correct Tightening of Hydraulic Connections


The following procedures are recommended to ensure that system hydraulic connections are correctly made and to minimize the probability of system leaks.

Figure B-1: Tightening SAE Flare Connections

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation AppendixB.fm

-B.3-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Appendix B, Version 00 - 03/06

General Hydraulic System Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Table B-1: Pipe Thread Leaks

B.2.2 Pipe Thread Connections


Pipe thread connections tend to leak more at high pressure than any other style of connection. National pipe threads (NPT) leak much more than do the dry seal thread (NPTF) types. However, either will leak if under-tightened or over-tightened. Use a good pipe thread sealant on NPT threads of the male connection, but do not use sealant on the first two threads. This will prevent the sealant from entering the system. Always apply sealant on male threads - never apply sealant to female threads. The most probable causes and remedies for pipe thread leaks are listed in Table B-1.

B.2.3 SAE Flare Connections


Most leaks from this type of connection are due to lack of tightening and human error. It is impossible to tell if the nut has been tightened by simply looking at the connection. Figure B-1 shows one method of tightening this type of connection. If the joint still leaks after it has been correctly tightened, refer to Table B-2 for possible remedies.

B.2.4 SAE Straight Thread Connection (O-ring Seal)


This type of connection leaks most often because the jam nut and washer are not properly installed before assembly of the fitting. As a result, there is not enough room for the O-ring to seat when it is squeezed and the washer cannot seat properly on the face of the O-ring boss (View A, Figure B-2). The compressed rubber between the washer and the boss face will cold flow out of compression and the fitting will loosen and leak. Leakage from straight thread connectors may be indicated by any of the following: 1. Fittings loosen after short service.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Appendix B, Version 00 - 03/06

-B.4-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation AppendixB.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

General Hydraulic System Maintenance

2. O-rings leak after short or long service.

Figure B-2: Incorrect O Ring Installation

Table B-2: Flare Connection Leakage

3. Instant leakage upon start-up. To stop leakage from straight thread connectors, proceed as follows (see Figure B-3): A. Back the jam nut and washer (View A, Figure B-3) to the end of the smooth portion of the fitting. B. Lubricate the O-ring. C. Thread the fitting into the port, finger tight. D. Back the fitting out (no more than one turn) to align the fitting for attachment of the mating hose or tube.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation AppendixB.fm

-B.5-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Appendix B, Version 00 - 03/06

General Hydraulic System Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

E. Tighten the jam nut to achieve the O-ring seal as illustrated in View B, Figure B-33.

Figure B-3: Correct O Ring Installation

B.2.5 Split Flange Connections


Table B-3 lists probable causes and remedies for split-flange connection leaks. To install a split flange connection, refer to Figure B-4 and proceed as follows: 1. Thoroughly clean the sealing surfaces and the flanges.

Figure B-4: Split Flange Tightening Sequence

2. Lubricate and install the proper O-ring in the fitting groove. 3. Align the fitting with the port and assemble the flanges over the fitting.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Appendix B, Version 00 - 03/06

-B.6-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation AppendixB.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

General Hydraulic System Maintenance

4. Snug the bolts in the sequence shown in Figure B-4 to 113 of the torque value obtained from Table B-4. Be sure the flanges remain square with the fitting and bolt surface. 5. Torque the bolts diagonally to 213 of the final torque value from Table B-4. 6. Torque the bolts diagonally to the final torque value in Table B-4.

Table B-3: Split Flange Leakage

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation AppendixB.fm

-B.7-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Appendix B, Version 00 - 03/06

General Hydraulic System Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

B.2.6 Flat Face O-ring Seal Connections

Table B-4: Split Flange Torque Values

Flat face O-ring seal connections allow installation or replacement of connecting parts without mating piping. O-ring failure is the primary cause of leaks in this type of fitting. Contamination, improper fluid, or improper installation of the O-ring or fitting may cause premature failure of the O-ring. To install a flat face O-ring seal fitting, proceed as follows: 1. Be sure the fitting sealing surfaces are clean and free of defects. See Figure B-5.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Appendix B, Version 00 - 03/06

-B.8-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation AppendixB.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

General Hydraulic System Maintenance

Figure B-5: Flat-face O Ring Seal Connection

2. Inspect the O-ring. It must be free of defects. 3. Lubricate the O-ring and install it in the groove. Use petroleum jelly to hold the O-ring in place. 4. Assemble the fitting and hand tighten while pressing the joint together. This will ensure that the O-ring remains in proper position. 5. Tighten the connection to the torque value specified in Table B-5.

B.2.7 Troubleshooting Hydraulic Systems


Probably the greatest aid to troubleshooting is knowledge of the system. Every component has a purpose in the system. The construction and operating characteristics of each component should be understood.

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation AppendixB.fm

-B.9-

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Appendix B, Version 00 - 03/06

General Hydraulic System Maintenance

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual

Table B-5: Flat-face Seal Torque Values

B.2.8 Developing Systematic Procedures


To troubleshoot a system effectively, develop a logical sequence of looking for the cause of the problem, using some or all of the following techniques: 1. Ask the operator how the machine performed when it started to fail or if there was anything unusual happening prior to the machine failure. 2. If the machine is operative, check to see what gauge or other indications are normal and which are out of normal limits. 3. Visually inspect the machine for oil leaks and loose connections. 4. Examine filters and all lines, checking for heat, loose connections and collapsed hoses.

B.2.9 Recognizing Trouble Symptoms


The following symptoms are signs of trouble:

B.2.9.1 Excessive Heat


A misaligned pump places an excessive load on bearings and can be readily identified by the heat generated. A warmer than normal return line may indicate that the system is operating at the unloading valve setting. Low viscosity hydraulic oil will increase the internal leakage of components, resulting in a heat rise. Cavitation and slippage in a pump will also generate excessive heat.

B.2.9.2 Excessive Noise


Wear, misalignment, cavitation or air in the oil will cause noise. Contaminated oil can cause an unloading valve to stick or chatter. Excessive noise may be the result of dirty filters or fluid, high fluid viscosity, excessive drive speed, low reservoir level or loose intake lines, which would allow air to enter the system.

P&H Mining Equipment - Knowledge and Development Appendix B, Version 00 - 03/06

-B.10-

Copyright 2006 Harnischfeger Corporation AppendixB.fm

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual BD120149-00-MS

Reader Comment Form

To assist us in providing you with the most useful publications, we ask that you use this form to express your views concerning this publication, its organization or subject matter, with the understanding that P&H Mining Equipment may use or distribute whatever information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without any obligation to you. All comments and suggestions are both welcome and appreciated. To report machine problems or to request additional publications, do not use this form; rather, contact the nearest P&H MinePro Services will forward your information or requests to the appropriate division at P&H Mining Equipment. Does the publication meet your needs? YES NO Comment: _________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ Is the information accurate and complete? YES NO Is it easy to read and understand? YES NO

Comment: _________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ Is the information organized for convenient use? YES NO Is it well-illustrated? YES NO

Comment: _________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ Is the information written to an appropriate technical level? YES NO Comment: _________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ Please use the space below to identify errors, suggest changes, or to provide additional comments. Include drawings, photographs, or other graphics as appropriate. For comments regarding the manual, please refer to page numbers and/or paragraph numbers. If necessary, use additional sheets and mail in an envelope.

Fold and Tape

Please Do Not Staple

Fold and Tape PLACE STAMP HERE

P&H Mining Equipment P.O. Box 310 Milwaukee, WI 53201-0310 Attn.: Knowledge and Development Department

Fold and Tape

Please Do Not Staple

Fold and Tape

BD120149 Mechanical Systems Manual BD120149-00-MS

Reader Comment Form

To assist us in providing you with the most useful publications, we ask that you use this form to express your views concerning this publication, its organization or subject matter, with the understanding that P&H Mining Equipment may use or distribute whatever information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without any obligation to you. All comments and suggestions are both welcome and appreciated. To report machine problems or to request additional publications, do not use this form; rather, contact the nearest P&H MinePro Services office. They will forward your information or requests to the appropriate division at P&H Mining Equipment. Does the publication meet your needs? YES NO Comment: _________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ Is the information accurate and complete? YES NO Is it easy to read and understand? YES NO

Comment: _________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ Is the information organized for convenient use? YES NO Is it well-illustrated? YES NO

Comment: _________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ Is the information written to an appropriate technical level? YES NO Comment: _________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ Please use the space below to identify errors, suggest changes, or to provide additional comments. Include drawings, photographs, or other graphics as appropriate. For comments regarding the manual, please refer to page numbers and/or paragraph numbers. If necessary, use additional sheets and mail in an envelope.

Fold and Tape

Please Do Not Staple

Fold and Tape PLACE STAMP HERE

P&H Mining Equipment P.O. Box 310 Milwaukee, WI 53201-0310 Attn.: Knowledge and Development Department

Fold and Tape

Please Do Not Staple

Fold and Tape

You might also like